Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH

Mechanical Separation
Division

Technical Documentation Technische Dokumentation
/

Take the Best - Separate the Rest
/

-

I

Visco Booster Unit For M/E

.

Edlt ion I Ausgabe

~

18.01.2008

Customer I Kunde: Project I Projekt: NB No.! Serie: WS-Order No.: Modell Modell:

Semco Maritime AJS· Esbjerg Power Plant EI Salvador Proj. EI Salvador

402S68900_27
VBU

Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Mechanical Separation
Division

IMPORTANT!

This manual must be available to the operating and maintenance personnel at all times.

It contains important information on operation, maintenance
and procurement of spare parts, and is essential for safe application of the plant.

We cannot assume liability for damage which occurs as a result of non-compliance with the instructions in this manual.

A company of GEA Group

Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Mechanical Separation
Division

Contents Iinhalt
Cover Sheet
De ckblatt

Important!
Wichtig!

How to use the Documentation
Verwendung der Dok um entat ion

Safety
Sicherheit

1.1 Safety Precautions
Sicherheitshinweise

1.2 Qualification Operators
Qualifikation des Persona ls

2

System Description
Systembeschreibung

2.1 General Description
Allgemeine Beschreibung

2.2

Instaliationguidelines
Installationsrichtlinien

2.3 Start - up and Shut down Instructions
An- und Abfahranleitung

3

Documents Relating to Orders
Projektbezogene Dokumente

3.1 Set of Final Drawings
Zeichnungssatz

Operating Data Sheet
Prozess Datenblatt

Instaliation Diagram P&ID
Installationsschema

Graphical Symbols
Grafiksymbole

Device List
Gerateliste

Dimensioned Drawing
Aufstellungsplan

Circuit Diagram
Stromlaufplan

3.2

Maintenance Schedule and Parts List
Instandhaltungshaltungsplan und Ersatzteilliste

3.3 Order Sheet

A company of GEA Group

Power Plant EI Salvador 1402568900_27 I VBU 118.01.2008

Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Mechanical Separation
Division

3.4

Bestellschein Loose Parts Beipackteile

4

Control Unit Steuer- und Regeleinrichtung 4.1 C7 -635/ WSM D-20

Is

Pumps Pumpen 5.1 Screw Spindle Pump Schraubenspindelpumpe Type K Induction Motor Drehstrommotor TypeAY + ACM

5.2

Is

Filters Filter 6 .1 V-Strainer Schmutzfanger Instructions Betriebsanleitung Indicator Filter Indikator Filter Type 2.06.5.4

6.2

1 7

Heat Exchanger Warmetauscher 7.1 Tube Heat Exchanger Rohrwarmetauscher Type MX Plate Heat Exchanger Platte nwarmeta usch er Type CBE

7.2

8

Valves, Fittings and Assembly Ventile , Armaturen und Zubehor 8.1 Valves Ventile Compact Ball Valve, 3-way Kompaktkugelhahn , 3-Wege Hand-operated Handbetatigt Limit Switch Endlagenschalter Ball Valve, 2-way Kuge lhahn , 2-Wege
Power Plant EI Salvador 1402568900_271 VBU 118.01.2008

A company of GEA Group

Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Mechanical Separation Division

Type DKA. " Type NKA .. , Non Retum Valve
Ruckschlagventil

Type MR)I.," Type RK 41 Hand Shut-off Valve
Hand-Absperrventil

Type FABA Straight Through Control Valve
Durch ga n gs-Ste live nti I

Type 440-441 Electric Actuator
Elektrischer Antrieb

Solenoid Valve
Magnetventil

Type 255, 2/2-way Safety Valve
Sicherheitsventil

Automatic Air Vent
Be- und EntlUftungsautomat

8,2

Other Parts
Sonstige Teile

Steam Trap
Kondensatable iter

Type FT-14
Measurement
Messtechnik

9,1

Temperature Measurement
Temperatur-Messtechnik

Angle Thermometer
Win kelthermometer

Thermometer
Thermometer

Thermometer with Transmitter
Themrometer mit Messumformer

9.2

Pressure Measurement
Druck-Messtechnik

Pressure Gauge
Druckmessgerat

Pressure Switch
Druckschalter

Difference Pressure Indicator
Differenzdruckanzeiger

Type 4,36,2 9,3 Viscosity Measurement
Viskositats-Messtech nik

A company of GEA Group

Power Plant EI Salvador 1402568900_271 VBU 118,01.2008

Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Mechanical Separation Division

Viscosity Transmitter, Type VISCO MASTER Viscositatsmesswertgeber 9.4 Flow MeasuremenUFuel Consumption Du rchll uss-M ess te ch nikIT re ibstoffve rbra uch Flowmeter Durchflussmesser Volumeter, Type OMG Type PROMASS 83F Electronic Units Elektronikein heiten Indicator, Type CUB 5 Zahler Sensor BEG 9.5 Level Switch FOllsta ndgrenzschalter

Pressure Vessel
Druckbehalter

10.1 Mixing Tank Mischtank 10.2 Pressure Damping Tank Druckstor..-Tank Type 191

A company of GEA Group

Power Plant EISalvador 1402568900_271 VBU 118.01.2008

Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Mechanical Separat ion Division

[j\I]©~®
[j\I]©~®g)

[j\I]©~O{6®[Jj]

~[Jj]©~IID~O©[Jj]®i))
[j\I]©~IID~®1?
[j\I]©~®g)

[j\I]©~®

A company of GEA Group

Power Plant EISalvador 1402568900_271 VBU 118.01.2008

Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Mechani cal Separation Div ision

Westfa lia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Take the Best - Separate the Rest

Westfalia Separator Mineraloll Systems GmbH Werner·Habig·StraBe 1 Tel.: +49 (0) 2S 22n7·Q Fax: +49 (0) 25 22n7·23 94

0·59302 Oelde (f.R. Germany)

http://www.westfalia-separator.com/mailto:info@gea-westfalia.de

Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Mechanical Separation Division

6

Filters Filter 6.1 V-Strainer
Schm utzfanger

Instructions
Betriebsanleitung

6.2

Indicator Filter
Indikator Filter

Type 2.06.5.4

A company of GEA Group

Power Plant EI Salvador 1402568900_271 VBU 118.01.2008

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions
Strainer

-~ -

Contents
6.0 Putting the valve into operation ..................6 instructions ................................................ ... 2 7.0 Care and maintenance .. ....................... ........ .6 2.0 Notes on possible dangers .............. ............ 2 8.0 Troubleshooting .......... ......................... ........ .7 2.1 Significance of symbols ........................................ 2 9.0 Troubleshooting table ........... ....................... 7 2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information ............... 2 10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part ....... 8 3.0 Storage and transport ................................. 2 11.0 Warranty I Guarantee ................. ................. 8 4.0 Description .................................................... 3 12.0 EC declaration of conformity ..... ................9 4.1 Scope of applications ... ............ .... ......................... 3 4.2 Operating principles .............................................. 3 4.3 Diagram ..... .. ..... ... ... .. ... ..... .. ................. .. ................4 4.4 Technical data - remarks ...................................... .4 4.5 Marking ............... .. ..... ..... ... .. .... .. .. ...... ........ ... ........ 5 1.0 General information on operating

5.0 Installation ................... ............ .. ......... ........... 5
5.1 General notes on installation ........ ......................... 5 5.2 Installing valves with butt weld ends ...... .. ............. 6

Rev. 00401010002103 englisch

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions Strainer

1.0 General information on operating instructions
These operating instructions provide information on mounting and maintaining the fittings. Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer in case of problems which cannot be solved by reference to the operating instructions. They are binding on the transport, storage, installation , start-up, operation, maintenance and repair. The notes and warnings must be observed and adhered to. - Handling and all work must be carried out by expert personnel or all activities must be supervised and checked. It is the owner's responsibility to define areas of responsibility and competence and to monitor the personnel. - In addition, current regional safety requirements must be applied and observed when taking the fittings out of service as well as when maintaining and repairing them. The manufacturer reserves the right to introduce technical modifications at any time. These Operating Instructions comply with the requirements of EU Directives.

2.0 Notes on possible dangers
2.1 Significance of symbols

1,\. AT.TENTION I .. . ~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ L I -_ _ _

I
~

Warning of general danger.

2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information
In these Operating and Installation Instructions dangers, risks and items of safety information are highlighted to attract special attention. Information marked with the above symbol and "ATTENTION!" describe practices, a failure to comply with which can result in serious injury or danger of death for users or third parties or in material damage to the system or the environment. It is vital to comply with these practices and to monitor compliance. All other information not specifically emphasised such as transport, installation, operating and maintenance instructions as well as technical data (in the operating instructions, product documentation and on the device itself) must also be complied with to the fullest extent in order to avoid faults which in turn can cause serious injury to persons or damage to property.

3.0 Storage and transport

ili -Protect against external force (like impact, vibration, etc.).
- Valve mountings such as actuators, handwheels, hoods must not be used to take external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as connecting paints for lifting gear. - Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used. See catalog sheet for weights.
- At -20·C to +65·C. - The paint is a base coat to protect against corrosion during transportation and storage. Do not damage paint protection.
Page 2
Rev. 00401010002103

J:\

ATTENTION!

It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance.Refer to the data sheet for applications. 00401010002103 Page 3 .The valves are designed for standard operating conditions. ATTENTION! . The special markings on the valve must be taken into account. .2 Operating principles The medium flows through the strainer screen in the direction shown on the strainer and is thereby cleaned .1 Scope of applications Strainers are used for "cleanin flowing mediums". . The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.g. Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions. limits on use and possibilities. e. 4.Certain media require or preclude the use of special materials. .0 Description 4.Valves made from grey cast iron are not authorised for use in systems subject to TRO 110. aggressive or abrasive media. Rev. the operator should state the higher requirements when ordering. Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions . If conditions exceed these requirements.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Strainer 4.

~ ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions Strainer

4.3 Diagram

/ 2~

~/ 7

fig . 1: Strainer - Y

fig . 2: Strainer - Y SE

-

7

fig. 3: Strainer - Y (1.4408) Refer to the data sheet for information about materials with designations and figure numbers.

4.4 Technical data - remarks
for - Principal dimensions - Pressure-temperature-ratings - Valves with butt weld ends, etc.

refer to datasheet.

Page 4

Rev. 00401010002103

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions Strainer

4.5 Marking
Details of the CE-marking on the valve:

(E: CE-marking
0525 Notified body

<!lID>
Typ 8j.

Manufacturer Type Year of manufacture

Address of manufacturer: refer to item 11.0 Warranty I Guarantee

According to the Pressure Equipment Directive table 6, annex II, valves without safety function are only allowed to bear the CE-marking DN32 onwards.

5.0 Installation
5.1 General notes on installation
The following points should be taken into account besides the general principles governing installation work:
ATTENTION I

- Remove flange covers if present. - The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles. - Note installation position with reference to flow direction, see mark on valve. - Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation. - Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse, bending and torsional forces are avoided. - Protect valves from dirt during construction work. - Connection flanges must mate exactly - Valve mountings such as actuators, handwheels, hoods must not be used to take external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as connecting pOints for lifting gear. - Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used. See data sheet for weights. - Leave sufficient space to remove the screen basket during installation in pipelines. - Installation position: a) The screen basket should never be at the top, otherwise the dirt will fall back into the pipe. b) If water hammer is possible due to condensation in steam lines, never install the trap with the screen basket at the bottom, but install it so that it is horizontal. - Centre gaskets between the flanges. - Install compensators to compensate for thermal expansion of the piping.
- Planners I construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and installing products.

Rev. 0040101000 2103

Page 5

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions Strainer

5.2 Installing valves with butt weld ends
Please note that only qualified persons using appropriate equipment and working in accordance with technical rules are allowed to install fittings by welding . The responsibility for this lies with the system owner. Refer to the data sheet for information about the shape of the butt weld ends.

6.0 Putting the valve into operation
ATTENTION!

- Before putting the valve into operation, check material, pressure, temperature and direction of flow. - Regional safety instructions must be adhered to. - Residues in piping and valves (dirt, weld beads, etc.) inevitably lead to leakage. - Touching the valve when it is operating at high (> 50°C) or low « O°C) media temperatures can cause injury. Affix warning notice or protective insulation as appropriate! Before putting a new plant into operation or restarting a plant after repairs or modification, always make sure that: - All works has been completed' - The valve is in the correct position for its function. - Safety devices have been attached.

7.0 Care and maintenance
The strainer screens must be cleaned regularly. Maintenance and maintenance-intervals have to be defined by the operator and depends on the degree of dirt accumulation in the system. - If necessary, the strainer can be fitted with an additional start-up filter (e.g. filter with supporting basket) to start up the system. - Flush the plant thoroughly before starting it. - The strainer requires little maintenance. ATTENTION I

Refer to point 10.0 before opening the strainer. - Contaminated strainers in suction-lines will result cavitation and damage the pumps.
- Before reassembling the unit, remember that the bearing surface must be cleaned and a new gasket (pos. 6) must be inserted. - Set the strainer cover (pos. 2) in place. - Tighten the hexagon nuts (pos. 4) evenly crosswise .

Page 6

Rev. 00401010002103

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions Strainer

Tightening torque's for hexagon nuts I bolts: hexagon nuts I Torque ON bolts (Nm) 15- 32 40 50-65 80-150 200 250-400 500 M 10 M 12 M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 27 20-35 20-35 60-80 100-125 150-200 340-410 340-410

8.0 Troubleshooting
In the event of malfunction or faulty operating performance check that the installation and adjustment work has been carried out and completed in accordance with these Operating Instructions .

6

.I.\.

ATTENTION!
It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults.

If malfunctions cannot be eliminate with the help of the following table "9.0 troubleshooting table" , the supplier or manufacturer should be consulted .

9.0 Troubleshooting table
ATTENTION!

- read point 10.0 and 11.0 prior to dismantling and repair workl - read point 6.0 before restarting the plant I
Fault
No flow Flow too low

Possible cause
Flange covers have not been removed (7, Fig. 3, page 4) strainer clogged. Piping clogged.

Corrective measures
Remove flange covers (7, Fig. 3, page 4) Clean/replace screen. Check piping system. Re-align piping and fit new valve!

Flange broken between unit and piping

Bolts tightened unevenly. Mating flanges not properly aligned.

Rev. 0040101000 2103

Page 7

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions Strainer

10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part
ATTENTION!

The following paints must be observed: - Pressureless pipe system , - Medium must be cool, - Plant must be drained, - Purge piping systems in case of caustic, inflammable, aggressive or toxic media,

11.0 Warranty I Guarantee
The extent and period of warranty cover are specified in the "Standard Terms and Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co, KG" valid at the time of delivery or, by way of departure, in the contract of sale itself, We guarantee freedom of faults in compliance with state-of-the-art technology and the confirmed application, No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling or disregard of operating and installation instructions, data sheets and relavant regulations, This warranty also does not cover any damage which occurs during operation under conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements, Justified complaints will be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a specialist appointed by us, No claims will be accepted beyond the scope of this warranty, The right to replacement delivery is excluded, The warranty shall not cover maintenance work, installation of external parts, design modifications or natural wear. Any damage incurred during transport should not be reported to us but rather to the competent cargo-handling depot, the railway company or carrier company immediately or else claims for replacements from these companies will be invalidated,

~

ARMATUREN

Technology for the Future.
GERMAN QUALITY VALVES ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co, KG, D-33756 Schlof). Holte-Stukenbrock Telephone (+49 5207) 994-0 Telefax (+49 5207) 994-158 or 159 Internet: http://www.ari-armaturen.com E-mail: info.vertrieb@ari-arrnaturen.com

Page 8

Rev, 00401010002103

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions Strainer

12.0 EC declaration of conformity
ARI·Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG, Mergelheide 56·60, 0·33756 SchloB Holte-Stukenbrock

EC declaration of conformity
as defined by the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC

Herewith we declare, that according to the above mentioned Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) the below listed products comply and have been approved according to table 6, annex II , Module H through LLOYD'S REGISTER QUALITY ASSURANCE (8S-Nr. 0525), Monckebergstr. 27, 0-20095 Hamburg . Certificate-No: 50003/1 Strainers Type 050, 059, 080 Applied standards: DIN 3230 DIN 3840 AD 2000 leaflet A4 - Cast iron with spheroidal graphite - Cast steel - Forged steel

Schlor.. Holte-Stukenbrock, 2008.2002

Rev. 0040101000 2103

Page 9

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE DUPLEX FILTER

Contents:

1.

Type sheet

2.

Spare parts drawing and spare parts list

3.

Description and Operating Instructions for the duplex filter

4.

Description and Operating Instructions for the filter element cleaning

5.

Data Sheet for the Differential Pressure Indicator (to order)

6.

Spare parts drawing for the Differential Pressure Indicator (to order)

TYP2,06,5,4 23,09,2002

Z45555

POS,l

8
CfJ

(~265)

RE
0

z
N2

-=r=T~ I
I
I

u..
0

a

I I I
I

D

0

18
I

G

A

N1

60
N

0

n

AUSTRITT OUTLET SORTIE

INLET. ENTREE

HEIZANSCHLOSSE FOR ROHR 21 3 HEATING CONNECTION FOR TUBE 02 1.3 CONNECTION DE CH AU~FAGE, POUR TUBE 021,3 N2 FIL TERAUSTRITT FILTEROUTLET SORTIE DU FILTRE

POS,2

E

'"

BEl RINGSIEB DURCHFLUSS ENTGEGENGESETZT WITH RI NG· EL E ~ENTS FLOW INOPOSITE DIRECTION AVEC D:SPA"lIERS AA.'mEAUX LE PASSAGEE TEN S 1 CO~ T RAJRE S E1S FOR KORSIEB NICHT GEEIGNET NOT QUAUFIED FOR BASKET· OR STAR PLEATET E LEI/HITS NeST P POUR PANIERS ACORBEILlE OU A AS TRELUS PUSS E

14

M h L

RE

~~~~~m~G Gl/4
DESAERATION

ALLGEMEINTOLERANZEN DIN ISO 2768·y TOLERANCE OIN IS 2768·y O TOLERANCE 0 IN ISO 2768·Y PNI BETRIEBSOBERDRUCK FILTERRAUM IN BAR BEI120' C WORKIN G PRESSU RE, FILTER COMPARTMENT INBAR AT 120'C
PRESS!CN [J: SER\~CE. CH PJI.8RE DE FILTRATION EN BAR POJR 120'C

RS Jj\\J,f~ERUNG VlD.ANGE S SIEBAUSBAU DISM OU NTI NG OF THE FILTERELEMENT OEM ONTAGE DU PANIER g"a

~?IJ1Jt~T&Ny~g .m~G~~& FIL TERELEMENT

POUR LES PANIERS A MANTEAUX ET ANNEAUX

GEHAUSE GEGOSSEtj. EN·GJL·250 CASING CAST ED.,~· ~JL · 250 CORPS MOULE. ",,·GJL.250 POS.l

PN2 BETRIEBSOBERDRUCK HEI1RAUM IN BAR BE1200' C WORKING PRESSURE. HEAT ING COMPART MENT IN BAT AT 2OIJ'C PRESSICN DE SERI1C , cHINBRE D CHAU E E iFACE EN BAR POUR 2OIJ' C BESTELLBElsPlEL ORDERING E JIAl~PL E EXEMPLE DE COMMANDE
oG 195

gSHxMX¥I%~EifFHPRESSURE
EQUILI BRAGE DE PRESSION

IYP
1(654
I.. 135

cG

0

ON

11,,, 1 ~
C

~
H
J

a
L50

'T1in ON at.

'NI

B
200

00

E
115 195

265

eoo

500

so
80

65

00

100
100

10 U
10 14

155
165

270

SUBJECT TO Al TERAnOtI5

."

'" ffJ5

''''

'W

420 420

210 ,<0 W ,W 350 610 '50 41 5 210 840 600 '10 ANDERUNGEN VORBEHALTENI

'so "

520

310

"

350

" '"

'IS' "" " " '" '" '
68

'.J 510

'33

"

m

RS

,

EW. W{A...
LTR

120

31~

270 60

GI GI

I,IOOIFICATIOUS I\f:SERvEES

'" ""

" '30

2.<'"

""

DUPLEX FILTER

DOPPELFILTER 2.06.5.4

FIL TRE DOUBLE

Z39143
TYP2.06.5 10.04.2000

1B

23

5

>--"
@

12 13
11

@ @ @

0 f
@ @
D
I

@

t
3,4
B,9

0

@

4

6,7

32,31

l+~~~-50
n7--{j'D>-+-- 49
48

SPARE PART LIST

ERSATZTEILLISTE TYP 2.06.5(.4)

LIST DES PIECES DE RECHANGE
81. 1;3

ERSA TZTEILLISTE TYP 2.06.5 (.4)
SPARE PART LIST LlSTE DES PIECES DE RECHANGE

2.06.5. G

Typenschliisse/: = Doppelfrlter aus GG25 Gehiiusedurchmesser Q Filtereinsatzliinge DN = Anschlul1fiansche

duplex filter made of GG25 cabin diameter length of the filter element connection flanges

Filtre double en GG25 diametre du corps longueur du panier brides desirees

Pos. Nr.

3

4

5

5

6

7

8

9

11

12 *) 13 *) 14

15

Bezeichnung Designation Designation Versch lu I1schraube screw plug vis Dichtung gasket joint O-Ring (Viton) O-Ring (Perbunan) O-RinQ Flachdichtung gasket IjOint Versch lul1schraube screw plug vis Dichtung gasket Ijoint Stiftschraube stud bolt vis Multer nut ecrou Siebeinsatz filter element element frltrant Anker bolt vis Multer nut ecrou KOken cock robinet O-Ring (Viton) O-Ring (Perbunan) O-RinQ

G 265 Q 500 DN 80 2000191

SI.

G 195 Q 500 DN 80 2000191

SI.

G 195 Q 250 DN 65 2000189

SI.

2

2

2

3270006 3030183

2

3270006

2

3270006

2

2 3040131
-------- - ---

---- --------

-----------2 3380008 2

3380008

2000189

2

2002885

2

2002885

2

3270003

2

3270002

2

3270002

2

2009088

6

2009088

4

2009088

4

2100007 Fabr.Nr. Filtertyp WN 5.1.90 (1) WN 5.1.91 (2)

6

2100007 Fabr.No. Filtertype WN 5.1.83 (1) WN 5.1.84 (2)

4

2100007 Fabr.No. Type de Filtre WN 5.1 .81 (1) WN 5.1.82 (2)

4

2

2

2

2100035

2

2100033

2

2100033

2

Z35933 3030075

1

Z35933 3030075

1

Z35932 3030175

1

2 3040121 3040121

2 3040119

2

Pos. Nr.

16

Bezeichnung Designation Designation Sicherungsring retaining ring anneau de protection Druckausgleichkuken
cock for equalizualion of pressure robinet d'equilibroge de pression

G 265 Q500 DN 80 2200002

St.

G 195 Q 500 DN 80 2200002

St.

G 195 Q 250 DN 65 2200001

st.

1

1

1

18

Z44750 3034796

1

Z44750 3034796

1

Z44750 3034796

1

19

20

21

23

24

30

31

32

39

47

48

49

50

O-Ring (Viton) O-Ring (Perbunan) O-Ring Schraube screw vis Federring spring ressort Hahnschlussel reversing handle cle Differenzdruckanzeiger differ. press. indicator indi. de diff. de pressure Verschlur..schraube screw plug vis Dichtung gasket I joint Verschlur..schraube screw plug vis Mutter Nut ecrou Dichtung gasket joint Dichtung gasket jOint Stiftschraube stud bold vis Mutter Nut ecrou

2 3040094 2007497 2 3040094 2007497

2 3040094 2 2007497

2

2

2209799 WN 48.3 SW27 Typ Druck

2

2209799 WN48.3 SW27 Type Pressure

2

2209799 WN 48.3 SW27 Type Pression

2

1

1

1

2002885

2

2002885

2

2002885

2

3270002

4

3270002

4

3270002

4

2002885

2

2002885

2

2002885

2

2100003

1

2100003

1

2100003

1

3380041

2

3380041

2

3380040

2

4-18109

1

4-18109

1

4-18109

1

2000001

4

2000001

4

2000001

4

2100004

4

2100004

4

2100004

4

*)

Bei Mantelsieb (1) und Kerzeneinsatz (2) zusatzlich. These items are supplementary by multimantle- (1) and filtercandle-element (2) En supplement avec panier manteaux (1) et cartouches (2) filtrantes .

a

8 bar. . Duplex filters are used in cases where the contaminated filter elements have to be regenerated without interrupting the filtration process. ball valves or double-stage changeover valves. Owing to the design of the change-over device it is not possible for both filter chambers to be switched off at the same time.Special eqUipment needed for heatable filters a) Steam-heated filters: Safety valves for the filter chamber set to operate at the relief pressure which is 10 % above the max. cylindrical plugs. The connections for the inlet and outlet depend on the strainer element used (see works standard WN 211). i.INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR BOLL DUPLEX FILTERS 1. admissible operating pressure of the filter housing. Description Duplex filters which can be changed over consist of two filter housings operated in parallel by a two-stage change-over device. The same applies to the connected piping. the filter housing must be free from strain. According to the AD Information Sheets. The maximum differential pressure for filter meshes is 0. admissible temperature of 150°C in the filter chamber and one safety valve per filter pot. the filter elements are provided with an appropriate safety factor for the differential pressures indicated on the filter nameplates. permit change-over without pressure shocks. for micro-cartridges 2 bar.e. The filter housings are designed to meet the current regulations for a particular pressure range. Electrically heated filters: Thermostats which cut off the power supply to the heating element at a max. Pay attention to the arrow marked on the housing. The change-over devices. b) Heating of the filter serves to offset the heating loss at the filter during the filtration process or before start-up of the plant to heat the liquid in the filter. Additional external forces and moments at the connection flanges of the filter are to be avoided (possibly support feed lines). 2. Heated filters with shut-off devices: . the filter housings are only rated for internal overpressure. Installation When the filter is attached to its foundation.

by opening the sludge outlet. 3. both chambers in service.8 bar in filter meshes or 2 bar in micro-cartridge filters change over to the clean filter chamber as follows: Cleaning Check that the pressure equalising cock is open and whether the stand-by chamber is full by briefly opening the air vents. the isolated chamber is on stand-by until the admissible differential pressure has built up as a result of clogging.1 Start-up Pressure filters (> 0. liquid leaking during the cleaning process can be drained off. this releases the liquid pressure and it is then possible to check whether the change-over device has cut off the flow to the filter chamber. complete sealing is not possible with the plug-type system. leave the pressure equalising cock open. Close air vents when the air has escaped and the liquid has started to emerge. Close pressure equalising cock. while one of the filter chambers is being used for filtering. Change over. pressure equalising cock open. Open the air vent on the isolated filter. Start plant up slowly. In smaller duplex filters without pressure compensation the heat expansion of the medium is so low that there is no risk to the components. Isolate one filter chamber by operating the change-over device. Remove the housing cover from the isolated filter chamber. Drain liquid down to the strainer base in the case of basket strainers.It is imperative for the pressure equalising cock to only remain closed in the cleaning phase so that there is no inadmissible pressure build-up through the thermal expansion of the medium in the isolated chamber. • • • • . Open air vents of both chambers (with venting screws only about 1 turn). drain filter housing completely in the case of mantle strainers. In contrast to the change-over and ball valve devices. At a differential pressure of 0. Remove the filter element vertically upwards.1 bar pressure in the filter) Set the change-over device to the mid-position. cartridge strainers and microcartridges. 3.

Screw cover on . set change-over device to mid position until the air has been vented.Clean filter element (see operating instructions "Strainer cleaning") . Air may be drawn in if the level drops . Open air vent on the isolated filter half. if not installed. This filter is now on stand-by. Start up the plant. the air vent remains open .97 I • • • • Fill and vent both filter halves. When the differential pressure across the filter reaches the maximum allowed by the pump suction head.09. a change-over to the other filter half must be made. Open pressure equalising cock or. close pressure equalising cock.1 bar pressure in filter) Recommended container filling for suction filters drain ' L • • I . Close pressure equalising cock. the isolated chamber is on stand-by. . • Close air vent. Isolate one of the filters with the change-over device.. 3. Change over.- filling line ~ . 0>.25.2 Suction filters « 0. • Before mounting the cover.:>J Z4Q3 84 v. It is imperative to renew seals which have become hardened and deformed. While one filter chamber is being used for filtration.--~ --f. Open pressure equalising cock. renew disposable elements and install them in the filter. check that the seal is in perfect condition and seated properly.

The cleaned filter half is ready on stand-by. Close air vent. We reserve the right to change this description without any prior notice! . Renew disposable elements and install in the filter. touch up or repaint as and when required . check that the seal is in perfect condition and seated properly. if necessary. It is not permitted to fill the filter against the indicated flow direction of the filter elements. If the filter is provided with rust-inhibiting paint. BOLL & KIRCH assumes no liability for any mistakes by any misuse of the product. It is imperative to renew seals which have become hardened and deformed. 4. Servicing: Servicing of the duplex filter comprises checking and. liIJ11en filtering cooling water or media which may cause sedimentation on the change-over device. This procedure is to be repeated from section as and when required .). Drain liquid down to the strainer base. • Fill filter housing (see Fig. it is advisable to activate the change-over device as often as possible and at regular intervals in order to prevent clogging . renew the seals and filter elements. • Remove filter element vertically upwards.• Dismantle the housing cover from the isolated filter half. Clean filter element (see operating instructions "Strainer cleaning") . • Before mounting the cover.

06.OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR SEGMENTAL COCK CHANGE-OVER VALVE FOR BOLL DUPLEX FILTER TYPE 2. The illustration in Fig.7 1. General The segmental cock valve is used as a changeover element in duplex filters. the pin "A" in Fig. 2. The special design and the limited change-over movement of the segmental cock (2) prevent pressure surges and interruptions to the flow. Operation In the operating mode the pressure equalisation knob must always be open. both filter chambers are under operating pressure. The relevant filter chamber is filled through this open transverse bore.5 AND 2. i. The pin "A" in Fig. 1 points towards the appropriate symbol indicating which chamber the medium is flowing through. Z42367 BILO 1 Ease of movement and pressure-tightness of the segmental cock (2) are achieved by means of exact fits and small friction surfaces. The flow diagram. This covers a bore located at right angles to the cock axis. In this position both filter chambers are in operation. The isolated filter chamber is pressure-relieved by loosening the venting screw and can then be cleaned (see Operating Instructions for Duplex Filters and Operating Instnuctions for Strainer Cleaning). The pressure equalisation knob (3) is closed by turning the knurled screw (5) clockwise until screwed in full. Fig. Change-over The segmental cock (2) is moved through 120· by turning the valve lever (6) to the left or right. 1 is in the central position pointing towards the relevant symbol.06. shows the change-over arrangement and the filter chamber in use. . WJ67 Bill 2 'Mlen the filter chambers are operated in parallel. 2 shows the parallel-operation position of the segmental cock. 1.e.

3 3.4.1 Isolate the filter from the plant.2. 3.2.4 Dismantle segmental cock (2).4. Check O-rings (10) for damage and replace if necessary. Dismantle pressure equalisation knob (3) .5 3.Dismantling and installation of the valve 3. 3. refer to Operating Instructions for Duplex Filters.2 3. Pull cock (2) out of valve housing (1).1) and spring washer (13).2 Drain the medium from both filter chambers (at least down to the lower filter chamber port).2 3.7 Check segmental cock (2) and pressure equalisation knob (3) for ease of movement. Unscrew threaded pin (14) until the knob (3) can be unscrewed. Undo lock nut (12). 3.3 3. Check knob (3) and O-ring (11) for damage and replace if necessary. Oil the O-ring (11) and position it in the knob groove (3).4 3.1 3.2. Remove circlip (9) with pliers to DIN 5256 C.2 3.4. 3. We reserve the right to change this description without any prior notice! . In this way the correct stop of the cock is also guaranteed.6 BOLL & KIRCH assumes no liability for any mistakes by any misuse of the product.4.2 Insert segmental cock (2) into the housing bore and press down until the groove for the circlip (9) is exposed. 3.4. 3. Secure threaded pin (14) with hexagonal nut (13.3. Oil the knob bore and screw knob (3) in full.3.4. Examine segmental cock (2) and housing bore for damage and repair if necessary.4 Assembly 3. Position circlip (9) in groove using pliers.1.3 3.4 3.8 For commissioning of the filter.1. Then unscrew the threaded pin (14) by one turn so that the threaded pin (14) does not block the movement of the knob (3).4. 3.4.3 3.2.1 Position O-rings (10) in the grooves of the cleaned and oiled segmental cock (2). 3. Unscrew knob (3) completely.3. Ensure that the circlip (9) is properly seated as it must withstand the full operating pressure through the cock.3.1 Relieve the pressure in both filter chambers. 3. Screw threaded pin (14) right in full .1 3.

1 4. Open the drain screw in the filter base and drain contents completely . A rising pressure loss is a sign of increasing dirt accumulation. The differential pressure is not to exceed 0. petroleum ether.g. repeat points 5. This prevents dirt from reaching the clean side. Place the individual filter elements into containers with cleaning agent and brush off with not too hard a brush (e. 4. The length of these intervals depends on the amount of dirt that has accumulated.2 5.8 0. Use a torch for finer fabrics. To this end insert the cleaning gun type 5.4 and 5. Carry out the first cleaning operation immediately after the installation has been flushed .6 5. (bar) 2.8 Cleaning Shut off single filter or change over duplex filter. the fabric has been cleaned well. Release pressure from the filter housing by undoing the venting screw and remove the housing cover. The multi-mantle filters consist of up to 6 nested filter elements.5. If the light penetrates evenly. In the case of persistent dirt or paint encrustation. . Lift the remaining filter elements out individually by gripping the inside of the filter ring. 5.g. For final cleaning.4 5. paraffin.434 3. Before you open the filter chambers.230 290 356 .02 (22) into the openings located in the upper filter ring and blow through the filter surface from the inside with up and down motions. the joins of the individual components are sealed with O-rings.g. 5. Make sure that the filter is not completely immersed but that the upper ring remains free . Fields of application are filter meshes < 200 ~m.8 magnetic primary filter (19) magnetic secondary filter (20) 4.3 5. Seals which have become hard and deformed must be renewed without fail. Now blow compressed air at about 4 bar through the filter element cleaned in the above manner from the clean side.2 bar (suitable monitoring appliances are available from BOLL & KIRCH). Assess cleaning effect by holding the filter element against the light. hot water or similar) and blow through again.2 0. observe the operating instructions for single and duplex filters.3. Slacken the self-locking nut (4) on the central tie rod (5) and lift out the inner filter with the lifting eye (18). 1.2 and 5. oper. Then check fabric for cleanness and damage. place the filter into a container (e. nylon brush). In order to prevent flow short-circuits.5 5.1 5.8 or 1. 3-23700) with cleaning agent (to sheet KV 349) and allow to soak for up to 4 hours.CLEANING THE MUL TI·MANTLE FILTER ELEMENTS 1. If necessary.7 5.2 Maintenance Clean and inspect multi-mantle filter elements at regular intervals. The admissible differential pressures depend on the multi-mantle filter diameter: Filter'" (mm) 86 . as shown in drawing No. Accessories of the filter element The following items can be supplied as 'accessories: 6p max. rinse the filter in clean cleaning fluid (e. Remove filter and continue to treat as described under points 5. Check all seals including cover seals.

BOLL & KIRCH assumes no liability for any mistakes by any misuse of the product.6. Compressed air connection. pump and cleaning gun. We reserve the right to change this description without any prior notice! .1 6. 10 mm spanner. 3-23700 . 6.04 with cartridge filter. type 5.3 6. Cleaning gun.2 6. 6 bar.4 Cleaning appliances 2 cleaning containers to drawing No .02. max. For particularly convenient and thorough filter cleaning we recommend our cleaning trolley type 5.

The filter chamber is relieved through the venting screw (4). lYP 2. Otherwise.2 / 2.06.5 / 2.9 fiP 2.04.5 cannot be removed with out actuating the venting facility (4).5 5 . The cover plate (2) covers a minimum number of cover screws (3). so that the cover (1) T1P 2.5 %/~ -\ 1 T'l'P 2.05.62.COVER SECURING DEVICE FOR DOUBLE FILTERS Z37134 The function of the cover securing device is to prevent the uncontrolled excape of lubricantes and fuels in the case of operating errors. the service pressure of the filter chamber falls immediately and hardly any fuel excapes.78. With the correct switching position. the venting screw is immediately closed and the fuel discharge is limited.2 / 2.02.68.

Establish on the circuit diagram (5) with chamber is switched off. BOLL & KIRCH assumes no liability for any mistakes due to misuse of the product. Loosen cover screws (3) and remove cover (1). 2. Unscrew the venting screw of this chamber (4) to the point where the cover plate (2) can swivel over the cover screws (3) 3.93. 5. For sieve cleaning and commissioning.2 / 2. see Sieve Cleaning Operating Instructions and Double Filter Operating Instructions. We reserve the right to change this description \r'lithout prior notice! .80 4. Assemble in reverse order Check seals items 6 and 7 for damage.2 DN25 Operation: 1.9 01·150.TYP 2. TYP 2.93.62.

= GO .0 BAR 250 0-60 1al 63 220 0-60 0.2 .5 BAR 0.50-100% DELTA p.8 3a 1 60/60 40/60 MATERIAL RATING RANGES OF PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL: DELTA P = TO BE SPECIFIED WHEN ORDERING DESCRIPTION: THE PURPOSE OF THIS DEVICE IS THE MEASUREMENT. THE FIRST REED CONTACT IS ACTUATED AT 75% DELTA P1. AS THE PRESSURE DIFFERENCE INCREASES (DELTA P > 0).36.TYP4.= MAKING ANDIOR BREAKING CAPACITY WNAMAX.= SWITCHING CURRENT A MAX. AND THE SECOND AT 100% DELTA P2.3. DATA: SWITCHING VOL TAGE V~ MAX. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE CONTACT INDICATOR TYPE 4. AT THE SAME TIME.0.5 4005 52 97 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM L". A PRE-LOADED SPRING CAUSES THE PLUNGER TO TAKE UP ITS ZERO POSITION WHEN THE PRESSURE DIFFERENCE DELTA P IS ZERO. METHOD OF OPERATION: A PLUNGER SEALED BY A DIAPHRAGM SEPARATES THE SPACE UNDER PRESSURE INTO TWO CHAMBERS.2 BAR 0. TEMPERATURE 150°C 0 . PRESSURE 100 BAR MAX.8 BAR 0.0 BAR 0.01. THE RED SEGMENT OF THE INDICATOR DISC IS VISIBLE OVER A PRESSURE RANGE EQUAL TO APROX. AND VISUAL INDICATION OF THE DIFFERENCE IN PRESSURE BETWEEN TWO POINTS. AND THEREFORE VIRTUALLY WITHOUT FRICTION. THE PLUNGER IS FORCED TO MOVE AGAINST THE SPRING.2 09.2.ALUMINIUM MAX.0.06 Z45550 m N 93 95 1_+--1----"'G1/4 I--~M20x1.1.= FREQUENCY HZ MAX. AN INDICATOR DISC IS MOVED MAGNETICALLY. AND THE TWO REED CONTACTS ARE ACTUATED.36. AND THE ESTABLISHMENT OF AN ELECTRICAL CONTACT WHEN THE PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL ATTAINS A SPECIFIED FIGURE. P2 SPECIFICATION: PROTECTION CLASS: IP 65 ELECTR.

: ORDER NO. NO DE COMMANDE TYP 4.94 Z21434 3 I .2 11 10 7 3 POSNR ROLLMEMBRAN FEDER KOlBEN DICHTUNG BEZEICHNUNG DIAPHRAGM SPRING PISTON GASKET DESIGNATION DIAPHRAGME RESSORT PISTON JOINT DESIGNATION SPARE PARTS DRAWING ERSATZTEILZEICHNUNG ZUM TYP 4.46.36.2 PlAN DES PIECES DE RECHANGE .2-+4.TYP4.2 UND 4.36.2 1102.36.46.NR. f-- A CEMENTED COLLE A-8 BEl BESTELLUNG ANGEBEN TO BE MENTIONED IN CASE OF ORDER A MENTIONNER LORS DE LA COMMlINDE AUFTR.

: +45145/ 42 12 99 E-mail: info@bol lfilter.be o Russia I Ukraine I Belorussia Dr.: +49/2273/562-223 E-Mail: info@bollfilter. 10-14.nl o 6 8 Belgium/Luxembourg AUXIMECA NV Wijtschotbaan 3/3 B .R.ru o Croatia Marine Trade d.: +45/ 45142 12 00 Fax.: +43(732(76460 Fax. : +49/4102/474()'{) Fax .: +385-47-61 1365 Fax.: +39-02-3800 36 31 E-Mail: sales@decosta.o.o.c om o BOLL & KIRCH Filterbau GmbH Geschafisstene SUd Rangaustrane 7 a D-91639 Wolframs-Eschenbach Tel.il o e () Austria/Czech .de 06 Italy DeCoSta S.oehler@schmachtl.4021 linz Tel.Rep. Box 133 RUS -198262 St.dk ursula .de o 6 @) Greece I Bulgaria FILTERKON 8. : +49/9875/971865 (Herr Pirkl) Fax. 12 1-20156 Milano Tel. 11742 Acropolis Athens.: +39-02-3800 52 83 Fa x.180 Fax.: +357/25889999 Fax. : +2122129076 E-Mail : filterkon@fiJterkon.: +49/98 75/884 (Herr Henkelmann) Tel. The Hawk Building 124 Gladstonos Street CY-3032 Limassol Tel. Vladimira Nazora 6 HR-47000 Karlovac.I. If you need service or spares fo r our products please contact our head offi:e or our branch-of fices.: +49/2273/562-0 Fax .: +49/9875/885 E-Mail : norbert .L. Alexej Simakov P. : +31 /180/556255 Fax.cy.de o Cyprus M. : +49/3 6514200075 E-Mail: ivg-neubert@superkabel.: +49/365/4200 07 4 Fax.) e Netherlands Lubrafil B.Bel Service.: +4317321785036 E-Mail : g.t-com .6.! Rep. 50143 Kerpen Siemensstr.: +31 /180/556265 E-mail : lubrafil@lubrafil. Petersburg Tel.2007 .at o f.und Filtrationstechnik Gera Prehlis 13A D'()7552 Gera Tel. 9. Greece Tel.O.39B E-mail : info@auximeca.2900 Schoten Tel. Services Ltd .unci Ersatzteilbedart wenden Sie sich blUe an das Stammhaus cxler an unsere Niederlassungen. Aalborg 2 NL .: +32/3/646.2993 LP Barendrechl Tel.E.: +357/25345639 E-mail : info@mieserv.: +4914102/4740-22 E~Mail: oe €) DenmarklSweden/Norwayllceland Fin land/Lithu a n ia/Latv j alE s ton ia BOLLFILTER Nordic Hammerbakken 21 DK ~ 3460 Bir1<eroo Tel.de o IVG Pumpen.: +30/2 10/92 17671 Fax. 1 1 2 Stand: 01.net o e BOLL & KIRCH Filteroau GmbH Geschaftsstelle Nord An der Strusbek 34 22926 D-Ahrensburg Tel. Vertretungen oder Service-Stellen. Milsaion Sir.: +385-47-61 4281 E-Mail: marine-trade@ka .henkelmann@bollfilter.bauer@bollfilter. Kroatien Tel. agencies or service-stations • Europa I Europe Deutschland/Germany Zentrale / Headquarters o6 e BOLL & KIRCH Filteroau GmbH Postfach 1420.06.hr o VerkaufsbOro Agency Lager Stockist Service Service PC003-99 1 81.: +7/812136880 19 E-Ma il: simakov@rol. Via Bicetti de Buttinoni. of SlovakialSlovenia Schmachtl GmbH Pummererstrane 36 A .: +32/3/646. + Fax. D-50170 Kerpen Tel.V.

Florida 33315 Tel.: +44-1206792234 oe €) South Korea Blohm & Voss (Korea) lid.co . : +1 (954) 763-2872 o • Australien I Australia €) Peacock & Smith Ply Ltd .ae @ €) Motor-Services Hugo Stamp .com.K.93-634 26 80 Fax . MI 48170 Tel. China Office Shanghai 2011081 P. : +91 /222/7560146 E-mail: akdulta123@vsnl.net o E'3 €) Japan Bollfilter Japan lid.com o E'3 €) U.: +81 / 78/2428515 E-mail : info@boUfilter. : +82/51/74 05 70 1 Fax . Domingos Afonso .: +34.: +971-4-3243786 E-Mail : info@safetech.Singapore 629021 Tel. : +27/11 /6099535 E-Mail: sales@afrifil. : +91 /222/ 7560 147 Fax.br o • Afrika I Africa South Africa Afrifil Industrial Filters (Ply) Ltd .com United Arabian Emirates O@ Middle East MIS Safe Technical Supply Co. E Exp.co.K.L. : +852-3181 7830 Fax .: +86 21 64422211 Fax.: +44-1206-793004 E-Mail: sales@bollfiller.: +41/22/7359500 Fax.: +61139/37 62 165 E-Mail : sales@peacocks-aus. loc. ROK .es Blohrn&Voss Industries China Ltd. P.: +55111/6918-4111 E-Mail : Luizcarlos. L.Kensington Vic.R.R. Box 4832 Dubai Tel. 1600 Tel.4996276 E-Mail : adm in@aresmakina.2007 .Gomes@pml. China Tel. Ltda.Duduliu /ISTANBUL Tel: + 90 (0) 216.O .: +971-4-3243240 Fax. .4996252 (pbx) Fax: + 90 (0) 216. LTD.: +82/5117405 70 4 E-Mail : bvkorea@kornel. Hongkong Office HK .com E'3 o Brazil PML Petersen Matex Imp. of ChinalMacao PC003-99 1 BI.za 6 o • Asien I Asia Blohm&Voss Industries China ltd.?Ti.beck@bollfilter. 460-03161-090-Sao Paulo Tel.: +34-93-66522 79 E-mail: uwe. USA . IHR .: +8621 64 42 20 66 E-mail: info@bvi-marine.: +852-2541 2171 @ @) Hongkong/P. Zona Cami Ral Paseo del Ferrocarril .06. 3031 Tel. 651-0085 Tel.Hong Kong SAR Tel. and Ireland BOlLFILTER UK LTD Commerce Park.uk o6 • Amerlka I America €) BOLL FILTER CORPORATION USA . : +1 -734-451-4680 Fax .o 6 €) Spain/Portugal Bolltiller Espana S.R.Ft. Ltd . Dutta INO . : +65/6/86 24 222 E-Mail: mnmcorp@mnmcorp. Whitehall Road GB . : +27/11/4525444 Fax. 339 3-2 E .: +55111/6100-1917 Fax .ch Turkey AR-ES MAKINA MOHENDisLiK iTH . AUS .Colchester. : +1 (954) 763-3660 Fax.L.Plymouth. SGP .hk o 06 Sw ilze rJandiLiec hlen sIe j nfPo la n d EIGCRUSTAG 120 Route de Frontenex CH .: +81 /78/2428550 Fax. Japan / Kobe. SAN.08860 Caslelldefels Tel.: +41/22/7866171 India A.com . VE Tic.com o o @ €l Singapore' Malaysia I Indonesia MNM Corporation Pie. 2 / 2 Stand : 01 .C. BR . Des Sanayi Silest 117 Sokak C-24 Blok No : 5 34775 Y. Essex CO2 8HX Tel.1208 Geneve Tel.Navi Mumbay 400614 Tel. Lauderdale. ZA -Isando .net Fax.Pusan I Korea Tel.: +1 -734-451-4681 E-Ma il: latorre@bollfillerusa. : +65/6/86 14 22 2 Fax. : +61139/37 64 499 Fax.jp E-Mail: info@eig-cruslag.

2008 .01.2 Plate Heat Exchanger Plattenwarmetauscher Type CBE A company of GEA Group Power Plant EI Salvador 1402568900_271 VBU 118.1 Tube Heat Exchanger Rohrwarmetauscher Type MX 7.Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH Mechan ica l Sepa ration Division 7 Heat Exchanger Warmetauscher 7.

.

.. .... . .... ..INSTRUCTIONS FOR SHELL & TUBE HEATER Instruction Manual for VESTATM MX Table of contents for instnlCtion manual 1. 2 Mounting and Installation ... All heaters may be delivered as immcrsion or ontflow heaters for insertion in tanks.... 5 . 3 Conservation during shut do\\". .. ....... . 2 3 ... Other capacities may be manufactured at request. Installation Space Requirements ...... .. 10............ The Vesta MX heaters range from 0... .... 8.. ..... General Description Aalborg Industries' Vesta MX heat exchangers are of thc shell and h. 3 .. lubrication oil. .... ... ...... pcriods . Maintenance and Cleaning ......... 2....... Storage ........ Vesta MX heat exchangers are primarily used as fuel oil.. .... or water heaters (JCW)...Spare Parts Drawing ........ ...5 m' to 60 Ill' heating surface with design pressures 16-or 30 BAR....Dimensional Drawing 1. 4........... . Appendix: ......... General Description ....... Spare Parts... 4 .... . 4 5 9..... ..... 5... .....be type with u-tubes.... 6... Connccting the Heat Exchanger .... .. . Dismantling and rcasscmbling of the tube section..... . 7........... ..... 3.... Operation ..

Installation surface The heater must be placed on a level and stable surface. Storage 3. 2. Vesta MX heat exchangers have been type approved by all major classification societies.1. 200 I. 4.2. Please refer to dimensional drawing for withdrawal space requirements.INSTRUCTIONS FOR SHELL & TUBE HEATER Safety valve.\TEI. Damp . 3. Regulating equipment for either oil . If the room is damp the heater must be isolated with bags of silica gel.3.2. 3. hence no further actions regarding storage are required before installation. Extended storage When heat exchangers are to be kept in storage for an extended period of time we recommend Castrol Rustilo Aqua 2 be used as protection against con-asian. Mounting and Installation The heat exchanger is designed for vertical or horizontal installations. To avoid damage it is recommended the heater be stored in the original packaging. The steam regulator (optional) must always be placed horizontally. inspection. In case of horizontal installation the steam inlet pipe and media outlet pipe must face upwards . Denmark APR. or replacement purposes.md humidity Store the heater only in a dry storage room before installation.Proj ect speciJicati oll deleted C. re\'. 3 .1 P\Preheater_"'a nuaLdoc 2/5 . If the heater is placed vertically the inlet and outlet tubes as well as the media inlet must be at the bottom and the heater must be equipped with an air escape screw at the top end. All heaters have been hydrostatic pressure tested before deli vet)'. and pressure gauge may be mounted on a standard outlet tube (optional). in stm clion manual for heat exchanger type VESTA™ MX Manufactured in Aalborg. 2. steam or water is optional.1. Sllace a1lommce When mounting the heater sufficient space must be allowed for withdrawal of the tube insert for cleaning. Hydrostatic testing All Aalborg Industries heat exchangers have undergone hydrostatic pressure testing bcfore delivery. The testing fluid used contains a certain amount of corrosion protection (Castrol Rustilo Aqua 2) . Installation Space Requirements 2. thenuometer. 3.

Initial adjnstments The safety valve must be adjusted to maximum desigu pressure or lower.Proj ect spcciticati oll del eted C:\TEMP\Prehe ater_ManuaLdoc 3/5 . Connecting the Heat Exchanger 5. Before start-up it is equally import aut that the heater is filled 100% with liquid and that all connecting pipes are thoroughly air-vented. Dellmark APR. Hentel'lllllin flange bolts tightening schedule (dl)' . 5. Instmclion manual for heat exchanger ty pe VESTA™ MX Manufactured in Aalborg.'alues) . and retighten all bolts according to schcdule.3. 6. Tighten all main flange bolts accordiug to below schedule. The steam trap is always to be placed horizontally. Opemte thc heater for one hour. stop. Set up the pipe connections and make sure that no forces are transferred to the heat exchanger. Both sides of the heater IIlUSt be carefully ventcd mId the circnits carefully inspected for leakage dnring the whole start-up period. Initial start-ull IMPORTANT: Fluid flow through the heat exchanger must be established before the heating mediulll is applied.INSTRUCTIONS FOR SHELL & TUBE HEATER The steam trap (optional) should be mounted as close to the condensate outlet as possible and somewhat lower.2. rev. 6. 2001 . NOTE: Remember to retighten the air ventilation plug. Place the bolts into the holes and tighten up.1. 3 .1. Operation 6. Place the heater on the surface and drill the holes for the foundation bolts. Commissioning Before start-up it is important to make sure that all connections are secnrely tightened. Preparation and pipe connection of the heat exchnnger Remove all plugs and cover flanges before connecting the heater. Make sure sand and other impurities are removed from all connections.Tl6 types No bolts MXIO MXI5 MX20 MX25 MX30 MX40 8 8 12 12 12 16 Size MI6 M20 M20 M24 M24 M27 Torque INml 50 83 79 137 186 245 Tightening schedule 1472583 6 14725836 1 7114 926 1251038 17114 9 2 6 12 5 10 3 8 17114 92 612 5 10 38 I 95 13 8 16 12 4 1573 II 6 14 10 2 Always usc a torque wrench when IIghtelllllg the flange bolts. 6.

However.3. The steam pressure applied to be as basis heater size calculation. even when fully emptied. Maintenance and Cleaning 8. Open the air escape valve and check for clogging. 8. heaters out of service should be protected against corrosion. Cleaning of tubes Cleaning of the tube system frolll the outside is cmTied ant after removing the tube insert using a sharp liquid jet (citric acid or water). Cleaning of the tube system fram the inside is carried out after removing the cover by flushing the tubes with e. 6.4. Henv)' contamination If the heater is heavily contaminated with carbon deposits Aalborg Industries recommends the heater chemically cleaned with a carbon remover. If the heater is out of sen'ice for an extended period of time . heaters are exposed to corrosion caused by water residues or condensation.in particular during winter seasons with frost . Correct layout of the condensate system avoids negati ve effect of counter pressure.g. The corrosion occurs if non-distilled or alkaline water remains in the heat exchanger. The output is fm1hermore subject to correct type of steam trap being used. Checking the safety valves Once every year the saCety valve must be checked for correct set point.doc .1. 8.it must be carefully emptied .Proj ect specitication deleted C:ITEM P\PreheateU. 7.2. Instmclioll manual for heal exchanger type VESTA™ MX 4/5 Mmmfactured in Aalborg. 8.4. Mter cleaning has been completed the heater must be flushed carefully with fi'esh water and allowed to dry afterwards. Denmark APR. Hence.INSTRUCTIONS FOR SHELL & TUBE HEATER Output The output of the heater is subject to the supply of dry saturated steam at thc inlet steam valve . Conservation during shut down periods Corrosion occurrences in shut down periods are mainly caused by oxygen. Note: The heat exchanger lllust be emptied before removing the tube section.\anual. 2001 . Check if any deposits have collected on the tubes. citric acid. 8. 3 . rc\'. Regular cleaning periods The heater shonld be cleaned regularly evelY six months by removing the tube insert or at any time there is a decrease in output not related to other causes.

doc . A pressure test should be carried out to prove tight joints. The tube flange has threaded holes for dismantling screws and for mounting eyebolts for lifting devices . Operate the heater for one hour. slop.Project specificat ion deleted C:\TEt.Tl6 types Size Tonl"e INmJ 50 83 79 137 186 245 Tightening schedule MXIO MXI5 MX20 MX25 MX30 MX40 8 8 12 12 12 16 MI6 M20 M20 M24 M24 M27 14725836 14725836 171149261251038 171149261 251038 1711492 6 1251038 I 95 J3 8 16 124 1573 11614 JO 2 Always use a lorque wrench when tIghtenll1g the flange bolts. 2001 . IMPORTANT: Flnid flow Ihrough the heat exchanger must be established before the heating medium is applied. Both sides of the heater must be carefully vented and the circuits carefully inspected for lcakage during the whole start-up pcriod.Ianual. and retighten all bolts according to schedule. The back end of the tube section is not fixed . Tighten all main flange bolts according to below schedule. Instmctioll manual for heal exchanger type VESTA™ MX 5 15 Manuf.'lClured in Anlborg. Dismantling and reassembling of the tube section The tube section is inserted into the heater and fastened tightly between the shell flange and the end flange. The steam connection for pJimmy steam must be dismantled before dismantling the tube section for inspection. Spare parts When ordering spare parts please state the serial number of the heat exchanger (located on the nameplate).INSTRUCTIONS FOR SHELL & TUBE HEATER 9. For spare parts and further infonnation please contact Aalborg Industries. Gasket surfaces are to be cleaned and protected against damage.lP\PreheateU. Note: Pressure testing to be carried out only with insert mounted in shell. Heatel'main flange bolts tightening schedule No bolts (dr~' ". cleaning.)' time the flange connection has been dismantled. Denmark APR. Ncw gaskets are to be fitted eve.\lues) .. 10. etc. re\'o3 .

Inspect the PUlis for signs of damage or excessive wear. B. Pull the bnndle from the shell. General This manual describes the procedure for replacing a tllbe bundle for the Vesta"! MX shell & tube heat exchanger.1. Loosen the nuts on the end flange and remove it. Mounting of the new tube bundle Before mounting.. special precautions may be needed. 2. and can be conducted by most crews without prior supervision. Remove old gaskets 2. If the tube bundle replacement is changed fonn the original design.doc 1/ 1 . Drain liquid from both sides of the heat exchanger. Disassembly of the heat exchanger The disassembly should be conducted according 2. 2. Remove the old gasket and unscrew the bolts from the tube sheet Ulld store with nuts and discs for installation of dIe new bundle.REPLACEMENT OF MX TUBE BUNDLE Replacement of MX tube bundle 1.·fanu alslDocumcnls\Word1 r.2. the bundle should be inspected for h'Ullsportation damage (bent tubes or bames). Remove the steam inlet assembly Disassemble the C & D flange joints and clear piping to make space for pulling of the bundle. to avoid that the bundle drops as it clears the shell flange. The two MI6 threads for expausion bolts in the tube shect can be used to loosen the tube sheet from the gasket face. C:\Documcnls and Scttingslhdu\Dcsktopll-. the replacement proccdure is rather straight forward . Isolate and drain the heat exchanger (0 (he following procedure: Shut down the heat exchanger and close (he isolation valves on nozzles A. in this case please refer to order specific instructions for the replacement. it is important to keep the bundle coaxial to the shell to avoid excessive pulling resistance. While pulling the bundle. C and D. Support the bundle with a strap or place a support under the bundle when pulling. 3.3. Remove the tube bundle Loosen the nuts on the shell side of the main bolts.·IX tube bundle replaccmcnl. Since the heat exchanger is of the U-tube type. Remove the dividing ring.

Usually there will be a yellow marking on the rim of the tube sheet.2. make sure that the bundle is oriented according to the shell side nozzles. Mounting of the stcam inlet assembly 3. Orientation of the bllndle Before mounting.JX tube bundle repinccmcnl.3. the flow of the cold fluid shollld be established before the heating media is applied. 4. Tighten the bolts according to the above table. Re-commissioning of the heat exchanger When re-commissioning the heat exchanger. The movement must be coaxial to avoid excessive load on the barnes. Reassemble the flange connections C & D with new gaskets. Operate the heat exchanger for one hour and inspect for signs of leakage. A test pnessure of 24 bar(g) is the maximum allowed pnessure in cold condition for the Vesta™ MT T16 series. which indicates "up" to facilitate COlTeet orientation. Vent the heat exchanger and apply pressure to test for tighbless. Keeping the orientation. Re-tighten the bolts according to the above schedule. bolts MXIO 8 MXI5 8 MX20 12 MX25 12 MX30 12 MX40 16 flange bolts tightening schedule (dry bolts) T 16 type TighteninQ schedule Size Toroue fNml 1472583 6 MI6 50 1472583 6 83 M20 I 7 11492 6 125 10 38 M20 79 I 7 11492 6 125 \0 38 M24 137 1711492 6 125 103 8 186 M24 19513816124 15731161410 2 M27 245 Always use a torque wrench when tightening the flange bolts. Fit new gaskets to the dividing ring and place it on the blbe sheet face.cloc 2/3 . Mount the discs and nuts on the shell side and tighten according to below table: Heat exchanger main No.REPLACEMENT OF MX TUBE BUNDLE 3. Vent the blbe side of the heat exchanger and apply test pressure for tightness testing. gently slide the bundle into the shell. 3. C:\Documents and Scllin gs\hdu\Desklopll\'lanu3\s\Documcnts\Word\l-.1. Fit the end flange wi th nozzles C & D and mount discs and nuts on the bolts. Mounting of the bundle Place the bolts in the thneaded holes in the tube sheet and fit a new gasket on the shell face (or slip over the blllldle). The first barne mllst have the cut off side on the opposite side of the first nozzle.

.1anulllsIDocurncnts\Word\MX tube bundle replacemenl.doc 3 /3 .REPLACEMENT OF MX TUBE BUNDLE Appendix: -+.-1 p- C:\Documenls lind Seltings\hdu\DesklopIJ.

.

vacuum-brazed with a pure copper or Table 1: Examples of CBEs with various material and design pressures CBE Calo ories Sl:aooard CSEs High Pressure CBEs All-slam~ss Donomlnatlon B25Hfl P·SC-S 62SHfl P-SC-H B25HllP-SN-S B25Hl lP-MC-S Ex lanatlon S25 W4h stainless sleet pla~e$ brtu:cd ".i lh n'C~eI8Uoy. ... ". e . This CBE hes a cross-flow configuration. L). The cover plate packages consist of scaling plates. S...g . the B60.. The standard malerials are stainless sleel.g. 625 with staln~s l>1eel plates brucd . . H. Counter-carrent flow _1p. The outer citcuit has a slighUy tower pressure drop as it contains one more channel.g. nickel-based filter. Material Combinations There are different types of CBE product categories depending on material combinations and design pressures.. the thermal characteris tics of the CBE can be modified .. The design creates a heat exd1<lnger that consists of 1'0'10 sepa rate circuits..4401 or 2343).101 p.v conligurations: co·current or countercurrent. Plate maw/inl e.~ . C.. M.. Some CBEs have a blind ring for the purpose of sealing off Ule space be tween the channel plate and the cover plate. . In some CBEs the blind rings are Integrated in the cover plate and firsVlasl channel plate s. .1o . ~or parallel.g: S. of AISI 316 type (1.. refrigerants (e . Slaodard pressure rating. Please note that if natural refrigerants (e .XX. Note that pOr1s F1 and F4 make up the ou ter circuit and ports F2 and F3 the inner circui t. nlcJ\el aUoy j For cross-f1owCBEs. pressure ratings and functions. F4) is the ouler clrcuit .'10 C"''' . with Ihe type and size of CBE and its respective pressure rating. S..: S. there are two differenl f1o'. rol z.. FLOW CONFIGURATIONS The fluids can pass through the heat exchanger in different ways.. We define them as standard CBEs. During the vacuum·bmzing process. The chevrons can be obtuse (creaUng a high theta plale. By mixing h:gh and low theta plates. The connections can be customized to meet specific markel and application requirements . 025 wah Mo·slC()1 plates brlllCd with copper. .. copper. standard pressure. blind rings and cover plates.g. However in a condenser it is very important Ihat the gas inlet is por1 F1 and the ouUe t F4 . e ..5001 lM . Nole Ihe ofderin which they appear. Paris P1/P21P3IP4 are situated on the back. you get the same result wilh these two different installations. Plates: Ports F11F21F31F4 are situated on the front of the heat exchanger.:.hl .. Either of an adhesive sticker type or embossed in the cover plate . instead of the parallet flow normally found in CBEs . F3) is the inner circui t and the fight side (POri F2. glycol mixtures (ethylene and propylene glycol). N.. CBEs Me-sleel CSEs The fronl plale of SWEP's CBE is marl<ed with an arrow.. water (not seawater). or high pressure rating. vacuumbrazed wilh a pure copper fi ller.. For demanding applications.g : C.. Typical examples are: synthetic or mineral oil.. stainless steel: M. or a nickel-based filler.g. flow CBEs. The basic materials of construction indicate the type of fluids that SWEP's CBEs can be used w ith . 625 . them are two types of ptat es which are combinable in onty one way..ith stainless slccl platos bra~C<I wdh copper. organic solvents. the left side (Port F1 .g .~. The material and pressure denominations are shown below. P2 CBE Plafos and Channel Typ es Some CBEs are availab!e wilh different types of channel plates where Ihe herringbone pallem varies. B35Hx40/1p. Catbon steel can be used to some extent. High pre ssuro faling._ ~. Slarodard pressure. a brazed joint is formed alevery conlacl point between tl'lO plates. . a stainless sleel with a higher content of molybdenum... Mo-steel . 1.d~ Sealing plales are used to seal off the space between the cover plale and the firs l andlasl channel plate . for certain types of connections. CBEs with nickel -based brazing malerial must be used. SlarldilN prossuN raling.Pres'Jure rat ing e. high pressure Orllze material o. N.. The purpose of this marker is to indicate the front side of the CBE and the location of Ule inner and oulet cirroits/channels . c. The number of cover plates varies. H) oracule (creating a low thela plate. Mo-steeJ CBEs and High·pressure CBEs. ammonia) are employed. HCFC). For example one can have a CBE wi th the same pressure drop on both sides despite different flow rates. H L Channels. "'..ilh copper.I"" C<n . H L M(MH&ML) CONSTRUCTION The CBE is in principle built up by a plate package of corruga te d channel plates between front and rear cover-plate packages.... t When using the 860 exchanger in single-phase applications. With the arrow pointing up. there are s(lveral different types of Compact Brazed Heat Exchangers (CBEs). the plates can be made of SMO 254.. AlIstainless CBEs.INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR CBEs GENERAL INFORMATION Depending on material combinations..X H. There are CBEs availab!e for standard pressure rating. The standard plate malerials are stainless steel.

:~: " Some connections have an extemal heel. waler-to-waler or water·to-oil.. inslall vibration absorbers. the orientation of the heat exchanger becomes very imperial'll In two·phase applications. Sealing surface s. i:lS Uley notalways are compatible. USA. If there is a risk of this.g.n. Dual·Circuit CBE (. Canadian Standard Association (CSA) Japan.Different versions available There a re several different versions of the channel plate packages. -:I'l 15. e. American Bureau of Shipping (ABS). Slipportod from the bottom 2.'tards. Victuafic.H l'. NPT and ISO 7/1. Shea' metal bracket (rubber ilJsurf bef>'1cen bracket and exchallger) 3. i. The purpose of the heel is to simplify the pressure and leakage tesling of the CBE in production ..­ I'. P. Italy For operating conditions concerning the European approval PED.. maximum operating pressure. · C( ' . . II is also suggested Ihat e..i h) l ed' (1 <u<>1. a rubber mounting strip should be used as a buffer between the CBE and the mounting clamp. For more details on the respective approvals.g . e . For delails. J1 ]~ Pm SK II<"p '[ N.g ." N-~ ~ j l ~ (. DESIGN CONDITIONS AND APPROVALS The standard pressure rating lorSWEPCBEs. the mounting direction has little or no effect on the performance of the heat e)(changer. 2 3 4 5 Dual-ovor-Two-Pass CBE (JD2P) 1. Norway.Ht<HlttO heHt the light interni:ltion(:ll 01 lowl stanu(:Ilu of colllltlction. However.g . However. Rolalock. Regislro Italiano Navale (RINA).W~"" ~ Threaded connections Ex/emally Threaded Connections (Male) Some connections are equipped with a specia l plastiC cap to protect the threads and sealing surface of the connection and to prevent dirt and dust from entering the CBE. Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) SWEP also has design approvals. SWEP's standard maximum operating temperature is 22S"C (437"F) for copper-brazed CBEs. The High Pressure Gas Safely Institute of Japan (KHK) USA. SAE flanges. SWEP's CBEs should be mounted vertically.J ~4 [.e.g.. Several mounting suggestions for SWEP CBEs are shown below.' THS '. Tabie A . Rolalock Connections Victualic Connee/ions Welding Connoctions Flanges of SAE Type SAE D-Ring Connections LABELING SYSTEM AND OPERATING CONDITIONS AU CBEs are equipped wilh an adhesive label which includes vital information about the unit.. Compacfianges./..~Il1. a process whiCh gives a very strong seal between the conneclion and the cover plate. state the maximum operating temperature and pressure as per the respective approving orga nizalion. type of heat exchanger (which indicates the basic CBE execution and male rial combination) and SWEP's item number. there are a lot of options available for the connections.l~f Vl> 31 j l~ \'Ulr:E. For large connecUon diameters. CONNECTIONS All connections are brazed to the heat exchanger in the general vacuum brazing cycle. different versions and locatJons. but in two· phase applicallons.01 . please see Appendix. in different versions and locations. arc available on the CBEs as an option .ID) Two-Pass CBE (.. threaded connections and welding connec tions.nz~ SlI1.II"(l"~l19 10)11/:.1P "(.ut'. Bar-code serial numoor Infornally Threaded Connrxtions (Femalo) of Standard Type Intemally Threaded Connoctions (Female) with a Hexagonal Exterior 2001171520001 The engraved Serial Number provides information about where and when the CBE was produced. which corrcsponds to two units connected in series. Use a screwdriver.£?~ ~. e . Equippod with moul/ling stud bolls Oil tho froot or back cnvor plato 5. please check the label and other technical documentatJon. from: lIoyds Register.. Support legs am available for somo CBEs ForsmallerCBEs it is also possible to mount the unit by simply suspending it from the pipe sJconnections. we advise you to use an expanding device in the pipeline . Great Britain. Depending on the application . ri~ I'.g. Crossbar and bolts (rubber insert between the crossbar and exc/langor) 4. Underwriters l aboratories (Ul) Europe. 4S0 psi) . Korean Register of Shipping (KR). 1\ is also important thai no vibrations are transferred to the heal exthanger. Det Norske Veritas (DNV). please contact SWEP. Below are a couple of examples. SWEP's CBEs are approved by a number of independent bodies. The label also indudes the serial number which is described below. e .:t. It is i !l1~I(.1 MPa. pliers orkflife. A~~t o ''' _I ' Threaded connections can be female or male of well·known slandards such as. This plastic cap should be removed with care. and 350' C (GSO' F) for AU-stainless CBEs (nickel·based filler). there is a possibility to iflCfease the pressure if the temperature is reduced . In sing~e·phase applicaUons. MOUNTING Never expose the unit to pulsations or excessive cyclic pressure or temperature changes .'~.c. is 31 bar(3 . e. in order rIOt to damage the thread. SU .. lake care nollo join the counterpart with such force that the connection is damaged. Korea.. The exteri or can also be hexagonal which is shown below.(·:. Mounting stud bo·ts.J2P). Canada. The Operating Conditions. sealing surtdce or any other part of the connection. ISO·G. lllilh the arrowon the front plate pointing up'. as temperature and pressure are closely coupled .I"~ '~"-.

in different versions and locations. F2 ~ + •' - f\ F3 Allowable Connection Loads for Pipe Assembly Conditions Two-PhaseApplications In all refrigerant applicatlons it is very importa nt that every refrigerant channel is surrounded bya water/brine channel on both sides. This is because the righi-hand side of the heat exchanger contains one channel more than the lefl-hand side.'y. i. The pipe diameter between the expansion valve and the GBE should be the same as the diameter of the refrigerant liquid line. and thereby its property makes the flux potentially very aggressive . the circui t with the highest temperature and/or pressure should be connected on the left side of the heat exchanger when the arrow is pointing upwards. so no flux should be allowed to enter the CBE.5 Allowable Loads for Stud Bolt Assembly Conditions Mounting stud bolts. The particles could otherwise b!ock Ihe channels. Normally. various types of insulation boxes can be used.y.5 18 41 255 390 1350 40 138. The purpose of the distribuUon device is to evenly dislribute the refrigerant in the channel. 45% silver. Armaflex or equivalent which also can be supplied by SWEP. whereas thc bulb should be mounted about 500 mm from the vaporized refrigerant outlel connection.- ShearForce. the evaporation temperature will drop. 650'C (1200·F). causing bad performance.5 155 t 3. Le. in a typical water-to-water application. with the risk of freezing and very bad perform ance. 45% silver solder.Soldering Connections The soldering connections (sweat connections) are in principie designed for pipes with dimensions in mm or inches. For V-type CBEs. Point the flame towards the piping and braze at max. Welding Procedure Protect the unit frOm excessive heating by: a) usingawet clotharoundtheconnection b) making a chamfer on the joining tube and connection edges as shown Use TIG or MIG/MAG weldmg When uSing electrical welding CirCUits. Too much heat could change the material structure resulting in internal or external leakage at the connection. Apply chloride flux with a brush.9 10. Expansion Valves The expansion valve should be placed close to the inlet connection. The refrigerant liquid should be connected to the lower left connec tion (F3) and Ihe refrigerant gas outlet to the upper left connection (F1). Soldering Procedure Degrease and polish the surfaces. 10 the first and last channel instead of waterlb rine. filler.5 " 148 413.1 0. Table 3:Allowable loads for different stud bolt assembly conditions studBott M6 Olameler. condensers or district heating applications. Insulation for Heating Applications For heating applications. INSULATIONS Insulation for Refrigerant Applications CBE insulation is recommended for evaporators.5 73 " 1224 1142 2. l'Ie recommend that a strainer with a size of 16·20 mesh (number of openings per inch) is installed before the exchanger . Table 2: Allowable connection loads for different pipe assembly conditions PIpe Size )1. Ft (kN) (kp) BenctmgMomenl.5 44.5 16. e. Welding Connections Welding is only recommended on specially designed welding connections All SWEP's welding connedions are executed wilh a 30' Chamfer on top of the connection. 3. Mt(NOl) M8 M12 3 7 18 .75 mm .dk(Olm) 5.g. The measurement in mm corresporlds to the external diameter of the connection INSTALLATION OF CBEs IN DIFFERENT APPLICATIONS Single-Phase Applications Normally. are available on the CBEs as an optlon. not to the back of the plate package.5 255 408 663 969 1377 1836 4181 2" 20 20 45 2 2 4.'1 soldering temperature and high mOistening and fluidity properties.5 11. The maximum allowable connection loads given below are valid for low cycle fatigue. the pressure drop in the internal distribution system must be added to the pressure drop in Ihe expansion valve to arrive at the tolal pressure drop. This type of so~der has a relatively 10'. selecting the next larger size valve will give satisfactory performance. Fs (kN) (kp) 357 TensionFo{ce.5 4 6. Under normal soldering conditions (no vacuum). For example.5 16 27 35. cold water inlet F-t . The working temperature range defines which Insulation is recommerlded. Do not weld on pipes on olher types of connections.. the hot water inlet in connection F1.5 21. Some of SWEP's soldering connections are universal. use extruded inSUlation sheets.5 9 16 35 115 155 265 350 600 1450 4050 3. fit bolh the mm and inch pipes.e. ouUet F2. such as Ihe 28U which fits both Ihe 1 118' and 28 . the Iwo fluids are connected in a counter-current flow. Soldering ffux is used in order to remove oxides from the metal surface. SWEP GBEs used as condensers or evaporators should always be fitled with adequate connections on the refrigerant side. Because of this we recommend that all soldering is made with silver solder containing min. Avoid internal oxidatlon. i. Inlernal oxidation can be reduced bya small nitrogen How through the unrt . The water/brine circuit inlet should be connected to the upper right connection (F2) and Ihe outlet to the lower right connection (F4). The maximum allowable load on the stud bolls during assembJyare stated beJow.5 61 t479 1683 2193 4538 7444 87.e. ctc.5 9. it is very important to use the correct amount of flux. e. Too much might lead to severe corrosion. outlet F3. Normally the refrigerant side must be connected to the lefl~hand side and the water/brine circu it to the righthand of the CBE. These are denominated xxU.Mt (Nm) (kpm) Evaporators. Mb (Nm) (kpm) Torque.- 1 Yo" IW 2- 2W 4' 112 14. These stud bolts are welded to the unit. If high cycle fatigue is involved special analysis should bemade. and the hot medium is thus surrounded by the co~d medium to prevent heat loss.3 TamllonFor(l6. ConsequenUy. SWEP can supply some of these insulation types as optional accessories .04 inch). normally port F3. by protecting the inside of the refrigerant side with Nz gas.5 2. Insert the copper lube inlo the conneclion and braze with min. All CBEs are vacuum-brazed with either a pure copper filler or a nickel-based STRAINERS If any of the media contains particles larger than 1 mm (0. the temperature should not exceed 800'C (1470'F). increased pressure drop and risk of freez ing.5 . V· Type CBEs The V-type GBEs type are equipped with a special distribution device at the refrigerant inlet. For refrigeration.FtIN) 1500 2700 6000 Torqu9. If the re frigemnt is incorredly connected. The measurements correspond to the intern~1 diameter of Ihe connedions . connect the ground terminal to the joining tube.

." .'0 1..$."~ o..~ ~ ~ •. e....". ." 31/)' .....~... SE-261 22 Landskrona.... . ' . .~' '" . 011 HP . S\J\Er1~111r. .'0 .IIJ D'll •• •• ".. Use a tank with weak acid. However........ .....~ .. ".. maintenance and operating conditions done in conformance with this manual.' . .I Q..3)) ~ om .. '" ..' '" .'). ly/Yr~ •• = ~ . 451H llllo\ ':)"10 )It)! ' ''-'0 n 'l S . .... Tnble A: Opefllling C<!ndilions for PE 0 sppro... . = "".11 ) " " ....O» ' . ~o To"" 2t .... =. ~ [!o'I '". After use.. 15 9..~. if lhe exchanger is fre.".. .~ 3Vll 1. . WARRANTY SWEP offers a 12·month warranty from Ihe date of instaiJation. .~ . . ~..~.. I!S' . ~' . .. . ~. F3...I." ."~ O. . ." o"'u ...lO Q. ". ". OW' . . .. 17 T..J!!<l1 CLEANING OF THE CBEs Thanks to the normally very high degree ofturbulence in CBEs there is a self·cleaning effect in the channels .. 5% phospho· ric acid or. '00 '00 " " " " " " " " " " " " • " " " " " " " " " " '" '00 ". . Avoid "pump ·dewn" function.") o.. 'W '!5' .. ...po2!iN '.. •• 4 00U •. Pump the cleMing liquid through Iheexchanger.. du ring and after compressoroperalion. 1""...~~..... in some applications the fouling tendency can be very h:9h. ..~ .") Q..m O. 16 mesh (see previous chapter on Strainers).~2!i '''''' l~to 1.~~ 316' . When starting up a system. .2l. .. ...... .m.poll I ..'O . .. .11) ~ ~~ O.. The water/brine circuit inlet should be connected to the lower right COMection.~ 0.Freezing Protection a) b) c) d) e) Usea fi lter< 1 mm..2' ~ f).~. ."". . .«.. . ... .. . ." . m.. ~.....m T""'~ I ' I".~.5 times the normal How rate....~ ."". = = = 'fi...m' 31t)! 31.. . 1~~' "" . . . .. •• •• •• •• olo'<S 150')5 1!rI~ ".!S' '" ........ . .1251'0 ".. ..cloI\ <~. and the outlet to the upper righ t connec tion. . . Fl..<lSHP 1 . ...2)fIJ. A solution of 1·2% sodium hydroxide (NaOH}or sodium bicarbonate (NaHC01 before the lasl rinse l ensures that all aCid is neutralized..w '" '" . "" O.. •• ."~ D.".. .. ~. ... ~~ ". . wait a moment before slarlinglhe condenser (or have reduced flow through it}.net . = ~ ~ ~ ~. .. '00 Ml5 ".w '~S' 'w .... ' ''''' I..?oo><p W<l 311250') 1 l lllo\ . ~. Sweden Fax +46 418 292 95 Internet: www. Ref." .." ... . the cleaning solution flow rate should be a minimum of 1. '&") ...'0 T.ed units . . . '" '" . ~..'0 1 4'" ~ 5/0.')1 ~'llollll ' lo')I. /fqi.. o~.= "" .l\~ . .... For approved units Ihe data on the lable must oot be exceeded al any circumstances.= ." . ~. . but in no case longer than 15 months from the dale of delivery.. when using extremely hard water at high temperatures . 12 . . .I) H' 11f"" 100 T".Q. J6 SI.". . 116' 1~~ ' \~. In such cases it is always possible to clean Ihe exchanger by Circulating a cleaning liquid (CIP· Cleaning In Place).·10 .*. O.19. 1...." .. 2ft t~ HP .~. .-" 1r. DISCLAIMER SWEP's CBE periomlance is based on installation..-"' . ...\IJ 0.:JJ Q..2~<..~ ?1£11 <l. F4 .oP'UI r".. Use a freeze protection thermostat and How swilch 10 guarantee a constant wilter flow before. /5115 ~..OIl I . ~.. .. SWEP cannot assume any liability for CBEs that do not meet these criteria. ".'O . . 1.w = .v 2 ~I A DOUER ) COMPANY Phone +46418 40 04 00 SWEP INTERNATIONAL AS Box 105.. . '" .. .CiSI ~ ~ O~ ... and the condensate to the lower le ft connecLon. ' lo·.'IS I.\\) 0.~' IW . . please cons{ll/ SWEP's tochnical informalion oryol/flowl SWEPcomp[JlJY· APPENDIX CIP soilIfiollS in A number of SWEP's CBEs are approved by the European approval PED (Pressure Equipment Diredive).5CI 9.0>12"" 1. .. iii """ IS 1... ZI Sl... .~.... 'W '~S' ~ ..OO (J'.. For details about operaUng conditions forSWEP's PED approved heat exchangers. . Q. . Forfurrherinformation.. Foroplimum cleaning.l· 4 !o"'~ .. !oJ 1. .. ... Condensers The refrigerant (gas) should be connected to the upper left conn· ection..'eol ~~.*.!o".O X> 0. '" ~ " " " • " " '" "..m -..'0 ."S...~ llllo\ lIt)! lIllo' lV)1 ~.g....... .= .net E-mail:info@swep.IH' llfOOll I . I ~HP l....l><' 7J t~ 1.... 31. 45 9. ."INI "". .. 0.. F2.....-" 9. U l . preferably in a back·flush mode... '" •. For tough instal lations we recommend factory·installed CIP connections/valves for easy maintenance. do not forget to rinse the heat exchanger carefully with clean water....swep... 3\61 lI'n . ~. 2SHP ' . The heat exchangers are designed for use with fluids according to groupe1 inAFS 1999:4." . The warranty covers only manufacturing and malerialdefects. 5% oxalic acid. . . ..~. m . '" no '" .. ~~ o.. WI! Jl1l1 '".7l.....01+ ' _ ' J . . 31/)...\1Q ... ~= "" "" "" O... ...n1 . . quently cleaned.W.1~ .. IW . Clean at regular inlervals For further information about cleaning of the CBEs.:l .. ~ ol~ •. please see TableA.. ..2301 m.~~ . please consul! SWEP's CIP infomlation or your local SWEP company.'0 1. Use an antifreeze when the evaporabon temperature is close to liquid· side freezing.

Wes tfali a Sep arat or Min eral oil Systems GmbH Mechan ical Separat ion Division 8 Valve s.." Type RK 41 Hand Shut.2008 .01 .off Valve Hand -Absperrventi l Type FABA Straig ht Throu gh Contr ol Valve ourchgangs-Stel lventi I Type 440-44 1 Electr ic Actua tor Elektrischer Antrie b Solen oid Valve Magne tventi l Type 255. 2-way Kugel hahn.und Entluf tungsa utoma t 8.1 Valve s Ventil e Comp act Ball Valve .. Fittin gs and Asse mbly Venti Ie. Arma turen und Zube hor 8. 2/2-w ay Safet y Valve Sicherheitsventil Autom atic Air Vent Be.2 -Wege Type DKA . Type NKA ...2 Other Parts Sonstige Teile Steam Trap Kondensatableiter Type FT-14 A compa ny of GEA Group Power Plant EI Salvad or 140256 8900_2 71 VBU 118. 3-way Komp aktkug elhahn . Non Retur n Valve Ruckschlagventil Type MR 1f..opera ted Handb etatig t Limit Switc h Endlagenschalter Ball Valve .3-We ge Hand.

.

.Handbetriebene Kompaktkugelhahne Compact ball valve DEUTSCH ENGLISCH Betriebs.. ElitlelJeachten·$ie d..(:ejsan()\lVedfor $killed empll)ye~sonly: .ii •. ••. •.fijhrtwerden"i • .. ... I Spart. .. .... ·. . ..•·• . .CcCiC . .valve..dW!lrtungQarfn...) . . . .~eforejnsl~uing~nq~ainlaini6gyour. ••• DJeIMI!lllalionun.•.. . .lyadvices! .•... .·. ·i.!ldurohge. . . . I Schafft Mehrwert. .ie in dieserAnleltllng ayfgefUhrtenSiqherheit~hil1wejse!.. . .· Steuert.... .. . .. ..W!lrtllng~!lIMitl!l1g$orlJfcillig Cgurph.ei!teJesel1$iellQrlnsl!lllationlhre:rArm~lllrdieseEl~lriebs"und •..i .. ~ll1s.•.tan!lliQnandmaintaran.. .. .readlhism~n~al~atefully. Ple~se payatlenliPlltothll safe.·..lJrgqfchqu!llifi~erl~~ Person!. und Wartungsanleitung Installation and Maintenance ·~. . \!.•.

lsofil\\i1h6ulv.. AnfragenriGhlenShlbiUe sehriftliCh an MlrArmaturen GmllH Inqustrlelltr.par.....auch die derOberse". .....n~erUngel)sin~vofuehalte~ .i AUfllge:Apru ~....Mrf. . ' Diese~ Hendbuchdarf niehl.qitigW:April...Armaturen GmbH. Th~ propertyn~h!$Qfaflte>ds aQ~p"hJres~ie~ubjooJ JoMir-'lfll1arurenGfTIbHHisnotallo~dIOchange()r dupliiat~ eVen. vervietfaltigt oder verbreitelwllrden. sind voibehallell .... auch nichl in AuszOgen.rjlle~perIl'i8sionW"do noI assumefesllonsibilily for correctness aBel ir)legJityColou~of.hren) ohne. Errors?xceptedregardingprinl and tec~nical change~. . .urg.' origkial products dan <liffer rromjmages .· ..inirgendein~r Form (Druck.9 32602Vlo..40Q5Heyision1.fi. Folo~opie. f....tho -2- .B~VlSl()r)1 E. ..schriftliche Zustimmung reprodlI1ierl oderunletVerwemlung' eteklroniscl]er Sysleme verarbcllel. MkrofilmoderweHeie Ve...BW-Komp-KH-H-FI-05-01 ©2005 ..•.. Vlotho Aile RechteanTaxlen und Bildern. ..

BW-Komp-KH-H-FI-05-01 Inhaltsverzeichnis Sefte Ipage OJ ~ Zu dieser Anleitung This manual Abkurzllngen lind Symbole SIJoltcuts and symbols 4 4 Leistungsbeschreibung Specification of setvice BestimmlingsgemaBe Verwendung Intended usage Lagerllng. disposal Allgemeine Einsatzbedingllngen Tews of general appfcalion 5 5 5 5 ~ '&"d. transpotl. Transport. Geriitebeschreibung Device description Wartllng Maintenance 6 6 ~ Inbetriebnahme und Wartung Acticity description Installation lind Inbetriebnahme Installation 7 7 -3- .> . Entsorgung Storage.

die dem technischen Forlschritt dienen. die Annatur fachgerecht zu installieren und zu warten. -t1:~.>. Aktuelle Infonnationen zulhrem Produkt kiinnen Sie jederzeit unter www. Diese Anleitung unterliegt nicht der Revisionierung und stellt lediglich den zum Zeitpunkt des Drucks aktuellen Informationsstand der MIT Armaturen GmbH dar. Abkiirzungen und Symbole OJ £1 [i] -4- Gt1 ~ Achtung! Bitte lesen! Werkzeug notwendig Zu Ihrer Infonnation Verletzungsgefahr! Betriebsstoff notwendig ~ ~ ~ ~ .· Achtung! Heil1.systemannaturen.ig liber aktualisierte Versionen dieser Anleitung zu infonnieren. Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein. Es wird vorausgesetzt. Aktuelle Dokumentation im Internet Wir bitten Sie. informieren Sie bille Ihren zustandigen Kundenbetreuer beiMIT. Die Anleitung richtet sich an technisch qualifiziertes Personal. sich regelmiil1.e Oberlliiche! Vorsicht! Spannung Dokumente beachten Hinweis auf Anleitung . vor.de abnlfen Giiltigkeit der Anleitung MIT Armaturen behiilt sich Anderungen an der Armatur sowie Erweiterungen und Anderungen der vorliegenden Anleitung.DEUTSCH BW-Komp-KH-H-FI-05-01 Zu dieser Anleitung Ziel der Anleitung Die vortiegenden Infonnationen enniiglichen es Ihnen. dass bestimmtes Fachvokabular verstanden wird und dass technische Zeichnungen gelesen werden kiinnen.

Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten. bzw. andernfalls gilt die Ware als genehmigt. Warenmangel oder Abweichungen der Menge mUssen spatestens 7 Tage nach Erhalt der Ware schriftlich angezeigt werden. Automatisierle Armaturen bedUrfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei der Inbetriebnahme! Diese Gerate kennen im Werk nur unter Weikstaltbedingungen getestet und eingestellt werden. Wir empfehlen.d. nachjustiert werden! Zusalzliche Wegschalter oder andere elektrische Gerate zur SteliungsrUckmeldung ebenfalls auf richtige Justierung ilbelllrUfen! -5- . Erst nach Betatigung des Kugelhahns wird das Nenndrehmoment wieder erreicht. Transport. NFC17. Verteilen und Mischen neutraler gasfdrmiger und fliissiger Medien. dass die Gerate trocken und schmulzfrei untergebracht werden. Sicherheitsstellungen sollten gezielt simuliert und getestet werden.BW-Komp-KH-H-FI-05-01 DEUTSCH Leistungsbeschreibung 8estimmungsgemiiBe Verwendung Kompaktkugelhahne derBaureihen KFA16.R. um die Gerate vor Verunreinigungen zu schOlzen.bilte informieren Sie uns unverzUglich wenn die Ware bereits mit beschadigter Verpackung bei Ihnen eintriftl! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmiltelbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und sollte eine PrUfung der technischen Parameter und eine SichtprUfung beinhalten. NFD17 und SFA20. Entsorgung MIT-Produkte sind i. der MIT Armaturen GmbH sind zlim Einsatz im industriellen Bereich geeignet. Die Endlagen (offenlgeschlossen) mUssen UberprUft und ggf. andernfalls erlischt der Gewahrleistungsanspruchl Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen Rohrleitungen sollten vor Einbau. diese Umverpackung erst kurz vor Montagebeginn zu entfernen. lange lagerzeiten konnen eine ErhOhung des losbrechmomentes zu Folge haben. NFA13. Auf die Handhabung beim Transport kennen wir jedoch nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss nehmen . KFA23. KFA19. Verdeckte Mangel sind unverzuglich nach Entdeckung zu rUgen. Hineinfiihren von Korperteilen und Gegenstiinden in den Kugelhahn kann zu schweren Verletzungen filhren und sollte unbedingt vermieden werden! Lagerung. spatestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchgespUlt werden. Die Gehause-und Dichtmaterialien miissen flir das eingesetzte Medium lind den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein. durch Umverpackungen vor aufleren EinflOssen wie Feuchtigkeit oder Schmulz geschUIzt. Die ArmaRlren ermoglichen das Absperren.

r SitzdiChlllng a.AnSchlag 12 13 Wartung Kompaktkugelhahne konnen nur In qualifizierten Fachbetrieben gewartet und in stand gesetzt werden.Gehause<lichtung 11. Stopfbuclisr>ackung 6.J\nlalffl"ing 10 11 15. 9.()'-Ring« 1$. H!Jndhl)pelmtttern 3.Kugei .Kotper .Spindel.. Ufsache Abhilfe SlopfblXOhsmulter Slopfbuchsmulter nach qelosl ziehen Kugel durch Bilte selzen Sie sich nil MedlumiSchmulz in ihrem Serv~eparlner in den Leiiungen Verbindunq verschlissen Undlchligkeil Kugelhahn Schwergangig Bilte selzen Sie sich mil Verschmulzung / Ihrem Serviceparlner in Verschleiss der Kugel Verblnduna -6- . I-landhebel 2.. 1.·.Gehausevel'Schtau~ling 9 14.DEUTSCH BW-Komp-KH-H-FI-05-01 Geratebeschreibung 1.Qruckring 5. da die Montage Sonderwerkzeuge erfordertl Foigende Probleme ktinnen auftreten: Fehlef Undichligkeil MOQI. Tellerfedem ~.2. SUzdlChtung 10.

dass die Ausrichtung der Bohrungen mit der gewiinschten Einbaulage des Kugelhahnes iibereinstimmen muss! Das Kugelhahngehause mit den Flanschdichtungen vorsichtig zwischen die zuvor angebrachten Flansche schieben. Stiftschrauben in das Kugelhahngehause einschrauben und die Flansche mit passenden Muttem kreuzweise fest anziehen. Bille achten Sie darauf. dass das verwendete Dichtmittel fiir das Durchlfuss-Medium geeignet ist! Die Flanschbohrungen dllrch drehen des Kugelhahnes zueinander ausrichten. Missbrauchen Sie bei der Montage den Handhebel nicht als Hebel! Bitte beachten Sie schon vor dem anschweill.BW-Komp-KH-H-FI-05-01 DEUTSCH Tiitigkeitsbeschreibung Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines Kompaktkugelhahns mit Flansch Der Einbau darf nur in drucklosem Zustand erfolgen.en der Flansche. -7- .

. Please read documents Hint to the manual part. This manual is not audited and represents only the current information of MIT at the time of pressure. Validity of the manual We hereby declare that we reserve our right to modify both the manual and the valve if necessary for technical advancement. For your information Attention! Risk of injury! Supply items needed! A . We assume that you are familiar with the common valve tenninology and that you can read technical documents.~~ -'" ~ Oangerl Hot surface! Oangerl Voltage.)/.systemarmaturen.de. Shortcuts and symbols IT] [£] -4- ~ ~ Attention! Please read carefully Tools necessary 0S: ~ ~ 1.ENGLISH BW-Komp-KH-H-FI-05-01 This manual Intention of this manual This infonnation enables you to install and maintain your valve. This manual is for skilled employees only. If you don't meet these expectations please inform your MIT customer advisor! Latest documentation in the internet Please check regularly for updated versions of this document. You can get current infonnation of your product at any time in the internet: www.

This can cause heavy injuries and should be absolutely avoided! Storage. After a long period of storage the breakaway torque may increase. disposal MIT-products are protected by packing against external influences such as humidity or dirt. After opening and closing the ball valve manually for one time the rated breakaway torque can be reached again. The housing and sealing compounds must be suitable for the assigned medium and temperature range. Automated valves need a special attention in time of initial operation! These devices can be tested at MIT only under workshop cond~ions. Security pos~ions should be simulated and tested straight. Subsequent complains can not be excepted. NFC17. made by MIT Armaturen GmbH are suitable for the producing industries. We can only take influence on the transport process with your assistance .please infonn us immediately if the commodity arrives with damaged packing! Examination of technical parameters and a visual product check should take place emidiately after delivery. The valves makes possible to distribute and mix neutral gaseously and neutral liquid media.BW-Komp-KH-H-FI-05-01 ENGLISH Specification of service Intended usage Compact ball valves ofthe type KFA16. NFA13. During storage make sure that the devices are accommodated dry and dirt-free. -5- . The final positions must be checked(openedlclosed) and be preadjusted if necessary! Additional switches or other electric devices to the position feedback must be likewise checked for correct alignment. KFA23. I'If\l ~ The warranty expires if product failings or quantity divergences are not announced in writing within 7 days after receipt of goods! Terms of general application Please ensure that no humidity gets into the pipings. transport. We recommend removing this packing just before assembly in order to protect the devices against impurities. NFD17 and SFA20. KFA19. Don't put parts of your body or articles into the ball valve.

because the valve requires special tools! The following problems are possible: Problem undensity Undensily at the spindle Ball valve treacly Possible cause Defective seal Gland nut loose Soiling ofthe ball Solution Change sealing compound Fix the gland nut Clean the ball / ball valve We recommend you to exchange the whole valve if it is defective." -:7 .0-Ring 12. Spincie 14.:>-~ 2. Stop bolt Maintenance ~ 1../' -:7 ./'~ /1 1. Hand lever nuts S:Plate fe!llher 4. BOdy screWs 1_3. Thrllst firg 15. Compact ball valves can be serviced and repaired only in specialized companies. 1 2 3 . B!lII 9.S_eat support 1O'~O\lsing $eal 8 9 10 11 12 11.. Hand lever . Thrust ring 5. -6- .ENGLISH BW-Komp-KH-H-FI-05-01 Device description .\.-. Gland seals fLBody rs~atsupport 151F~ 8.

BW·Komp·KH·H·FI·05-01 ENGLISH Activity description Installation of a ball valve with flange The installation may occur only in state without pressure. that the adjustment of the drillings must agree with the installation position ofthe ball valve! Push the valve housing with the flange seals carefully between the flanges. Screw the right stud bolts into the threaded holes and fix the nuts crosswise and firmly onto the stud bolts. Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds means are suitable for the flowing medium! Align the flange drillings to each other through turning the ball valve. -7- . Abuse with the assembly the hand lever not as a lever! Please consider before weld the flanges.

449 (5228) 952-0 Fax 449 (5228) 950-90 Email: MlT@Systemarmaturen. Kontakt I Contact: MIT Armaturen GmbH Industriestr. I Spart. 9 32602 Vlotho Tel. systemarmaluren.BW-Komp-KH-H-FI-05-01 Steuert. de -8- . I Schafft Mehrwert.de Internet: WNW.

.

n3! af-"pc...'. t 3..1 C':'.y (lED pr(.)..!-'I'Wiflflg • THfl:ipiMnt «(J(C--f te! ea~y BdilJ'>tn""fit and irqx~[tiGn Standmd actUi'lt':.!..ftS • C"hl.:.TIE' .ic2li.llic.-"'.5 flmg" d 'clBp lid CE ®@ • S!"nd¥d a:tual0f~ to DIN Hi SC(J-lJ i:yp..T'.ctIC'fi d3S'S lP £.:' A. • Sr~.}.'2f pT':J!~-(h th~ CQn(a-:r~ during moun ling • '.'lh .jJr..~Ch'l!c·r p:t.b.r:.952-90· MIT@systemarmaturen._\ rfnh.f d".{.l"rMk~·& tl~\I' ~I. ItK.'Ali.'i1(O' bl1>_ \c:. (f19 1) () .l'll) 5C~ v '. y.".):t. 1')1 1-. (!-'In~"':!.-:W:e !c:o: .tKt".'11 t'JIfN.OO'l/' Ftc..k (:>If.'.\'.1fc[..'..'.Pi:' d!..« btl>: :·)[.:!.' $.OO 13 • intNna\.systemarmaturen.:~ wnfigwation ..ll w: h'Jf2~ f..)1 IA S .'11 .lS DIU EfJ SOOllJ Options • Conta:t ID. r. Seite 1 MIT Moderne Industrietechnik GmbH· IndustriestraBe 9 • 32602 Vlotho-Exter· Fon +49 (0)52 28..312ty apP!lc3tl(.188·SU1Z RiWK I Plastic-bodied limit switch .~r " \I. ITn'.trr M lOx 15 • Terntlrd:.\\.!! d.lLVlt ..i wfthi:\ \Clrn./ 4%'1 .n~I' i>::J.:<10) !tf~_.p &:\tDfj « ~!t..danti (11'1 3i • :l. (Qn!2(t~ Mounting a) .:. (MIl: .-!~: (h"'1":"~ !. ..mtdi t·) [..rldltbn:.j'!H\' <I'lnq"':'.:"h:i'lf': ~b·t ffllh..'1>1' -3C~~~.nd lid PA G '.If)d (.- ' .tqo ~(.h i·y. wp6ratGd (')n'_"ct~ • for((·d dl.x 90~ ..1 '1 \22 [fin'! (>::-fllfe~:' bi 1-1:l.:o -smp lid fOT qud.t lED di:pl. l~~ .IH::J :1.A !o).'ll l."~ <". £ • i"fQ2 lang.k :. ·.:" fof.".bh .'l:tlG10!.-.: . • Protedi:.b.'.1 I('? 1~ Ite!ll·).'..:..~<:c>l(J:m(<.::'r.\j..952-0 Fax +49 (0)52 28.-[: N·: II:) nz 4% 'J 4"~ 'j -SA ".'.-.[~."jch.\\.Hn '..Hht'd) • Intern.> \\I!h DiN OJ ~. !::i'.. ""I-~ . C.-\ .\diu~t..~1> y..nS 'Nitl10Ut ad(:liU:ma.j.'.n) Y.~ !P 5S • Body .:ri2'..tdnciard .de ."-'liS'Jit 'i 5i)G 'j .tmli:.<1.:.4J Hi ~.) Itf~Jlt-n . f."::' h'\l~' ~b_.1 S • AdrflDornl lid ""'-":uri!'i mtil tlxing ~':!2W A«%soIY ~quipll)ent page 53 (mta.i f.\.de • www.:.'Jn1I:H.~/._"IJIJ 2) d) honl mounling ':Ij.1 !. 188 ~ilfc'n:'ln\ .:.'l~Z D l.t. Benefits • Hmg.'8 f. ..j in .~:~ !(£In :oLi') bt' EUSit.)lrg:.C0nnEtlOJ'l ol CC[.lng"':'S( ':h-lo].\'~ • Ga\'lar.10. tiC>r1 \\'ith QUld~ .!"'·) • lid h-ng[·~ QX-f1 tc.'.!.\.t:! pull but((..:. B..:.inal clmnberi • Cab!?t?ntryM 1'.\ I'MII: ....!.n rtC~j)D • (j)n-t.:ri!'.~( l'\'Ii.~ rhl~'.r.'per.!"~ b!~.1mgul!h!f1g d.\lHch .? cd .~' t&lmimh With ysH>liltio'J d"mp-s kl!2:.t Ix.3':t:.).

952-90 • MIT@systemarmaturen. lQx !ri ~3D·C .~ ..trodmi lffiut·:u ..M) OM (:.I~ll I )(O..I! " ~.1-J}6·f i.lilln fil~>_ !Ul:n..Ull U"'~: 6Cl85161Jlla B-J MZ /.:{ d~«-'1III':t !..>lP.(y 1t{-:b:«.j f(.) twt 'J~I'>lfIYlj}i '.' I.o.oAHdllfr] li"frj~!):'" • I ((.. ...'f'.. '" o.Fl1.1~ -Jlf••>x-If. hj. ~lfl-.te] H~12 r :21-.\' m:{~II!.>14Hd 1->'11 (Jot'. (fl IJeli (:}'-'II'."""1 __ .I/}.':.1.!.lf'Ii1r ? .r.1.jj{.. 6D8.tl!1tlct. J.ltgt..952-0 Fax +49 (0)52 28..zl! 8i:-U1Zllr..r t!.}fP""'~~ )W~..n l':·:.Hl!.}'.non lC'x 1n' -JQ ·':.'t! If.llr .. zb " 1H·. b (-(<1IY'D_Islb oe .'Uf'LHI~_ ~w. 11±12 ~~±~: 23 -24 ~:..d .Ql1 !8f!--.ttll.r_ D 'J"i' I... I.l:IJNa mJnJlh51. -..>.f( 01- ill4frd ~.rr.j H""i'. -::0 ~( -1£ 'fi4 I "{to ~F 1 x la' .lll r~l.'l" 6te..'- ['CO.~·l dl....'IE'::'-( M.systemarmaturen..:_~) ({ .:22 ej:.tdu'ltJJrI '~l ~{.:htr'L11 Ha - fUHIlVot d ~Ml<hnq .:.. ib " Seite 2 MIT Moderne Industrietechnik GmbH' IndustriestraBe 9 • 32602 Vlotho-Exter • Fon +49 (0)52 28.-:d)..-l·1· .de .I~J f{lI.h}) ~ 1 . Lr~hir._. n 1\ -.188-SU1Z RiWK I' 1".-.'I:<Jll ID w:kr .de·www.) - • :.~'3·'lbl:" f'Htl1l1mb'f -:l!.Se.i iHX.

.

.~rdjese..>.und Wartungsanleitung Installation and Maintenance -SiM ... -Plea~ paYilMntiontothesafetyadyiqesl . . . .••...•.....lnSicherheitshil)wejse! ..•.» .relld thi~mahllalc~e~IIY. ..•.lin~t(lllingandrnaiAt~i~ingYO~ryatve..ese~Siev9rlPstaliaijonlhrerArm~..•• ... ...·Ohr. ~Bi\fe beal(htenSieqiein ~ie~rAtll~itungaufgefilhrt(... ·...dartnurdur()h . ...• ....... I Spart. ~Jnstal..•••. .laU9nal1dlTlaintananceisllllowedfor skHledwnployees Dilly...Dreiteilig handbetriebene Kugelhlihne Three pieces ball valve with hand lever DEUTSCH ENGLISCH Betriebs.• . ...• .. I Schafft Mehrwert.. Steuert..zi~rtes l"~rSQ~al <jll(l(hgefUhrt Werden..•.. ... ...B~triebscund\Na~119Sanl~ltung~orgfaHig .aefO~(. ...... .qualifi.#~rch... ...•.lnst~II~~on undVllartung. .

..:..ln Texten und Bildern.c. ErfQrs except$d regarding print and technical changes. . The properly ri9hts ()talJ duplicatl'evenpafts pi i!\'IitlJQUtwritten perrT)i~on. DiesesHandbuch darlnicht.' '-:. Fotokopie. ../. .... Mikrofilmoder weitereVerfahren) ohne schrifUicheZustimrT)ung Jeproduzieitoder unterV'erwendung. auch die derObersetZung.iS nqtallowed·tQ~hah~~()t· "->.sind~(jrbehalt~~' .lt.elektronischer.We dopo! assurT)ereSp9nsibilityforcorrec!nl'SS..<' '-': '" '''''\ "'> . . Auffage: April 2005. .- '.'" .BW-3Tlg-KH-H-Gew-05-01 ~005 . Revisioni Editi9fl: . . .'. .oloursploriginalproductscan differ from images.> '. 9 32s02YI<i!bo -2- .' Anderunrieh. sindvorbehaiten.vElfVielfiiltigt oderverbre.(~~tsandPictufesare~ubj~rto.M1TAtmatut~nGmbH.»"<'- \.ren GmbH.Systeme verarQeit~t...pril2005RevisJon 1 Anfragenricht~n Siebitte schriftlich·an: MllArmaturen GmbH IndListriestr.. Vlotho Alle·Rechte. ang. '. integrity.. "". allch nichtin Ausz9gen. .>.A..MIIArmatu.itetwerden. in irgendeinar Form (Druck.

BW-3Tlg-KH-oW-AE-05-01 Inhaltsverzeichnis Sefte/page ITJ ZK ~ ~ ~t~~~.5. Transport.5.6- ~ Inbetriebnahme und Wartung Acticity description Installation und Inbetriebnahme Installation -7-7- -3- .5. Entsorgung Storage. Zu dieser Anleitung This manual Abkurzungen und Symbole Shorlcuts and symbols -4. transporl. disposal Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen Terms of general application ..4- Leistungsbeschreibung Specification of service BestimmungsgemaBe Verwendung Intended usage Lagerung.5- Geratebeschreibung Device description Wartung Maintenance -6.

die Armatur fachgerecht zu installieren und zu warten. Aktuelle Informationen zu Ihrem Produkt konnen Sie jederzeit unter www. Diese Anleitung unterliegt nicht der Revisionierung und stem lediglich den zum Zeitpunkt des Drucks aktuelien Informationsstand der MIT Armaturen GmbH dar.de abrufen. sich regelmiiBig Gber aktualisierte Versionen dieser Anleitung zu informieren.systemarmaturen. dass bestimmtes Fachvokabular verstanden wird und dass technische Zeichnungen gelesen werden konnen. So lite dies nicht der Fall sein. Die Anleitung richtet sich an technisch qualifiziertes Personal. die dem technischen Fortschritt dienen. Es wird vorausgesetzt. vor. AbkGrzungen und Symbole lli GtJ OJ [f] -4- Achtung! Bitte lesen! Werkzeug notwendig Zu Ihrer Information Verletzungsgefahr! Betriebsstoff notwendig ~ ~ ~ ~'t-?J-: lli ~ Achtung! HeiBe Oberfiiiche! Vorsicht! Spannung Dokumente beachten Hinweis auf Anleitung . Giiltigkeit der Anleitung MIT Armaturen behiilt sich Anderungen an der Armatur sowie Erweiterungen und Anderungen der vorliegenden Anleitung. informieren Sie bilte Ihren zustandigen Kundenbetreuer bei MIT.DEUTSCH BW-3Tlg-KH-H-Gew-05-01 Zu dieser Anleitung Ziel der Anleitung Die vorliegenden Informationen ermoglichen es Ihnen. Aktuelle Dokumentation im Internet Wir bitten Sie.

Erst nach Betatigung des Kugelhahns wird das Nenndrehmoment wieder erreicht. andernfalls gilt die Ware als genehmigt. Transport.d. andernfalls erlischt der Gewahrleistungsanspruch! Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen Rohrleitungen soli ten vor Einbau. Die Endlagen (offenlgeschlossen) mOssen OberprOft und ggf. dass die Gerate trocken und schmutzfrei untergebracht werden. durch Umverpackungen vor au~eren EinflOssen wie Feuchtigkeit oder Schmutz geschOtzt. Die Gehause. Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten. nachjustiert werden! Zusatzliche Wegschalter oder andere elektrische Gerate zur SteliungsrOckmeldung ebenfalls auf richtige Justierung OberprOfen! -5- . diese Umverpackung erst kurz vor Montagebeginn zu entfernen. Automatisierte Armaturen bedOrfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei der Inbetriebnahme! Diese Gerate kennen im Werk nur unter WerkstaUbedingungen getestet und eingestellt werden. Verdeckte Mangel sind unverzOglich nach Entdeckung zu rOgen. um die Gerate vor Verunreinigungen zu schOtzen. Auf die Handhabung beim Transport kennen wir jedoch nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss nehmen .R. Die Armaturen ermoglichen das Absperren gasformig. spatestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchgespOit werden.und Dichlmaterialien mussen fUr das eingesetzte Medium und den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein. Entsorgung MIT-Produkte sind i.und flussiger Medien.biUe infarmieren Sie uns unverzOglich wenn die Ware bereits mit beschadigter Verpackung bei Ihnen eintrifft! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmiUelbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und sollte eine PrOfung der technischen Parameter und eine SichtprOfung beinhalten.BW-3Tlg-KH-oW-AE-05-01 DEUTSCH Leistungsbeschreibung Bestimmungsgemiifle Verwendung Hanbetatigte Kugelhiihne der Baureihen DKA04 und DKA07 der MIT Armaturen GmbH sind zum Einsatz im industrielien Bereich geeignet. Wir empfehlen. Warenmangel oder Abweichungen der Menge mUssen spa!es!ens 7 Tage nach Erhalt der Ware schrifUich angezeigt werden. HineinfUhren von Korperteilen und Gegenstiinden in den Kugelhahn kann zu schweren Verletzungen fUhren und sollte unbedingt vermieden werden I Lagerung. Lange Lagerzei!en konnen eine Erhohung des Losbrechmomen!es zu Foige haben. Sicherheitsstellungen soli ten gezielt simuliert und getestet werden.

DEUTSCH BW-3Tlg-KH-H-Gew-OS-01 Geratebeschreibung 1 16 15 14 13 2 3 4 5 6 7 tMutter 2. Bei wieder Zusammenbau des Kugelhahns darauf achten. GehiiusEimutter 8. Ursache Abhilfe Stopfbuchsmutter Stopfbuchsmutter nach gelost ziehen Kugel durch Bitte setzen Sie sich mit Medium/Schmutz in ihrem Servicepartner in den Leitungen Vemindung verschlissen Verschmutzung der Reinigen der Kugel/ KUQel des KUQelhahns Undichtigkeit Kugelhahn SchwerQiinQiQ -6- . miissen aile Zu.und Ableitungen drucklos geschaltet werden.Gehii~sesc:hr"ube 12 11 10 9 1Q. Sitzdichtun9 7. 13. Gehaus~ende 11. lJnterlegscheib~ 8 Wartung Bevor der Kugelhahn gewartet werden kann. dass die Gehiiuseschrauben gleichmiiBig und iiber Kreuz angezogen werden! Foigende Wartungsgrunde sind m6gich: Fehler Undichtigkeit Mogl. Handhebel 3. ~pin~el(wjrdvon unlen eingefOhj1) . A!llaufri~g 15. Stoplbubhsmutter 4.Kllgel .. Korper 14. Gehiiusedichlung 12. Stoplbuchse 6. Federring 9.5.~toplbuchSpackung (3 fig) 1~..

dass die Dichtungen und die Kugel nicht herausfallen. Missbrauchen Sie bei der Montage den Handhebel nicht als Hebel! Zum Anschluss des Kugelhahns an Ihr Rohrsystem beniitigen Sie eine Schlilsselweite vonXmm. Geeignetes Dichtmaterial an die Rohrleitungsenden anbringen. Nur dem Einsatzzweck entsprechende Dichtmaterialien verwenden Gehauseenden fest anschrauben und Kugelhahn montieren. Gehauseschrauben gleichma~ig und Gber Kreuz anziehen. -7- . Bitte achten Sie darauf. dass das verwendete Dichtmittel fUr das Durchlfuss-Medium geeignet ist! Kugelhahnmittelteil vorsichtig herausnehmen.BW-3Tlg-KH-oW-AE-05-01 DEUTSCH Tiitigkeits beschrei bu ng Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines Kugelhahns mit Gewindeanschluss Der Einbau darf nur in drucklosem Zustand erfolgen. Den Kugelhahn vorsichtig in einen Schraubstock spannen (die Verwendung von Schutzbacken verhindert Beschadigungen der Gehauseenden). -+ Dabei darauf achten. Verschraubungen kreuzweise und gleichmiiBig Ibsen und Schrauben herausnehmen. bei PTFE-Band oder Hanfdichtungen die Einschraubrichtung beach ten.

This manual is not audited and represents only the current information of MIT at the time of pressure. We assume that you are familiar with the common valve terminology and that you can read technical documents. Shortcuts and symbols Gt1 OJ £J [1] -4- ~ Atlention! Please read carefully Tools necessary For your information Atlention! Risk of injury! Supply items needed! ~ ~ ~ & Danger! Hot surface! Danger! Voltage. If you don't meet these expectations please inform your MIT customer advisorl Latest documentation in the internet Please check regularly for updated versions of this document.ENGLISH BW-3Tlg-KH-H-Gw-05-01 This manual Intention of this manual This information enables you to install and maintain your valve.de. Validity of the manual We hereby declare that we reserve our right to modify both the manual and the valve if necessary for technical advancement.systemarmaturen. This manual is for skilled employees only. You can get current information of your product at any time in the internel: www. Please read documents Hintto the manual part. .

During storage it is to be made certain that the devices are dry and dirt-free accommodated. After opening and closing the ball valve manually for one time the rated breakaway torque can be reached again On the handling in case of transport we can take influence however only with your assistance please inform us immediately if the commodity already arrives you with damaged packing! An eximination of the technical parameters an a visual check of the product should take place emidiately after delivery. The warranty expires if product failings or quantity divergences are not announced in writing within 7 days after receiptofgoodsl Terms of general application Please ensure that no humidity gets into the pipings. Oflngm of injury I' ~ ~" Don't put parts of your body or articles into the bali valve. transport. -5- . We recommend to remove this packing only briefly before beginning of assembly in order to protect the devices against impurities. Security positions should be simulated and tested straight. disposal MIT-products are protected by packing against external influences such as humidity or dirt. This can cause heavy injuries and should be absolutely avoidedl Storage. The armatures make possible to distribute neutral gaseous and liquid media. The final positions must be checked( opened/closed) and be preadjusted if necessary! Additional switches or other electric devices to the position feedback must be likewise checked for correct alignment. Subsequently possible complains will not be excepted. After a long period of storage the breakaway torque may increase. Automated valves need a special attention in time of initial operation! These devices can be tested at MIT only under workshop conditions.BW-3Tlg-KH-H-Gw-05-01 ENGLISH Specification of service Intended usage Hand lever ball valves of the types DKA04 and DKA07 made by MIT Armaturen GmbH are suitable for the producing industries. The housing and sealing compounds must be suitable for the assigned medium and temperature range.

body screw S.caps . 13.ENGL. nut 2. spindle (assemb~fromOOWn) 4.gland 6.W&aringpart 9. hand lever 3.body .ISH BW-3Tlg-KH-H-Gw-05-01 Device description 1 15 2 3 4 5 6 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 1. ~odyseal 7. all in· and outputs must be switched without pressure. 10. thr!Jst ring H.' wearihgpart Maintenance Before the ball valve can be serviced.gland seals (3pcs.) 15. 11 body seal 12. body nut . ball 8. With reassembly of the ball valv pay attention to the fact that the body screws are drawn firmly and overcross! The following maintenance reasons are possible: Problem undensity Undensity at the spindle Ball valve treacly Possible cause Defeclive seal Gland nut loose Soiling of the ball Solution Change sealing compound Fix the gland nut Clean the ball I ball valve -6- .

(use protection cheeks to prevent damages of the body) loose the screws crosswise and take them out. Use only to the purpose suitable sealing compunds. Attach suitable sealing compounds to the conduit ends. respect that the seals or the ball do not fall out.BW-3Tlg-KH-H-Gw-05-01 ENGLISH Activity description Installation of a ball valve with thread connection The installation may occur only in state without pressure. Abuse with the assembly the hand lever not as a lever! Fix the ball valve carefully into a vice stretch. Fix the caps on the pipe ends and install the ball valve. if you use PTFE tape or hemp seal follow the direction of thread. -7- . Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds means are suitable for the flowing medium! Take out carefully the ball valve center section. Fix body screws firmly and crosswise.

BW-3Tlg-KH-H-Gw-05-01 Kontakt I Contact: MIT Armaturen GmbH Industriestr.de -8- .systemarmaturen. 9 32602 Vlotho Tel.de Internet: www. +49 (5228) 952-0 Fax +49 (5228) 950-90 Email: MIT@Systemarmaturen.

.

3 kg 2.4 kg 10 kg 40 30 30 25 25 20 16 16 10 49 53 63 74 89 105 119 142 59 70 81 94 112 134 157 189 G5/4 G6/4 G2 G2112 G3 G4 535 850 1360 edltlon: 02101 a!llnformatlons given In good face but without warranty MIT-Moderne 'Industrie' Technik Industriestra~e 9' 32602 Vlotho' Telefon 05228/952-0' Telefax 05228/952-90 .5 kg 0.1 kg 0.3 kg 0. G1/4 G3/8 G1/2 G3/4 G1 ON 10 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 PN 50 50 A 40 40 41 B 80 80 80 115 115 130 150 170 170 235 235 C 7 8 9 11 12 13 15 17 19 21 24 L 39 44 49 Kv [m'/hj 5.1 kg 0..2 kg 0. for industrial use. All valves signed acc.. "'YSrH'~"? Zertili]ien nach NKA01 2-way threaded ball-valve.2 kg 3. i'-. to .: :::: I-- r:::: description: High-quality brass-ball-valve with full port. .. Bottom loaded. 60 50 1[~ 30 i 20 f:.4 17 41 70 121 200 292 weight 0. .AD-Ieafief' with manufacturer-sign. .8 kg 1. type: NKA01-1J2ETF NKA01-1J3ETF NKA01-1J4ETF NKA01-1J5ETF NKA01-1J6ETF NKA01-1J7ETF NKA01-1J8ETF NKA01-1J9ETF NKA01-10ETF NKA01·11ETF NKA01-12ETF con.:: t::: ~ ~ [. 2-pieces connection: temperature: pressure: materials: body: ball: seallng: ISO 9001 O"""""k"UQ)<J C~"t""""c~ threaded female acc. ON. to DIN ISO 228 -20°C to +150°C PN 10to PN 50 nickel-plated forged brass machined brass·bar. All sealings from high-quality pure tefion.9 9. I w!-34' 5(4" " - 614"- 2YJ"- 10 3'+4"- f:::. PN and material. f-~ c:: ~ -0:: ::--. pneumatic or hydraulic actuator.-diagram for PTFE .~ ~ .2 kg 5. On request we can supply this valve completely assembled with electric.t---.....anti-blow-our' stem. chrome-plated pure PTFE 6 operation: aluminium lever stem sealing: PTFE-stem-packing pressure-temp.

.

.

KG Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100341 . 78 D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen . . Swing-Check valves Mounting and Operating Manual END-Armaturen GmbH & Co.de . Oberbecksener SIr. http://w'INwnd.--I Non-Return valves.~~j END ARMATUREN Qualitat von Anfang an. Telefon (05731) 7900-0 Telefax (05731) 7900-199 .

END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. However. KG claims copyright over this documentation. reproduced nor passed to third parties withoutthe written aggreement 01 END-Armaturen GmbH & Co.end. END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. expanded.de 13. END-Armaturen GmbH & Co.11. The products are specified by the statements in this documentation.KG cannot be held responsible.end. KG.Impressum © by END-Armature" GmbH & Co.de Edition: 11/02 2 http://www.80 Internet: http://www. no assurance 01 the properties is given. END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG All rights reserved.02 . KG has the right to change parts of the non-return valves / swing check valves at any time without prior or direct notice to the client. either for any errors occuring in this publication or for their consequences.de E-Mail: post@end. This restriction also applies to the corresponding drawings. This documentation may neither be altered. KG Oberbecksener StraBe 78 0-32547 Bad Oeynhausen Telefon: 05731/7900 . This publication has been written with great care. The contents 01 this publication are subject to change without notice.0 Telelax: 05731/7900 .

1.2 5.5 Foreword General Advice Validity Inward monitoring Complaints Guarantee Symbols and their signification Safety Advice Personal advice Safety advices for mounting Safety advice for maintaining / repairing Device safety Name-plate Non-Return valves.2 7 7 7 8 9 4 5 5.2. Swing-Check valves General Corresponding use Operation Mounting / Disassemble Mounting with threaded connection Mounting with welded connection Disassemble of the bonnet and the inner parts Welding the body between pipes Mounting of the bonnet and the inner parts Mounting of the valve with flanged connection Maintenance 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 3 3.4 2.1 5.4.5 10 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 15 15 13.3 3.3 5.4.1 5.2 5.2 5.3 5.02 http://www.2 2.3 5.de 3 .2.1 2.4 5.1 5.1 3.Contents Contents 1 2 2.4.2.4.1 3.1.3 2.4.4.11.end.

end. which is necessary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the non-return valves / swing-check valves rapidly and correctly.11. Yours END-Armaturen GmbH & Co.Foreword 1 Foreword Dear customer. KG 4 http://www. these operation and installation manuals are intended to give YOll the knowledge. Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount.02 . The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation manual. If you have any questions in relation to the non-return valves / swing-check valves we shall be pleased to answer them. Please read these instructions carefully and pay particular attention to the advice and warning notes. adjust or maintain the non-return valves / swing-check valves. Dear assembler / user.de 13.

1 General Advice Validity This mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard versions of the non-return valves / swing-check valves and their variants. The warrenty and guarantee rules of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. please make a damage protocol and send the parts back to the manufacturer.11.4 Guarantee For our non-return valves / swing-check valves we give a guarantee period in accordance with the sales contract The end of the normal duration of life of the wearing parts represents no defect. KG are applicable. 2. 2.end.2 Inward monitoring Please check directly after delivery the non-return valves /swing-check valves for any transport damages and deficiencies and with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of parts. please mention the following: • Name and address of the consignee • Stock-/ ordering-/ article-number • Description of the defect 2.General Advice 2 2. In case of a return. if possible in the original packaging.de 5 .02 http://www. Do not leave any parts in the package. In case of returns Ibecause of transport damage / repairs). 13.3 Complaints Claims for replacement or goods which relate to transport damage can only be considered valid if the delivery company is notified without delay.

de 13. Observe these paragraphs without fa il! Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices. ~ This spanner identifies the description of actions which you should carry out. this also includes advices for averting health risks.end.02 . Observe these papgraphs without fail! This symbol indicates paragraphs which contain comments / advices or tips.Symbols and their signification 2. 6 http://www. this also includes how to avoid damage to property.11.5 Symbols and their signification Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices.

for example.1 3. Please observe (only) the advices which applies to your situation! 3. If necessary. Ohserve the respective relevant professional safety and accident prevention regulations when carrying alit the mounting I repair work. etc)! 3.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting As a result of the starting of the non-return valves / swing-check valves the flow of gases. as a result of the starting or the test adjustment no potential hazards will be produced for the personnel or the environment! 13. If appropriate. you must take into account particular safety aspects in each case! If.end. Switch off all the devices / machines / plant affected by mounting or repair. you may find advices on hazards in the following descriptions which are not relevantto you. pneumatical and electrical knowledge! Secure thatthe machine / plant come up to the Machinery Directice allerthe mounting and installing of the ball valves.11.1 Personal advice Safety advices for mounting We wish to point out expressly that the mounting. steam. adjusting and at accessories the pneumatical and eletrical installation olthe butlerflyvalves must be carried out by trained specialist personnel having mechanical. Check the correct fllnctioning of the safety equipment (for example the emergency push off buttons/ safety valves.de 7 .1. Check (for example in chemical plants) whether the switching off of devices / machines / plant will cause potential danger. in order.Safety Advice 3 Safety Advice Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and atwhich the non-return valves / swing-check valves are mounted. to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures! Before mounting or repairing. isolate the devices / machines / plant from the mains. a non-return valve / swing-check valve works a slide in an operational chemical plant. remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machines / plant. the potential hazards of commissioning have another dimension from that when this is only being carried out fortest purposes an a "dry" part of the plant in the assembly room! Since we do not know the circumstances at the time of the mounting/adjustment/commissioning. liquids. set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up of the devices / machines / plant.02 http://www.1. adjusted and commissioned. etc. If appropriate. may be enahled or interrupted! Satisfy yourself that. in the event of a fault in the butterfly valve (in a plant which is in operation) inform the shift forman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about the fault. for example.

to avoid an outflow/ overflow of chemicals or a discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures! £ Vou have to relieve the pressure in the pipes in which the butterfly valve is mounted. • the inadvertent starting up olthe devices/machines/plants in which the armature is mounted • the switching on 01 pilot medium supplV. Before disassembling the armature some essential points should be clarified! • Will the non-return valves / swing-check valves to be disassembled be replaced by another immediately? • If appropriate. inform the shift foreman/ safetv engineer or the manager about the maintenance or repair without delay in order.g.de 13. Check the lunction of the limit switches (option)! Check. solenoid valves.11. ~ Switch off pilot pressure and the power supply and relieve the pressure in the pipes. il the control signals the appropriate limit stop! Through suitable measures. set up warning signs in orderto preventthe inadvertent starting up or shutting down of the device / machine / plan!. The telephone number will be found on the back cover of these mounting and installation manual.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing Do not carry out anv maintenances / repairs if the non-return vales / swing check valves will be under pressure. ~ II necessary set up warning signs in order to prevent In case of delect in the non-return vales / swing check valves make contact to the supplier. limit switches) there is the risk that live parts (230 V AC~) can be touched! Therefore the adjustments must be carried out only by the electrican or a person having adequate training. whether the armature will be closed totallv. actuators.end. does the production process 01 the plant needed to be stopped? 'Is it necessary to inform specific personnel about the disassmbly? ~ If necessary.Safety Advice If necessarv.02 . for example. who is aware 01 the potential hazard! 3. prevent links being trapped bV moving actuating elements! Check the right function of all safetv devices (for example emergency push off buttons / safetv valves)! Carry out the starting and the adjustments onlV in accordance with the instructions discribed in this documentation! 16' QI I' Adjusting switchs on ball valves with options (e.! BV ending the adjustment check the correct function and should the occasion arise the position of the non-return valve / swing-check valve.1. pilot power supply and/or the power supplV 01 actuators and accessories. 8 http://www.

~ ~ After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the non-return vales I swing check valves and the tightness of the pipe connections. ~ Also check the function of the accessories e. In order to maintain this condition. the pipes or a mounted actuator will he damaged. 3. limit switches. start or adjust the non-return vales I swing check valves if itself.. etc.end. Do not mount.02 http://www. actuators. Do not mount.11. actuators.Safety Advice If you ascertain a damage of the non-return vales I swing check valves. The non-return vales I swing check valves must be used only for a IlUrpose corresponding to their construction! The non-return vales I swing check valves must be used within the values specified in the technical data! The operating of the non-return vales I swing check valves outside the nominal temperature range could destroy the sealings and the bearings. Please observe the safefy advices. as installer luser you must carry out your task in accordance with the descrilltion in these instructions. 13. as a trained specialist you are having mechanical and electrical knowledge! Satisfy yourself that the non-return vales Iswing check valves will only be used within their admissible limiting value (see the technical data. Also check the function of the accessories e. The operating of the non-return vales I swing check valves outside the nominal pressure range could destroy the inner parts and the body. isolate the device from the mains. We assume. Alter the maintenance or repair check the righllunclion ollhe non-return vales I swing check valves and the tightness olthe pipe connections. start or adjust the non-return vales I swing check valves if itself.g.2 Device safety The non-return valves I swing-check valves • are quality products which are produced in accordance to the recognized industrial regulations . etc. • left the manufacturer's work in a perfect safety condition. limit switches. technically correctly and with the greatest possible precision.g.de 9 . the pipes or a mounted actuator will he damaged.

admisable working pressure of the valve / armature [bar! recommend pilot pressure for correct function of the valve / armature [bar] (only at pneumatic actuated valves / armatures) connecting size of the valve / armature testing pressure of the body of the valve / armature allowed fluidgroup of the valve / armature month and year of manufacturing of the valve / armature 10 http://www.1 "name-plate Art. Serial Pressure range (PS) Pilot pressure Size (ON) Testing pressure (PT) Fluidgroup Date of manufacturing article number of the valve / armature order..end.end.11.7900-0' www.plate. No. The name-plate should not be displaced or changed.de 13. 4.2002 C€ 0062 Fig..: ZA310028-E0620632 Serial: 313857 Pressure range (PS): 16 bar Pilot pressure: 6-8 bar Temperature range (TS): -30°C .or production.de Art. +180°C Size (ON): 50/ G2" Testing pressure IPT): 60 bar Fluidgroup: 1 Date of manufacturing: 11.02 . KG 0-32547 Bad Oeynhausen +4910)5731 . which permitts a definite identification of the armatures/valves and shows the most important technical data to you.number max.Nr. lEAl END-Armaturen GmbH & Co.Name-plate 4 Name-plate In some cases the armatures/valves will be provided with a name.

installation (Fig. Swing-Check valves 5 5. The installation of a swing-check valves will have take place that the flap of the swing-check valve will close by the force of gravity automatically.de 11 . 5. Observe that there won't be any parts of the package or other pollution in the armature. 5. on which the material of the valves and the material of the sea lings will be resistant. 0.non-return valve. Pollution or using outside the nominal pressure range and/or the nominal temperature range should causes damages on the valves especially on the seals.Non-Return valves.11. 5. adjust or commission a non-return valve or a swing-check valve you must have read the ~ Safety advice If you have not read the safety advices until now please read these imllortant advices now and turn back to this point. Please observe that that the installation of the swing-check valve / non-return valve will have influence on the opening pressure.3 Operation Non-return valves and swing-check vales need no special operation. Fig. swing-check valve.2 Corresponding use Non-return valves and swing-check valves are used to preventthe back-flow of media. Pollution will reduce the safety and the duration of life of the armature. Remove all transport safety devices (e. plugs or caps). 5.g.end. Observe the flow direction which is specified on the valve body. 13. It should only be used clean liquids and gases. Before mounting swing-check valve / non-return valve clean up the pipes.1 Non-Return valves.4 Mounting / Disassemble The mechanical mounting is identical in all variants.1 .02 http://www. It differs only by the type of connection.: Art TR100025).1<. SWing-Check valves General Before you mount/disassemble.1<. 0.

4. Screw the pipes into the connection ends of the valve.: Art BHt20025) 5.1 Mounting with threaded connection Before lay on sealing compounds.Non-Return valves.2 • non-return valves. 5. By using PTFE-ribbon or hemp sealings observe the screw direction.2 Mounting with welded connection Before welding the valve between the pipes you have to disassemble the bonnet of the non-return valve first.02 .end. Lay on the correct sealing compounds on the pipes end. to preventthe damage of the sealings. Swing-Check valves ~ Avoid stress in case of non align pipes. check the hardly screwing by the pipes into the valve body.de 13. Don't use sealing compounds which are not prescribed for your employment. 5. swing-check valves. o flow direction Fig. Strike up the pipes with pressure after that time the manufacturer of the sealing compounds pretends to harden it. 12 http://www. mounting with threaded connection (Fig. Check the tightness of all connections.4.11.

Loosen the bonnet with a fit spanner.1 Disassemble of the bonnet and the inner parts Clamp the valve between a vice carefully. swing check valve. If appropriate inform the shift foreman / safety engineer or the works manager and the fire brigade of yourfactory. disassembly of the bonnet and the inner parts (Fig.end. By using guard plates you can prevent the damage of the ends olthe valve body. 5. because there will be a resilience on the bonnet.2.4.11. Swing-check valve 5. Welding the parts in a serviceable device/machine/plant the potential of danger is as higher as welding the parts in a welding room. By welding observe your own national guide lines about safety and the prevention of accidents. Take the spring and the inner part out of the bonnet and putthe parts aside.de 13 .Non-Return valves.2 ~ Welding the body between pipes By welding the valve body with the pipes observe appropriate demands and guide lines. The safety demands be welding are depending on the place and the position of the point of weld. Alt. EB310064) 5. By doing this be very careful. Screw the bonnet Ollt of the body.2.3 • non-rehlrn valves. 13.02 http://www.4. o I resilience Fig.

4. Take care about the correct placement of the inner parts and the spring. Screw the bonnet into the body.4· non-return valves. Check the tightness of all connections. Insert the inner parts and the spring into the body. welding of the body (Fig. Check the correct position of the sealing at the bonnet and take care thatthere will be no pollution on the sealing or on the seat Tighten the bonnet with a fit spanner.end.non-return valve. mounting of the bonnet and the inner parts (Fig. Swing-Check valves flow direction Fig.: body of Art. EB310064) 5. swing-check valve.11.5 .3 Mounting of the bonnet and the inner parts Before mounting the bonnet and the inner parts let the body cool down. 5.2.: Art EB310064) 14 http://www.02 .Non-Return valves. 5. swing-check valves.de 13. cool down Fig.

read this important advices now and turn back to this page. Check the tightness of all connections. This process must happen easily to avoid the damage of the sea lings. mounting with flanged connection (Fig.. flow direction Fig..: Art KU3000xx) 5..02 http://www. Fasten all screws crosswise and check the function of the valve.de 15 . 5. Observe the maximum torque of the screws.non-return valves. Salety advice.6 .3 Mounting of the valve with flanged connection In the following discription we assume that you have mounted the flanges at the end of the pipes and the valve (welded flanges) and they are cooled down .11. Swing-Check valves 5.Non-Return valves. II you determinate that there is a demage to the valve switch oil the device! machine! plant! However before doing this. Screw the fit nuts onto the screws and tighten them up crosswise.5 Maintenance Before you maintain or shut down a non·return valve! swing-checl< valve you have to read the ~ Salety advice II you have not read the salety advices until now. Align the borings of the flanges and put some fit screws through the holes.cnd. Push the valve between the flanges by using the appropriate sea lings.4. swing-check valve.. 13. The telephone number will be found on the back or these operation and installation manual.. it is essential to reler to the . Non-return valves need on maintainance In case of a delect of the valve make a contact to the supplier.

02 .Notizen 16 http://www.de 13.1 1.end.

in particular: DIN 3840:1982 Armaturengehause Fesligkeitsberechnung gegen Innendruck (9) On behalf I J~"" Friedheim Konig Technical Manager """""" httP:!"""". AC. SK. VA.. EA. RK. EB. MB. VH./fw. PB. VD. VS.. (6) Applied conformity assessment PED: Modul H. ZF. IC.OU8lit6t von Anf8ng 8n. BE. VK. MD.end.". AG.7900-0 • Germany 31·1900-00 . VM.. lK. CW. DK. TD. and all varialions of lhese articles (4) of the company END·Armaluren GmbH & Co. MR. BH. HK. VU. NG. CA. VC. CV. AD. 78 D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen (Germany) Teleron +49 .do \ ii 32547 Bad9 (0 TeIefoo: . AB. MA.de . lG.A. IL. 20. T. PD. BF.. CB. Oberbecksener SIr.vw. lE. / Michael End Quality Manager END·Arrnaturen GnlbH & co. BG.7900--80· htlp. ZA. TH. Paris I Frankreich Kennzeichen 0062 (8) Applied harmonized standards. TE.7900-{)· Teiefax +49 . KA. TR.5731 . KG Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 . post@eOd. IK. EA. TA. RM.. TC. TB. lR. FG. Juli 2004 ey usen 31 . BK. RG. VO. KG D·32547 Bad Oeynhausen Germany (5) are in conformity with lhe regulations of the directive 97/23/EG. (1) Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EG Herewith we declare lhat the supplied articles: (2) (3) M. CK. KU. NK. (7) Notified body for conformity assessment PED an Quality·Management·System: Bureau Veritas S. ZD. TF. IG. CD. VN. WG. . SD. EK. ZP. CU. AK. SV. UV. SONV. VT.5731 .t(G ~~d sen. AR. VL.."': +49 (0 ~=n~~~~&co.

.

.

a • .® RK 70/71 RK41 ~B) RK 44/448 CD RK76 RK86/86A CD RK 16A116B/16C RK49 RK29A o Betriebsanleitung 808519-05 Ruckschlagventile RK Installation Instructions 808519-05 Non-Return Valves RK Instructions de montage et de mise en service 808519-05 Clapets de retenue RK Instrucciones de montaje y servicio 808519-05 Valvulas de retenci6n RK Manuale di Istruzioni 808519-05 Valvole di non ritorno RK ·· m 1_a.

® Wartungs. .Sicherheitshinweis Das Gerat darf nur von geeigneten und unterwiesenen Personen montiert und in Betrieb genom men werden. BesUmmungsgemaBer Gebrauch Einsatz in Rohrleitungen zum Verhindern des RUckflieBens von Medien innerhalb der zulassigen Druck. die eine spezielle Unterweisung erhalten haben.und UmrUstarbeiten dOrfen nur von beauftragten Beschaftigten vorgenommen werden. Die Medienbestandigkeit der Armatur muss fUr die Einsatzbedingungen geprOft werden.und Temperaturgrenzen unter Beachtung der chemischen und korrosiven EinflUsse auf das Druckgerat.

oder Wartungsarbeiten nur in drucklosem Zustand durchfUhren! Die Armatur ist wahrend des Betriebs heiB oder tiefkalt! Schwere Verbrennungen an Handen und Armen sind moglich. stromen heiBes Wasser.& Gefahr Die Armatur steht wahrend des Betriebs unter Druck! Wenn Flanschverbindungen oder Verschlussschrauben gelost werden.oder Wartungsarbeiten nur bei Raumtemperatur durchfUhren! Scharfkantige Innenteile konnen Schnittverletzungen an den Handen verursachen! Beim Wechseln der Armatur Arbeitshandschuhe tragen! ® . atzende Flussigkeiten oder toxische Gase aus. Dampf. Schwere Verbruhungen und Verbrennungen am ganzen Korper sind moglich! Schwere Vergiftungen sind moglich! Montage. Montage.

. Einsetzbar in Ex-Zonen 0.2. Die Gerate erhalten keine Ex-Kennzeichnung.ATEX (Atmosphere Explosible) ® Die Gerate weisen keine potenzielle ZUndquelle auf und fallen daher nicht unter die Explosionsschutz-Richtlinie 94/9/EG. 1. 21.20.22 (1999/92/EG).

o Riickschlagventile mit Spiral-Zentrierung Riickschlagventile mit Gehause-Zentriernocken Riickschlagventile mit Gehause-Zentrierung Position der Fiihrungsleisten in horizontaler Leitung e e e .System besch rei bung ® Ruckschlagventile RK mit Spiralring-Zentrierung oder Gehause-Zentrierung. Ventile ohne SchlieBfeder nur in vertikale Leitungen mit Stromungsrichtung von unten nach oben montieren. Fur Ventile mit SchlieBfeder ist die Einbaulage beliebig.

C W .Q = «S • ... • ....I- o Il.

Aufkleber fOr Weichdichtung. . Reduzierte Temperaturgrenzen bei Verwendung von elastischen Dichtungen und bei einigen Federwerkstoffen beachten (Daten blatt}. Typenschildangaben (Druckklasse PN/Class.und Temperaturgrenzen siehe Kennzeichnung bzw. Werkstoffnummer.Technische Daten ® Druck. Federwerkstoff).

.: >. .. ~ZZ . .(1) .e ::.::: Q.Z Z f'-oo. "C ...- 00 N N ~I~I .c Co) C C N c ::3 c en ~ ::... ~ ... ex:: . •• ...::: . ex:: : . i:::i..::: ex:: :.. . i:::i.. • ..c Co) en c (1) t~ ::.... ••• : ~oo. .... .

1997. Modul H. lJ~ &. Bei einer nicht mit uns abgestimmten Anderung des Gerates verliert diese Erklarung ihre Gultigkeit. • Angewandtes Konformitatsbewertungsverfahren: Anhang III. I/: ~1 ~~ Ofpl. Lars Bohl Qualitatsbeauftragter ..KonformitatserkUirung (E: ® Fur die Gerate RK. Bremen. den 11. Uwe Bledschun Leiter Konstruktion .05. uberpruft durch die benannte Stelle 0525.02. erklaren wir die Konformitat mit folgender europaischer Richtlinie: • Druckgerate-Richtlinie 97/23/EG vom 29.3 fallen .-Ing.2005 GESTRAAG .. :acJ~ Dipl. soweit die Gerate nicht unter die Ausnahmeregel nach Artikel 3.. I.-Ing. i .

Maintenance and retrofitting must only be performed by entrusted personnel who . .Safety Note @)D The equipment must only be installed and commissioned by qualified and adequately trained personnel. Check the chemical resistance and suitability of the valve for the operating conditions in question. The admissible pressure and temperature ratings as well as the chemical and corrosive influences of the fluid on the pressure equipment must be taken into account.have achieved a recognized level of competence.through adequate training . Usage for the intended purpose The non-return valves RK are automatic-stop check valves and designed for use in pipes in order to prevent the backflow of fluid.

The valve becomes hot or extremely cold during operation. This presents the risk of severe burns to hands and arms. . Sharp edges on internals present a danger of cuts to hands.& Danger The valve is under pressure during operation. corrosive fluids or toxic gases may escape. hot water. steam. Installation and maintenance work should only be carried out at room temperatures. Installation and maintenance work should only be carried out when the system is depressurized. This presents the risk of severe burns and scalds to the whole body or severe cases or pOisoning. Always wear industrial gloves for installation and maintenance work. @B) When loosening flanged connections or sealing plugs.

ATEX Directive 94/9/EC. 20. 1999/92/EC The equipment can be used in the following explosive zones: 0. 21 and 22. 1. The equipment does not have its own potential source of ignition and is therefore not subject to the Directive 94/9/EC. 2. The user must make sure that the process fluid does not generate an inadmissibly high surface temperature. The equipment does not produce excessively high surface temperatures. @~~ . The equipment does not require an Ex marking.

Exception: Valves without spring can only be installed in vertical lines with upward flow.Description @~B) Non-return valve RK with spiral centering ring or self-centering body. Installation in any position. o Non-return valve with spiral centering ring Non-return valve with body centering cams Non-return valve with self-centering body Position of guide ribs (horizontal installation) e e o .

...CO CO .. -en c c • 0 .o I- c.. • 0 ..

Technical Data For pressure/temperature ratings see marking or name plate (pressure class PN/Class. material number. sticker for soft seal. . spring material) @)D Observe lower temperature ratings for equipment with elastic seals and certain spring types (see data sheet).

....: c. >.. ..: ~ZZ . ..:: 0: as .® a:5 . c.....=:.Zz . ....'Clc.=:... o N ..'Clc... .... : : t'-Clc...=:. Q) c. ~ZZ .. ~ZZ . .'Clc. Q) : c. . . ::..... .

Applied conformity assessment procedure: Annex III. verified by the Notified Body 0525. Equipment in conformity with the PED bears the marking CE 0525.except for equipment excluded from the scope of the PED according to section 3..3 . This declaration is no longer valid if modifications are made to the equipment without consultation with us. McJ~ Head of the Design Dept.conforms to the European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC of 29 May 1997. J/: LJ~ c.Declaration of Conformity CE: @~B) We hereby declare that the pressure equipment RK . 1st August 2004 GESTRAAG . ~. I. Module H. Uwe Bledschun (Academically qualified engineer) Quality Assurance Manager Lars Bohl (Academically qualified engineer) . Bremen.

Utilisation ·conforme Le clapet de retenue s'utilise sur la tuyauterie pour eviter Ie reflux des fluides dans les limites de pression et temperature admissibles. la mise en service. I'entretien et les travaux de modification ne doivent etre realises que par du personnel qualifie.Avis important pourla securite CD L'installation. II est necessaire de verifier la compatibilite entre Ie fluide et les materiaux consituant Ie clapet pour en assurer la longevite. .

II ya risque de brOlures aux mains et aux bras. Pendant Ie fonctionnement de I'installation Ie clapet de retenue est tres chaud ou tres froid. des liquides ou gaz corrosifs ou toxiques peuvent s'echapper. II ya risque d'empoisonnement et de brOlures graves sur tout Ie corps. de la vapeur. CD Lors du desserrage des brides ou des bouchons. Avant d'effectuer des travaux d'installation ou d'entretien verifier que Ie purgeur est temperature ambiante. de I'eau bouillante. Porter des gants de travail pour remplacer les pieces internes.& Danger En service Ie clapet de retenue est sous pression. Avant d'effectuer des travaux d'installation ou d'entretien. a . decomprimer I'installation. a Les pieces interieures an~tes vives peuvent causer des coupures aux mains.

21 et 22. par consequent ils ne sont pas concernes par la directive 94/9/CE. 2. 20. 1. Les equipements ne portent pas Ie marquage Ex. L'utilisateur doit s'assurer que Ie fluide du procede n'engendre pas des temperatures de surface inadmissiblement hautes. . Les equipements n'engendrent pas de temperatures maxi de surface inadmissibles. 19991921CE ® Les appareils peuvent etre utilises pour des zones explosibles 0. Les equipements ne disposent pas de leur propre source potentielle d'inflammation.Directive AT EX 94191CE.

Montage en toutes positions. la seule exception des clapets sans ressort de rappel. o e • Clapet de retenue avec bague de centrage speciale Clapet de retenue avec butees autorisant Ie centrage Clapet de retenue avec corps autorisant Ie centrage Position des nervures de guidage (installation horizontale) o . Pour ces clapets. montage uniquement sur tuyauterie verticale.Description CD a Clapets de retenue RK avec bague de centrage special ou avec corps autorisant Ie centrage. avec sens de passage de bas en haut.

.... c: • - U) c: • .....8 o Ic.. • CD • 0 .. «S .... -S « ..

nuance joint souple et ressort). .Donnees techniques ® Plage d'utilisation (pression/temperature) . nuance materiaux. Observer les restrictions (reduction des limites de pression et temperature pour des appareils avec des joints elastiques ou certains materiaux de ressort (voir notice technique)).voir plaque d'identification ou marque (classe de pression PN/Class.

::: 0: t N o .8 00 NN ~I~I :::.

Uwe Bledschun Directeur de la conception Dfp!. verifie par I'organisme notifie 0525.3 . J/: Dip!. Breme.Declaration de conformite CE: CD a a Nous declarons la conformite des appareils soumis pression RK . module H.. -Ing.sauf les cas d'exclusion suivant I'article 3.avec la « Directive Equipements Soumis Pression » (DESP 97/23/CE) du 27 mai 1997. I. -Ing.1tcJ~ . Procedure d'evaluation de la conformite appliquee: annexe III. Lars Bohl Delegue la Qualite a . V.. Cette declaration n'est plus valable si une modification est apportee aI'appareil sans notre accord. L'equipement certifie conforme ala directive porte Ie marquage CE 0525. Ie 1er aoOt 2004 GESTRAAG [. 0.

sustitucion 0 reparacion solo deben ser realizados por personal que dispone de una formacion especial.Advertencia sobreseguridad CD EI equipo solo debe ser instalado y puesto en marcha por personal cualificado y especial izado. Los trabajos de mantenimiento. . Debido a la influencia quimica y corrosiva del fluido sobre la resistencia de la valvula recomendamos comprobar la idoneidad del material de la valvula para la aplicacion en cuestion. Aplicaci6ndeacuerdo conlafinalidad Las valvulas de retencion se utilizan en tuberfas para limitar el paso del fluido en un solo sentido dentro de las temperaturas y presiones especificadas.

Los trabajos de montaje 0 mantenimiento deberan realizarse unicamente a temperatura ambiente. existe el peligro de sufrir importantes quemaduras en las manos y brazos si se manipula sin precaucion. Utilizar siempre guantes de trabajo para realizar los trabajos de montaje 0 de mantenimiento. Las partes internas por tener terminaciones afiladas. Existe el peligro de sufrir graves quemaduras.&Peligro o La valvula esta sometida a presion durante el funcionamiento. Dado que en operacion la valvula puede encontrarse a temperatura muy elevada 0 muy baja. heridas 0 intoxicaciones por inhalacion cuando se produzca un escape de fluido. Ifquidos corrosivos 0 gases toxicos. pueden ocasionar heridas cortantes en las manos. vapor. . Los trabajos de montaje 0 mantenimiento solo deben ser realizados cuando la valvula no se encuentre sometida a presion. AI aflojar los tornillos de las bridas 0 los tapones de cierre podrfa producirse escape de agua caliente.

Los equipos no producen temperaturas de superficie inadmisiblemente altas. 21 Y22. Los equipos no requieren un marcado Ex. 1. EI usuario debe asegurar que el fluido de proceso no pueda generar temperaturas de superficie excesivas.DirectivaATEX 94/9/EC 1999/921EC Los equipos se pueden usar en las zonas explosivas 0. CD . Los equipos no tienen fuentes potenciales de ignicion y por eso no entran en el ambito de aplicacion la directiva 94/9/EC. 20. 2.

o o f) Valvula de retencion con anillo de centraje espiral Valvula de retencion con topes de centraje Valvula de retencion con cuerpo de centraje Posicion de los nervios gufa en caso de instalacion horizontal e o . Excepcion: Valvulas sin muelles solo se deben instalar en tuberfas verticales con flujo ascendente.ipcion Valvulas de retencion RK con anillo de centraje espiral 0 con cuerpo de centraje. Instalacion en cualquier posicion.Descr.

8 o .... c. • s "G..) :E Q C • .

. numero de material. etiqueta para junta blanda. Tener en cuenta las restricciones (reduccion de temperatura para los aparatos con juntas blandas 0 para unos materiales de resorte (vease hoja tecnica). material de resorte).Datos tecnicos CD Margen de aplicacion (Ifmites de presion y temperatura) .vease marcaje 0 placa caracterfstica (clase de presion PN/Class.

. .. I-Clo. .8-22 o ... Cl.: .Cl. : . o .22 I-Clo. . 00 N N ~I~I t~ :.. . .. . ._22 I-Clo.e : o : .: .:: c:::: ..: ....

-Ing. -Ing. I.excepto los casos de exclusion segun el parrafo 3. J/: Dipl.. Los equipos conforme a la Directiva lIevan el marcado CE 0525. Uwe Bledschun Director de Disefio DIp I.08. Lars Bohl Encargado de Calidad . lJ~ 0" ~cJ~ .Declaracion de conformidad ( E: ® Declaramos que los equipos de presion RK .3 de la Directiva . verificado por el organismo notificado 0525. modulo H. Bremen. Procedimiento de evaluacion de conformidad aplicado: anexo III. 97/23/CE del 29 mayo 1997. 01. Esta declaracion pierde su validez en el caso de que se realicen modificaciones en los equipos que no hayan sido acordadas con nosotros.2004 GESTRAAG c.cumplen con la Directiva de Equipos a Presion (DEP) no.

Verificare scrupolosamente la resistenza aile aggressioni chimiche nelle effettive condizioni di esercizio.Note di sicurezza CD Le valvole devono essere installate e poste in esercizio solo da personale qualificato ed adeguatamente istruito. Devono essere tenuti in considerazione sia i limiti di PressionelTemperatura che gli effetti chimici e di corrosione del fluido utilizzato. Uso appropriato Le valvole RK sono valvole automatiche progettate per essere utilizzate su tubazioni per bloccarne il flusso di ritorno. dopo adeguati training. La manutenzione ed eventuali sostituzioni devono essere eseguite solo da personale che. . possegga un riconosciuto livello di competenze.

durante I'esercizio. . Questi lavori devono essere sempre eseguiti ad impianto freddo e senza pressione. CD Smontando la valvola 0 allentando Ie viti acqua calda. Cia provochera scottature su tutto il corpo e/o casi gravi di avvelenamento. possono essere estremamente calde 0 fredde e quindi provocare seri danni a mani e braccia. Parti interne con spigoli vivi possono causare lesioni aile mani. Le valvole. fluidi corrosivi 0 gas tossici potranno fuoriuscire violentemente. vapore. per questo motivo raccomandiamo I'uso di robusti guanti da lavoro.& Pericolo Durante I'esercizio la valvola esotto pressione. L'installazione e la manutenzione devono essere sempre eseguite a temperatura ambiente.

di per se. non produce alte temperature superficiali. La valvola non necessita di marchio Ex. 1. La valvola non ha una propria sorgente di innesco e non Direttiva 94/9/EC. L'utilizzatore finale deve assicurarsi che il fluido di processo non generi inammissibili alte temperature.Direttiva AT EX 94/911EC. CD epercib soggetta alia La valvola. 1999/92/EC La valvola pub essere impiegata nelle seguenti zone pericolose: 0. 21 e 22. . 20. 2.

Descrizione CD Le valvole RK con dispositivo di centraggio a filo 0 con corpo sagomato possono essere installate in qualsiasi posizione. Nel caso di valvole senza molla. o e Valvola di non ritorno con anello di centraggio a filo Valvola di non ritorno con corpo autocentrante a camme Valvola di non ritorno con corpo autocentrante Posizione nervature di guida (installazione orizzontale) e o . queste dovranno essere montate su linee verticali con flusso dal basso verso I'alto.

co 0 c C!) co .8 o !:i <C . (I) N C - • .....

nel caso di basse temperature e tenuta soffice. codice materiale del corpo e della molla. materiale della eventuale sede soffice).Datitecnici CD I dati di rating Pressione/Temperatura possono essere rilevati sulla targhetta dati (classe di pressione PN/Class. iI rating della valvola e la compatibilita di alcuni tipi di molle (vedere il foglio tecnico). Verificare accuratamente. .

00 NN ~I~I . '::::::::'-0 ..:: .- ~ N . o ... . .9-22 1-00.9-2:2: .9-22 1-00. o . ...... c. ... o : : ..8 1-00.:: . ...:. : : o .:.. ..._ 2 2 1-00..

Dichiarazione di compatibilita (E: Con la presente dichiariamo che Ie valvole RK. 6. Lars Bohl Responsabile Qualita . In caso di modifiche non con noi concordate questa dichiarazione perde ogni sua validita. 1 agosto 2004-09-01 GESTRAAG c.3 della PED.-Ing. JtcJ~ I.. CD Le valvole conformi alia PED sono marchiate: CE 0525. sono eseguite dall' Organismo Notificato 0525.-Ing. V. ~ . sono conformi alia direttiva «European Pressure Equipment» PED 97/23/EC del 29 Maggio 1997. Uwe Bledschun Coordinatore Costruzione Ofpl. Brema.. Dipl. Modulo H. tranne quelle escluse dalla sezione 3. Le applicazioni delle procedure di conform ita: Allegato 11\.

.

GESTRA® '--=. Dr.o.V Av. 003902/66 32 51 Fax 003902/66 32 55 60 E-mail: infoitaly@flowserve..I Luis Cabrera.gestra.com w~~ Flowserve DAlCO Steam Products tI' Flowserve S.pl ~ IE' GESTRA ESPANOLA S. ~ UI. Schuberta 104 PL .5152036 E-mail: aromero@flowserve. 1159 Porto 41 00-082 Tel. Antunes Guimaraes. ~ Flow Control Division Via Prealpi.. Burrel Road.p. \.80-172 Gdansk Tel.com . 30 1-20032 Cormano (MI) Tel.A E-28002 Madrid Tel.de tp'l'\ GESTRA Polonia Spolka z.com 2601 Grassland Drive Louisville. 86-88 www.4951788 Fax: 00 15 02 1 4 95 16 08 EMail: dgoodwin@flowserve.: 001502/49501 54.. lda.A.com @~B) Flowserve Flow Control (UK) Ltd..o. Haywards Heath West Sussex RH 16 1TL Tel. 00351 22/6198770 Fax 0035122/6107575 E-mail: jtavares@flowserve. 00441444/31 4400 Fax 00 44 14 441 31 45 57 E-mail: gestraukinfo@flowserve. 00 48 58 1306 10-02 od 10 Fax 00 48 58 1306 33 00 E-mail: gestra@gestra. 003491/5152032 Fax 003491/4136747. KY 40299 Tel.com Flowserve Portuguesa.

.ag@flowserve.-FLOWSERVE . 0-28054 Bremen Munchener Str.de 808519-05/1005es . © 1999 GESTRA AG . Bremen· Printed in Germany .gestra.0 Telefax +49 (0) 421 35 03 . 0-28215 Bremen Telefon +49 (0) 421 35 03 .com Internet www.. 77..393 E-Mail gestra. ® ~ GESTRA GESTRAAG Postfach 10 54 60.

.

...................................................................... 5 5......................................0 Warranty I Guarantee ...................... 13 Rev................ 6 5..3 4....... 3 4.......0 Installation ...... 2 2............... 11 10.....2 Explanatory notes on safety information ....................................................0 Notes on possible dangers ..2 3....................................... 5 4..........0 Care and maintenance .2 Installing valves with butt weld ends .. 12 12.......... 10 9........2 Operating principles ......................................5 Marking ..........................6 5........................1 General notes on installation ........................0 Troubleshooting .......4 Installation data on valves with loose plugs ......... 7 6......4 Technical data .....................5 5...........remarks .............................................. 8 8.1 Scope ofapplications ....... 7 7.............0 EC declaration of conformity ...................................... 12 11........ 00401030005104 englisch .....3 Diagram .3 4.................4 4...............ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Stop valve with bellows seal maintenance-free FABA®Long Life I FABA®-LA Contents 1...........5 Installing valves with limit switches ............0 Dismantling the valve or the top part ............. 5 5.................3 Installing valves with pressure balancing plugs .... 7 5.....0 Putting the valve into operation .........0 General information on operating instructions .........0 Storage and transport .........1 Significance of symbols .....0 Troubleshooting table ... 2 2........................0 Description ........................................ 2 4.............................................2 2......................

e.The paint is a base coat to protect against corrosion during transportation and storage.0 Storage and transport ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ~ . a failure to comply with which can result in serious injury or danger of death for users or third parties or in material damage to the system or the environment.Protect against external force (like impact. or as connecting paints for lifting gear. It is vital to comply with these practices and to monitor compliance. . . etc.\ ATTENTION! . vibration. Information marked with the above symbol and "ATTENTION!" describe practices. . 3. 2.1 Significance of symbols ~TTENTlON! I I Warning of general danger. operation. hoods must not be used to take external forces. storage. Page 2 Rev.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions FABA®Long Life I FABA®-LA 1. risks and items of safety information are highlighted to attract special attention. installation.In addition. It is the owner's responsibility to define areas of responsibility and competence and to monitor the personnel.At -20°C to +65°C. handwheels. .0 General information on operating instructions These operating instructions provide information on mounting and maintaining the fittings.0 Notes on possible dangers l2\ 2. 2. maintenance and repair. See catalog sheet for weights. . . The manufacturer reserves the right to introduce technical modifications at any time.Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used.g.Valve mountings such as actuators. start-up. operating and maintenance instructions as well as technical data (in the operating instructions. installation. product documentation and on the device itself) must also be complied with to the fullest extent in order to avoid faults which in turn can cause serious injury to persons or damage to property. 00401030005104 /. The notes and warnings must be observed and adhered to. They are binding on the transport. Do not damage paint protection. current regional safety requirements must be applied and observed when taking the fittings out of service as well as when maintaining and repairing them. All other information not specifically emphasised such as transport.Handling and all work must be carried out by expert personnel or all activities must be supervised and checked. they are not designed for use as climbing aids. Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer in case of problems which cannot be solved by reference to the operating instructions. These Operating Instructions comply with the requirements of EU Directives.).2 Explanatory notes on safety information In these Operating and Installation Instructions dangers.

.Valves made from grey cast iron are not authorised for use in systems subject to TRO 110. aggressive or abrasive media. e.Refer to the data sheet for applications. Tighten the safety stuffing box if required. The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.2 Operating principles The valve is closed by turning the hand wheel clockwise (valve plug/seating function).1 Scope of applications Valves are used for "shut-off and/or throttling of media". It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance.Operating and installation instructions FABA®Long Life I FABA®·LA 4.\ ATTENTION! Do not use tools to increase the torque on the hand wheel. If conditions exceed these requirements. Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions.The valves are designed for standard operating conditions.0 Description 4. 0040103000 5104 Page 3 .Certain media require or preclude the use of special materials. The valve stem is sealed by a bellow and an outer safety stuffing box. 4. the operator should state the higher requirements when ordering. limits on use and possibilities. Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions. . ATTENTION! . The special markings on the valve must be taken into account. 6 1.g. Rev. .

.

See data sheet for weights. .5 Marking Details of the CE-marking on the valve: (E: CE-marking 0525 Notified body .Planners I construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and installing products.The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles. . valves without safety function are only allowed to bear the CE-marking DN32 onwards.remarks for .Valve mountings such as actuators. refer to datasheet. .Keep the thread and shaft of the stem free from paint.Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation. .Valves should be installed upside down only. .Valves can be installed with the stem pointing in any direction. they are not designed for use as climbing aids. handwheels. .Valves with butt weld ends.Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used. 4.Centre gaskets between the flanges. . hoods must not be used to take external forces.Remove flange covers if present. but the prefered stem position is vertical. .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions FABA®Long Life I FABA®-LA 4. 5.Connection flanges must mate exactly.Note installation position with reference to flow.Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse.Protect valves from dirt during construction work.Principal dimensions .g. . see mark on valve.0 Installation 5. . annex II. .0 Warranty I Guarantee Bj. Year of manufacture According to the Pressure Equipment Directive table 6. etc. Manufacturer Typ Type Address of manufacturer: refer to item 11. bending and torsional forces are avoided. if the medium being handled is clean. 0040103000 5104 Page 5 . e.1 General notes on installation The following pOints should be taken into account besides the general principles governing installation work: ATTENTION! '--------- .4 Technical data . . . . or as connecting points for lifting gear.Pressure-temperature-ratings . Rev. .

2 Installing valves with butt weld ends Please note that only qualified persons using appropriate equipment and working in accordance with technical rules are allowed to install fittings by welding. The responsibility for this lies with the system owner. Valves with pressure balancing plugs should be installed so.1 Fig. 3.5 bar . the valve can be opened by turning the valve further. Refer to the data sheet for information about the shape of the butt weld ends. turbulent flow directly behind pumps.If adequate pressure equalisation cannot be achieved using a pressure balancing plug. 5. ~. . BalanCing plug Pressure difference 4. .1) off the larger balancing plug (pos. --"-A--C---Aa..3 Installing valves with pressure balancing plugs ATTENTION! ARI stop valves must be equipped with pressure balancing plugs if the differential pressures listed in the table below are exceeded in the closed state. 5 Valves with pressure balancing plugs have to be installed with medium flowing over the plug (pos.."'---'· ! Note direction offlow. 3). that the pressure of the medium acts on the plug (pas. After the pressures have been equalized within the values stated in the table below. 3) as indicated by flow direction arrow on valve body. 3.. Page 6 Rev.r:. junctions etc.Mounting position FABA®-LA: Bellow seal out of media flow path. This allows the medium to pass through the plug and equalizes the pressure of the medium under the plug (pos. elbows. Especially for pulsating. other design solutions must be used instead (e.g.Pressure balancing plugs are fully effective only in closed line section. Working prinCiples: When the valve is closed.-~ ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions FABA®Long Life I FABA®-LA . 3) and the stem is vertically upright."NC. a bypass line).-. 3).N ! ~'> (n---::\ltLIj1/~"~'=~:::./""OC. 00401 03000 51 04 .. 5. anticlockwise rotation of the hand wheel lifts the pilot plug (pos.T'"-r:--E.The pressures of the medium on either side of the plug cannot be equalized if the medium is discharged into "open air".

Regional safety instructions must be adhered to. 0040103000 5104 Page 7 .The valve is in the correct position for its function. temperature and direction of flow. 5.Touching the valve when it is operating at high (> 50·C) or low « O·C) media temperatures can cause injury. .5 Installing valves with limit switches The valves with limit switches must be connected up as shown in the plans of the plant on the basis of their working principles. etc.Before putting the valve into operation.All works has been completed! . 6.Safety devices have been attached. .4 Installation data on valves with loose plugs The data given in point 5. . The set pressure is 0. Affix waming notice or protective insulation as appropriate! Before putting a new plant into operation or restatting a plant after repairs or modification. check material._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. weld beads. pressure.0 Putting the valve into operation ATTENTION I ~___ .Residues in piping and valves (ditt. always make sure that: .) inevitably lead to leakage.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions FABA®Long Life I FABA®-LA 5. The valve should only be installed in horizontal lines in an upright position.0 _ Rev. .3 applies to the maximum differential pressure.05 bar.

2) starts leaking.FABA®Long Life: -If the stem (pos.0 Care and maintenance Maintanance and maintenance-intervals have to be defined by the operator according to the requirements.\ ATTENTION! Pay attention. gradually tighten the stuffing box seal (pos. . 6: Pattern with hinged bolts fig. Postfach 701047. ~ J.If the stem (pos.) -L . 7: Pattern with gland screw . Replace bonnet at earliest opportunity! Page 8 Rev. 6) evenly in increments by means of the hex. 0-81310 Munchen to order at: or a lubricant wich is suitable for the application.6 lHf--f---25 :ad~~---4. 12) until leaking stops (Fig.1) until leaking stops (Fig.iir====12 11 1'/.----6 8 ~-7 fig.FABA®LA: ."--.Observe safety instructions! . +----15 ~§. 3.Keep the stem well greased! .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions FABA®Long Life I FABA®-LA 7. Replace bonnet at earliest opportunity! . tighten the bolted gland (pos.~--13 ~. ] . nuts (pos. 7).Lubricant: e. 00401030005104 . 6).t---28 UHihL--. 4. that the lubricant is suitable for the media.2 -+-----15 ~~~'----_-_2 'f'i 13 .g.2) starts leaking and a safety stuffing box is used. 4. Kluberpaste HEL 46-450 (at valves for oxygen: Oxigenoex FF 250) Kluber Lubrication Munchen KG.

For safety reasons we recommend that valves only be repacked when depressurised. In the case of corrosive or aggressive mediums.When cutting the new packing from the roll. 8: Split packing ring Mounting of the bonnet: .Retighten the stuffing box packing if required and re-pack it in good time.0 before dismantling the valve. .Before reassembling the unit. .Tighten the hexagon nuts (hexagon screws for valves of cast iron) evenly crosswise. make sure that the ends are cut with a slant fig. 9) must be inserted. remember that the bearing surface must be cleaned and 2 new gaskets (pas.Refer to paint 10. . .Tightening torque's for hexagon nuts I screws: ON hexagon nuts / hexagon screws M 10 M 12 M 16 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 27 Torque (Nm) 15-32 40-65 80-100 125-150 200 250-400 500 15-30 35-50 75-100 80-120 150-200 340-410 340-410 Rev. drain and ventilate the valve before replacing the packing. . .Operating and installation instructions FABA®Long Life I FABA®-LA ATTENTION / '--------~ .Set the cover in place.0 and 11. . 0040103000 5104 Page 9 .Replace stuffing box packings only after the system has cooled down and the pressure in the plant has been relieved.

ARNIATUREN Operating and installation instructions FABA®Long Life I FABA®·LA Application of lubricating nipple 1.\ -It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults. Page 10 Rev. fig.) 2. ATTENTION! If malfunctions cannot be eliminate with the help of the following table "9. 6 J. Lubrication (Lubricating nipple not screwed in up to the stop.) Special version: without lubricating nipple (threaded hole closed with protective cap). handwheel is not clamped. 00401030005104 .0 Troubleshooting table".0 Troubleshooting In the event of malfunction or faulty operating performance check that the installation and adjustment work has been carried out and completed in accordance with these Operating Instructions. the supplier or manufacturer should be consulted. 9 8. Locking screw (Locking the handwheel by turning the lubricating nipple clockwise.) 3. Lubrication and locking (Lubrication is possible with the handwheellocked.

renew packing in stuffing box seal (pos. 6). 6) Valve difficult to move or cannot be opened (Lubricant: refer to page 8) Wrong direction of rotation Turn in correct direction (anticlockwise to open valve) Lubricating nipple flocking screw Loosen lubricating nipple flocking tightened screw Valve stem leaking Bellows seal damaged Replace top of bellows seal at earliest opportunity! Gland screw (pos.read point 10. 1-4. screw the stroke limiter higher Flange broken between Bolts tightened unevenly. 32. 4. 12) until leakage stops. 00401030005104 Page 11 . Use a valve with pressure balancing plug (refer to point 5.I-2) Valve not sufficiently open Dirt sieve clogged Piping system clogged stem (pos. Replace bonnet at earliest opportunity! stuffing box gland (pos. Re-align piping and fit new valve! valve and piping Mating flanges not properly aligned Rev. fig. 1. 6.2) f plug (pos. Replace bonnet at earliest opportunity! If necessary.I-2) Little flow Open valve. 1-4). Check piping system. screw screw cannot be opened Stroke limiter is countered Loosen counter nut. page 8) Corrective measures Open valve Remove flange covers (pos. Install a strainer upstream of valve (suspended solids). 27) (fig.0 before restarting the plant I Fault No flow Possible cause Valve closed Flange covers not removed (pos. nut (fig. Grease stem (pos.2) dry (fig. Pull hand wheel tight without tools Seat (pos. 32.read point 6. fig.0 prior to dismantling and repair work! .~ ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions FABA®Long Life I FABA®-LA 9. 3) damaged Replaced valve or rework sealing by foreign particles (fig. page 4) surfaces Pressure difference too high. 4. Valve with throttling plug + Lubricating nipple flocking screw has Release lubricating nipple flocking stroke limiter + locking been tightened.0 and 11. 1-4) until leakage stops -Hex.2) (fig. Observe warnings (Fig. 12) slack Tighten gland screw (pos.0 Troubleshooting table ATTENTION! .3) Medium contaminated Clean valve. 27) slack Tighten stuffing box gland (pos. 6 and 7)! Leakage across valve seat Valve not properly closed. Clean f replace sieve.

KG.com E-mail: info. datasheets and relavant regulations. aggressive or toxic media.Purge piping systems in case of caustic.0 Warranty I Guarantee The extent and period of warranty cover are specified in the "Standard Terms and Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co.- ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions FABA®Long Life I FABA®·LA 10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part ATTENTION! The following pOints must be observed: . Justified complaints will be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a specialist appointed by us.Medium must be cool. the railway company or carrier company immediately or else claims for replacements from these companies will be invalidated. . This warranty also does not cover any damage which occurs during operation under conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements. in the contract of sale itself. . 0-33756 Schlol? Holte-Stukenbrock Telephone (+495207) 994-0 Telefax (+49 5207) 994-158 or 159 Internet: http://www. . GERMAN QUALITY VALVES ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. inflammable.com Page 12 Rev. No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling or disregard of operating and installation instructions.vertrieb@ari-annaturen. ARMATUREN Technology for the Future.ari-armaturen. KG" valid at the time of delivery or. We guarantee freedom of faults in compliance with state-of-the-art technology and the confirmed application. by way of departure.Plant must be drained. design modifications or natural wear. Any damage incurred during transport should not be reported to us but rather to the competent cargo-handling depot.Pressureless pipe system. The right to replacement delivery is excluded. 11. No claims will be accepted beyond the scope of this warranty. 00401030005104 . installation of external parts. The warranty shall not cover maintenance work.

069 Applied standards: DIN 3230 DIN 3840 AD 2000 leaflet A4 .08.0 EC declaration of conformity ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co.Cast steel . annex II. 044. 068. Rev. 066. that according to the above mentioned Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) the below listed products comply and have been approved according to table 6. 040.n.Forged steel Schlor.067.• ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions FABA®Long Life I FABA®-LA 12.dd~ . Holte-Stukenbrock.z" . module H through LLOYD'S REGISTER QUALITY ASSURANCE (BS-Nr. 27. 046. Certificate-No: 50003/1 Stop valves with stainless steel bellows FABA® LongLife Type 031. 33756 SchloB Holte-Stukenbrock EC declaration of conformity as defined by the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC Herewith we declare.2002 . Mergelheide 56-60. 0-20095 Hamburg. Managing director) Page 13 . 0525).049. 0040103000 5104 (Brectim. 047. 20. KG.Cast iron with spheroidal graphite . 041. Mbnckebergstr..

.

.

.............. .............0 Storage and transport ..................... 14 7... 17 7/2R1ePRlac~ment of infterlnal padrts ................1 Plug design .............1 PTFE V-ring unit design ...........................5 Marking ........... 9 instructions ....3........................ 10 2 ..... 8 6....1 Replacement of stem sealings ........... l~~ ~~~ Series 440..............................0 Troubleshooting .. 8 5..............2 Tightening torques for seat rings ... 15 10............0 Notes on possible dangers ......... 7 5....1...4 Technical data ..................... 16 12......... .................. 16 11...............3 Replacement olthe seat ring .. 6 4..................................446 1............ 2 7................2 7.....................................................STEVI® 440 I 441................. 445 Contents Series 441..........3 Bellows seal design ..............................................................0 Troubleshooting table ...............2 Operating principles ...................0 Putting the valve into operation ............. 11 3......6 5.....................1 Tightening torques for ....1 Significance of symbols .........2 Explanatory not es on safety·In forma t'Ion ......... 14 8.....................0 Instaliation .........2..3...........................................1.. 9 2............... 7......2 Replacement of seals of pressure balanced plugs ................................... ep acement 0 p ug an stem .........1 Scope of applications ......... 2 7.. 1122 Rev..........................3 Diagram ....2.................................................. 5 4.... 13 7................................................. 7 5.0 Description ....1 General notes on installation .3 Tightening torques .................. 3 4..........0 Care and maintenance ......0 General information on operating 7..... 0040301000 3504 englisch ..................................ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Straight through control valves .......... 13 7......... 9 2............... 14 9...........................2 Requirements at the place of installation .. 2 4............3.................4 4.....2 Stuffing box packing design .........................................3 4.............................................3 Installation instructions concerning actuators ....... 14 7.......................... 9 ......... 2 7..............................................0 EC declaration of conformity I Manufacturers declaration ...... ........1.. 445 1446 -<~[ ~ ~.....0 Warranty I Guarantee .............0 Dismantling the valve or the top part ..3 4.

. operation. A T.In addition. handwheels. .The paint is a base coat to protect against corrosion during transportation and storage.\ ATTENTION! . current regional safety requirements must be applied and observed when taking the fittings out of service as well as when maintaining and repairing them. All other information not specifically emphasised such as transport.0 General information on operating instructions These operating instructions provide information on mounting and maintaining the fittings. maintenance and repair.2 Explanatory notes on safety information In these Operating and Installation Instructions dangers. I Warning of general danger. vibration. installation. See catalog sheet for weights.445/446 1.). It is vital to comply with these practices and to monitor compliance. storage.Protect against external force (like impact. . They are binding on the transport. The notes and warnings must be observed and adhered to. hoods must not be used to take external forces. ----------------~ 2.0 Storage and transport ~ . thr. .STEVI® 440/441. 3. or as connecting paints for lifting gear.1 Significance of symbols L ~ ~ Iw'. risks and items of safety information are highlighted to attract special attention. The manufacturer reserves the right to introduce technical modifications at any time. e. they are not designed for use as climbing aids. Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer in case of problems which cannot be solved by reference to the operating instructions.At -20·C to +65·C. 0040301000 3504 J. It is the owner's responsibility to define areas of responsibility and competence and to monitor the personnel. etc.Handling and all work must be carried out by expert personnel or all activities must be supervised and checked.TENT/ON I .0 Notes on possible dangers 2. product documentation and on the device itself) must also be complied with to the fullest extent in order to avoid faults which in turn can cause serious injury to persons or damage to property.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Str. . Information marked with the above symbol and "ATTENTION!" describe practices.Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used..Valve mountings such as actuators.g. These Operating Instructions comply with the requirements of EU Directives. 2. operating and maintenance instructions as well as technical data (in the operating instructions. Page 2 Rev. a failure to comply with which can result in serious injury or danger of death for users or third parties or in material damage to the system or the environment. installation. Do not damage paint protection. start-up. control valves . .

Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions. control valves· STEVI® 440 1441. the operator should state the higher reqUirements when ordering. In the case of control valves with perforated plugs. 4.g. thr.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Str. . The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. Rev. If a pneumatic actuator is to be used on a straight-way valve with a perforated plug with the fluid moving in the closing direction.The valves are designed for standard operating conditions. The special markings on the valve must be taken into account. Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions. but liquids flow through in the closing direction.Valves made from grey cast iron are not authorised for use in systems subject to TRO 110. aggressive or abrasive media. limits on use and possibilities. a higher clOSing force will be needed. If conditions exceed these requirements. gases and vapours flow against the closing directions. Four plug types are available to suit the various applications: parabolic plug (standard) perforated plug V-port plug pressure balanced plug The flow through control valves is always against the closing direction. ATTENTION! . gases and vapours in chemical and other processing plants and for plant engineering". This is to prevent vibration as the plug approaches the closed position. arrangements should be made to relieve the pressure as far as this is compatible with service conditions. e.1 Scope of applications Valves are used for "controlling the flow of liquids. 00403010003504 Page 3 . If the forces generated by the actuators are too low. 445/446 4.Certain media require or preclude the use of special materials.2 Operating principles ARI control valves are especially suitable for actuation by pneumatic or electrical actuators. .0 Description 4. . It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance.Refer to the data sheet for applications.

J c L ~4--rm=-----2 0 8 ~~==-----20 7 ----20. control valves· STEVI® 440 1441. ~§:==::~15 ~ 'II 9 8 3 12 I 1U~~===201 ~ i l l 9 204 4 '12 3 I Fig.'17 20.3 Diagram 18 19 17 12 16 14 h~~=m--IO 7 20.3 ~1l1).-.j-. 2: Series 441 DN15-100 Fig.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Str.12 "0 .2 206 f-H--i+----7-.445/446 4.\2-~$~..'10 ~~. thr..20. 1: Series 440 DN15-100 Page 4 Rev. 0040301000 3504 .10 20.

STEVI® 440 1441.1 Plug design / / Fig. 4: Series 445 DN15-100 (only stainless steel) Fig.3. 0040301000 3504 Page 5 . thr. ''''·-'1 Fig.~ ARMATUREiN Operating and installation instructions Str.445/446 I "". 5: Series 446 DN15-100 (only stainless steel) 4. 7: Design with V-port plug (Design with pressure balanced plug refer to Fig. 6: Design with perforated plug Fig. 16) Rev. control valves .

=:.Jlol. refer to data sheet.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Str.::::::=~~--<=customer-specific lo. thr. 4. information Serial-No. control valves . 445/446 4. 8 Address of manufacturer: refer to item 11.Pressure4emperature-ratings.Principal dimensions .3 K\ Pack ~ ~=t} -[~~====:::I~.0 Warranty I Guarantee According to the Pressure Equipment Directive table 6.4 Technical data for . Stem sealing l __~:m::T~s:ure=-+. and 2. valves without safety function are only allowed to bear the CE-marking DN32 onwards.STEVI® 440 1441.C~J ~ I Manufacturer Pi'l CE-marking Notified booy L: 0525 Material of internal parts Year of manufacture clear speech (1. annex II.5 Marking Type-Number Kvs-value ~~~~~g~ristic ON Nominal diameter Plug design - 4'.1 and O-sign Page 6 Rev.. Valves with safety function are: Type 440 DP-G 1441 DP-G and Type 440 I 440-D with FR2. position) Fig.::r:::S:. etc. 0040301000 3504 .

Refer to data sheet for weights. .Remove flange covers if present.The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles.Valve mountings such as actuators.0 Installation 5. . . Rev. or as connecting pOints for lifting gear.Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse. bending and torsional forces are avoided.Connection flanges must mate exactly. 0040301000 3504 Page 7 .Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation. . . e. .1 General notes on installation The following items should be taken into account besides the general principles governing installation work: ATTENTION { .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Str.Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used.Note installation position with reference to flow. control valves· STEVI® 440 1441. . they are not designed for use as climbing aids. hoods must not be used to take external forces. thr. handwheels.Centre gaskets between the flanges. . 445/446 5. . Planners I construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and installing products.g. . see mark on valve.Protect valves from dirt during construction work.Keep the thread and shaft of the stem free from paint. .Strainers or filters should be installed before the valves.

STEVI® 440 1441.2 Requirements at the place of installation The place of installation should be easily accessible and provide ample space for maintenance and removing the actuator. ATTENTION f Care must be taken with the bel/ow type valves when actuators are mounted or removed. It is not permitted to mantle I dismantle actuators with valves operating and service conditions (temperature and pressure). 445/446 5. To ensure that the control valves function correctly. Sufficient space must be left for the maintenance of the stem packing.d. During assembly work. Stop valves should be installed before and after the control valve to enable maintenance working without draining the piping system. The actuators must be assemble as describe in the operating instructions during conversion and maintenance. thr. 10: Pipeline horizontally Permissible actuator weights for valves with unsupported horizontal stems: The pipes must be lagged to protect the actuators from excessive heat.3 Installation instructions concerning actuators Normally.50 29kN for ON 65-100 Series 441/446 18kN for ON 15-100 Page 8 Rev. the pipe run should be straight for at least 2 x n. (Hold the valve-stem against turning with an open-end wrenCh!) =J When retrofitting actuators. the maximum permissible force for valve actuation must be taken into account: Series 440 I 445 12kN for ON 15. 6 /. control valves . 9: Pipeline vertically 20 kg for ON 15 .32 25 kg for ON 40 . control valves are supplied complete with actuator fitted.d.\. Inclined or horizontal installation without supports is permissible only with light actuators.Operating and installation instructions Str. the two distance columns (or joke) have to be above each other in the vertical plane. For this installation position. 0040301000 3504 . 5. the plug is not be turned on its seating at closing pressure. upstream and 6 x n.65 35 kg for ON 80-100 Fig. The valve should preferably installed vertically with the actuator at the top. Ii Fig. downstream of the valve.

All works has been completed! .0 Putting the valve into operation ATTENTION f . 12) consisting of: 1 backing ring 4 sealing rings 1 cover ring Owing to the installed compression spring (pos. .0 before dismantling the valve. etc.. . 15).When replacing PTFE V-ring unit (pos. 7.. weld beads.-- "--" 7. 17) must be replaced.Safety devices have been attached. temperature and direction of flow.\ ~ Refer to item 10. 11: Rev. . always make sure that: .Residues in piping and valves (dirt.1.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Str.1 Replacement of stem sea lings 7. . Affix warning notice or protective insulation as appropriate! Before putting a new plant into operation or restarting a plant after repairs or modification. Damaged stems must also be replaced (refer to item 7. check material. (Refer to operating instructions for actuator!) . 0040301000 3504 Page 9 . the ring pack is worn out and must be replaced" '~T rr:JI "19 /17 12 Replacement of PTFE V-ring units: ATTENTION! ~-"--------- . If the stem starts leaking..Gasket (pos.1. this stem packing is self-adjusting.Regional safety instructions must be adhered to. pressure. .0 Care and maintenance Maintenance and maintenance intervals have to be defined by the operator according to the service conditions.Before putting the valve into operation.The valve is in the correct position for its function. Fig. control valves· STEVI® 440/441. . 11). thr. make sure that the parts are installed in the correct order and positions (refer to Fig.0 and 11. 12). .445/446 6.Touching the valve when it is operating at high (> 50 ·C) or low « 0 ·C) media temperatures can cause injury.1 PTFE V-ring unit design PTFE V-ring unit (pos.) inevitably lead to leakage.2 for instructions) since a new ring pack will soon start leaking again if the stem is damaged.Remove actuator.

ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Str. control valves .Fig. (Refer to operating instructions for actuator!) -Insert new packing ring as shown in Fig.f L---. 25). 23) must be inserted into the gland. 12: Stuffing box packing t~/~~~?) {~/ II Page 10 If a split packing ring is used. Rev. Replacement of stuffing box packings: 6 J.2 Stuffing box packing design . 13. 12 . immediately tighten the screw joint (pos. ) Fig./ Fig. 23) requires maintenance.The stuffing box packing (pos. thr. . 445/446 7. .\ ATTENTION [ ------------------------- Refer to item 10. 23) stops leaking. . 13.1.If leaks can no longer be stopped by tightening the screw jOint (pos.0 before dismantling the valve. 0040301000 3504 .Remove actuator. 25) gradually until the packing (pos.The service life of stuffing box packings (pos. .If leaks develop.2 for instructions) since a new ring pack will soon start leaking again if the stem is damaged.0 and 11. cut with a chamfer as shown in Fig. 13: Split packing ring Damaged stems must also be replaced (refer to item 7. 23) can be increased by checking regularly leakage.STEVI® 440/441. a new packing ring (pos. /" ~l / .

6) and 1 gasket (pos. . 20.Tighten screw joint (pos.Drive pin (pos. 0040301000 3504 Page 11 .1. the bellows seal (pos. 20. 20. 20. .Detach mounting bonnet (pos. .Extract stem/bellows unit (pos.1).17). . . (For tightening torques refer to item 7. thr. iOu.Unscrew plug (pos. 20).3) down. 20. . .2).3) from the bellows housing (pos. 20.4451446 7. 11).\ ATTENTION! "=~n/202 208. 20.Replace 2 gaskets (pos.W 206 203 20.Assemble in reverse order. I 4~.STEVI® 4401441. . 4) out with a drift. The leak can initially be stopped by tightening the screw joint (pos. 9).~ ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Str. 11.1) .8).3.Bolt new parts together and drill them. (Refer to operating instructions for actuator!) .10). .0 before 10. control valves .Detach bellows assembly (pos.3 Bellows seal design If the stem leaks.Loose nuts (pos. . 20. Replacement of bellows seals: ill Refer to itemthe valve. . 20.3) is defective.8) and tighten them crosswise. Stem and bellows (pos. --[1- Fig.Slacken screw joint (pos. 3).Secure with nuts (pos. 20.17) by about one turn. 14: Series 441/446 br' Rev.Remove actuator.0 and dismantling . 11 1. 20. 20.17) gradually up to tightness of the stuffing box packing (pos.Press stem/bellows unit (pos.3) can only be replaced together. . 20.Loose nuts (pos.

-J . .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Str. Page 12 Rev.1. .0 before.Remove actuator. 19 or 25) by about 1 tum.Secure with nuts (pos.1.1 Replacement of plug and stem 6 1.DN125-150: Unscrew plug (pos.\ ATTENTION! I Refer to item 10. 0040301000 3504 . (Refer to operating instructions for actuator!) Series 440/445: . (For tightening torques refer to item 7. 9). . thr.0 and 11. 4) out with a drift.Replace gasket (pos.DN125-150: Drive pin (pos.2 Replacement of internal parts 7.Assemble in reverse order. . . 7). ----. control valves .DN125-150: Extract plug (pos. 11).DN15-1 00: Extract plug/stem assembly (pos. 3).STEVI® 440/441. .Detach mounting bonnet (pos. drill and pin them. .) Fig.Slacken screw joint (pos. . 3) and stem (pos.2.DN125-150: Bolt new parts together. 15: Series 440 1445 DN15-100 9 Series 441/446: For replacement of plug and stem with bellows sealing (Series 441/446) refer to item 7.3.. . 3). 5).3.Loose nuts (pos. . 11) and tighten them crosswise. .445/446 7. I dismantling the valve.

11). . .445/446 7. ! ATTENTION! Refer to item 10. thr. 2). . smooth with fine abrasive if necessary. 31).2.Insert new piston seal (pos.0 before dismantling the valve.1.Replace gasket (pos. 2).Replace 2 gaskets (pos.Assemble valve top part. (Refer to operating instruction for actuator!) .0 before dismantling the valve.Remove actuator. (For tightening torques refer to item 7.Secure with nuts (pos. .2.Loose nuts (pos.g. 11) and tighten them crosswise. .3.0 and 11. .Replace respectively recondition seat ring (pos. control valves· STEVI® 440 1441. 0040301000 3504 Page 13 .2. 2) with a special wrench (can be obtained from the manufacturer). 9). 32). 16).2. 11) and tighten them crosswise.Detach valve top part. (For tightening torques refer to item 7. . .) Rev. . (Refer to operating instructions for actuator!) .3 Replacement of the seat ring Only with control valves series 445 I 446 the seat ring is screwed in. . 1) and apply with suitable lubricant.Clean sliding surface of guide bush (pos. 9). \ ----- 7. .Unscrew seat ring (pos. .3.Prise worn piston seal (pos.Remove actuator.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Str.Secure with nuts (pos.) Fig. 32) out of groove in plug with suitable tool (e.Clean thread and sealing taper in body (pos.2 Replacement of seals of pressure balanced plugs I A~. . ill IZ\ ATTENTION! Refer to item 10.Replace guide ring (pos. (For tightening torques refer to item 7. .Assemble in reverse order. 16: Pressure balanced plug I. taking care that it is in the correct position (refer to Fig. .1.3.0 and 11. . .Remove plug as described in item 7. screwdriver). 30).Install seat ring (pos.) .

1 Tightening torques for M 10 = 15 .0 Troubleshooting table". thr.0 Troubleshooting I n the event of malfunction or faulty operating performance check that the installation and adjustment work has been carried out and completed in accordance with these Operating Instructions. 1.3 Tightening torques 7. 00403010003504 .\ ATTENTION I Page 14 Rev. If malfunctions cannot be eliminate with the help of the following table "9. -It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults. ill. the supplier or manufacturer should be consulted. control valves· STEVI® 440 1441.2 Tightening torques for seat rings ON 15/20 ON 25/32 ON 40/50 ON 65 ON 80 ON100 = = = = = = 100 Nm 150 Nm 350 Nm 480 Nm 660 Nm 980 Nm ! Refer to operating instructions for actuator concerned for installing actuators! 8.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Str. 445/446 7.30 Nm 35 .3.50 Nm 80 -120 Nm M 12 M 16 = = 7.3.

Valve stem leaking. Flange covers not removed. - Valve stem moves in jerks.1.2.1. Clean seating and plug with suitable solvent.1 Tighten screw joint (pos. refer to item 7.3 Leakage too high when valve is closed. Valve stem or plug cannot be Seating and plug clogged with dirt. Replace plug and seating.0 prior to dismantling and repair work! • read item 6. PTFE V-ring unit damaged or worn. Little flow Valve not sufficiently open. 12). refer to item 7. Replace plug. Open valve (using actuator). Slacken screw joint (pos.0 Troubleshooting table ATTENTION! • read item 10. refer to item 7. Replace ring pack (pos. Rev. Corrective measures Open valve (using actuator). Dirt sieve clogged. moved. 25/20.1. 00403010003504 Page 15 . vented. Fit valve with higher Kvs value. control valves· STEVI® 440/441. Piston sealing ring worn (pressurerelieved valves). seal. Check piping system.2. thr. refer to item 7. Valve plug seized in seating or guide owing to deposits or dirt in medium.17) slightly. Sealing edge of seating damages or worn.3.1. Clean 1 replace sieve.2. especially with V-port and perforated plugs. smooth rough spots. Valve must nor start leaking! Clean internals. Remove flange covers. spring force not fully effective.ARMATURElN Operating and installation instructions Str. fit dirt sieve if necessary. Valve plug slightly seized owing to solid dirt particles. Stuffing box gland too slack in valves with stuffing box packings. refer to item 7. Replace seating (only at Series 445/446). Sealing surfaces of plug eroded or worn. - Bellows defective in valves with bellow Replace bellows unit. Replace sealing ring. 25). fit strainer if necessary. refer to item 7.0 before restarting the plant! ~----------------- Fault Noftow Possible cause Valve closed. 445/446 9. Install more powerful actuator. Pneumatic actuator not completely Vent actuator air chamber completely. Stuffing box sealing too tight (for valves with graphite pac kings). Piping system clogged. Kvs value of valve unsuitable. ~c Actuator not powerful enough.0 and 11. Check service data.2 Clean internals of valve. Seating andlor plug dirty. use parts made from different material if necessary.2.

11. KG. GERMAN QUALITY VALVES ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Str.0 Warranty I Guarantee The extent and period of warranty cover are specified in the "Standard Terms and Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co. design modifications or natural wear. D-33756 Schlo~ Holte-Stukenbrock Telephone (+49 5207) 994-0 Telefax (+49 5207) 994-158 or 159 Internet: http://www.com E-mail: info. The warranty shall not cover maintenance work.Purge piping systems in case of caustic. thr.\ ~~-=======~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--. ATTENTION! The following paints must be observed: .STEVI® 4401441. by way of departure. The right to replacement delivery is excluded. installation of external parts.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part ~ J.ari-armaturen. inflammable.Medium must be cool.Plant must be drained. . We guarantee freedom of faults in compliance with state-of-the-art technology and the confirmed application. ARMATUREN Technology for the Future. 0040301000 3504 . .com Page 16 Rev. Any damage incurred during transport should not be reported to us but rather to the competent cargo-handling depot. the railway company or carrier company immediately or else claims for replacements from these companies will be invalidated.vertrieb@ari-armaturen. control valves . datasheets and relavant regulations. No claims will be accepted beyond the scope of this warranty. No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling or disregard of operating and installation instructions. aggressive or toxic media. 4451446 10. KG" valid at the time of delivery or. This warranty also does not cover any damage which occurs during operation under conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements.Pressureless pipe system. in the contract of sale itself. Justified complaints will be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a specialist appointed by us.

4451446 12. Certificate-No: 50003/1 Straight through stop and control valves Type 405. Mergelheide 56-60. D-20095 Hamburg.440. SchloB Holte-Stukenbrock.0 EC declaration of conformity I Manufacturers declaration ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. If the supplied model is intended to be incorporated into machinery or assembled with other machinery to constitute machinery covered by this directive and must be put into service until the machinery into which it is be incorporated has been declared in conformity with the provisions of the ECMachinery Directive as amended by 98/37/EC. 26.441. 0-33756 SchloB Holte-Stukenbrock EC declaration of conformity as defined by the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC Herewith we declare.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Str. 426. Module H. 27. 441 Applied standard: DIN EN 60534 part 1 VDINDE 3844 sheet 1 DIN 3840 AD 2000 leaflet A4 . Certificate-No: 50003/2 Straight through control valves with safety function Type 440. KG. thr.11.Cast steel .445. Managing director) Rev. control valves . module H or module H1 (with safety function: also EC type test according to module B+D) through LLOYD'S REGISTER QUALITY ASSURANCE (NB-No. Monckebergstr.STEVI® 4401441.Cast iron with spheroidal graphite . 460.Cast steel .Forged steel Manufacturers declaration as defined by the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC Herewith we declare.425. 0040301000 3504 Page 17 .422.470.Cast iron with spheroidal graphite . 0525).462. that according to the above mentioned Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) the below listed products comply and have been approved according to table 6. 480 Applied standard: DIN EN 60534 part 1 VDINDE 3844 sheet 1 DIN 3840 AD 2000 leaflet A4 . annex II. 446.471.Forged steel Module H1.2002 .

.

.

..............................................."""". '" ..........................................................................................................................".............................................................2 ARI-PREMIO 12 -15 kN ""...............0 Description ....... 14 5...........".......""........""""" ............... ...........2.........................................................................................................................................................0 Storage and transport ......................................................................................2....."....................""""""""""""""""""""""""""".............................................. 12 5.•...................................•...........................................3 Parts list..........3........................................0 Notes on possible dangers .......... 00405010004706 englisch ............1 Significance of symbols ..""" 12 5......................... ".........0 Installation ..............15 kN ..3 Diagram ..............."""""""........................""""""..............•................................•........................................................•....2 Explanatory notes on safety information ......1 ARI-PREM I0 2.................................... 11 5.•.........1 General installation data ..................................•..................... 5 4........................... 3 2...................... ".......................... 5 4.............................................. 6 4...•.............2 ARI-PREM I0 12 ..2 Manual operation ................................... 7 4...........••....1 ARI-PREM I0 2...... 5 4..............................••......................•.........................""""""""""""""""............................................. 3 2.. 15 Rev............................................................1 Field of application ....................3........Operating and Installation Instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO Contents 1...............................................................•........................................................................................................................................................."".................................. 3 2.........................".............................2 ......................................................."""""""""........3......................... 4 4............ 6 4....4 Technical data ............. 8 4.................................•......................................""""""""""""........ 9 4.. 4 3.................................2 Method of functioning .......................5 kN ........0 General infonnation on operating instructions .....5 Dimensions .......................................................................2 .........................."""" ............. 14 5..................5 kN ......

..3 Setting the additional travel switches (S4/S5 and S24/S25)................. ............ 50 9..14................ 32 5................................................................... .............. ............1 Wiring diagram ARI-PREMIO 2..... ........................ ................................... 25 5.... ....................... ...... ....... 22 5.....................5....2 ....... 50 7.. ..2........................ ................1 Mounting for valve-lift up to 30 mm (yoke version) .................13... ...5..................................................... 20 5....5................................. 38 5.....5..................... 47 5....1 Fitting the DC MODULE to ARI-PREMIO ...................0 EC declaration of confonmity ............2 Connection boards PA or NA (only 2.............................15 kN 1 Ph-/ 3 Ph.................................................11................ ...... .......5........ ............... ..........1 Installing the phase control relay ........ 37 5...........5 kN + 3-step DC module ............................................ .5....14 Electronic position indicator RI32 ............................... ........ .......5......6..................................... ................................................5...13..... 35 5....5..................4............1 Installation of the dTRON 316 .... 46 5..........................4.................... ..5................. .............. 49 6............. ................................. ..............................12.standard feature ................13....................................................3 Electronic position indicator (RI32) and position controller (ES11) together in the actuator................................... .........5.......... 24 5.......................... .......... 31 5.. 34 5..................5.......3 Wiring diagramARI-PREMIO 2............... 43 5...................5 kN + DC module .....Position indicator RI32................ ..............14........................... 36 5................................... 52 12................ 18 5..................48 5........ 37 5......................... 45 5. .............................................................. .................5..10..............................................0 Troubleshooting table ........................................2 Installing the R132 electronic position indicator in the PREMia......... 21 5................. ......2 . error-proof position feedback ............ 40 5.............................3.... .............9 Electronic position indicator (RI21) and position controller (ESll) together in the actuator ............................ .............. .......5...................................... ........ .............1 Useful range of the linear motion potentiometer ....................13..........0 Putting the actuator into operation .............. 53 . 27 5...................................................................................5 Settings ..... 48 5.......1 ARI-PREMIO 12 ................... . ..........1 Torque and travel switches ............ ..........................0 Warranty I Guarantee ...3........................................ ..8 Electronic position controller ESll .. ...... 38 5.....................................................15 kN ...... 40 5..................................0 Dismantlement of thrust actuator ............14...............2 Electrical connection with ES11 or dTRON 316........... .............................. 25 5................. .................................................................2 Setting the potentiometer...............14.. ....3 Installation instructions for mounting to valves ...........................8 Setting zero point and slope span .................................. ............................................................. 39 5...............................14............ 42 .6 Heating .. ..with reversing contactor....... ......................5.............................. 51 10..........without reversing contactor.....................5.................2 ..5........... 34 5....2 Setting of standard travel switch (S3) ........0 Care and maintenance .................................................. 35 5........................1 Installation of heating .............5......................................................13 DC-MODULE ...............5...... .......7 Electronic position indicator RI21 . ....5..........................2 Wiring diagram ARI-PREMIO 12 ......... ......... 20 5.5..14...............................5.4.....3......................... 23 5............. ...................... 44 5......................................45 5..........................5........... .................................................5.................................................................................................................. ............5................. 38 5.......... 24 5............DC-Module ................. 21 5..................... .................................4................ 47 5....... .............................5.................................................4.....5............5......................5 Potentiometer installation .......................5...5....................................... ............................ 16 5......0 Troubleshooting ...............................................................5 kN ....................5..............................................5. ....12 Phase control relay .................3 Travel switch .............................. ......4......................................5..5..4 Electrical connection ..................... ............................1 Installing the reversing contactor ....................5...................... ............................................................................................ ....................... ....... 24 5......5.............................5..... 39 5...... .. ..... ........ ......................... 16 5.................................................. .............................4 Technical data .........2 ...................5..2 ARI-PREMIO 12 ................ 5.................................4.6 Wiring diagram .............................14..................5 Error-proof potentiometer for single-channel.............. ..3 Connection ...11....................... ........7 Connection conditions ........................ ..1 Installing the potentiometer ...............11 Integrated reversing contactor . 32 5.. 52 11...................................................................................5 kN) .. 29 5.....................4 Wiring diagram ARI-PREMIO 2..........15 kN 1 Ph-/ 3 Ph.............. 45 5........................28 5...2 Mounting for valve lift over 30 mm to 80 mm (column version) .. .......... .......................................................................................... ......................................... .....1 Installation of additional travel switches................................. ......2 Technical data . .............14................ 29 5.................................................3.3...............................................2..1 Setting the potentiometer on conductive plastic basis.......... 50 8.............10 Integrated temperature controller dTRON 316 ....................5........ ................4 Potentiometers .......

00405010004706 Page 3 .1 Significance of symbols [6 1. The notes and warnings must be observed and adhered to.\ ATTENTION! ~ I Warning of general danger. L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ LI7\ ~ I _____·_·_·__ A\ ATTENTION! I Warning of dangerous voltage. .0 General information on operating instructions These operating instructions provide information on mounting and maintaining the fittings. operation.Handling and all work must be carried out by expert personnel or all activities must be supervised and checked.~ ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 1. . Danger when not observing the operating and installation instructions! Before installing. operating.0 Notes on possible dangers 2. They are binding on the transport.In addition. VKI@I kt. These Operating Instructions comply with the requirements of EU Directives. installation. Danger though voltage! Before dismantling the hood. The manufacturer reserves the right to introduce technical modifications at any time.lt~1 Exposed to injury! Don't touch the turning handwheel when the motor is running. maintenance or dismantling read and observe the instructions. It is the owner's responsibility to define areas of responsibility and competence and to monitor the personnel. start-up. switch of the electrical source and secure against turning on again. storage. Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer in case of problems which cannot be solved by reference to the operating instructions. maintenance and repair. Exposed to injury! Don't put your hand into the up or downwards moving appliance. current regional safety requirements must be applied and observed when taking the fittings out of service as well as when maintaining and repairing them. 2.

Non-compliance may lead to death. 3. It is vital to comply with these practices and to monitor compliance.0 Storage and transport ATTENTION! ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~_~ 0 . a failure to comply with which can result in serious injury or danger of death for users or third parties or in material damage to the system or the environment.g. ~~~~~~~---. Page 4 00405010004706 . All other information not specifically emphasised such as transport.. .Valve mountings such as drives.l . free from dirt.Do not unpack thrust drive or setting equipment assembly prior to installation. hoods must not be used to take extemal forces.4 Technical data" for weights. .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 2. product documentation and on the device itself) must also be complied with to the fullest extent in order to avoid faults which in turn can cause serious injury to persons or damage to property.. vibration etc.2 Explanatory notes on safety information In these Operating and Installation Instructions dangers.Protect against external force (impact.At _20° to +70 e dry. See "4. . . Information marked with the above symbol and "ATTENTION!" describe practices. injury or damage to property due to persons falling or parts being dropped. operating and maintenance instructions as well as technical data (in the operating instructions.•. risks and items of safety information are highlighted to attract special attention.Do not soil or damage type identification plate and wiring diagram on the controller. or as connecting points for lifting gear. e.Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used. . installation. handwheels.). they are not designed for use as climbing aids.

which is safeguarded against torsion. The load-dependent switches serve to protect the valve and thrust actuator against damage. The drive spindle. See data sheet for areas of application. Additional the compatibility to this directives has to be maintained in case of expansion or other changing of the ambient conditions.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 4. the lift of the thrust actuator will be set to the stroke distance of the valve. Any use of the thrust actuator beyond the specified technical data or improper use of the actuator is deemed to be not for the intended purpose. is mounted to the valve. the spindle nut is pressed against a set of springs so as to produce closing force. easy access is provided to the switchgear and indicating feature. The torsion safeguarding feature also serves as a lift indicator. Transfer of force is effected via a coupling safeguarded against torsion. The electrical components are accommodated separately from the gearbox underneath a sealed hood. The rotary motion of the motor is transmitted to the spindle nut by means of spur gear.2 kN to 15 kN.2 Method of functioning The thrust actuator. The ambient conditions have to be conform to the actual electromagnetic compatibility directives. screws its way into the spindle nut and thus performs a pull or push motion depending on the sense of rotation. In the final positions of the valve. 00405010004706 Page 5 . Following removal of the hood. The motor is switched off by means of two load-dependent switches and one strokedependent switch.1 Field of application ARI-PREMIO linear thrust actuators are employed to actuate control or shut-off valves requiring a nominal linear stroke distance of up to 80 mm and thrust from 2. If supplied with the valve. application limits and potential. 4. The thrust actuators are set to the thrust forces specified in the technical data. The load-dependent switches will also switch off the motor if foreign bodies have lodged themselves between the valve seat and cone. thus being protected against operating and environmental effects.0 Description 4. Selection of the proper actuator version in alignment with the corresponding fitting as well as use of the thrust actuator in accordance with the specified technical data is the responsibility of the systems engineer. fitted with a yoke or columns. The lift settings can be read off on a lift dial attached to the yoke or between the 2-ear clamps mounted to the column.

44 5043 so I.58 50.1 ARI-PREMIO 2.19 50. 5035 .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 4.'17 /" hT'F='f==\--1l\--J-L '1_ II :.: "i~~t= :10.u I '!' ~ Ji§.50.5 kN Yoke Version Column Version I :. 1 Page 6 00405010004706 .59 SO.20 50.040 50.18 <}-_5026 - .~ 50.--/ 5014 50.37 50.5 50.3.'~ <r-.48 5038 :1045 50.16 50..21 " 50.0.2'1 ----yitt1!' 'E:[IB' J 5022// .:::' ::.024 l.I+--t-----II~+­ I / / ~ ".6 / ..15 u i"".3 Diagram 4..0. .2 . 50.57 5059 50.403 50.47 ::."10 50.39 5036 50.'I1 50 Ii Fig.

1 --~H=t=t==i=+~ ~urff--.so "10 50. 5025 5052 5050 50119 :.7 50.36 5011 Fig.1::' :.3 50101 5058 so 43 so 38 5045 50.08 'H--'t\-~[t:j::)==H+.2 ARI-PREMIO 12 .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 4.50 30 ~---5026 50.32 5037 50. 2 00405010004706 Page 7 .6 50.0.40 so 42 5047 SO 40.15 kN ~~~~+-C.27 .1-_ _ 502'.37 50.0.3.

17 50.50 50.1 50.1 Tuming handle of handwheel Connector.14 50.59 50.27 50.34 Shift lever Washer Wiring diagram sticker.M5x20 Column Conical spring washer Handwheel Yoke Flange Spring washer DIN 128-A10 Hexagon head screw DIN EN ISO 4017 .2 .46 50.43.54 50.-..16 50.43 Designation Grub screw DIN ISO 4766 .110 Gear cap 50.M6 Set collar Grub screw DIN 913-M3x5 Guide spindle Hexagon nut DIN EN ISO 4034 .41 5D.5 12 -15kN: 2 x M16x1 .52 50.7 50.1.M5 ~~ 50.26 50.8 50.3 Parts list Pos.22 50.36 50.30 50.18 50.101 Setting spindle for switch S4 Setting spindle for switch S5 Trip cam Spring PREMia for trip slide Head cap screw DIN EN ISO 4762 .40. 50. standard -- 50.51 --.12.20 50.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 4.45 50.-'--------- 50.19 50.11 50.4 50.-.15 50.6 50.119 Fan wheel -- Page 8 00405010004706 .43.5kN: 2 x M16x1 . 8-pole -------- Spring washer DIN 128-A12 Hexagon nut DIN EN ISO 4032 .- C=--:-::50.M4x10 Protective conductor terminal Head cap screw DIN EN ISO 4762 .M12 Lift dial Distance column Hexagon nut DIN 980-V-M16 2-ear clamp (stroke indicator) Coupling Driving spindle Spindle safety feature Torsion safety feature Bellow ---- 50.56 50.8 Connector.21 50.58 50.2 Torque switch 50.--- 50.40 50.115 a-ring DIN 3771 .M10x40 Hexagon head screw DIN EN 24017-M10x55 T-head bolt DIN 261-M12x40 Washer DIN EN ISO 7089 ------'" Sealing washer DIN EN ISO 7089 ----- 50.52x2. complete Head cap screw DIN EN ISO 4762-M4 -18 Board support Standard board 50.39 50.35 50.31 50.M4x6 Threaded bush a-ring DIN 3771 .5 Sealing plug 1 x M16x1 .23 50.25 50.48 50.53 50.12 Synchronous motor.38 50.96 50..24 50.5 -"'-.32 50.87 50.9 50.3 Motor capacitor Counter-sunk screw DIN EN ISO 10642 .3.37 50.2 .1 Designation Gearbox Gearbox cover plate Cable gland 2. 50.42 5D.up) S3 50.57 50.10 50.1 Directional switch (valve .5 Hood Hood seal - Pos.5 / 1 x M20x1 .47 50.4 x 1.. 3-pole (standard) Trip slide Setting spindle for switch S3 -- 50.

switching capacity 10A. ~.. 50% ED 1200 c/h 0...3 52... 250V- Enclosure IEC 60529 Max. S3 . S3· 80% ED 1200 c/h 0. IP65 ·20 ·C . . +70 ·C Yes (rotating during operation) Yes (engage able) Any.79 230V· 50Hz 160Hz . 230V· 50Hz 10.4 Technical data Type': .0 I 0. 250V. . .38 I 11.• ·•·•· ·. /. .· .250V- Travel switch 1 pcs.·•· ...../i 5. permissible ambient temperature Handwheel Mounting position Gear lubricant f---. 2.• ·. permanently wired switching capacity 16A.2 ARI·PR~MI() • ··/i>. switching capacity 10A.. 15.' i i Thrust force .~... .. Exception: motor must not be suspended downwards KIOber Isoflex Topas NB152 5. permanently wired.. ·.4 Molyduval Valenzia H2 6. 2 pcs. permanently wired switching capacity 16A.. permanently wired. . li..7 25. i.i· . ••.. .3 I 0...5 • Control speed and power consumption are 20% higher at frequency of 60 Hz 00405010004706 Page 9 .•.0 I 50 I 80 Stroke distance max.• • •· \.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO 4.0 12.• Weight kg I 6 I 10. i.•.38 I I 0. S1 ·100 % ED. .250V1 pcs.25 S1 ·100% ED. ..38 I 1.. Duty classification in accordance with EN 60034·1/A11 Control speed Motor voltage Power consumptionW Torque switch mmlsec.9 109 I 96 2 pcs. .../ kN mm •.···..5 .. •.0 •..

..50Hz 115V ..60Hz' 230V .. . · ._-_. zero potential.•· . Only 1 potentiometer possible Not compatible for use with the temperature controller. with gold contacts.>< ••. Only 1 potentiometer possible Using the temperature controller.i .1000 Ohm.·i<\·._-Integrated reversing contactor --To control ARI-PREMIO 230V-50Hz with 24VDC. Accessories t¥. 1000 Ohm. Not compatible for use with the temperature controller! ~ Actuator with 400V50Hz and 440V-60Hz Only 1 electronic module possible! Only in addition with integrated reversing contactor! Phase control relay DC-Modul e 3-step converter -... ·. installation is only possible in the control cabinet 2 .. (with automatic switching) 230V-50Hz. ·····. for free wiring. 20mA.60Hz' Possible with standard version TOV-approved potentiometer Electronic position indicator RI21 Electronic position indicator RI32 Electronic position controller ES 11 Heating resistor Additional voltages I frequencies 24V . for low switching capacities and at ag~ressive atmosphere.1A.. 15 Watt 24V . 0 A. or standardized active current or voltage signals... for low switching capacities and at aggressive atmosphere. Not compatible for use with the ES11! .50Hz 3-400V .60Hz' 24V -50Hz 24V -60Hz' 115V . . 2 only Ohmage optional: 100.0 Additional travel switches for low-voltage I electronic system Potentiometer 2 additional travel switches. . NA 2 torque switches and 1 travel switch.-.•··. Control range: -200'C to 850'C (resistance thermometer) Voltage: 24V. 10V.60Hz' 230V ..\RI·pI'tFWnO· 2. ..• .·J. with gold contacts.- Integrated temperature-controller dTRON 316 . switching capacity max. ····. 1.···. 10V . PA Low-voltage connection board (electronic system). 0(4) .· . Not compatible for use with the heating resistor or R121! No retrofitting possible! 0(2) .··.•.2 · · ••<···.'. 0.50Hz 115V .•.- ..50 160Hz * Standard-voltage connection board.5 Watt. 4-30V max. . zero potential. . .1000.-._- -.5 Watt max. 500.- . 250V --~ I 5. • Control speed and power consumption are 20% higher at frequency of 60 Hz Page 10 0040501000 4706 . zero potential.. 200.••·· •..60Hz' 3-400V .~-. 200. 250V - 2 torque switches and 1 travel switch.···) •.•.. > . 0(2) ..•..' · •·• . 115Vor 230V 50/60Hz Compatible with resistance thermometers and thermocouples (provided by customer).0 Thrust force Additional travel switches ~- 2 additional travel switches.0 15.-::--.••• .< .···ii kN . 4-30V Three-step temperature-controller in microprocessor-technology. 12.---.~.. 20mA.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO ~. Switching capacity max. 1.. for free wiring..~""-.50Hz 24V -60Hz' 115V . 0(4) .· •· • • •. 10V . 115V-50Hz..•. ... 2 only . Switching capacity1 OA. 24V-50Hz.-.. 20 mA Only 1 potentiometer possible.50 160Hz * 115V .Ohmage 5000 or optional: 100.. Switching capacity 10A. 4 . 500.

_UI I » -.J .t " .' (Q ~ ::T::l -1111 ~ 1) . o m \~J. c:: oS" r+ _ 1II)!l.'J "tJ"' me.5 kN Nominal stroke> 30 mm . r+ _. 30 mm max.5 kN Nominal stroke max.. 80 mm UI -..t it!_ ~. . 80 mm ~? / ~ </': / I' . -::l OUI .o~ S:O ... r+::l III UI "'Q.50 mm ARI-PREMIO 12 -15 kN Nominal stroke max.§~ "C o CD I[I I i I 8 IIII hr III I I I IIII-l --I rrl o B i \ Ii I \ I!! 11 i I ! I IlV / ...V o o Clearance required for removal of hood 202/'176 3' ::l en C CD UI UI f- OJ 0' ::l Clearance required for removal of hood o ~ o o o ~I Clearance required for removal of hood 97 I o o ~ '" so . .. .2 ....2 .. 50 mm max. i IIII :.J max.c:j xl • I f~'?~ 1236633 256 653 271 668 286 683 I.o::l "' ::l r+ TI·~ .'P ::!J (.~. 65 mm max... 30 mm ARI-PREMIO 2. c:: - o • 0 CO '" '" ~ ARI-PREMIO 2.

Non-compliance may lead to death. the following points are required to be observed: .Valve cone approximately in mid lift position . or as connecting points for lifting gear. they are not designed for use as climbing aids.This may result in reversed directions of rotation or defective switch-off Recommended safety circuit for relays and electronic load relays: Connect a varistor or RC module parallel to each relay point. .Existing operating instructions for valve.Actuator components which rotate or move during operation are coloured red.0 Installation ATTENTION! . e. Crushing and injury hazard! 5. .A voltage is induced in the thrust actuator motor.Valve mountings such as drives. Page 12 00405010004706 . . .on no account supported inside a seat! . . . This induction voltage may be higher than the operating voltage.Planners / construction firms and operators are responsible for positioning and installing the products.1 General installation data .Electrical installation in accordance with current regional regulations.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5.Conductor cross-section selected to correspond to the given drive power and existing line length.Check thrust actuator for damage prior to fitting. .Work on electrical systems or equipment must only be carried out by qualified electricians or by trained individuals under the guidance and supervision of a qualified electrician in compliance with regional electrical safety requirements and regulations.In addition to general installation guidelines.For this reason relays and electronic load relays for thrust actuator control require a protective circuit.Complete valve with crossarm. . Damaged parts must be replaced by original spares. . injury or damage to property due to persons falling or parts being dropped.g. handwheels. Varistor S10K385 to S10K460 RC module 100 Ohm / 100nF Where relay points and electronic load relays are particularly sensitive a coil should be connected in series additionally to each relay point. Recommended coil: Toroidal coil 2mH /2A . The contacts of unprotected relays may stick after a while.Contactors of 16A and upwards do not need a safety circuit. ATTENTION! . hoods must not be used to take external forces.

. 6A. the thrust actuator must be provided with an additional cover to protect against . 4 ). In case of widely fluctuating ambient temperatures. . If installed outdoors.Ease of access to installation site.rain. the thrust actuator must be mounted so both yoke legs or columns are on top of one another in the vertical plane (see Fig. . .Install where there is protection against high-energy heat radiation. . .Thrust actuator complete with yoke or distance columns and coupling parts intended for mounting to the corresponding valve.direct insulation. high atmospheric humidity and temperatures below the freezing pOint.Conformity of technical data on thrust actuator with field conditions. Fig.The ambient temperature must be between -20°C and + 70°C. If installed with a horizontal connecting rod.Adequate clearance space above the thrust actuator for removing the hood (refer to point 4. . . . your are recommended to install a heating resistor to minimise condensation buildup in the actuator. .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO . .Mains voltage in accordance with data specified on rating plate of thrust actuator.5 Dimensions). 4 0040501000 4706 Page 13 .Mains fuse rating max.dust.Circuit breakers in the plant to cut off the mains supply to the actuator.Thrust actuator mountable in any position except in downward suspended position.

2 . never operate by hand while the motor is running .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5.The handwheel always rotates during motor-driven operation (running indicator). Injury hazard! -In the manual operating mode pay careful attention in the final positions that the handwheel is only turned to the point where the torque switch trips (audible click) as otherwise damage will be caused to the thrust actuator! Since the handwheel always follows during motor-driven operation (running indication).Turning in counter-clockwise direction --> retracting spindle.Swing out lever (pas.5 kN ATTENTION! . 5 Page 14 00405010004706 . retracting spindle extending spindle Fig. .2 Manual operation 5.Turning in clockwise direction --> extending spindle.1) from handwheel (pas.2.12. the thrust actuator can be run in the retracted and extended state with the handwheel firmly meshed with the gear. .potential injury hazards! With the motor in the stationary state. Never activate manual operation while the motor is running. 50. Proceed as follows: .12).1 ARI-PREMIO 2. 50.

2 ARI·PREMIO 12 ·15 kN ATTENTION! '-------- . it's necessary to observe for a correct function of the manual operating device.0. that the head-cap screw M4x18 is screwed in the right place.Fold the turning handle out of the handwheel (A) .Turning in counter-clockwise direction --> retracting spindle The motor is no longer in mesh when the handwheel is engaged. -In the manual operating mode pay careful attention in the final positions that the handwheel is only turned to the point where the torque switch trips (audible click) as otherwise damage will be caused to the thrust actuator! With the motor in the stationary state. the thrust actuator can be run in the retracted and extended state with the engageable handwheel. 00405010004706 Page 15 . Proceed as follows: .Tum the handwheel slightly and push in the engaging button for manual mode (8) --> the button engages .1 Fig.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO 5.Turning in clockwise direction --> extending spindle . The handwheel is automatically disengaged when the motor starts and the motor is once more in mesh. Engaging button for manual mode .'12.Do not attempt to engage manual operation until the motor has stopped. 6 ATTENTION! When changing the motor. Switching over while the motor is running may damage the thrust actuator.2.~ B' =.

50) on valve.87) matching the valve onto the valve spindle in accordance with setting dimension (Y) and lock with hexagon nut.Turn flat hexagon nut if not present on valve spindle. 50 87 ':':.3-way valves with mixing plug at closed way B.>- .:. 50. Fig.. I . This means for .. . I e .Screw threaded bush (pas. ' ~ Fig. DIE: . 50) on fitting with two T-head bolts (pas.Position valve cone approximately in mid lift position. 50.. 50.Swing out handwheel lever (pas.--_~spmdle l ~. ! .0. Fig..27) out of torsion safety feature (pas.27 5027 ..Screw coupling (pas.=rf I . 50. Page 16 0040501000 4706 .1 Mounting for valve-lift up to 30 mm (yoke version) A B C 0 E ~ F ~~.> >.B7 5032 :.Slip coupling (pas.87). ~ . .oo".3..~~.22).:. Setting dimension (Y) and fitting-projection (X) are measured with insetted valve spindle. '..30) comes to rest on the threaded bush (pas.20).19). two spring washers (pas. 50. .Place thrust actuator (pas.= .12.30 il\l'i\\iiffij--50..> ~L __ . A: . Fig. . Fig. 50.' .Mount thrust actuator (pas.~oo "' ~V~espirde . 50. proceed as follows: . 50. I I . 50. 50.3-way valves with divetting plug at closed way A After measuring put the valve plug back in the mid lift position! ATTENTION! .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5.27) over valve spindle. two hexagon nuts (pas.2-way valves at closed valve. I \Eil". ~ "'. 1 ~ ~ __ 7'i /50 23 035 .1) and use it to move out the thrust actuator until the driving spindle (pas.I -. 50. . 7 To mount the thrust actuator to a valve having a nominal lift of up to 30mm. two washers (pas.21).Setting dimension (Y) for fitting-projection (X) 60 and 83mm = 102mm. 50. C: . . A-B: .3 Installation instructions for mounting to valves 5.32) of thrust actuator (not illustrated). -':..

Run valve to both final positions and check to ensure that these are safely reached .Set travel switch S3 (see point 5.Carry out electrical connection (see point 5. . . F: .2).32) and secure in place using grub screw M6 (pos. 00405010004706 Page 17 .5.Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO Fig.27) firmly into the torsion safety feature (pos. .Clip lift dial (pos. 50.Run valve to lowest position.35).4).Screw the coupling (pos. 50.23) onto yoke in such a way that top edge of torsion safety feature is in alignment with tip of arrow mark on lift dial. 50. .3. 50.

Slip coupling (pos. Page 18 00405010004706 . A-B: .2-way valves at closed valve. . This means for .32) of thrust actuator (not illustrated).Position valve cone approximately in mid lift position.27) over valve spindle.Screw threaded bush (pos. . Fig. 50. .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO F 5.27) out of torsion safety feature (pos.3-way valves with mixing plug at closed way B. !f\. 50. 50. proceed as follows: .Turn fiat hexagon nut if not present on valve spindle.Screw coupling (pos.3-way valves with diverting plug at closed way A After measuring put the valve plug back in the mid lift position! .A: . .3.2 Mounting for valve lift over 30 mm to 80 mm (column version) ABC D E IT~ I I ~lJ Fig. ~ ATTENTION! Setting dimension (Y) and fitting-projection (X) are measured with inserted valve spindle.87) matching the valve onto the valve spindle in accordance with setting dimension (Y) and lock with hexagon nut.Setting dimension (Y) for fitting-projection (X) 83mm = 102mm. . Fig.Setting dimension (Y) for fitting-projection (X) 98mm =116mm. 50. 8 To mount the thrust actuator to a valve having a nominal lift of over 30mm to 50mm.

with the bottom clamp in the lowest valve position located directly below torsion safety feature (pos.Place thrust actuator (pos. C: . Fig. 50.12.1).Press 2-ear clamps (pos.Screw coupling (pos.25).5. . 00405010004706 Page 19 . 50. The engaging button for manual mode (only 12 .3.Set standard travel switch S3 (see pOint 5. . slightly turn the handwheel and press in the engaging button for manual mode (only 12 -15 kN) (button engages).15 kN) disengages when the motor starts up.2).24) press on very lightly. Fig. 50.Move the valve to the lowest position. . DIE: . .26) onto a distance column (pos. . 50.12.Fold out turning handle of handwheel (pos.27) firmly into torsion safety feature (pos. . . move out the thrust actuator until driving spindle (pos. 50.35).Move the valve to both travel positions and check that it reaches them reliably.4 Electrical connection"). .Screw distance column with 2-ear clamps on opposite side of handwheel into the flange in such a way that one of the 2-ear clamps is situated above the torsion safety feature (pos.87). 50. 50. .30) comes into contact with threaded bush (pos. Having done this. 50. 50) with distance columns onto valve and fix into position with two self-locking hexagon nuts (pos.32) and the top clamp in the highest valve position located directly above the torsion safety feature.Screw the other distance column into the flange likewise. 50.Fold turning handle of handwheel (pos.32) and secure using grub screw M6 (pos.26) into position according to the stroke so they cannot slip. 50.1) back in. 50.Make the electrical connection (see point "5. 50. 50.Slip 2-ear clamp (pos. F: .32) and the other below.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO Fig.

I~ <..> ~O~'4 _ GND _ GND =:::::J U"iVl illliL....~=:-=:-=:-=:-=:-.=dlJ "s~ ~'I J X'2~00 IIJ Xl' X16 X18 I I x24j I I ""' """ g M . Rl21 m CD r~." lIN IA21 "C CD o I_ 1." HI Xl ..1. IMPI 111N1 N IMDI HZ ..." • r+ ...... ::s 111.. .J Straight through valve I t 3-wayvalve with diverting plug 1... . ::s ::s CD ..::='~I~j"~O(4(""" ~ ==::J Current TTR dTRON 316 T~crmo- (Q Voltage 0(2).. ICrRll Wire connections of the different valve types I '" ~ ' 10 0 1 _ _ lOS -~~~ • (SI 1 & c::::: ~JOVI1A '-s =p N• =JI ~ "O-l~OV nOl p!)weI" A( <opp. r POT ~i l I I I 11 ~ I r r IT II. . ::s ::Till N IMPI DE DE closed 11 1£ S\1 15111 S12 1521) Gf\l GP... zero potential Potentiometer .. AB-B open 141t AS-A open ~6t I ~2a~1 ~ M Option NA: same design but no RC circuit and swttches with gold contacts (Swttching capacity O. I ' I I ..lA..".voltage connection board. .nnr'f outp ut(OUt1) 230V/'JA Binary outpu t (Out2) en :>. zero potential Electronic temperature·controller dTRON 316 0111 :s: o· -::s m~ . III _.o::S _III ..re. . o· ~ OM"..".01: Travel swttch.. zero potential Standard·voltage connection board... I ...' "It open t A-AS open t B-AS open ~I IMPI N I'-<Dl DE WE (S3) RI21 ES 11 NA PA POT WE TTR Torque switch Travel switch for traveling the stroke distance in retracting direction Electronic posttion indicator Electronic posttion controller Low. 11N " 3-wayvalve with mixing plug I'lt~1 IN Output to th~ actuator Voltage and poIWr supply yoUnge are (lqJal ---Heating resistor J I ~ . p - lli'. r WE ~~..... o _ ..D0"'0 I WE S13 (S23) LL~=:-=:-=:-~~~~~H~~~~f.. " ' _ OuO L. iii' !!!. 0 = » ::s _..::~.illlI 1 II¢ 0 1l~ E ES11 woon 1{l rnA II "" .'2V aitemativlo binary Inputs » 3 o o rr ~: I 52 OpIIOr1 PA i . .....~"I~ :.J... I . :.. .)00 0 " X..2-5kN. r: POT ~ I § :1. "". I I "" "'" "" '" o o o ~ o" ""' o I~Ii" " IE """ "''''I x81 0 .tOY ::l (Q ~ I I ::J on' ~ n~.g...: n o c..0 I _ _ . :..WE ! II II I I II "I II ~ .' -Icc I: a. .C! I :§!l nm... WOVDC) ..co 'o" '" '" ""0 <is' (0 ARI-PREMIO 2. " s: o N Z l>l "'tJ 2:! ~ • m ::s o· 230VI3ABi.. r~Z~ ~CS24) :'!s~' ~ITl ~ WE 0. III III I: III III 11 1 .. :. ""Tl standard accessories -' en en ~ ~ .

.. I I I ill ~ 1 HI os: o . L3 .-_/ :I..... .) '" "I 1S closed 11 ~ A-AS open 14 1 " IMP' 1"'11 14 N iMP) 1 HZ DE WE (S3) Heating resistor Torque switch Travel switch for traveling the travel distance in retracting direction Electronic position indicator Electronic position controller Low·voltage connection board. AB-B open 14.Rc .. ~ 230VI3A Blnaty output (0011) Ot "'tJ .. o o o o ~ AP. DE. I H: S4 • lS2_41__ --" Irl ~"""' c"~n 1 POT! 11 000 '" {ZJ/ 0-10000/ / ... c::: c::: P.... .'..~" Standard 3-way valve With mixing plug l1!tll_ _ 3-wayvalve with diverting plug ~1y Oulpli to the actuator Voreage and power vdlage ere eval ""'1M"'" ~ "tJ . C : : I ! ! l .::!J <0 o ~ .. E"O 12·15k'.g ~ l!l. !..._ TTR dTROI.I"..... 410 Il.J....actuator spindle drives in L3. zero potential Temperature-controller dTRON 316 Reversing contactor Phase control relay Temperature switch motor "'0 .1A...essones ~ r=. L2... extemal reversing contactor "0 L112 13 RI21 External reversing contact or: L1... r-~ II -'c / .r ..~nt VO~8ge I 10V 2GmA) 1QV/ / EJ ~ A '~' ~ ------:.a.::r _.actuator spindle drives out ES 11 NA POT WE TTR !i!. ~ In all external reversing circurts the torque switches S1 and S2 have to be used to swrtch off the actuator motor." Uj~~11~~~'~'Ec~e~~~~~"'ee 'm. _ pc!\IoIef AC 11D_2~O'i AC CO·JOV ~ ~ CQ . I A(". .0- IT " u u ~ Please check the operating direction of the actuator! WS PR TR .w_' ..t. II II ___ ~ ~..' " " " "" . P c "" 230VI3ABirnuyoutput(0ut2) Z ::0 . .-:. ~I~.. ~ ~ ~i ~m! II II .. "" ' ee' J eee J.supply » ::0 .. I.14 element O(4}.(". ::I /' / 10 \' 20 mA r- (e-"o .. ~_ N . 4-30V) " 3Ph~ Wire connections of the different valve types Straight through valve IN N !11Pl ... L2.. !if iii' Q ..1~n~1L_ i'"' c U. L1 . ES11 ~ _.. 3 N . 1PC>. ~ - ~ III CQ 1.- () g »_ .I... o o '" o " nI 11 It..·PR standard " .. . ~.. (."\" = ' L e '" I.a.\ open t B-AB open t AB-A open .. co N " '" :s: g 0/11 m !:!: ~ . . III DJQl.. ~D. 0 ~ _..::r 0 N I . ... . zero potenoal Potenoometer Travel sw~ch. W. tEl g ~ ... 3~~ !'l ~ • en ~ • en ' WE.itches with gold contacts ISwilching capacity O. 20mA O(2). __ .. :iE »_. 0::::1 I: ~ ~ CD "" Z a 5.'.I-Pf::EMIO 12--15r. 'I....::r ! Ot 0 "C CD 11 ...... !:!: . ~~. m os: QRJlQnJJA same design as Standard but no RC circuil and sv."". ~ ~ ::0::::1.

:. L2. L3 only here 1m N IMP) 1m IJ lMPI a '" a a a Accessories WS . N Lt 3-step input signal ARI-PREJ110 12-1SkN... :::I (") :::l"1Il "" :::I C 0. 1% TS . - WS I ~. t &-AB open f AB-B open 14 t AB-A open 11 r·j (HPJ :::r c..[ l l WE S3 I "I 11 closed 11 .l?~ '<28 ::J Wire connections of the different valve types ..(i1 3.......-. X28::J o :::I S" !l o .> "0 ~ :::r "C (1) o ~ 5· 4 @JIIIIII 1111·m 111411 I j W rot.. TS tw-e r ".. II' '~W~~1ll1 "\ S2" l> ~ 'I. a ~ a a L.-...: 51* DE I DEl 52' r J o-nl:Dll I X27 14 1 45 .. l1L2L -12111:.1"1 N N .:. "0 ~ Z . 3Ph-S~andDrd Ll L2 L3 Straight through valve 3-wayvave with mixing plug 3-wayvalve with diverting pug 1m Conned 3 phases L1. WE S3 _PR .-. .IJ... ...:0 :l: m '~n1114. A-AB open open 14 I.. r.. 1· III I ..WO N N 3 I r. :::1 III I/) c III = _...1"1 . . 51 . I l1A1..... I/) :::I m!:!: . • ®'. ..- r .. 0101 1' ~ eTol 0 lo! "'eX·'\··r i '~'\...:.. _. rJ Lt 3-step input signal Conned 3 phases L1.. .. .~-IL1T1L2T UB2122 U' I -y0iLlr1Lll3!n21~ -I-l ~. .. I ...lJ) "0 CD <0 cO· "'T1 ARI~PREMIO 12-'15k~J...:0 . :::r iil < CD -tIC I/) 4Al ."0 ._"... (.I D '"'" 0- DEt J.... 11 l2 U ... S~andard Accessories WS + PR ~ .~ -. L3 only here A Please check the operating direction LU olthe actuator! ::u§ 5:0 -:::I 01/) """ ~ ...\"\···~I II ': ' I I .. o _. :>:" o (. III ~!il" "" 0 »:::1 L...... L2.c".. 0000 "l ill 3Ph.. -'~ ~o ~~ I. 222'121..::: .....LH1L~T2UT I I 21::2 -wI' I ' LH1L2T UB212 to iii...

. .When connecting the thrust actuator the supply line must be disconnected from the mains (not live) during connection work. carefully remove hood in upward direction. then tighten the cable connection until the connecting cable is clamped in place inside it.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5. . . also checking to see whether the direction of movement on the thrust actuator corresponds to the desired direction. It must be impossible to switch the power on unintentionally while the mains are disconnected in this way Failure to comply may result in death. .Strip connecting cable approx. 1-1.Run the thrust actuator a few mm out of the lower final position applying the manual mode.Work on electrical systems or equipment must only be carried out by qualified electricians or by trained individuals under the guidance and supervision of a qualified electrician in compliance with regional electrical requirement and regulations.Connect pulse line for move-out connecting rod up to terminal 11 of thrust-actuator terminal strip. serious injury or substantial damage to property To connect the thrust actuator up to the electrical power supply.Strip the individual conductors approx.Place hood on carefully from above and mount firmly onto thrust actuator with countersunk screw and rubber gasket. .Connect pulse line for move-in connecting rod up to terminal 14 of thrust-actuator terminal strip.3 Connection ATTENTION / .Connect protective conductor of connecting cable up to protective conductor terminal of thrust actuator. .Insert the connection line through this cable inlet until sufficient conductor length is available up to the corresponding terminals.5 cm above cable inlet.If the directions of movement are contrary to those deSired.Connect neutral N/MP conductor of connecting cable up to terminal1/N of thrust-actuator terminal strip. . . proceed as follows: .Loosen countersunk screw in hood. .Connect supply line to mains and run thrust actuator to each of the final positions so as to check whether the final-position travel switches effect switching off. . 5mm away from the end and fit with conductor end sleeves.4. . . 00405010004706 Page 23 .Remove blind plug fom the cable connection. the pulse lines governing the move-in and move-out connecting rod will need to be exchanged.

The 3 contacts on each of the switches 811/821.2 .5 kN) On connection boards PA or NA. grievous bodily injury or substantial property damage. 5. 4-30V (gold contacts). For this function. .Improper execution of the setting operations or lack of care may cause death. a load-dependent travel switch for the retracting direction (82) and a stroke-dependent travel switch for the retracting direction (83).1A. 82) switch off the motor as soon as the factory-set thrust force is attained. . 250V AC._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. thus causing the load-dependent travel switch 82 to switch off the motor. 5.1 Torque and travel switches .812/822 and 8131 823 do not reveal interlock-controlled circuitry and can be integrated individually into the facility control system. all three switches reveal interlock-controlled circuitry on the board.5 Settings ATTENTION! . The switches on the NA optional board (low-voltage connection board) are designed for switching capacities of up to 0. The load-dependent travel switches (81.5 kN). travel switches and the electrical options.The thrust actuator may only be operated for a short time without the hood for unavoidable setting operations to the potentiometers. If the thrust actuator is supplied on a straight through valve. the trip cam belonging to travel switch 83 is set in the retracting direction in the trip slide to such a downward extent that the upper final position of the valve is attained prior to travel switch 83 being reached.Operation of the thrust actuator without the hood for any purpose other than that described above is strictly pro~h~ib~it-=-ed~. the thrust actuator has hazardous.standard feature As standard.brought out on terminals 40-48 and can be freely connected.in the case of these boards .812/822 and 813/823.5. are . If the standard travel switches are to be integrated directly into the facility control system. thrust actuators are equipped with a load-dependent travel switch for the extending direction (81). If the thrust actuator is supplied on a three-way valve. uninsulated parts exposed as well as moving and rotating parts. The switches on the PA optional board (standard-voltage connection board) are designed for switching capacities of up to 10A. the standard travel switches 811/821. 6 1.5. designed as double-throw contacts. Page 24 00405010004706 .2 .2 Connection boards PA or NA (only 2.__---.\ ~---"--- -The settingsbe changed! of the load-dependent travel switches must on no account whatsoever ATTENTION! The stroke-dependent travel switch (83) switches off the motor as soon as the lift or stroke is attained. live. the standard board can be replaced by optional boards PA or NA (only 2. the strokedependent travel switch 83 is set in such a way that the motor of the thrust actuator is switched off as soon as the maximum valve-lift is attained.Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5. While these operations are in progress.

50. 50. For low voltage (see pOint "4.38) is centrally situated in the borehole of the board support (pos.Remove trip slide (pos.62) in jack strip of stroke-switch board.Push trip slide (pos.Loosen head cap screws (pos. 50. . when switching the load-dependent travel switches S11121.Mount the trip slide (pos. 50. 5. .that. the additional travel switches are supplied with gold contacts (option: low-voltage travel switch). 50. proceed as follows. .38). 50. 50.4 Technical data"). S121S22 and S131S23 the motor of the thrust actuator comes to a standstill without delay This function is not provided for on the optional boards PA and NA in the supplied state! 5. 00405010004706 Page 25 .50) upwards from the board support. it must be warranted .Mount board support loosely on gearbox cover plate with two head cap screws (pos.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO The optional boards may only be installed at the factory due to the switching pOints of the load-dependent switches having to be reset following installation of these boards! ATTENTION! . 50. then screw down tightly on gearbox cover plate (only necessary on 5kN).Insert stroke-switch board (pos.61) in board support (pos. .Disconnect motor plug and mains connection plug from board. .50) so that the spring (pos. 50.Switch off mains voltage and safeguard to prevent it from being switched back on again accidentally. The maximum switching capacity of the switches (see point "4. .50) back into board support (pos.57) on board support and remove this from gearbox (only necessary on 5kN thrust actuator).When using optional boards PA or NA. 50. 50.42).42) and fix in place using the supplied screws (pos.57) (only necessary on 5kN). carefully remove hood.Align board support (pos.42) from above and onto the guide spindle (pos. .56) (open ends) with a screw driver while pulling the trip slide (pos.5.3. . 50. . These switches can be set on infinitely variable lines over the entire stroke distance in both lift directions and integrated at will into the facility control system (no interlock-controlled circuitry).due to the operator's individual circuitry.Insert 6-pole connector (pos.3 Travel switch The thrust actuators can be equipped with an additional stroke-switch board containing two travel switches (double-throw contact S4 and S5).44).56) clips into the groove of the guide spindle (pos.38). 50. 50.Loosen countersunk screw in hood.Carefully ease open the lock washer (pos.50) from board support by pulling upwards.4 Technical data") must not be exceeded.1 Installation of additional travel switches To install additional travel switches. . . 50.42) on gearbox cover plate in such a way that the guide spindle (pos. 50. 50. 50.5. .

50. \ t:1~~~ft----. 50..4 50.43. . 6-pole (option: travel Switch) -- Page 26 00405010004706 .Carefully place hood onto gearbox and mount firmly on thrust actuator with rubber gasket and countersunk screw.43.Insert motor connection plug in jack strip (pos.Proceed to strip the connecting cable that has been led in through the cable inlet and fastened.8et switch pOints on travel switches in accordance with section 5. .50 43. __--.- Spring Head cap screws DIN EN ISO 4762 M4x10 Stroke-switch board .3) provided for the purpose. ":go 1'19\t{j.4) provided for the purpose.62 -_. 12 8witchgear and indicating feature ARI-PREMIO 2 2 . 50.52 50.3 50. 50. . W~-50f.44 Designation Guide spindle Board support Jack strip for mains connection Jack strip for motor connection Self-tapping screw Trip slide Setting spindle for switch S3 Designation Setting spindle for switch S4 Setting spindle for switch S5 "---'" 50. IIHl---S062 so so ~-----J.![ / / Pos.43.5 kN Pos.51 Connector. and connect the individual conductors to the terminal strip in accordance with the desired circuitry and the wiring diagram.- So:5i:i 50.56 50.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO . .54 Trip cam 50.57 50.38 50.3 8etting the additional travel switches (84/85 and 824/825) .505'1 ~ _--SO 52 ~B&~V--50 53 Fig.4 5061~ 5044 "- '".43.53 __________ 5038 SO 57 ~----. .3.Insert mains connection plug in jack strip (pos.61 50.42 50.5.3 SO 42 ------lI+U.3..

50. . 50.54) of the travel switch S3 is situated below switch S3 and has not tripped the latter. . If the trip cam (pos.5.3. . 50.Run thrust actuator briefly in extending direction and then in retracting direction once more. 50. 50.Using a screw driver. 00405010004706 Page 27 . the travel switch S3 needs to be set as follows: . . the standard travel switch (S3) is already set to the existing valve-lift and the setting spindle for the travel switch S3 (pos. correct the setting as described.Run valve in both final pOSitions and check in each final position whether the valve switches off via the load-dependent switch. proceed to turn setting spindle for switch S3 (pos.54) arriving from below trips the switch (audible click).2 Setting of standard travel switch (S3) On delivery of the thrust actuator.51) is sealed with screw glyptal. checking to see whether the thrust actuator is switched off at the desired point (nominal lift).ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5.Run the thrust actuator in both final pOSitions once more and check whether thrust actuator switches off in both final positions via the load-dependent switches. the setting spindle governing the travel switch S3 (pos. If reinstalling the thrust actuator on a straight through valve.51) until the trip cam (pos. correct the setting as described above. . the travel switch S3 needs to be set as follows: . after switching off the thrust actuator. 50.Carry out a check in the top final position the see whether.51) needs to be turned until the trip cam is situated below travel switch S3 without tripping it. the trip cam (pos. This setting needs no changing for normal operation.If need be.If need be. .Move valve out of the lowest position so as to run valve-lift to up position. If reinstalling the thrust actuator on a three-way valve.54) is situated above the travel switch S3 or trips the same.

ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO 5. correcting the setting. . Standard design: For that reason. care should be taken on additional travel switches to see that the actuating state of the switches remains active only for a short time while the thrust actuator continues to run and that switching back takes place afterwards. To do this.3. The actuating state of the travel switches remains in force over a lift of 4 mm.Run valve to desired position due to be indicated by the corresponding switch.3 5etting the additional travel switches (54/55 and 524/525) The two additional travel switches can be freely set in both lift directions for indicating certain valve positions. . the actuating state of the travel switches remains in force over a lift of 49 mm. checking and.Run thrust actuator briefly in both directions.5. The actuating feature on the travel switches is designed in such a way that both travel switches can be overrun in both directions. Page 28 00405010004706 . if need be. proceed as follows: . Special design: At additional travel switches with extended switch levers.Proceed to turn the setting spindle belonging to the appurtenant switch until the switch is tripped (audible click).

50. 00405010004706 Page 29 .5. Use must only be made of the pinion specified for the valve-lift.74) in jack strip of connecting cable (pos. 50.4.Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5. 50. 5. 50.4 Potentiometers The potentiometers are used for electrical position acknowledgement on the facility control system or for the options .Switch off mains voltage and safeguard to prevent it from being switched back on again accidentally. .Insert additional 3-pole connector (pos. 50. IN1th a valve lift between 30 mm and 50mm. readjust by bending a little.15kN middle window) above the potentiometer guide. carefully remove hood.IN1th a valve lift up to 30 mm. The potentiometers can be supplied with different resistance values (see point .Check to see whether pinion (pos..4. . 50.69) (single potentiometer connectors 25-27). IN1th a valve lift between 50 mm and 65 mm. For the electronic position controller ES11 and the electronic position indicator RI21 use must be made solely of 1000 ohm potentiometers.42) above the potentiometer guide. 50. . 50. hook spiral spring (pos.5.68) to board support (pos.Screw jack strip of connecting cable (pos. .Insert the potentiometer into the guide in the way that the pinion (pos.68). and place back in position again. insert into the guide between the slide block and the potentiometer guide and hook into the cut-out below the potentiometer.42) above the potentiometer guide.73) is pressed into toothed rack by spiral spring (pos. 50. 50. remove spiral spring (pos.70) into the left-hand window of board support (pos.70) and is positioned free from backlash.Loosen countersunk screw in hood. those of the red cables onto the upper connector pins and those of the yellow cables onto the lower connector pins of the potentiometer (Fig. 50. the potentiometer is assembled and set ready for operation.electronic position controller ES11 or electronic position indicator RI21 A maximum of 2 potentiometers can be installed (= 1 double potentiometer).If this is not the case. .70). hook spiral spring (pos.70) into the righthand window (for 12 .Plug in the flat connectors on grey potentiometer cables onto the middle connector pins. insert into the guide between the slide block and the potentiometer guide and hook into the cut-out below the potentiometer.42) with two self-tapping screws (pos. 50. . 13 ).73) of the potentiometer meshes with the gear stick of the trip slide. .4 Technical data"). To achieve optimal electromagnetic compatibility it is recommended to use shielded cables for connecting potentiometers or standardized active current or voltage signals.70) into the middle window in board support (pos.1 Installing the potentiometer If retrofitting the potentiometer. insert into the guide between the slide block and the potentiometer guide and hook into the cut-out below the potentiometer. 50. . hook spiral spring (pos. Conversion of the relevant valve-lift to the potentiometer angle of rotation is effected by means of transmission determined in respect of each valve-lift between the toothed rack on the trip slide and the pinion on the potentiometer shaft. If the thrust actuator is supplied with the valve and built-in potentiometer. proceed as follows: . 50.

2 Tooth lock washer 50.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO ..67.1 Hexagon nut 50.' .Set potentiometer (see point 5.69 Self-tapping screw -50. / 50 671 50'/6 SO 73 ~ '. red grey . 3-pole (option: potentiometer) .73 Pinion (selection depends on valve-lift 20.5 kN Pas. Fig. 50.42 Board support 50.74 Connector.46 Washer 50. Pos.. 65 or 80 mm) -50.50 71 / Fig 14' Switchgear and indicating feature ARI-PREMIO 2 2 .47 Circuit-diagram sticker Spiral spring (option: 50. Designation Designation 50.5.2).67.71 Slide block (option: potentiom~~ 50.68 Connecting cable for option: potentiometer .- ~~\\ ~~Y-S0673 -"~50672 ------..67.Place hood carefully onto thrust actuator and fasten it on the actuator with rubber gasket and countersunk screw.3 Potentiometer 50.70 '~rj I I . x (2r'~Jll'\ " . 13 I yellow 0 0 50.4. 30. ~.50. ----'- ! I' . .70 potentiometer) --. ..50. Page 30 00405010004706 .

0 ohm. .4.Switch off mains voltage and safeguard to prevent it from being switched back on again accidentally.Run thrust actuator to upper final position and read off corresponding resistance value on ohmmeter.Measure resistance on potentiometer 1 between terminals 25 and 26. 0 ohm).The resistance values thus measured need to be taken into account for the settings to the facility control system. the measured value should be approx. . . 00405010004706 Page 31 . . .5.For checking purposes. proceed as follows: .Move thrust actuator to extended position.Turn potentiometer shaft in counter-clockwise direction until reaching the travel stop. . .Measure resistance on potentiometer 2 between terminals 28 and 29. .~ ARMATUREiN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5.2 Setting the potentiometer To set the potentiometer. This places the potentiometer in the initial position (approx.In this position of the actuator. the resistance of the potentiometer needs to be measured using an ohmmeter.

4. potentiometers on conductive plastic basis are not as adjustable pre-resistors to begin but as read-free voltage dividers! 5. The pinion and the potentiometer shaft are firmly connected. The potentiometers can be supplied with different resistance values (see point . To use for the electromagnetic compatibility. . 0 Ohm).Subsequently.For checking purposes. . the screws are to be provided again with locking lacquer. Page 32 00405010004706 .5. 320° without stop) and by means of ohmmeter bring the potentiometer in initial position (approx.5. the resistance of the potentiometer needs to be measured using an ohmmeter. error-proof position feedback The TGV certified potentiometer on conductive plastic basis is used for single-channel. pinion from the toothed rack. proceed as follows: . . An additional installation of the option "Error-proof potentiometer" is not permitted for safety reasons. If the thrust actuator is supplied with the valve and built-in potentiometer. electr.Switch off mains voltage and safeguard to prevent it from being switched back on again aCCidentally. 360°. For the electronic position controller ES11 use must be made solely with 1000 ohm potentiometers The conversion of the relevant valve-lift to the potentiometer angle of rotation is effected by the transmission between the toothed rack on the trip slide and the pinion on the potentiometer shaft. . . . . shielded lines are recommended for potentiometers and electrical unit signals.Bring the potentiomter and the pinion back in contact with the toothed rack and fasten the screws. A maximum of 2 potentiometers can be installed (=1 double potentiometer).5.4 Technical data"). The potentiometer is with the options "Heating" and "position indicator R121" not combinably.Measure resistance on potentiometer 1 between terminals 25 and 26.Turn potentiometer shaft (angle of rotation mech..ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO 5.Run thrust actuator to upper final position and read off corresponding resistance value on ohmmeter. error-proof position feedback in connection with error-proof. electronic group monitoring systems for the regulation of fuel -. [A ! Don't lay signal lines parallel to the main line! ATTENTION! -In order to achieve as high a life span as possible with maximum accuracy.Loose the potentiometer by unscrewing the 2 screws and remove it incl.1 Setting the potentiometer on conductive plastic basis To set the potentiometer. the potentiometer is assembled and set ready for operation. air and exhaust gas streams.Measure resistance on potentiometer 2 between terminals 28 and 29.5 Error-proof potentiometer for single-channel. .Move thrust actuator to extended position. .

73 50.38 50.74 -- Designation Guide spindle Hexagon nut Board support Trip slide TOV-approved potentiometer Slide block (option: potentiometer) Pinion (travel 50 mm) 3-pole connector (option: potentiometer) Pos.50 50.- 50.124 50.67 50.. 50.81 50.5 kN Pos.122 50.121 50.39 50. self-locking nut 00405010004706 Page 33 .2 .0 39 36 74 39 Fig. Straight pin.42 50. 7-1 b7 73 ·121.125 50. slotted Hexagon nut M4.123 50.71 50.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO . 120 42 '125 121 126 1:::3 122 81 :.The resistance values thus measured need to be taken into account for the settings to the facility control system.~ Designation Head cap screw Lever Metal sheet .126 Tension spring Pan-head screw _. 50.120 -. self-locking Hexagon nut M5. 15: Error-proof potentiometer ARI-PREMIO 2.

6 50.Connect the individual conductors up to the connection terminal block in accordance with the wiring diagram...5.83. . /! ~ .2-15 kN ~.Loosen countersunk screw in hood.cc' Pos. .6 Heating A heating resistor should be fitted as a means of protection against the formation of condensation water in cases involving widely varying ambient temperatures..2 50.Switch off mains voltage and safeguard to prevent it from being switched back on again accidentally. ~-'--' Page 34 0040501000 4706 .6. 5mm away from the end and provide with conductor end sleeves. 17).=-+-_ for jack strip '~"> t ¥ '/ 50.S0. . 16: Heating installation ARI-PREMIO 2.83.Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO 5. 50.3 - ---- -'''-''''-~-- Designation Holding bracket (Option: heating) Head cap screw DIN 84-M3x8 Thermal circuit breaker .4 50. Mounting thread M3 -$c for heating reslstor.83. Pas. . 50.83 -:: --.-. (Fig. It is completely mounted on a holding bracket.Strip continuous-current cable approx. If electronic system ES11 or RI21 is already installed. 2-pole Heating resistor ---. 1-1.r 1/ / Mounting thread M3 /' for thermal circJit breaker MountingthreadM4 for options ES11 and RI21 ~h'r '1 I/. carefully remove hood.Lay the individual conductors in such a way that they do not come into contact with moving parts. . " 1/ .5 cm above cable inlet.83. install the heating and attach the electronic system to the holding bracket for the heating. ..~ ~ .-.______ 50. To install the heating proceed as follows: .5.Strip individual conductors approx. remove it. 5.10 Designation Jack strip Connector.831 -llli ~ --508310 50833 Mounting thread M3.Using the supplied screws. mount complete heating (on holding bracket) at the point on the gearbox cover plate provided for the purpose. . high atmospheric humidity (outdoor use) and temperatures below the freezing point.Lead continuous-current cable (mains voltage = rated voltage of heating) through cable inlet into thrust actuator and fix in place with inlet. ---.83.1 50.83" Fig.83.1 Installation of heating On principle. the heating can be combined with all options.. unscrew the electronic system from the holding bracket.. The heating resistor is self-regulating so that a continuous supply of current merely needs to be connected up. ~ <-.

7 Electronic position indicator RI21 The electronic position indicator RI21 converts the resistance of the 1000 ohm potentiometer corresponding to the lift into an optional output control signal 0 (2) .M4x12 ._" Pos...ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5. 1OV DC or 0 (4) . 5..80 SO 81 I Fig.5.82 00405010004706 Page 35 .81 DeSignation Head cap screw DIN EN ISO 4762 .. 20mA DC. 5078 5079 .--5083 5082 50...8 Electronic position controller ES11 The electronic position controller ES 11 converts continuous input control signals 0 (2) . For installing and setting the electronic position controller ES11 the operating instructions applicable to this unit must be observed in the appropriate valid version. in which case interrogation of the valve position takes place via a 1000 ohm potentiometer. The corresponding operating instructions are supplied with each unit. 50.. The corresponding operating instructions are supplied with each unit. For installing and setting the electronic position indicator RI21 the operating instructions applicable to this unit must be observed in the appropriate valid version..- '- 50.5.. 20mA into a 3-point output signal for the motor.M4x8 Head cap screw DIN EN ISO 4762 .5 kN 'so~78!79 '50.80 _. 10V DC or 0 (4) . Designation Option ES11 or RI21 Holding bracket Pos. 17: Installing R121! ES11! heating ARI-PREMIO 2.2 .

81 Designation Potentiometer Option ES11 or RI21 Head cap screw DIN EN ISO 4762 .108 Designation Head cap screw DIN EN ISO 4762 .79 50. It must be used a double potentiometer with 1000/1000 Ohm.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5. 18.M4x8 Pos. carefully remove hood.78/79 -50.67 50. 50. 12 kN and 15 kN type in 24V version.106 50.82 50.Switch off mains voltage and safeguard to prevent it from being switched back on again accidentally.9 Electronic position indicator (RI21) and position controller (ES11) together in the actuator Except or the 5 kN. 50. . the electronic position indicator RI21 and the electronic position controller ES11 can be build-in together in the ARIPREMIO.5 kN Pos.81 Fig. .Loosen counter-sunk screw in hood.106 50.82 50. To install the RI21 and ES11 proceed as follows: .5.2 .Mount RI21 and ES11 with mounting kit according to Fig. 50.M4x12 Metal sheet ES11 and RI21 Distance bold - - Page 36 00405010004706 . 18: Installing R121 1 ES11 at the same time as ARI-PREMIO 2.

To install the dTRON 316 proceed as follows: In addition to "5. '50-.5.10.M4x8 Temperature controlierdTRON 316 Fixing bracket (option dTRON) Holding bracket (option dTRON) Self-locking nut (option dTRON) Fig.For changing the working direction to heating signal = extending driving spindle.1 Installation of the dTRON 316 The dTRON 316 can be mounted in the ARI-PREMIO as a complete unit with a mounting kit. . 19).3 Connection".98 50.5. to a manual given setpoint by means of a three-step output connected with the actuator.81 50.Mount the temperature controller on the gear plate by using the specific installation kit (Fig. It cannot be combined with ES11.100 Designation Head cap screw DIN EN ISO 4762 .5 kN 0040501000 4706 Page 37 .Plug in the connector X2 of the dTRON 316 to the plug-in connector X 1 (1/N. just change the wires on the connectors 11 and 14. . .2 . 14) of the actuator terminal. which are measured by inputconnected temperature sensors.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5. . the electrical connection of the dTRON 316 has to be done in the following way: .97 50. 11.4. 5.Connect the signal input and the individual wanted additional functions according the wiring diagram to the dTRON 316. Pos.99 50.Connect the power supply L 1 and N to the dTRON 316. 19: Installing dTRON 316 ARI-PREMIO 2.10 Integrated temperature controller dTRON 316 The integrated temperature controller controls temperatures.

11. ATTENTION I . L2 and L3 are wrongly connected! ----------------------------------The electrical connection procedure as described in 6.5. . K2/A2 Page 38 00405010004706 .Use the mounting kit to attach the reversing contactor to the gear plate (fig.11. . 19). 5. . L2 and L3 to achieve the desired direction of rotation of the three-phase motor.5.5.4. 11. .5.Connect the individual conductors as follows: Black (L t) S2/14 Brown (U) Blue (1/N) S1/11 K1/A2.When the reversing contactor is installed without a phase control relay.Strip off the outer cable insulation down to about 18 cm.12 Phase control relay" regarding connecting with a phase control relay.Connect the three-phase connection L1. It is also possible to install the heating and the phase control relay. the thrust actuator may be damaged if phases L 1.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5. Proceed as follows to install the reversing contactor: Switch off the mains voltage and take measures to prevent it being switched back on inadvertently. 10 if you are connecting the reversing contactor without a phase control relay. .11 Integrated reversing contactor The integrated reversing contactor is actuated using a 3-step input signal.Refer to "5. The reversing contactor can only be combined with one of the ES11. L2.Remove plug X25.Wire up as shown in the table in fig. The reversing contactor swaps over phases L 1.2 Electrical connection with ES11 ordTRON 316 Modify the 3P output cable of the ES11 or the dTRON 316 as follows: .1 Installing the reversing contactor The reversing contactor can be mounted in the ARI-PREMIO as a complete unit using a mounting kit. 5. RI21 or temperature controller options.3 Connection is supplemented by the following steps: . L3 and the 3-step input signal as shown in fig.

It cannot be combined with the dTRON 316 temperature controller in the actuator. 5.4. .107 Designation Head cap screw DIN EN ISO 4762 .Connect the three-phase connection L1.81 50.M4 x 8 Reversing contactor Fixing plate (option reversing contactor) Phase control relay Bracket (option phase control relay) . The electrical connection procedure as described in .3 Connection" and . This protects the thrust actuator.102 50.Attach the phase control relay next to the reversing contactor (Fig.5.- Fig. 10.M4 x 6 . L3 and the 3-step input signal as shown in Fig.57 SO.12. 50.5.M4 x 10 Head cap screw DIN EN ISO 4762 . 20: Installing reversing contactor and phase control relay ARI-PREMIO 12 -15 kN 00405010004706 Page 39 .11 Integrated reversing contactor" is supplemented by the following steps: . 19).59 50. It is only possible to use the phase control relay in conjunction with the reversing contactor. Proceed as follows to install the phase control relay: Switch off the mains voltage and take measures to prevent it being switched back on inadvertently. L2.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5.. L2 and L3 are connected correctly.105 50.103 50.5..1 Installing the phase control relay The phase control relay is installed in the ARI-PREMIO next to the reversing contactor.5.5.12 Phase control relay The phase control relay monitors phases L 1. The reversing contactor is only activated by the phase control relay providing phases L 1. Pos. L2 and L3 in the mains input supply. Head cap screw DIN EN ISO 4762 .

or wall-mounted . ATTENTION! ~----~.1) with the 2 x hexagon bolts (pos. 50.5) back on to the body (pas. .2) and secure lock washers (pas.Once connection is complete.13 DC-MODULE Three-step converter for control of electric thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 230V 50Hz 2.Unscrew 2 x hexagon bolts (pas. 50.Release screws (pas.120.Position controller ES11 and position indicators RI21 and RI32 can be used as optional extras .STOP . . .The cable from the DC module must be taken through the cable glands on the drive and screwed. 50.5kN 230V 50Hz thrust actuator 5.1) with screws (pas.5) from body (pos.120. 50.1 Fitting the DC MODULE to ARI·PREMIO The DC MODULE is mounted to the outside of the ARI-PREMIO. 50. screw the cover (pas.120. for OPEN . . . 50. Characteristics .Fasten body (pas.4) to retaining plate (pos.120.5.Even with only 24V in the input.2) with lock washers (pos.2 to 5 kN. 50.16) on connection side of ARI-PREMIO.120.3).Fasten retaining plate (pos.120. 50.5.Can be retrofitted to the ARI-PREMIO 2.120.Simple 2-wire control .Fitted to the ARI-PREMIO. 50.2 . .13. .High voltages are induced in the DC MODULE and ARI-PREMIO.4). 50. Page 40 00405010004706 .SHUT functions .120. .Electronics installed in a strong protective housing .16).120.120. 50.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO 5. . for conversion of a 24V input DC voltage into a 230V 50Hz 3-step output control signal.Connect DC MODULE in accordance with wiring diagram. voltages can reach over 230 V. with 24V DC voltage.3-step converter. (Isolation means that the voltage to a system is switched off at a/l poles) . 50.- .Direction of rotation changed simply by reversing polarity .6) and remove cover (pos.4).For a safe connection it is vital to isolate the 24V in the input. 50.120. The DC MODULE converts a 24V input DC voltage into a 230V 50Hz 3-step output signal depending on polarity.

1 50.5 50.120.1203 ' \ 50.120.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 50.16 50.4 50.5 50.120.:' --_j-IIHH~ ~ ~~\ . 50.120.2 .3 50.120.120.6 Designation Head cap screw M4 x 12 Body Cover Head cap screw M4 x 20/7 -- -- 00405010004706 Page 41 . 21: DC Module Option ARI-PREMIO 2.6 Fig.5 kN Pos.120 50.120.120.2 - Designation Lock washers DC module complete Retaining plate Hexagon bolt M 10 x 45 Pos. 50. 50.120.

·.i.. .· ...-.13....-~---- DC. 0. 65VA) with ES 11 230V (option) mit RI21 230V (option) only possible in conjunction with ES11 (option) mit RI32 (option) only possible as two-wire connection in current loop - .la~i~n ...{ ... · . / > i ..•.. Output frequency Power output Protection type EN 60529 max.5 A at no-load S1 -100% ED 230V (at no-load above 230V AC) 50Hz . .5 A (5 Aat full load)...\/...... as a high voltage drop occurs in long conductors! Add-on to thrust drive ARIPREMia ARI-PREMIO with Position controller ES 11 ARI-PREMIO with Position indicator RI21 ARI-PREMIO with Position indicator RI32 PREMia 230V 50Hz 2. . ·. A Operating mode EN 60034-1/ A11 Output voltage --. approx.. ...-.(.5. .... ....· ... >.hl$~I..ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO 5..• 9q. •. ..~.' . ambient temperature Weight Dimensions DC MODULE Hz VA °C kg 65VA IP 65 -20°C ... · Not possible in combination with dTRON temperature regulator Page 42 00405010004706 .. . +10%/-20% (smoothed) 1 ..•..>. . V --- 24V DC voltage.. Supply voltage Current consumption -"'~-. .. . . ...~"--.. .. .. ·/X....M~C!!AI!I' Electrical connection using screw terminals max 2... . ------.2 .---....... . • • >. ."-~ V •.ModOI~ ' . + 70°C 2 -~-- mm BxHxT 160x100x83 (without retaining plate and screw fittings) ~()ilrr~qti2\'1J..' .2 Technical data· DC·Module Typ(>.5kN (max.-....·... .. . ..5mmL Ensure suitable conductor cross-section. ...

. 2!. :... SO -:::s 0111 .. ::I.: II 11'12512'127 xw[:..V ?4V ~ll U 1 2 J ... -=_ ~.U 3-P 24V o '" ~ ....2-SkN... "1 ..:4VA[ U .. ARI-PREMIO 2.....OFF ~ON ..o :0..\2~00 J ~~UII" XO r. 10V 24V DCandAC 58 . with DC-MODULE Accessorie 0'1 '" (...(.VOC 24VA.J... '4.. '" "0 + iil eo :::s CO ~ 2.. =-..- » .(.. oS' r+ _ CD 1-111 l.UI 24-VDC SA Four-wire connection 2.10' N N " ?t ..U . r II ~ 24-vDc I'r Two-wire connection (current loop) 4... _..- T :: -- I " c'" " L' I~..I.. » :::s _. I -r~ '& n ~ l I II I ' Ii RI RI32 CQ 3 i Ii -c6'-=.... W '" "U :.~x ... 'iE I II "1.20mA 24VDC SA S8 ~o..o:::S "tJ ..1 l~~ x121~ Potentiometer connection optionally with R1 or R2 potentiometers from 100 Ohm to 20 kOhm 34 "C CD o Z '--"v Polarity for retracting PREMIO stem I . Co I» III r+:::S _. 230V ~~~: _ >. -... . CO <1> ..OFF S8 . '" o [V: .of4 me. Four~wire connection 4.- iil 3 . . 1 -.3~3J y _ _---=:::s. .1 WE 551525) ~ iii· Co WE HZ S': (524) i r.t:.." SA . II "I I" It "I I : POT II "I '4. 20mA 24VDC andAC ~Ol' ~Oll o 3 o Co C ~ -tl» :::l":::s . _ -.T0f0 xs S N " m 0'1 o i-.. :::l CQ --J. POT! F~2 1[+1db r&f l o ~ o o o o ~ 53 n-=r DC-MODUL X4~"M'M' _J M ..[ Input c: cI»~ 00 -III .. :.3' LfLll __ 1It t:L I I I - I!T lJ I•In' :...

r II II ~ ~ .. r . r WE 5S ('325) II ~ . "'I I I I! ! g. I. ARI-PREMIO 2. ::rill -Icc Polarity for extending PREMia stem Polarity for retracting PREMia stem ....1..' 21i2017J -'" "12930 '..U .. 1"11 I'll _ ~ "-.I~ xl'! RoR.."CI ." '" !l) to" N W .> :!.xc '18 :>:6 00 X6 0 0101 [ 221327 (') 1[. ..0::1 _UI .h DC-MODULE Accessorie ....JJ o~ I . ~ -J... to RI21 ...10 0 '" 0 :<120 0 0 ~ I ~ 3 '0 (I) o :.11 I -J. (Q ES11 i»' POT PI r-'~ o o o HZ ::..1 c- "'".V 1:= ~S' 8'!:t. w.01: II ... N i l o N m S N Ii Ii ~ ..' I~ + iD iil . _ . o '" ~ DC-t10DUL : I II 3-P ?i. .4 {52'.. r X201 I X12 24V !! from DCMODULE from DCMODULE X9.-+ so' -::I OUI m~ .. 24V III III II .V ~-tl---"I .-+::1 II III UI 2:. r WE WE I II ~ . n -.." Xl.==---.. "'" 0 » ::I _..J I I Y3J I I I LB3:J--OO-l U :: I tt. "'" ::I I: CUI _. 1[.. I I I 0 IF ci ~" Ql 3 .lH or X11"~.xzo to ES11 " II "\J"'" • ... c.-. r POT R2 RI21 (Q ::s Q.2-SkN....U ):> . " !" !" :. ~ g o nov 50Hz DC IN OUT Ix.E~"zol"l l.i -. '" . ..

5.1 Useful range of the linear motion potentiometer Linear motion potentiometers R1 or R2 are connected in a three-conductor connection. Designation Fixing bracket Position indicator RI32 Washer 4.98) with the head cap screws (pos.81 Designation Head cap screw M4 x 6 ~~ Pos.5.2 .. 50. 20mA or 2 .5 kN Pos. It is important that the mechanical stroke distance of the control actuator is smaller than the stroke distance of the linear motion potentiometer. 50.Screw fixing bracket (pos. 50. adjustable zero point setting range 100%- adjustable slope span setting range '10%- Fig.. 50.59) and washers (pos.2 Installing the R132 electronic position indicator in the PREMIO .. .14.The RI32 position indicator is fitted to the ARI-PREMIO as illustrated.Then fit position indicator (pos. 50. 50. 10V standardised control signal. Here the RI32 position indicator is also suitable for conductive plastic potentiometers. 50. 50.122).ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5. 5.3 Potentiometer Head cap screw DIN EN ISO 4762· M4x8 50.98 .121 50.14 Electronic position indicator RI32 The R132 electronic indicator transforms a resistance change into a 4 .98) to gearbox cover plate with head cap screw (pos.5. The diagram on the right will help when adjusting the RI32 position indicator to the stroke distance of the linear motion potentiometer. ..07 Fig.121) to fixing bracket (pos. It is possible to link into a current loop without an additional power supply.59 50.67 50. 50.122 00405010004706 Page 45 .81). 24: Linear motion potentiometer 5. The R132 position indicator can be operated by 24V DC voltage or 24V AC voltage. 25: Option RI32 ARI-PREMIO 2.14.

Loosen counter-sunk screw in hood. It must be used a double potentiometer with 1000/1000 Ohm.5 kN -- Pos. Fig.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5.121 Designation Head cap screw DIN EN ISO 4762 .14.. . Page 46 0040501000 4706 . 26. To install the RI32 and ES11 proceed as follows: . 50.78 Designation Potentiometer Option ES11 or RI21 Pos.5.82 50.2 .M4x12 Option RI32 . carefully remove hood.Mount RI32 and ES11 with mounting kit according to Fig.67 50. . 26: Installing RI32 1 ES11 at the same time as ARI-PREMIO 2.3 Electronic position indicator (RI32) and position controller (ES11) together in the actuator The electronic position indicator RI32 and the electronic position controller ES11 can be build-in together in the ARI-PREMIO. 50.Switch off mains voltage and safeguard to prevent it from being switched back on again accidentally.

.··.. 29..••·.. 10 kOhm three-conductor connection.4 Technical data· Position indicator RI32 Typ~»< .·.".5... 30 of the ARI·PREMIO..5 Potentiometer installation f. +85 "C % 95 % r. I Supply voltage Potentiometer input Control signal output.2 % measurement range %/K 0.3~PQ~ltj(lOiO~ig~tQr······ -40 "C...4 Potentiometer" in these Operating Instructions.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO 5. Rc connector from potentiometer cable of R132 position indicator into pin strip 25.... -- ::J Plug Ra.. ..····· ~ 32f>o~iti~nindlpat~r •. ·. ._ . •.i«<.>..:.• '. 27 or 28.. .14. 800 j. ambient temperature Humidity Weight Dimensions C9nne¢tiQ:tj/his!<lll~tioti . no dewing ca. 500 W) (control output signal with supply voltage internal electrical connection) j. current Measuring current at potentiometer arm Linearity error Temperature coefficient Auxiliary energy inflow Protection type EN 60529 Max. 60Hz 1 kOhm .t.·.··". .i~i Electrical connection Built into thrust actuator using screw terminals max 2. suitable for I conductive plastic potentiometer '..20 mA DC (load max. voltage Control signal output.. .... 35 g g mm o x depth 44 x 38 "C ... .F. .tA max.· ••·.entiometer please note point .RI. 26.tA % ± 0..'.5.: .04 %/K %N 0. ..5. . 0040501000 4706 Page 47 . Rb.5.. .14.5 mm< in ARI-PREMIO all versions 5.. ..V 2....\ ~ ATTENTION! - When installing the pO.. \ . 10 V DC with (control signal output with supply voltage intemal electrical connection) rnA 4. . V Q 24V DC I AC 50 .02%N IP40 (terminals IP20) - -- ...

.. 20mA ~ON ~ON ~11 Fig. The connection to the potentiometer is made by a cable.5.5 mm 2 To achieve electromagnetic compatibility is recommended that shielded conductors be used for longer routings. Please request technical information direct from ARI-Armaturen..14. When the valve is shut approx. r-: POT R-j i ~i -1 r: POT R2 i RI32 1~2~1 ~llr p~'/// 1 I . 0 ohm are applied between Rb and Rc.. 10V 24V DC and AC SA S8 24-V[.7 Connection conditions The electrical connections are joined to position indicator R132 by series disconnect terminals... 20mA 24VDC connection SA S8 U SA ~o.VAC L. Appropriate conductor cross-sections for terminal connections are 0.l 5. 27 Four-wire connection 2. OFF ~ ON 2t. Ir~ IOFf-O ~n U Four-wire connection 58 24-vDc 24VAC 24V DC and AC 4. Position indicator R132 is connected by a potentiometer (R1 or R2) built into the ARIPREMIO.. Control signal selection The required control signal is adjusted uSing microswitches SA and SB i I I tf~~JAF Potentiometer connection optionally with Rl or R2 potentiometers from 100 Ohm to 20 kOhm Two~wire (current loop) 4.5.2 to 2.6 Wiring diagram II II ~1 .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO 5.14.( . Page 48 00405010004706 ..

. rotate to the left to reduce it (a slip clutch engages after 12 rotations)... = 4 mA .. rotate to the left to reduce it (a slip clutch engages after 12 rotations) For example: . .5....The meter from the zero point setting stays in the same measurement range for the slope span setting. .. maximum value ... Zero point setting ....Resistance measurement at potentiometer cable between Rb and Rc..8 Setting zero point and slope span The 4 . ...Adjust zero point setscrew N so that the desired minimum control signal value is applied to the meter.Voltage output ..Adjustment of resistance range to control signal output range is set at the slope span setscrew marked S. 1OV output control signal is adjusted to the potentiometer stroke by miniature potentiometers S (slope) and N (zero).. . . ... .Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 5... = 10 V 0040501000 4706 Page 49 ... .... isolate the potentiometer from the RI32 position indicator and reconnect after measuring.Rotate slope span setscrew S to the right to increase the output signal. . isolate the potentiometer from the RI32 position indicator and reconnect after measuring....Rotate zero point setscrew N to the right to increase the output signal... maximum value .. minimum value ...Current output .... For example: .Potentiometer must be at approximately 0 Q... .. ...Current output . .Zero point setting is made at the zero point setscrew marked N.Before measuring resistance.Resistance measurement at the potentiometer cable between Rb and Rc.14...Make the connection in accordance with the wiring diagram.....The zero point setting is always made before the slope span setting... ..Voltage output ...20mA or 2 .. .Adjust the slope span setscrew S so that the desired maximum control signal value is applied to the meter.Before measuring resistance. = 2 V Slope span setting The slope span setting is made after the zero point setting. minimum value .. = 20 mA ......

ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 6. the pulse lines governing the retracting and extending action must be exchanged on the thrust actuator. an inspection should be carried out of the sealing pOints on the thrust actuator.If failing to function properly. Accordingly maintenance in specified intervals is not necessary. I A . Page 50 00405010004706 . . always make sure that: . Crushing or injury hazard! Before putting a new plant into operation or restarting a plant after repairs or modification.0 Troubleshooting In the event of malfunction or faulty operating performance check that the installation and adjustment work has been carried out and completed in accordance with these Operating Instructions.Apply brief pulses to the thrust actuator for each direction of movement and check whether the directions of movement correspond to those desired. . During and after cleaning. the supplier or manufacturer should be consulted.Using the handwheel. Depending on the conditions governing use.hood of thrust actuator assembled.Run thrust actuator to the final position in each direction of movement and check whether it switches off automatically and whether all externally moving parts are able to move freely. run the thrust actuator to approximately mid lift position. If there is any sign of lubricant escaping or dirt having accumulated. If this is not the case.~~ ~ If malfunctions cannot be eliminate with the help of the following table "9. The thrust actuator must not be cleaned with high-pressure equipment or aggressive solvents or detergents injurious to health or highly inflammable. the sealing elements must be repaired. correcting if necessary.Regional safety instructions must be observed as a matter of policy.! ATTENTION! -It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifyin.0 Care and maintenance The thrust actuator requires very little maintenance.all works has been completed! . and afterwards place into service once again. .0 Troubleshooting table". check all installation and setting work previously carried out. the maintenance and maintenance-intervals have to be defined by the operator.Actuator components which rotate or move during operation are coloured red. 7. 8. When placing into service proceed as follows: .0 Putting the actuator into operation ATTENTION! . .

Check whether the mains voltage agrees with the voltage specified on the rating plate.) Have motor operating capacitor replaced Remove thrust actuator and send to factory for repair Thrust actuator not properly connected Short circuit due to: .. (Manual release of the handwheel disengagement mechanism.15 kN) Handwheel is still engaged and does not disengage when the motor starts up Thrust actuator alternates between clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation Thrust actuator fails to run to final positions and also produces chalter Motor operating capacitor defective Load-dependent travel switches out of ----..0 Troubleshooting table ATTENTION! . Insert connector firmly in jack strip thus affected Unscrew the motor mounting screw closest to the cable feedthrough.moisture .- Remedy Ascertain and eliminate cause Fuse has blown Replace fuse Rectify connection on thrust actuator in accordance with wiring diagram Ascertain exact cause.Dry the thrust actuator and eliminate leakage . .- (Only for 12 .read point 6. Have motor changed.read point 10.0 and 11.Rectify connection on thrust actuator in accordance with wiring diagram .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 9.0 prior to dismantling and repair work! . ! defective long connecting cables or inadequate conductor crosssection Mains fluctuations beyond permissible tolerance travels System pressure too high Periodic failure on thrust actuator Thrust actuator is switched off in retracting direction prior to load-dependent switch (threeway valve) Loose connection on feedline Travel switch S3 not set corresponding to use -Lay connecting cables in accordance with requisite output Arrange for "clean" mains system within requisite tolerances Reduce system pressure Tighten connections on terminal strips Set travel switch S3 in accordance with operating instructions 0040501000 4706 Page 51 .drop due to excessively Voltage .0 before restarting the plant ! Fault Thrust actuator fails to move Possible Causes Power failure -.wrong connection .motor has burned out Connector contacts not plugged in! not properly plugged into jack strip .

. We guarantee freedom of faults in compliance with state-of-the-art technology and the confirmed application. .on no account supported inside a seat! To dismantle the thrust actuator proceed as follows: . .e. The warranty shall not cover maintenance work. the railway company or carrier company immediately or else claims for replacements from these companies will be invalidated. . .Place hood on carefully from above and fix in place with counter-sunk screw and rubber gasket.Loosen clamping bolts connecting the thrust actuator to the fitting.Valve plug approximately in mid lift position . design modifications or natural wear. GERMAN QUALITY VALVES ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co.Remove thrust actuator from valve. After being disconnected. Any damage incurred during transport should not be reported to us but rather to the competent cargO-handling depot. the mains power must be prevented from being switched back on again accidentally. KG" valid at the time of delivery or.vertrieb@ari-arrnaturen. No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling or disregard of operating and installation instructions. Technology for the Future. No claims will be accepted beyond the scope of this warranty.0 Dismantlement of thrust actuator ATTENTION! .Loosen counter-sunk screw in hood.com E-mail: info. KG. datasheets and relavant regulations.The system must be run down (depressurised state) as the valve cone is not held without the thrust actuator and would thus be conducted by the system pressure.Disconnect all cables led into thrust actuator from outside and remove from thrust actuator. 11.0 Warranty I Guarantee The extent and period of warranty cover are specified in the "Standard Terms and Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co. in the contract of sale itself. 0-33756 Schlo~ Holte-Stukenbrock Telephone (+495207) 994-0 Telefax (+49 5207) 994-158 or 159 Internet: hUp:lfwww. carefully remove hood. by way of departure. Justified complaints will be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a speCialist appOinted by us.ari-armaturen. The right to replacement delivery is excluded.com Page 52 00405010004706 . . disconnected while dismantlement work is being carried out.The supply line for connecting up the thrust actuator must be in the dead state i. . installation of external parts.Loosen grub screw inside torsion safety feature. screw coupling out of torsion safety feature.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO 10. This warranty also does not cover any damage which occurs during operation under conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements.

EN 50082-2 . EN 294. 0040501000 4706 Page 53 .Directive about electromagnetic compatibility 89/336/EEC (amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC) Applied harmonized standards: EN 55011. EN 60335-1.EG-Low voltage directive 73/23/EEC (amended by 93/68/EEC) Applied harmonized standards: EN 60204-1. EN 60730-1 . EN 349.EG-Machinery Directive 98/37/EC Applied harmonized standards: EN 292-1. KG. 33756 Schlo(1 Holte-Stukenbrock that the supplied model of electric thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO in the delivered version complies with the following regulations: . Mergelheide 56-60.0 EC declaration of conformity EC declaration of conformity as defined by Directive about electromagnetic compatibility 89/336/EEC and the EG-Low voltage directive 73/23/EEC Declaration of the manufacturer as defined by the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC Herewith we declare. EN 50081-1.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARI·PREMIO 12. EN 60204-1 The supplied model is intended to be incorporated into machinery or assembled with other machinery to constitute machinery covered by this directive and must be put into service until the machinery into which it is be incorporated has been declared in conformity with the provisions of the directive as amended by 98/37/EC. ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. EN 292-2.

ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Thrust actuator ARt-PREMIO 0040501000 4706 Page 54 .

.

&tsatztelfe Sechskantmutter IOsen uM Spu!e abnehmen. The arrow on the bOdy Indcates the direction of flow. Kern oder Kernraum verschmulrt FestsH~ zender Kern beWirkt bel Wechselspannung SpulenOberhltzung. as then foreign maHer does not lend to accumulate In the armature tube (Increases life). normally Neutrale sowle telCht aggresslve Gase und F10sslgkeiten. ElektrtlCher Anschlu8 Spannung und Stromart laut Typschlld beachten.EPDM. da sle ohne Kern In kurzer Zeit durchbrennl ·Sttkung AnschluB. Voltage tolerance ± 10%. VA) sowie den gewAhlten Olchtwel'k9toff nieht engreiten. If after a langthYPElrlod of use. ObSetVe (he permlssible pressure range given on the valve label. die die GehauaewerkStoffe (Ms hzw. Spar. In Ruhestellung geschlossen. AnschluB durch BOrkertKabelkopf. Beslelfnummer 1050-S001. Eban80 sind dle konkreten Elnsatz· Operating Instructions type 255 These Installation and operating inslructlons must be followed. Installation as required but preferably with the coil uppermost. Operating Instructions 0507/02_EU·ML_00893044 . F= FPM. dlrektwir1<end. DlchtuogsmatElrlal) sAubem. Kabel3xO. For order numbers.. Drehmoment fur KabelkopfbefestJ. weld 8patter. Kabelkopfefn$&. montiert 1st. Cable plug Insert can be rotated by 4 x90°. operating pressure and vol~ tage. schadhafte Teile-. leakages occur between the body and the threaded pipe. $Ollten nach Jangerem E1nsatz Undlchlheiten zwischen Gehause und Gewinderohr auftreten. 1st das Gewlnderohr nachzuzlehen. order number 1~50·S001'{)21. Aache Stecker1ahne = ErdungsanschluB.tz: kann urn 4 x goo gedrehl werden. parts Electrical connection Observe the voltage ar:d type ofcunentas given on the valve label. Tefton tape Is recommended for sealing valve ports. Bnbaulaga belleblg.Sohutzart IP 65. Connection via Barkert cable plug. SUPl?Ort and align pl· pellnes sufficiently to prevent strain Ol1the vutve bodfQ. well slch dadurch SlnkstOffe nlchtlm Kernraum ablagem kOnnen (erhOhte Lebensdauer).75 mm2. bedlngungen zu berockslchtlgen und die LelatunQs- DoolIn closed. taken Into account and the performance data of the device must be observed In accordance with the data sheet The operator must ensure that the&e Instructions are followed eo as to guarant" the prOblem-free operation and long service life or the device. the exact conditions of U8e must be.und Botrlebsanleltung 1st unbedlogt zu beachten.o21. Caution When screwing In the plpeconnactlons: 00 not use the solenoid as a lever. daB de metaljsohe Oiohtflache am Gewlnderahr und GeMuse nlcht ver$Chmutzt oder beschAdigt wlrd. EPTFE. Der Dlent· workstoH 1st hinter derNennwefte auf dem Typenschild angegeben. Ala Oichtungsmaterial PTFE~Band verwen- E1nbau fluids handled Neutral and s/ighHy_agijre85lve gases and ilqulds which do not attack the bodY materials (brass or stainless steel) or the selected saal matertal The seal material Is coded after the ortflceon thevatvelabel (1\. classlflcation IP 65.-EPOM. Belriebsdruck und Spannung QberprOfen. Kern-. SchweiBperlen. Similarly. gung 1 Nm.annature. Metal~sealed solenoid valve.6urkert Betrlebsanleltung Typ 255 Diose Elnbau.6. Bestelinummern slehe ROckseHe. Balm ZUsammenbau darauf achlen. Cable 3x0. empfohlen wlrd nach aben weisendes Magnetsystem. (. S=Stahl).. Magnet ziehl nlcht an: Kurzschlu8 oder Spulenunterbrechung. S=Steel). as they bum out after a short time without an armature. Rohrteltung gut abstOtten un<! richMn. Prior to Installation remove foreign matter (solder residues. Solenoid does not energize: Short-cIrcuit or coil bum-out. Spannungstaleranz ± 10%. Medium Dies 1st yom Anwender zu gewahrlelsten und daten des Gerate gemAB Datenblatt elnzuhalten.75 mm . Ast terminal = Earth connection. Achtung Belm Bnschrauben der RohranschlOsse Spule nlcht als Hebel verwenden. take care that the metallic sealing faeas at the threaded pipe and the body are not dirty nor suffer damage. seal materiaQ. damttV¥ltHkOrper nicht verspannl wlrd. Feder-austauschen. Gewinderohr Ibsen. Der Pfeil auf dam GehauS9 glbt die DurchfluBlichtung an.. InataUatton den. Nm. E=PTFE. ZUIMslgen Druckberelch taut Typenschlld beachlen. see over. spring. Vantil kann ireitragend in Rohrteitung elngebaut oder mitlels zwaier Bohrungen" 7 mm befestigt werden. F""FPM.. TroubllHlOOotlng Check port connections. When re-assembling. direct acting. Unscrew nut and extract coli. The valve can be Installed wtthout a separate support in the pipeline oreen beattached by means of two I:xlres of 7 mm dla. or foreign maHer impeding annature movemenl A Jammed armature causes the COIl to overheat In the case of AC supply. Tightening torque for catle plug attachmenl1 Achtung Wechselstromspule nlchl an Spannung anschlieBoo wenn sle nlcht aut dem Ven". Autbau MetaHisch gedichtetes MagnatvenllJ. Vor der Montage Rohrteltung Yon Verunrelnlgungen (lOlr(l(lkst8nde. unscrew the threaded plpe:and replace defective parts. caution Do not supply power to AC colis If they are notinstalled on the valve. retighten the threaded pIpe. Voraussetzung fOr eine efnwandfrele Funktion mit langer LebenSdauer.

....~n:l82U VAG 112 ~. Bitte wegen der hohen Amahl an Monragevarlanten beT Ersatztelfbestelluna kompfetla Angaben beifOaen.S-0. (IImln] (mmJ 1 2 2... kill. please alva all details when ordering spatS parts.5 N DIN 3771-FPM 70 (F) _ _ _ _ _ Stoplen mit Rohr und GeYr'inderohr255-3012 Plug Wllhplpe and threaded pipe IlII Druckfeder III! . Steel {bar] o.03 0.... 355-3004 Coli.O-Ring 14 x 2 N DIN 3771-FPM 70 (F) {OIl -- Spring washer Spule.65 0. EPOM FPM.(~ !S) BofeSllgu~g~ 256-20 Attachment cliP 2 Sl Komblschraube DIN 6900 M4x6 A2L 2$crews DIN 6900 1.so 0..ion by liquids and 9a888 DN Ky- ONnWert Gasel g...a·Rlng 16){ 1. Ii! PTfE {bar] ..16 02' Druckberelch/pressur/presslon by AC nooslgt Gase/gasesfgaz liquidS [bar} NBR. Due to the large number of variants.Ersatztelle Typ 255 Spare parts type 255 _ ~ ~ Sechskantmvtter DIN 439·8M 14 x 1.60 5 6 33 130 175 270 540 700 860 -0-3:5 0-60 0-60 0-100 0-40 0-32 0-16 0-10 0-6 0-4 o-so 0-30 0-16 -0·25 0-12 0-7 0-10 0-5 .Compression spring 490-44 ~ ~ ::::i:t:" ~u.14..12 0....5 3 4 Wert flOsslg1 liquids {mllhj 0.4-A 2l Nul .~ J [255-10&52.Federscheibe 355-18 c = . .6 A2L Typ 255 Druckberelch/preBsur/preB. compl..

tI. utiliser du PTFE en ruban. La posiclOnd& Ia wlllula es Indlferente. malMau d'&tan· cMM). ne pas mettre Ia boblne sous tension \ant qu'eI/e n'est pas mont" surla vanne. Tengase en euenta la gams de presiOn Indicada en Ie place. Como estopada empl6ese elnta PTFE. Construction: con lerge duraclOn.). AuldOl: Gases y Uquldos neutrales que no ataquen al cuerpo (Ms 0 VA) nl al malerial delaSjuntas. degri:l de protection IP 65.7Smm y ciavija plana de puesta a tierra. lors du vissage des raccords. Le connecteur paut atre oriantb suivant 4 x 90°. muat/a. Raccordomant 61ectrlque: Respecterla tension at Ie type de courant flgurant sur la plaque signailltique. La. vallier Ace que Ie plan de joint me. asegOre8$ que los conduclos eslan libres de cuerpos axtral\os (residues de soldadura. Pour les ref&rences. y retlrando eI nOcleo tljo (roscado). car.. pues sal~prolon­ ga Ia vida de Ie valvula. pasl. 1050--8001Oil. de acci6n dIrects y normalmente carratta. Duronle el montaJe obs6rv&se que las superflcles da unlOn del cuerpo y nucleo fijo. ver al dorsa.. Un bIocage de I'armature en altematif paut provoquer une $urchauffe dela bob/ne. sobrecalentamlento da la boblna. E = PTFE. voir au verso. La flecha def cuerpo Indica Ia dlrecci()n del fI\lldo. F = FPM. etc. pero J)(eferentemenle el sistema magn6tico en is parte superiQr. ne pat utiU&er Ie boblne comma levier. EJ atesesmlento del nueleo origina. L'4Mectro-almaot ns fonctionne pas: court--cir~ cult ou coupure de fa boblne. La materiau d'6tanche/t6 est IndlQU& $OUS Is tonne d'un code sur Ia plaque Slgnailltique.espreclso reapretar oJ tubo.burkert Instructions de service type 255 d'ullllsatlon.. de pr6f6rence avec 6lectro-aimilnt vets Ie haut pour emp&chertout-d6pOt dane "antl'efer (augmentaHon 'de: la durl)e de vie).l d'etancMitll cholai. paries de soudure. Esto debe estar gerantlzado por el usuar 0 yes eon~ dlclOn previa para un funclonamlento sin problemas Respecter Imperativement la notice de montage at nique. Interrumpi~ de 0 el nUcleo atascado por suciedad 0 par alguncuerpo emano.M apparais.la pression de service at Is tension. Raecordemenl par connecleur BOrkert. Alenel6n: AJ montar los conduetos en la valvula. nattoyer les ce. e nCicleo m6vi1. La lolerancla en Ie tensIOn es de± 10%. rassort -. it action dlracte. InstaUation: Avant d'installer Is vanne. no esMn sucias 0 sa deterloren. etc. Instalacl6n: Antes de la Instalacl6n de la vAlvula.cable3x O.. Ia suite du diameue nominal (A=EPDM. Si d63pUA! de un seNicia prolongado se obs&rvaran fugas entre eI cuerpo delavt\lvula y etlubo roscado.: Gaz at liquldes neutres au peu agressifs n'oHaquant pas Ie corps de Is vanna (lallan au eclar lnoxydable) nI Ie mal6riEU. no haeer palenca con la boblos. VAntier Iss raccordements. E = PTFE. Aslmlsmo deben tomarse en conslderaclOn la8 condJck>nes concretas de apllcaclon y atenarse a los datos de rendlmlento del sperato con forme ala hOle de datos. defecluosos. la bobine paut grillar rapidement D6faule de foncUonnement: torBOrker. S = Acler). resstlrr9f Ie tube ftlete. Respecter Ia gamme de pression actnlss/ble s~i6e sur Ia plaque 8lgnal6tlque. ptkee de rechllnge: OlMssar j'ecrou hexagonal at retireria boblna. SI. COuple de sarrage du connecleur: 1 Nm. pr~l6n de trebajo y tensIOn electrica SI el nucleo mOvil no 8cclona. rem placer les pieces andommageesannaluta. F = FPM.senl entre Ie corps de la vanne at Ie tube mete. CAbte de 3xO.si no ssM montada 80bre la vAlvula. biemente Ia bobina &Stem cortoclrcultada.Para la referenda de los recamblos. lore du remontage. Tol6rance detension:± 10%. malerial de junta. Tenlr compte des conditions realise d'ullllsation et respecter les caractMstiQues de puissance de I'apparell indlQu4es sur Is fiche tech- Inatrucclonea de aervlclo tlpo 255 Deben observarse impresclndiblemente estas Instrucclonea de monlaje y aervlcio. normalement fennee. neche sur Ie corps de lEt vanne Indlque Ie sens d'Acoulement Position d'installation Indiff&renle. Averial: Compruebense las conexiones. Attention: Constl'\JCelc)n E!ectrovAlvule con earcasa metAlica. La vanne peul titre malnlenue dlractement par tea canaBsations ou flxea au moyen de deux Irous de 01 mm. Par de lorsl6n del enehufe 1 Nm. ConexiOn electrlca mediante cone<::- puede montarse en 4 posidones (4 x 9QO). Atenclon: No conecta:( fa bobina de corrlentealtema a Jared.nallsaUons (re· stes de brasure. armature ou entrefer encressbs. puesto que sin nCicleo se Quema inmedJatamente.demonler Ie lube filete. en cornenle aile rna. Bfen soutenir el allgnertes canalisations Pour ne pas forcer Ie corps de Ia vanna. sans armature. Elconector CoMxl6n elKlrlc. Comma matl)riau d'l)tancMitiJ. au boutc:fun r:ertaln temps.a: Compruebese Is tension y tipo de comenls IndlCados en fa placa de caraeleris\k}as.75 mmll'. virutas de la roses. Languette = borne de mIse A la terre. Instalar y fljar los conOOctos de tonna qUe no se produzoan tenslones en al cuerpo de la valvula. indlcadoen Ia pfaca de caracterfsticas a continuael6n del diAmetro nominal (A =: EPDM.1050~SOO1--011 prolece16nP65. Sustltucl6n de pleza8: Quintando Ia tuecca hexago~1 puade susUtulrse la boblna. AttentIOn: En altematif. . Atrides utllIulll. 8ectrovanne AtltancMil~ m~tal/metal. Ref. des dMauts d'atanch9. La valvula puede ser fi'jada direciamenle a loa conduetos 0 mediante !os dos taladros de 7 rom 0. II appartlent IlIl'utillsateur de sulvre ooslnstrucUons qui garanll&aent un foncllonnemenl correct al una longue dun~e de via. S = Acero). talliqua au niveau du tube lilete du corps de vanna soft propre at oon endommag&.

och strOmvarden stammer med SpQnnlngstolerans ± 10%. Sa till vld hopmonleringen. gade rOret och byt ut skadada detalJer -ankara. stangd 1VlloIAgo.. ne II materiale di lanuta scelto. fjAder. tlpo 255 Osservare 8ssolutamente Ie IstruzJoni per II montegglo e "u8o. BesuUlnlngsnummer. chiusa in poslzlone di riPOse. un nucleo Inceppatoprovoca II surriscald8mooto della bobina.75 mm2. Om anvAndaren tOlJer dessa lnstruktloner garanleras felfrl funkUon och tang IIvslangd.sere giraio 4 voile dl90°. Obaervera: Anslutinte en vAx&lstrllmsspole till spAnning dA denln· Ie 4r monlerad pA ventilen. Venti!en kan monteras frlbarende I rOrlednlngen eller S4ttaafast genom tvA hAl 0 7 mm. L1nser1o della splna pu6 es.75 mm!!. Terminale platlo = terra. Nm. Monterlng: AvlAgsna f6rorenlngar (IOdrester. Numeri d'ordlnazlonl vedere 8 lergo. spolan som hAvann yld Inskruvandet ay rOranslulningarna. Stacoere II tubo filettato. 51 conslglia dltenere Ia bobinarlvofta verso /'alto in modoche I sed/menU non $I deposItino n~ vena del nucleo (maggiore durata): Ja valvola pub venlrmontataa ebalzo nella tubazione 0 fissata con 2 fori da 7 mm 0. Pilon pA ventilhuaet anger genomstrOOlnlngsriktningen Monterlngstage Ar valfrltt. Elekhi'k . SIOd upprOr1ednlngama val och rllda upp. magnetkaman eller styrrOret igensatl av smuts. occorreril rlserrare 1/ tubo f~ettato.gnelsystemel t1ktas uppal.truzfone: 8ettrovatvola ad azlone diretta. Controllare \I collegamanlo.rsl perd~e fra carpo vaJvola e lubo fi/ettato. arbetstryck oc. E= PTFE..n. S ""stal). eHersom den bn!nner sOnder pa kart tid utan magnetkarna. Montegglo: PrIma delmontaggio efimlnare 10 sporco dalle tubazlonl (resldul dI braeatura. OmmagnetkarnanhAnger sig. Sa dopa un lungo funzlonamenlo dovessero veriflca. S = acetala)._ _ nI ai corpo valvola. Medler. Om otathet mellan ventilhu&et och del gAngade rOret skulle upptrAda etler langre tids drfH. eo. kan spolen bli OVerhettad vJd vaxelstr6m. typs~len. nucleo ovana d~ nucleo sporeo. ahe non attaccano II materiale dellacoIpOvalvola (Mao VA). Aata kontaktstiftet = JorciningsansMnlng. dalo che senza nucleo brucerebbe rapldamente. Sostenere ed _ _ _ IeJo_nipor. Cavo 3x0. Attenzlone: Avvltando I mccordl non far leva &ulla vatvola. \rucklll metalliC!. sA atl vontilkroppen Inte kommer i spann. II magnete non attrae: cortoclrculto 0 interruliane nella bobina. F = FPM. A"eR%lone: Malepplicare lenslone alia bObina per carrenlealternata se non ~ monlata suUa valvola. Ta Aven hAnsyn till konkreta anvllndnlngavlllkor och donets kBpacttet enllgt datablad. tAtnlngsmaterlal) fran rOr1ednlngen fOre monterfngen..llnlnganummer 1050S 001-011. Konatnddlon: Metalliskt tAtad magnetventll. va) eller (fet valda tAtnlngsmalerialel TAtnlngsmatelialel Ar specificeral pA typskylten efter genomloppel (A= EPOM. La freccia sulla corpo valvula indica la dire-zione dl "U8$O. Protezione P 65. F ~FPM. Fela6kn1ng: Kontrollera anslutnlngar. Katlel3 xO. perle dl saldatura. Auldl: GajJ e liquidi neutri e leggermente aggressivl.nUCIeo. ObServers tlJlAtettryckomrAde onigt typskytien. dlrektstyrd. Collegamenlo eon morsettlera BOrken. AnvAnd PTFE-bend scm gAngtAtningsmaterial. OSServers II campO dl pression! ammesse Indicate sulla targhetta.och driftlnstruktion bOr absolut beaktas. Dleturbi: . Neutrals samt IAtt aggresslva gaser och vAtskor. Ia press/one d'esercWo e Ia tenstone. materlale di tenuts). 8kyddSform IP65. Coppla dl se«agglo per flssagglo spina 1 lossa sexkantmuHam och tag av spolen.. atl den metalllSl<a talningsytan pA det gangade roret och ventilhuset inta blir nedsmulsad eller akaOOd.h spanning. Iossa det g6n- R•••rvdelar. A! IiassemblaggJo fare attelllJone che Is supefUcle dl tenuts metallica al tubo fllettato e 81 corpo valvola non venga sporcata 0 dannegglata. men det rekommenderas atl ma. sono la premessa per un funzlonamento perfetto dl lunga durata. Qu&Ste Istruzlonl.iiurkert Istruzionl per I'UBO. Magneten drat ej: koftalutning &lIer avbrott i s~en.1I meterialedl tenuta ~ indica- to sulla targhetta dletro al dlametro nomlll8le (A = EPDM E = PTFE. SoatItulre I penl dlfettosl. 0I>HrVenI: Anvand Int. Allaccllmento cMeHI1co: Osservare Ie tenslone e Ia corrante Indicate suUa targhetta. bestA. PeW dl rlcamblo: Svitare it dado O88gooole etogllerela bob/no. eftereom d4tigenom avlagrlngar Inte kan avsAlts sig i ankarutrymmet (Okad livsIAngd).lnoltretenere In oonslderazione Je condlzlonl concretedllmplego e rlspettare Idatl (fI potenza delrapparecchJo In base al fOQllo del dati tecnle!. PoSlzklne dl montagglo a placlmenlo. nOdordinaDone 1050-8 001021. che vanno osservate datl'utente Bruk8snvisnlng typ 255 Denna monterfngs. Inkoppllng genom Bilrkert-kabelhuvud. VridmomentfOrfastsattnlnQ av kabelkonlakt 1 Nm. se baksldan. Kabelkontsktens insabkanvridas4 X90°. ermellnata con guarnl- zioni metaniche. Con corrente aJlernala. Tolleranza vottagglo ± 10%. som Inta angriper ventilhusmaterialen (rna resp.lutning: Se till aU spannings. avetsloppor. Usare nastro PTFE come guarnlzione. sksll det gAngade r6rm efierdragas. molla.

.

........ ...... ..........1 Significance of symbols ....3 Diagram .............1h partlsdhStl..........................: ......................0 EC declaration of conformity I 4.. 10 Rev.........1 Scope ofapplications .....................................................0 Care and maintenance ........2 Changing the set pressure "without" 2........................................1.......... 11 2...........................3 9............. ............................4 10........................................... ..................... .remar s ............1 General notes on installation .......... 15 .................................................. 17 4..... 4.......0 Installation .........1 Removing the cap .................. 8 6...0 Putting the valve into operation ......... 2 7........0 General information on operating 7...................0 Description .................0 Notes on possible dangers .....0 Warranty 1 Guarantee ....................................................................................2 spring change .....2 Explanatory notes on safety information ....... 14 4.......... 5....... SAFE (Senes 900) SAFE·P (Senes 920) (Senes 940) Contents SAFE·TCPITCS (Series 960/950) 1........... 3 spring change ..............1.... 11 2....................................................2 7......0 Trou bl es h 00 t'mg tabl e . 12.... 17 5 4.... 15 4..... 7 M f t d I t' 18 anu ac urers ec ara Ion .... 11 instructions ...3 Changing the set pressure "with" 3..................0 Storage and transport .....3 80 Trou bl es h 00 t'mg .................................................. 12 4.............0 Dismantling the valve or the top part ............................2 Operating principles ......... 2 7.................. .ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Safety valves SAFE /~ ~t (1 (/ ... 8 5................... 'In\ rrf il~+ =i::::U- • ".................... 12 7.1 Setting instructions ........··········k································· .....5 Marking ..6 11...........4 lee mea a a .......... ................1.............. .. 0040401000 2704 ........... 3 7......................................2 Representation .......

operation. All other information not specifically emphasised such as transport. current regional safety requirements must be applied and observed when taking the fittings out of service as well as when maintaining and repairing them.2 Explanatory notes on safety information In these Operating and Installation Instructions dangers.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions SAFE. installation. The notes and warnings must be observed and adhered to.\. operation. It is the owner's responsibility to define areas of responsibility and competence and to monitor the personnel. Page 2 Rev. Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer in case of problems which cannot be solved by reference to the operating instructions. 2. operating and maintenance instructions as well as technical data (in the operating instructions. a failure to comply with which can result in serious injury or danger of death for users or third parties or in material damage to the system or the environment.Handling and all work must be carried out by expert personnel or all activities must be supervised and checked. installation. 0040401000 2704 .0 Notes on possible dangers 2. 2. maintenance and repair. Warning of general danger. SAFE-TC.. It is vital to comply with these practices and to monitor compliance. The manufacturer reserves the right to introduce technical modifications at any time. product documentation and on the device itself) must also be complied with to the fullest extent in order to avoid faults which in turn can cause serious injury to persons or damage to property.In addition. . ATTENTION . !J .0 General information on operating instructions These operating instructions provide information on mounting and maintaining the fittings.1 Significance of symbols I6 I. These Operating Instructions comply with the requirements of EU Directives. risks and items of safety information are highlighted to attract special attention. SAFE-P. j maintenance or disassembly and adhere to them strictly. Information marked with the above symbol and "ATTENTION! " describe practices. j0'ili] -- Non-compliance with operating instructions is dangerous! Read the operating instructions before installation. . storage. They are binding on the transport. start-up.. SAFE-TCP/TCS 1.

). aggressive or abrasive media.Cenain media require or preclude the use of special materials.Open safety valves (open bonnet I open cap) are not permissible for fluids. Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions.0 Storage and transport 6 J. dusty atmospheres. e. SAFE-P. handwheels. limits on use and possibilities. Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions. ~~~~~- The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.Valves made from grey cast iron are not authorised for use in systems subject to TRD 110.1 Scope of applications Safety valves are used to protect press uri sed systems. etc. the operator should state the higher requirements when ordering .\ -Protect against external force (like impact. 4. or as connecting paints for lifting gear.The paint is a base coat to protect against corrosion during transportation and storage. Rev. e.0 Description 4. hoods must not be used to take external forces. The special markings on the valve must be taken into account. seal exteriors must be designed so that they pose no danger to humans or the environment.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions SAFE.Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used. ATTENTION! . . open air use or for any Group 1 fluids in accordance with Pressure EqUipment Directive 971231EC. vibration. Do not damage paint protection. SAFE-TCP/TCS 3. . 4. they are not designed for use as climbing aids. 0040401000 2704 Page 3 . SAFE-TC. .g. . .When media in Fluid Group 1 are used. See catalog sheet for weights.2 Operating prinCiples Safety valves are safety devices designed to prevent the pressure in any pressurised system from exceeding the maximum permissible pressure by more than the permissible tolerance of. If conditions exceed these requirements.At -20°C to +65°C. .Valve mountings such as actuators. It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance. .g. usually +10%.Refer to the data sheet for applications. ATTENTION! .The valves are designed for standard operating conditions.

' 8 67 68 6b 65 17 36 37 '1"1 20 37 10 8 ~~ .27 ~+--17 ~8 14 l~O LJ.36 fig. 941 33 19 48 4.k---1o~-l4-bHk--- 26 14 11 37 2S 3 4 '16 12 18 22 lfl::1l1§ttJl:. :::-.:. 902/912/903/904/922/924/945/946 ". .' ~{+ "1 29 -38. SAFE-P..::.. 2 Page 4 Rev.12 I >4----20 WEDI ~fdt~. 961/962 Disc series 950 Bellow series 940 ...tdlf--..3 Diagram Fig.L". 00404010002704 .+..61 !'c'fY'-'-_ 4 64 ~ts~::::=: ~6 4 '16 13 12 IH----1 15 2 fig.· 39.Itl}-. I kiiIH-. .J. 1 Fig.··-.:..'" Bellow ~.40 ~"".J. SAFE-Tep/Tes Fig.47 ~~~~-70 ( ss 1ttI.4 3S I')--\--\-. SAFE-Te.. 901 Fig. 951/952.21 IU..I..ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions SAFE..."~.9 42 { --59 Lever Fig. 961 20 28 21 27 17 36 11 '1.

1 Parts list Pos. Description Hex" nut Lift bolt Screw Lift fork Lifting lever Spring Screw Bolt Split pin Lever open Bonnet. open Bellow Ring Ring Ball Retaining ring Bellow unit Protective rim Spacer Coupling Weight Guide bush Coupling O-Ring Lift button Spring type straight pin Balanced piston ""- -"- 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 47 48 55 59 60 61 62 - -- - -- '63 65 66 67 68 70 - - Refer to the data sheet for information about materials" Rev" 0040401000 2704 Page 5 .. 1-:.3. closed Cap open Ring "- r. SAFE-TCP/TCS 4. nut Lift limitation ring Spindle ring Bonnet.:- ~--"" 1 2 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 31 -- Pos. SAFE-TC. head screw Lead seal Snap ring Spring plate Gasket Cap. SAFE-P.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions SAFE.--- Description Body Seat (not changeable) Screwed seat (SAFE-TC) Stud Spindle guide Gasket Hex. closed Disc unit Lifting aid Spindle Gasket Spring type straight pin Adjusting screw Ball Spindle cap Parallel pin Lock nut Hex.

Application letter D/G/H and D (for Figure 904. TRD 721. to: Figure 941-943 Figure 945-946 Series 950/960: ON 15· ON 25 (G 1/2" • G 1") EN·JS1049. Application letter DIG and F . SAFE-P. PN 40/16. removable lifting aid Approval acc.4581 PN 100 .DIN EN ISO 4126-1.DIN EN ISO 4126-1. PN 40 . AD2000-A2 and TRD 421. VdTOV leaflet 100. to: Figure 951-953 Figure 961-963 Accessories: Page 6 Rev. VdTOVleafiet 100. refer to datasheet.ASME Code Section VIII-Division 1 (UV-Stamp) -VdTOV leaflet 100. SAFE-TC. EN. 1.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions SAFE. AD2000-A2 and TRD 421. DIN EN 12828.0619+N. test gag. proximity switch.1.Pressure·temperature·ratings.1. 990 Series 920: ON 20· ON 100 EN·JL 1040.JS1049.4408 PN40 . 1"x2"· 6"x10" EN·JL 1040. -100/4. Application letter DIG and F Approval acc. 990) Approval acc. Application letter D/G/H and D Approval acc. 1. 904. 1. ANSI 150/150.DIN EN ISO 4126-1. etc. soft sealing disc.DIN EN ISO 4126-1. TRD 721.0619+N. to: Figure 901. AD2000-A2 and TRD421. rupture disc. VdTOV leaflet 100. Series 900: ON 20/32· ON 150/250. 911. ANSI 300/150 . Application letter D/G and F -VdTOV leaflet 100. 00404010002704 . -10014. 912 Figure 903. elastomer bellow. DIN EN 12828.4 Technical data· remarks for • Principal dimensions .4408. support tongues. heating jacket. Application letter DIG and F Stainless steel bellow for baCk-pressure compensation. VdTOV leaflet 100. AD2000-A2.4408 PN 16. 1. lock bush. SA 216 WeB PN 16/16. SAFE-TCP/TCS 4. 902. to: Figure 921-924 Series 940: ON 15· ON 25 (G 1/2" • G 1") EN·JS1049.

0 Warranty I Guarantee Fig.-Nr. UDT. BAfBQ Mechanic No. 0040401000 2704 Page 7 . SAFE-Te. 3: Type test plates Set pressure Year Serial-No. SZU) Fig. .5 Marking Safety valve (TOV) Fig./Type M f t Type-test anu ac urer approved No. SAFE-TeP/Tes 4. 4: Body (outlet) Series with thread connections are marked on the body.-No. A ARI disc E = EPDM -35°C up to 150°C V = Viton _25°C up to 180°C N = Neoprene _30°C up to 125°C Set pressure (bar / psig) Approval (e. \. Notified body Capacity Units: SCFM = air Fig.g. SAFE-P.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions SAFE./Type Iblhr = steam gal/min = water Address of manufacturer: refer to item 11. Rev. do Notified body Set pressure Size (inch) NB-stamp Manufacturer CE-marking Safety valve (ASME) Fig.

Blockage of the drainage system by dirt or foreign bodies shall be avoided. . .No pipe sections or screws must protrude into the spring bonnet through the inspection connection. then they must be installed horizontally . If necessaty a leak detector should be provided to monitor the back pressure compensating metallic bellow seal.Safety valves shall be installed with upright spindle. bending and torsional forces are avoided.Flange gaskets shall be fitted concentrically and not restrict the flow cross section.1 General notes on installation The following pOints should be taken into account besides the general principles governing installation work: ATTENTION! . The maximum back pressure must be specified by the manufacturer. 15%) of the set pressure. not series 950 when marked. .Note installation position with reference to flow. . . SAFE-TC. 15%) of set pressure.Blow-off lines shall be laid with gradient. If necessaty use a heating jacket and/or stainless steel bellow with or without a rupture disk. they are not designed for use as climbing aids. See data sheet for weights. see mark on valve. or as connecting pOints for lifting gear. sticking or blocking of the safety valve must be avoided at all costs.0 Installation 5.The blow-off line shall be sufficiently large to ensure that the internal backpressure while blowing-off does not exceed 10% (on reqest max. .Valve mountings such as actuators.Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation . bonnets must not be used to take external forces. "Einbau nur horizontal (Installation only horizontal)". Page 8 Rev.g. . Blockage hazard! .Remove flange covers if present.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions SAFE. . . Ventilation must not be blocked by any leak detector used. . . 0040401000 2704 .Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used.Keep the shaft of the spindle-unit free from paint (open bonnet I cap). . but the leak detector must not block ventilation.The drainage system shall be adequate to remove the condensate. e. .If back pressure exceeds 10% (on request max. the safety valve must be fitted with a metallic bellow seal for back pressure compensation.Freezing. .The ventilation hole in the bonnet of safety valves with a metallic bellow seal must remain open as a matter of principle.The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles . SAFE-P.Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse. handwheels.Connection flanges must mate exactly . although in the case of Group I fluids (PED 971231EC) a non-isola table pipeline must be connected to remove the medium safely (without back pressure if the bellow seal is damaged. SAFE-TCP/TCS 5. (Exception: safety valves with metallic bellow for back-pressure compensation).Protect valves from dirt during construction work.

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions SAFE, SAFE-P, SAFE-TC, SAFE-TCP/TCS

- The ratio pao/po shall be taken into account when dimensioning the system. - Safety valves shall be equipped with support tongues to absorb high reaction forces. - Pressure losses in the line to the safety valve shall not exceed 3%. - Ensure that adequate drip pans are used if setting media in Fluid Group pursuant to PED 97/23/EC. . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ L..___ - Planners I construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and
~

installing products. - Refer to appropriate TRD 421, AD2000-A2, DIN, ASME Code rules for piping and installation. - Remove transport fasteners and protective caps for inlet and outlet immediately before installation. - Water shall be drained from the safety valve and blow-off line via the blow-off line (drainage points always at the lowest point).

Drainage at lowest point

fig. 5

Rev, 00404010002704

Page 9

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions SAFE, SAFE-P, SAFE-Te, SAFE-Tep/Tes

6.0 Putting the valve into operation
ATTENTION!

~----

- Before putting the valve into operation, check material, pressure, temperature and direction of flow. - Regional safety instructions must be adhered to. - Residues in piping and valves (dirt, weld beads, etc.) inevitably lead to leakage. - Touching the valve when it is operating at high (> 50·C) or low « O·C) media temperatures can cause injury. Affix warning notice or protective insulation as appropriate! - Before putting the valve into operation, check material, pressure, temperature, direction of flow and also check that the data of the valve are correct for the plant (refer to type test plate) - Remove any test gag from cap and close opening with stopper. - Remove protective caps and lever lock before putting the valve into operation - Freezing, sticking or blocking of the safety valve must be avoided at all costs. If necessary use a heating jacket and/or stainless steel bellow without a rupture disk. (Note point 5 "Installation']' - When operating without a blow-off line, medium may spurt from the valve outlet. Injury hazard! - Blowing off may generate loud flow noise. - Medium may be discharged from the ventilation or inspection hole in the spring bonnet (safety valves with stainless steel bellows and heating valves) Injury hazard! - Hot vapour may be discharged if the spring bonnet is open. Before putting a new plant into operation or restarting a plant after repairs or modification, always make sure that: - All works has been completed! - The valve is in the correct position for its function. - Safety devices have been attached.

I

Page 10

Rev. 0040401000 2704

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions SAFE, SAFE·P, SAFE·Te, SAFE·Tep/Tes

7.0 Care and maintenance
Maintenance and maintenance-intervals have to be defined by the operator according to the requirements.
~

"".

- Too frequent lifting for test purposes can increase wear of the sealing surfaces! - The safety valve must be lifted from time to time in line with current regulations to ensure that the valve works correctly. (The intervals at which this must be done depends on various factors so that no generally applicable interval can be specified) - Original parts only should be fitted as spares as a matter of policy. -In safety valves with an open spring bonnet there is a danger of being crushed between the spring windings during lifting and setting.

ATTENTION /

- Lift the safety valve stem briefly (releasing the lever suddenly) to eliminate slight leaks due to particles between the seat and disc. - If this does not eliminate the leak, the sealing surfaces of the seat and/or disc have been damaged. This cen only be rectified at our works or by an authorised contractor. - With valves corresponding to Figures 901 , 921 and 941, the lever must always be returned to the original position after lifting the safety valve. - With Fig. 951 and 961 the lift button must be pressed down again after lifting. - The manufacturer accepts guarantee liabilities only if tampering by third parties is prevented.

IA !
1.\

7.1 Setting instructions
ATTENnON I

The following wo. rk must only be carried out by authorised specialist workshops .. or at the operator's own responsibility with monitoring by an independent agency (e.g. TOV).
... .-------,

7.1.1 Removing the cap ATTENTION!

~

If there is back pressure or during settingllifting, medium may be discharged from

the open bonnet, or into the adjusting screw area if the bonnet is closed.
Open caps - Remove slit pin (pos. 40), bolt (pos. 39). - Extract lifting lever (pos. 41). - Remove screw (pos. 38). - Unscrew cap (pos. 29). Closed caps - Press lifting lever (pos. 36) towards bonnet (pos. 11) and against stop. - Unscrew cap (pos. 28). Closed cap series 960/950 - Remove spring type straight pin (pos. 68) - Remove lift button (pos. 67) or lifting lever (pos. 36) - Unscrew cap (pos. 28)
Rev. 00404010002704 Page 11

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions SAFE, SAFE·P, SAFE·Te, SAFE·Tep/Tes

7.1.2 Changing the set pressure "without" spring change

1,\,
~

ATTENTION!

- When changing the set pressure in a pressurised system bear in mind vapour discharge if bonnet is open, in adjusting screw area if bonnet is closed. - Note spring setting range.

- Check the spring range. - Spindle (pos. 14) must be held fast by all alterations. - Loosen lock nut (pos. 21). - Turn adjusting screw (pos. 17) clockwise to increase and anticlockwise to reduce the set pressure. - Secure spring setting by tightening lock nut (pos. 21). - Assemble lifting device.

l{1\ _!

7.1.3 Changing the set pressure "with" spring change

ATTENTION!

I

Depressurise the system before dismantling or opening the safety valve.

~_.-J

- For removing the cap refer to 7.1.1. - Extract parallel pin (pos. 20) and lift off the spindle cap (pos. 19). - Slacken locknut (pos. 21) and relieve spring (pos. 37) by turning adjusting screw (pos. 17) anticlockwise. - Unscrew nuts (pos. 8) at flange connection and remove bonnet (pos. 11/42). Fig. 940: loosen coupling (pos. 61) Fig. 950/960: loosen bonnet (pos. 11) ~ ATTENTION! ------------------------~

~

- With higher set pressures, the two nuts (pos. 8) on the longer studs (pos. 3) must be removed last and simultaneously!
--------~--------------------

- Remove top spring-plate (pos. 26) and spring (pos. 37). - Extract spindle (pos. 14) with disc (pos. 12/12a), guide plate (pos. 4/4a) and bottom spring-plate (pos. 26). - Clean seat (pos. 2) and disc (pos. 12). - Insert spindle (pos. 14) with disc (pos. 12), guide plate (pos. 4), spring-plate (pos. 26) and different spring (pos. 37).

Page 12

Rev. 0040401000 2704

ARMATURElN

Operating and installation instructions SAFE, SAFE-P, SAFE-TC, SAFE-TCP/TCS

- when carrying out any adjustment work hold the spindle (pos. 14) firm to prevent it twisting.

6

J.\

-Torques must be observed:
R10 M12 M16 M20 16-25 Nm
-

ATTENTION!

--

-

screw joint BR940 screwed seat BR940 bonnet BR950/960

100 Nm 180 Nm 60Nm

30-40 Nm 70-90 Nm

150-175 Nm

- Check spring marking in accordance with manufacturer's data. - Note spring setting range. - Change seals. - Fit bonnet (pos. 11142) and reset the set pressure; make sure spring setting range is appropriate. - Secure spring setting by means of lock nut (pos. 21). - Assemble lifting device. - If necessary, replace both spring plates (pos. 26) and use longer studs (pos. 3) when fitting a spring for a higher set pressure. - Further information obtainable from the manufacturer.
Only for series 900

ATTENTION! ~ When changing the set pressure and fitting a new spring, note that safety valves with set pressures between 0.2 and 1.5 bar have a greater lift. Therefore:
..-

;f\.

Set pressure in the range 0.2 to 1.5 bar > 1.5 bar
-

Spring change only in the range 0.2 to 1.5 bar > 1.5 bar

1 6
!

Only for series 950:

ATTENTlO=NCO"."O""/- - - - - - - - - - - - - - Safety valves for horizontal application, .must also to be set in a horizontal position (~ 4.9 bar).
. . .

l

•.

..---------------~

Rev. 0040401000 2704

Page 13

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions SAFE, SAFE-P, SAFE-TC, SAFE-TCP/TCS

7.2 Representation

fig. 6
Page 14

Rev. 0040401000 2704

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions SAFE, SAFE-P, SAFE-TC, SAFE-TCP/TCS

8.0 Troubleshooting
In the event of malfunction or faulty operating performance check that the installation and adjustment work has been carried out and completed in accordance with these Operating Instructions.

6

J.\

ATTENTION f

It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults.

If malfunctions cannot be eliminate with the help of the following table "9.0 troubleshooting table", the supplier or manufacturer should be consulted.

9.0 Troubleshooting table
ATTENTION!

- read point 10.0 and 11.0 prior to dismantling and repair work! - read point 6.0 before restarting the plant!
~~~~~-~

Fault
Safety valve does not respond, no flow

Possible cause
Flange covers not removed.
.

Corrective measures
Remove flange covers. Remove test gag. Remove pipe or screw projecting into bonnetthrough inspection connection .
.

Test gag still in place. Spring blocked. Set pressure too high. Stainless steel bellow defective, no back·pressure compensation. Back·pressure not taken into account.

Reset (point 8.1) or replace the safety valve. Replace the safety valve. Reset (point 8.1) or, if necessary, replace the safety valve. The use of a stainless steel bellow to compensate for back-pressure should be considered. Use bellow I heating jacket. Insert rupture disc upstream if necessary.
..

'"----..

Medium viscous or sticky

The valves and piping must be protected against freezing and solidifying media. Stem cannot be lifted. Safety valve seat leaking. Pressure less than 85% of set
pressure.

Heating!

It must be possible to lift the spindle at over 85% of the set pressure. Working pressure must be less than 90% of the set pressure. Press lever into neutral position (towards bonnet). Refer to separate point "Flattering". Raise spindle briefly or, if necessary, replace safety valve. Use of a soft sealing disc should be considered. Page 15

Working pressure higher than 90% of set pressure. At low pressures: lever not in neutral position with closed cap. -Safety valve flattering.
~~-

Medium contaminated; foreign body between seat and disc.

Rev. 00404010002704

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions SAFE, SAFE-P, SAFE-TC, SAFE-TCP/TCS
Corrective measures
Replace safety valve.
-

Fault
Flange broken.

Possible cause

r-----

Damage during transport.

._-

Flange bolts not evenly tightened.

Replace safety valve. Install free of tension. Install safety valve at highest point.

Transfer of forces such as bending or torsional forces. Pressure surges. Safety valve not installed at highest point.

Valve drainage inadequate or not fitted. Install drainage system a required by regulations. Valve constantly blows off. Transport fastening not removed. Spring corroded by medium and broken. Injury owing to medium. Danger of injury from medium (e.g. liquids) emerging from valve. Remove transport fastening (red screw above cap, Figure 990). Replace safety valve. In the case of vapour, select open cap or bonnet if possible. Replace safety valve. Select design with closed bonnet and cap. Install a guard if necessary. Install a guard if necessary Reduce resistance by chamfering or radius in connection socket. Select larger line if necessary.

Injury from vapour discharge (open bonnet / cap) Flattering. Pressure loss >3% in line to valve.

Poor welding (root pass), gaskets at Change conditions. inlet and outlet flanges too small or not concentric.
r-~~~'

Safety valve capacity too high. Burner capacity too low. Blow-off line too long or diameter too small.
--,,~-

Install smaller safety valve. -Install smaller safety valve. Use larger diameter or back-pressure compensation by stainless steel bellow. Install with dimensions larger than ON of inlet and outlet lines. Install stainless steel bellow for pressure compensation.

Inlet and/or outlet socket too small. Back-pressure higher than 10%. Capacity too low.

Safety valves not applied unsuitable for Select and install suitable safety plant conditions. valves. -Safety valve not applied in line with current DIN, AD, TRD, etc. rules. Adjust conditions.

Page 16

Rev. 0040401000 2704

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions SAFE, SAFE-P, SAFE-TC, SAFE-TCP/TCS

10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part
ATTENTION!

The following pOints must be observed: - Pressureless pipe system. - Medium must be cool. - Plant must be drained. - Purge piping systems in case of caustic, inflammable, aggressive or toxic media.

11.0 Warranty I Guarantee
The extent and period of warranty cover are specified in the "Standard Terms and Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG" valid at the time of delivery or, by way of departure, in the contract of sale itself. We guarantee freedom of faults in compliance with state-of-the-art technology and the confirmed application. No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling or disregard of operating and installation instructions, datasheets and relavant regulations. This warranty also does not cover any damage which occurs during operation under conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements. Justified complaints will be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a specialist appointed by us. No claims will be accepted beyond the scope of this warranty. The right to replacement delivery is excluded. The warranty shall not cover maintenance work, installation of external parts, design modifications or natural wear. Any damage incurred during transport should not be reported to us but rather to the competent cargo-handling depot, the railway company or carrier company immediately or else claims for replacements from these companies will be invalidated. The manufacturer will accept warranty liability only if there has been no third party tampering.

ARMATUREN

Technology for the Future.
GERMAN QUALITY VALVES ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG, D-33756 Schlol? Holte-Stukenbrock Telephone (+49 5207) 994-0 Telefax (+49 5207) 994-158 or 159 Internet: http://www.ari-armaturen.com E-mail: info.vertrieb@ari-arrnaturen.com

Rev. 0040401000 2704

Page 17

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions SAFE, SAFE-P, SAFE-TC, SAFE-TCP/TCS

12.0 EC declaration of conformity I Manufacturers declaration
ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG, Mergelheide 56-60, 33756 Schlol! Holte-Stukenbrock

EC declaration of conformity
as defined by the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC Herewith we declare, that according to the above mentioned Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) the below listed products comply and have been approved according to Module H1 and also EC type test according to module B+D through LLOYD'S REGISTER QUALITY ASSURANCE (NB-No. 0525), Monckebergstr. 27, 20095 Hamburg. Certificate-No: 50003/2

Safety valves SAFE series 900 Type 901,911,912,902,903,904,990
Applied standards: DIN EN ISO 4126-1 AD 2000 Code of Practice A2 AD 2000 Code of Practice A4 - Cast iron with spher. graphite - Cast steel TRD 421, TRD 721 VdTOV 100, DIN 3840 ASME Code Section VIII-Div. 1

Safety valves SAFE-P series 920 Type 921,922,923,924
Applied standards: DIN EN ISO 4126-1 AD 2000 Code of Practice A2 AD 2000 Code of Practice A4 - Cast steel TRD 421, TRD 721 VdTOV 100, DIN 3840

Safety valves SAFE-TC series 940 Type 941,942,943,945,946
Applied standards: DIN EN ISO 4126-1 AD 2000 Code of Practice A2 AD 2000 Code of Practice A4 - Cast iron with spher. graphite - Cast steel TRD 421, TRD 721 VdTOV 100, DIN 3840

Safety valves SAFE-TCP/TCS series 950/960 Type 951,952,953,961,962,963
Applied standards: DIN EN ISO 4126-1 AD 2000 Code of Practice A2 AD 2000 Code of Practice A4 - Cast iron with spher. graphite - Cast steel VdTOV 100, DIN 3840

Manufacturers declaration
as defined by the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC Herewith we declare, that the listed products as supplied are intended for installation in a machine or system and that the machine 1 system must not be started up until it has been established that the machine 1 system complies with the provisions of the EC Machinery Directive 98/37/EC. Schlol! Holte-Stukenbrock, 12.07.2004

Page 18

Rev. 0040401000 2704

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions
Automatic air vent (PN16 - 25)

PN161 PN25
- with - with - with - with flanges screwed sockets socket weld ends butt weld ends (series (series (series (series 656 .... 1) 656 ..•. 2) 656 .... 3) 656 .... 4)

Contents
1.0 General information on operating instructions ........•.•....................•................••.• 2 2.0 Notes on possible dangers .••................•........ 2 2.1 Significance of symbols .......................................... 2 2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information ................. 2 3.0 Storage and transport .•.....••..•....................•.• 2 4.0 Description ..••.....••....................•...................... 3 4.1 Scope of applications ..............................................3 4.2 Operating principles ................................................ 3 4.3 Diagram .................................................................. .4 4.4 Technical data - remarks ......................................... 5 4.5 Marking ................................................................... 5 5.0 Installation ...•.....•...........•...••............................ 5 5.1 General notes on installation ................................... 5 5.2 Installation instructions for welding ......................... 6 5.3 Controller adjustment ..............................................6 5.4 Steam trap testing through ultrasonic measurement ..........................................................6 5.5 Installation pOsition ..................................................6 6.0 Putting the valve into operation .•.••...•.•••...... 7 7.0 Care and maintenance .•...••...•.•....•.•••...........•. 7 7.1 Cleaning/replacing controller assembly .................. 7 7.2 Option drip pipe with union joint ............................ 8 7.3 Tightening torques .................................................. 8 8.0 Troubleshooting .............•..••.•...••.••................• 9 9.0 Troubleshooting table .............•••••.......•......... 9 10.0 Dismantling the valve or the body ........... 10 11.0 Warranty I Guarantee .........•...•••................. 10 12.0 EC declaration of conformity •.................... 11

Rev. 0040807004 2404 englisch

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions Automatic air vent

1.0 General information on operating instructions
These operating instructions provide information on mounting and maintaining the fittings. Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer in case of problems which cannot be solved by reference to the operating instructions. They are binding on the transport, storage, installation, start-up, operation, maintenance and repair. The notes and warnings must be observed and adhered to. - Handling and all work must be carried out by expert personnel or all activities must be supervised and checked. It is the owner's responsibility to define areas of responsibility and competence and to monitor the personnel. - In addition, current regional safety requirements rnust be applied and observed when taking the fittings out of service as well as when maintaining and repairing them. The manufacturer reserves the right to introduce technical modifications at any time. These Operating Instructions comply with the requirements of EU Directives.

2.0 Notes on possible dangers
2.1 Significance of symbols

!;t.

~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---' Warning of general danger.
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information
In these Operating and Installation Instructions dangers, risks and items of safety information are highlighted to attract special attention. Information marked with the above symbol and "ATTENTION!" describe practices, a failure to comply with which can result in serious injury or danger of death for users or third parties or in material damage to the system or the environment. It is vital to comply with these practices and to monitor compliance.

A.T.TENTlON! .

I

All other information not specifically emphasised such as transport, installation, operating and maintenance instructions as well as technical data (in the operating instructions, product documentation and on the device itself) must also be complied with to the fullest extent in order to avoid faults which in turn can cause serious injury to persons or damage to property.

3.0 Storage and transport

6

A

. - - - - - - - ..

-------------~.

ATTENTION!

-Protect against external force (like impact, vibration, etc.).
- Valves must not be used to take external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as connecting pOints for lifting gear. - Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used. See catalog sheet for weights.
--~----------~.

- At -20°C to +65°C. - The paint is a base coat to protect against corrosion during transportation and storage. Do not damage paint protection.

Page 2

Rev. 0040807004 2404

Operating and installation instructions Automatic air vent

4.0 Description
4.1 Scope of application
Automatic air vents with level regulation are used for the deaeration and venting of pipeline systems.
------=======~---------------~~----~~------------

6

1.\

ATTENTION I Refer to the data sheet for applications, limits on use and possibilities. - Certain media require or preclude the use of special materials. - The valves are designed for standard operating conditions. If conditions exceed these requirements, e.g. aggressive or abrasive media, the operator should state the higher requirements when ordering. - Valves made from GG-25 are not authorised for use in systems subject to TRO

~----

-

110.

-----

The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance. The special markings on the valve must be taken into account. Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions. Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions.

4.2 Operating principles
(refer to Fig. 3 page 8) Deaeration and venting is controlled by a swivel-mounted ball float (Pos. 24.16). As the automatic air vent is installed at the highest point of the pipeline system or vessel, any air in the pipeline system or vessel is led to the automatic air vent. As long as no liquid flows into the automatic air vent, the float controller (Pos. 24) stays open, and air is discharged to the outside. If liquid enters the automatic air vent, the ball float (Pos. 24.16) rises with the liquid level and the valve plug (Pos. 24.4) seals the outlet of the controller (Pos. 24). The pipeline system or vessel is closed to the outside. No liquid can escape from the system via the automatic air vent. If the liquid in the pipeline system or vessel falls, the ball float (Pos. 24.1) drops down and the controller orifice is opened. For increased venting power use a version with built-on venting valve.

Rev. 0040807004 2404

Page 3

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions Automatic air vent

4.3 Diagram
)~> ..t /
'------..r---~

27
aeration venting
LJI '

'1'1
\

• ill

Fig. 1: Automatic air vent - series 656 PN16-25

L---::'> aeration l I[ venting

"..., 11 L/

6
I

17

24

/

I ,

16
/ /

/

~'....L./.L....L...L/~\~.,

/

/'\!

~<;_~J

"'71:fPC/

.J fJ 4

(),

~

\J Fig. 2: Automatic air vent - series 656 PN16-25 For higher performance with mounted vacuum breaker series 655

Refer to the data sheet for information about materials with designations and figure numbers.
Page 4

Rev. 0040807004 2404

ARMATUREiN

Operating and installation instructions Automatic air vent

4.4 Technical data - remarks
for

- Principal dimensions, - Pressure-temperature-ratings, operating limits, - Valves with different types of connection, etc. refer to datasheet.

4.5 Marking
AWH Manufacturer

Typ Bj.

Type Year of manufacture

Address of manufacturer: refer to item 11.0 Warranty I Guarantee

According to the Pressure Equipment Directive appendix 2 diagram 7 valves acc. to article 1 paragraph 2.1.2 (pipes) only shows the CE-marking from DN40 onwards.

5.0 Installation
5.1 General notes on installation
The following pOints should be taken into account besides the general principles governing installation work:
ATTENTION I

- Remove flange covers if present. - The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles. - Install at highest point of pipeline system, always supply media from below. Note installation position with reference to flow, see mark on valve. - Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation. - Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse, bending and torsional forces are avoided. - Protect valves from dirt during construction work. - Connection flanges must mate exactly. - Valves must not be used to take external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as connecting points for lifting gear. - Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used. See data sheet for weights. - Centre gaskets between the flanges. - Precautions against freezing should be taken as a matter of course in any systems susceptible to frost.
- Planners I construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and installing products.

Rev. 0040807004 2404

Page 5

ARMATUREN

Operating and installation instructions Automatic air vent

5.2 Installation instructions for welding
(refer to page 1) Please note that only qualified persons using appropriate equipment and working in accordance with technical rules are allowed to install fittings by welding. The responsibility for this lies with the system owner. Please refer to the catalogue sheet for information on type and instructions relating to welding socket weld ends/butt weld ends. When welding products to the pipeline system, they should be adequately cooled to prevent any adverse effect on the complete controller assembly (Pos. 24) or the flat gasket (Pos. 17). The heat-affected zone should be restricted to the immediate weld seam area! Note pre- and post-welding heat treatment in accordance with Material Fact Sheet DIN EN 10222. If there are plans to acid clean the system before putting it into operation, the controllers (Pos. 24) should be dismantled completely, replaced by acid cleaning inserts, and reassembled after acid cleaning (see 7.1). In such an event please contact the manufacturer.

5.3 Controller adjustment
The controller is designed by the manufacturer for the relevant maximum operating pressure - 14 bar or 21 bar - and does not need changing.

5.4 Steam trap testing through ultrasonic measurement
Testing the operation of the steam trap in the installed state is straightforward with the "SONACON" function tester Refer to data sheet "CONA further components / accessories".

5.5 Installation position
(refer to Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 page 4) The automatic air vent is operated in a vertical installation position (system connection vertically downward). The arrow on the side of the cover (Pos. 6) indicates the direction of flow. Always install the steam trap so that the ball float (Pos. 24.16) can work in a vertical plane.

'------------~~~~~

6

J.\.

ATTENTION I

In principle the "TOP" mark on the hood must point vertically up.

J

Page 6

Rev. 0040807004 2404

0 prior to dismantling and repair work! . .Safety devices have been at/ached. . .Pull complete float controller (Pas. . "OKS Anti-Seize Paste" white/metal-free for PN 16-40 or "Rivolta" lubricant and parting agent for PN 63 onwards).16) must float.All works has been completed! . 3 page 8) . .The valve is in the correct position for its function.) inevitably lead to leakage. . taking care with the sealing ring (Pas. 2 page 4 and Fig.g. . threads and seal faces should be coated with temperaturestable lubricant (e. 11). 24) from the cover (Pas. 16) by slackening cheese-head screw (Pas. 24. 6). If the ball float (Pas. check material. 6) and hood (Pas. 24) and clean separately or replace the float controller.Fig. 7.Remove dirt from cover (Pas.0 Care and maintenance Maintenance and maintenance-intervals have to be defined by the operator according to the requirements.0 Putting the valve into operation ATTENTION! . 24) out.refer to item 6. 24.Dismantle the hood (Pas.16) sinks (i. When immersed in the water bath the ball float (Pas. 00408070042404 Page 7 . weld beads. always make sure that: .refer to item 10.Touching the valve when it is operating at high (> 50 °G) or low « 0 °G) media temperatures can cause injury.0 before restarting the plant I Prior to installation.e. ATTENTION! . temperature and direction of flow. Affix warning notice or protective insulation as appropriate! Before putting a new plant into operation or restarting a plant after repairs or modification. . 6). 1 page 4.Residues in piping and valves (dirt.0 and 11. 27). pressure.Before putting the valve into operation.~ ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Automatic air vent 6. 16).Unscrew the hollow-core screw (Pas.If necessary dismantle the float controller (Pas.Regional safety instructions must be adhered to.10) of the float controller (Pas. 7.Check lifting force of ball float (Pas.1 Cleaning I replacing controller assembly (refer to Fig. 24. 24.16) by immersing the whole controller (Pas. goes under) the complete controller (Pas 24) should be replaced! Rev. etc. tiny dirt particles can be removed by flushing out the ducts and rinsing the cover (Pas. . 24) in a water bath.

_4. 7.Assemble in reverse order (see 7.ARMATlJREN Operating and installation instructions Automatic air vent . cpl. 531 54) at the air inlet side to safely discharge any leaking liquid. 1 page 4 .3). 0040807004 2404 . 3: Controller. .2 Option drip pipe with union joint LIi It is possible to install a drip line (Pos.Fig. 3 page 8) Torque (Nm) DN15-25 Pos.3 Tightening torques (refer to Fig. Note item 7. Automatic air vent PN16-25 Controller Cheese head screw M 10 Union joint for drip pipe Connector for vacuum breaker 24 27 53 45 60 25 60 60 Page 8 Rev.3 when installing the option. ) S3 54 Fig. 7/ I II \ Fig. 4 7.

If malfunctions cannot be eliminate with the help of the following table "9.3 properly tightened.5. refer to item 7. 9.ARMATURElN Operating and installation instructions Automatic air vent 8. refer to item 6. . refer to item 7. Remove flange covers Check lifting force. or internal leakage Controller clogged Controller worn out Controller incorrectly screwed into body Controller operated above safe operating Observe operating limits as per data pressure sheet.0 prior to dismantling and repair work! .0 and 11.1 Note installation position.3 Change flat gasket.1 Connector (Pos. tighten controller correctly.16) defective Corrective measures Fit valve in direction of flow arrow. . .0 Troubleshooting In the event of malfunction or faulty operating performance check that the installation and adjustment work has been carried out and completed in accordance with these Operating Instructions.ATTENTlON I .0 before restarting the plant I Fault No flow -J -~ Possible cause Installed in wrong flow direction Flange covers not removed Ball float (Pos. refer to item 7. the supplier or manufacturer should be consulted. to flow diagram Clean controller.! It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults.e. refer to item 7. Tighten. Correct installation position Check piping system Correct selection acc. .. refer to item 7. 0040807004 2404 Page 9 . 45) for venting valve not Tighten. 17) defective.3 Little flow Wrong installation position Piping system clogged Wrong controller size choosen No closure.1 Check seal face between body and controller.0 troubleshooting table". refer to item 5. lft. possibly select different controller External leakage Hood (Pos. refer to item 7.0 Troubleshooting table ATTENTION I • refer to item 10. Rev. 16) not properly tightened cheese-head screw (Pos. 24. i. 27) Flat gasket (Pos. refer to item 7.1 Change controller.

11. . We guarantee freedom of faults in compliance with state-of-the-art technology and the confirmed application. The right to replacement delivery is excluded.com Page 10 Rev.Plant must be drained. installation of external parts.0 Dismantling the valve or the body ATTENTION t The following points must be observed: .ari-armaturen. Any damage incurred during transport should not be reported to us but rather to the competent cargo-handling depot.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Automatic air vent 10. by way of departure. KG" valid at the time of delivery or. No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling or disregard of operating and installation instructions.Pressureless pipe system. This warranty also does not cover any damage which occurs during operation under conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements. in the contract of sale itself. 0-33756 Schlol1 Holte-Stukenbrock Telephone (+49 5207) 994-0 Telefax (+49 5207) 994-158 or 159 Internet: http://www. 0040807004 2404 .Medium must be cool.0 Warranty I Guarantee The extent and period of warranty cover are specified in the "Standard Terms and Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co. The warranty shall not cover maintenance work.com E-mail: info. KG. GERMAN QUALITY VALVES ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. . design rnodifications or natural wear. Justified complaints will be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a specialist appointed by us. ARMATUREN Technology for the Future. the railway company or carrier company immediately or else claims for replacements from these companies will be invalidated. datasheets and relavant regulations. No claims will be accepted beyond the scope of this warranty.vertrieb@ari-armaturen.

03. 1.ARMATUREN Operating and installation instructions Automatic air vent 12. Pursuant to Article 3. pressure Material PN 16/25 GGG-40.3.2004 Rev. 0040807004 2404 Page 11 . 1.0 EC declaration of conformity m. paragraph 3 these products need not carry a CE mark.I®AWHARMATUREN~ WERK HALLE GMBH a member of the ARI group AWH Armaturenwerk Halle GmbH. Automatic air vent Series 656 Nom.4308 DN 15-25 Applied standards: DIN 3840 AD 2000-leaflet ASME VII1I1 Halle/Saale. 25. D-06110 Halle/Saare EC declaration of conformity as defined by the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC We hereby declare that pursuant to the aforementioned Pressure Equipment Directive the products listed below were executed and classified in accordance with Directive 97/23/EC (Article 3.0619+N. paragraph 3). Turmstrasse 118-123.

.

Operation 6. General safety information 2. Spare parts Printed in the UK @ Copyright 2005 .sarco II IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11 1. Maintenance 7. Commissioning 5. Installation 4.1440013/11 FT14 Ball Float Steam Trap %11 (DN15) to 111 (DN25) Installation and Maintenance Instructions splrax . General product information 3.

General installation and safety instructions for pipeline and plant construction. Pressure Before attempting any maintenance consider what is or may have been in the pipeline. 2 IM-S02-13 8T Issue 11 . Ensure that any pressure is isolated and safely vented to atmospheric pressure before attempting to maintain the product. commissioned and maintained by a qualified person (see Section 11 of the attached Supplementary Safety Information) in compliance with the operating instructions. Dangers might include. this is easily achieved by fitting Spirax Sarco depressurisation valves type DV (see separate literature for details).1. isolation of vents and protective devices or alarms. Temperature Allow time for temperature to normalise after isolation to avoid the danger of burns and consider whether protective clothing (including safety glasses) is required. Do not assume that the system is depressurised even when a pressure gauge indicates zero. as well as the proper use of tools and safety equipment must also be complied with. Warning The cover gasket contains a thin stainless steel support ring which may cause physical injury if not handled and disposed of carefully. Disposal This product is recyclable. General safety information Safe operation of the unit can only be guaranteed if it is properly installed. Isolation Consider whether closing isolating valves will put any other part of the system or personnel at risk. Ensure isolation valves are turned off in a gradual way to avoid system shocks. No ecological hazard is anticipated with the disposal of this product providing due care is taken.

Note: All certification/inspection requirements must be stated at the time of order placement..1 General description The FT14 is an SG iron ball float steam trap with integral automatic air venting facility. 2 FT14C (R-Ll screwed Fig. 4 FT14C (R-L) flanged spiraA. 3 FT14 (R-Ll flanged IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11 Fig. It is available with screwed or flanged horizontal connections with flow from right to left (R-L) or left to right (L-R). If required the flanged version can be modified on site to the vertical orientation.. 1 FT14 (R-Ll screwed Fig. this feature is available in addition to the air vent. Standards The product fully complies with the requirements of the European Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.2. The screwed version is also available with vertical connections (FT14V) with flow downwards.2. Optional integral strainer screen. General product information .2.2 Optional extras FT14C FT14X An optional steam lock release (SLR) valve (designated 'C' on the nomenclature) can be fitled to the trap to prevent steam locking of the system. Fig.arco 3 . 2. Certification This product is available with material certification to EN 10204 2.

. Body design conditions PMA Maximum allowable pressure @ 1200 e (248°F) TMA Maximum allowable temperature Minimum allowable temperature PMO Maximum operating pressure for saturated steam service TMO Maximum operating temperature Minimum operating temperature @ PN16 16 bar 9 250 0 (232 psi g) (482°F) (32°F) (203 psi g) (482°F) (32°F) e ooe 14 bar 9 12 bar 9 (174 psi g) 2500 e ooe FT14-14 14 bar 24 bar 9 t.. JIS 10 and KS 10... :J ~ 50 I0 --o Steam saturation curve I 2 4 8 10 6 Pressure bar 9 - "'. ANSI 150. OJ ill 100 Q...."1-=-0----------.2.5 =F=T"-14:---..-:-:-::--~c= 10 bar (145 psi g) (203 psi g) (348 psi g) Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 4 IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11 ...... 12 14 "' 482 400 roI 3 300 "2 200 ro C @ 100 ° 16 " .. %" and 1" screwed BSP or NPT..I The product must not be used in this region. DN15.. DN20 and DN25 standard flange PN16....3 Sizes and pipe connections '12". 2. PMX differential pressure Maximum (65.-::-:-------.5 bar FT14-4.4 Pressure/temperature limits (ISO 6552) 250 150 o 20 40 60 80 Pressure psi 9 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 () ° 200 ~ ...-----.25 psi g) 4.

Minimum withdrawal distance to remove cover is 105 mm (4.The trap must be fitted with the float arm in a horizontal plane so that it rises and falls vertically. Determine the correct installation situation and the direction of fluid flow.2 3. Installation Note: Before actioning any installation observe the 'Safety information' in Section 1. FT14-10C. . The unit should be screwed clockwise to close and anticlockwise to open. A new gasket must always be fitted. Installation note: . Please consult Spirax Sarco should further information be required.4 3. pressure and temperature and their maximum values. Remove protective covers from all connections and the protective film from all name-plates before installation on steam or other high temperature applications. If the maximum operating limit of the product is lower than that of the system in which it is being fitted. Traps can be supplied with vertical connections with flow from top to bottom or horizontal connections with flow from right to left (R-L) or left to right (L-R).g. When required the SLR should be used as a controlled continuous bleed.Unless specified. . it is not recommended that the SLR be left in the fully open condition as this may lead to premature trap failure and more frequent maintenance schedules.13"). Installation of the Steam Lock Release Unit (SLR) 3.3 Check materials. 3. traps will be supplied with horizontal connections and with right to left flow (R-L). 'C' = Combined steam lock release and thermostatic air vent (TV). IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11 5 . pre-set to a partial bleed condition. name-plate and Technical Information Sheet. . therefore the arrow on the name-plate must point downwards.5 3.The connection orientation can be changed on site by undoing the four cover bolts and moving the cover to the preferred orientation. ensure that a safety device is included in the system to prevent overpressurisation. Refering to the Installation and Maintenance Instructions. check that the product is suitable for the intended installation.1 3. . Warning The cover gasket contains a thin stainless steel support ring which may cause physical injury if not handled and disposed of carefully.6 The SLR valve is fitted to all float traps where a suffix 'C' is hard stamped on the nameplate e.If the trap is to discharge to atmosphere ensure it is to a safe place. The SLR should only be used to prevent 'steam locking' and therefore is designed to pass only a small amount of steam.3. The SLR unit will be dispatched. Check if the application requires the SLR valve for correct operation. the discharging fluid may be at a temperature of 100°C (212°F).

. Fit a new gasket. the thermostatic air vent allows air to bypass the main valve preventing the system air binding.5.. fit element and clips.Undo the cover bolts (2) and lift off the body (1). Float traps are renown for their high start-up load handling capability. 6.. Align the complete air vent horizontally so that the frame clears the cover. Assemble the spacer plate.. clean tight shut-off and resistance to waterhammer and vibration.. Note: A valve spring (item 16) is fitted to the 1" traps only.After installation or maintenance ensure that the system is fully functioning. seat and frame. Operation ... When reassembling. element and spacer plate (9). Warning The cover gasket contains a thin stainless steel support ring which may cause physical injury if not handled and disposed of carefully.. .keeping the system drained of condensate at all times.. 6. Maintenance Note: Before actioning any maintenance program observe the 'Safety information' in Section 1. the float rises and the lever mechanism attached to it opens the main valve . 6... 6.Fit a complete new float assembly by tightening the assembly set screws (7) to the recommended torque (see Table 1). but as soon as it enters the main chamber of the trap. 6 IM-S02-13 8T Issue 11 . On start-up. The trap should then be allowed to cool.2 How to fit the main valve assembly: ...3 How to fit the air vent assembly: Remove the spring clip. .4. Hot condensate will close the air vent tightly..1 General information: Before undertaking any maintenance on the trap it must be isolated from both the supply line and return line and any pressure allowed to safely normalise to atmosphere. the float drops and closes the main valve. .. ..Remove the main valve seat (5) and replace with a new one supplied with new gasket. When steam arrives. Commissioning .The float trap is a continuous discharge trap. removing condensate the instant it forms. Carry out tests on any alarms or protective devices.Remove the complete float assembly by undoing the two screws (7).Refit the body (1) using a new gasket (3). Unscrew the seat. ensure that all joint faces are clean. .

Table 1 Recommended tightening torques Item 2 5 7 W t§j or mm i M10 x 30 M4x 6 Air vent assembly 9 Frame Nm 47 .40) (37 .37) (37 .0 50 -55 50 -55 (Ibf ttl (35 .8 .55 2.40) (1. Reset the SLR to the desired bleed rate.2.3. 6 IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11 7 .5 .6. Replace the SLR assembly and washer with new ones. Remove the SLR gasket (13).2) (37 .4 How to fit the Steam Lock Release (SLR) assembly: Unscrew the complete SLR assembly (12) and (14).50 50 .40) 17 A/F 17 A/F Pozidrive 17 A/F 9 12 + 14 19 A/F Steam lock release assembly 112+14 131 1 16 2 16 LI_6________1_1__ __ 5 1_0_7 1'_'o_n~ly _________~ 8 Main valve assembly Fig.

Steam lock release assembly /12+14 131 16 Air vent assembly 9 Fig.12 + 14.10.. Available spares 3. 7 8 IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11 .6.The spare parts available are shown in solid outline. Parts drawn in broken line are not supplied as spares.16 (1" only) Maintenance kit How to order spares Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of trap. 8. Spare parts .6. 10.9. 13 Steam lock release unit and air vent assembly (FT14C only) Cover gasket (packet of 3) 3 3.7 (2 off).8. 11.. 16 (1" only) Main valve assembly with float 3.Air vent assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN20 FT14-10 (R-L) ball float steam trap.5.11.6.7.7.6.. Example: 1 .9.9 Air vent assembly 3.5.

Type CUB 5 Zah ler 9.4 Flow Measurement/Fuel Consumption D u r chfl u ss-M esstech n i kfT rei bstoffve rbr auch Flowmeter Du rchflussmesser Volumeter.1 Temperature Measurement Temperatur-Messtechnik Angle Thermometer Winkelthermometer Thermometer Thermometer Thermometer with Transmitter Thermometer mit Messumformer 9.36. Type VISCOMASTER Viscositatsmesswertgeber 9.5 Sensor BEG Level Switch FO IIsta ndgrenzscha Iter A company of GEA Group Power Plant EI Salvador 1402568900_27 1 VBU 118.2 Pressure Measurement Druck -M esstechn i k Pressure Gauge Druckmessgerat Pressure Switch Druckschalter Difference Pressure Indicator Differenzdruckanzeiger 9.2 Viscosity Measurement Vi skositats-M esstechn ik Viscosity Transmitter. Type OMG Type PROM ASS 83F Electronic Units Elektronikeinheiten Indicator.Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH Mechanical Separation Division 9 Measurement Messtechnik 9.01.3 Type 4.2008 .

.

Thermometer THERMOMETER J _+.b _ R 1/2 _ 200 +_t-SW 0d --I I _ 10 _ 27 I PART .5 Gl / 2 A/Jv1 20 'd .~ f---f-/ G3/8 A / ~I 16x1. .5 I r ' J~ 22 27 1 - I 0°_ 160°C RANG--+---_ a EI 1 63 I.-----.No.E BELOI-IGS m .G --+--I. 0 ·59302 Oelde .m (H[(K[('I wil unl elleRtctrtavor I"::::::. 0001-1504-400 CORRESPONDING DRAI'IINGS . REV. 90 0 18112003 Bergman 18 11 ZOO] Klrs{n ~ WestfaJia Separator AG Oatenblatt I DATA SHEET STMlDAIlDS CH((KED.035 KG CAD .ORA WING r-______-+~OA T~ I~A I-~IE ~ JY\ ~ E~~~ QRA\'. DATE ~OPY"~nt reservea FUr dleso Ze~ctmung beha_~ en \vEIGHT 0. Anqular Ty pe. A OES(RIPTIQIi SUBJECT TO 1-IOOIFICA TIOI'IS EXCHANGE FOR x REPLACED BY.

.

.09.. aile R&etrte VOl BE LONGS TO. DA TE· RANGE 0°_ 120°C 0°_ 160°C a 55 63 G b 110 200 0d 10 10 SW 27 27 R 1/2 R 1/2 .Thermometer THERMOMETER - - - - - L) .: 0001-0326-280 0001-0335-400 PART .81 04 . > 0-59302 Oelde DRA\'/ I~IG ~rlo 990 '1. c.I~7 ( / 1 -~" " " SW G ru -L~ Part-No.2002 Bisping Oatenblatl I DATA SHEET .035 li G . FORi·tAT A4 H . .No. REPLACED BY .S0S I SHEET I SHEETS I ' . CORRESPONDING DRAWINGS REV. DATE DR A\'!~~ CHE( KED S1AI-!DARDS CHW:fO 6[:1\ WestfalJa Separator AG DSA I DSB I OS[ I OSD 18092002 l ' 18 .ORA WI~IG TYPE DESCRIPTI01i vopynght reserved Fur d l6S8 Z&:cMung beha ~en wir un.~O vlEIGHT 0. 9901 .0000-661 NAm SUBJECT TO t·IODI FICA TIOI IS EXCHANGE FOR.

.

.. ~ ~ .01 .1526-2BO x X I WEIGHT.30 V DC 0001 .DRAWING 0. ¢ I .11 . 10 • I I I • Techni sche Daten: Gehause: Lange 110 x Breite 30 mm Kapillare : prismatisches Spezialglas Merlbereich 0-200°C I 32-392°F Tauchrohr: 10 x 1 mm Material: nichtrostender Stahl Elektr. ~PG 11 I . I . CAD . WesHalla Separator AG 0·59302 Oelde BELONGS TO.: TECHNICAL DA T A: CASING: LENGTH 110 mm x WIDTH 30 mm CAPILLARY: PRISMA TIC SPECIAL GLASS RANGE: 0-200°C I 32-392°F IMMERSION TUBE: 10 x 1 mm MATERIAL: ST AINLESS STEEL SENSOR ELEMENT: 1 x Ptl00 I 2 WIRE CONNECTION: BACK WALL MOUNTED CASING WITH CABLE SOCKET ACCORDING TO DIN 89280 OUTPUT SIGNAL TEMP. .11 . -=I=::.r. Rechte vor OATE DRAWH HAIlE CHECKED Normgepr 26 .97 26 . Sensor: 1 x Ptl00 I 2 Leiter Anschlurl: Riickwandgehause mit Kabeleinfiihrung nach DIN 89280 Ausgangssignal : Merlumformer 4 .. Ir un.98 ST SIS CI""_A ..m I FORMAT 4H .l- ~~ . all. TRANSMITTER WITH 4-20 mA POWER SUPPL Y 12 . : I .20 mA Versorgungsspannung : 12 .. 9901-0000-667 TYPE: DESCRIPTION: DRAWING-No. I I ~27 i I --- ~ : I R1/2 . I -ct ( 1-= 1-= 1-= 1-= I- !::.. I .. I .30 V DC PART -No.Maschinenthermometer mit Transmitter MACHINE THERMOMETER WITH TRANSMITTER 50 53 ~17. DATE: EXCHANGE FOR: x REPLACED BY: Copyright reserved FUr diese Zelthflung blhalhn .97 15 .36 KG x (ORRESPONOIG DRAWINGS: REV.: OSA/OSB/OSc/OTB DA TASHEET SHEET AG 9901-8104-910 I SH.. -= 1 ~ ~ I . 1-= .:.

.

~". Dangerous pressure media such as Oxygen.2 Selection and Installation recommendatlons for pressure gauges EN 837-3 Diaphragm and capsul e pressure gauges.-' W Mod el 432. Dimensions. taking the influence of convection and heat radiation into consideration . Admissible ambient and working temperatures When installing the pressure gauge it has to be ensured that. Storage The pressure gauge should remain in its original packing until installation. if necessary. requ irements and testing EN 837. KG 10 Alexander-Wiegand-StraBe 30 8 63911 Klingenberg· Germany ~ Phone (+49) 93 72/132-0 ~ Fax (+49) 93 72/132-406 E-Mail info@wika. EN 837-2 "Selection and installation recommendations for pressure gauges' should be complied with. Pressure gauges removed from service should be protected from dust and humidity. When a blow-out device is fitted to a pressure gauge it shall be resistant to blocking by debris and dirt. flammable gases or liquids. gauge connection by means of a union nut or a LH-RH adjusting Technical alteration rights reserved. Ovorpressure safety upto 400b. The tests or recalibrations have to be carried out by qualified persons with the appropriate equipment.de N . '. ~ / upto 400b3r Mode1213.P'" . '} . Dimensions.. Tests should be carried out on a regular basis to guarantee the measuring accuracy of the pressure gauge. IWIKAII Pal1: of yo ur busin ess Notes according to Pressure Equipment Directive 97123/EC II The pressure gauges are "pressure accessories· in accordance with article 1. With safety pattern gauges (see dial symbol @ ) you need to pay attention to the fact that the free space behind the blow-out back will be at least 15 mm. .:lr Only qualified persons authorised by the plant manager are permitted to install . Maintenance and servicing / Repairs The instruments require no maintenance or servicing. maintain and service the pressure gauges. PTFE tape (EN 837. In order to guarantee the accuracy and long-term stability specified.de Pressure Gauges '. respectively (I. "" Wrenc h surface /W x:..e. t is recommended to simplify correct orientation of the gauge. OV9rprGZ~Uro safety ModQl732. Mechanical connection According to the general technical regulations for pressure gauges. Applied standard Installation with open -ended spanner . 3.. This should be considered when handling and storing the removed pressure gauge. 2. EN 837-2). paragraph 3 ·sound engineering practice". 5.1.. After an external fire pressure media can leak out particularly at soft solder joints.36. requirements and testing WIKA Alexander Wiegand GmbH & Co.. t Correct sealing of pressure gauge connections with parallel thread CD shall be means of a suitable sealing ring. toxic gases or liquids as well as for refrigeration plants or compressors requires attention above the standard regulations. sealing washer or WIKA profile seals. metrology. . Here the specific safety codes or regulations must be considered.. paragraph 2. Sea I'109 0 f ·. with additional sealing material like. Acetylene.1 Requirements for the installation point If the measuring point is not adequately stable a measuring instrument support such as a bracket or flange should be used for fastening (and possibly via a flexible capillary line). for example .the thread "" Sealing area CD ~ <D A ~ ~ The torque depends on the seal used.40 2. metrology. If the pressure gauge is exposed to vibration or pulsating pressure or both. .. Serious injuries and/or damage can occur should the appropriate regulations not be observed. Storage temperature: -40 o e .4 SI The volume of the pressure bearing housings of WIKA pressure gauges is < 0..__ 1. the corresponding load limits are to be observed. Instruments should be protected against coarse dirt and wide fluctuations in ambient temperature.wika. With standard G-type pipe thread. All gauges have to be checked and . Safety instructions The user must ensure that the appropriate pressure gauge with regard to scale range and perfonnance and the appropriate wetted material (corrosion) for 1he specific measuring conditions of the respective application is selected. . The sealing of tapered threads (e.. then a liquid filled pressure gauge may provide considerably better performance and readability.de www.2). replaced before recommissioning the plant. +70 °e. Pressure gauges that do not carry the CE marking are manufactured in accorda nce with article 3.- '". NPT threads) is made by providing the thread 0 . The influence of temperature on the class accuracy is to be observed. Specifications: see data sheet under www. When screw-fitting the gauges the force required forthis must not be applied through the case or terminal box but just through the spanner flats (with suitable tool) provided for this purpose.wika.. no upper or lower deviation from the permissible ambient and medium temperatures can occur.. Remainder of the pressure medium contained in the pressure element may be hazardous or toxic. 1-____ . table 1 when their permissible working pressure exceeds 200 bar . " o EN 837· 1 Bourdon tube pressure gauges. ~il'J Examples: A . 4.14... The gauge should be protected from external damage during storage.1 L 12 The pressure gauges carry the CE marking for fluid group 1G in accordance with annex 2.g..

5 (0 . + O' C ..40' C .1- ITHfll A Schalter 63 2 1 3 DIN 43650·A DIN 43650·A (GL ) 10 (2) A Schaller 20 AC 250 V 220 V 11 0V 24 V Scha lter 26 Microswitch 28 AC 250 V 220 V 11 0 V 24 V 5 (1) AC 30V 75 V 30 V 0 .~ ~ """"'~ ~~lj i ..~ I I I .3 (0...3)A 5 (4) A Microrupteur 83 DC Microswitch 83 l ebensdauer mec hanisch (Anza hl L astspiele) Dur~ de vie mechanique (Nombre de cycles) Mechanical life lime (Number of cycles) Sc haller 20 Microrupteur 20 Schalter 28/83 1 Mia. r --".Betriebsanleitung Instructions de service Instructions Massbilder / Cotes d'encombrement / Dimensions .2)A 0 ..2)A 0.com Internet www .. + 80·C Lagertemperatur / Temperature de stockage / Storage temperature . ~ru 52 52 . Microswitc h 20 Microswitch 28/83 Betriebstemperatur / Temperature de service / Operating temperature Type 980. D 30 Gl/6'x12 76.--- 9XO Picostat Fr . I -: .! 66. 9KO T ype 9MO . 2 r --. + sooe Trarag AG CH ·8708 Mannedorf "' a Fcag SWITZERL AND Tel. .3 (0. 9KO Type 9MO .com .2)A 0.7 91 * '" ~ : ~I'" \X=II i 20 ! 34 Slecker / Connecteur I Plug DIN 43650·A ( ZllbehO 58 / Accessoire 58 / Accessory 58 ) r Stecker / Connecteur / Plug DIN 43650·A (GL) ( ZubehO 59 / Accessoire 59 / Accessory 59 ) r ffektrischer Anschluss / Raccordement (!lectrique / flectrical connection .. .3 (0... + 120' C O~ C .25 °C ..16 (O...trafag..~~~.5 (0. Fax +4 1 1 9223232 +4 1 1 9223233 e-ma il trafag@tra fag.l)A 0.::. + 85 ' C eo'c Messsto((-Temperatur / Temperature de medium / Medium temperature T ype 900.3 (0 . - - I _ I ! ! ! I ~ I I I I -- t- i S I I . Mic rorupteur 28/83 10 M ia.3)A 10 (4) A Microrupteur 28 DC 0..5 67.5 ! r--r'-~i ~ D30 .25' C .2)A Mic rorupteur 20 DC Microswilch 20 0 ..

) HOchslwl..2 . / Switching differential switch 28/83 approx. Schalter 20128/83 HOchslzul.8 . 100 16 . 6 0. Schaltdiff.10m eingestellten Soltwert. H&hstzul..4 0. .. 16 0. 1. 10 0.. . Schaltdiff.. ..160 25 . Ht>chstzul..6 1.. 20Nm G 1/4".. Schaller 28/83 ca.. MA = 16 ..60 10. .4 .2 40 6 .4....... 15 200 Schaltdiff.. . ..250 40 ..S . MA = 32 .GO 4 . 1G 200 5 .. . I Switching differential switch 20 approx. abtulngig '.2 ..4.78 Nitril 90"Shore 0 Nitril 70 Shore 250 bar < 250 bar 3) Befestig ungs -Sc hra ube: Vis de fixation: MS fastening screw: Festigkeilsklasse: Cia sse de resistance: Property class: Anziehdrehmoment: Couple de serrage: Mounting torque: 8. 6 100 5 ..2 40 6 .em:n ~ 2.3 0. / Differenliel suivant type de microrupleur 28/83 env.5 200 200 200 200 4 . Betriebsdruck / Pression maximum admissible / Maximum working pressure 1) 2) 3) Druckanschluss / Raccord de pression / Pressure connection 1) Allziehdrehmoment: Couple de serrage: Torque moment: G 118".8 4 . Betriebsdruck 0..com bafag SVViTZERlAND .trafag. 40Nm 2) a·Ring' Joint torique: O-ring seal: :<?: o 6.16 200 4 .3. o ~ 0 M H: Hysterese abhtlngig '. +41 1 9223232 Fax +41 1 9223233 e-mail trafag@trafag. 15 200 12 ... 16 . 40 Messbereich / Plage / Range Membrane Schaltdiff.7 0...40 400 12 . Schalter 20 ca... . .10m eingeslelilen Sollwert / Differentiel en fonetion de la valeur de consigne / Switching differential depending upon !he preset value Schaltdifl.com Internet www.2 12 1 ... GNm Achtung / Allention / Allention Soliwert-finstellung / Adjustage de la valeur de consigne / Preset value adjustment enlever remove en...6 .160 25 .6 1.4 0.100 16 . Schaller 20128/83 ca".. .) 10.4 0 .4 . .. Trarag AG CH-8708 Miinnedorr Tel...7 1..3 0.5 1 .. 50 600 Schaltdiff.2..7 0...2 12 1 . 25 24 4 .40 400 12 .1.5 1..2 12 24 2 ...40 1. / Differentiel suivant type de microrupleur 20 env. 2. 400 ca~) 0. Betriebsdruck Kolben Piston .7 0.75xl..Betriebsdruck / Pression de functionnement / Operating pressure Messbereich / Plage / Range Balg Soufflet Bellow Schaltdiff. Betriebsdruck -0... .. 250 '} '} '} 0. H: Hysteresis dependante de la valeur de consigne. H: Hysteresis depending upon the preset value. Schalter 28/83 ca... 10 0 ...3 0.4 100 100 2 ..5 2 .. 6 100 2 .8 .. Schalter 20 ca.25 1.

.

= FREQUENCY HZ MAX.2 .1. A PRE-LOADED SPRING CAUSES THE PLUNGER TO TAKE UP ITS ZERO POSITION WHEN THE PRESSURE DIFFERENCE DELTA P IS ZERO.2 09.0 BAR 250 0-60 1al 63 220 0-60 0.= MAKING AND/OR BREAKING CAPACITY WNAMAX.0 BAR 0.36.8 3a 1 60/60 40/60 MATERIAL RATING RANGES OF PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL: DELTA P = TO BE SPECIFIED WHEN ORDERING DESCRIPTION: THE PURPOSE OF THIS DEVICE IS THE MEASUREMENT. METHOD OF OPERATION: A PLUNGER SEALED BY A DIAPHRAGM SEPARATES THE SPACE UNDER PRESSURE INTO TWO CHAMBERS.ALUMINIUM MAX. THE FIRST REED CONTACT IS ACTUATED AT 75% DELTA P1 .TYP4.5 52 97 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . TEMPERATURE 150·C 0 .0. AND THE ESTABLISHMENT OF AN ELECTRICAL CONTACT WHEN THE PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL ATTAINS A SPECIFIED FIGURE. AND THE SECOND AT 100% DELTA P2.= SWITCHING CURRENT A MAX. PRESSURE 100 BAR MAX. AS THE PRESSURE DIFFERENCE INCREASES (DELTA P >0). AND THEREFORE VIRTUALLY WITHOUT FRICTION.= GO . AND THE TWO REED CONTACTS ARE ACTUATED. AT THE SAME TIME.36. THE PLUNGER IS FORCED TO MOVE AGAINST THE SPRING.2. THE RED SEGMENT OF THE INDICATOR DISC IS VISIBLE OVER A PRESSURE RANGE EQUAL TO APROX. DATA: SWITCHING VOLTAGE V~ MAX.06 Z45550 r-- lJ) m N 93 95 4005 I_+----+--"'G 1/4 i---iM20x1.50-100% DELTA P.8 BAR 0.6P2 SPECIFICATION: PROTECTION CLASS: IP 65 ELECTR.5 BAR 0.01. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE CONTACT INDICATOR TYPE 4.0.2 BAR 0. AND VISUAL INDICATION OF THE DIFFERENCE IN PRESSURE BETWEEN TWO POINTS. AN INDICATOR DISC IS MOVED MAGNETICALLY.3.

94 Z21434 3 I .2 PLAN DES PIECES DE RECHANGE .2 UNO 4.2+4.36.2 11.02.36.TYP4.46. NO DE COMMANDE TYP 4.2 11 10 7 3 POS.NR ROLLMEMBRAN FEDER KOLBEN DICHTUNG BEZEICHNUNG DIAPHRAGM SPRING PISTON GASKET DESIGNATION DIAPHRAGME RESSORT PISTON JOINT DESIGNATION SPARE PARTS DRAWING ERSATZTEI LZEI CHNUNG ZUM TYP 4. f-- A CEMENTED COLLE A-B BEl BESTELLUNG ANGEBEN TO BE MENTIONED IN CASE OF ORDER A MENTIONNER LORS DE LA COM MAN DE AUFTRNR ORDER NO.46.36.

.

Process measurement solutions ViscoMaster 7829 Digital Viscosity Transmitter CE .

.

5". Aufnehmerzinken mit PTFE Beschichtung.5 ~ Klemmringverschraubung. 2 . Boitiers. !. Raccord conique 1. Lames revetues PTFE .The 7829 ViscoMaster digital viscosity transmitter is for heavy fuel oils Le viscoslmetre digital Viscomaster 7829 a eM con9u pour des fiouls Jourds Der dlgitale Viskositatstransmitter 7829 dient zur Messung der Viskositat von Schwerolen e (0 8 Electronics housing. PTFE coated tines. Elektronikgehause. 1.5" Cone Seat fitting.

Serial Number. Numero de serie. No. 7829FEANAEBBBAA MAX. WORKING PRESSURE:. 291051 LR97715 DATE MAY-Ol TEMP: T4 MAX AMBIENT TEMP 110C Solartron Mobr ~. Berkshire. Type .Device Identification Identification Typenschlld 8 8 e Type Number. Lloyds Approval . 5 M Pa CLASS 1 GROUP C HAZARDOUS LOCATION RATING: 30Vd. SER. 124 Edinburgh Avenu Slough. Engla d. Agrement Lloyds. Seriennummer.c max 2Wmax A SEAL SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN 50mm OF T ~ ENCLOSURE. Lloyds Zuassung. UN SCELLEMENT DOlT INSTALLE A MOINS DE 50m ~ OU BOITIER. Typennummer. 3 . VISCOMETER TYPE No.1 0 .

___ .8 8 e Measurements (outputs) Mesures (sorties) Messsignale (Ausgange) ~ .j:> c (f) '2 C 0 ro 0 .l> ~ 0 0 ~ c c 0 0 0 . I I I I 1. ~ (") 0 ~ ~ ~ '!2 ~ 4 .l> 3 0 "0 ~ ... J I $: .--. N 0 ..

. . .) Temperaturregler Computer (PC) 9 Engine Management Computer Burner or Systeme de gestion du moteur BrQleur au Gras moteur Retour de carburant non-consomme Maschinen Managementrechner Brenner oder Grossdieselmaschine 10 11 12 Large Diesel Engine Unburned fuel return Treibstoff . ' .ROckJaufleitung 5 . .C. .' .. ' .. . CJ . I '. . . 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 HFO fuel tank (0 Cuve fioul lourd Melangeur Schweroltank 8 Mixer Re·circulation pump Mischer Umwalzpumpe Warmetauscher Regelventil 7829 ViscoMaster Pompe de recirculation Rechauffeur Fuel heater Control valve 7829 ViscoMaster Vanne de regulation 7829 ViscoMasler Heater Controlier Personal Computer (PC) Regulateur de temperature Ordinateur (p.8 e o Typlcallnstallatlon Installation type Typlscher Elnbau \ . . . .

Aufschweissstutzen.Flow Chamber or Weldolet Options d'installation . Cellule de mesure. 6 .Installation Options .Cellule de mesure au raccord Weldolet Montagemoglichkelten .Durchflusskammer oder Aufschweissstutzen Flow Chamber. Raccord Weldolel. Ourchflusskammer Weldolel.

Beispiel. Choisir fioulleger. Exemple. Commissioning Mise en service (0 Inbetrlebnahme Work safely! Securite d'abord! Sicherheitsregeln beachten! 2.e 8 1. Anfahren mit LeichlOl. 7 . Example. Select a distillate (light fuel oil).

8 . Oberwurfmutter anziehen. Serrer I'ecrou . V2. Inserer Ie 7829 Viscomaster. 6. Tighten the nut. V2 . und V4 offnen. V3. Ventile V1. 5. V3 and V4 . Demarrer la pompe o Pumpe einschalten. 7829 einfOhren. V3 et V4. Close valves V5 and V6 . Insert 7829. Open valves V1. Start the pump. 4. Ouvrir vannes V1 .3. Fermer vannes V5 et VG. Ventile V5 und V6 schliessen. V2.

Re~tighten nut if necessary. I II 1 8. Oberwurfmutter nachziehen. Monitor until at normal temperature for HFO. Controler jusqu'a la temperature normale du fioullourd. Resserrer I'ecrou si necessaire. Wenn dieht. auf Schwerol umschalten. Switch to HFO when not leaking. 9. falls n6tig.7. . 9 . Selectionner fioul lourd s'iI n'y a pas de fuites. Beobachten bis die normale Schweroltemperatur erreicht ist.

Contr61er jusqu'a la temperature normale du fioullourd. 11. Wenn dieht. Monitor until at normal temperature for distillate (light fuel oil) . Selectionner fioul leger q'jI n'y a pas de fuite . Beobachten bis die normale Schwer61temperatur erreicht ist. falls notig. 10 . auf LeiehWI umschalten.10. Switch from HFO when not leaking. Oberwurfmutter nachziehen . Resserrer I'ecrou si necessaire. Re-tighten nut if necessary. 12.

Probemessungen im Labor. S'il y a des fuites. ' 14. Record readings. Wenn dieht. I ···1'.13. dann mit 50 mm Mineralwolle isalieren. contacter Ie fournisseur. n I ! I I OK [. Take samples. Messwerte notieren. den Hersteller ansprechen. If no leaks. consult manufacturer. Prendre echantillons.j . I j. S'il n'y a pas de fuites. 11 . Wenn weiterhin undicht. calorifuger avec >50 mm laine de roche . OK 15. ~ If there are leaks now. I - . insulate with ~ 2 ~ Rock-wool. Noter valeurs indiquees.

take action.Keine Aktion erforderlich. Aufgezeichnete MessVlerte mit Laborwerten ve rgleichen: 8ei Differenzen entsprechende Aktionen einleiten. @Jj= Compare recorded values with lab values: Comparer les valeurs avec resultats labo: Difference ! .Mission terminee. 12 .take no action Resultats acceptables . Difference! Contr61er reglages. Keine Differenz .16. No difference .

5+6: sortie 4-20mA. 3+4: MODBUS. 1+2: Alim. 5+6: 4-20mA Ausgang . (20· 28Vdc. 3+4: MODBUS Schnittstelle. Electrical Installation Installation eleetrlque Elektrlsche Installation 8 1+2: Power In.e 8 1. Normale Spannungsversorgung . 3+4: MODBUS. 100mA) 13 .protegee centre les surtensions et la foudre .absichern gegen Spannungsspitzen und Oberspannungen durch Bli12schlag. 5+6: 4-20mA out. 2. r rr ~""''':IW. -. Alimentation d'instrumentation .protected against electrical surges and lightning strikes. Instrument Standard Power Supply . 1+2: Versorgungsspannung . .

.---------_llf) ~ 13247116":' '------.JOS PC (+Adview) 14 . r--As---I 1 11234 ' 561 1' I I f I I Cable length s 100 metres. Kabellange ~ 100 m. • 17· 35Vdc) 11lq>12 O~ 3 7 51 If) ~l.. ----- ------ 6 4 3 2 1 ill 0 CO ~ B '" « . the RTS connected can be omitted.. 100 metres.3. .. Longueur cable 5: 100 metres.. L _______ J 1 3 (8) 8 (A) ~ PC (+Adview) Cable leng1h ~ 100 metres.J. Kabellange s 100 m.J 0)-. a: <0 t: 0 li. L() N 0 a: ::L 1 ~ '" N <f) > " c U (RTS) 3 5 6 7 L-.. Anm : Bei PC's die mit Wndow NT arbeiten en!fallt der RTS Anschluss. Note: For a PC running Windows NT. Note: Pour PC sous Windows NT.. Longueur cable 2. RTS n'est pas necessaire..

----L--------L~ ~ 4 3 2 1 « .. I 1 J ~--~L======+~~~ 6 lJ.. PC (+ Adview) 71~~ 4.externally powered. L{) 0 0 1 3 CO '<t i'l N (f) ~ ~ oc 0 0 "' '" oc 'c>" 7 8 ~ (RTS) 5 6 • (7 . 4-20mA Output . utiliser Adview pour changer I'adresse du 7829 avant de I'inclure dans une boucle Multidrop. : ! 12 l 34 1 56 ~ : ______ ..L + (4-20mA) 15 . mit externer Spannungsversorgung.JO. .6( . use Adview to change the slave address before adding 7829 to a r--"s---I 1 ~~-~~ 1 L multi-drop network.s.J ). 4-20mA Ausgang (passiv). Pour eviter des conflits.-1on - L-----.--------..7829 7829 To avoid conflicts. 1m Zweifelsfall mittels Adview die Slave Adresse andern.35Vdc) '-----' 1 2 3 7 5 1 1324 '. bevor der 7829 in ein Multidropnetz eingebunden wird. Sortie 4-20mA passive - aalimenter.

.

_ KRAL VOlumeter® OMG Series. KRAL Operating Instructions 01 014en Edition 06/2007 .

flanged connection Heating system 6 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 Operatfon 0 Function test 0 Commissioning 0 Switching off the volumeter • Safety instructions for switching off the volumeter • Switching off the volumeter 0 Resuming volumeter operation Maintenance 18 18 19 19 19 19 0 Electrical heating system 0 Medium heating system 0 Auxiliary heating Function description 9 9 0 Recalibration of the volumeters 0 General information about mounting instructions • Tightening torques 0 Mounting instnuctions OMG 13 General drawing Required mounting tools Removing seals and bearings Installing seals and bearings 0 Mounting instructions OMG 20/32 General drawing Required mounting tools Removing seals and bearings Installing seals and bearings 0 Mounting instructions OMG 52168 General drawing Required mounting tools Removing seals and bearings Installing seals and bearings 20 20 20 21 21 21 22 22 23 23 23 24 24 26 26 27 27 28 30 30 31 31 32 9 0 General drawing volumeter 0 Function description 0 Rolling bearings 0 Signal generation 0 Linearization 0 Temperature compensation 0 Pressure pulse compensation Transportation. pipe thread connection 0 Dimensions and weights.. labeling 0 Type code 5 5 Q) :::J E o Rating plate Technical data « 0: ~ -.. removal and connection 0 Target groups 0 Symbols used 3 3 3 3 4 CJ 0 Safety instructions for installation and removal 0 Installation Start·up filter Pipe thread connection Flanged connection Installing the volumeter 0 Electrical connection I Safety instructions for electrical installation 0 Removing the volumeter 15 15 15 15 15 16 17 17 17 0 @ ~ 0 Danger levels 0 Further applicable documents 0 General safety instructions Q) +-' .(/) Table of Contents ·c Q) Q) CI) About this document Installation. storage and disposal 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 0 Unpacking and checking the state of delive!)' 0 Raising volumeters 0 Safety information for storage and preservation 0 Storage 0 Preserving the volumeter 0 Removing the preservative 0 Safety information for disposal 0 Disposing of the volumeter 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 14 0 Mounting instnuctions OMG 100/140 General drawing Required mounting tools Removing seals and bearings Installing seals and bearings Troubleshooting 0 Possible faults 34 34 o Troubleshooting Appendix 0 General drawings 0 Spare parts 0 Notes 36 40 41 2 010 14en Edition 06/2007 .l > 0 0 Intended use 0 Use not as intended 0 Operational limits • Maximum values • Substitute operating data 0 Noise levels 0 Dimensions and weights..

. Furthermore observe the operating instructions of the sensors and the E :::J U evaluation electronics...0 o :::J warnings.. also for future use. Observe additional plant-specific directives and regulations. in particular the safety instructions and warnings.. serious personal injury Further applicable documents Calibration ce rtificate Manufacturer's declaration to EU Directive 98/37/EC and 97/231EC ATEX declaration of conformity Corresponding operating instructions for sensor Corresponding operating instructions for electronic equipment 010 14en Edition 06/2007 3 ..... slight personal injury Death. serious personal injury Death.c . -0 o Target groups Target group Operator-owner Tasks en .. o o o Keep these instructions available at the plant's site of use. in particular the safety instructions and « .Target groups . Read... Ensure that employees read and observe these instructions and the associated documents.. Specialist personnel. The operating instructions have to be kept for future use and reference... observe and foliow these instructions and the associated documents..0 is a registered trademark of KRAL AG. Q) C The operating instructions form part of the volumeter. fitters 0 Symbols used Symbol Meaning Warning Action steps at mechanical instaliation IZ1 Warning Caution Warning Danger Action steps at electricallnstaliation Check or fau lt table Danger levels Danger level Possibly dangerous situation Possible threat of danger Immediate threat of danger Consequences of non·observances Material damage. . KRAL Volumete.

• Pressure drop of the volumeter must not exceed the values stated in the technical documentation (load rating diagram). dangerous to health. Observe the safety conditions for handling dangerous materials. o o Do not use KRAL Volumeters outside the performance limitations specified on the name plate.g. o Observe the general regulations for the prevention of accidents as well as the local safety and operating instructions. contact the manufacturer. • Maintain and check the protective/alarm equipment regularly. « . corrective maintenance during the warranty period require the express permission of the manufacturer.+-' E ::J U <D C General safety instructions General safety instructions The following general safety Instructions must be observed: "'0 (/) o o .) cause high pressure differences and may damage the measuring unit. • Read the operating instructions carefully and observe them . • The operator-owner is responsible for the observance of the operating instructions.. Strong variations of the flow rate (e. see "Safety instructions for switching off the volumete(. o o The pumped media may be dangerous (for example hot. 4 010 14en Edition 0612007 . poisonous. o In case of plants with an increased potential of danger to humans andior machines the failure of a volumeter may not lead to injuries or damage to property. removal and installation work may only be carried out by specialist personnel. .c +-' +-' No liability is accepted for damage arising through non-observance of the operating instructions. o Observe the valid national and international standards and specifications of the installation location.0 o ::J • Installation. Do not continue to use volumeters that are operated contrary to specifications or after damage. pressure pulsations. on the calibration certificate and in the "Technical data" section.. Pumped media can be subject to pressure and can cause material andior personal damage if leaks occur. • Always equip plants with an increased potential of danger with alarm equipment andior bypass. In the case of operating data that do not agree with the specifications on the name plate. Check the volumeters regulariy. temperature. Shut down damaged volumeters and replace wom volumeters immediately. combustible). etc.. rapid switch-off.. Volumeters wear to different degrees depending on the respective operating conditions (pulsations. o o In order for the warranty to remain valid.). page 19.

.0 . 2 Name plate 010 14en Edition 06/2007 5 .800145 + BEV 13 3 L L \'--_ rr 5 Designation Descnptlon OMG: Universal OMG 13: Nominal flow rate 10 I/mln OMG 20: Nominal flow rate 30 Vmin OMG 32: Nominal flow rate 100 I/min OMG 52: Nominal flow rate 350 I/min OMG 69: Nominal flow rate 700 I/min OMG 100: Nominal flow rate 2000 Vmin OMG 140: Nominal flow rate 5000 Vmin Series Size 2 3 Version index Completion For internal administration Manufacturer-specific indexing 43: BEG 430 44: BEG44 45: BEG 45 47: BEG 470 4 5 Sensor 6 Amplifier BEV13 (only in combination with sensor BEG 45) Rating plale 1 Serial number 2 Construction year 3 K-Factor 4 Flow direction 5 Maximum temperature 6 Type 7 Maximum pressure Fig.J 2 4 6 ell 2 3 4 5 6 Size Version index Completion Sensor Amplifier 1 Fig. 1 Item 1 Type code / OMG 20.Type code 0> C Type code 1 Series Q) .

& n (Qm.6 57. Maximum values The following table shows the respective maximum values that . The permissible operational limits of individual values influence each other so that every application is checked individually by the manufacturer when selecting the volumeter.85 17.000. however. may not occur simultaneously.000 1.+200 min.-max.I ntended use Intended use KRAL volumeters of the OMG series are designed solely for flow measurement of lubricating fluids that are chemically neutral and do not contain any gas or solids content. Measuring chamber volume 1 .1.. of the sealing material and of the sensor are to be observed. inform the manufacturer. Sizes OMG 13 OMG 20 OMG 32 OMG 52 OMG 68 OMG 100 OMG 140 Flow rale [l/m in] Qmax Orated 15 10 0.8 79.8 33. Operating data that deviate from the values on the rating plate and the operational limits specified here can cause damage to the volumeter.3 2259. Viscosity [mm 2/s] -20 . Operational limits The values specified on the rating plate and the calibration report apply.3 833. In addition.7 251. standardized substitute operating data are used.1 2 4 12 4 8 16 6 12 26 8 16 10 20 42 14 28 48 20 40 50 9120 6090 61 7200 4800 48 5850 3900 39 4658 3105 31 4182 2784 28 3600 2400 24 3318 2214 22 34 6 010 14en Edition 0612007 .6 167 16.1 250 45 30 0. Use not as intended The volumeter is not suitable for measuring the flow of gases or flu ids containing solids.5 160 1050 700 7 100 3000 2000 20 40 7500 5000 50 amin Max. the operational limits of the corresponding completion.6 8 .3 150 100 1 525 350 3.7 22. pressure [bar] Temperalure rO C] min.6 112.0 142 302 39.64 6.9 [mVU] Rotaling speed [lImln] n (Qmaxl n (Q"".25 25. If there is any doubt whether deviating operating data can cause damage .) Pole number [p] Kl K2 K3' K·Faclor [PII] Kl K2 K3' 1216 2432 7296 640 1280 2560 234 468 1014 71. If no operating data are provided by the orderer.-max. The volumeters may only be used within the operational limits described within this chapter.

31 25.8 2763 1842 18.822 0. Tab.0 608 405 4.6 697 464 4. the operational limits 01 the corresponding completion.3 2927 1949 19.2 1106 738 7 .08 7.4 2213 1475 14.2 2880 1920 19.n) 1690 16.411 0 .4 1920 1280 12.6 100 100 2 350 350 7 160 700 700 14 100 2000 2000 40 40 5000 5000 100 Max.2 960 640 6.52 29.. 010 14en Edition 06/2007 7 .8 585 390 3 . In addition.99 56..3 2640 1760 17..2 480 320 3.n.6 1680 1120 11 .Noise levels Sizes OMG 13 OMG 20 OMG 32 OMG 52 OMG 68 OMG 100 OMG 140 Milliliters per pulse [mI/P] Kl 0 .391 4.5 840 560 5.56 0. temperature and viscosity.782 0.-. Sizes OMG 13 OMG 20 OMG 32 OMG 52 OMG 68 OMG 100 OMG 140 Flow rate [l/min] Omax Orated Qmin 10 10 0.nax.4 11 (0.n) 1 (Omax) 3" 13" (O"led) 13" (Om. 1 1243 828 8.9 " Observe the lIow range : II the value lies below 0m.99 14. Viscosity [mm 2/s] -20-+120 min. 01 the sealing material and 01 the sensor are to be observed.14 0. pressure [bar] Temperature rO C] min.2 1-200 Substitute operating data Noise levels KRAL Volumeters operate almost silently.137 1..) 12 (O".98 59.36 112.8 2535 621 414 4. 1 Maximum values Substitute operating data The lollowing table shows standardized values lor the Ilow rate .) 304 203 2 .) 12 (Omax) 12 (Oml_. These values can be used at the same time as maximum values without impairing the service lile 01 the volumeter..9 1170 780 7.1 1824 1216 12.13 12..56 5 .2 250 30 30 0.76 17.-max. reler to the operating instructions 01 the corresponding sensor Tab.1_.20 K2 K3" Pulse frequency [Hz] 11 (Omax) II (0.6 1393 929 9.50 45.27 2.04 3.

2 Nominal pressure Mass Dimen sional drawing OMG with flange l J . 3 Dim ensions and weights. pipe thread connection Dimensions and weights.6 3/4" 250 145 74 145 4.-J.. l JI PN m Fig.'. flanged connection DN M18xl o L1 L Nominal diameter flange Sensor hole Outer diameter Volumeter length without co nnections Total length M18x1 ~ \ ON ~ ~---~-~-~--------~ --~--- ~l 0 1 Il-'.. Pressu re Mass Dimen sional drawing OMG with pipe thread L OMG68 2" 100 355 138 295 29 11LJ 11 -'~ I!I OMG 13 OMG20 OMG32 1" 250 215 104 215 11 OMG 100 4" OMG 140 6" 40 645 267 537 180 G P I d 11 m [inch) [bar) 1/2" 250 145 90 94 4.."'0 U U C\'l C\'l C\'l Q) Dimensions and weights..---I Tab..!: M1 8x1 '\ I- ~II OMG52 1 1/2 " 160 295 118 240 18 p m Fig.LI .. pipe thread connection G M1Sxl d 11 Pipe thread Sensor hole Outer diameter Volumeter length without connections Total length C ...L.L.-. 4 Dimensions and weights.1 40 480 188 400 70 [mm) [mm) [mm) [kg) Tab.-. -.... · ·. flanged connection 8 010 14en Edition 0612007 . pipe thread connection Dimensions and weights..

This can result in bearing damage or destruclion of the device. Medium heating system Medium heating systems are available for the sizes OMG 20 -140. The coiled tubing cartridge consists of a heating sleeve that encloses the volumeter housing.Electrical heating system KRAL volumelers can be equipped oplionally wilh a healing system. apply insulation to the volumeter if possible. en 0> C Cti I a> Electrical heating system Two types of electrical heating systems are available depending on the size of the volumeter: Size OMG 13-32 OMG 52-140 Melhod of heating Heating cartndge Coiled tubing cartridge The heating cartndge is integrated in the volumeter housing. 010 14en Edition 06/2007 9 .ng cartridge is used. This is advisable in the case of very viscous fluids that do not flow sufficiently when not heated. The medium heating system consists of a heating jacket with pipe thread connections. please contact the manufacturer. Operating data: o Maximum pressure: 16 bars o Maximum medium temperature: 200 · C Auxiliary heating If the customer's auxiliary heating systems are installed. The following types are available: o With ancillary heating: Electrical or medium heating system o With auxiliary heating by customer E a> +-' en >. Caution! ~ Do not heat the sensor and sensor cable above the temperature specified in the sensor instructions. Operating data: o Voltage: 230 V o Frequency: 50 Hz o Wire cross-section: 2 x 1 mm 2 o Gable length for coiled tubing cartridge : 1 m Size OMG13 OMG 20 -32 OMG52 OMG 68-100 OMG 140 Heating output [W] 125 100 800 2000 on request ~ If a coiled tut.

The free cross-section of the measuring unit is constant throughout its length so that the flow rate can be calculated simply from the product of the free cross-section.". Together with the measuring casing 4 that encompasses the measuring unit. the volumeters can be equipped with correspondingly adapted completions for connection to various flanges. Thanks to the displacement principle described here. Depending on the customer requirements. fixed bearing end 9 Sensor hole 10 Pole wheel Function description As screw meters. In a screw meter a special form allows an almost tight engagement of two intermeshing screws 5.I 5 2 3 o U C / 1 / ::::l LL \ 10 Fig . 10 010 14en Edition 06/2007 . KRAL volumeters belong to the group of rotating displacement meters. § Connection 2 Screw plug 3 Bearing cover 6 Ball bearing. The measured medium flows around and lubricates all the rotating parts. The fluid current makes the measuring unit rotate.:: o u (/) C General drawing volumeter c.7 to be achieved. 1 Volumeter design ~ u '". The displacement effect results from the continuous filling. floating bearing end 7 Measuring screw large 4 Measuring casing 5 Measuring screw small 8 Ball bearing. the meter does not require inlet and smoothing sections in its supply and discharge.. General drawing volumeter Q) "'0 C 1 3 I 4 . closed volumes are achieved by this means. rotary speed and pitch of the screws. The meter can be operated in any installation position and direction of flow. axial displacement and discharge of the volumes described above. The medium is supplied and discharges axially and almost without deflection.

The K-factor relevant for the flow rate being measured is then determined by means of linear interpolation between the two nearest interpolation values. Possible formats of the pulse signals: o o o PNP NAMUR NPN Depending on the design of the flow sensor either cylindrical pole wheels with embedded magnets or toothed metal disks with varying tooth density can be used (higher number of poles = higher K-factor). that were determined at a viscosity of 4. This flow sensor generates a specific number of pulses per flow volume unit . Depending on the respective size. This device-specific characteristic is called the K-factor (unit: pulses/liter) and is listed in the enclosed calibration certificate. These are also documented in the enclosed calibration certificate. to take these different values into consideration by means of a "Unearization". The K-factors are therefore fed into a suitable evaluation electronic unit across several interfX)lation values 01 the flow rate. 010 14en Edition 06/2007 11 . This preferred direction is based on the desire to position the thin-walled dry sleeve of the low-pressure end for the case that the volumeter is blocked. LL Signal generation A pole wheel 10 is affixed at the fixed-bearing end of the large measuring screw 7.2 mm'ls in the calibration test.depending on the size and working point. Its pole is sampled by a flow sensor mounted in a dry sleeve. also has to be taken into account. Various types of flow sensors can be used depending on the application (operating temperature. the following bearings are used: o a. The dry sleeve allows the flow sensor to be mounted without contact to the fluid to be measured. Linearization The calibration certificate contains a mean K-factor that has been determined for the flow range to: 1 and that can therefore be used across a wide flow range. the K-factor shows slightly different values at different flow rates. especially at strongly varying flow rates. it is therefore advisable. The influence of the flow rate on the K-factor decreases at higher viscosities so that the mean K-factor can then also be used in a considerably larger flow range without noteworthy errors.Rolling bearings Rolling bearings The measuring unit is maintained without contact and with a low degree of friction in the casing of the KRAL volumeter by means of a precision rolling bearing . However. The viscosity dependence of the K-factors. The bearing end at the rotor end is realized as a fixed bearing. ·C u (/) Q) c o o o Single-row deep-groove ball bearings Paired angular-contact ball bearings Four-point contact bearings "0 C o U C :::J The bearing point at the opposite end of the measuring unit is realized as a floating bearing with a movable deep-groove ball bearing at all sizes. required frequencies) : o o o Inductive sensors Sensors based on the Hall effect MagnetiC sensors The rating plate of the KRAL volumeters lists a preferred direction of flow at which the dry sleeve lies on the flow-off end. If highest measuring precision is required.

A normalized volume measurement is then possible at which the displayed values are converted to a reference temperature XO that can be selected freely. () c C :::::l Pressure pulse compensation Systems with a changing direction of flow as well as systems with pressure pulsations .. This ensures that measuring errors caused by changes in the density due to temperature variations are avoided.:: () (/) c Temperature compensation Temperature compensation If the KRAL Volumeter is additionally equipped with a temperature sensor. LL 12 010 14en Edition 06/2007 . a..o .. "0 a. This additional signal (90° phase-offset) and the incremental encoding inputs available in the KRAL electronic unit can be used to determine the direction of flow and to take it into consideration when calculating the total values. 0..that can also cause a reversal of the direction of flow ..require the use of a second sensor (flow direction sensor)...... the current density of the flowing fluid can be calculated from this measured value by means of a density table stored in the evaluation electronic unit.> o .

(/) IFig. Dispose of packing material in accordance with the locally appicable regulations... > Only store volumeters with screw plugs. > Use intact and correctly dimensioned hoisting equipment. > Protect the volumeters against corrosion during long standstills. (/) "0 "0 C Raising volumeters +-' . On delive".. unpack the KRAL volumeter and check for damage during transportation. Safety information for storage and preservation CAUTION! Volumeters can corrode If stored Improperly and dUling longer standstills. Screw the eye bolts into two opposing holes at the casing. Prerequisites for volumeters from Size 100 on: Sufficiently dimensioned lifting equipment o The used hoisting equipment conforms to the local regulations and regulations for the prevention of accidents o WARNINGI Risk of inlU".. > Observe the chapters "Storage" and "Preserving the volumeter". o (/) ~ Q) 0) ~ o +-' C t ~ o C 0. > Do not stand under raised loads. 3. andlor damage to equipment should the volumeter fall... 2. Raising volumeters from Size 100 on Volumeters up to Size 68 can be transported by hand without any further devices. Raise the volumeter. Hang the slinging device into the eyebolts. 1 Note: ~ . Report damage during transportation immediately to the manufacturer. 3. 4.Unpacking and checking the state of delivery Unpacking and checking the state of delivery 1. Hang the crane hook into the slinging device. 4. 010 14en Edition 06/2007 13 . Store the supplied sensors with the union nuts for the installation. o (/) ~ 0. > Attach the hoisting equipment in accordance with Fig. 1. 1. 2.

In addition. the volumeter will have to be preserved.. Pour non-corrosive. 3.. (/) ~ 0> Preserving the volumeter 1. >... 4. >.. 14 010 14en Edition 06/2007 . Disposing of the volumeter Aids: o Solvents or industrial cleaners suitable fo r the pumped medium 1. The preservative applied at the factory will protect the volumeter for up to six weeks. Close a connection of the volumeter with a cover plate. which has a preservative effect. a special anticorrosive agent is sprayed onto the interior of the devices before being dispatched. 3. if it is stored in a dry and clean location. 2. In order to remove the residual oil. Drain the volumeter. If storage over longer periods and in adverse storage conditions is necessary. etc. the extemal components of the volumeter are preserved with a single-coat PU-based two-component paint. Remove the second cover plate. Clean residues of the pumped medium from the individual parts. 2. Mer about 6 months storage check the oil level in the volumeter and if necessary top up oil.Before disposing of the volumeter collect the discharging pumped medium and oil or grease and dispose of in accordance with the locally applicable regulations. will noticeably reduce the possible storage time. Separate sealing elements made of elastomer from the volumeter and dispose of them in the residual waste. Storage During the test run. "'0 "'0 ~ Q) o . Unless otherwise specified. resin-free oil until the oil has reached the flange and the air bubbles stop rising. rinse the volumeter with the pumped medium. 2. I- "- 4. o t:: c ~ o c (/) 0. 4. Place the volumeter vertically.Observe the local regulations on disposal.. such as high humidity. Remove one of the cover plates.Wear protective clothing during all the work on the volumeter. Turn the measuring unit slowly in the process. Recycle cast-iron and steel parts. Adverse ambient conditions. ~ Removing the preservative Aids: o Vessel to collect the preservative oil 1.Before disposing of the volumeter neutralize the residues of the pumped medium in the volumeter... Close the upper connection with a cover plate. salty air. the internal components of the volumeter are wetted with test oil. collecting the preservative oil in a suitable vessel. Disassemble the volumeter. Safety information for disposal WARNING! Danger of poisoning and damage to the enVironment through pumped medium or oil! >. 3. >.o c (/) ~ Storage (/) 0.

the volumeter must be protected by a startup filter to stop particles of dust getting inside. Note: Both directions of flow are possible. Do not take apart the volumeter. Ensure cleanliness and take care during installation and removal... Removal: Screw in the screw plugs again after the sensors have been removed.Safety instructions for installation and removal Safety instructions for installation and removal The following safety instructIons must be observed: o 1:5 Q) () c o KRAL volumeters are precision measuring devices. • Installation: Only remove the screw plugs in order to insert the sensors. 1 Mesh width of the start-up filter Pipe thread connection The screw-in length of the piping may not exceed the threaded length of the volumeter. Put the protective caps on the dry sleeves during removal. c o ctI ctI en Tab. Page 5. 2. Fig. Do not remove the protective caps from the dry sleeves during installation. Flanged connection The volumeter connections to the piping system must be stress-free. The mesh width of the start-up filter is relevant to the size of the volumeter. o c c "0 C E Q) . as otherwise there is no guarantee that the volumeter will operate safely. see Fig. The preferred direction of flow is indicated on the rating plate by means of a bright arrow. > o c ctI ctI Installation KRAL volumeters can be operated in any installation position. 1 Correct flange connection 010 14en Edition 06/2007 15 .. Start-up filter If the piping system has to be flushed out with the volumeter. since the flow cross·section is narrowed and internal components can be damaged. The following drawings show how a flange is connected stressfree to the volumeter.

>. 2 Incorrect flange connections Installing the volumeter CAUTION! Damage to the volumeter through Impurities In the piping system. 16 010 14en Edition 06/2007 .. Page 15..Ensure that the volumeter mounting on the piping system is free of mechanical stress. CAUTION! Damage to volumeter when the pipe threading IS screwed In too far. Remove the protective covers and store them. 3. Ensure that the dry sleeves and screw plugs remain accessible.Ensure that a pressure relief valve or bypass of the volumeter is installed.Ensure when welding that welding beads and abrasive dust cannot get into the piping system and the volumeter. 2. see "Start-up filter". >..Observe the thread length of the volumeter.Observe the mesh width of the start-up filter. Take the preferred direction of flow into consideration. >. ). >.During welding work attach cover piates in front of the connecting flanges. Use standard cutting ring screwed connections. >. Under no circumstances may water or superheated steam be used! >. c E (]) > o 1 Linear offset 2 Vertical offset 3 Angular offset o Fig. >..Ensure that the piping system has been cleaned carefully. >.o +-' C Installation U C C (]) U o "0 C ~ ~ ~ 1 ~ ! ..Before operating the volumeter rinse the piping system via the bypass. 1. Install the volumeter stress-free in the circular pipeline.

Ensure that the volumeter is not under pressure. ~ 1.. Ensure that the supply voltage is correct. 5. > o IZ1 . Dismantle the volumeter.. 010 14en Edition 06/2007 17 . E CD . DANGER! Risk of inJulY th rough emitted hot.. Observe the sections "Storage" and "Preserving the volumeter" on the subject of storing the volumeter. 4. Removing the volumeter Prerequisite: o Plant switched off ~ o c ~ ( /) C o I Aids: Vessels for leaking pumped fluid OANGER! Danger of hfe through electric shock. ~ ~ Ensure that the power supply is de·energized.Electrical connection Electrical connection Safety Instructions for electrical Installation The following safety instructions must be observed during the electrical instaliation: o t5 c U C c CD o ~ C o The following qualifications are required for the electncal connection: • Practical electrotechnical training Knowledge of the safety guidelines at the workplace Knowledge of the electrotechnical safety guidelines "'0 ~ o o The connecting lines of the sensor connections are to be shielded and laid separately from the supply and measunng lines. Apply the protective covers.. 2. Observe the operating instructions for the sensors and electronic equipment. In case of operation at higher temperatures wait until the device has cooled down to the ambient temperature. The volumeter may only be separated from the power supply by authorized electrical personnel. pOisonous or corrosive pumped flUId when removing the volumeter ~ ~ Observe the safety regulations for handling dangerous liquids. 3. Drain the closed circular pipeline or dive rt the fuel via the bypass.

Check the installation and installation position of the sensers. Ensure that the plant is de-energized. ~ ~ Before you start it.1 bar. ~ Ensure that the pressure at the volumeter outlet> 0. ~ Switch on the system. Check the connections of the sensors. Deaerate the piping system. > Before commissioning the volumeter. ~ Ensure that the fluid does not flow freely out of the volumeter. 3. Check the numbering of the flow sensors and of the flow direction sensors. Check the assignment of the sensors to the volumeter. Electrical installation ~ ~ ~ Power supply 1. Check that the wiring of the power supply at the termination panel is firm ." the piping system. CAUTION! Measuring error through gas inclusion. Check the connection of the power supply to the piant. Page 6 o Volumeter connection to the piping system is free of stress o Piping system contains no pollutants or particles of dirt o Piping system deaerated o Any shut-off devices in the supply and discharge lines opened o CAUTION! Measuring error when pressure drops below the minimum pressure at the outlet. 18 010 14en Edition 0612007 . Check the pipe threading/flange and the temperature sensers for leaks under operating pressure. Commissioning Prerequisite: The ambient conditions correspond to the operating data. Check the connection of the power supply in the electronic unit. see 'Technical data". 4. observe these operating instructions. 2. make sure that the volumeter is filled.o +-' C Function test ~ Function test Q) 8- 0' Check Installation Procedure ~ ~ ~ Check the installation position of the volumeter with regard to the direction of flow. The volumeter measures when the flow sensor generates a signal.

see "Commissioning". Under the requirements menlioned above. pressure pulsations .. gummy or crystallized flUid in the volumeter. ) cause high pressure differences and may damage the measuring unit. CAUTION! Damage to device through hard.. No further measures are required to switch off. rapid switch-off. 1 Limit values Switching off the volumeter When the flow through the volumeter is stopped. Switch on the system. Resuming volurneter operation o Prerequisite: The requirements for commissioning are met. 2. 010 14en Edition 06/2007 19 . the generation of the signal stops automatically. Tab. 1. • Pressure drop of the volumeter must not exceed the values stated in the technical documentation (load rating diagram) ."structions must be observed· 'Q) o c ctl o c. the volumeter is ready for operation at any time. The flow sensor can be removed at any time from the dry sleeve. Disassemble and clean the volumeter before resuming operation .g. o Strong variations of the flow rate (e. Page 18. • The limit values of the following table must not be exceeded at any time.or> Heat up the fluid during standstill by means of a heating system.Switching off the volumeter Switching off the volurneter Safety Instructions for switching off the volumeter The following ..

o o ObselVe the sensor operating instructions when replacing the sensor. In order to maintain the high degree of precision. result in excessive wear. Q) () Recalibration of the volurneters KRAL volumeters are fundamentally maintenance-free. c ('Ij ~ General information about mounting instructions The following information is to be observed Any mounting work may only be carried out by qualified personnel. 1 Table of tightening torques 20 010 14en Edifion 06/2007 . are also subject to a certain wear as time passes. Changes in the cross~section due to deposits or corrosive/abrasive wear at the elements coming into contact with the flow are further factors that can result in a change to the characteristics. Please also take our information about OKD and facto!). o The volumeter has to be recalibrated after the measuring casing or the rolling bearing has been replaced.Q) Recalibration of the volumeters c ('Ij c .. as mechanical meters. The guarantee for the KRAL volumeter expires if the red sealing point is damaged... However... Conditions lying clearly above the rated flow rate can. Recalibration and maintenance of your KRAL volumeter ensures its measuring precison and technical functionality. calibration into account. Tightening torques Tab. despite the robust design volumeters. however. KRAL recommends car!). The results of the recalibration reveal the wear starting at the measuring unit. Further specifications can be made in your quality management system.ing out the first recalibration after about one year of operation in order to ensure the technical functionality. The interval at which recalibration is actually required depends strongly on the operating conditions of the device. rolling bearings and rotor may only be carried out in the facto!). o Do not twist the d!)' sleeve during the mounting work. Under favorable conditions no significant change in the characteristics could be established even after years of use in many cases. o Replacement of the measuring unit consisting of the set of screws..

817.1 672.2 / 81 +.1 672.5. .2 Deep-groove ball bearing 817.O-ring 2 units if 2nd sensor hole exists Required mounting tools Allen key 010 t 4en Edition 0612007 21 .5" \fj __ ~ ..2 ".1 Distance sleeve Spacer 597.UI I ~ ~ -- .1 ! 1 ! f eQ-L 672.3 Deep-groove ball bearing 817.1 915.1 Deep-groove ball bearing 817.1 Screw plug Measuring screw large Measuring screw small O-ring 817.Mounting instructions OMG 13 Q) U C Mounting instructions OMG 13 General drawing c ctl Q) +-' C 128 039 597. 817.r I I .1 062 / ctl ~ ~ .1 Socket screws 080..1 080 .4 / ri \ 739.~ ~ -- / ()~<~ -: I 817 .3 \ 739. 1 259 Fig. t 039 062 Exploded view OMG 13 672.2 739.1 Bearing cover 128 Measuring casing 259 Pole wheel 739. ~ I ' .4 Deep-groove ball bearing 915.

22 010 14en Edition 06/2007 . c:J C1 j 3. ensuring that it is positioned correctly. ! 2. pull the set of screws together with the distance sleeve 039 out of the measuring casing 128.. Insert the O-ring 739.4 onto the large and small measuring screws.from the bearing cover . Tighten the socket screws 915.4 from the large and small measuring screws.5. Remove the O-ring 739.5. Caution: Press on only over the inner ring! Press the pole wheel onto the large measuring screw.3 and 817. .1 into the measuring casing. Lay the bearing cover 080.1.Q) () Mounting instructions OMG 13 c C1l c Removing seals and bearings Prerequisites: o Volumeter removed from plant o Completion consisting of socket screws and flanges or pipe threaded flanges and seals removed o Sensor inserts removed n CJ Q) +-' C ~ C1l o~ 1. Pull the pole wheel 259. ball bearings 817.1. n 4.1.. Take off the spacer 062 and O-ring 739.1 . Remove the socket screws 915. Clean all the parts using a suitable detergent. Press the ball bearings 817.1.1 + 817. .into the bearing cover 080. Lay on the spacer 062.2. slide the distance sleeve 039 flush into the hole of the small measuring screw 672.1 onto the measuring casing. c:::J C1 1.3 and 817. Slide the set of screw into the measuring casing 128. 4..1 + 817. take off the bearing cover 080.. Installing seals and bearings Prerequisites: o Replacement parts available 5. i 2.2 + 817..". ensuring that the cylinder pins in the measuring casing fit into the corresponding holes.2 + 817. -===3. Insert the O-ring 739.

2 070 . .1 259 056 Fig ...1 064..2 128 259 597.2 Measuring screw large Measuring screw small 869.Mounting instructions OMG 20/32 Mounting instructions OMG 20/32 General drawing Q) () C c CO Q) +-' C 915.1 739. does not exist at OMG 20 Required mounting lools ~ Allen key <~ Straight gnps for shaH " 7Ir I Puiling-off deVice Hexagon socket torque wrench 010 14en Edition 06/2007 23 .. 869.2 .1 672.4 Ci rclip 904.. ~ ~ 817 ...~ g 070.3 915 .. _ _ 672.a-ring 817..2 672..1 ~ CO 6 ..2 Circlip 869.4 817 .1 ~ V Q ". a\o .1.7 915 ..1 O'ring 739..1 o® .4 Deep-groove ball bearing Deep-groove ball bearing Deep-groove ball bearing Deep-groove ball bearing 2 units if 2nd sensor hole exists .2 070.5" 739..1 817. .5. .1 ~ 064.2 cil #13'/// ~ ~ '~ ~69?2 '¥' 817.2 Socket screws 915..2 Lock washer 915.2 817.1 Lock washer 904. ? IV "l" ~ 915.2 120 039 597.1 Sockel screws 915.3 817...1 070..4 ~~ 739 .1 817.6 Socket screw 915..2 O'ring 739..2 904 .6 904. 064 . 2 039 056 Exploded view OMG 20/32 Distance sleeve Spacer Spacer Spacer End cover End cover Measuring casing Pole wheel Screw plug 672.2 " \.7 Socket screw 064.. .1 739.

6 and 915. Press the ball bearings 817.2 at both ends. Remove the socket screws 915.2 .2. Remove the end covers 070. 5.1 or small 672. Pull the distance sleeve 039 together with the set of screws out of the measuring casin g. socket screws and seals removed o Sensor inserts removed 20. Lay the O-rings 739.1 + 904. Clean all the parts using a suitable detergent.2.1 + 070.1.817.2 and 869. Lay O-ring 739.1 and 915.7 .2 measuring screw respectively. 2. Caution : Press on only over the inner ring! ~ 1 4. ~ Installing seals and bearings Prerequisites: o Replacement parts available 2. 1.5~ into the sensor hole.2.4 respectively from the large and small measuring screw respectively. Screw out the socket screws 915.1 .4 onto the large 672. Pull the ball bearings from the screws using the pulling-off device. 869. and remove them together with the lock washers 904.Q) () Mounting instructions OMG 20/32 c co c Q) Removing seals and bearings +-' ~ co C Prerequisites: o Volumeter removed from plant o Any completion consisting of flanges. Caution: spacer 064. 1.817.2 and spacers 064.1 + 064. 6. Pull the pole wheel 259 from the large measuring screw 672.1 and 070.1 + 739.3 and 817.1 does not exist at OMG 24 010 14en Editi on 061 2007 . 3.2 in' the end covers 070.

~ 10. 1. Tighten the socket screws 915. ensuring that the cylinder pins in the measuring casing fit into the corresponding holes.7 respectively onto the large and small measuring screws respectively and tighten using the torque wrench.7 respectively and grease the thread.2 using the torque wrench. 010 14en Edition 06/2007 25 .2 respectively as well as spacer 064. Slide the set of screws in the measuring casing and the distance sleeve 039 flush into the hole of the small measuring screw 672. ~ 8. 5. Page 20. Mount the socket screw 915. 1. Page 20. casing.1 Q) ~ C ~ C ~ 7. tighten the socket screws 915. 3.2 respectively onto the socket screw 915. 1.1 and 904. Place the end cover 070. Tightening torque seeTab.1 064.6 and 915.2 on the measuring 4.1 onto the measuring casing. Pull the NORD-LOCK wedge lock washer 904. wedge lock washer is positioned correctly (wedge surtace to wedge surtace)! 6. Page 20. Slide the spacer 056 onto the large measuring screw. respectively on the floating bearing end. Lay the end cover 070.1 does not exist at OMG20.2. Press the pole wheel 259 on.1 using the torque wrench. Caution : Spacer 064. I 9. Tightening torque seeTab.Mounting instructions OMG 20/32 Q) U C f1Il .6 and 915. Tightening torque seeTab.

6 Support ring screws screws screw screw 2 units il 2nd sensor hole exists 26 010 14en Edition 0612007 .1 Spacer 064.1 Fig.2 Circlip 869.1 Measuring screw large 672.2 739.2 : i / i OS6 91S. \ 870 .2 Socket 868.2 Bearing ccver 128 Measuring casing 259 Pole wheel 597.U.2 Angula r-ccntact ball bearings 915.2 Lock washer 818.597....2 \ .1 Deep-groove ball bearing 869.6 Socket 868.1 Exploded view OMG 52168 739.1 Screw plug 597.2 Support ring 915. \ ~r i 9q I.2 i 915 .4 Support ring 915.1 Lock washer 818.2 Spacer 080.1 080. 739.2 • 6 . .2 O-nng 739.7 '\ II @~ q . .1 Socket 868.1 B70 .5-0·ring 817..4 672. 915.4 " 817.6 .'. ~ ~ \ \ '0 '0 n9 .~68.2 Measuring screw small 817.6 818. 3 yo 9~ ~~ - 818.2 128 . \ ' 868.7 Socket 868. I 064. .7:1Il.2 Deep-groove ball bearing 904.~ 868..1 Bearing cover 080.1 a.2 Screw plug 672.1 Angular-contact ball beanngs 904.2 .if:!'TJ~ ( 672.6 ' 904.1 f 6~~~ 869 . A 904. A\ ~ I l i 868.5 Support ring 915.1 Circlip 870.. .CI1 ~ Q) c c C Q) () Mounting instructions OMG 52/68 CI1 Mounting instructions OMG 52/68 General drawing 597.1 O-nng 739. ( ! .1 91S.4 Circlip 870.2 '. .} 259 064.1 I 869.2 ' 817.2 ~.2 Circlip Spacer 056 064.2 g 080.2 818.S" I ! I .1 739.2 \.

.5-. 010 14en Edition 06/2007 27 . 2. C Q) c C C'Cl ~ Allen key Plastic hammer '~ ~~ Straight gnps for shaft Hexagon socket torque wrench / I C'Cl ::2: Bent gnps for hole Pulling-off deVice Removing seals and bearings Prerequisites o Volumeter removed from the plant o Completion consisting of socket screws and flanges or pipe threaded flanges and seals removed o Sensor inserts removed i 3.2.Mounting instructions OMG 52/68 Required mounting tools Q) U .. Use light blows of a soft hammer to drive the set of screws together with the bearing cover OBO.6. Pull the set of screws together with the bearing cover OBO. 4. take off the bearing cover OBO.. Remove the O-rings 739.1 + 870. Remove the circlips 870.1 + 915.1 out of the measuring casing...2 out of the recesses in the bearing cover. Remove the socket screws 915. . 1.739. screw out the socket screw 915.2 + 739.2 at both ends.1 out of the measuring casing 12B. .1.

u Q) Mounting instructions OMG 52/6B Q) c co c Installing seals and bearings Prerequisites: ~ c co o Replacement parts available 5.2 and 817. bearings on in X-layout.4 and support engs 868.2 onto the socket screw 915. 2.3 onto the large 672.1 + 81 8. Use the pulling-off device to pull the pole wheel 259 and bearing cover 080. Observe order and mounting direction.2 measuring screws respectively.2 . 1 + 080.2 + 868. Remove the spacer 056.2 and spacer 064. 9.2 onto the large or small measuring screw respectively.7 at the small measuring screw 672. 4. 1.2.2 into the bearing cover 080.81 3. Insert the O-ring 739.1 + 870.1 from the set of screws.1. 1 + 739. = = 7.1 + 868.5.2 + 869. Clean all the parts using a suitable detergent. 28 010 14en Edition 06/2007 .1 and spacer 064. 1.4 from the large and small measuring screws. Remove the lock washer 904. Slide the circlips 870.7 and grease the thread. Caution : Press the angular-contact ball 8.into the sensor hole beaeng.2 and support rings 868. Press on only over the inner ring! . Screw out the socket screw 915. Remove circiips 869. Pull the bearings from the screws using the pulling-off device. Press the ball bearings 818. ~ 6.1 and small 672.1 + 817. Pull the NORD-LOCK wedge lock ':'asher 904.

lighten the socket screw 915. Press the pole wheel 259 on. . consisting of set of screws.2 + 869. lighten the socket screws 915. . bearings and rotor. . wedge lock washer is positioned correctly (wedge surface to wedge surface)! 10.Mounting instructions OMG 52/68 wedge lock washer Is positioned correctly (wedge surface to wedge surface). 7.1 and spacer 064. Pull the NORD·LOCK wedge lock washer 904. 6. Page 20.4 on the floating bearing end. 8. see Mounting steps 4 and 5! Q) U C c C'Cl . Slide the spacer 056 onto the large measuring screw. 1. 1.6 on the large measuring screw using the torque wrench.1 . into the measuring casing 128. lightening torque seeTab. Page 20. 010 14en Edition 06/2007 29 ..7 with mounted wedge lock washer and spacer onto the small measuring screw 672. Slide the large and small measuring screw into the bearing cover 080. Mount the socket screw 915. tighten the socket screws 915.1 onto the socket screw 915.2. 11. Tightening torque seeTab..1 + 870. Mount the circlips 870. support rings 868...2 and tighten using the torque wrench. 12.2 + 868.1 with premounted measuring unit.2.4 and circlips 869. ~ C C'Cl Q) 5. Caullon: Ensure that the NORD·LOCK ) 13. Slide the bearing cover 080. 9..1. Place on the bearing cover 080.2.6 and grease the thread.

O-ring 817.1 '889.2 868.f ~ ~9 .1 Screw plug 597...1 Spacer 064.2 126 739.1 915.1 Bearing cover 080..2 .4 Circlip 870.0 (.4 868.2 Bearing cover Measuring casing Pole wheel 597.3 Deep-groove ball bearing 904.2 Screw plug 672.6 Support ring Socket screws Socket screws Socket screw 915.2 Support ring 915.2 Spacer 080.1 Support ring 915.1 597.2 O-ring 739.1 Measuring screw large 128 259 739.1 821.4 Support ring 869.5 H I915. o l!) • .1 1\\"99 .2 Fou r-point contact bearings 915.".2 \p 868.2 817.Q) () Mounting instructions OMG 100/140 ctl ~ Q) c ctl c Mounting instructions OMG 1001140 General drawing c 597.1 821.1 Measuring screw small O·ring 868.1 - ~o <\ ~ --.2 739.l.4 041 056~ Exploded view OMG 100/140 Sleeve Spacer 672.5.1 Fig..2 868. 080 .2 • \ 064.1 Deep-groove ball bearing 817. 868.2 .2 Circlip 869.7 Soclket screw 2 units if 2nd sensor hole exists OMG 140: replaced by spare part 041 30 010 14en Edition 06/2007 ..1 870.2 I .1 080."""""""'" oe~ 869.2 ' A .3 8702 821.2 821... <1 .1 259 ' 056 064.1 Circlip 870.7 904. 868. 739. b .1 915. b \.2 672.2 ! 739.1 Four-point contact bearings 904.1 868.J 672 .6 904 .2 Circlip Lock washer Lock washer 064.4 817.2 " 915.qQ ~ .

2.1 out of the measuring casing . .. 1. Use light blows of a soh hammer to drive the set of screws together with the bearing cover 080.5".. 2. screw out the socket screw 915. Remove the O-rings 739.1.1 out of the measuring casing 128.2 out of the recesses in the bearing cover.1 + 915. take off the bearing cover 080.1 + 870.2 + 739.. 739.Mounting instructions OMG 100/140 Q) U C Required mounting tools c CO .. C Q) ~ Allen key '~ Straight gnps for shaft ? " I CO :2: Bent gnps for hole Pulling-off device Plastic hammer Hexagon socket torque wrench Removing seals and bearings Prerequisites: o Volumeter removed from the plant o Completion consisting of socket screws and flanges or pipe threaded flanges and seals removed o Sensor inserts removed 3. 010 14en Edition 06/2007 31 . Remove the socket screws 915.2 at both ends. Remove the circlips 870. ! 4.6. Pull the set of screws together ~ith the bearing cover 080..

2 into the bearing cover 080.7 and grease the thread.3 onto the large 672.1 + 080. 32 010 14en Edilion 06/2007 .1 + 821.2 + 868.1.4 from Ihe large and small measuring screws.2 onto the large or small measuring screw respectively. Use the pulling-off device to pull the pole wheel 259 and bearing cover 080. Pull the NORD-LOCK wedge lock washer 904. IDII .1 and small 672. 3.7 at the small measuring screw 672. Press the ball bearings 821. 2.1 from the set of screws.2 and support rings 868. 1 + 739.2.2 measuring screws respectively.1 and spacer 064.into the sensor hole bearing.2 .(l) c c c (l) () Mounting instructions OMG 100/140 ~ Installing seals and bearings Prerequisites: o Replacement parts available ~ ~ 5. Clean all the parts using a suitable detergent.2 and 817. Remove the lock washer 904. Remove the spacer 056or sleeve 041 respectively. Caution: 821.1 + 870.1 + 817. Caution: Press on only over the inner ring! 8. Insert the 0ring 739.2 and spacer 064. support nngs 868.5. Pull the bearings from the screws uSing the pulling-off device. Slide the circlips 870. 7. 4. 6. Observe order and mounting direction .1 + 868.2 onto the socket screw 915. 1.2 are four-point contact bearings! Avoid damage to the threads! 9. Screw out the socket screw 915.1 + 821.

8.1.1 and spacer 064. Slide the bearing cover 080. Tighten the socket screw 915. see Mounting steps 4 and 51 Q) () ('(j C C Q) C ('(j 2 5. grease the thread. . OMG 140: Slide the sleeve 041 onto the large measuring screw. circlips 869. 1.6 on the large measuring screw using the torque wrench.4 on the floating bearing end.1 + 870. 11. 1. Press the pole wheel 259 on. Slide the large and small measuring screw into the bearing cover 080. tighten the socket screws 915. Tightening torque seeTab. I ::: 7.7 with mounted wedge lock washer and spacer onto the small measuring screw 672. Mount the circlips 870.2. 010 14en Edition 06/2007 33 .Mounting instructions OMG 100/140 Caution: Ensure that the NORD·LOCK wedge lock washer is positioned correctly (wedge surface to wedge surface). 13. 12. 6. . Mount the socket screw 915.2. Page 20.2. Tightening torque seeTab. wedge lock washer is positioned correctly (wedge surface to wedge surface)! 10. consisting of set of screws.2 and tighten using the torque wrench. . into the measuring casing 128. lighten the socket screws 915.6. OMG 100: Slide the spacer 056.1 with premounted measuring unit. 9. bearings and rotor.1 onto the socket screw 915. Place on the bearing cover 080.1.onto the large measuring screw. Pull the NORD· LOCK wedge lock washer 904.2 + 869. Page 20.

6.23 3.6.17. > Increase the system pressure.22. Replace the seal.22.22.15.. 21. Use the start-up filter.0 I- e :::J o o Volumeter leaks No flow Negative flow rate Volumeter does not generate a pulse Pressure loss too high . 18.24. contact KRAL for information. The following table lists the symptoms of a fault. Flow sensor not connected correctly.4.10. 16.4. observing the operating instructions of the sensor. 6 7 8 9 Flow sensor defective Dry sleeve not adjusted correctly Dry sleeve destroyed Fluid lubricates too little Inlet pressure too low Viscosity of the fluid too high Viscosity of the fluid too low Flow rate too low > Check the function of the flow sensor. the possible causes and measures for elimination . Increase the temperature while observing the permissible temperature range. Possible faults Fault Cause I Elimination 1.12. Measured values not plausible o o o o 3.5. > Increase the flow rate .9. 5.20. Increase the supply line pressure.13. Check the chemical resistance of the seal.or - > Use a suitable volumeter size . > Use the OMK series. 17. observing the operating instructions of the sensor.14. observing the operating instructions of the electronic equipment.22. > Set the dry sleeve correctly.or~ Use linearization.9. ~ Check the supply voltage for the flow sensor.24. 10 11 12 13 > > > > Replace dry sleeve. Disassemble the volumeter and clean it. 19.or - > Use a suitable volumeter size.2.23 Troubleshooting No. 1 2 3 4 5 Cause Remedy Seal pretension too low Seal damaged Foreign bedies in the fluid andlor volumeter Flow sensor not positioned correctly > > > > > > Pretension the screws. 20. 14 Flow rate too high > Reduce the flow rate .19 .5. observing the operating instructions of the sensor. observing the operating instructions of the sensor. 15 16 Ainocks Outgassing > Deaerate the system and check for leaks.7. 34 010 14en Edition 0612007 .7.10. Position the sensor correctly. Use the OMK series.25.c (/) (J) C 0> Possible faults o o Faults can have different causes.8 3.8.25 11. > Check the connection of the flow sensor. > Reduce the temperature.

etc.). Check whether the fluid flows in the plant (pump in operation. 20 21 22 Filling amount too low Strongly deviating operating data Wear at the measuring unit and bearing Sluggishness through deposits Flow impaired at the system end of the electronic e I- 23 24 > > > > > > > > > Use a suitable volumeter size. Use a suitable volumeter. Filter out the abrasive matenals. 25 Volumeter switched to bypass > Switch the volumeter to through-flow. damper. Carry out changes to the system . Ensure a continuous flow rate by taking suitable measures (use of a different pump. etc. or > Smoothen the indication. 010 t4en Edition 06/2007 35 .s::: (]) ~ o en . slide valve opened.Troubleshooting 0> C Cause Pulsations too high Back pressu re too low Flow rate fluctuations too high . > Check whether shut-off devices before and after the volumeter are opened.) . Disassemble the volumeter and clean it carefully. valve. Remedy No. 17 18 19 (5 > > > > Use another feed pump. while observing the operating instructions equipment. Use a suitable volumeter type. Adapt the operating data to the volumeter.. Increase the back pressure. Renew the measunng unit.0 . Renew the bearing .

.2 ' 817.J -~ 128 039 . 739 . .1 259 ! _# ~ / 672.1 I . 0 l--- .>< "0 C Q) General drawings General drawings « Q.1 : -~ - / 817.2' 739.697.3 ' 739. --- .4 107.. 916 .4 672 .5" l» ~ -w '~ I i " / 81. 2 Fig_ 1 Exploded view OMG 13 36 010 14en Edition 0612007 .1 080. f 915.1 739.-I ~ -- I / Q .! ~l --·~ -----I-- / / I I I - 817.5 .3 -. . Q..1 i I : ~ -. 107 .1' \..

General drawings ..J..------------- 01014e n Edition 0612007 " 37 . 0....6.6 04 .2 " ~ ~O~ .32.2 \ 612.2 1.1 01 139..2 128 13. :tl~b 915.9.4 I J 139. 2 _ . ! '9 f'" (l ~~~.91.1 039 / 010 . - o 64.! I .4' 116.2 056 ::-_ __ Fig. AY' ' " 672 1 ' i! ~(." ' .2 817. 5 91.1 269 • EXr>oded view 0~M~G~2~0-=-.7 915.1 .1' 139..x '0 C ()) 115.3 064.4' « 0.QI 817 1 1 ~.3' 916.3' b 915. 915.2 ' 0" J"': •••• " I@ -. ..I ~04.. .2' 139.2 . I 811.5" 6 .«p ' 9 81 ' 86: .1 I!J / ' / .

4 107.6 904 .1 080.X C Q) General drawings « 0..2 j 739 .3 739 .4 '." 915 .4 107. 3 Exploded view OMG 52 68 38 Ol014e n Edillon 06/2007 " . \\et\l""{868 6 . B1B.lJ.2 904. .064. ' .~9 C) ~m~6B. '" n .1 739 .1 . 868.2 870 . \ ' . 8 7 0. • 915..2 ..---"~' o~:~ 869.S"' I I 0642 818. 915.1 Fig. 817 2 ' .4 672 2 .1 259°56 8181818 ."0 . 0.r 61 b ~ (j fIif'!T/"" • 869.2 .1 _____ .1 ..3 597.~~P9 .2 r ~ ~@) ~ 915.. 868 6 6721 • .1 ' .. 915.2 · '.7 ~ .2 597.2 ' . 739.1" 9Hi.

4 107. 868.1 597 .2 ~ 9~ ~ «> .7 90~.9 9 869.140 010 14en Edillon 06/2007 .1' 915.3 739.General drawings . 4 Exploded view OMG 100 . 1 .4 672 ..2 ' 821 . 8'8 1 870.' 915. £ h ..1 ' . l.6" I 915. 0. 39 .2 128 739.2 8683 ' 8702 821 2 . 107.6 904 .1 080.1 L ~ 0 C) ..3 597.x "0 C Q) 739. 259 056 0641 915.4 « 0.~4.2' 915.4 817.1 I . Fig.2 739.® WI\J \» ' 0 ~(j'" -G b b ~~ ~ I 672.1 _~ o '\ e 869.

1 868.1 597.4 868. Q.3 915.2 739.2 904.7 Pall Deep-groove ball bearing Deep-groove ball bearing Deep-groove ball bearing Deep-groove ball bearing Angular-contact ball bearings Angular-contact ball bearings Four-point contact bearings Four-point contact bearings Support ring Support ring Support ring Support ring Support ring Support ring Circlip Circlip Circlip Circlip Lock washer 062 064.6 869.2* 128 259 597.1 818.1 904.2 672.4 915.6 915.1115.4 818.1 821.1 070.1 080.2 080. 817.1 870.4* Lock washer Socket screws Socket screws Socket screws Socket screws Socket screws Socket screws Socket screws Socket screw Socket screw 739.5 Parts for pipe threading or flange connection alternatively 2 units if 2nd sensor hole exists for OMG 140: replaced by spare part 041 does not exist at OMG 20 Tab.2 868.2 868.5 868. 039 041 056 056~ « Q.1 817.4915.4 870.1 739. 1 Spare part numbers 40 010 14en Edition 0612007 .3915.>< "'0 C Q) Spare parts Spare parts Spare part no.5 915.3739.2115.2 107.2 739.2 915.2 821. Part Distance sleeve Sleeve Spacer Spacer Spacer Spacer Spacer Spacer End cover Spare part no.3 868.1 672.3 739.1064.2 070.2 817.2 869.1 915.2 915.3 817.4 739.1 064.1'* End cover Bearing cover Bearing cover Pipe threaded flange Pipe threaded flange Flange Flange Measuring casing Pole wheel Screw plug Screw plug Measuring screw large Measuring screw small O-ring O-ring O-ring O-ring O-ring O-ring O-ring 107.

Notes X "0 Notes Q) Q. Q. c « 010 14en Edition 06/2007 41 .

..... 0.-............X 1j Notes ....-...........- C « <D 0.........-...-.. 42 010 14en Edilion 06/2007 ..........

Notes X "'0 C Q) « 0. 010 14en Edition 0612007 43 . 0.

Industrie Nord.at. E-mail: kral@kral.a Fax: +43/5577/88433.Tel. www . Bildgasse 40.at .: +43/55 77 18 6644 .kral. Austria._ _I KRAL KRAL AG. 6890 Lustenau.

.

07 7lCW1 12 Valid as of \'I:rslon PROFIBUS DP V 3.XX (dtvke softwaJ<.04.Level B[][]]~~~~~~ PnUUJe flow Temperature Uquld ReghtnUon Anllysl.+: People for Process Automation r .XX (dl-vicl' softwarr) Endress+Hauser j .04.-) PROFIBUS PA V 3.s Splems Services Componenu Solutions Operating Instructions Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Coriolis Mass Flow Measuring System BA06.3D!IXl/enl08.

DIsplay and operating elements I Page 39 ft.Density adjustment . using the special ' Qulck Setup' menu. . Basic configuration (devIce functions. 2 Endress+ Hauser .Zero point adjustment . for: • PROFIBUS DP • PRO FIBUS PA . the device address. The measuring device can be configured and operated using the local display and using operating programs from various manufacturers... for example display language..). operational safety and the safety icons and symbols used In the document. famHiarize yourself with the safety Instructions so that you can carry out the following working steps quickly and easily.Gas measurement .. The following adjustments can be made separately as necessary: .. You can commission your measuring device quickly and easily.....Device functions . through to the actual installation of the measuring device. . Here you can find Information about such topics as the designated use of the measuring device. units of measures. ... PROFlBUS Interface Commissioning the PROFIBUS interface I Page 79 tf. First of all.Brief operating instructions Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Brief operating instructions These brief operating instructions show you how to configure your measuring device quickly and easily: Safety Instructions I Page 7 ft. measured variables. . installation site. Wiring I Page 24 ft. type of signal. Installation I Page 13 ff.. Operatlng programs I I Page 47 ff. Additional topics of this chapter include: • The specifications of the signal and fieldbus cable • The terminal assignment • The degree of protection . the instlllation conditions that have to be observed (orientation.. automation functIons) Page 58 ft.. Page 50 ff. It enables you to configure Important basic functions using the local display. System Integration and cyclic data transmission Use of the device master files rCSD files) Cyclic datl transmission Page 87 ff.. The display and operating elements of the local display and working with the function matrix are presented here . etc. The "Installation' section contains all of the necessary information for Incoming acceptance. etc. vibrations etc. The ' Wirlng' section describes the electrical connection of the measuring device and the connection of the remote version connecting cable. Hardware settlngs Information about setting the hardware write protection. .

In the · Descrlptloll 0/ Device Function( manual which Is a separate part of these Operating Instructions. for Instance the menu for measuring pulsating now.) . F-Chip -+ Page 118 No te! Always start troubleshooting v. Endress+Hauser 3 . -) Page 118 I -+ Page 53 ff..th the checklist on Page 122 if faults occur after commissioning or during operation. Additional configuration (only PROFlBUS OP) On nexlble-asslgnment boa rds.Proline Promass 83 PROFIB US DP/ PA Brief operating instructions Application-specific commissioning I Page 58 If. The routine takes you directly to the cause of the problem and the appropriate remedial measmes. Customer-speclnc configuration funcUons. ~ Notel For time·savlng commissioning. Data storage I Page 71 The configuraUon of the transmitter can be stored on the Integrated T.. the settings stored In the T-DAT can be transmitted: . appllcation-speclfic QuIck Setups.OAT data storage device.Fo r equivalent measuring points (equIvalent configuration. as Is the functIon matrix itself. In the ·Commlsslonlng" Quick Setup. I Page 44 Complex measu ring operations necessitate additional functions that you can conHgu re as necessary with the aid of device ~ Note! All functions are described In detail. concentration measurement and viscosity. and customize to su it your process pa rameters. -+ Page 53 The F-CHIP module gives the user the added optlon of uslng software packages for diagnosis.In the e\'ent of devlcelboard replacement. you have the option of launching other. the Inputs and outputs can be changed by connguring the cu rrent output and relay contacts. etc.

D=nsity .ulion of display ? No M n matic p..Y~On of \he display . 1: BalcNng II P.l<I@@@ HOM E-POSITION c.. ~~!!ow I I I ~~~~ Density Reference 1 Calcula tad 0""" Un.'. n-..t~1 II CuTenl OU\pll\ ""' II F' '''"'''''' Freq. I ····· f.IQ 'I ~ ..nl$ Demily II Corr. fiow Ten~a l\..Jsa t::ng ~ow " Carrying out another Qtid<.. Coeff.. u ov'. lin 1 E:qI .p.. SQR 1 I --- I y" I • I 0 I Reference te<J"f}. I "~I I ':1 I cons~~ I Ov'~ 5l~u'l I FailSafe mod~i I Ttmecoos~ti I y" • u I "'" Pulse oo'..Brief operating instructions Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP I PA QUICK SETUP "Commissioning" Note! More detailed information onlUnning Quick Setup menus.\o~1 I I II IOpera~on I. I mo:lfj PtJse WI1t. III I Fig. can be found in the "Commissioning" section. mod!! TIme I "''''' "'I I puseva:~u1 I I <nl I """'" . No Conr.ode Ueas.I C~~SS~~ ""'s""" I LanlJUagg Pra-5an.nent5~Ull I End fr~~' I r:.ng " '1 I II I Actual Sel~ngs Selection pre-se lti Oe!r:ery Sellings II II J . ~~ FIx.goxe another system \XIi t ? I Selection IlIJ'f:IUIIyptI FnoqJP . "II 01 Exp.. II CoITYT1<riCil~on I I No I Carrying out the seleclild Qu'ck Sa/up I Quick Setup ' Commissioning ' 4 Endress+Hauser . S etup 7 II Ga s me as .rI C urfl.:::1 I ""gn '~"'I I Co. especially for devices without a local display. Coofr..'ue Q'4 V<lhJe 20 Value F Val ue F I..1 '11 T~~ .pul V.leas .: 1 I LO"~ '"'"'i I ~u1 j H' i. No I I I y" Aulorna tic coofigo..:). 'l L Re f.> Mass ftow U(j l Mass nO'N Volume now I Seladk)n system . --> Page 58 If.gn. mode Fail safe Fails afe nx!Lj Configure another ou' pu\ 7 . outpuI valve I I I I "." " I...l'e ""' I I I 11VoI":\)O'N '11 COIf.":.teas. Vol ..

..........3 Configuring the terminating resistors . .. ...1 Identification ...4. 87 6...6 3.. . .3 Orientation .4 Icons . .. 14 Installation conditions .. . 23 5.. . 57 Quick Setup .3. ... . .. 50 5...1 General notes . . .. .. .. 4... 1 Configuring the write protection .5 6. 9 2... ........ ..3.5 3. .. ..... . 53 5.. 19 Installation . .... . . ..1 PROFIBUS DP cable specifications .4 Current output configuration .. ... .•.... . .. . Connecting the remote vel. 69 6..4.... . 40 5.6 Endress+Hauser 5 . ......2. .. .. .... Return ... ...6.3 Additional display functions .. . ... ....... ............. ... 12 5. 77 Commissioning the PROFIBUS interface ..7 Vibrations ... ... 38 Local display .. 71 Device configuration . .6.. ... .. .1 Connecting connecting cable for sensor / transmitter .... . ..... . ..1 Incoming acceptance . . 14 3. . 13 3...2 5... . 89 4 4. . .... ....... .. .. . 4... • .... . ....... .... .. .2 . 4...... ... . 9 2...... 46 5.4 De. ...•.6 Data backup/transmission .2...1. 57 Function check .... • ... • . .•..... . ........ ..3 Turning the local display . .2 Transport .. .. . 4.3 Nameplate for connections .... .. . . . ...... .. 24 24 24 25 27 28 28 29 29 29 30 31 33 36 37 4.. ...6.4 PROFIBUS PA connection diagram . ....... ...2.. . . ..3.......5 Relay output configuration . .....2 Error message type ....... 10 2...3..4 3 3. .. .. .. 1 5.. 47 5.... .1 HeldCare .6 Inlet and outlet runs . 19 3..... . .1 .... ... 79 6. 13 Incoming acceptance.. . . 4... ... 19 3... . . . .. .....4 Heating ... 54 PROFIBUS PA hardware settings .....2 PROFIBUS PA cable specifications ..... 21 3.... Degree of protection .... ..2 Mounting location .... 1. .....3 6.. .. . . .. 23 Post-installation check .. • .2 Operating program "ToF Tool ... .. ..•. ... .... . ..3 Commissioning .....3.... . .. .•.•..2..... .... .. ..... . .1 Turning the transmitter housing .ce address .2 Transmitter cOlUlection ..3 Operating program "SIMATIC PDM" (Siemens) .. .. . . 58 6. ... • ... 4... ... 46 5. .... 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PAsystem integration . .2 Installing the wall-mount housing ..... ....2 Enabling the programming mode .. . .. •...8 Umiting flow ...... .5 Safety instructions .. ...2.....3... ...... ...5.. 12 Registered trademarks . . .. .... .. .... . ....... ...... .3. . .....5 ....1 Type of enor ...•.. ..3. ... . 52 5. ..... • ... ... . . . ..... • . • . ...2.ce master file (GSD file) ....1.. 55 5. 60 6.... .... 1.... .. .. .1 Dimensions .. .1 1. 13 3. .. .. Operational safety .... .. 40 5.. .. .2 .. ..1 Concentration measurement ... 38 Quick operation guide ..... . . .... . ... .. II Certificates and approvals ........ . . ... ... 4..3 Quick Setup "Batching" .. ......5 Controlling the batching processes using tile local display ..2 Nameplate of the sensor ..•. .2 Cable specification for cOlmecting cable .. .2 6.1 Nameplate of the transmitter . • ... ..... ....... . .. .. Connecting the measuring unit ..... ... .... .... ..2 Operation . .... .. ..... 14 3... . 43 Blief operating instructions on the function ma trix ... . .......ion ... . 48 PROFIBUS DP hardware settings .. .. 4. .... . ..... ....1. .... 87 6... ... . . ... ... .•... ...... ..7..6. . . . 56 2 2. 47 5......... 39 5. . .. .. .......... .. 39 5. .3 5. . 16 3.3 Shielding and grounding .. .3.... . .... 7 7 7 8 8 5 5.. .3. .. .. .. . .... . . . . • .2 . .. . . ... . .... .. Post-<:onnection check .3. ..2...•. . .3..4 1. • .... . ..3 Storage ....... 20 3. .. . .... . . .5. .. 47 5... ....3 PROFIBUS DP connection diagram .4. .. . . ..1... . . . .. . .. 1 Terminal assignment .. . . ..... .... ....1 Display and operating elements . .• ..... . .......... . ... .• . . .....5 Thermal insulation .. ...... . 58 6...2 Display (operating mode) . ..Proline Promass 83 PROFIB US DP/PA Table of contents Table of contents 1 1.. .... . . .... ...2..1.. . . . .5.. . ......2 Advanced diagnostic functions ....... 50 5.......ce description files for operating programs . .. 1 Quick Setup "Commissioning" ..•.. .. 46 Operating options . ........ . 18 3..1 Wiring PROFIBUS cable specifications ..2....... ... ...... .2... ......5. . .. ...... ...2 6. . ... 55 5... .. . .. . .....2 Selecting the GSD file in the measuring device .. ..... .... ..... ........5 Quick Setup "Communication" ....7 3. .3. Installation. ... . ... .... .4 Quick Setup "Gas Measuremenr' .... . .2 PROFIBUS PA commissioning .3. .. .1.1 De\.. 67 6.....2 Configuring the de. . .6. .... 47 5. . ..3 2... ... . • .. . . .. .. .5 4....Fieldtool Package" . .. 20 3.3.2 2. . .. .6. ..... . . ... .... . . ..5. ....1 PROFIBUS DP com missioning . ...4 4.2 Quick Setup "Pulsating Flow" ......... .. ..1 6. •. . 63 6. ..... . 44 5. . ....... .. . ..... .. .. . . ...3 5. .. .4 4.7.. ... .3. 13 3..2 Configuring the device address ...... . ..... 14 3. . 45 5. 19 3.... 7 Designa ted use .. 51 5.. . ... 72 6. 79 6..... ..•. . ...4... .. . ...1 Installation. . 9 Device designation .... .3 Disabling tile programming mode . transport and storage ..... . . . ... .. ........ . . ..... .. 57 SWitching on tile measllling device . • . .. ..... . ..3 1....... . . 41 5....6.... .. . ... . . commissioning and operation .....1 Configuring the wri te protection .. .2 1....... . ... ..... ..... ........ 45 Error messages . ....4 6 6.2.. . 72 6.. ..2.. 45 5. Notes on safety conventions and icons ... . . .. .... .. ... . ... .. .. 4..

.. .. ... . .9. ... .... .. ...... . . ... ..1. .1.......... . .. ......12 Data storage device (HistoROM).. . III 6..8..9 Acyclic data transmission PROFIBUS DP/PA ... 9...6. ..... 122 124 124 125 133 133 133 136 137 138 138 139 140 144 9... ...2 Modules for cyclic data U'ansmission ... .... ..9 Return ..... . .. . ........... .. 10. .. • .•.... .... Response of outputs to errors ... . 9. . . 147 Techlucal dataat a glance .. S.... ...2. 145 10 10.3 9. I. .. . 91 6.1.. Process errors without messages ...•. ..I..... • .. 147 147 147 147 149 150 lSI 157 157 15B 168 173 174 175 175 175 Index ..... .6... 10..1 8...B...... .. ... .... 120 MeasUling principle-specific accessolies: . 9. .4 Olltplltvariables ... • ...2... • .. .1. . . . ... .. .B Operating conditions: Environment .. 91 6.. 114 6.1 HistoROM/ &-DAT (sensor-OAT) lIB 6.2 HistoROM/ T-DAT (transntitter-DAT) .... ..... . ..... . ....... . 9. . • ...... .1 9.3.. . .. 90 6.... . pressure mOlutoring connections and rupture elements . .... ... .. • .. ......... ....... 11 B 6. .....•. • .1. .. .1 Zero point adjustment .. ...13 Ordering information ....... PI .. 119 Cleaning with pigs (Promass H.. . ..... 92 6. 10.. .. ..10 Adjustment .. .2 List of system error messages . . ... . 9. .. .. 144 Disposal . ... .3 Description of Ule modules .1.. . . ... . . .6. . 10. . .. .•.... ......7.2 Troubleshooting ..•. 144 Software history .. 10...• ........ . .. ..........10... . .. lIB 9..3 Accessories .. 103 6.... . .. ..7.....•. ... .4 Configw-ation examples WiU.1 Master class 2 acyclic (MS2AC) ... . . ..... .B. .. ..1....... .1. Process eiTor messages .... 121 9 9.... . ......... . .. I 15 6. ... . .... . ... ..3 Input .6. ........ 10.. 10..2 PROFJBUS PA .... . . .... . .10 Mechanical consUlIction .. . ........ . .. . . .5 Powersupply ... .... ...... ....0) ...1...14 Accessories ..9..... . . . . . . . .7 9.. ... . ......... ... .... .2 7. .8...2 8.. .. . .15 Supplementary documentation..6. ... . . ... . .. .. . ... 91 6..1 Block model .. .1..... 9. 176 7 7.11 Humaninterface .... ...7 Operating conditions: Installation ..2 Function and system design ....8 PROFIBUS PA cyclic data exchange ...8 9.. . ..... ... 119 8 8.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Table 01 contents 6.......•... . ... .6 6 Endress+Hauser . .... ..... ... 114 6.3 Maintenance . I I B 6.12 Certificates and approvals ..... ..11 Purge..1 PROFJBUS DP ... Spare parts .4 Configw-ation examples with Simatic S7 HW-Konfig .. .... .1 Displaying the device status on PROFIBUS DP/PA .. ..5 9. . .. . . ...... 10.. 10. ...4 Maximum number 01 writes . 122 Troubleshooting instructions . .... . . .. 9.....3 Description of the modules . . ... ..... 105 6... . . ..... 1 7. 119 Replacing seals . ... .... 10... .......1 Technical data . . ...... 120 Device-specific accessories: ...7 PROFIBUS DP cyclic data exchange ........ . 115 6.....6 Performance characteristics . • . 9... lIB 6......... ... ........ .... •. ..1 Block model ..3 Compatibility with pre.2 List of process error messages . ... 119 Exterior cleaning .1.. •...... .... Simatic S7 HW-Konlig ...1 Applications .. 90 6.12.10. 10.. .... .... .. •. 10..7....9 Operating conditions: Process . .... ... .2 Master class I acyclic (MSIAC) ... .. . . . ...12.3 Removing and installing printed circuit boards . .... . . .. ...4 Replacing the device fuse ..... .... • ... ....... .. .1. ..... 114 6.. 103 6..6.1.... ... . . 10. . 120 Senoce-specific accessories: .3.. 10.2 Modules for cyclic data U'ansmission ..... . ...2 Density adjustment . .. F-CHIP .............. . 100 6. .... .. .... System error messages .... .12.oous Promass 63 model (Profile Version 2. . ..... .3 FF-CHIP (Function-Chip) .. 10. ....... 103 6.4 9.1 Displaying the device status on PROFIBUS DP/PA . .7.1... .. ......... . . ........ . ...... .. ... ..•. .. .... ........ .. . . . ..•.......... .• . ..... ..... 116 6. ..

inhibitors. which is an integral part of these Operating Instructions. • The measuring device complies with the general safety requirements in accordance \vith EN 61010-1.g. Examples: • Chocolate. qualified specialists authorized to perform such work by the facility's owner-operator.2 Installation.g. Fluids with widely (liffering properties can be measmed. Resulting from inconect use or from use other than that designated the operational safety of the measUling devices can be suspended. The transmitter must be grounded. local regulations governing the opelung and repair of elecu'ical devices apply. galvanically isolated power supply SELV or PELV). the welding unit may not be grounded by means of the measming device. • For measuring systems used in SIL 2 applications. <W Europe. solvents and cleaning agents • Pharmaceuticals.1 Safety instructions Designated use The measuring device described in these Operating Insauctions is to be used only for measuring the mass flow rate of liquids and gases. liquid sugar • Oils. liquefied gases. the separate manual on hlllctional safety must be obselved. catalysts. • Endress+Hauser is willing to assist in clarifying the chemical resistance properties of parts wetted by special fluids. At the same time. connection to the electricity supply. • The installer must ensure that the measming system is correctly wired in accordance . The symbol on the front of this supplementaJy Ex documentation indicates the approval and the certification body (e. NE 43 and NE 53. etc. the EMC requirements of IEC/EN 61326. suspensions • Gases. alkalis. 1. However small changes in temperature. condensed milk. • The device must be operated by persons authorized and u'ained by the facility's owner-operator. commissiolung and maintenance of the device must be carried out by u'alned. concenu'ation or tile degree of contaminatio n in tile process can result in changes of the chentlcal resistance properties. • If carryi ng out welding work on the piping. These parameters are tilen used to calculate other variables such as volume flow. except in cases where special protective measures have been taken (e. The manufacturer accepts no liability for damages being produced from this.vith the wiring diagrams. including fluids used for cleaning. Endress+Hauser can not guarantee or accept liability for tile chentlcal resistance properties of the fluid wetted materials in a specific application.3 Operational safety Note the following points: • Measuring systems for use in hazardous em. 1. fats • Acids. commissioning and operation Note the following points: • Installation. Strict compliance with the installation insu'uctions and ratings as stated in this supplementary documentation is mandatory. Strict compliance with the instructions in the Operating Instructions is mandatory. Therefore. lacquers.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Safety instructions 1 1. Endress+Hauser 7 . the system also measures fluid density and Huid temperature. «jj> USA. The specialist must have read and understood these Operating Insuuctions and must follow the instructions they contain. and NAMUR recommendation NE 21. paints. «l Canada). • Invaliably.ronments are accompanied by separate "Ex documentation". The user is responsible for the choice of fluid wetted materials in regards to their in-process resistance to corrosion.

for example.g.5 Notes on safety conventions and icons The deloces ru'e designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requlrements. if not performed correctly. etc. Note! "Note indicates an action or procedme which. for example a safety data sheet as per EN 91/155/EEC. • Enclose special handling inslluctions if necessruy. • Costs incurred for waste disposal and injwy [burns. • Remove all residues. in particular. e. d Caution! "Caution" indicates an action or procedure which. ensure staff are protected against burns and scalds. The devices comply with the applicable struldards and regulations in accordance with EN 61010-1 "Protection Measures for Electrical Equipment for Measurement. Note! You will find a preprinted "Declaration of contamination" form at the back of this manual. e. Your Endress+Hauser distributor will supply you with cumnt information and updates to this Operating Instructions. however.Safety instructions Proline Promass 83 PRORBUS DP/PA • Due to the performance rate in the eleco'onic components.4 Return The following procedures must be carried out before a flowmeter requiring repair or calibration. can result in incorrect operation or desu'uction of the device. examine and repair a returned device. When hot media are passed through the measwing tube. If the temperature of the medium is high. if not performed correctly. the surface temperature of the housing increases. Warning! • Do not return a measwing device Hyou are not absolutely certain that all traces of hazardous substances have been removed. etc. carcinogenic. Comply strictly with the instructions and proceed with care. 1. This is particularly important if the substance is hazardous to health. 1. Consequently. caustic. be a source of danger if used incorrectly or for anything other than the designated use. • The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. toxiC.g. lt 8 Endress+Hauser . have been tested. always pay pru·ticular attention to the safety inslluctions indicated in these Operating Instructions by the following icons: Warning! "Warning" indicates an action or procedure wltich. Only then can EndJ'ess+Hauser transport. With Promass Aand Promass M the threaded process connections must first be removed fi'om the sensor and then cleaned. you should expect temperatures that can be close to the temperature of the medium. can have an indirect effect on operation or u'igger an unexpected response on the part of the d€\oce. and left the factOlY in a condition in which they are safe to operate. The deloces can. With regard to the sensor. if not performed cOiTectly. Comply strictly with the instructions. Pay special attention to the grooves for seals and cr"oces which could contain residues. is returned to Endress+Hauser: • Always enclose a duly completed "Declaration of contamination" form. can result in injUly or a safety hazru·d. the maximum heating of the outer housing surfaces is 10 K.) due to inadequate cleaning will be chru'ged to the owner-operator. substances which have penetrated crevices or diffused through plastic. Control. Regulation and LaboratOlY Procedures" . flammable.

47\1.4$3.. • Remote version: transmitter and sensor are installed separately.1 it.753 i t US 5.648. 2: Nameplate speCIfications/or the •Promass 8.'ates. US 4.801 .l Ill/anl/a.Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Identification 2 2. Power slIpply /jrequemy/power consllmptlo n Adllit(onaljunct fons and software Available (npals alld outPlilS Reserved for In/onl/ation 01/ spec(al products Pfeilse refer to operating Instroctfans / documenration ReseIWd for ceJti/ii.lion 01/ device version Ambfellllemperatllre range Degree of pro/eetion 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 Endress+Hauser 9 . ' ·OUT.768. Promass A. 2.I·OUT 0 67- & . Prom ass H. Promass S 01' Promass P sensor.No : 12345678901 TAG No. Promass I.[Ii] eE -20' C (-4<F) < lamb < +60' C(-t-14 0' F) ~ ... Endress+Hauser m 1P67 I NEMAfType 4X ABCDEFGHJKLMNPQRST 23 - 2O-55VAC/16-62VDC 50-60Hz 15VANY 4 5- PRQFIBUS OP (Fforile 3. Two versions are available: • Compact version: transmitter and sensor form a single mechanicaJ unit.1.355 6.007 $. Promass M.611.897 Fig._-OO ~l CII\~'''' ~: ~t us 6"12.1 Nameplate of the transmitter 8 9 PROMASS83 1 _ 1Order COde: 83F2S·XXXXXXXXXXXX Ser.0 ) STATUS-IN. t Identification Device designation The "Promass 80/83" flow measuring system consists of the following components: • Prom ass 80 or 83 transmitter. • Promass F. Promass E.384 4.·r IWISfwUer (example) On1ercode / Seria/llum/)(>r: See tile specifications on t he arriercofljimlaffon/orflle meal/fngs ojtlle fndivfdual letters ami Ilfglls. approvals andfor add/liana.

(j:M l I.. 15 :> 14 lI S~. 3.lls 1.1 B celtificate jor wetted materials 10 11 12 Reserved jor injormation all special products Ambiellt lemperature range Please nier to operatlng fnsfn/t1/0Ils / doculIlmtation Degree oj protection 13 14 15 /-101'1 direction Reserved jor additional injormation all device version (approval::. / / . 6 .. .'.[f '-PROMASS F '--.----: ~ - 8 9 ~/ /' 10 --::::.1I1wter/nominal pressure 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Plange nominal diameter/nominal pressure MeasurlJlg tube material Max.ss 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 2. 2 4 -.1. 2.ze DN25 DINIEN PN100 pnom =PS= l00bar M~t e ri. 3: Nameplate specfjicatiollsjorthe ·Pn. 12 11 ...O.m .~ Order CO<l~: B3F25·XXXXXXXXXXXX SeOlo.2 Nameplate of the sensor Endress+Hauser g.1 TAG No.3.&.OOlglcc Density cal . +392°F Tlk 40bar 1600psi Containel +/. -20·C (.~ ~ . /.1.1 B: with 3. I "'O" Fig. cenij/cates) 10 Endress+H.: j 5P·CAL ...user . Calibration factor willi zero pOIil1 Device nominal di.5100/-11 S'. +200' C 1-58' F. fluid temperature Secondary containment pressure range Df'IIsI1yaccuracy Ad{l/Hollallnjonnatfon (examples): .OF)" Tamb" t 60'C (~HO 'F ) NEMAlTlEe 4X 13 (E F'III .5f-CAL. / ABCDEFGH JKLMNPQRST K·lactor.45391904L ·50 'C ..4404/316L.: 12345878901 1 -5 6 7 .Identification Proline Prom.: DN2511 u 3 IPS7 ~ .· with ~point calibration .mass P" sensor (example) Order code / Smal number: See the specijlcations 01/ til(' anter C01ljlnllatioll!or the meanfngs ojtlle individual letters and digits.

.2: N for A C. /6 to 62 V DC 4 Termlllal No. 30 VAG I 0.. cable for flower 511Pl1ly:85 10 260 V AC. GOVDC/O_1 A RELAY max. l . .-. 1 Versorgung I Tension dalimenlalion fA 7 -:c::-". 30 VAC J 0. J: LI forAe: L+ Jor DC 5 fJ 7 8 9 10 7erm(flal No. MMM .."".'e ·~I==========~~ E'E operating manual Betnebsanleitung beachlen passIVe Observer manuel dinslrucllon I open contact closed contact ______ 2 1-----\---.jor DC Pendlllg signals at tile inpllts md outputs possIble configuration and tenllillal assignment Version 0/ device software currently II/stalled {Inclusive language group} Inslalled communicaliolllype FRON8US ID No..xx (WEAl 7 ----'\. Date 0/ installation Currel/t updates to d.5 A max.+---i''-''k7I PROFrBUS DP (Profi le 3.\. RELAY A max. 4: N/:mU'plale Spt'cijit':Jliolls lor Proline sensor (example) I S('naillIJmber 2 3 IbssllJlc configuration of cum'lIt Olltput fbsslble cOl/figuration 0/ mlay cal/tJets TermInal assignment.1ta spec~7ed /11 points 6 to 9 Endress+Hauser II .Communication: PROFIBUS DP Drivers: 10 XXXX (HEX) 9 .-.0) max...3 Nameplate for connections -:'::~~~~--------~~ad~w.Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Identification 2. YYYY 10 Fig. 20 to 55 V AC. .Dale: DD.Device SW: xxxx.3 12345678912 A STATUS-IN S.1.5 A I ab-Werk I reglages usine 6 .' .

The measuring system complies with the EMC requlrements of the "Australian Communications and Media AllthOlity IACMA)". D HistoROMn" 5-DAr®. The Dowmeter has successfully passed all the test procedures canied out and is certified and registered by the PNO IPROFIBUS User Organization). Applicator'" Registered or registration-pending trademarks of Endress+Hauser F10wtec AG. Endress+Hallser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark. Karlsruhe.Identification Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 2.1. The measUling system described in these Operating Instmctions thus complies with the statutOlY requirements of the EC Directives. CH 12 Endress+Hauser . Control. Du Pont de Nemours & Co. . USA TRI-CLAM P® Registered trademark of Ladish & Co.. Inc.. Fieldcheck"'. The devices comply with the applicable standards and regulations in accordance with EN 6 10 10. Reinach.. Wilmington.1 "Protection Measures for ElecUical Equipment for Measurement. The device thus meets al\ the requirements of the following specifications: • Certified to PROFIBUS Specification Profile 3. 2. Regulation and LaboratOlY Procedures" anel with the EMC requirements ofIEC/EN 6 1326. FieldCare® ToF Tool .2 Certificates and approvals The devices are designed in accordance wi th good engineering practice to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements. F-CHIP"'.0 version IDevice certification number: provided upon request) • The measuring device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers linteroperabilityj. have been tested. and left U factOlY in a condition in which they are safe to le operate.. USA PROFIBUS® Registered trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organization. T-DAT"".3 Registered trademarks KALREZ®and VITON® Registered trademarks of E. Solon.Fieldtool® Package. USA SWAGELOK'" Registered U 'ademark of Swagelok & Co. Kenosha.

ty of the assembled measuring de\.ce might be higher than the points around which the slings are slung. 5). make sure nothing is missing and that the scope of supply matches your order. o Cheek the shipment. The center of gra\. cheek tlle following points: o Cheek the packaging and the contents for damage.Use webbing slings slung round the two process connections. o Do not lift measuring devices of nominal diameters > DN 40 (> IV by the o'ansmitter housing l') or the connection housing in tlle case of the remote version (Fig. At all times.2 Transport The following instructions apply to unpacking and to transporting the device to its final location: • Transport the devices in the containers in which they are delivered.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Installation 3 3. use OI~y the lifting eyes on the flanges to lift the assembly! Warning! Risk of injury if the measuring device slips. transport and storage Incoming acceptance On receipt of tlle goods. Fig.1 Installation Incoming acceptance. make sure that the device does not unexpectedly turn around its axis or slip. .1 3. Consequently. 5: Instmclions/ortranspof1in sensors wilh > DN 40 (> 1*") g Endress+Hauser 13 . o The covers or caps fitted to the process cOlmeetions prevent mechanical damage to the sealing faces and the ingress of foreign matter to the measwing tube during transportation and storage. do not remove these covers or caps until immediately before installation. Do not use chains.1.1. as they could damage the housing. therefore. o In the case of the Promass M / DN 80 sensor. 3.

• The measuring de\oce must be protected against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures. for example the secondary containment. Mounting location Entrained air or gas bubbles forming in the measuring tube can result in an increase in measUling Avoid the follo"ong locations in the pipe installation: • Highest point of a pipeline. T-pieces. • Directly upsU'eam of a free pipe outlet in a vertical pipeline. . etc.1. • For mechanical reasons and in order to protect the pipe. '. • The high oscillation frequency of the measuring tubes ensmes that the correct operation of the measuring system is not influenced by pipe vibrations.2.2 errors. L as long as no cavitation occurs. 6: M oullting location 14 Endress+Hauser . elbows. • Do not remove the protective covers or caps on the process connections until you are ready to install the device. 3. External forces are absorbed by the construction of the instrument. • No special precautions need to be taken for fittings which create turbulence (valves. 3.. • The permissible storage temperature is -40 to +80 °C [-40 °Fto + 176 of ].3 Storage Note the following points: • Pack the measUling device in such a way as to protect it reliably against impact for storage (and U·ansportation). The original packaging provides optimum protection. preferably +20 °C (+68 OF).2 Installation conditions Note the following points: • No special measures such as supports are necessaly.1 Dimensions All tlle dimensions and lengths of the sensor and transmitter are provided in the separate documentation "Technical Information" 3. it is advisable to support heavy sensors.Installation Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA 3.2. Risk of air accumulating. " ~ ~ ~~ 66 Fig.

9 1' liS' 3/S' 0.60' 0.S7' 1.5 3.06" ON 40 40 fS SO SO fB SO 100 I SO 250 mm t 'h" I V1" 2' 2' 22 35 2S 54 SO 65 Inch 0.54' 5.55' 0. it is important to ensure that pressure does not drop below tile vapor pressure and that the liquid does not start to boil.Batcliiflg lank o Orlnce plate.95' 3' 4' 6' !h" I' I' 90 ISO 10' FB = Full bore versions of Prom ass [ System pressure It is important to ensure that cavitation does not occur. . liquefied gases) or in suction lines.=. 7: 'nstallation in a I'f'rtical/ip(.0 Inch 0. pipe restrictor mm 1124' 1/12' O.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Instatiation The proposed configuration in the following diagram.' fr.24' 6 10 IS 14 24 W 0.12' 0. Endress+Hauser 15 .S. pipe rrstrictiofls (see Table/. however. Such effects can be prevented when system pressure is sufficiently high. permits installation in a vertical pipeline.3S' 1. 3 Orifice plate.Jor batching appllcalions) = J == Supply lank. Pipe restrictors or the use of an orifice plate with a smaller cross-section than the nominal diameter prevent the sensor from running empty during measurement. pipe restrlctor ON I 2 4 S IS IS fS 25 25 fS 12) Orifice plate. 2 '" Sensor.03' 0. the following installation locations are preferred: • Downstream from pumps (no danger of vacuum) • At the lowest point in a vertical pipe. 4 = Valve.10' 2. solvents.g.60' 3.00' 2.00' 2. No special measures need to be taken for fluids which have properties similar to water under normal conditions. 2 3 4 5 Fig.S 1. because it would infiuence the oscillation of the measuring tube. It is also important to ensure that the gases that occur naturally in many liquids do not outgas. In the case of liquids with a low boiling point (hydrocarbons. For this reason.40' 0.

Jnstallation Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 3. Horizontal: When installation is correct the transmitter housing is above or below the pipe. The measuring tubes can be completely drained and protected against solids buildup. % / Vertical alld horIzontal odell/aUan IPromass A) 16 Endress+Hauser . in other words without support or attachment. entrained solids will sink down and gases will rise away from the measuring tube. Do not install the sensor in such a way that it is suspended in the pipe. This is to avoid excessive sU'ain at the process connection.3 Orientation Make sure tilat tile direction of tile arrow on the nameplate of the sensor matciles the direction of flow (direction in which the fluid flows through the pipe). The base plate of the sensor housing is designed for mounting on a tabletop. Fig. Orientation Promass A Vertical: Recommended orientation with upward direction of How. /.S. wall or post..2. This arrangement means that no gas or solid deposits can accumulate in the cUlved measuring tube (single-tube system). When fluid is not flowing. / .

. M. . E): The measuring tubes of Promass F.!l tj .. Endress+Hauser 17 . .40 to + 140 °FII is not exceeded. B ~ . Horizontal orientation TransmItter head up Abb. P Make sure that the direction of the arrow on the nameplate of the sensor matches the direction of H (direction in which the fluid flows through the pipe).:W~1l . V).. E. VI· qJ = For fluids with low temperaMes. e ... . x • "" "" "" ® "" "" ".Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Installation Orientation Promass F. M and E must be horizontal and beside each other.: :£1j '" ig " . @ "" K "" TM> 200 °C (302 O F) (j) Abb. When fluid is not flowing.. HI I or the vertical orientation (Fig. Vertical orIentation e. m~N "" ® "" ® .: . eJl S-ii.. ow Vertical: Recommended OIientation with upward direction of flow (View V). .. .~!$ ~ S 0 B ~ . I. S'" ~ ~ . entrained solids will sink down and gases will rise away from the measming tube.~ . ~ . Always avoid having the transmitter housing in tlle same horizontal plane as the pipe. When instaliation is correct tlle transmitter housing is above or below the pipe (View HI I H2). we recommend tlle horizontal orientation with the transmitter head pointing dOWllwards (Fig. Horizontal orientatIon Transmitter head down c& ? TM > 200 "C I 392 O F) (j) " .. :!. 5.. .. M. P): Promass Hand Promass I can be instalied in any orientation in a horizontal pipe run . Abb. H. HI. I. " :£ " " " u ~'i! v. HZ. we recommend the following olientations: (j) = For fluids with very high temperatures> 200°C (392 °FI. Horizontal (Promass H. The measuring tubes can be completely drained and protected against solids buildup." 2·. H21 or the vertical olientation (Fig. "'~ :{~ ~ eB '" ... optional .40 to +60 °C (. x ~ " S lIS :3 ... we recommend the horizontal orientation witll the o'ansmitter head pointing upwards (Fig... S.. m66~ vV' = R ecommended orientalion V = Orientation recommended in certain sl tuallons )( = ImpermissIble orientation In order to ensure that the maximum permissible ambient temperatw'e for the transmitter (-20 to +60 °C (-4 to + 140° FI. Horizonlal (Prom ass F. '" S'" ~'!l " ..

3. make sure that the adapter between sensor and transmitter and the connection housing of the remote version always remain free of insulating material.. at values greater than those permitted by the EC standard (Sinus 30 Aim)). S and P d Caution! If tile measuring tube is curved and tile unit is installed horizontally. wftll cUlved measuring tube. Risk oj solids accumulaling. (i. heating is not permitted for the compact version of the high-temperature version. adapt the sensor position to the fluid properties. 2 Fig. Note Ulat a certain orientation might be required.Plate thickness d. with heated elements.g. d Caution! • Risk of electronics overheating! Consequently. • When using electrical heat tracing whose heat is regulated using phase conn'ol or by pulse packs. 9: Horizontal iflstal/ation oj sensor:.g. or by means of hot water or steam pipes made of copper. depending on the fluid temperature. 0. H.OO I I ") • Information on permissible temperature ranges -> Page 158 Special heating jackets which can be ordered as accessories fi'om Endress+ Hauser are available for the sensors. 18 Endress+Hauser .35 mm(O.. The secondaJY contailllnent can be shielded with tin plates or electric sheets without privileged direction (e. Heating can be electric. Risk oj air accumulating. e. Not suitabfe for fluids witll eli/rained sof(ds.Installation Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Special installation instructions for Promass F.e. -> Page 16 • Witi. a fluid temperature between 200 to 350 °C (392 to 662 OF).2. it cannot be nrled out that the measured values are influenced by magnetic fields which may occur. the sensor must be magnetically shielded (except for Promass M). 2 300 . E.4 Heating Some fluids require suitable measures to avoid loss of heat at the sensor. 2 Not slIitable for outgassIng /lulds. In such cases.Relative magnetic permeability ~ . V330-35A) with the following properties: .

etc. 3. If pOSSible.2. the sensors require no special measures for attachment. A wide range of materials can be used to pl'O\ode the required thermal insulation.'(1 o lilt' electronics/neck. 3.7 Vibrations The high oscillation frequency of the measwing tubes ensmes that the con'ecl operation of the measuling system is not influenced by pipe vibrations.2. oj 0 . an insulation thickness of min.2.5 Thermal insulation Some fluids require suitable measmes to avoid loss of heat at the sensor.. f If the Promass F high-temperature version is installed horizontally [with transmitter head pointing upwards). 3.4 ". fIlust be observed ill the 311. T-pieces. install the sensor well c1eay of fittings such as valves. a maxflllul/I II/sula({ol/ tltlcknesso/60 mm (2.4") must be obselved. 111e maximum insulation thickness of 60 mm [2. elbows. Consequently.6 Inlet and outlet runs There are no installation requirements regarding inlet and outlet runs.: '" x E III tile case o/the Promass F It(gh-leJllperatllre version.2. 10: '" 0 . mm (inch) '" g Fig.4") is recommended to reduce convection.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Installation 3.8 Limiting flow Relevant information can be found in the "Technical Data" section under MeasUling range -> Page 147 or Limitingflow-> Page 159 Endress+Hauser 19 . 10 mm [0..

2 x 90° in either direction). 3. Retighten the two securing screws. 5. 5. 2. Lower the housing into position.3. Loosen the two securing screws. J I. I Div. Fig. Carefully lift the transmitter housing as far as it will go.1 Installation Turning the transmitter housing Turning the aluminum field housing Warning! The turning mechanism in devices with EEx dlde or FMlCSA CI.3 3. 12: Tllming the transmitter housing (stainless s{celjield hOI/sing) 20 Endress+Hauser . 1. Turn the transmitter housing to the desired position [max. 31 Fig.Installation Proline Prom ass 83 PROFlBUS DP/PA 3. 6. CarefuUy lift the o'ansmitter housing as far as it will go. 4. Loosen the two seeUling screws. Retighten the two securing screws. 2. 4. Turn the transmitter housing to the desired position [max. 2 x 90° in either direction). Lower the housing into position and reengage the bayonet catch. 3.' Tuming the transmitter 'IOI/sillg (aluminullljield hOl/sing) Turning the stainless steel field housing I. I classification is not the same as that described here. The procedure for turning these housings is described in tile Ex-specific documentation. Turn the bayonet catch as far as it will go.

accessories) -> Page 22 • Pipe mounting (separate mounting set.20 to +60 °C (. . 2.:} ~ -----a 0 ° 0 / c N =l 90 (3.56) mm (inch) Endress+Hauser 21 . 192 (7 . Avoid direct sunlight.Securing screws (M6): max. 4. 5.40 to +60 °C 1-40 to + 140 OF)). Install the device in a shady location. --I 35 (1 381 0 0 0 0 b .3.2 Installing the wall-mount housing There are various ways of installing the wall-mount housing: • Mounted directly on the wall • Installation in control panel (separate mounting set.26") . 3. 13: Mounted direct/yon the waif ~ ° '" .5 mm (0. Drill the holes as illustrated in the diagram..5 mm (0.41 ") Secure the transmitter housing to the wall as indicated.Screw head: max. '" 6.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Installation 3.. • Always install the wall-mount housing in such a way that the cable entries are pointing down. Remove tlle cover of the connection compartment (a). '" 10.4 to + 0140 FJ. Mounted directly on the wall I.54) Fig. optional. Screw the cover of the connection compartment (a) firmly onto the housing. Push the two securing screws (bl through the appropriate hores Ic) in the housing. accessories) -> Page 22 d Caution! • Make sure that ambient temperature does not go beyond tlle permissible range (.

Installation Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Installation in control panel I.. Afterwards.. Additional support is not necessruy. 2. 245 (9 65)-0 5 -0019 >"1'" 0 191 mm (inch) -" Q \\ j \ Fig. 70 (00.75) l -_ -f"--/ r mm (inch) Fig. 14: Panel installatioll (wall-mount/lousing) Pipe mounting The assembly should be performed by following the instructions in the diagram. 4. Slide the housing into the opening in tile panel from tile front... 2. make sure that the housing temperature does not exceed the max.79 . 020 . /5: Pipe moulltlilg (wall-moullt housillg) 22 Endress+ Hauser . 3. d Caution! If a wru'm pipe is used for installation. Screw threaded rods into holders and tighten until the housing is solidly seated on tile panel wall. Screw the fasteners onto the wall-mount housing. permitted value of +60 'C (+ 140 'F) . Prepare tile opening in the panel as illusU'ated in the diagram. tighten the locking nuts.

4 Post-installation check Perform tile following checks atter instaliing the measuring device in the pipe: Device condition and speclflcatJons Is the device damaged (visuallnspectJonj? Notes - Does the devIce correspond to specifications at the measuring point. 2. Is the orienta tion chosen tor the sensor correct. ambient tempera ture. TW'ning the local display Unscrew cover of tile electronics compartment fi'om tile U'ansmitter housing. ~x 45' 4 \ Fig. 16: TurnIng rfle {ocill display (fIeld hOI/Slife) 3.3 I. Including process temperature and pressure.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Instaliation 3. 4. In other words suitable tor sensor type. and reset it onto the electronics compartinent cover plate. etc. w ith entraIned solids) and nuld temperatu re? Process envIronment / process condItIons Is the measurIng device protected agaInst moIsture and direct sunlight? Notes - Endress+Hauser 23 . Notes - pipe? Are the measuring point number and labeling correct (visual inspection)? -> Page 14 ft. fluId propertIes (outgassIng. measuri ng range. 4 x 45 ' in both directions). Screw tile cover of the electronics compartment firmly back onto the n'ansmitter housing. Rotate tile display to the desired position Imax. 3. Press the side latches on the display module and remove the module from the elecn'onies compartment cover plate.? Installation Instructions Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the direction of flow through the -> Page 7 ff.3.

1 x 2. see the notes and diagrams in the Ex-specific supplement to these Operating Instructions. 4. Cable type A can be used for all ~·ansmission rates up to 12 Mbitls. The first and last segment can complise max. assign the device a switch or power-circuit breaker which can be used to disconnect the power supply line fi·om the power grid.e table for the cable parameters: Gable type A Characteristic Impedance 135 to 165 < 30 pF/m n at a measuring frequency of 3 to 20 f. 2 x 2 or 1 x 4 wire loop-resistance Signal damping Shielding 110 nlkm Max.1. The bus length or the number of users can be increased by introdUCing a repeater.34 mm:!. 24 Endress+Hauser .. Note! The device does not have an internal power s\vitch .1 Cable type PROFIBUS cable specifications PROFIBUS DP cable specifications Two versions of the bus line are specified in IEC 61158.1Hz Cable capacitance COTe cross-section Cable type >0. • The maximum distance between two bus users can be calculated as follows: (NO_REP + I) x segmentlength ~ Note! NO_REP = maximum number of repeaters that may be switched in series depending on the repeater in question.6 to 93.Wiring Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 4 Wiring Warning! When connecting Ex-certified devices. Please do not hesitate to contact your Endress+Hauser sales office if you have any questions. For this reason. 9 dB over the entire length of the cable section Copper braided shielding or braided shielding and foil shielding Bus structure Note the foIlo\ving points: • The maximum line length (segment length) depends on the O·ansmission rate. Please refer to U. For cable type A. the maximum line length [segment length) is as follows: Transmission rate [kBlt/s) 9. 30 stations.5 1000(3300) 500 400 (1300) 1500 200(650) 300 to 12000 100(330) Line length Imj(jlnchll 1200 (4000) • • • • A maximum of 32 users are permitted per segment Each segment is terminated at either end with a terminating resistor. 31 devices. The segments between the repeaters can comprise max . COTJl'sponds to Awe 22 TWisted In pairs.1 4.75 187.

D) can be used with the fieldbus. B.1. Only these types have cable shielding that guarantees adequate protection fi'om electromagnetic interference and thus the most reliable data transfer. No other circuits are permissible in the same cable. fully shielded 0. In the case of type B multi-pair cables. PROFIBUS DP/ PA.6 m (21.25 kHz 44nikm 100 n ± 20% 3 dB/km 11 2 ll1km l00!l±30% 5 dB/km Attenuation constant at 39 kHz Capacitive asymmetry 2 nF/km 2 nF/km Endress+Hauser 25 . • If you cannot avoid using spurs. shielded Wire cross-section 0. if possible.l. field communication.8 mm ~ lAWG 18} Loop-resistance (DC) Characteristlc Impedance at 3\. it is permissible to operate multiple field buses with the same degree of protection on one cable.7 ttl. 9 repeaters can be switched in series when using a standard line.5 MBiVs may be 6. The elecokal data of the fieldbus cable have not been specified but determine important characteristics of the design of the fieldhus.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Wiring Example In accordance with manufacturer specifi cations.7 tt) (at max. Type Cable structure A Type B One or more twisted pa irs. • Cable types A or B are particularly preferable for new installations. fom different cable types (A.32 mm:!: (AWG 221 Twisted pair.6 m (2 1. such as distances bridged. we recommend you do not use any spurs. Bus termination It is important to terminate Ule RS485 line cOlTecUy at Ule start and end of Ule bus segment since impedance mismatch results in reflections on the line which can cause faulty communication transmission. etc." 4. For Ulis reason. number of users. C.2 Cable type PROFIBUS PA cable specifications Twin-<:ore cables are recommended for connecting the del1ce to the fieldhus. at transmission rates >1. This is affected greatly by the arrangement of the field devices.5 MBiVs can be calculated as follows: (9 + I) x 200 m . --> Page 52 Further information General information and further notes regarding the wiring are contained in BA034S/04: "Guidelines for planning and commissioning. you cannot presume that the sum of all spms at 1. Following IEC 61158-2 (MBP). Spurs Note the following pOints: • Length of spms < 6. only two of which (cable types A and B) are shielded .5 MBiVs. 2000 m. Ulen they may not include any bus terminators.5 MBiVs. electromagnetic compatibility. Experience has shown that you should proceed with caution when configming spurs. The line between the connector and the bus driver is described as a spm.5 MBiVs) • No spurs should be used for transmission rates> 1. Therefore. The maximum distance hetween two bus users at a transmission rate of 1. • Practical experience has shown that cable types C and D should not be used due to the lack of shielding. since the freedom from interference generally does not meet the requirements described in the standard.

A maximum of 32 users per segment in non-Ex areas or a maximum of 10 users in an Ex-area IEEx ia IIC) is possible. The actual number of users must be determined dUling configuration. In the case of non-Ex applications. the device furthest from the segment coupler represents the end of the bus. With vaJious junction boxes Inon-Ex).e main cable and the length of all spurs [> 1m).7 ~/km Shield coverage Max. the maximum permissible cable length is doubled. If this is not the case. the line length is limited to max. 1000 m. cable length (ind spurs > I m) * Not specifiei:l 90% 1900 m (6200 It) . Maximum spur length The line between the distribution box and field device is described as a spur.Q to 39 kHzl Type B 1.Wiring Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Type A Envelope delay distortion t7. 26 Endress+ Hauser . the max. length per spur Iml Il~ 120 400 90 300 60 200 30 100 3 Number of field devices In systems that meet FISCO with EEx ia type of protection. length of a spur depends on the number of spurs [> I m] 1>3 ft): Number of spurs I to 12 13 to 14 15 to 18 19 to 24 25 to 32 I Max. A maximum of three repeaters are permitted between user and master. Note the following points: o The maximum permissible overall cable length depends on the cable type used: o If repeaters are used. Note the following points: o In the case of a branched bus segment. Bus termination The start and end of each fieldbus segment are always to be terminated with a bus terminator. 1200 m (4000 ft ) * Suitable fieldbus cables fi'om various manufacturers for non-hazardous areas are listed below: o Siemens: 6XVI 830--SBHIO o Belden: 3076F o Kerpen: CeL-PE/OSCRlPVC/FRLA FB-02YS[ST)YFL Maximum overall cable length The maximum network expansion depends on tl. o If the fieldbus is extended with a repeater then the extension must also be terminated at both ends. The overall cable length combines the length of U.e type of protection and the cable specifications. the bus termination can be activated via a switch. a sepaJ'ate bus terminator must be installed.

PROFIBUS DP/PA. are shielded and that no portion of the system is unshielded. there are tilree important poinlS to consider: • Electromagnetic compatibility IEMC) • Explosion protection • Safety of tile pel~onnel To ensure the optimum electromagnetic compatibility of systems. can be used witilOUt resUiction in systems with good potential matching.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Wiring Further information General information and further notes regarding the wiring are contained in BA034S/04: "Guidelines for planning and commissioning. Keep the sU'ipped and twisted lengths of cable shield to the terminals as short as possible. which connect the componenlS. Since these are generally connected to the protective earth.g. the cable shields are connected to the normally metal housings of tile connected field devices. This approach. field communication.3 Shielding and grounding When planning the shielding and grounding for a fieldbus system.1. e. a power supply frequency 150 Hz) equalizing cUlTent can now between two grounding poinlS which. it is therefore recommended to connect the cable shield directly to the building ground lor protective earth) at one end only and to use capacitive coupling to cOlmect all other grounding pOinlS. To suppress tile low fi'equency equalizing currenlS on systems without potential equalization. when it exceeds the permiSSible shield current. may destroy the cable. d Caution! The legal EMe requiremenlS are fulfilled only when the cable shield is grounded on both sides! Endress+Hauser 27 . it is important that the system componenlS and above all the cables. Ideally. in unfavorable cases. In the case of systems without potential matching." 4. which provides the best electromagnetic compatibility and personal safety. the shield of tile bus cable is grounded many times.

... 17 or wiring diagram inside cover).--------------..1 Connecting the remote version Connecting connecting cable for sensor/transmitter Warning! • Risk of electric shock. Establish the connections between sensor and transmitter in accordance with the wiling diagram (see Fig.MIC'SA -+ see separate Ex documelltatfoll l/e c d e Remote wlSlof/Jjlange Wr.---.2. Do not install or wire the device while it is connected to the power supply. Failure to comply with this precaution can result in irreparable damage to parts of the electronics.Wiling Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 4. 41142 = brown 28 Endress+ Hauser ... 1f / 12 = wltile. 8 = yellow: 9/10 =.J J ... • Risk of electric shock.. >--- ' I"- ~ >--- @ c I 4 ) 5 I 6 I 7 I ~ ) ~ ) {O) 11 ) 1. Communication errors can occur if this is not observed when connecting the devices..... 3.2 4.tOfi Cowr o/the connection compartment or cOllnectionltollsing Connecting cable Terminal No. Seal the connection comparttnent or the transmitter housing again.. I 141-lf2 1 Fig.. f~ . Feed the connecting cable (e) through the appropliate cable runs..: 415 :0: gr'1JIi 617". + + + + S1 S1 S2 S2 GND TM TM TT TT " . d .pInk. 2.U U.:. @ ) 4 ) 5 ) 6 ) 7 ) 8 ) 9 ) 10) 11 ) 12 ) ) 41 ) 42 ) d J. • You may only connect the sensor to the transmitter with the same serial number. Connect the protective ground to the ground terminal on the housing before the power supply is applied. green. S1 S1 S2 S2 GND TM TM TT TT + + + + ) a b .... 17: a Connecting til e remote version b Wall-mount housing: non-hazardous area and ATEX 113C / Zone 2 -+ see separate &: documentat ioll Wall-mount housing: AlEX 112G I ZO I II. 1. Switch off the power supply before opening the device. 4.------------ =. Remove the cover (d) fi·om the connection compartment or the sensor housing. __.

reverse polarity protection Endress+Hauser 29 .3 4. 50 Q/km Capacitance core/shield: '.3 · 26 ~ B (RxD/ TxD-P) 27 ~ A (RxDlTxD-N) Fixed on I/ O board *.3. 20 m 13..38 mm' PVC cable with common shield and individually shielded cores Conductor resistance: . 11 . The individual slots are marked and assigned to the following terminals in the connection compartment of the transmitter: • Slot "INPUT / OUTPUT 3" ~ Terminals 22 /23 • Slot "INPUT / OUTPUT 4" ~ Termi nals 20 / 21 TermlnaJ No. (inputs/outputs) Order version 83***-****** *"* "*F 20 (+) 1 21 (-) 22 (+) I 23 (-) 24 (+) /25 (-) .2 Cable specification for connecting cable The specifications of the cable connecting the transmitter and the sensor of the remote version are as follows: • • • • • 6 x 0... Ex i 83"**-*****""'·· · *H I) · · · · PROFIBUS PA With integrated. ~·* P Current output Relay output I Status Input Frequency output Status Input PROFIBUS PA Terminal No. *1 · PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP 83"''' ''-*··''··''"*·*·V Relay output 2 83**·-**···** . . to prevents movement. 4. ** ...Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Wiring 4. 420 pF/ m Cable length: max.28 tt) Permanent operating temperature: max. (lnpuu/ outputs) Order version 20 (+) 121 (-) Submodule on 22 (+) / 23 (-) SubmoduJe on 24 (+) I 25 (-) FIxed on 110 board +5V (power supply for ext bus terminator) slot No. PROFIBUS DP d Caution! Only certaln combinations of submodules (see Table) on the I/O board are permissible..2. 26 = PA + I) 27 = PA _I ) PROFIBUS PA.1 Connecting the measuring unit Terminal assignment Note! The electIical characteristic quantities are listed in the "Technical data" section..4 83*~ *-" slot No. + I 05 °C 1+22 1 OF) Note! The cable must be installed securely.

Cormeet the protective ear·til to the ground terminal on the housing before the power supply is applied (not required for galvarllcally isolated power supplyl . Unscrew the COlUlection comparunent cover (al fi·om the transmitter housing. Failure to comply with this precaution can result in irreparable damage to parts of the electronics.3. 30 Endress+Hauser . --> Page 27 . d Caution! . The national regulations governing the installation of elecbical equipment also apply. • Risk of elecU·ic shock. the fieldbus cable (dl and tile power supply cable for external bus terminator (optional) or signal cable (gl through tire appropriate cable entries.Risk of damaging the fieldbus cable! Observe the information ahout shielding and grounding the fieldbus cable. 2. Do not install or wire the de. 4."ce while itis connected to the power supply. Feecl the power supply cable (bl.We recommend that the fieldhus cable not be looped using conventional cable glands. 1. If you later replace even just one measUling device. 3.2 Transmitter connection Warning! • Risk of elecu'ic shock. the bus communication will have to be interrupted. Perform wiring in accordance with the respective terminal aSSignment and the associated wiring diagram. Screw the cover of the connection compartment (al hack onto the U·ansmitter housing.Wiring Proline Prom ass 83 PROF/BUS DP/PA 4. • Compare the specifications on the nameplate with the local supply voltage and frequency. Switch all tlle power supply hefore opening the device.

~ldfnl('ss sfeeljleld housfng) Vfew C (wall-mount IlOl/stog) COIIII('l1folll'Ompartm£'nr cover Cable for power supply: 85 to 260 V AC.3 PROFIBUS OP connection diagram Permanent assignment board {order version 83* . 24: ~5 V Terminal No. A \RXDfTXO-N) 27 0 DGND25 0 +5V 24 0 d 23 (/) Ifilill ~ 22 "" 20 0 0 210 c b N (L-) 2 L1 (L+) 1 ~0 "-'-J~"''=:/1=~:J b c 9 • d Fig.. 20 to 55 V li e. 18: Connecting tile transmitter.'): DCND / g Endress+Hauser 31 . a / ::. 27: A (RxIJllxD-N) Ground termillal for Ife!dbus (. 26: B /RxDITxD-P ) e Terminal No.0=".c.2: N lor AC... ~~\..tliat the slrlpped and [wlsllYi lengths 0/ cable sliield to fhe ground temlillal are as short as possible SefVIce adapter /or connecting service Inter/ace FXAJ Q3 (Fieldclied:.5 mm1lAWC 14) A B C View A {field flouslilfJ View B (.3b!e shield ObSeflf! llie /ollowing: .Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Wiring 4.1 A c B +5V N (L-) L1 (l+) OGND B (RxDfTxD-P) A (RxDfTxD-N) 8 RxDfTxD-P) 26 ... 2..(fIe shielding 3nd grollndif/g o/ille jieldblls cable -) Page 27 . 16 to 62 V DC Term/lIilINo . J:LI/orAC:L+/orDC Terminal No.lIal No.! bus terminator {optional}: Tenn. ··*J} 1___ .. /..(. FieldCare} fbwer supply cable/or extern.for DC Ground (emlinaljo r protective earth Fie/dollS ('ab/e: a b c d 7'enllinal No._.3.. ·-***** .2. cable cross~sec{/on: max.

5 flint (AWe 14} A B C View A (field housing) View B (staInless steelfield housing) VIew C (wall-mount 1I001sing) a b Connection compartment cover CablejorpolVcrslI(!ply: 85 to 260 V AC.Wiring Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Flexible assignment boards (order version 83 ***-* ** *** *** . *V and 83** *-** ** ** * **** P) A c a B N (L-) L1 A (RxDfTxD-N) 27 B (RxDfTxD-P) 26 rm . 27: A {RxDITxO-N} e Ground termfnal/or sigllal cabl£' sllfeldlpeldblls cable sllield Obscwe tlw /ollowillg: .2: N for AC. L+ jor DC Terminal No.23 + 22 .Jor DC c d Ground temllnaljor protective earth Fiddbus cable: Terminal No.25 + 24 . 2.r-C b I A (RxOfTxD·N) B (RxDrrxD-p) @. FieldC-are. N (L-) 2 L1 (L+) 1 b c o e d Fig.21 + 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 r-_. Signal cable: see terminal assIgnment ~ Page 29 32 Endress+Hauser . cable cross-section: max.. /9: COl/necting the {ral/smiller. 26: B {RxOITxD -P} Terminal No. 20 toSS V A C /(J to 62 V DC Tem/ina! No..tllat the stripped and twisted lengths oj cable shield to the ground terminal are as short as possible Selvice adapterfor connecting sClvice intetjace FXA 193 (Fleldclleck.1: LJ f or AC.the shieldfng and grollnding 0/ thejiefdbus cable ---) Page 27 ! g . L.

cable cross-section: max. /6 to 62 V DC Temllnal No.2: N /orAG L. 27 26 25 2' 23 22 21 20 H~/ B • + + b d \ a ill ill ill ill d "f f Ell ill <1J e ill ill ill ill N (L-) 2 L 1 {L+)1 b c e d Fig.'* . I: LflorAe.(whh reverse polan'ly proteclioll) Ground leonina/jorIle/dblls cable shield ObselW tile fol/owlng: . JorDe Tem/fl/ill No.5 flIml (AWe 14) A B C View A (field hous(ng) View B (sta{n/ess stee/field housing) View C (wall-mount hOI/sIng) COllnedfon compartment cover Cable/or power SIJfJPly:85to260 VAC. 27: PA .4 PROFIBUS PA connection diagram Permanent assignment hoards (order version 83***-"*****·"·F and 83** *-** **. FfeldCare) e J Endress+Hauser 33 .lapterlorcol/nectfllg service inlerlace FXAI93 (Fieldcheck.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Wiring 4. 20 to 55 V AC.'*.JorDe a b c d Groul/d termlnillfor proreclfl'l! earth Ffeldbus cable: Termillal No.that the stripped afld Misted lengths 0/ cable shield to lite ground tennillal are as short as /XJssilJle SelVice <N.the shielding and grounding ojfhe/ieldbus cable --+ Page 27 . ··H) c a b +W PAPA. 26: PA + {wilh rfl1!rse polarity protection} Terminal No. L.. 20: Connecllng the trill1smilter. 2.3..

offers substantial advantages over conventional wiring: • Field devices can be removed. Fig.': fA + (temlillal26) 2 Not COII/Wt'fed 3 Blue wire: fA . 21: 150/300 mm (inch) Connectors/or conflecting to fill:! PROHBUS PA A B C D Aluminum field housfng Stafnless stee/field housing Protection cap/orconneclor Fieldbus confle(1or E F G Adapter PC 13.:?f.. This connection tectmology using prefabricated disU·ibution modules and plug-in connecto!.. --> Page 139 A B ~ • p.Wiring Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Fieldbus connector Note l The connector can only be used for PROFIBUS PA devices..'.. o.5 Connector at housing (male) Female connector Pill assigllment I color cades: . when constructing new star diSlributo" using 4-channel or 8-£hannel distribution modules. BrowlI wirt. c.g.. replaced or added at any time during normal operation. o.5 / M 20. disU·ibution modules etc. • Existing cable infrastructures can be used and expanded instantly. • Installation and maintenance are significantly easier. Fieldbus connectors for reU·ofitting can be ordered from Endress+Hauser as a spare part. The device can therefore be supplied with the option of a ready-mounted fie1dbus connector. Communication is not interrupted.1) 5 6 7 Mfddle/emale COf/nector nal assigned Positioning groOl'e Positioning kW 34 Endress+Hauser . e. The connection technology of PROFIBUS PA allows measuling devices to be connected to the fieldbus via uniform mechanical connections such as T-boxes..(lennil/aI2?) 4 Black wire: ground (instructions/or connection ~ Page 3.

Endress+Hauser 35 . the iris spring is pressed onto the shield. with surrounding contact of the cable gland (iris spring). • Always keep the connection of U.40 to +302 O F) 3A Nominal current per contact Nominal vollage Resistance to tracking 125 to 150 V DC In accordance with the VDe Standard 01 10/150 Croup 10 KC600 Volume resistance Insulation resistance s a mQ In accordance with lEe 512 Part2 :S: 10 12 n In accordance with lEe 512 Part 2 Shielding of the cable connecrionl T-box Use cable glands with good EMC properdes.5 Degree of protection IP 67 In accordanc!? with DIN 40 050 lEe 529 Contact surface HousIng material CuZnAu Cu ln. surrace Nr V . This is particularly bue for offset boxes when these are connected to a PROF/BUS PA measuring device using a plug-In cable. In such a case.e PG thread is screwed closed. Ideally. making a conductive connection between the shielding and the metal housing. The shielding mesh is located under the iris spring.a U. When U.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Wiring Technical data (/ieldhus connector)' Connection cross sectlon Connector thread 0. cable glands with iris springs should be used for the cOlUlection of the shielding.2 In accordance with UL . The shield is placed on the T-box \. This requires small differences in potential.94 flammability OperaUng temperature -40 to +85 "c 1-40 to + 185 "F) Ambient temperature -40 to + 150 "C (.e ilis spring that is inside the cable gland. A junction box or connection is to be considered part of the shielding (Faraday cage).e shielding as short as possible. • Do not interrupt the shielding of the PA cable . and possibly potential matching.75 mm l PC 13. use a metallic plug in which the cable shielding is attached to Ule plug housing (such as prefablicated cables).

Compliance with tile following paints is mandatory following installation in the field or serVicing. cable entries. • Do not remove the grommet from the cable entry. in order to ensme that IP 67 protection is maintained: • The housing seals must be clean and undamaged when inserted into their grooves. cable el/tnes 36 Endress+Hauser . a Fig. • The cables used for cOlmection must be of the specified outside diameter -> Page 150. cleaned or replaced if necessary. The seals must be dried.oce fulfill all the requirements for IP 67.Wiling Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 4. The cable entries may not be point up. • Remove ail unused cable entries and insert plugs instead. as othelwise the degree of protection guaranteed by Endress+ Hauser no longer applies.4 Degree of protection The measuring de. 22). • The threaded fasteners and screw cover~ must be firmly tightened. • The cable entries must be firmly tighten (point a -> Fig. 22: Installatiofl iflslmcUOflS. d Caution! Do not loosen the screws of the sensor housing. • The cable must loop down in fi'ont of the cable entry ("water trap") (point b -> Fig. This arrangement prevents moisture penetrating the entry. 22).

firmly tightened and correctly sealed? Cables looped as ·water traps"? Are all housIng covers Installed and firmly tightened? Electrical connection or PROFIBUS OP/PA Are all the connecting components (T-boxes.Proline Promass 83 PROABUS DP/ PA Wiring 4.5 Post-connection check Perfonn the foUowing checks after completing electrical installation of the measuring device: Device condlUon and speclllcations Are cables or the devIce damaged (vlsuallnspectlonj? Blectrlcal connectIon Notes Notes 85 to 260 V AC (45 to 65 Hz) 20 to S5 V AC (45 to 65 Hz) 16to62VDC Does the supply voltage match the specificatIons on the nameplate? Do the cables comply with the specIficatIons? PROFIBUS DP-+ Page 24 PROFIBUS PA ~ Page 25 Sensor cable -+ Page 29 Do the cables have adequate straIn relief? Cables correctly segregated by type? Without loops and crossovers? See the wiring diagram Inside the cover of the terminal Are the power supply and sIgnal cables correctly connected? compartment Are all screw term inals firmly tightened? Are all cable entries Installed.J connected with each other correctly? Has each f1eldbus segment been terminated at both ends with a bus terminator? Has the max. length 01 the fteldbus cable been observed in accordance with the PROF/BUS specifications? Has the max. etc. connectors. PROFIBUS PA -+ Page 26 PROFIBUS DP -+ Page 25 PROFI BUS PA --+ Page 27 ~ Page 26 Endress+Hauser 37 . length of the spurs been observed In accordance with the PROF IBUS specIfications? Is the fteldbus cable fully shielded and correctly grounded? -+ Page 36 Notes - PROFIBUS DP-+ Page 52 ff. PROFIBUS DP ~ Page 24 ft. Ju nction boxes.

@j'@J@j j ~ lJ' ~ Fig. Operation Quick operation guide Local display (option) --> Seite 39 The local display enables you to read all important variables directly at the measuring pOint.1 I. Fie/dCare) Jumper/miniature switches/or hardware settings (write protection. Configuration/operating programs (e. Jumpers/miniature switches for hardware settings . configure device-specific parameters in the field and perform commissiolung. 23: 2A Methods 0/ operating PROF/BUS PAIDP 28 3 Local display jordevlce operatlofl in tlw field (option. address mode} 38 Endress+Hauser .Operation Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 5 5. You can obtain special configuration and operating programs from various manufacturers for these pmposes. Operating programs --> Seite 47 The configuration of profile and devicE>-specific parameters is plimarily done via the PROFIBUS interface. The user has a number of options for configllling and commissiolung the device: 2.g.-------------.g.PROFIBUS DP --> Page 50 . 2B 3 1 / j . FiefdCare) joroperatiofl via PROF/BUS DPiPA Configuration/operating program/or operating by means oj the FXA193 sClYice interface (e. device address.PROFIBUS PA--> Page 55 You can make the following hardware settings using a jumper or miniature switches on the 110 board: • Address mode configuration [select software or hardware addressing) • Device bus address configuration [for hardware addressing) • Hardware write protection enabling/disabling ~ Note! AdesCliption of the configuration of the CUlTent output [active/ passive) and the relay output [NC contacVNO contact) can be found in the "Hardware settings" section. --> Page 53 3.

Display Optical sensors/or "Toucll Cofllro!" /'fils/mIl/us k.\)02 [ .HOME pos(f{on ~ Entry hlto tlwjilllclfon matrix . select parameters . bar graph.Exit the jUlIctlon matnx step by step Endress+Hauser 39 . You can change the assignment of display lines to different variables to suit your needs and preferences (--> see the "Description of Device Functions" manual).kEys 15m} sfmullaneous{y to trfggertlle jollowfngjWH11olls: 4 ~ HOME position .Press and IIold dowl/ +/ . dialog teA1s. etc.1 Local display Display and operating elements The local display enables you to read all important parameters directly at the measwing point and configure the device using the "Quick Setup" or the function matrix.S3Ve the numerlol valu(. this is where measured values andlor status variables (direction of flow.keysjor longer tllall3 secollds ~ Return directly to HOME posilfoll .-~ In"! \ +24.Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Operation 5. Tile display as 11 appears when normal measuring is fn progress Is JulOwn as the HOME posilfoll (operiJlllIg mode).97 x r>d J" 2 3 Fig.1are displayed.s you illput or settings you change .2 5.eys ~ 2 3 HOME IXJsl1lol1 ~ Direct acc:ess to totalizer values and aclual vallles o/Inputs/outputs . y\' y m{ +1863.jallll messages and notice messages.Enter fIIlfIlCrical values.2.lou~lfne liquid crystal display sholVs measured vallles. groups and fUl/ctlon groups within the/ul/ctioll matrix Press the +/ . The display consists of four lines.Cancel data entry Hiller f<ey . 24: Display and operating elements liquId crystal display The backlft. " /.Select d{f/erefll blocks. empty pipe.

the local display has different clisplay functions: Device without batching software: From HOME position.502 X -Fig.tloflj J 2 3 " MaIn IIl1e: shows tlie main measllred va/lies AdditfOl/allfll(': 51/01'15 adrift/onal mea5ull!d van"ables and status varIables In/ormation IIl/e: S/tOl'. e.). *f-. You will find a detailed description on --'> Page 43. bar graph dfsplay "Info fcons ' jfeld: icons representing add/tfonal In/omJatfol1 on the measured vailles are shown ill thisjfekt. bar graph.2 Display (operating mode) The display area consists of three lines in all. Variables multiplexed in this way altemate evelY 10 seconds on the display.CHIP ~ Page 118 40 Endress+Hauser .!S additional in/anI/alton 01/ tile measumd van'ables and status variables. use the keys to open an "Inlo Menu" contallung the following information: • Totalizer (including overflow) • Actual values or states of the configured inputs/outputs • Device TAG number (user-<lefinable) --'> Scan of individual values within tlle Info Menu 68 (Esc key) --'> Back to HOME position rn rn Device with batching software: On measUling devices \vitll installed batching software (F-CHIP-) and a suitably configured display line. Multiplex mode: A maximum of two dilferent display variables can be assigned to each line.g.2.2. you can cany out filling processes directly using the local display. Error messages: Display and presentation of system/process enors 4 --'> Page 46 6 5 +24. and/or status variables (direction of flow. You can change the assignment of display lines to different variables to suit your needs and preferences (--'> see the "Description of Device Functions" manual). this is where measured values are displayed. etc.3 Additional display functions Depending on tlle order option (F-CHIP-).Operation Proline Promass 83 PROFlBUS DP/PA 5. 25: 1 Typical displayJor f/ormal operatfng mode (HOME {X)s. 5 6 " Measured vallll's' field: the current measured vailles 3ppear ill tltlsjiefd • Unif of measlIf'P ' field: "1(> units of measure and tfme defined/or (/I(> current measlllvd values appear {n lids field 5.

.lm 41 ..2..1) 11» ~ oN N- % Target corrected volume flow Mass flow ...mll<~ e R Reference density ..(I11!7 N 0 "'. device status. '))) 1.'. lIll Volume flow ~ d21 .... II ton Cu rrent output 1 to n P I to n Pu lse output I to n F 1 to n Frequency outpu t Measuring mode: 5 I to n Status outpuVrelay output 1 to n Status Input . . Y» U!I PULSATING flOIV IN ~ .-(.>JIIl l Ca rrier corrected \'olume flow % N ri1 % Target volume flow :/.l Carrier mass flow ~ % Carrier mass flow ")J I I>O e Fluid density .111 '1 Target mass flow ~ % Target mass flow ~:Q1I .:: iN oJo. Endress+Hauser wt Batchlng quantity upwards .· lOl l(C1 ..'>}) !!.:: . and error messages. 7 m. .X'.. .>0 1 W1 ..~ Batchlng quantity downwards " <:(..4 Icons The icons which appear in the field on the left make it easier to read and recognize measured variables.. Icon S I MeanJng Icon P MeanIng System error Fault message (wIth effect on outputs) Process error Notice message (wIthout effect on outputs) .1 -:. 10'(.. ) 11:l' 1 Batch quantity Total batchlng quantity .1(1 11" O:-)J1I<~ m1 ......Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Operation 5.:«J1\d Target correctl'd volume flow ~ ~ CarrIer volume flow 00::."))l l '> ~1l" Target volume flow ~ 00::1 ..

OK TOTi TOTS! UNC ... Totalizer I to 3 (TOTAL module) with status GOOD . '»1 11" AO BAD Display value (module DISPLAY_VA LU E) with status BAD .. Analog Input I to 6 (AI module) w ith TOTi TOTS! OK ... for example via PLC (Class 1 master) via PROF1BUS active .... )·~ l l'..~ i= <- Flu id temperature >. OK All Al E.j --> (scrolling display) (e . Analog Input 1 to 6 (AI module) with status BAD .c 'n~ Output value OUT.. )). ". OK . BAD Totalizer I to 3 (TOTA L module) o:G)11N with status BAD 42 Endress+Hauser .. Totalizer 1 to 3 (TOTAL module) with status UNC = uncertain Output value OUT. BAD UNC . All AI6 BAD . uncertaIn "'<'~!l' Output value OUT.g... UNC Output value OUT... via the operating program "Fieldeare") Display value (module DISPlAY_VAWE) wit h status GOOD ""'luI Display value (modu Ie DISPLAY_VALUE) with status UNC = uncertain UNC .Operation Proline Promass 83 PROFI BUS DP/PA Icon Meaning Icon Meaning Ix Batch coun ter (x times ) . ~ OK RO RO Acyclic communication Cyclic communication via PR OFIBUS active.:w .?)"':I)J~ All AlE. UNC >.»jIlI' Output value OUT..»"!~ TOTi TOTS! BAD .y.. ~ -mlj :lol status liNG . Analog Input t to 6 (A I module) with status GeX)D Output value OUT.

G -+ Selection of the batching fluid (BATC H #1 to 61 If the 'ACCESS CUSTOMER" option was selected for the ' PRESET batch quantity" prompt In the "Batching' Quick Setup. accessories --> Page 120) . the de\1ce can be fully deployed in the field as a "batch controller". If the ' LOCK ED' optIon was selected. .5 I " .-+ Initial setUngs for the batching process No.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Operation 5. / ..5 I ~I 2. · PRESET . I START II PRESET II MATRIX I ~ ~~~sT o==I~I=H=oL=D=I~ . . r----. +2.5 Controlling the batching processes using the local display Filling processes can be carried out directly by means of the local display with the aid of Ule optional "(Batching)" software package (F-CHIP. Punctlon BATCH SEL ECTOR BATCH OUANTIlY Settings 7200 7203 E. The follOwing "softkeys" then appear on the bottom line of the local display --> Fig.TRIX I Fig.~Rlx~ I =p . the batchlng quantity can be altered via the local display.. 3. 7265 RES ETTOTAL OUANTllY / TOTALIZE R Resets the batchlng quantity counter or the total batch lng quantity to '0'. New softkeys (STOP / HOLD or GO ON) now appear on the display.---. Various batching process functions requiJing configuration will now appear on the display: 2. Therefore.. / 00 I Wi 0.PRESET = middie display key (El) . the hatchIng quantity can only be read and cannot be altered until the private code has been entered .. the "START' or "PRESET' softkeys reappear on the display.MATRIX = light display key (0 ) Press the "PRESET (8)" key. Procedw'e: I.. --> Fig.-----.------. After exiting the PRESET menu. you can now start the batclling process by pressing "START (8)".START = left display key (8 ) .0 I /I " .2. Configure all the required batching functions and assign Ule lower display info line (= BATCHING KEYS) using the "Batch" Quick Setup menu (--> Page 63) or use the function matrix (--> Page 44). "= 1 STOP II GO ON I : : . 26: COllfroll/ilg batcliing processes using lite local display {softkeysj Endress+Hauser 43 . 26 STOP (8) --> Stops batchi ng process HOLD (8 ) --> Interrupts batching process (soflkey changes to "GO ON") GO ON (El) --> Continues batching process [softkey changes to "HOLD") After the batch quantity is reached. continue or stop the batching process at any time. You can use these to interrupt.----. 26: .

. t -. 3. 27: H~ . -R .g.. numeJical values ~ --7 Save your enDies Exit the function manix: .. ... OUTPUTS) Select a group [e. ..3 Brief operating instructions on the function matrix Note' • See the general notes --> Page 45 • Function descriptions --7 see the "Description of Device Functions" manual" I. ®'[8j <D v~· . TIME CONSTANT) Change parameter / enter numerical values: rn --> Select or enter enable code. CURRENT OUTPUT I) Select a function group (e. .'1 .HI> . Fig. HOME position --> 0 --> Entry into the function mamx Select a block (e. 4.~ ~ . . ..:«-111·' Selectfngjul1clions and cvnjlgun"ng parameters {jullction matnx} 44 Endress+ Hauser .Repeatedly press Esc key (6i'l) --> Return step-by-step to HOME position 6.g.' 0 E @ GEl E G~ N '" ' ••.. parameters. 5. .Rll ( - . .Operation Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 5. :-" @ @ @ . I 'dl @ [.Press and hold down Esc key (6'0) for longer than 3 seconds --> HOME position .g. 2. CONFIGURATION) Select a function (e.1'-.rJ-.g.

• If "0" is entered as the customer's code. This saves yow' setting or starts a function. If you use a code numher of your choice. in tile "Description of Device Functions" manual which is a separate part 01 these Operating "lSouctions. Note! • The transmitter continues to measure while data entry is in progress. Ilyou do so . • Return to the HOME position is automatic il no key is pressed for 5 minutes. rn d Caution! All functions are described in detali.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Operation 5. are arranged on a number of menu levels (blocks. for the sake of clarity. for example. Please contact Enctress+ Hauser if you have any questions. as is the function mamx itself. • Celtain functions prompt you to confirm your data enmes. rn d Caution! Changing certain parameters such as all sensor characteristics. you exclude the possibility of unauthorized PelSOllS accessing data (--> see the "Description of Device Functions" manual) . as applicable. There is no need to change these parameters under normal circumstances and consequently.2 Enabling the programming mode The function matrix can be disabled. Press to select "SURE [ YES [" and press 0 to confirm. i. • If the supply voltage fails all preset and parameterized values remain safely stored in the EEPROM. • You can switch off certain functions IOFF). influences numerous functions of the entire measuring system. and function groups) . a prompt lor the code automatically appears on the display. Each cell in the function matiix is identified by a numerical or letter code on the display.1 General notes The Quick Setup menu contains the default settings that are adequate for commissioning. Complex measuring operations on the other hand necessitate additional functions tilat you can configure as necessru. A numerical code (factory setting = 83) has to be entered before settings can be changed. You can also disable programming in the "ACCESS CODE" function by entering any number (other than the customer's code). related functions in other function groups will no longer be displayed.3. Endress+Hauser 45 . The function mab'ix. Comply with the following instructions when entering codes: • If programming is disabled and the operating elements are pressed in any function.3.e. Disabling the function matrix IUles out the possibility of inadvertent changes to device functions. • Programming mode is disabled automatically if you do not press a key within 60 seconds following automatic return to the HOME position.3 Disabling the programming mode Programming mode is disabled if you do not press an operating element within 60 seconds following automatic return to the HOME position. 5. comprises a multiplicity of additional functions which. 5.y and customize to suit your process parameters. numerical values or factOlY settings. programming is always enabled! • The Endress+Hauser service organization can be of assistance if you mislay your personal code.3 . Comply with the following instiuctions when configuring functions: • You select functions as described --> Page 44. particularly measuring accuracy. the current measured values are output via the signal outputs or the fieldbus communication in the normal way. they are protected by a special code known only to the Endress+Hauser service organization. groups. therefore.

oce always assigns system and process errors which occur to two types of elTor messages (fault or notice messages). If two or more system or process errors occur.tion of most treen! erroroccurmnce /holll's:minutes:secondsj 5. are always identified and classed as "fault messages" by the measuring device.4. etc.S = system error f = falllt 2 3 Error message type: Error desfgnal iOI/ message. --> Page 124 • Process error.2 Error message type The measUling de. hardware errors.g. • If an elTor message occurs. --> Page 133 1 -I- P r. P: process error) • Displaying the de. the error with the highest priority is the one shown on the display. e.g.1 Error messages Type of error Errors that occur during commissioning or measuring are displayed immediately. Nolice message (f) • The error in question has no effect on the current operation and the outputs of the measuring device. P: process error) • Displaying the device status on PROF1BUS DP/PA --> Page 124 Faull message ( ~) • The error in question interrupts or stops the CWTent operation and has an immediate effect on tile outputs.4. e.'= lIotice message 4 5 Error number Dura. e. an upper or lower signal level for the breakdown information according to NAMUR NE 43 can be output . type of error (S: system error.":.oce status on PROFIBUS DP/PA --> Page 124 Note! • Error conditions can be output via the relay outputs or the fieldbus commulucation. type of error (S: system error. The measuring system distinguishes between two types of error: • Syslem error: This group includes all device errors. --> Page 122 ff. Serious system errors. The response of the outputs (fallsafe mode) can be defined by means of functions in the function man'iJe --> Page 137 • Displayed as --> Lighbung flash ( ~ ).I- f xxxxxxxxxx -#000 00:00:05 I 2 Fig.4 5. resulting in different weightings. module defects. ll11 4 Error messages on the display (exan/plr) Errortype: r = process error.. 46 Endress+Hauser . fluid not homogeneous. 28: I I 5 3 ". etc.Operation Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 5.g.oa the current output. • Displayed as --> Exclamation mark (!).' This group includes all application €lTors.

2 Operating program "ToF Tool.e conligW'ation and diagnosis of intelligent field devices. manufacturer-independent tool for the operation.3 Operating program "SIMATIC PDM" (Siemens) SIMATIC PDM is a standardized. you also have a simple but effective tool for monitoring devices. The Proline flowmeters are accessed via a selvice interface or .Heldtool Package": • Commissioning.1 Operating options FieldCal'e HeldCare is Endress+Hauser's FDT-based plant asset managementtool and allows ti.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Operation 5. configuration. Endress+Hauser 47 . maintenance and diagnosis of intelligent field devices.oa the service interface FXA I93.5.5. 5. By using status information.Fieldtool Package" Modular software package consisting of the service program "ToF Tool" for configuration and diagnosis of ToF level measuring devices [time-of-flight measurement) and evolution of pressW'e measuring instruments as well as the "Fieldtool" se"oce program for the configuration and diagnosis of Proline flowmeters.5.5 5. maintenance analysis o Configuring flow meters • Service functions o Visualization of process data o Troubleshooting o Reading out the velification data and updating the software of the "Heldcheck" flow simulator 5. Contents of the "ToF Tool . The Proline flowmeters are accessed via a se"oce interface or via tile selvice interface FXAI93.

endress.gsd eh3_1529.com (--+ Download --+ Software --+ Device Drivers) • CD-ROM (Endress+Hauser order number: 56004088) • www.com (--+ Download --+ Software --+ Device Drivers) • CD-ROM (Endress+Hauser order number: 56003894) • www.bmp/.gsd Standard Format: Before configuring the PROF1BUS network.com • www.endress.gsd EH_1529_d.Operation Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 5.dib EH _1529_s. PROFIBUS DP Valid for device software: Device data PROFIBUS OP: 3.04. printed and used for official certification.0 1529 (Hex) 9742 (Hex) ---7 PROFI LE VERSION function (6 160) -) DEVICE ID function (61621 Extended Format (recommended): eh3x 1529.bmp/.XX -) DEVICE SOFTWARE function (8100) Prome Version: Promass 83 ID No.4 Device description files for operating programs The following table illustrates the suitable device descliption file for the operating program in question and then indicates where these can be obtained.2007 Sources for obtaining device descriptions/program updates: • www.dlb EH_1529_TI.dib SofMare release: Operati ng program/device description : Promass 83 GSD file 08 .com /--+ Download --+ Software --+ Device Drivers) • ww.v.bmp/. Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more information.endress. read and follow the information ~ Note! for using the GSD file -) Page 87 U. When used in conjunction with the "FieldCare" software package. Profile GSD fiie: BItmaps: PA039742.: GSD fi le Information : Promass 83GSD file: 3. test results can be imported into a database.: Profile lD No.de Profile GSD file FieldCare / DTM SIMATIC PDM Tester/sim ulator: Device: Fieldcheck How to acquire: • Update by means of FieldCare via Field flash Note! The Fieldcheck tester/simulator is used for testing flowmeters in the field.feldgeraete. 48 Endress+ Hauser .5.profibus.

com • www..de eso file Pro file GSD file. When used in conjunction with the "FieldCal'e" software package. printed and used for official certification.+ DevIce Drivers) • CD-ROM (Endress+Hauser order number: 560(4088) • www..+ DevIce DrIvers) • www. read and follow the Information for using the file --+ Page 87 ft.: GSD file information: Q7421Hex) EJitended Format (recommended ): eh3x152A.com (.gs<! EH_152A_d..endress.hmp/.gsd Promass 83 eSD file: Sta ndard Fonnat: Before configuring the PROFI BUS network.-.hmp/.: 0 3. FieldCare/DTM S[MAT[C POM Tester/sImulator: Device : Fieldch.-.2007 Sources for obtaining device descriptions/program updates: • www..com (-+ Download --+ Software --+ DevIce Drivers) • CD-ROM (Endress+ Hauser order number: 560(3894) • w\vw.+ Download. ~ Note! eso Profile eso file: PA [3Q7 42.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Operation PROFIBUS PA Valid for device software: Device data PROFIBUS PA: 3.dib Bitmaps: EH_1S2A_s.bmp/.feldgeraete.-.profibus. Note' The Fieldcheck tester/simulator is used for testing fiowm eters in the field.dib Software release: Operati ng program/device description: Promass 83 08. Contact your Endl'ess+Hauser representative for more information. test results can be imported into a database..XX -+ DEVICE SOFT\VARE function (8100) Profile Version: Promass 83 1 No. OEV[CE [0 function 16 [62) Profile lD No..endress.endress..0 I S2A (Hex) -+ PROFILE VERSION function (6160) .eck How to acquire: • Update by means of FleldCare via Fleldnash.04.dib EH_ 1S2A_n.+ Software. Endress+Hauser 49 .-.com (--+ Down load --+ Software.gsd eh3_152A.

vfa tile operating program 'FfeldCare "j Wn1e protection switched 011 '" it is not possible to write to the device junctions via PROF/BUS (iilyclic data transmission. 'Narlling! Risk of electric shock. e.1 ~ ~ 1.1 Write protet1ion switctled off (factory setting) =: it is possilJfe to write to tile devicejullctfolls via PROF/BUS (acyc/tc data transmission.6 5. I. 50 Endress+Hauser .2 ---t Page /22 If.Lit contilluousfy-4 ReadyJvroperativH . 4.t A B Flexible assignment board Permallent assignment board Jumper for switching write protection on and off /.1 PROFIBUS DP hardware settings Configuring the write protection A jumper on tile I/O board provides tile means of switching hardware wlite protection on or off. Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the elec~'onics compartment.2 A 1. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedme.6. via the operating program "FieldCare"J.g.g.1 ~ ~ " 1. e. When hardware write protection is switched on.Not lit ---t Not ready lor operatfoll . 2.g. Switch off power supply. Exposed components cany dangerous voltages. via the operating program "FieldCare"j LED Ovetvic'lV vJ LED states: .' /10 wan. Configure the hardware write protection accordingly witil tile aid of the jumpers (see Figw·eJ. it is not possible to write to the device nmctions via PROFIBUS (acyclic data transmission."las!lfflg ---t System or process error jJfeseflf 1. Remove the I/O board. e. 29: Switching write protection on and offwilll tile aid 0/ a lumperoll fill. 3.2 Fig.Operation Proline Promass 83 PROF/BUS DP/PA 5. 1.

3.2 Configw'ing the device address The address must always be confi gured for a PROFIBUS DP/ PA device. If an address is not configured correctly. Exposed components cany dangerous voltages. 3(J: Addrnssfog with the aId o{mfllfaillre swi/clles all tile /10 board I OFF ON a b MinIature switches for setting the device addrrss (Illustrated: I + 1tJ +. the device is not recognized by the master. 2 ~ 4 8 16 32 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 64 / b FJ Ji' I J Ii I Fig. 4. . Loosen the Allen screw 13 mm) of the securing clamp.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Operation 5. In a PROFlBUS DP I P network. Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment. Ali measUlingdevices are delivered from the factOlywith the address 126 and with software addressing.32 = devfce address 49) M/il/atore switches for lite addl1!ss mode (method 0/ addressIng): OFF = software addn!ssillg via local operation/operatillg program (factory sell/ng) ON = Itiu'dware addressIng via minfature switches Mill/alUm switches flot assigned c Endress+Hauser 51 . The vafid device addresses are in the range from I to 126. 2. Set the position of U miniature switches on the 1 board using a sharp pointed object. Unscrew cover of tlle elecD Scompartment fi'om the transmitter housing. Addressing via minjature switches Warning! Risk of elecD'ic shock. each add ress can only be assigned A once. Addressing via local operation/operating program Addressing takes place in the FIELDBUS ADDRESS function (6 101 ) ---> see U. 'olllC Remove the local display (if present) by loosening the set screws of the display module. OFF ON ~ 1 t. 5.e /0 Installation is tlle revel~e of the removal procedure.6.e "Description of Device Functions" manual.a rn:. I.

Page 32 The miniature switch for termination is located on tile 1/0 board (see Figure): A SWI 390 B n 2 SW I 390 n ~ 2 ~ 2200: 3 4 ~ ~ ~ OFF ON 3 4 390 ~ ~ ~ OFF ON 220n n . Make sure that the power supply is switched off before YOll remove the cover of the electronics compartment. 52 Endress+Hauser .oa the terminating switch SW I for the last transmitter on the bus: ON . make sure that an external bus terminator is used.5 MBaud: due to the capacitive load of the user and the resulting line reflection. the termination is set .ON .5 MEaud) A ~ FactoI}' setting B '" Setting at the last transmitter Note! It is generally recommended to use an external bus terminator since if a device that is terminated internally is defect.3 Note! Configuring the terminating resistors It is important to terminate the RS485 line correctly at the start and end of the bus segment since impedance mismatch results in reflections on the line which can cause faulty communication transmission. • For baudrates up to 1.6.ON . Warning! Risk of electric shock. . 31: ~7 > Configuring the tenninating resistors (jor baud rates < J. • Device is operated with a baud rate> 1.Operation Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DPIPA 5..ON .. this can result in tile failure of the entire segment. Exposed components cany dangerous voltages. In addition./ /:4 'iX' ::tI' I~ ~ • Fig. the signal lines have to be shielded and grounded for flexible assignment boards ..5 MBaud..

Fig. Current output configuration The current output is configured as "active" or "passive" by means of various jumpers on th e current Warning! Risk of electric shock... Switch off power supply.'lIl output Active C UfTellt output (defaull) Passflt:1 current output Endress+Hauser 53 . 3. Position the jumpers (see Figure). f] +~ ~ +tu . 2. d Caution! Risk of destroying the measuring device.2 Cllrn../ Configuring the current Input willillle aid o/Jumpers filO boarrf} 1. 32: /. Make sure that the power supply is swi tched off before you remove the cover of the eleeti'onies compartment. Remove the 110 board.. Installatioll of the 1/0 board is the reverse of the removal procedure.. I..6.. . Exposed components cany dangerous voltages.4 submodule.. _-------------_ ....oce or external devices connected to it.. Incorrectly set jumpers can cause overcurrents that would destroy either the measuring de. Set the jumpers exactly as shown in the diagram.Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Operation 5. 4.

relay I) Configured as NC col/tacl {factory setting.5 Relay output configuration The relay contact can be configured as a normally open (NO or makel or normaliy closed (NC or breakJ contact by means of two jumpers on the pluggable submodule. Warning! Risk of electric shock.Operation Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DPI PA 5. 3. Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the elecU'onics comparUllent. I ConfEgured as NO collfacl (factory setttllg. I. relay 2) 2 54 Endress+Hauser . Remove the 1 board . Instaliation of the 110 board is the reverse of the removal procedure. 4. /0 Position the jumpers (see Figure). Fig. 2. 33: (ol/flgurfng relay contacts (NeINO) 011 the ronvertible 110 board {sllbmodu/ej with tile I/rlp a/jumpers. you must always change the positions of both jumpers! Note precisely the specified positions of the jumpers. d Caution! If you change the setting. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages.6. Switch off power supply. This configuration can be called up at any time with the ACTUAL STATUS RELAY function (4740J.

via tlie operating program "FfeldCam"j Write protection switched on = It Is not possible 10 write to lite devIce/unctions via PROHIJUS (a(yclfc data transmission.g.(. via tlte operating program " FMdCare"j 2 Jumper without fUl/ction OveNte-w 0/ Lff) states: .g.lioll 011 and off Wnre protection switched off Ua(tory settine) = it is possfble to write to the (Ievlce luncflons via PROf7BUS {acyc/fcdala transmission.vitch off power supply. 3. \lVal'ningl Risk of electric shock. 4. e. I 1. When hardware write protection is switched on.Not fh ---) Not ready/or operation .2 1.1 Pig. Exposed components cany dangerous voltages. Configure the hardware write protection accordingly with the aid of the jwnpers (see Figure) . R emove the 1/0 board . e.I. e.if cOfltllluously ---) Ready /oroperatloll . 34: I. 1.7 5.Flaslllllg ---) System or process ClTOr present ---4 Page 122If- LED Endress+Hauser 55 . Installati on is the reverse of the removal procedure. 2.g.1 PROFIBUS PA hardware settings Configuring the write protection A jumper on the 110 board provides the means of switching hardware write protection on or off. I.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Operation 5. S. Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment. it is not possible to write to the device functions via PROFJBUS Iacyclic data O·ansmission.7.2 Sw/telllng write protedloll 011 alld aI/ with the aid of a jumper (m tlie liD boarrJ Jumper for switching wrile prol(. via the operating program "FJeldCare") .

Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. Unscrew cover of the eleco'onics compartment from the transmitter housing.Operation Proline Promass 83 PROFlBUS DP/PA 5. I. the d". 5.7. 3. The valid de"ce addresses are in tlle range from I to 126. 4. each address can only be assigned once. 35: Addressing IVitli lite afd of minialure switches on tile /10 board 4 I. All measW'ing devices are delivered from the factory with the address 126 and with software addressing. If an address is not configured cOITectly. OFF ON 2 . hardware 3ddrl'ssing vIa milliature switches c Miniature switches not assigned 56 Endress+Hauser . In a PROFIBUS DP/PA network. Addressing via local operation!operating program Addressing takes place in the FlELDBUS ADDRESS function (6 101) --> see the "Description of Device Functions" manual.a 2 32 64 b 3 4 ~ ~ OFF ON a b Miniature sl'II1chesjor setting the device address (fill/strafed: I + 16 + 32 = device address 49) Mil/(ature slVilc!/es!or the address mode (method o/addressll/g): OFF = software addressfllg via local operatiollloperatfng program (factory setting) ON ". Remove the local display (if present) by loosening the set screws of tlle display module. V 7/ 3 4 ~ 2 ~ 1 3 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 2 4 8 16 1/ r Fig. Make sure that tlle power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the e1eco'onies compartment. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages. Set the position of the miniature switches on the I/O board using a sharp pointeci object.2 Configuring the device address The address must always be configured for a PROFlBUS DP/PA device. Loosen the Allen screw 13 mm) of the securing clamp.ce is not recognized by the master. 2. Addressing via miniature switches Warning 1 Risk of electric shock.

• A normal multimeter can be used to check the bus voltage of 9 to 32 V and the current consumption of II mA at the device. please note the following: • The PROFIBUS interface's technical data must be maintained in accordance witll IEC 6 11 58-2 (MBP) .Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning 6 6.XX. Messages: PROFIBUS PA PROMASS 83 Start-up message START-UP RUNNING ".1 Commissioning Function check Make sure that the following function checks have been performed successfully before sWitching on the supply voltage for the measuring de"ce: • Checklist for "Post-installation check" -> Page 23 • Checklist for "PosH:onnection check" -> Page 37 Note! When using PROFIBUS PA.XX ". Various measured value andl or status vatiables appeat· on the display (HOME position). PROPIBUS DP RELAY OUTPUT I RBLA Y OUTPUT 2 STATUS INPUT 1 ". The device then performs internal test functions and the following messages are shown on the local display: Messages: PROFIBUS OP PROMASS 83 START-UP RUNNING ". PROMASS 83 DBVICB SOI'l"WARB V XX.vitched on via the supply voltage. an error message indicating the cause is displayed. Endress+Hauser 57 . Note! If startup fails. SYSTEM OK Beginning of normal measuring mode SYSTEM OK --+ OPERATION -+ OPERATION NOlmal measUling mode commences as soon as startup completes. the device is operational and can be s. PROMASS83 Current software version Softwa re DaVICB SOFTWARE V XX.2 Switching on the measuring device Once the function check has been performed successfully.XX.XX ". 6. PROFIBUS PA EXisting input/output modu les Input/output modules ".

.l.':::'.a. No ConIigosa ar.pu1 1 II COSTenlou'..oma~~amll!eta~on oT Iha dls~ay ~ 'll ~ I y" I .al '1 1 '. S~~ I I y" I . ConS!l'Jnl anolhef ouIpuI? I i.olhaf syslllffi uni t? I I " C... FieldCare.d..3 Quick Setup In the case of measuring devices witllOut a local display. 6.g. mode ~sign.ak:ula~on Tamperallre """ '1 L COlT. can be configured quickly and easily by means of the follovving Ouick Setup menus.1 Quick Setup "Commissioning" I ~-~ 1_® '--"' GJ _ IOticX SIt~ \Qi@@j HOME-P OSITION 6 1 --"' l con~~sl~w1 ®J' I I I l angoaga"'-"l Pra'saHing • II ·D Se!action pra·satt: oer ery Sailings I ..Cn of display ? I No J ConYl lUlication I I Fig.. • VOMlIaff!1N I Selactloo system lri ls ~aN Carr..3. ali the important device parameters for standard operation.nenl 0u'.li I Failsafa mode"l I . . the indil. II I No I I Automatic OOI1figuai.''1 1 "'''"':''1 I s~oll I fr~' I vaI~"1 I 1 ::i 1 "~I End value VcAJe 0.. Do~bll l E~. nxx:a " l I lima conslNlll I 0\I1pul $i~01 I Failla!e n~eJ I Ti me cons~tl I Failsafe nlOdel I y" I Meils. '11 cw'C.. as well as additional functions..22j I Valuo 20 nl/\ l I ValUlI F Ki~ l I Meas. Carrylog ovl anolhaf Ouidt Setup? Batch'ng II Pulsating ft!1N II Gas meas. Cod . ~~~ Fix.".:~ "11 &po Coeff.dual parameters and functions must be configured via tile operating program. Density T~rallre I <>.pvI Osranl Se!edon ou1put type Fr&qJPulsiI ouIpYll I II I F""""" Freq. I I 1 Uri\ Mass roaw 11 "".. nm: 1 I Milas.. Au'. '11 """ I '1 c. ov'.1 <ow"if 0""". e.Commissioning Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA 6... PUse output NiO 1 ". pvt "'" II Oper ation M~ I I "".. 1 "'''''.. Demay Refl!f8llCe II Calrua led Ref. I No I Carrying oullhe sal€chtd Quid( S&tup I I 36: Quick Setup ·Commissloning" 58 Endress+Hauser .'4 InA Value Flow PUSO . If the measUling device is equipped vvith a local display. I I Rtiference t'. A~tuaI Settngs II I Ma ss r...::. Vol. Vol.

"NO" Is the only option displayed when no further outputs are available. m The ' DELIVERY SETTINCS' option sets every selected unit to the factory setting. I1J @ NO (!J The eJ!E'Cution of other Quick Setups Is desc ribed In the following sections. The 'YES' option remains visible unlll all the outputs have been configured. • The QUICK SETUP PULS. The ' ACTUAL SETTINCS' accepts the units you con figured beforehand.option contains the following basIc settings/factory settings YES Main Hne = mass flow AddItional line = totalizer 1 Information line = operating/system condition The eJ!lstlng [selected) settings rema in. ' NO' is the only option displayed when no further unIts are available. The "automatic parameterization of the display. FLOW Is only available Jf a current and/or pulse/frequency output Is avallable. The stored parameters remain valid . This prompt only appears if a current output and/or pulse/frequency output Is available. volume and corrected volume Is derived trom the corresponding flow unit G (J) The ' YES' option remains visible until all the units have been configured. Th e unit for mass. Endl'ess+Hausel' 59 . @ On ly units not yet configu red In the current Setup are offered for selection In each cycle.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning ~ Note! • The display returns to the cell SETUP COMMISSIONING (1002) if you the press l~idl key combina tion during parameter Interrogation. ~ Note! • The QUICK SETUP BATCHING Is on ly a\'allable when the optional software package BATCHING is installed and PROFIBUS DP is present. Only the outputs not yet configured In the current Setup are offered for selection In each cycle. • The ' Commissioning' Quick Setup must be ca rried out before one of the Quick Setups explained below is ru n.

3. 2[YVJ Flow cllRraclerislics a/various lypes of pump B With self!re/y pulsatingj/olV Willi low pufsalingjlow !-(yffmler cam pump 2--qlinder calli pUfIIP Magnefic pump Peristaltfc pump. for example. unvruying output signal : • Measuring system damping: FLOW DAMPING function --> Increase value • CUiTent output damping: TIME CONSTANT function --> Increase value 60 Endress+ Hauser . flow fluctuations of this nature can be compensated over the entire flow range and pulsating liquid flows measured correctly.Commissioning Proline Prom ass 83 PROFlBUS DP/PA 6. Note! It is always advisable to work through the "Pulsating flow" Quick Setup menu if there is any uncertainty about the exact flow characteristic.37: A .j/e>.. it is not absolutely necessary to work tiu'ough the Quick Setup menu. Note! Before carrying out the Quick Setup "Pulsating How" the Quick Setup "Commissioning" has to be executed. for example with gear-type. peristaltic and cam-type pumps. however. threecylinder or multi-cylinder pumps. Certain types of pump such as reciprocating. it is advisable to adapt the functions listed below in the function matrix (see the "Description of Device Functions" manual I to suit local process conditions in order to ensure a stable.') Severely pulsating flow Once several device functions have been configured in the "Pulsating flow" Quick Setup menu. Negative flows can occur with pumps of these types on account of the closing volume of the valves or valve leaks.ible colllleclifig hose Multl-<:ylillder reciprocating pump 2 3 4 . create a flow characterized by severe periodic fluctuations. In cases of this nature. --> Page 58 A a a B b (j 1 "ng. Slightly pulsating flow If flow fluctuations are no more than minor. as is the case. Below you will find detailed instructions on how to use this Quick Setup menu.2 Quick Setup "Pulsating Flow" Note' The "Pulsating flow" Quick Setup is only available if the device has a current output or a pulse! frequency output.

l l Measuring mode nWel I Measuring mode "~ lime constant :a~ I No Alarm delay I I C2> Configure another output? I I I I I I I! I Fig.11 - lj I I Pulsating no~- l I Current outpull damping DiSPlay~~ j 1 <D Selection of oulpullype I Freq. current range or full scaJe value. Endress+Hauser 61 . Note that this has no effect on values configured beforehand.~ -~) HOME-POSITION QuickSelup 1 9 @ J @ J L --=--. • The Setups can be called up either dlrectty aJter the ' COMM ISSIONINC' Quick Setup or manually by means of the QUICK SETUP PULSATING FLOW (10031 function.o ~ Note! • The display returns to the cell QUICK SETUP PULSATING FLOW (1003) If you press the ~ keycomblnaUon during parameter Interrogation . -/Pulse output 1 1 1 Quit 1 I Operation mode no~ II Frequency 1 1 I JI Pulse l l I I Measuring m~ nmeconsta~ Ye.·~". 38: Q/Jfek.----'l§.. (j) <%> Only the outputs not yet configured In the cu rrent Setup are offered {or selection In each cycle.varuef~ IF-Cut off Off-valuef~ shock suppression Quit Quick Setup pressuress~ j .. "NO' Is the only option displayed when no further outputs are available. Selllp for measun"ng severely pufsatif/gjllJws.CID.. such as measlIIillg range. a~ Assign f ~ LF-Cut off IF-Culoff on. ~. The ' YES' option remains visible until all the outputs have been configured.. I ~: .'-' I .Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Commissioning Performing the "Pulsating flow" Quick Setup This Quick Setup menu guides you systematically through the setup procedure for all the device functions that have to be parametelized and configured for measuring pulsating flows. . .

II/hi ON 50 0 70 Ikg/hl resp. ~ ./PULSE OUTPUT I" (for PRSQUBNCYoperatlng mode) 4206 420S ~·1EASURING MODE PULS... as PULS. the Quick Setup menu calls up all the subsequent functions in succession .llIhl ON SO 0 ISO Ikg/hl or II/hi ON 100 0 350 Ikg/hl or II/hi ON 150 ~ 650 Ikg/hl or II/hi ON 250 ~ ISOO Ikg/hl or II/hi FB = Full bore versions of Promass I CUTOFF 6403 6404 OFF-VALUE LOW FLOW CUTOFF PRESSURE SHOCK SUPPRESSION 50% Os . .0 Ikg/h l or II/hi ON 15 ~ 6. FLOW ( [003) Function No. II/hi ON 40 ~ 45 Ikg/hl resp. FLOW Os TIME CONSTANT Signa] type for °FRBQ.10 Ikg/hl or II/hi ON 4 ~ 0... II/hi ON 50 FB 0 ISO Ikg/hl resp./PULSB OUTPUT 1° (for PULSE operating mode) 4225 Other settings S005 6400 6402 MEASURING MOOE PULS.5 Ikg/hl or IlIhl ON 15 FB 0 IB Ikg/hl resp.Commissioning Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Recommended settings Qulck Setup ·Pulsatlng Flow· HOME position ---4 [D ---4 MEASURED VAR[ABLE (A) MEASURED VAR[ABLE ---4 [J ---4 QU[CK SETep (B) OUiCK SETUP. Repeatedly press and release Esc key 6'6 --} Exit the function matrix step by step 62 Endress+Hauser . FLOW Is TIME CONSTANT Signa] type for "FRBQ. FLOW ALARM OELAY Os ASS[GN LOW FLOW CUTOFF ON-VALUE LOW FLO'I~1 MASS FLOW Setting depends on diameter: ON I ~ 0. Back to the HOME position: -+ Press and hold down Esc key oG for longer than three seconds or . Basic configuration 2002 DISPLAY DAMPING Is Signal type ror "CURRENT OUTPUT I" 4004 4005 MEASURING MOOE PUIS.02Ikg/hl or II/hi ON 2 0 0.45 Ikg/hl or II/hi ON S ~ 2.II/hl ON 25 0 IS lkg/hl resp. II/hi ON 25 FB ~ 45 Ikg/hl resp. II/hi ON 40 FB ~ 70 Ikg/hl resp. 1003 Functlon name OS PUIS FLOW Selection with [18 ) YES After 0 is pressed by way of confirmation.

g. --> Page 58 • You can find detailed information on the batching functions in the separate "Descliption of Device Functions" manual". an appropriate dialog appears concerning the automatic display configuration. tile measuring device can be fully deployed in the field as a "batch controller". Therefore.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Com missioning 6. • You can also directiy control fiUing process using the local display. Endress+Hauser 63 . we recom mend that you rerun the "Commissioning" and/ or "Pulsating How" Quick Setup. You can order this software fi'om Endress+Hauser as an accessory at a later date. MATRIX) to the bottom line of the display. for the calculatio n of afterruns orfor muiti-stage batching procedures. During Quick Setup. These basic settings allow simple [one step) batching processes. Note! • Before carrying out the Quick Setup "Batching" the Quick Setup "Commissioning" has to be executed. --> Page 120 This Quick Setup menu guides you systematically Uu'ough tile setup procedure for all tile device functions tllat have to be parameterized and configured for batching operation. Acknowledge this by clicking "YES". PRESET. This assigns special batching functions (START. must be made '"a the function matrix itself (see the "Description of Device Functions" manual).3. --> Page 43 • You can also directly control the filling process usi ng the fieldbus. These can be directly executed onsite using the three operating keys [ ~ I G I 0 ). Additional settings.3 Quick Setup "Batching" Note! This function is only available when tile additional "batching" software is installed in the measuring device (order option). d Caution! The "Batching" Quick Setup sets certain device functio ns for discontinuous measurement operation. e. If the measuring device is used for continuous How measurement at a later time.

39: all((* Quit Quick Setup I Setup "Ba/elling " Recommended settings are found on thejollmving page. Automatic parameterization of the display \.lID o '...Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA ~ @t1 [Q1 .. . J 47001 478°1 NO II I YES j Max.... Balch 7240 1 Batch Supervision? II TIme 1 j II YES Autom.c:lJ -1 I I Quick Setup B I HOME-POS ITION ~ 1 I as BalchinglDosing 1005 ON-Value Low flow cui off 84021 6603 I I I I I Flow damping 1 Pressure s~ock 6404 1 suppression Batch Selector 72001 7201 Balch Name 1 7203 1 Balch Quantity I Compensation Quantity 1 FIX 7204 II Relay 1 Select Output? r-- ~~lay_ 2 t I I .... Config uration Display? NO II II l ocked PRESET Batch quantity I IAccess customerl l t ... - j y . . _ __ _ .-- - I I Fig.' .L .j Assign Relay Terminal No........I .... ........... 64 Endress+Hauser ...

.ss 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning Recommended settings Quick Setup "Batchlng - HOME position ~0 ~ MEASURED VARIAB LE (A) MEASURED VARIABLE --> ['] --> QU ICK SETUP IB) QUICK SETUP --> ~ --> QUICK SETUP BATCHIN G fiOOs) Function No. the Quick Setup menu calls up all the subsequent functions In succession. T Functlons with a gray background are conngured automatically (by the measuring system itseln ~ Note! ASS IGN LOW FLOW CUTOFF ON-VALUE LOW FLOW CUT OFF 6400 6402 6403 6603 6404 7200 7201 MASS FLOW See Table on Page 62 OFl'-VALUE LOW HOW CUTOFF FLOW DAMPING PRESSURE SHOCK SUPPRESSION BATCH SELECTOR BATCH NAME ASSIGN BATC H VARIABLE BATCH QUANTITY FIXED CORRECTION QUANTITY CORRECTION MODE BATCH STAGES INPUT f{)RMAT 50% o seconds o seconds BATCH ff l BATCH #1 MASS 0 0 OFF I VALUE INPUT BATCH VALVE 1 7202 7203 7204 7205 720B 7209 4700 4780 7220 7240 7241 7242 2200 2220 2400 2420 2600 2620 ASSIGN RELAY TERMINAL NUMBER OPEN VALVE I MAXIMUM BATCH TIME MINIMUM BATCH QUANTllY MAXIMUM BATCH QUANTITY ASSIGN (Main Une) Output (display only) 0% or 0 lunltl oseconds (. switched ofo 0 0 BATCH NAME OFF BATCH DOWNWARDS OFF BATCHING KEYS OF F T ASSIGN (Multiple!: malo line) ASS IGN (Additlonall1ne) ASSIGN (Multiplex addittonaillne) ASSIGN (Information line) ASSIGN (Multiplex Information line) Back to the HOME position: Press and hold down Esc key 08 for longer than three seconds or -4 Repeatedly press and release Esc key 6G -4 Exit the function matrIx step by step -4 Endress+Hauser 65 . Function name Setting to be selected ( Ii?J ) (to ne.t function with 0) 1005 QUICK SETUP BATCHING / DOSING YES After 0 is pressed by way of confirmation.Proline Prom..

40 1.003 0.000 11.08 0.600 2.000 2.00 26.300 1.Commissioni ng Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Low now cutoff / factory settings (v .000 10' Full bore versions of Promass I 66 Endress+Hauser .015 1 2 4 8 15 15 fB 25 25 fB 40 40 fB 50 50 fB BO 100 150 250 FB =0 0.00 0.80 8.00 2600.00 7200.066 0.00 72.00 IBO.600 11.00 300.OO I BO.00 720.00 72.00 720.000 95.000 26.600 6.00 1200.000 I/l' Ill' I' I' ]lh' lJh" 2' 2' 3' 4' 0' 26.0.13 ft /s)) DN 51 units Ikg/h) 1124' 1/12' 1/8' 3/8' us \lolts lib/mIn] 0.000 44.600 6.04 m/s (0.OO 300.000 260 .

40: Oufek. Endress+Hauser 67 . the relevant device functions can be configured either by means of an operating program 01' the local display. Setup "Gas Measuremeflt" Recommended settings are found 01/ tfte follolVlng page. Direct mass measurement based on the Coriolis plinciple is also possible for measuring the flow rate of gases. The "Gas Measurement" Ouick Setup can be called up in the function manix by means of two different functions: • Via the as GAS MEASUREMENT (1004) function --> Fig.4 Quick Setup "Gas Measurement" The measuring de"ce is not only suitable for measwing liquid flow.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning 6.3. Note that direct density and/or volume measurement is not possible! • The flow ranges and measuring accuracy that apply to gas measurement are not the same as those for liquids. For this purpose. Performing the "Gas Measurement" Quick Setup The "Gas Measurement" Ouick Setup menu guides you systematically through the setup procedure for all the device functions that have to be configured for operation with gas. Note! • Only mass and Corrected volume flow can be measured and output with tile gas measurement mode. 40 or • Via the QS COMMISSIONING (1002) function --> Page 58 HOME POSITION Fig.

.-} Press and hold down Esc key 00 for longer than three seconds or .fter 0 Is pressed by way of confirmation. the following applies: Setting: 0. select the system unit "Corrected volume flow" and configure the functions as follows: 2. in Nm3/h) should be displayed and output instead of the mass How le. so the value for the switch-on point [= low flow cutoff) must be correspondingly low. " 6402 6403 OFF-VALUE LOW FLOW CUTOFF Back to the HOM E position: . Function No. Under "Pre-setting".0000 [unltj User Input: Flow rates for gas measurements are low.-} Repeatedly press and release Esc key 66 . Select tile "Commissioning" Quick Setup by means of the function matrix.-} Exit the function matrix step by step " Note' Quick Setup automatically deactivates the function EMPTY PIPE DETECTION 16420] so tilat the instrument can measure flow at low gas pressures.. 68 Endress+Hauser .. referenced to the switch-on point. Corrected volume measurement with gas: Proceed as follows if the corrected volume How le. VOL.0\3 bar) 0421 6461 UNIT REFERENCE DENSITY FIXED REFERENCE DENSITY 3. Function name Setting to be selected ( 18 ) (to next function with [D) 1004 as GAS MEASUREMENT YES . Function name UN[T CURRECTED VOLUME FLOW CORR. 0400 ASS[GN LOW FLOW CUTOFF ON-VALU E LOW flOW CUTOFF On account of the [ow mass flow Invo[ved when gas flows are measured.t. in kg/h ): 1.-} 0.2928 kg/Nm ~ (In relation to 0 °C and 1.. the density related to the reference temperatu re and reference pressure) Example for air: Reference density = 1.g.Commissioning ProUne Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Recommended settings Quick Setup MGas MeasurementHOME position.e. Exit the "Commissioning" Quick Setup menu and return to the HOME pOsition. it Is advisable not to use a low flow cutoff. Setting: OFF [f the ASSIGNMENT LOW flOW CUTOFF function was not set to 'OFF". If the ASSIGNMENT lOW FLOW CUTOFF function was not set to 'O FF' ..-} MEASURED VARIABLE (Al MEASURED VARIABLE -+ [CJ -+ aUICK SETUP (B) aUICK SETUP -+ ~ -+ as GAS MEASUREMENT(1004) Function No. the following applies: Setting: 50% User input: Enter the switch-off point as a positive hysteresis in %. CALC SettJng to be selected ( ~ ) (to next function with 0 ) Select desired engineering unit 0404 6460 FIXED REFERENCE DENSITY Select desired engineering unit Enter the gas-dependent reference density (I. the Quick Setup menu calls up all the subsequent functions in succession..g.

Factory setUng: MANLIFACT. SPEC .. Quick SetufJ communlcatloll Quick Setup ·Communlcation - HOME posi tion -+ [D .. 'II .0 --+ The measuring device Is used as the replacement for the previous Promass 63 model (compatibility mode) .... Enter the device address (perm itted address range: I to 126) Factory setting: 126 6140 SELECT ION GSD Select the operating mode (CSD file1 which should be used for cyclic communication with the PROFI BUS master (Class I).. 4 J. Function name QUICK SETUP Setting to be selected ( Ii!! J (to nen (unction with 0 ) 1006 YES --+ After (D Is pressed by way of confirmation.J.--_ _-. These functions can be configured quickly and easily by means of the "Communication" Ouick Setup. ~lANUFAC T \'2.5 Quick Setup "Communication" To establish cyclic data transfer. --+ The measuring device Is operated in the manufacturer-speclfic mode.... ~ Note! For PROFI BUS network configuration. the Quick COMMUNICATION 6 10 1 FIE LDBUS ADDRESS Setup menu calls up all the subsequent functions In succession. The following table explains the parameter configuration options in more detail. Options: MANUFACT.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning 6.. --+ Page 87 If.. 8.... make sure that the rIght device master file (CSD file) of the measuring devIce Is used for the selected operating mode.. Endress+Hauser 69 . I~""~ I _~ 00 _~ _ I H OME· POSITION t c . QUICK SETUP COMMUNICATION (10061 Function No. SPEC.._ _ _-.3.. PROFJLE-GSD --+ The measu rIng dev ice Is ope rated In the PROF1BUS Profile mode... QU ICK SETUP (B) QUICK SETUP.-) MEASURED VARIABLE fAJ MEASURED VAR IABLE. @ @ I L . various arrangements between tile PROFlBUS master IClass I) and the measuring device (slave) are required wlllch have to be taken into consideration when configUling various functions.. Quick Setup B I I!iJ j Setup 1006 Commun:calion i Fieldbus Address 6101 Seleclion GSa 6140 Unit To Bus 6141 Fig.

ecuted. this.Commissioning Proline Prom ass 83 PROFlBUS DP/PA QuIck Setup 6141 ~CommunlcatlonM UNIT TO BUS If thIs functi on Is e. Options: OFF SET UNITS (Transmission is started by pressing the I'l key) c) Caution! Activating this function can cause a sudden change of the measured variables transmItted to the PROF1Bl!S master (C lass I).. in turn.tE posItion: -+ Press and hold down Esc keY88 for longer than three seconds or -) Repeatedly press and release Esc key 88 -) Exit the function matrix step by step 70 Enciress+ Hauser . can affect subsequent control routines. the measured variables are transmitted cyclically to the PROFIBUS master (Class I) with the system units set In the measu ring device.. 'I' Back to the H(lt..

u*upllrallsmfssfon willi T-DAT SAVE/LOAD/unction Information on the LOAD and SAVE options avallable: LOAD: Data are transferred from the T-DAT to the EEPROM. • Replacing a transmitter: current data are copied from an EEPROM to the T-DAT and then transferred to the EEPROM of the new transmitter. Otherwise.6 Data backup/transmission Using the T-DAT SAVE/ LOAD function.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning 6. SW-DAT" appears after restarting and the LOAD function is then no longer avallable. • Duplicating data: cUl'rent data are copied from an EEPROM to tile T-DAT and tilen transferred to EEPROMs of identical measUling pOints. This is required in the following instances: • Creating a backup: current data are transferred from an EEPROM to the T-DAT.. • This option is only available.J)~:--l-------------.~. if tile T-DAT contains valid data.[~Q~Uick~S.3."~P}~---------l @@J@) HOME POSITION I!li I:::.-. SAVE: Data are transferred from tile EEPROM to the T-DAT Endress+Hauser 71 . 42: Data b. L:J-"0 . .0 . CANCEL Restart of the measuring device Fig. you can transfer data (d e\~ce parameters and settings) between the T-DAT (exchangeable memory) and the EEPROM (device storage unit). • This option can only be executed if the software version of the T-DAT is the same or newer than that of the EEPROM. Hinweis! • Any settings already saved on the EEPROM are deleted. the error message "TRANSM. Hinweis! For information on installing and removing the T-DAT -> Page 138 ff.

these measured variables allow other process variables to be calculated.. . accessories) ollers a multitude of additional density functions ..DI) ·rOO% p ·[D2-DI) -.Commissioning Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 6. This density unit or scale Is mainly used for acidic solUtions. • Converting density of the ftuid into special density units (OBrix. Two Baume scales are used In practice: . mass and volume flow in two-phase media [carrier fluid and target fluid)... e.g. you can select various density functions which use a fixed specified calculation mode for calculating concentration: Density function %-MASS Remarks % -VOLUME By using the functions for two--phase--medla. A Jlquid with a value of 1° BALLING (Plato) has the same density as a water/cane sugar solution consisting of 1 kg cane sugar dissolved in 99 kg of water.·\$A table for Bri! units is the basis for calculations within the device. The optional soltware package "Concentration measurement" [F-CHIP. etc.DI) ·100% [D2 DI) .4 6.1 Device configuration Concentration measw'ement The measuring deloce determines three primary variables simultaneously: • Mass flow • Ruid density • Ruid temperature As standard. 1%1" D2· [p.g. lime powder or a second llquefied material to be measured] r = measured overall density °BR1X Density unit used for the Food & Beverage Industry which deals with the saccharose content of aqueous solutions. e.BAUME < I kg/J: for solutions lighter than water " BALLING " PLATO "BAUME Both unIts are a commonly used basIs for calculating the fluId density In the brewery industry.BAUME> I kg/J: for solutions heavier than water .). ferric chloride solutions. it is possible to calculate the percentage mass or volume contents of the carrier fluid or the target fluid. e.g. °AP] (= American Petroleum institute) Density units specifically used In North America for liquefied oil products.. Additional evaluation methods are available in this way. I" Balling (P lato) is thus I % of the liquid weight The units of concentration used in the paper industry for black Ilquor in % by mass . % -BLAGK LIQUOR < 'APi 72 Endress+ Hauser . for measuring solutions containing sugar such as fruit juice. DI = density of carrier Huid (transporting liquid. Volume [%J = [p . .. 'API. Concentration measurement with fixed calculation function By means of the DENSITY FUNCTION [7000) function. especially for special density calculations in ail types of applications: --> Page 120 • Calculating percentage contents. e.... etc.)~ II'. The basic equations (without temperature compensation) are: M". reference density [density at reference temperature) and corrected volume flow.g. The following fCUf. °Baume.4. such as volume flow. water) D2 = density of target fluid (material transported.. The formula used for the calculation is the same as for % -MASS.

54 1126. 16 1150..47 1038.01 1035 . see separate description Reference temperature temperature Fig.BRIX L.96 1047. ! II • PLATO • BAUME FLEXIBLE ~.83 60 " C 983.78 990.08 1073..70 1137..21 1119.5 1 1202.._.25 Endress+Hauser 73 . I .33 1187.34 989.97 1077.58 1172.38 1052.------ ._ I • APt ! .44 50"C 988.I .71 1167.'·::·~T · ' I! . • BALLING I --.98 1031.74 1118. 19 11 54.20 1147.60 1085.55 105 1.97 1103..50 1095.56 20 De 998.68 11 70. 14 1090.85 1079.64 10 15.58 lOW.59 1127. . 43: Selectin and eVlljtgunilc different densIty !ul1clfol/s in tile IUI/ctloll matrix g Brlxgrade (density of hydrous saccharose solutIon In kg/m 1 ) °Brlx 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 JO"e 9Q9.22 1206.23 70"C 977.52 1030.65 1162.03 40"C 9Q2 ..21 1011.20 1021..78 1102.79 30"e 9Q5.70 1016.13 1156. 19 1002.94 1113.20 10 17.63 1073.70 1180.44 1132.48 1083.93 1042.03 1007.61 1108.-_J··.51 1068. 10 1059.58 1123.1 5 1001.03 115 1. 15 1080.94 11 93.50 1040.27 1169.79 1144.70 1019.58 11 06. 15 1096. 14 1026.39 1063.23 1030.72 1057.80 1142.65 1010.86 11 30.25 11 98.76 aoo e 971.Prolin e Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning c=J @l@@J HOME POSITI ON r-----.13 1055..33 11 70.7 1 1182.

45 1287. officlally recommended by rC UMSA.59 1276. However. °BI1x. the concentration call be calculated from the measured density alld temperature values by means of the following formula (the coefficients AO.70 1236.53 1251.21 1330.10 1434.83 1376.63 50·C 1214.Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Brlxgrade (density of hydrous saccharose solution in kg/ml ) °Brlx 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 lO o e 1233. density alld temperature must be known (3-dimensional).40 1379.30 1373.20 1429 .52 13 12.56 1220.46 1389. 20th session 1990 Concentration measurement with flexible calculation function Under certain application conditions.00 1264. p' +A3· p' + A4· p' +BI· T + B2· T' + B3 ·T' K p AO Al A2 A3 A4 81 82 B3 T Concel/tralion CUfTent/y meJslIn?d density Valuejromjullction /COEFFICIENT AO (7032)) Valuejromjunction /COEPHCIENT AI /7033) Valuejromjunction /COEFFlClENT A2 /7034) Vallie jrom junction /COEFFICIENT A3 /7035) Value jromjunction (COEFFICIENT A4 /7036) Valuejrom junction (COEF!-1C!ENT 81 (7037) Value jromjunction (COEFFICIENT 82 (7038) Vallie jromjunctiol/ (COEPFICIENT B3 /7039) Currenfly measlllrd temperature in T 74 Endress+Hauser . etc) . The following types of calculation can be selected in function MODE (7021): • % MASS 3D • % VOLUME 3D • % MASS 2D • % VOLUME2D • OTHER 3D • OTHER2D Calculation type "%MASS 3D " or "% VOLUM£3D " For this type of calculation. etc.50 1252.93 1330.3 1 1321.61 1316. by a table. e. Technica l University of Brunswick.79 128 1.g.58 1417.80 1412.21 1258.84 1362.25 1305.50 1242.55 20"e 1229.00 1416. have to be determined by the user): K =AO +AI· p +A2. the relationship between the three van abies .06 1324.52 1395.80 1368.60 1410.90 Source: A.38 30 c e 1224.18 1270.20 1445.11 1223.64 1257.08 40"C 1219.87 1262.80 1356.88 1281.59 1311.46 1352.50 1347.21 1383. & L Emmerich . A I.concentration.80 1384.70 1440.55 1350. it may not be possible to use density nmctions with a fixed calculation function (% mass. user-specific or application-specific concentration calculations can be used with the "FLEXIBLE" setting in the function DENSITY FUNCTION (7000).38 1342.90 13 18.67 1204.50 1451.36 1401.13 1343.61 1300.93 1247. In this way.88 1406.20 1422 .1 1 1201. 64 1286.05 60·C 1208.18 70·C 1202.98 80 Ge 1196.

85711 ·0. 10'.5% 53. Assume: Density Ip): 870 kg/ m' --> 0.3469· 10'. or I O~·.0% 77.4% 79.0% 74.9% 66. 1% 73 .9% 60. p' +A3 .3% 60.0% 85.5% 68.04% Endress+ Ha user 75 .870' + 0· 0.6% 81.870 kg/I Temperature IT): 20·C Coefficients determined for table above: AO = -2. Temperature Density 825 kg/ml 10"C IS "C 20" C 25°C lOG e 93.3 % 84.7% 840 kg/ml 855 kglm) 870 kglm' 885 kglm' 900 kglml 9 15 kg/mJ 55.6057 AI = 11. T' -2.8 % 78.0% 83.5% 76.82 and 83 need to be entered into the ma~ix positions 7037.642 A2 = -8.6% 89.e following is a co nc e n~'ation table fi'om a reference source.50.5% 72.7 % 83.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning Example: n.8 % 92.2% 86.870' + 0 · 0. T + 82 . 83 = 0 Calculation: K = AO + AI .7604 76. 7038 and 7039 in scientific notation as 1O~3.7747 · 10~3 82 = ..2% 64. 1% 70.5% Note! The coefficients for the Promass 83 concentration algol'itllm should be determined with the density in Ultits of kg/liter.3 46 9j-/O -6 ·20'2 + 0 · 20·\ 0.7747. temperature in·C and concentration in decimal form 10.1 % 91.2% 80.0% 57.3% 88..870' + (-2.5% 88.6% 71.8% 65. not 50%).6057 + 11.6% 62. p' + A4 . p + A2 .870 + (~ 8.3% 90. T' + 83 .857 1 A3 = 0 A4 = 0 81 = -2.-/0 -3 ·20 + {-7.612·0.7% 59. p' +8 I . 81.7.4% 67.

AI. users can enter a free selectable designation for their specific concentration unit or target parameters (see function TEXT ARBITRARY CONCENTRATION (060611 . The parameters important for measuring the reference density can also be configured directly via the "Commissioning" Quick Setup menu.. 1must be entered in the measuring system. To do so. have to be determined by the user): K ConctlllrJtfoll proj AO Al A2 A3 A4 Currently measurr:d rojerence del/sity Value/rom /unction Value/rom/unction Value /rom/lI1/ction Value/rom function Value jrom jUflction (COEFFICIENT AO(7032}) (COEFFICIENT AI (7033) (COEFFICIENT A2 (7034) (COEFFICIENT AJ (7035) (COEFFICIENT A4 (7036) Note! Promass determines the reference density by means of the density and temperature currently measured.... the relationship between the tvvo variables concentration and reference density must be known (2-<limensionall. In tllis way.g. etc. Calculation type "OTHER 3D" or "OTHER 2D" With this option.Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Calculation type "% MASS 2D" or "% VOLUME 2D" For tilis type of calculation. by a table.. both the reference temperature (function REFERENCE TEMPERATURE) and the expansion coefficients (function EXPANSION COEFF .. 76 Endress+Hauser . e.. tlle concentration can be calculated from the measured density and temperature values by means of the following formula (the coefficients AO.

Ensure that Ule process conditions always correspond to the reference status when data is being recorded. e. Normally. These reference values are determined under reproducible.g. mass flow.pecific process conditions.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning 6.4. non-changing process conditions. Reference values are recorded and saved in the measuring system always by means of the device function REFERENCE CONDITION USER (7401). Enter the desired Ume intelval by means of the function ACQUISITION PERIOD (741 1). Methods of ascertaining data Process and device parameters can be recorded in two different ways which you can define in the function ACQUISITION MODE (74 10): • PERIODICALoption: Measuring device acquires da ta periodically.2 Advanced diagnostic functions Changes to the measwing system. coating buildup or corrosion and abrasion on the measuring tubes can be detected at an early stage by means of the optional software package "Advanced Diagnostics" (F-Chip. temperature values. accessories --> Page 120). density/ reference density. e. By means of the diagnostic functions it is now possible to record valious process and device parameters during operation.g. Reference data can also be ascertained lInder customer-. Reference values as the basis for trend analysis Reference values of the parameters in question must always be recorded for trend analysis. Endress+Hausel' 77 .g. It is only in Ulis way Ulat deviations from the reference status can be cleaxly determined. By allalyzing the trend of these measured values. e. measuring tube damping etc. The "history' of such values can be called up via various functions: Diagnosis parameters Mass now Density Reference density Data saved (per parameter) R eference value --7 REFERENCE VALUE function Lowest measured value --7 MINIMUM VALUE function Highest measured value -+ MAXIMUM VALUE function list of the last ten measured values --+ HISTORY function DevIation measured/reference value --+ ACTUAL DEVIATION function Temperature Measuring tube damping Sensor symmelry Operating frequency nuctuation Tube damping nucluation More detalJe-d Information can be fou nd In the "Description of Device Functions· Manual. constant conditions. Such reference values are i1utially recorded during calibration at the factOlY and saved in the measuring deloce. • SINGLE SHOT option: The user himself acquires the data manually at different. free selectable periods. d Caution! It is not possible to analyze the b'end of process/device parameters vvithout reference values! R eference values can only be determined under constant. Note! The last ten enbies are retained in chronological order in tire measuling system. etc.) . deviations of tire measuring system fi'om a "reference status" can be detected in good time and cOlrective measures can be taken. these influences reduce the measuring accuracy of the system or may lead to selious system errors. during comntissiolung or at certain process stages (cleaning cycles.

you can analyze the reference density [density at a constant temperature.g. corrOSion . e. abrasion). ). For example. The limit value is entered into the measuring system as an absolute (+/-) or relative deviation from the reference value --> function WARNING LEVEL [74 . Use this diagnosis parameter to determine whether the sensor signals are symmetrical. A warning message is triggered if this limit value is exceeded --> function WARNING MODE [7403) .. a limit value can be assigned to all the process/device parameters relevant to the diagnostic functions. when using the limit function it is especially important to know tile minimum and maximum deviation tolerances allowed. Mass flow DenSity Reference density The reference density values can be interpreted In the same way as the density values. ). The following table provides examples and pointers for each of the six diagnosis parameters recorded: Diagnosis parameters Posslble reasons for deviation A deviation from the reference status Indicates possible zero point shlfL A deviatlon fro:n the reference status can be caused by a change In the measuring tube resonance frequency. Deviations "ising and recorded by the measuring system can also be output via the current or relay outputs or by means of the fieldbus. Ensure that the parameters required for calcu lating the reference densIty have been correctly configured (functions REFERENCE TEMPERATURE and EXPANSION CO EFF. which have to be determined by the users themselves in each individual case. If the fluid temperature cannot be kept completely constant. A deviation in the tube damping fluctuation Indicates possible gas content in the med ium. There can be various reasons for deviating from the reference status. This means that users must have a very good knowledge of their specific process conditions and the related deviation tolerances in the process.Commissioning Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Triggering warning messages If required. e. Measuring tube damping Sensor symmetry Operating frequency fluctuation Tube damping fluctuation 78 Endress+Hauser . A deviation in the operating frequency fluctuation Indicates possible gas content in the medium. at 20 "C) instead of the density. Othetwise there is the danger that a warning message is aiggered inadvertently during "normal" process fluctuations. corrosion or abrasion.g. e. Data interpretation The way the data recorded by the measuring system is interpreted depends largely on the application in question.. A deviation from the reference status can be caused by a change In measuring tube damping. from mechanical changes (coating buildup.g. Temperature Use this diagnosis parameter to check the functionality of the PT 1000 temperature sensor. from depos its In the measuring tube.

In the function UNIT TO BUS (6 141 ).g. Select the system unit: a. 6. e. Endress+Hausel' 79 . so UJat the measured variables transmitted cyclically to the PROFIBUS master [Class I) are transmitted with the system units set in the measuring device: BASIC FUNCTION IG) --> PROFIBUS DP (GSA) --> OPERATION (6 14) --> UNIT TO BUS [614 1) ~ Note! • The configuration of the system units for the totalizer is desClibed separately --> see step 7 • If the system unit of a measlU'ed vaIiable is changed by means of the local operation or an operating program. Determine the units by means of the system units group: MEASURED VARlABLES (AI--> SYSTEM UNITS (ACA) --> CONFIGURATION (040) --> UNIT MASS FLOW (0400) / UNIT MASS [0401) / UNIT VOLUME FLOW (0402) / .1 I.ON ~ write access via PROFI BUS not possible Deactivate Ole wIite protection if necessary --> Page 50 2.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning 6..OFF (factOlY setting) ~ write access via PROFIBUS possible .5 Note' Commissioning the PROFIBUS interface • Ali nlllctions required for commissioning are described in detail in the "DesCliption of Device Functions" manual which is a separate part of these Operati ng Instructions . --> Page 45 PROFIBUS PA com misioning --> Page 83 If. select the option SET UNITS. 3. Enter the tag name [optional): BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFIBUS DP IGBAI--> CON FIGURATION (6 10) --> TAG NAME [61001 Configuring the fieldbus address: Software addressing using Ule local display or an operating program: BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFISUS DP [GBA) --> CONFIGURATION (610)--> FI ELD BUS ADDRESS (610 I) Hardware addressing via miniature switches --> Page 51 4. Changed system units of Ole measured vaJiables are not U'ansmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) until the SET UNITS option is activated in the function BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFIBUS DP (GBA) --> OPERATION [614) --> UNIT TO BUS (6 141 ). PROFIBUS DP commissioning The following steps must be canied out in the sequence specified: Check the hardware write protection: The WRlTE PROTECT (6 102) parameter indicates whether it is possible to write to the device functions via PROFIBUS (acyclic data U 'ansmission. . b. • A code (factOlY setting: 83) must be entered to change device functions. ~ No te! This check is not needed if operating via the local display. via the operating program "FieldCare"). BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFIBUS DP [GBA) --> CONFIGURATION (610) --> WRlTE PROTECf (6 102) --> Display of one of the following options: . numerical values or factOly settings. this initially does not have any effect on the unit that is used to transmit the measured vaJiable to the PROFIBUS master (Class I).5.

VISCOSITY T. Select the option ANALOG INPUT I. Configuration of the Analog Input function blocks I to 6: The measuring device has six Analog Input function blocks (AI modules). VISCOSITY 1177 1178 1179 1180 T. d. KIN. slot I). b. c. through which the various measured vaIiables can be cyclically traIlsmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class I).Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 5. Possible settings Measured variable ID for CHANNBL function MASS FLOW (factory setting Al function block 1) VOLUME FLOW (factory setting AI function block 2) CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW (factory setting AI function block 3) DENSITY [factory settIng AI function block 4) REFERENCE DENSITY (factory setting Al function block 5J 277 273 398 281 402 TEMPERATURE [factory setting Al function blcck 6) The followIng measured varlables are available when the addItional 285 ·concentratlon measurement" software Is Installed (order option) TARGET MASS FLOW % TARGET MASS FLOW 1164 1165 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 TARGET VOLUME FLOW % TARGET VOLUME FLOW TARGET CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW CARRIER MASS FLOW % CARRIER MASS FLOW CAR RIER VOLUME FLOW % CARRIER VOLUME FLOW 1172 1173 1174 1166 CARRIER CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW % BLACK LIQUOR °BAUME °API • PLATO "BALLING 1175 °BRIX The following measured variables are available when the additional · vlscoslty" software Is installed (order option) DYN. Select the function CHANNEL (6 123). mass How) to be cyclically transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class I): a. Using the CHANNEL function (6123). VISCOSITY KIN. Select the option MASS FLOW. you can determine the measured variable (e. COMPo DYN. VISCOSITY 80 Endress+Hauser . Select BASIC FUNCTION (G)-> PROFIBUS DP (GBA) -> FUNCTION BLOCKS (6 12) -> BLOCK SELECTION (6120) .g. The assignment of a measured vaI'iable to the Analog Input function block is shown below using the example of Analog Input function block I (N module. Ca MP.

BIDIRECTIONAL = the positive and negative Dow components 7. SENSORS TUBE DAMPING flUCTUATION DEVIATION TUBE DAMPING FLUCTliATION DEVIATION 1671 1688 2055 2072 If. ~ Notel 6.. c.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning Measured variable ID for CHANNEL function The following measured variables are available when the addItional "batchlng" software Is Installed (order option) BATCH UPWARDS BATCH DOWNWA RDS BATCH COUNTER BATCH SliM BATCHING TIME 1346 1347 1348 134Q 1354 The following measured variables are available when the additional "advanced diagnostics" software Is Installed (order option) MASS flOW DEVIATION DENSllY DEVIATION REFERENCE DENSITY DEVIATION TEMPERATlIRE DEVtATJON 1603 1620 1637 1654 TUBE DAMPING DEV(A TlON ACTUA L DEVIATION ELECTR.g. the Al module was Integrated in slot I to 6. Select the option MASS FLOW. Setting the measuring mode: In the function MEASURING MODE [0601). the measured variable selected In the CHANNELfuncUon for the respective Analog Input function block 1 to 6 Is transmitted cyclically to the PROF1BUS master (Class 1).. • Using the CHANNEL function 16133). Select the option TOTALIZER I. --+ Page 92 ft.UNIDIRECTIONAL (factory setting) = only the positive flow portions . mass flow) to be b·ansmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class I) as a totalizer value: a.. you can determine the measured variable le. MEASURING MODE 16601 ) -> Selection of one of tile following options: . BASIC FUNCTION (G) --) SYSTEM PARAMETER (GLA) -> CONFIGURATION (660) . The following example describes tile configuration of the totalizer using totalizer I as an example. b.. • Enter the desired unit lor the totalizer: BASIC FUNCTION [G) -> PROFIBUS DP (GBA) -> TOTALIZER (6 13) -> UNIT TOTALIZER (6134) • Configure totalizer status [e. Select BASIC FUNCTION (G) -> PROFIBUS DP (GBA) -> TOTALIZER 1613)-> SELECT TOTALIZER (6130). totalize): BASIC FUNCTION (GI-> PROFIBUS DP (GBA) -> TOTALIZER 16131-> SET TOTALIZER (6135) -> Select the option TOTALIZE Endress+Hauser 81 . Possible settings -> see foUowing table. DYN. when performing the PROFIBUS network configuration. Configuration of totalizers 1 to 3: The measuring device has three totalizers. Go to the function CHANNEL (6133). select the flow portions to be measured by the measuring device.g. d.

(order option) TARGET MASS FLOW TARGET VOLUME FLOW TARGET CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW 1164 1167 1169 1170 1172 1174 CARRIER MASS FLOW CARRIER VOLUME FLOW CARRIER CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW <iIQ. Note! If. (factDlY setting): the complete de. BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFIBUS DP (GBAlGCA) --> OPERATION (614) --> SELECTION GSD (6140) --> Options: . make sure that the right de"ce master file (GSD file) of the measuring device is used for the selected operating mode. Configuration of cyclic data transmission in the PROFIBUS master A detailed description of the system integration can be found on --> Page 91. when performing the PROFIBUS network configuration. Possible sellings Totalizer value/measured variable MASS FLOW (factory setting totallzE'r3 I to 3) ID for CHANNBl functlon 277 273 398 0 VOLUME FLOIV CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW OFF The following measured variables are available when the additional ·concentration measurement" software Is Installed.PROFILE-GSD: Proma55 83 is operated in the PROFIBUS Profile mode. .BALANCE (factDlY setting): calculates the positive and negative flow portions . 8.HOLD VALUE: The totalizer remains at tlle last value <iIQ. Note! For the calculation of the positive and negative flow portions (BALANCE) or the negative flow portions (NEGATIVE) to be ca!Tied out cO!Tectly. 9. --> Page 87 If. the module or the function TOTAL was integrated In slot 7.oce functionality is available. <iIQ. Note! For PROFIBUS network configuration.Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA • Set the totalizer mode: BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFIBUS DP (GBA) --> TOTALIZER (613) --> TOTALIZER MODE (6137) --> Selection of one of the following options: .NEGATIVE: calculates the negative flow portions . --+ Page 94 ft.MANUFACT.8 or 9. . Select the operating mode: Seleet the operating mode (GSD file) which should be used for cyclic communication with the PROFIBUS master (Class I). the selection BIDIRECTIONAL must be active in the function BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> SYSTEM PARAMETER (GLA) --> CONFIGURATION (660) --> MEASURING MODE (6601). ) 82 Endress+Hauser . SPEC.POSITIVE: calculates the positive flow portions .0: The de"ce is used as the replacement for the pr"oous Promass 63 model (compatibility mode). the measured variable selected In thE' CHANNEL function for the totalizers 1 to 3 is transmitted cycllcaUy to the PROF1BUS master (Class I).MANUFACT V2.

ON = write access via PROFIBUS not possible Deactivate the wlite protection if necessary -> Page 50 2.a the local display. e. b. select the option SET UNITS. Determine the units by means of the system units group: MEASURED VARIABLES (A) -> SYSTEM UNITS (ACA) -> CON FIGURATION (040) -> UNIT MASS FLOW (0400) / UNIT MASS (0401) / UNIT VOLUME FLOW (0402) / .. \.5.a the operating program "FieldCare")..g.2 I. ~ Note! This check is not needed if operating \.OFF (factory setting) = write access via PROFIBUS possible .a miniature switches -> Page 51 4. Endress+Hauser 83 . so that the measured variables transmitted cyclically to the PROFIBUS master (Class I) are transmitted with the system units set in the measuring device: BASIC FUNCTION (G) -> PROFIBUS PA (GCA) -> OPERATION (6 14 ) -> UNIT TO BUS (6 141 ) ~ Note! • The co nfiguration of the system units for tlle totalizer is described separately -> see step 7 • If the system U1tit of a measured variable is changed by means of the local operation or an operating program. Changed system units of the measured vaI·iables are not transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class I) until the SET UNITS option is activated in tile function BASIC FUNCTION (G) -> PROFIBUS PA (GCA) -> OPERATION (61 4) -> UNIT TO BUS (6141). Enter the tag name (optional): BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFIBUS PA (GCA) -> CON FIGURATION (6 10) -> TAG NAME (6 100) Configuring the fieldbus address: Software addressing using the local display or an operating program: BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFIBUS PA (GCA) -> CONFIGURATION (610)-> FIELD BUS ADDRESS (6\0 1) Hardware addressing \. BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFIBUS PA (GCA) --> CONFIGURATION (610) --> WRITE PROTECT (6102) --> Display of one of the following options: . In the function UNIT TO BUS (6141 ). this initially does not have any effect on the unit that is used to transmit the measured valiable to the PROFIBUS master (Class I). 3. PROFIBUS PA commissioning The following steps must be canied out in the sequence specified: Check the hardware write protection: The WRITE PROTECT (6102) parameter indicates whether it is possible to write to the device functions via PROFIBUS (acyclic data transmission. Select the system unit: a.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning 6.

Select the option ANALOG INPUT I. VISCOSITY' 1177 1178 1170 1180 T. t1u'ough which tile various measured variables can be cyclically transmitted to the PROFIBUS master IClass IJ. COMPo DYN. KIN . mass flow) to be cyclically u'ansmitted to the PROFIBUS master IClass IJ: a. Using the CHANNEL function 16 123].Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 5. b. The assignment of a measured variable to the Analog Input function block is shown below using the example of Analog Input function block I IAI module. Configuration of the Analog Input function blocks I to 6: The measuring device has six Analog Input function blocks IAI modules). VISCOSITY T. d. Select BASIC FUNCTION [GJ --> PROFIBUS PA [GCA)--> FUNCTIONBLOCKS [612J--> BLOCK SELECTION 16 120J. VISCOSITY 84 Endress+Hauser . Possible settings Measured variable MASS FLOW (factory setting Al function block I) VOLU ME FLOW (factory setting AI function block 2) CORRECTED VOLUM E FLOW (facto!)' setting AI function block 3) DENSITY (factory setting AI function block 4) REFERENCE DENSITY (factolY setting Al function block 5) ID for CHAN N Bt fundlon 277 273 398 281 402 285 TEMPERATURE (factory setting Al functlon block 6) The following measured variables are available when the additional ' concentration measurement:' software Is Installed (order option) TARGET MASS FLOW % TARGET MASS FLOW 11M 1165 1167 1168 11 69 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 11M TARGET VOLUME flOW % TARGETVuLUME FLOW TARGET CORREGTED VOLUME FLOW CARRIER MASS FLOW % CARRIER MASS FLOW CARRIER VOLUME FLOW % CARRIER VOLUME FLOW CARRIER CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW % BLACK LIQUOR ° BAUME °API °PIATO °BALLING ' BRIX 1175 The followIng measured vartables are avaUable when the addItional "vIscosIty" software 1$ Installed (order option) DYN.g. VISCOSITY KIN. Select the option MASS FLOW. you can determine the measured variable le. Select the function CHANNEL [6 123J. c. slot I J. COMP.

-+ Page 92 ft. Configuration of totalizers 1 to 3: The measUling device has tJrree totalizers. the measured variable seJ~ted In the CHANNEL functlon for the respective Analog Input fu nction block 1 to 6 Is transmitted cyclically to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1). you can determine the measured variable [e. ~ Note! 6. The following example describes the configuration of tlle totalizer using totalizer I as an example. totalize) : BASIC FUNCTION (G] -> PROFIBUS PA [GCA) -> TOTALIZER (6 13)-> SET TOTALIZER (6 135) -> Select the option TOTALIZE • Set the totalizer mode: BASIC FUNCTION (G) -> PROFIBUS PA [GCA) -> TOTALIZER [613) -> TOTALIZER MODE (6 137) -> Selection of one of tlle following options: . Possible settings -> see following tahle. Go to the function CHANNEL (6133) . • Using the CHANNEL function [6133). Select the option MASS FLOW. c. the AI module was Integrated In slot I to 6. mass flow) to be U·ansmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class I) as a totalizer value: a. select the flow portions to be measured by the measuring device. b.NEGATIVE: calculates the negative flow portions . Select the option TOTALIZER I.BIDIRECTIONAL = the positive and negative Dow components 7. Select BASIC FUNCTION (G) -> PROFIBUS PA (GCA) -> TOTALIZER (6 13) -> SELECT TOTALIZER (6130). SENSORS TUBE DAMPING FLUCTUATION DEVIATION TUBE DAMPING FLUCTUATION DEVIATION H.g.UNIDIRECTIONAL (factory setting) = only tJle positive flow portions .g. BASIC FUNCTION (G) -> SYSTEM PARAMETER (GLA) -> CONFIGURATION [660) -> MEASURING MODE [6601) -> Selection of one of the following options: . DYN.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Commissioni ng Measured variable ID for CHANNBL function The following measured variables are available when the addlUonal "advanced diagnostics· software Is Installed (order option) MASS FLOW DEVIATION DENS1IT DEVIATION REFEREN CE DENSITY DEVIATION TEMPERATURE DEVIATION 1603 1620 1637 1654 1671 1688 2055 2072 TUBE DAMPING DEVIATION ACTUAL DEVIATION ElECTR.HOLD VALUE: The totalizer remalns at the last value Endress+Ha user 85 . • Enter the desired unit for the totalizer: BASIC FUNCTION (G) -> PROFIBUS PA (GCA) -> TOTALIZER [613)-> UNIT TOTALIZER [6134) • Configure totalizer status (e. Setting the measuring mode: In tJle function MEASURING MODE (66011. d. when performing the PROFIBUS network conflguratlon.BALANCE [factmy setting): calculates the positive and negative How portions .POSITNE: calculates the positive flow portions .

the module or the function TOTAL was integrated in slot 7. the selection BIDIRECTIONAL must be active in the function BASIC FUNCTION [G) --> SYSTEM PARAMETER (GLA) --> CONFIGURATION (660) --> MEASURlNG MODE (660 1). 9. ~ Note! For PROFIBUS network configuration. [factOiy setting): the complete device functionality is available. when performing the PROFIBUS network configuration. 8. SPEC. the measured variable selected in the CHANNEL function for the totalizers I to 3 Is transmitted cyclically to the PROFIBUS master (Class I). 86 Endress+Hauser .MANUFACT.0: The device is used as the replacement for the previous Promass 63 model (compatibility mode). Configuration of cyclic data transmission in the PROFIBUS master A detailed description of the system integration can be found on --> Page 103. BASIC FUNCTION [G) --> PROFIBUS PA (GCA) --> OPERATION (6 14)--> SELECTION GSD (6 140) --> Options: . --> Page 87 ft.PROFILE-GSD: Promass 83 is operated in the PROFIBUS Profile mode. . Possible sellings Totalizer value/measured variable MASS flOW (factory setting totalizers I to 3) VOLUME FLOW CORRECTED VOLUM E HOW OF F ID for CHANNEL function 277 273 398 0 The following measured variables are available when the additional ·concentratlon measurement" software 15 Installed (order option) TARGET lY\ASS FLOW TARGET VOLUME FLOW TARGET CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW CARRIER MASS FLOW CARRIER VOLUME FLOW CARR1ER CORRECTEQ VOLUME fLOW 1164 1167 1169 1170 1172 1174 ~ Note! If. Select the operating mode: Select the operating mode [GSD filel which should be used for cyclic communication with the PROFlBUS master (Class 1).MANUFACT V2.Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA ~ Note! For the calculation of the positive and negative How portions (BALANCE) or the negative flow portions (NEGATIVE) to be carried out correctly. ~ Page 04 ft. 8 or 0. make sure that the right device master file (GSD file) of the measuring device is used for the selected operating mode. .

PROFIBUS PA .gsd l. An oven.gsd EH_'52A.dib EH3_ 1529.bmp/. The eso file containsa description of the properties of a PRORBUSdevice.dib Endress+Hauser 87 .dib EH3_152A.bmp/.bmpl. Name of the Prom ass 83 CSD file 10 No.bmp/. then use the standard eSD (EH3_15xx..200 EH_152Q_d. Page 103 ff.. CSD file with standard or extended format The GSO file witil either the standard or tile extended format must be used depending on the configuration software used.. Before configuration takes place. if the installation or the configuration of the measuring device fails with this format.6 6.. the device master file (eSO file) is needed for evelY bus user (PROFIBUSslave).gsd EH_1529_n. such as supported data b'ansmission rate and number of input and output data.gsd EH_1529. Note the specifications of the configuration software. Page 91 ff. PROPIBUS OP GSO rue Type f1Ie Bitmaps 1529 (Hexl Extended Format (recommended): Standard Format: PROPIBUS PA 152A (Hex) Extended Format (recommended): Standard Format: EH3x I 529. a decision should be made as to which eso file should be used to operate the measwing device in the PROFIBUS OP master system. complete de\. complete device functionality) Use this eso file to access the complete functionality of the measuring device. The measuring device supports the following GSO files: • Promass 83 eso file (manufacturer-specific GSO file.ew of the modules available (input and output data) is contained on the following pages: PROFIBUS OP ..ss 83 GSD file (manufacturel'-Specilic GSO file.dlb EH_1 52A_s.1 PROFIBUS DP/PA system integration Device master file (GSD file) For PROFIBUS network configuration.dib EH3x 152A. Prom. When instailing the eso file.bmp/. This differentiation is the result of differentimplementation of the eso formats in the master systems.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS OP/PA Commissioning 6.bmp/.gsd) should always be used first.ce functionality) • PROFIBUS Profile GSO file: • Promass 63 eso file (compatibility witil previous model Promass 63) Below you will find a detailed desCliption of the eso files supported.gsd EH_152A_n. However. the eso file with the extended format (EH3xI 5xx.200 EH _1 52A_d.dlb EH_1529_s. In this way.6.. devicespecific measured variables and functionalities are thus completely available in the PROFIBUS master system.

The function scope is restricted compared to the manufacturer~specific GSD file [complete device functionality). However.oce has to be replaced.com Promass 63 GSD me Promass 63 with Profile Version 2.gsd PA 1397 42. FW'ther information --> Page 90 88 Endress+Hauser .Commissioning Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA How to acquire • Internet [Endress+Hauser)--> www. The following modules are supported with tile Profile GSD file: 'AI Flow' module ' AI Density' module 'AI Temperature' module ' Totalizer' module --) --) --) --) Analog Input function block I / output \'ariable. If Promass 83 is already being operated in the system and if the measuring de.: 56003894 Contents ojthe downloadfilefrom the Internet and the C~ROM: • • • • All Endress+Hauser GSD files [standard and extended format) Endress+Hauser type files Endress+Hauser bitmap files Information on the devices PROFIBUS Profile GSD file: The function scope of the profile GSD file is defined by the PROFIBUS Profile Specification 3.com [ --> Download --> Software --> Device Driver) • CD~ROM with ali GSD files for Endress+Hauser devices --> Order No. Promass 83 can be used as a replacement device vvithout having to reconfigW'e the PROFIBUS DP network. mass flow Analog Input function block 2/ output varIable: density Analog Input function block 3 / output variable: temperature Totalizer function block / output variable: totalized mass flow Name oj the PROF/BUS Profile GSD file ID No.endress. similar devices fi'om different manufacturers can be interchanged vvith the profile GSD file without the need to reconfigW'e [interchangeability).0 is the precursor to the Promass 83.PROFIBUS.gsd Source Internet IGSD IibralY of the PROFIBUS User Organization) --> www. Prome GSD rue PROPIBUS DP PROPIBUS PA 9742 (Hexl 9742 (Hex) PA039742.0.

However. Before configUting the network. The GSD files also include bitmap files. ask your PROFIBUS master system manufacturer which directory you should use. Example for the configuration software Siemens STEP 7 of the Siemens PLC family 57-300/ 400: Use the GSD file\vith the extended format (EH3xI52A. A detailed description of the modules supported by the measuring device as follows: PROFIBUS DP --> Page 91 ft. the use of Ule manufacturer-spedfic GSD file (complete de.oce functionality) is shown using PROFIBUS PA as an example: Select the manufacturer-specific GSD file in the measuring device by means of the SELECTION GSD function. (factory setting) Select: PROFllE·GSD Select: MANl1FACT V2.gsdJ. \ siemens\step7\s7data\ gsd". always first use the GSD file wiUI Ule extended format IEH3x I52A.. Copy Ule file to the subdirectOlY ".0 Prom ass 83 GSD file -+ Example Before configuration takes place. i. These bitmap files are used to display the measuring points in image form. the desired module configuration (input and output datal must be performed in the next step. IfactOlY setting) I.6. The measuring device is a modular PROFIBUS slave.\ siemens\ step7\ s7data\nsbmp". PROFIBUS PA --> Page 103 fl. a decision should be made as to which GSD file should be used to configure measwing device 83 in the PROFIBUS master system.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning 6.. load the corresponding GSD file into the configuration system/ master system. if the installation or the configuration of the device fails with this format. the corresponcUng GSD file has to be configured in the device by means of the SELECTION GSD function. The bitmap files must be saved to the directory" .. BASIC FUNCTION IG)--> PROFIBUS PA (GCA) --> OPERATION (614) --> SELECTION GSD 16140) --> Select: MANUFACT.gsdJ. SPEC.e. Endress+Hauser 89 .. If you are using configuration software other than that referred to above. 2. Below. ~ Note! When Ins!alling the GSD file.gsdJ.2 Selecting the GSD file in the measW'ing device Depending on which GSD file is used in the PROFIBUS master system. BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFIBUS DP/ PA (GBAlGCAI--> OPERATION (614) --> SELECTION GSD (6140) Promass 83 CSD file Profile GSD file --+ -+ Select: MANUFACT. then use the standard GSD (EH3_152A. This can be done directly by means of the configuration software. SPEC.

gsd To be replaced with: Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP Extended Format: 10 No. 1506 (Hex) or Standard Format: Extended Format: or Standard Format: EH3_IS06.0 option is activated in the SELECTION GSD (6140) function.ce failure..0) Promass 63 with Profile Version 2.. In the event of a device being replaced.ce was configured in the automation system and makes both suitable input and output data and measured value status information available even though the devices differ in name and 1D number..ce parameter is modified via the cyclic or acyclic data transmission. the following settings have to be configured via an operating program: • Configuration of the application-specific parameters • Configuration of the system units for the measured values and totalizers. Set tile same (old) device address --> FIELD BUS ADDRESS (610 I) function In the SELECTION GSD (6140) function --> Select MANUFACT V2.ces: 1. this change is saved in the EEPROM of the measuring device.gsd -> -> EH3_ISI2..0 is the precursor to Prom ass 83.6.ce if the MANUFACTV2 . You do not have to adjust the configuration of the PROFlBUS network in the automation system .ce ..thout having to reconfigure the PROFlBUS network. For this reason. The measuring device automatically detects that a Promass 63 de\. Promass 83 completely supports the compatibility of the cyclic data with the previous Promass 63 model. Prom ass 83 can be used as a replacement de\. Procedure after replacing the measuring d.3 Compatibility with previous Prom ass 63 model (Profile Version 2. avoid constantly Wliting nonvolatile device parameters via the PROFlBUS! 90 Endress+ Hauser .. If Prom ass 63 is already being operated in tile system and if the measuring device has to be replaced.Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFlBUS DP/PA 6. Note! If necessary. 6. if exceeded. The measuring devices can be exchanged as follows: Existing device: Promass 63 PROFIBUS DP CSD me used: EH3xlS12. The number ofwlites to the EEPROM is technically restricted to a maximum of I million.6.gsd EH3x IS 06. 3.: 15 12 [Hex) Promass 63 PROFIBUS PA 1D No. it results in data loss and measuring de\.0 Restart the measuring device --> SYSTEM RESET (8046) function 2.4 Maximum number of writes If a nonvolatile de\..gsd -> Promass 83 PROFIB US PA Promass 83 is accepted as the replacement d. Attention must be paid to this limit since.

The modules are permanently assigned to the slots.----1 ~ . .---. . End ress+Hauser 91 . . . In conn'ast to a compact slave.••. • '1" Out value TOTAL : . . .--. .l ()ulool wlua AI QulIlU\ value AI .----. . . . .it consists of several individual modules. I~ . .--.----. Block hYSical ~ @@J@} O' l ocal ISp ay I Measured variable 1 .7 PROFIBUS DP cyclic data exchange Below is a descliption of the cyclic data n'a nsmission when using the Promass 83 GSD file Icomplete device func tionality). . .---- Conti uration SE TTOT MODETOT . . To opti mize the data throughput rate of the PROFIBUS network. .7.-. the sequence or arrangement of the modules must be obselved when configuring tile modules (see following table). . . . . .0 6. o a. . . . . it is recommended to only configure modules that are processed in the PROFIBUS master system.0 l'__ H Transducer block Signal ------1------:.---.2 Modules for cyclic data transmission The measW'ing device is a so-<:alled modular PROFIBUS slave.----. r-.------. .-. .CQm!)llRs ation ~aRlitv IBATCHtNG FIX COMP QUANTITY) . . . the individual modules (input and output data) are described with their individual properties. . . H ~ OIl lUI valueA.t8ilsurad variable . 44: Block... I processing f--< H . M easured variable __ Measured Y3riable 3_ t.1 Block model The block model illustrated shows which input and output data Promass 83 provides for cyclic data exchange via PROFIBUS DP. . . .---IBATCHING aUANn!:!1 Fig. 6. i. the su'uctW'e of a modular slave is variable .-- ------ .-.. MODETOT . . o cr u::: Display valua tDISPLA. (/) ::J TOIa!izer 2 Totalizer 3 Out value TOTAL l L COnflQluation SEITOT MODETOT . Gaps between configW'ed modules have to be assigned the EMPTY_MODULE module. aJ 0uI vakili TOTAL Conroguratioll SETTOT.------. a. .--. ..i f" Ma8suled variable 2 Measured variable 3 _ \ : Meilsured variable • • . ~. .-.------.. .----. model/or Promass 8.1 PROF/BUS DP Pro/ile 3. : Output YlI lueAI AnaJog InpIJ l 1 Analog InPliI 2 I OuIDtlt value AI H PROFIBusJ PROFILE Parameter I~ Analog Input 3 Analog Input 4 Analog Inpu l S /vIalog Inpul6 'M I value AI ~ -------------- .--------. . l .e. In the GSD fil e...Proline Promass 83 PROFI BUS DP/ PA Commissioning 6.---. ..7. . • . Measured variable 2.Y_VALUE) Cont rol (CONTROl_SlOCK) Ba tc ~ ltIg 9 u ant~ . Manufacturer specific Parameter Totalizer 1 '--- .---_.

t four bytes in the form of floating point numbers in accordance with the IEEE 754 standard. • The device has to be reset once a new configmation has been loaded to the automation system. The measured variable is represented in the Ill. FieldCare) .By means of an operating program (e. This can be effected as follows: . is cyclically transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) by means of the AI module (slots I to 6) .3 Description of the modules AI module (Analog Input) The corresponding measured variable. mass flow (factory settIng) Analog Input function block 2 Output va riable --+ volume flow (factory setting) Analog Input fundlon block 3 Output varIable.By means of the local (lisp lay . A detailed desc1iption of the individual modules is contained in the following section . including the status.g. output variable = totaHzed mass flow (factory setting) SETTOT --+ totalizer control MODETOT --+ totalizer configuration Q 10 11 12 13 DIS PlAY_VALUE CONTROL_BLOCK BATCH1NG_OUANTITY Default value for local display Control of device functions Batchlng quantity BATCH 1NG_F IX_COM P _QUANTITY Fi xed correction quantity Note! • The assignment of the measmed variables for the Analog Input function blocks (I to 6) and the Totalizer function blocks (I to 3) can be changed by means of the CHANNEL function. Further information on the device status --> Page 124 92 Endress+Hauser . The fifth byte contains standardized status information corresponding to the measured variable. 6. corrected volume flow (factory setting) Analog Input function block 4 Output variable --+ density (factory setting) Analog Input function block 5 Output \'ariable --+ reference densIty (factory setting) Analog Input functi on block 6 Output variable --+ temperature (factol)' setting) Totalizer function block t TOTA L--+ output variable = totalized mass flow (factory setting) SETTOT--+ totallzer control MODETOT --+ totalizer configuration 4 5 6 7 8 TOTAL or SETTDLTOTALor SETTOT_MOD ETOr _TOTAL Totalizer function block 2 TOTAL--+ output variable = totaHzed mass flow (fac tory setting) SETTOr --+ totalizer control MOD ETOT --+ totalizer configuration Totalizer function block 3 TOTAL.By S\vitching the supply voltage off and on again.Commissioning Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA It is essential to adhere to the following sequence/assignment when configuring the modules in the PROFlBUS master system· Slot sequence 1 2 3 Module A1 AI A1 A1 AI A1 Description Analog Input fundlon block I Output variable.7.

FUNCTION BLOCKS (6 12) --.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning Input data Byte I I Byte 2 I Byte 3 I Byte 4 Byte 5 measured variable (IEEE 754 floating point number} Status Assignment oj the measured variables to the Al module The AI module can transmit different measured variables to tile PROFI BUS master (Class 1). V1SCOS1TY KIN. PROFIBUS DP (GBA) --. BLOCK SELECTION (6 120): Selection of an Analog Input function block --.g. VISCOSITY 1177 1178 1179 1180 The following measured variables are available when the additional "batchlng" software is installed (order option) Endress+Hauser 93 . The measured variables are assigned to the Analog Input function blocks I to 6 by means of the local display or with the aid of an operating program (e.software Is lnstaUed (order option) OYN. V1SCOS1TY T. FieldCare) in the CHANNEL function: BASIC FUNCTION (G) --. COMPo K1N. COMPo DYN. CHANNEL (6123): Selection of a measured variable Possible settings Measured variable MASS fLOW VOLUME FLOW CORRECTED VOLUME fLOW DENSITY REfERENCE DENSITY TEMPERATURE (order option) ID for CHANNel function 277 273 398 281 402 285 The (ollowlng measured variables are available when the additional ·concen tratlon measurement" software Is Installed TARGET MASS fLOW 1104 1165 1167 11 68 1169 1170 I I 71 1172 1[73 % TARGET MASS fLOW TARGET VOLUME FLOW % TARGET VOLUME FLOW TARGET CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW CARR1ER MASS fLOW % CARRIER MASS fLOW CARRIER VOLUME flOW % CARRIER VOLUME FLOW CARRIER CORRECTED VOLUME flOW 1174 1166 % BLACK LIQUOR ' BAUME °API "PLATO ' BALLING "BRIX 1175 The following measured variables are available when the addltlonal ·vlscosity. VISCOSITY T.

then select CHANNEL (6 123) = TEMPERATURE 2. batchlng. If the measured variable Is selected even If the additIonal software Is not Installed. diagnosIs) are only available If the appropriate additIonal software is Installed In the device. BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFIBUS DP (GBA) --> FUNCTIONBLOCKS (612)--> BLOCK SELECTION(6) 20): Select ANALOG INPUT I. slot 2). the value ' 0' is transmitted to the PROF/BUS master (Class 1) for the measured variable.Commissioning Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Measured variable BATCH UPWARDS BATCH DOWNWARDS BATCH COUNTER BATCH SUM BATCHING TIME ID for CHANNBL function 1346 1347 1348 1349 1354 The followtng measured variables are available when the-additional "advanced diagnostics' software Is installed (order option) MASS FLOW DEVIATION DENSITY DEVIATION 1603 1620 1637 1654 REFERENCE DENSITY DEVIATION TEMPERATURE DEVIATION TUBE DAMPING DEVIATION ACTUAL DEVIATION ELECTR. SENSORS 1671 1688 2055 2072 FREQU. adv. 1. DYN. then select CHANNEL (6 123) = MASS FLOW BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFIBUS DP (GBA) --> FUNCTIONBLOCKS (6 12) --> BLOCK SELECTION (6120): Select ANALOG INPUT 2. slot I) and tile temperature by means of the Analog Input function block 2 (module AI. FLUCTUATION DEVIATION TUBE DAMPING FLUCTUATION DEVIATION ~ Note! The measured variables for the software options (concentration measurement. 94 Endress+Hauser . viscosity. Factory setting Module AI (slot I) AI (slot 2) AI (slot 3) Analog Input function block I 2 3 Measured variable ~1ASS Unit kg/s CHANNBL function factory setting 277 273 398 FLOW VOLUME FLOIV ml/h Nml/h CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW DENSITY REFERENCE DENSITY TEMPERATIJRE AI (slot 4) AI (slot 5) 4 5 6 kg/I kg/NI 281 402 285 AI (slot 6) K Example: You want to cyclically transmit the mass flow to the PROFIBUS master (Class I) by means of the Analog Input function block I (module AI.

The totalizer values can be cyclically D 'ansmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class I) via the TOTAL module (slots 7 to 9). FieldCare) in the "CHANNEL" function: BASIC FUNCTION (G) -> PROF/BUS DP (GBA) -> TOTALIZER (613) --> SELECT TOTALIZER (0130): Selection of a totalizer -> CHANNEL (6 133): Selection of measured variable Possible settings Totalizer value/measured variable 10 for CHANNEL function MASS flOW VOLUME FLOW 277 273 398 0 CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW Off The following measured variables are available when the additional ·concentratlon measuremenr software Is installed (order optlon) TARGET MASS flOW TARGET VOLUME flOW TARGET CORRECTED VOLUME flOW 1164 1167 11 69 1170 1172 CARRIER MASS flOW CARRIER VOLUME FLOW CARR IER CORRECTED VuLUME FLOW 1174 The measured variables for the software option ·concentration measurement" are only available If the appropriate additional software Is Installed in the device. The fifth byte contains standardized status information corresponding to the totalizer value. Further information on the device status -> Page 124 Input data Byte 1 !Byte 2 IByte 3 I Byte 4 Byte 5 Totalizer value (I EEE 754 noating point number) Status Assignment oj the measured variables to the TOTAL module The TOTAL module can transmit different totalizer variables to the PROFIBUS master (Class I). ~ Note! Factory selling Module TOTAL (.lot 7) TOTAL (.lot 8) TOTAL (slot 9) Totalizer function block I 2 3 TotalIzer value/ Measured variable MASS fLOW MASS FLOW MASS FLOW Unit kg kg kg 10 (or CHANNBL funcllon 277 277 277 Endress+Hauser 95 . If the measured variable Is selected even If the additional software Is not installed.g.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Commissioning TOTAL module The measuring d"oce has ti". The measured variables are assigned to the Totalizer function blocks I to 3 by means of the local display or with the aid of an operating program (e.e Totalizer function blocks. The totalizer value is represented in the first four bytes in the form of a floating point number in accordance with the IEEE 754 standard . the value ' 0' Is transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class I ) for the measured variable.

• The totalizer can be configured via the automation system (MODETOT). The following conU·ol variables are supported: • 0 = Totabze (factory setting) • I = Reset totalizer (the totabzer value is reset to 0) • 2 = Accept totalizer preset Note' After the totabzer value has been reset to 0 or set to the preset value. then select CHANNEL (6133) = VOLUME FLOW SETTOT_TOTAL module The module combination SETTOT_TOTAL [slots 7 to 9) consists of the functions SETTOT and TOTAL. The control variable does not have to be changed to 0 again to restart totalizing. refer to TOTAL module --> Page 95 Data structure of the SElTOT_ TOTAL module combination Output data Input data SSTTOT Byte t Control Byte t TOTAL I Byte 2 I Byte 3 I Byte 4 Byte 5 Status Totalizer value (IEEE 754 floating point number) SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module The module combination SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL (slots 7 to 9) consists of the functions SETTOT. Stopping totaliZing is controlled in the SETTOT_MODETOLTOTAL module via the MODETOT function. With this module combination: • The totalizer can be controlled via the automation system (SETTOT). tile totalizer can be conU·olled via control variables . --> Page 96 96 Endress+Hauser . MODETOT and TOTAL.oa the automation system (SETTOT). refer to SETOT_ TOTAL module. With tllis module combination: • The totalizer can be controlled . • The totalizer value is U·ansmitted including the status (TOTAL) SElTOT junction In the SETTOT function. • The totaUzer value is transmitted including the status (TOTAL) SElTOTfunctioll For a desctiption of the SETTOT function.Commissioning Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Example: You want to cyclically transmit the totalized volume flow as totalizer value I to the PROFIBUS master IClass I) by means of tlle TOTAL module [slot 7): BASIC FUNCTION [G)--> PROFIBUS DP [GBA) --> TOTALIZER (613)--> selectTOTALIZER (6130): Select TOTALIZER I. the totalizing continues automatically. --> Page 97 TOTAL junction For a description of the TOTAL function.

If the aggregated total of the totalizer should constantly retain Ule value 0. Display value assignmentto the main line.g. Output data Byte I IBy!e 2 IByte 3 !syte4 Byte 5 Displayed value (IEEE 754 floating poin t number) Status Status The measuring device interprets the status in accordance with PROFIBUS Profile Specification Version 3. DISPLAY_VALUE module Any value (IEEE 754 Doating point number).0. The statuses OK.oa conti'ol villjables. calculates the positive and negative Dow portions • I = calculates the positive Dow portions . switching on positive zero return). BAD and UNCERTAIN are indicated on Ule local display by a corresponding symbol. The following settings ill'e possible: = Balance (factory setting). including status. the totalizer can be configured . the MODElOT function must first be set to 3 [= totalizingisstopped) and then the SETTOT function must be set to I (= reset the totalizer). Ule option BIDIRECTIONAL must be active in the MEASURING MODE (66011 function. the value for the aggregated total is reset to 0. Endress+Hauser 97 .oce is able to process device-specific conti'ol variables from the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) in cyclic data ti'ansmission (e. Ule measllling de.g. FieldCare) . can be cyclically transmitted via the PROFIBUS master (Class I) direcUy to the local display using the DISPLAY_VALUE module (slot 10). ---> Page 41 CONTROL_BLOCK module By means of the CONTROL_BLOCK module (slot II ). additional line or info line can be configured via the local display itself or an operating program (e. refer to TOTAL module ---> Page 95 Data structure 0/ the SETTOT_MODETOT_ TOTAL module combination Output data Input data SB1TOT By!e J Control MODBTOT Byte 2 Configuration By!e J I TOTAL Byte 2 I By!e3 I Byte 4 Byte 5 Totalizer value (IEEE 754 noatlng point number) Status Example o/using the SETTOT _MODETOCTOTAL module If the SETTOT function is set to I (= reset the totaiizer). TOTAL junction For a description of the TOTAL function.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning MODEroT junction In the MODETOT function.2 = calculates the negative How portions • 3 = Totalizing is stopped •° Note! For the calculation of the positive and negative flow portions (control vill'iable 0) or the negative flow portions only (conti'ol variable 21to be CillTied out correctly.

ANUAL (SINGLE SHOT) 78: Start manual determination of the advanced diagnostics parameters ~ Note! The control (e. The output byte must always switch from ' 0' . Example (change the output byte) From 0 --. No effect Positive zero return Is switched off.1. --. switching on positi\'e zero return) is executed by cyclic data transmIssion If the output byte switches from ' 0' to the bit pattern in question. 0---* 30: Select batching specification I 0---* 31: Select hatching specification 2 ~ 32: Select batchlng specification 3 0-4 33: Select hatching specification 4 0---* 34: Select hatching specification 5 0---* 35: Select hatching specification 6 0 ---* 40: Stop batchlng 0-4 41: Start hatching 0---* 42: Interrupt batchlng 0---* 43: Continue hatching 0---* 44: Reset the fault message {affects the following hatching fault messages: # 471 .g. o ~ 50: Relay output I OFF o ~ 51: Relay output 1 ON 0---* 55: Relay output 2 OFF 0---* 56: R elay output 2 ON Control variables that are executed only If the "Batchlng" soft\vare Is Installed in the measuring device. CONTROL_BLOCK o 4741 0-4 46: Reset hatching quantlty counter and total batch lng quantity to 0 Control variables that are executed only If additional 'Advanced diagnostics' software is Installed In the measuring device.473. 472. 2 0 3 2 0 3 --. A switchback to ' 0' dO€"s not have any effect. fl. --> --+ 2 No effect Output data Byte I Control 98 Endress+Hauser .Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Supported control variables a/the CONTROL_BLOCK module The following device-specific control variables can be activated by changing the output byte from 0--> x: Module Control variables 0---* 2: Positive zero return uN o ~ 3: Positive zero return OFF 0---* 4: Run zero point adjustment 0---* 8: UN IDIRECTIONAL measuring mode 0---* 9: BID IRECTIONAL measuring mode o ~ 24: Run UNIT TO BUS function The followIng control variables are only executed if the measuring device has a relay output. 0---* 0---* 0---* 0---* 0---* 0---* 0 --7 25: Warning mode ' Advanced Diagnostics' OFF 26: Warning mode "Advanced Diagnosis' ON 70: Start determining the user reference status 74: Acquisition mode OFF 75: Acquisition mode. PERIODiCAL 76: Acquisition mode. To Result Positive zero return Is switched on.

including status. The correction quantity is determined by the system operator. • Further explanation of the parameter FIXED CORRECTION (7204) is contained in the "Descliption of Device Functions" manual. Endress+Hauser 99 . avoid constantly writing this de\1ce parameter via PROFIBUS! --> Page 90 Note! • This module is only evaluated by the measurtng device if the additional "batching" software is installed in the measw'ing de\1ce larder option) . This can be caused. Output data Byte I I Byte 2 I Byte 3 I Byte 4 Byte 5 FIxed correction quantity (IE EE 754 floating point number) Status Note! The status is not evaluated by the device. The permitted input range is ± 10% of the batch quantity. d Caution! The batching quantity is a nonvolatile device parameter. by a pump ovelTUnrtlng or by tlle closing time of a valve.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Commissioning BATCHING_QUANTITY module The value of the quantity to be batched IIEEE 754 floating paint number). For this reason. including status. Caution l The batching quantity is a nonvolatile device parameter. the closing contact for valve I is activated. can be cyclically transmitted by the PROFIBUS master [Class I. system-related incorrect quantity. the batching quantity may have to be adjusted. which is a separate part of these Operating Insti'uctions. The correction quantity balances out a constant. For this reason. The unit selected in the measuring device is used as the unit. BATCHING]fX_COMP_QUANTITY module A positive or negative correction value IIEEE 754 floating point number) . A negative compensation quantity must be specified for overbatching and a positive correction quantity for underbatching. II the batch quantity specified here is achieved. whicb is a separate part of these Operating Instructions. avoid constantly writing this device parameter via PROFIBU5! --> Page 90 Note! • This module is only evaluated by the measUling device if the additional "batching" software is installed in the measuring de\1ce larder option). d Output data Byte I IByte 2 IByte 3 IByte 4 Byte 5 Batch quantity (IEEE 754 floating po:nt num ber) Status Note! The status is not evaluated by the device. can be cyclicaliy transmitted by the PROFIBUS master IClass I) to the measuring device using the BATCH QUANTITY module Islot 12). • Further explanation of the parameter BATCH QUANTITY 17203) is contained in the "Description of Device Functions" manual. to the measuring device using the BATCHINGJIX_COMP_QUANTITY module Islot 13). for example. The unit selected in the measUling de\1ce is used as the unit. • II the input range is not sufficient for the correction quantity.

<n a~-"' . 100 Endress+Hauser .e... .. ""_.J... see -> Page 92 6.. ' Fig. the sequence or arrangement of the modules must be observed when configW'ing the modules. i.. " i" W :ij 1 ..... the individual modules are described with their individual properties.7...! .00.. Gaps between configured modules have to be assigned the EMPTY_MODULE module. ~rl . dPL1£1 iiii " !!I!rti·! I b3Mt' Int'" 1>0 ...it consists of several individual modules.. !pl x! .ooI>ot ..1 GSD file. In contrast to a compact slave.~ . :...«Jl'J m~ ·"".. I 1....c. Sf. tf1V. 45: Complete configurJtion using the Promass 8... ~ .._ • • ~ .'.. . In the GSD file..§II Ii Q[~1:--I1I1%1 S1 ~ ~ foi~~ n1 1 III' .... The modules are permanently assigned to the slots.Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA EMPTY_MODULE module The measuring device is a so-called modular PROFIBUS slave.4 Example I: Configuration examples with Simatic S7 HW-Konfig !.. the structure of a modular slave is valiable . For a more detailed description. 10.....

Proline Promass 83 PROF/BUS DP/ PA Commissioning It is essential to ad here to the [ollowing sequence when configuring U modules in the le PROFIBUS master (Class I): Slot sequence I Module Al Al Al Byte length Input data Byte length output data Description Analog Input function block I Ou tput variable --+ mass flow (factory setting) Analog Input function block 2 Outpu t variable --) volume flow (factory setting) 5 5 5 5 5 5 - 2 3 4 Analog Input function block 3 Output variable --} corrected volume now (factory setting) Al Al Al - Analog Input function block 4 Output variable --+ density {factory settlng) Analog Input function block 5 Output variable --+ reference density (factory setting) Analog Input function block 6 Output variable --+ temperatu re (factory setting) Totalizer function block I 5 6 7 SETIOT_MODETOT_TOTA L 5 2 TOTAL --+ outpu t variable = totalized mass flow ((ac tory setting) SETTOr --+ totalizer control MODErOT ----) totalizer configu ration 8 SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL 5 2 Totalizer function block 2 TOTAL ----) output va riable tota lized mass flow (factory setting) SETTOT ----) totalizer con trol MODErOT ----) totalizer configuration = 9 SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL 5 2 Totalizer function block 3 TOTAL ----) output variable totalized mass SETfOT ~ totalizer control MODETOT ----) totalizer conftguratlon = now (factory setting) 10 II 12 13 DISPLAY_VALU E - 5 I Default value for local display Control of device functions Batchlng quantity Fixed correction quantity CONTROL_8LOC K BATCH lNG_QUANTITY - 5 5 BATC HING_FIX_COM P_QUANTl1Y Endress+Hausel' 10 1 .

.>... "" .. to( [ ' ) ·[ W lf>ljf~....*u:t:J:I ~-'!. Ffg..:J ....~ ~ tl r~ "'~W~ ~ llII.:~ 1... " ! "l ·..or Qtl' I J. the Analog Input function block I (slot I). ~ . . The totalizer is configW'ed "without configuration"..m:-"l'. ...I! . ~) "" I. ~f"'" IO(U1 C-l l ~ '~ t. 46: fn l/ifs con[rguratfon example... [M . ">-!~ ~ )f..J 'Aot'.J ~ "''' .·.' ...:N :"u-. ... With this configuration... .J i3'..."" .. Slot sequence I 2 Module AI Byte length Input data Byte length output data - Description Analog Input function block I Output va riable --+ Mass now (factory setting) Empty Empty Empty 5 - EMPTY_MODULE EMPTCMODUL E EMPTY_MODULE EMPTY_MODULE EMPTY_MODULE TOTA L EMPTY_MOD ULE EMPTY_MODULE - 3 4 - 5 6 Empty Empty Totalizer function block I TOTAL--+ output variable = totalized mass flow (factory setting) Empty 5 - - 7 8 0 10 Empty Empty Control of device functions EMPTY _MUDULE CONTROL_BLOCK I II 102 Endress+ Hauser . • "". \.) .. """ II .. ~ f L.· YJP• ...."~ l~~ ""--'"Af.Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Example 2: _ ... The mass Dow (factmy setting) is read out cyclically by the measuring device by means of the Analog Input function block I.. l-.. HG '. . I \I HTH)1. ' .J ~::. ~!OU L>!om~ ... modules that are not needed are replaced by the module EMPTCMODULE. L!.·. .. the totalizer value TOTAL [slot 7) and the cyclic control of device functions CONTROL_BLOCK [slot II) are ac tivated . H ... In other words. nZ W-"'_ !AA w.. in this example it only returns the totalizer value for the mass Dow (factory setting) by means of the TOTAL module and cannot be controlled by the PROFIBUS master IClass I)...'. TIl(' Promass 83 GSf) /ile fs used....o.tH . ffiJ\I<SU."" 1'fI)'( '-I H)I.J ~ ... -I't~ ..lt! fJ.....10' J.Jf. (ffll..u\ N ·' _I ~ '! .. ~ ..:. o).~... ..I.. ["'·..l..'':: F'C ~''''''(9<' '' . n: """"'" 3J I '.. ..n.. .Y.....l.~ ...wL ~ !I...

I I I I I I I I I I D. Endress+Hauser 103 .------.-. . I I M"~.. -. I I I I I I I I rI PROFIBUS K L. alue TOTAl .d varia ble ~. . .---------.b. . Measured va riable 2 ~ 1'------. ~ ~~~ .e. o 0:: u:: ~ Dl5 p1a y value (DISPLAY VALUE ) ContlOI (CONTROL BLOCK) ~ ---.---1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I local Display Measuredvariab!e 1 . . J Out . the sequence or arrangement of the modules must be observed when configUling the modules (see following table) . it is recommended to only configure modules that are processed in the PROFIBUS master system.. The modules are permanently assigned to the slots." E"J ~ Signal process ing . Output val ue AI ~ f- Transducer block ~ Analog Input 1 I ~ Analog Input 2 :------i------. MODETOT Out value TOTAl ::::> (j) !----~ Cnrnll'ura tio n SEITOr MODETOT I Measured ""... 47: Block lIlodelfor Promass 83 PROF/BUS PA Profile 3.. To optimize the data throughput rate of the PROFIBUS network.--.- I Fig.Phys ical ~.! -._[. ..-----------------.lODETOT Out value TOTAl Config uration SETTOT.------------. Gaps between configured modules have to be assigned the EMPTY_MODULE module. Measured varia ble J . i.----------.-------.----.8 PROFIBUS PA cyclic data exchange Below is a description of the cyclic data b'ansmission when using the Promass 83 GSD file (complete device functionality)... r-------.8.it consists of several individual modules. the individual modules (input and output data) are described with their individual properties.8.. Mea su red va ria ble .--.-------. 6..2 Modules for cyclic data transmission The measuring device is a so-<:alled modular PROFIBUS slave. .. In contrast to a compact slave. .Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning 6... _~ ~ .0 6..-------.1 Block model The block model illustrated shows which input and output data Promass 83 provides for cyclic data exchange via PROFlBUS PA. Measured va ria ble 3 ~ \ MeasLlred va riable . 2' _ '.J Out~ value AI ~ M 09 ' lo put3 Analog Input 4 Outout val ue AI Outout value AI Outoutval ueAl Outpvt value AI ~~_~e~e~ PROFILE "-Lr Arl3 log Input 5 ~ • • ~ Analog Input 6 rt III ! Parameter specific IManufacturer Tota li1:er 1 Totalizer 2 Totaflzer3 Conti ura tion SETTOT /. In the GSD file. the structure of a modular slave is variable .

. 104 Endress+Hauser .By means of an operating program (e.By switching the supply voltage off and on again.Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA ltis essential to adhere to the followingsequence/assignmentwhen configuring the modules in the PROFIBUS master system: Slot sequence I Module Al Al Al Al Al Al Descrlptlon Analog Input function block 1 Output variable. A detailed descliption of the individual modules is contained in the following section .By means of the local display .g. • The device has to be reset once a new configuration has been loaded to tile automation system.-. This can be effected as follows: . FieldCare) .) mass flow (factory setUng) Analog Input function block 2 Output variable -+ volume flow (factory settIng) Analog Input function block 3 Output variable --+ corrected volume flow (factoi)' setting) Analog Input function block 4 Output variable -+ density (factory settlng) Analog Input function block 5 Output variable --+ reference density (factory setting) 2 3 4 5 6 7 Analog Input function block 6 Output variable --+ temperature (factory setUng) Totalizer functlon block t TOTAL --+ output variable =: totaU zed SETfOT--+ totalizer control MODETOT --+ totalizer configuration ma~ flow (factory setting) 8 TOTAL or SETTOT30 TAL or SETTOT_MODHOT_TOTA L Totalizer function block 2 TOTAL --+ output variable = totalized mass now (factory setUng) SETTor --+ totalizer control MODETOr -7 totalizer configuration Totalizer function block 3 TOTAL -7 output variable = totalized mass now [factory setting) SETTOT -7 totalizer control MODETOT -7 totalizer configuration 9 10 II DISPLALVALUE Default value for local display Control of device functions CONTROL_BLOCK Note! • The assignment of the measured variables for the Analog Input function blocks (I to 6) and the Totalizer function blocks (I to 3) can be changed by means of the CHANNEL function..

The measured val'iables are assigned to the Analog Input function blocks I to 6 by means of the local display or with the aid of an operating progrrun (e.g. The measured vaI'iable is represented in the first four bytes in the form of floating point numbers in accordance with the IEEE 754 standard.3 Description of the modules AI module (Analog Input) The cOlTesponding measured valiable. FieldCare) in the CHANNEL function: BASIC FUNCTION IG) --> PROFIBUS PA (GCA) --> FUNCTION BLOCKS (6 12) --> BLOCK SELECTION (6120): Selection of an Analog Input function block --> CHANNEL (6 123): Selection of a measured variable Possible settings Measured variable MASS FLOW VOLUME FLOW CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW DENSITY REFERENCE DENSITY TEMPERATURE (order option) ID for CHANNel function 277 273 398 281 402 285 The following measurro variables are available when the additional ·concentratlon measurement" software Is Installed TARGET MASS FLOW 1104 % TARGET MASS FLOW TARGET VOLUME flOW 1165 1167 1168 1169 % TARGET VOLUME FLOW TARGET CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW CARRIER MASS flOW 1170 1\7\ % CARRIER MASS FLOW CARRIER VOLUME FLOW 11 72 1173 1174 % CARR IER VOLUME FLOW CARRIER CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW % BLACK LIQUOR 1166 Endress+Hauser lOS . Further information on tile device status --> Page 124 Input data Byte I IByte 2 IByte 3 IByte 4 Byte 5 measured variable (IEEE 754 floating point number) Status Assignment a/the measured variables to the Al module The AI module can transmit different measured variables to the PROFIBUS master (Class I).8. The fifth byte contains standardized status information corresponding to the measured variable.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning 6. is cyclically o'ansmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class I) by means of the AI module (slots I to 6). including the status.

COMPo KIN.> BLOCK SELECTION[6120): Select ANALOG INPUT I. I. diagnosis) are only available If the appropriate additional software Is Installed In the device. viscosity. Factory selling Module Analog Input function block Measured variable UnI' kg/s mJ/h NmJ/h CHANNEL function factory setting AI (slot I) AI (slo'2) AI (slot 3) AI (slo' 4) AI (slot 5) Al (slot 6) I 2 3 4 5 6 MASS FLOW VOlUME FLOW COR RECTED VOLUME FLOW DENSITY REFERENCE DENSITY TEMPERATURE 277 273 398 281 402 285 kg/I kg/NI K Example: You want to cyclically transmit the mass flow to the PROFIBUS master [Class I) by means of the Analog Input function block I (module AI. the value ·0' Is transmitted to the PROFIBUS master l Class I) for the measured variable. DYN. slot 2) . VISCOSITY 1178 1179 1[80 The following measured variables are avaUable when the additional "advanced diagnostics' software Is installed (order option) MASS FLOW DEVIATION DENSITY DEVIATION REFERENCE DENSITY DEVIATION TEMPERATLIRE DEVIATION TUBE DAtlWING DEVIATION 1603 162D 1637 1654 1671 ACTUAL DEVIATION ELECTR . then select CHANNEL (6 123) = MASS FLOW BASIC FUNCTION [G) ---'> PROFIBUS PA [GCA) ---'> FUNCTIONBLOCKS [612) ---'> BLOCK SELECTION [6120): Select ANALOG INPUT2. BASIC FUNCTION (G) ---'> PROFIBUS PA [GCA) ---'> FUNCTIONBLOCKS [612)---. If the measured variable Is selected even H the additional software Is not Installed . SENSORS FREQU. then select CHANNEL (6123) = TEMPERATURE Endress+Hauser 2. COMPo DYN. 106 . VISCOSITY 1177 KIN. VISCOSITY T. VISCOSITY T. batch lng. adv. FLUCTUATION DEVIATION TUBE DAMPING FLUCTUATION DEVIATION 1688 2D55 2072 Notel ~ The measured variables for the sorMare options (concentration measurement.Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Measured variable ID for CHANNBL function <BAUME "API · PLATO ' BALLING °BRIX 117S The following measured variables are available when the additional ·vlscoslty" software Is Installed (order option) DYN. slot I) and the temperatme by means of the Analog Input function block 2 [module AI.

The totalizer value is represented in the filSt four bytes in the form of a Doating point number in accordance with the IEEE 754 standard. The fifth byte contains standardized status information corresponding to the totalizer value.ce has three Totalizer function blocks.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Commissioning TOTAL module The measuring de\. FieldCare) in the "CHANN EL" function: BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFIBUS PA (GCA) --> TOTALIZER (6 13) --> SELECT TOTALIZER (6130): Selection of a totalizer --> CHANNEL (6133): Selection of measured variable Possible settings Totalizer value/measured variable MASS FLOW VOLUME FLOW CORRECTED VOLUME FLOW OFF (order option) ID for CHANNEL function 277 273 398 0 The following measured variables aT available when the additional "concenttaUon measu r e emenr software Is Installed TARGET MASS FLOW TARGET VOLUME FLOW TARGET CORREC TED VOLUME FLOW CARRIER MASS FLOW CARRIER VOLUME FLOW CARRIER CO RRECTED VOLUME FLOW 1164 1167 1169 1170 1172 1174 The measured variables for the soft\vare option ·concentration measuremeor are only available If the appropriate additional software Is Installed In the device. Further information on the device status --> Page 124 Input data Byte 1 I Byte 2 I Byte 3 I Byte 4 Byte 5 Totalizer value (IEEE 154 floating point number) Status Assignment a/the measured variables to the TOTAL module The TOTAL module can transmit different totalizer variables to the PROFIB US master (Class I). The totalizer values can be cyclically transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class I) \. If the measured variable Is selected even If the additional sofnvare Is not installed.a the TOTAL module (slots 7 to 9). the value ·0' Is tra nsmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class I) for the measured variable. ~ Note! Factory selling Module TOTAL (sIo17) TOTAL (sI018) TOTAL (sI019) TotaJlzer runctlon block I 2 3 TotaJizer value/ Measured variable MASS FLOW MASS FLOW MASS FLOW Unll kg kg kg ID ror CHANNBL function 277 277 277 End ress+Hauser 107 . The measured variables are assigned to the Totalizer functio n blocks I to 3 by means of the local display or with the aid of an operating program (e.g.

MODErOT and TOTAL. --> Page 97 TOTAL function For a description of the TOTAL function.is module combination: • The totalizer can be controlled \1a the automation system (SETTOT). • The totalizer can be configured via the automation system (MODETOT). The following conti·ol variables are supported: • 0 ~ Totalize (factory setting) • I ~ Reset totalizer (the totalizer value is reset to 0) • 2 ~ Accept totalizer preset Note' After the totalizer value has been reset to 0 or set to the preset value.Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Example: You want to cyclically n·ansmit the totalized volume flow as totalizer value I to the PROFIBUS master (Class I) by means of the TOTAL module (slot 7): BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROFIBUSPA (GCA) --> TOTALIZER (613) --> select TOTALIZER (6130): SelectTOTALIZER I. With tl. then select CHANNEL (6133) ~ VOLUME FLOW SETTOT_TOTAL module The module combination SETTOT_TOTAL (slots 7 to 9) consists of the functions SETTOT and TOTAL. • The totalizer value is transmitted including the status (TOTAL) SETTOT junction In the SETTOT function. The control variable does not have to be changed to 0 again to restart totalizing. the totalizing continues automatically. the totalizer can be conn·olled via conti·ol varialiles . refer to TOTAL module --> Page 95 Data structure ojthe SETTOT_TOTAL module combination Output data SBTTOT Byte I Byte 1 Input data TOTAL I Byte 2 I Byte 3 I Byte 4 Byte 5 Control Totalizer value (IEEE 754 floating point number) Status SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module The module combination SETTOT_MODErOT _TOTAL (slots 7 to 9) consists of the functions SETTOT. --> Page 96 108 Endress+Hauser . Stopping totaliZing is controlled in the SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module via the MODETOT function. • The totalizer value is transmitted including the status (TOTAL) SETTOT/unction For a description of the SETTOT function. refer to SErOT_TOTAL module. With this module combination: • The totalizer can be controlled via the automation system (SETTOT).

can be cyclically ti'ansmitted via the PROFlBUS master (Class I) directly to the local display using the DISPLAY_VALUE module (slot 10).Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning MODETOT junction In the MODETOT function.g. the value for the aggregated total is reset to O. DISPLAY_VALUE module Any value (IEEE 754 Doating point number). The following settings are possil)le: • 0 = Balance (factory setting). FieldCare). additional line or info li ne can be configured via the local display itself or an operating program (e. the totalizer can be configured via conti'ol variables. TOTAL junction For a description of the TOTAL function. the option BIDIRECTIONAL must ow be active in the MEASURING MODE (660 1) function. calculates the positive and negative Dow portions • I = calculates the positive D portions ow • 2 = calculates the negative How portions • 3 = Totalizing is stopped Note! For the calculation of the positive and negative flow portions (conU'oi valiable 0) or the negative D portions only (control variable 2) to be carried out correctly. including status. --> Page 41 Endress+Hauser 109 . refer to TOTAL module --> Page 95 Data structure 0/ the SETTOT_MODETOT_ TOTAL module combination Output data SBTIOT Byte 1 Input data MODBTOT TOTAL Byte I Byte 2 Co nfiguration I Byte 2 I Byte 3 I Byte 4 Byte 5 Control Totalizer value [IEEE 754 floating point number) Status Example 0/ using the SETTOT_MODETOT_ TOTAL module If tlle SETTOT function is set to I (= reset the totalizer). The statuses OK. Display value assignment to the main line. BAD and UNCERTAIN a1'e indicated on tlle local display by a corresponding symbol. the MODETOT function must first be setto 3 (= totalizingisstopped) and then the SETTOTfunction must be set to I (= reset the totalizer). Output data Byte I 18Yte 2 IByte 3 I Byte 4 Byte 5 Displayed value (IEEE 754 noating point number) Status Status The measuring device interprets the status ill accordance witll PROFlBUS Profile Specification Version 3. lf the aggregated total of the totalizer should constantly retain the value 0.0.

the sequence or arrangement of the modules must be observed when configuring the modules. To 2 Resu1t Positive zero return is switched on . see -> Page 92 110 Endress+Hausel' .e. In contrast to a compact slave. i. the individual modules are described with their individual properties. MAN UAL (SINGLE SHOT) 78: Start manual determination of the advanced dlagnostlcs parameters ~ Note! The control (e. Gaps between configured modules have to be assigned the EMPTY_MODULE module. Example (change the output byte) From -. PERIODICAL 76: Acquisition mode.g. -. For a more detailed description. 3 2 3 No effect Output data Byte 1 Control EMPTY_MODULE module The measuring device is a so-called modular PRORBUS slave. switching on positive zero return). -. -.g. In the GSD file. 0 2 0 0 -. switching on positive zero return) Is executed by cyclic data transmission if the output byte switches from '0' to the bit pattern in question. The output byte must always switch from ' 0'. tile measuring device is aille to process device-specific control valiables from the PROFIBUS master (Class I) in cyclic data transmission [e. 0--+ 0 --+ 0--+ 0--+ 0--+ 0--+ 0--+ 25: Warning mod~ ' Advanced Diagnostics' OFF 26: Warning mode ' Advanced DiagnosIs' ON 70: Start determining the user reference status 74: Acquisition mode OFF 75: Acquisition mode. tile structure of a modular slave is vanable . No effect Positive zero return Is switched off.it consists of several individual modules. The modules are permanently assigned to the slots. A switchback to '0' does not have any effect. Supported control variables a/the CONTROL_BLOCK module The following device-specific conh'ol variables can be activated by changing the output byte fi'om 0-> x: Module Control variables 0--+ 2: PosItive zero retum ON 0--+ 3: Positive zero T€turn OFF 0--+ 4: Run zero point adjustment 0--+ 8: UNIDIRECTIONAL measuring mode 0--+9: BIDIRECTIONAL measurIng mode 0--+ 24: Run UNIT TO BUS function CONTROL_BLOCK Control variables that are executed only If additional ' Advanced diagnostics' software is Installed in the measuring device.Commissioning Proline Prom ass 83 PRORBUS DP/PA CONTROL_BLOCK module By means of the CONTROL_BLOCK module (slot 11).

"""""". ~ \ ocl ~ K..."'" Fig....- "'-(>I • ..8.. ..[2 ..~ '( U · .....4 Configuration examples with Simatic S7 HW-Konfig Example I: !l ._'J"....re ... • If _ .. ~ · > l'*(Jo"Hl " 000-... " • • _no.·I::::$~~ ..~~~ . I ""' ) ·.. 48: Complere configuration using tile Prall/ass 83 GSDfile. output data Descrlptlon Analog Input function block I Output variable --i mass flow (factory settlng) AI AI - 2 3 4 Analog Input fun ction block 2 Output variable --+ \'olume flow ((actory setting) Analog Input function block 3 Output variable -+ corre<:ted volume flow (factory setting) AI AI 5 5 5 - Analog Input function block 4 Output variable --+ density (fa ctory setting) 5 AI Analog Input function block 5 Output variable --+ reference density (factory setti ng) Analog Input function block 6 Output variable --+ temperature (factory setting) Totalizer function block 1 TOTAL --+ output variable = totalized mass flow (factory setting) SETTOT --+ totalizer control MODETOT --+ totalizer configura tion Totalizer function block 2 TOTAL --+ output variable = totalized mass now (factory setting) SETTOT --+ totalizer control MODETOT --+ totalizer configu ration 6 AI - 7 SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL 5 2 8 SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL 5 2 Endress+Hauser I II .. ' ... <~ ""~'.. '" 'iii .....· ... It is essential to adhere to the following sequence when configuring the modules in the PROFIBUS master (Class I): Slot sequence I Module Byte length Input data 5 5 5 Byte length.}t" ~ U '~'.. .......II ·" :1'=*3 '''''''''..... ( . 4)(» -~ ~=tl I . ''''' .Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning 6. r_~)OI..:~.. .. .. .II. ' ~ I'U ~.. .. .'O" . ·i ~"·'~" '" ~~. . ""....

ss 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Slot sequence Module Byte length Input data Byte length output data Description Totallzer function block 3 9 SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL 5 2 TOTAL ---? output variable = totalized mass now (factory setting) SETTOT --+ total\zer control MODErOT --+ totallzer configuration Default va lue for local display Control of device functions 10 DISPLAY_VALUE CONTROL_BLOCK - 5 1 II - 112 Endress+Hauser .CommissiOlung Proline Pro m.

49: III thfs conjiguraffon example. y Tile ?romass &1 GSDfile Is IIsed. the totalizer value TOTAL [slot 7) and the cyctic control of device functions CONTROL_BLOCK Islot I I) are activated. The totalizer is configured "wiUlOut configuration". Slot sequence Module Byte length Input data Byte length output data Description Analog Input function block t I 2 3 4 AI EMPTY_MODULE EMPTY_MODULE EMPTCMODULE EMPTY_MODULE 5 - Output \'arlable -t Mass flow (factory setting) - - Empty - Empty Empty Empty - 5 6 7 EMPTY_MODULE TOTAL Empty TotalIzer function block t TOTAL --) output variable ". ~ "~ Hg. in this example it only returns the totalizer value for the mass flow IfactolY setting) by means of the TOTAL module and cannot be controlled by the PROFIBUS master IClass I). With this configuration. In other words. modules that are flat needed aft! rrplaced b the modale EMPTY_MODULE. the Analog Input function block I Islot I). totalized mass fl ow (factory s etting) 5 - 8 EMPTY_MODULE EMPTCMODULE EMPTY_MODULE CONTROL_BLOC K 9 10 I Empty Empty Empty Control of dev ice functions II Endress+Hauser 113 .Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning Example 2: ~ ~''''' !.. The mass flow [factory setting) is read out cyclically by the measuring device by means of the Analog Input function block I.

These memory modules are designed for a limited number of write operations. note the following: • As described above. During this process.2 Master class 1 acyclic (MS lAC) In MSIAC. function block) can be changed while tlle device is in the process of cyclic data transmission with a PLC. the number ofwr'ite operations does not even come close to this number. • MSIAC is not supported by all PROFIBUS devices.).a PROFIBUS must be made known to a Class 2 master. When usingMSIAC commllillcation.dual parameter takes place either in a device descliption ( ~O). Transducer Block.9. the number of Class 2 masters that can communicate \vitll a de\.ce via special SAPs. Therefore. or inside a software component in the master \. a Class 2 master accesses a de\. 6. note that constant writing of parameters (for example.a slot and index addressing. note the following: • Currently. FieldCare. Thus parameters for identification.Commissioning Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS OP/PA 6. This must be taken into account when programming the control system used . few PROFIBUS masters on the market support this data transmission. this maximum number can be reached quickly.g.ce simultaneously is limited to the number of SAPs avallable for this data ti·ansmission. at every cycle of the program) can drastically reduce the service life of a device. Ail parameters to be exchanged with a device \. conti'ol or adjustment in the various blocks (Physical Block. If programming is incorrect. • In the user program. Acyclically written parameters are written to voltage-resistant memory modules (EEPROM. that is already reading the cyclic data fi'om the device or writing to the device opens the communication channel via the SAP Ox33 1 special Service Access Point for MSIAC) and can then read or write a parameter acyclic ally like a Class 2 master via the slot and the index (if supported). When using MS2AC commllillcation.9 Acyclic data transmission PROFIBUS DP/PA Acyclic data transmission is used to transmit parameters during commissioning or maintenance. ~ Note! The memory module of the measuring device is designed for one million writes. In normal operation without MSIAC (during parameter configuration). • The use of a Class 2 master increases the cycle time of the bus system.9.1 Master class 2 acyclic (MS2AC) MS2AC is acyclic data ti'ansmission between a field device and a Class 2 master (e. the master opens a communication channel via an SAP (Service Access Point) to access the device. drastically reducing a device's service life. a OTM (Device Type Manager). This assignment to each indi\. or to display additional measured variables that are not included in cyclic data traffic. Siemens POM etc. 114 Endress+Hauser . a cyclic master. The measuring device supports the two basic types of acyclic data transmission: • MS2AC communication with 2 available SAPs • MS IAC communication 6. Flash etc.) .

very high process temperatures or very high viscosity fluids). • Zem point adjustment is performed with tlle measuring tubes completely filled and at zero flow (v = 0 m/ s). This can be achieved. Endress+Hauser 11 5 . Preconditions for a zero point adjustment Note the following before you perform a zero point adjusUOent: • A zerO point adjusUOent can be performed only with fluids that have no gas or solid contenl5.Normal operation --> valves I and 2 open .10 6. with shutoflvalves upstream and/ or downstream of the sensor or by using existing valves and gates. containing entrained solids or gas) it may prove impossible to obtain a stable zero pOint despite repeated zero point adjustmenl5. Calibration takes place under reference operating conditions.1 Adjustment Zero point adjustment All measuring devices are calibrated with state-of-the-art technology. for example. • You can view the currently valid zero point value using the ZERO POINT function (see the "Description of Device Functions" manual). • Under exU·eme process or operating conditions (e. 50: Zero patnr adjustment and sfwtoflv. .Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ P A Commissioning 6. In instances of Utis nature.g. the zero point adjustment is generally not necessalY! Expelience shows that tlle zero point adjustment is advisable only in special cases: • To achieve highest measuring accuracy also with velY small Dow rates. --> Page 151 fl.Zero point adjusUOent with pump pressure --> Valve I open I valve 2 closed . Consequently.1tves d Caution! • If the fluid is very difficult to measure (e.Zero point adjusUOent without pump pressure --> Valve I closed I valve 2 open 2 t Fig. The zero point obtained in this way is printed on the nameplate. please contact your Endress+Hauser service center.g.10.

Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DPIPA Performing a zero point adjustment I. 5. • The 2-point density adjusanent is only possible if both target density values are different fi·om each oU. abrasion or corrosion. Ule "ZERO ADJUST. Using the local display or an operating program. 4. 6. Otherwise Ule error message #731 (adjusDnent is not possible) appears in the "Diag. Enter the code (factory setting = 83) .When the zero point adjustment completes. Back to the HOME position: .Repeatedly press and release the Esc key (6Th).er by at least 0. In such cases. Check that operating pressure is conect. Example: Blix density measurement for apple julce. Operate the system until operating conditions have settled. The 2-point density adjustment takes these mechanically-based changes into account and calculates new. • An error in defining the target density affects all calculated density and volume functions. . Zero point adjusanent is now started. • The system is used exclusively to measure a fluld's density which must be registered to a high degree of accuracy under constant conditions. adjusted calibration data. 2-point density adjustment (with two fluids).If the flow in the pipe exceeds 0. 6. . This type of density adjustment is necessary under the following circumstances: • The sensor does not measure exactly the density value that the user expects on the basis of laboratory analyses. Stop the flow (v = 0 m/s). the resonant frequency of the measuring tubes has been affected by these factors and is no longer compatible \loth the calibration data set at the factory.1 mis. 2.Press and hold down Esc key WG) for longer than Uu·ee seconds or . 8.oate fi·om Ule measured fluid density by more than ± 10%.2 kg/I. 3. or the reference operating conditions used to calibrate the measuring de\oce. Acknowledge the securitypromptwith YES and confirm again with 0. Performing a I-point or 2-point density adjustment d Caution! • Onsite density adjustment can be performed only if the user has detailed knowledge of the fluid density. I-point density adjustment (with one fluid). select the ZERO POINT ADJUSTMENT function in the function matrix: BASIC FUNCTION (G) --> PROCESS PARAMETER (GIA) --> ADJUSTMENT (648) --> ZERO POINT ADJUST (6480)." function reappears on the display. material buildup. . e.2 Density adjustment It is advisable to perform a density adjustment when optimum measuring accuracy is required for calculating density dependent values. the following error message appears on the display: "ZERO ADJUST NOT POSSIBLE". • The fluid properties are outside the measuring points set at the factDlY. obtained for example fi·om detailed laboratDlY analyses. .Act Sys. Check the shutoff valves for leaks. This type of adjusanent is always to be carried out if the measuring tubes have been mechanically altered by. Now use['] or[=] to select START and confirm with 0. 7. Condition" parameter. • The target density value specified in this way must not de.10.g. 116 Endress+ Hauser . The application may require a I-point or 2-point density adjusanent. When you press ['] or [=] you are automatically prompted to enter the access code if the function mao·ix is still disabled.The message "ZEROPOINT ADJUST RUNNING" appears on the display for 30 to 60 seconds while adjusanent is in progress.

Enter the code. select the SETPOINT DENSITY function in Ole function matrix and perform density adjustment as follows: Function name SETPOINT DENS ITY Punctlon No. Walt until the temperature difference between fluid and measuring tube has equalized . I. Promass compares the measured density value and the target density value and calcu lates the new density coefficient. 6483 6484 DENSITY SET VALUE I Use'S to enter the target densIty of the first fluId and press 0 to S3\'e this value (input range = actual density value ± 10%). " 6485 6486 DENSITY SET VA LUE 2 Use tb to enter the target density of the second nu ld and press [9 to save this value (Input range =actual density value ± 10%). FiU the sensor with flu id. During this time Prom ass measures the current density of the first fluid (measured density va lue).!. 2. 6487 DE NSITY ADJUSTMENT Use IS to select DENS ITY ADJUSTMENT and press 0. The time you have to wait for equalization depends on the fluid and the temperature level. MEASURE FLUID 2 Use '0 to select START and press eD. Using the local display. Back to the HOME position: ~ Press and hold down Esc key {GBI for longer than three seconds or ~ Repeatedly press and release Esc key (0"8) -+ Exit the function matrl. Make sure that the measuring tubes are completely filled and that liquids are fi'ee of gas bubbles. MEASURE FLU ID I Use 'i9 to select START and press 0. During this time Promass measures the current density of the second fluid (measur€'d density value). The message "DENSITY' MEASUR EM ENT RUNNINC " appears on the display for approximately 10 seconds. 3. you can select the RESTORE ORIGINAL function to reactivate the defau lt density coetnclent. " 6488 RESTORE ORIGINAL If the density adj ustment does not complete correctly. The message "DENSITY' MEASUR E MENT RUNNINC · appears on the dIsplay for approximately 10 seconds. • The functions outlined in the following instructions are described in detaIl in the "Description of Device Functions" manual. For 2-pol nt density adjustment only. ~ Note! When you press ~ you are automatically prompted to enter the access code if the function matrix Is still disabled. Setting to be selected Use ~ (~or G) (to next functIon with 0 ) 6482 to select a 1.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Commissioning • Density adjustment changes the factory density calibration values or the calibration values set by the service technician.or 2-poln t adjustment. step by step " Endress+Hauser 11 7 .

• Gas purging and optional rupture elements are not designed for conCWTent usage. 6.12. 6. In the case of a later upgrade. 6.1 HistoROMl5-DAT (sensor-OAT) The 5-DAT is an exchangeable data storage device in which all sensor relevant parameters are stored.. e.g. • Use only low gauge pressure to purge.12 Data storage device (HistoROM).12. up to a specified measuring pressure it additionally serves as secondary containment. With the help of these connections. The following insti'uctions apply to handling sensors with purge or pressure monitoring connections: • Do not open the purge connections unless the containment can be filled immediately with a my inert gas. Accessories --> Page 120 Plugging on to the 110 board --> Page 138 d Caution! To ensure an unambiguous assignmen4 the F-CHIP is coded \vith the transmitter serial number once it is plugged in.12. we recommend the use of sensors whose housing is equipped with special pressure monitoring connections or IUpture elements (ordering option). it can not be reused with other measuring devices. Thus. the housing does not selve as an additional secondary containment. device configurations can be duplicated onto other measuring devices to cite just one example. serial number. 118 Endress+Hauser . In case a danger of measwing tube failure exists due to process characteristics. diameter. the F-CHIP can be ordered as an accessory and can simply be plugged onto tile 110 board.Commissioning Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA 6. Beyond that. This diminishes tile danger of mechanical overload of the housing. tile term HistoROM refers to various types of data storage modules on which process and measuring device data are stored. F-CHIP At Endress+ Hauser. Maximum pressure 5 bar. the software is immediately made available to the transmitter. pressure monitoring connections and rupture elements The sensor housing protects the imler electronics and mechanics and is filled with dJy nitrogen. which could lead to a housing failure and accordingly is connected with an increased danger potential. calibration factor. By plugging and unplugging such modules. Le. fluid collected in the housing in the event of tube failure can be drained off. zero point. StOling of specific parameter settings from the EEPROM to the T-DAT and vice versa has to be carried out by the user [= manual save function).11 Purge.3 FF-CHIP (Function-Chip) The F -Chip is a microprocessor chip that contains additional software packages that extend tile functionality and application possibilities of the ti·ansmitter.2 HistoROMIT-DAT (transmitter-OAT) The T-DAT is an exchangeable data storage device in which all ti'ansmitter parameters and settings are stored. Detailed insti'uctions regarding this can be found on Page 71. 6. The pressure monitoring connections can also be used for gas purging (gas detection) . \~th corrosive process fluids. Warning! For a process pressure above the specified containment pressure. After start up.

it is essential to take the inside diameters of measuring tube and process connection into account. • Replacement seals [accessories) Endress+Hauser 119 . P) Ifpigs are used for cleaning.3 Replacing seals Under normal circumstances. fluid wetted seals of the Promass A and Prom ass M senso» do not require replacement. for example if aggressive or corrosive fluids are incompatible with the seal material. always use cleaning agents that do not attack the surface of the housing and the seals.1 Exterior cleaning When cleaning the extelior of measuring devices. 7. --> Page 175 7. 5.Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Maintenance 7 Maintenance No special maintenance work is required. Note! • The period between changes depends on the fluid properties and on the frequency of cleaning cycles in tile case of CIP/SIP cleaning . 7. Replacement is necessaIY ol~y in special circumstances.2 Cleaning with pigs (Promass H. I. See also Technical Information.

Accessories Proline Promass 83 PROFlBUS DP/PA 8 Accessories Vatious accessories... DK8MS - *' . Software add-ons on F-Ch ip. * .Concentration measurement DK8SO . can be ordered individually: ..Advanced dIagnostics . Use the order code to define the following specifications: Approvals Degree of protection / version Cable entries Display / power supply / operation Software Outputs / Inputs..Seals For regular replacement of the seals of the Promass M and Prom ass A sensors.* 8. The Endress+Hauser service organization can pro. which can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser. DK8UI-*' * * ~ Order code 83XXX .Wall mounting . 120 Endress+Hauser ..1 Accessory Device-specific accessories: DescrlpUon Transmitter for replacement or for stock. 8.2 Accessory Measuring principle-specific accessories: DescrlpUon Mounting kit for wall-mount housing [remote version}. comprising: .~ *' Mounting set for Promass A.ode detailed information on the order code of your choice. Post mounting set for the Promass A sensor Mounting set for the Promass A sensor Post mounting set for the Prom ass A DK8AS .XXXXX ~ Transmitter Proline Promass 83 *' *' *' *' *' Conversion kit Inputs/outputs (PROFIBllS DP only) Software packages for ProH Promass 83 ne (PROFIBllS OP only) Conversion kit with appropriate slot modules for converting the present Input/output configuration to a new version..2 process connections . are available for the transmitter and the sensor.Panel mounting Mounting set for aluminum field housing: Suitable for pipe moun ting I-'ll" to 3") Order code DK8WM - Mounting set for transmitter . *' Set of seals for sensor DKS . Set consists of two seals...Batching . Suitable for: .Pipe mounti ng ...

It can configure all Intelligent field un its In you r system and helps you manage them. prInted and used for official certification. Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more Information. test results can be Imported into a database. it is also a simple but effective way of checking their status and condition.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Accessories 8. Fleldcheck Tester/simulator for testing nowmeters in the field.endress. Fie]dCare FleldCare Is Endress+Hauser's FDT-based plant asset management tool. When used In conjunction with the "Field Care' software 50098801 package.' Applicator SolMare lor selecting and configuring tlowmeters. Applicator can be downloaded from the Internet or ordered on CD-R OM for Installation on a local PC.com FXA I93 The FXA ]93 service Interface connects the device to the PC for conftguration via FieldCare. FXAI93-' Endress+Hauser 121 . See the product page on the Endress+Hauser website: www.3 Accessory Service-specific accessories: Descrlptlon Order code DXA80 . Contact your Endress+Hauser representative for more Information. By using the status Information.

2 Check device fuse ~ 2. The routine takes you directly to the cause of tlle problem and the appropriate remedial measures. but no signal at the current or pulse output order spare parts ~ Page 138 . Check the d isplay No display visible and no output signals present I. Measuring electronics derective -+ order spare parts --+ Page 138 Display texts are In a foreign language.g. Switch off power supply. Check the following points: Supply voltage Transmitter Device fuse Check the supply voltage ~ Terminals 1/2 Check device fuse ~ Page 144 85 to 260 V AC: 0. = error designation (e. Check the supply voltage . Page 144 85 to 260 V AC: 0.Troubleshooting Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 9 9. minutes and seconds) #702:= error number Cautionl dAlso refer to the Information on • ~ Page 46 • The measuring system interprets simulations and positive zero return as system errors. but displays them as notice messages only..8 A slow-blow / 250 V 20 to 55 V AC and 16 to 62 V DC: 2 A slow-blow / 250 V PROFIBUS PA: Check data line Terminal 26 = PA + Terminal 27 = PAPROFIBUS DP: Check data llne Terminal 26 = B (RxD/TxD-P) Terminal 27 = A (RJ:DITxD-N) Fieldbus connection 122 Endress+Hauser . The display text will appear in English (default) and is displayed at maximum contrast. Display module defective -+ order spare parts --+ Page 138 3. fluid is not homogeneous) 03:00:05 = duration of error occurrence (in hours. Faulty connection to control system No connection can be made between the control system and the device.-) Terminals I. System error (de\'ice error) has occurred ~ Page 124 Process error (application error) has occurred ~ Page 133 . but I... Measuring electronics defecti\'e ~ Measured value Indicated. Error messages consist of a variety of icons. output signals are present 2. P = process error Error message type: ~ = fault message. Press and hold down both the ~ keys and switch on the measuring device.1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting instructions Always start troubleshooting with the following checklist if faults occur after commissioning or during operation. Check whether the ribbon-cable connector of the display module is correctly plugged Into the amplifier board --? Page 138 ff. 8rror messages on display Errors that occur during commissioning or measuring are displayed Immediately. I = notice message MEDIUM INHOM.. The meanings of these Icons are as follows (examplel: Error type: S = system error. Measuring electronics defective ~ order spa re parts --? Page 138 No display viSible.8 A slow-blow / 250 V 20 to 55 V AC and 16 to 62 V DC:2 A slow-blow / 250 V 3..

bus voltage of9 V DC Is present at termi nals 26127. (on ly for PROFIBUS PAl . Otherwise there may be Interference In communica tion. System or process error messages System or process errors which occur during commission ing or operation can be displayed via the local display or an operating program (e. Check the current consu mption of the bus segment: The current consumption of the bus segment In question (= total of basic currents of all bus users) musl not exceed the ma x. . permitted feed current Has the PROFIBUS network been terminated correctly? Each bus segment must always be terminated with a bus terminator at both ends (start and finish).Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Troubleshooting Fieldbus connector • Check pin asslgnmenVwiring --? Page 23 lon ly for PROFIB US PA l • Check connectIon between connector/fielcihus port [s the coupUng ring tigh tened correctly? Fieldbus voltage (only for PROFISUS PAl Check that a min . 11 rnA? Check bus address: make sure there are no double aSSignmen ts Bus termination lTermlnatlon) Power consumption... Diagnosis and rectification -) Page 136 Endress+Hauser 123 . pennlsslble feed currenl of the bus power supply. Other error (wIthout error message) Some other error has occurred .. FieldCareJ in the ACTUA L SYSTEM CON DITION functi on .g. Permissible range: 9 to 32 V DC Network structure Basic cu rren t (only for PROF1BUS PAl Bus address Check pennisslble fteldbus length and number of spurs..--? Page 24 Is there a basIc cu rrent of min.

--> Page 8 Always enclose a duly completed "Declaration of contamination" form.2 System error messages Serious system errors are always recognized by the instrument as "Fault message" and are shown as a Iighuling flash (7) on the display! Fault messages immediately affect the outputs.g_V_a_lue _ _ _ I ~--- . the following status information is transmitted to the PROFIBUS master (Class I) via the quality byte: • For FAILSAFE_TYPE --> FSAFE VALUE: Quality code (HBX) Quality slatus UNCE RTA IN Quality substatus Substitute set Limits OK Low High Ox48 O x49 Ox4A 124 Endress+Hauser ..g. FieldCare): Function block SUPERVISION --> SYSTEM --> OPERATION --> ACTUAL SYSTEM CONDITION Display in the PROFlBUS master system (cyclic data transmission) If the AI or TOTAL modules are configured for cyclic data transmission.0 and transmitted with the measured value to the PROFIBUS master (Class I) by means of the quality byte (byte 5). d Caution! In the event of a selious fault. You will find a preprinted blank of this form at the back of this manual. are classed and displayed as "Notice messages".J.2. 51: StmclUre a/the quality byte The content of the quality byte depends on the falisafe mode error behavior configured in the corresponding Analog Input function block. Important procedures must be carried out before you return a flowmeter to Endress+Hauser. on the other hand. the device status is coded in accordance with PROFIBUS Profile Specification 3. l~f--iO _ _ _ ea_s_ M_ u_rin-.Troubleshooting Proline Prom ass 83 PRORBUS DP/PA 9. The quality byte is splitinto the "quality status". Note' See the information on --> Page 46 9. "quality substatus" and "limits" segments. a flowmeter might have to be returned to the manufacturer for repair.. Simulations and positive zero return.. Depending on winch failsafe mode has been set in the FAILSAFE_TYPE function. Code .1 Displaying the device status on PROFIBUS DP/PA Display in the operating program (acyclic data transmission) The device status can be queried using an operating program (e.! Quality IB~5 I Quality Status Quality Subslatus Umils Fig.

i " "£1 'iii ~ ~. Access: SU PERVISION --> SYSTEM --> OPERATION--> SYSTEM RESET H RESTART) Endress+Hauser 125 . # 001 Remedy: Replace the amplifier board.g. CRITICAL FAILURE ~: OxOF BAD Device Failure Constant R OM/ RAM fallure Cause: R OM/RAM error. see the table in the following section.~ ::I message In the PROFIBUS master (spare part--+ Selte 138 ft. . System error ~ = Fault message (with an effect on the outputs) a 'iii ~ £I !l B ~ ~ Bxtended diagnostic Cause/ remedy '" a 'iii "lI " . 012 S. DevJce slatus message (local dlsplay) . -a t:il1 ~ B o~ Depleted on the local dIsplay: S"".46 OK UNCERTAIN Initial Value low High • For FAILSAFE_TYPE --> WRONG VALUE: For status information.45 0. Note! The FAILSAFE_TYPE function can be configured in the corresponding Analog Input function block I to 6 or Totalizer function block I to 3 by means of an operating program (e. AMP SW EEPROM " #012 OxOF BAD Device Failure Constant Amplifier EEPROM data Incon sistent Cause: Error when accesSing data of the measuring ampUfier EEPROM Remedy: Perform a ·warm starr (= start the measuring system without disconnecting main power).2. 9.2 List of system error messages PROPJ8US measured value status No.. AM P HW EEPROM ~: H 011 OlO F BAD Device Fai lure Constan t Amplifier EEPROM (allure Cause: Amplifier with faulty EEPROM Remedy: Replace the ampllfier board.Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Troubleshooting • For FAILSAFE_TYPE --> lAST GOOD (factOlY setting) : If a valid output value was availahle before the failure: Quality code (HBXI Quality status Quality substatus Limits 0144 0. 011 S.) ! = Notice message (without any effect on the outputs) 001 S.46 OK UNCERTAIN Last usable va lue Low High If no valid output value was available before the failure: Quality code (HBX) Quality slatus Quality substatus Limits OJ 4C 014D 0".. Error when accessing th e program memoryl R OMI or ra ndom access memory (RAM) of the processor. Fi eldCare).

Check whether the F-Chip is plugged into the JIO board correctly." .F-Chip Is not plugged into the I/O board correctly (or Is missing).K. replacement OAT Is compatible with the measuring electronics. 2. Plug the T-DAT Into the amplifier board.K. TRANSM. 126 Endress+Hauser . Low High S-DAT data Inconsistent Replace the 5-0AT if it is defective. 2.E • -a ><jl w. $. replacement DAT Is compatible with the measuring electronics. message In the PROFIBUS (spare part-) Sette 138 ff. Remedy: 1. Check the: . SENSOR HIV DAT f: # 031 0 . 032 S: SENSOR SW OAT ~: # 032 Ox 10 Dx ll Ox12 BAD Sensor Failure O. Remedy: I.F-Ghip Is defecti\'e Remedy: I. Plug the S DAT Into the ampllfler board. S-DAT Is defective. Low High $-DAT failure I $-DAT not Inserted Cause: 1. . Check that the new. 4. '" • '" ~ • 0 a 'il '.) master OxlO Ox l l Ox12 BAD Sensor Failure O. Replace the F-Chip if it is defective.. Replace the T-DAT if it Is defective. Check whether the T-DAT Is correctly plugged into the amplifier board.Spare part set number . 4. Check that the new. 061 S: HW F-CHIP ~: # 061 OxOF BAD Device Failure Constant F-CHIP fa ilure Calise: . • . 2. 042 S. T-DAT Is def~tlve. - Cause: I.DAT f: # 042 O. 041 S. Check the: . T-DAT Is not plugged into the amplifier board correctly (or Is missing). SW.Q ~ • Extended dlagnosUc Cause/remedy ~ :::.OF BAD Device Failure Constant T-DAT data inconsIstent 3. 2. ~ .Hardware revision code 3.Hardware revision code Replace measuring electronics boards If necessary. Device status message (local display) e. 3. TRANSM.Troubleshooting Proline Prom.Spare part set number . Plug the F-Chip into the V O board. ~~ 8 . 2.ss 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA PROPIBUS measured value status No. HW-DAT U041 OxOF BAD Device Failure Constant T-DAT fallure Replace measuring el~tronics boards if necessary.OAT is not plugged Into the ampllfier board correctly (or \s missing). a~ 031 S. Check whether the S-DAT is correctly plugged Into the amplifier board.

• i! II 0 81 121 g BAD eo · eo 0 ~ il • . Device status message (local display) xi! "'t! e:. 2. so that the temporary buffer can be cleared. 4. Remedy: I. Change the upper or lower Jlmlt setting. Remedy: Module with lower software version has either to be actualized by FleldCare with the required software version or the module has to be replaced.11 g ::. Remedy: Check whether the electronics boa rds are correctly inserted In thei r holders 261 5. AlC COMPATIB. 1/0 board and amplifier board are only partially compatible compatible (possibly restricted functionality)..Hardwa re revision code Replace measurIng electronics boards if necessary. ~ Note! • This message is only listed In the error history. s Bxtended diagnostic message In the PROPIBUS Cause/remedy {spare part-t Selle 138 cr.Spa re part set number . bur. . COMMUN. I/O t.} master 5. Remedy: I. not cleared Cause: The temporarily burtered now portions (measuring mode for pu lsating now) could not be cleared or ou tput within 60 seconds.DAT U205 OxOF BAD Device Failure Constant Save to T-DAT failed Cause: Data backup (download) to T. RenU'fiy: Replace the ampllner board. VU OxOF U2S1 BAD Device Failure Constant CommunIcation sensor failure Cause: Internal communlcatlon faul t on the amplifier board. COMMUN ICAT. Plug the T. 343 to 346 S: STACK FREQ. • Noth ing is displayed on the display. # 261 OxlS Ox l9 OxlA BA D No Communicatlon O.Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIB US DP/ P A Troubleshooting PROPIBUS measured value status No.Clear th e temporary buffer by the measures descrlbed u ndeTItem I. or error when accessIng (uploadIng) the calibration values stored In the T-DAT. Cause: Communication error. SENS. LOAD T. as applicable. as applicable. OUT n t: 1# 343 to 346 OxOF BAD Device Failure Constant Temp. 251 5. Low HIgh Co mmunIcation failure 339 to 342 S. buf.# 206 OxO F BAD Device Failure Constant Restore from T-DAT failed 3. not cleared Endress+Hauser 127 .OAT failed. K. In crease or reduce flow.DAT In to the ampllfler board. 206 S: SAVE T-DAT . replacement DAT Is compatible wIth the measuring electronics.Configure the fault response of the output to ACTUAL VALUE. 2. Check that the new.STAC K CUROUT n ~: # 339 to 342 OxOF BAD Device Failure Constant Temp. 205 5. Check whether the T-DAT Is correctly plugged Into the ampllfler board. Replace the T-DAT If It Is defecti\'e. Ched the: . Recommendaffon: .~ ~ " "'~ ~~ 8". No data receptlon between amplifier and 1 0 board or faulty internal data / transfer. I: # 121 OlOF Device Failure Constant Ampllfler and va Cause: board only partialty Due to different softwa re versIons.

RANGE n !: # 355 to 358 Increase or reduce flow.Clear the temporary buffer by the measures dl?scribed under Item I. OxOF -B ~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ . pulse frequency. as applicable. The pulse width to be entered Is: t 2. Reduce flow 128 Endress+Hauser . Example: The maxImum input frequency of the connected counter is 10Hz. Detenlline the pulse width : 2. so that the temporary buffer can be cleared. Change the upper or lowe r limIt setting. 2. Low High Flow Is Out of Range Calise: Current output: The actual value for the flow lies outside the set limits..l = 0 ~ a Device Failure '.I)1 3.54 Ox55 0. Extended dJagnostic message In the PROFIBUS Cause/remedy (spare part.). Low High Flow is Ou t of Range Calise: Frequency output: The actual value for the flow lies outside the set limits.Troubleshooting Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP IPA PROFIBUS measured value status No. Low High Flow is Ou t of Range Lause: Pulse output: The pulse output frequency is out of range. When selectIng the pulse Width.K. Remedy: t.K. Increase the setting for pulse weighting. 35 t to 354 S.10 Hz = 50 ms L-1N. 56 UNCERTA IN Englnl?er1ng Unit Range VIolation (impermIssible ovwanglng) O. but.Configure the fault response of the output to ACTUAL VALVE.K.1[54 Ox55 0. choose a va lue that can stl1l be processed by a connected counter (e. not cleared Cause: The temporarily buffered flow portions (measuring mode for pulsating flow) could not be cleared or output within 60 seconds. Increase the max. 3. 2.l ~ a ~ . as applicable.:.Q ~ '. PLC.) master 347 to 350 s: STACK PULSE OUT n !: # 347 to 350 BAD Constant Temp.g. as applicable.Version I : Enter the mlnlmum duration that a pulse must be present at the connected counter to ensure its regIstration. mechanical counter. 2.Version 2: Enter the maximum (pulse) frequency as the half ' recip rocal value' that a pulse must be present at the connected counter to ensure its registration. as applicable. SeUe 138 ft. PULSE RANGE !: # 359 to 362 0. 359 to 362 Increase or reduce flow. . . Recommrnrialion: . Change the upper or lower limit setting.1[56 UNCERTA IN EngIneering Unit Range Violation /lmperm iSSible overranging) O. Remedy: I. etc. Device status message (local dIsplay) eo o= "'~ ~~ aM ~ 8". CURRENT RANGE n !: #351 t0354 0. Remedy: t. 355 to 358 $: FREQ. Increase the setting for pulse weighting. Ox54 Ox55 Ox 56 UNCERTAIN Enginl?ering Unit Range VIolation /lmpermissible overranging) O. as applicable. Remedy: t. . If the tota lizer can handle a higher numb€r of pulses. Increase or reduce flow. S.

MIN. 383 S. 9 and ]0 -+ Page 28 ft. Cause: The temperatu re sensor on the carrier tube Is likely defective. LOW FR Ee.EXCEE D I.TEMP. Contact your EndresS+ Ha user service organization." o~ OxOF '" 5 ~ BAD II • II ~ ~ ~ • Bxtended diagnostic . SEN .TEMP.SENS. CARR.. FlUIDTEMP. IN L.K. >'#382 Ox10 Oxll Oxl2 BA D Sensor Failure O.K.SENS. Remedy: Check the followI ng electrical connections before you contact your Endress+Hauser servl~ orga nization : I Verify that the sensor signal cable connector is correc Uy pl u g~d Into the ampllner board • Remote version: Check sensor and transmitter 382 S.8 !l!ll -~ ~ 8~ . FLU IDTEMP. low High Carrier Temperature MIn. Devtce status message (local display) .. 6. CARR. Low HIgh Carrier Temperature Max. 38 1 S.K.DEF. 5. Cause: The temperature se nso r on the measuring tube is likely defective. K. >'#385 OxlO Oxl l Oxl2 Oxl0 Oxl] Oxl2 OxlO axil O 2 xl BAD Sensor Failure O. 4.K. # 387 BAD Sensor Failure O. OUTL. Endress+Hauser 129 . low High Sensor Asymmetry Exceeded RemecJy: Check the following electrical connections before you contact you r Endress+ Hauser service organization: • Verify that the sensor signal cable connector is correctly plugged Into the amplifier board • R emote version: Check sensor and transmitter terminal connections No. 380 S.# 386 BAD Sensor Failure O. 384 S.) Device Failure Constant Frequence limIt I Cause: The measu ring tube oscillatIon freq uency Is outside the permI tted ra nge. low High Fluid Temperature Max. terminal connections No.K. >'#381 Oxl0 BAD Sensor Fallufe Dx] l Ox]2 O. LIM U380 OIOF BAD Device Failure Constant Frequence limit 2 Cause: The measuring tube oscillation frequency Is outside the permitted range. I I and 12 --+ Page 28 ff.MAX. Outlet Sensor Defect 386 S.MIN >'#3B3 Ox l O Ox 11 Ox12 BAD Sensor Failure O.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Troubleshooting PROPIBUS mea sured value status No. 7. Causes: Measuring tube damaged Sensor defective or damaged Refll~'dy: Contact your Endress+Hauser se rvIce orga nIzation.DE F. UPPER FREe. l ow HIgh Inlet Sensor Defect Cause: One of the measuring tube sensor calls {inlet or outlet} Is likely defective. LIM U379 ".11 0 '•" :. Low High fl uid Temperature Min.K. e message In tbe PROFIBUS master Cause/remedy (spare part"""'* Selte 138 ft. .MAX U384 OxlO Oxl t BA D Sensor Failure Oxl2 O. ~ ~ 379 S.ASY . 385 S. Calls('s: Measuring tube dam aged Sensor defective or damaged Remedy. Remedy: Check the following electrIcal connections before you contact you r Endress+Hauser service organization: • Verify that the sensor signal cable connector Is correctly plugged Into the amplifier board • Remote version: Check sensor and transmitter terminal connections No.. l ow HIgh 387 S.

AMP. Currently no other functions are poSSible. (Substitute set of failsafe status) Currently no other functions are possible. FAULT " #388 389 S. 601 S: POS..53 UNCERTAIN Sensor conversion not accurate (measured value from sensor not accurate) Constant Positive zero retu m Cause: active Positive zero return Is active Remedy: Switch off positive zero return: Access: BASIC FUNCTIONS -i SYSTEM PARAMETER-i CONFIGURATION -i P ZERO RETURN OS. AMP ..-UPDATE ACT.:. Low High Oscillation amplitude too low Cause: The fluid properties do not allow a continuation of tile measurement Causes. Remedy: Change or improve process conditions. 588 ~: p.K.g. AMP. Low High Gain reduction impossible tause: Overdrivlng of the Interna l analog to digital com'erter. Low High No oscillation possible Calise: Extreme process conditions ex ist. ACT. e. !: # 502 Ox48 Ox49 O x4A UNCERTAIN Substitute set (Substitute set of failsafe status) O. 586 ~: p. GAIN RED. • 0 • "il w tl r~ . Remedy: Walt until process [s finIshed. LIMIT # 586 Ox 10 OxII Uxl2 BAD Sensor Failure O. The measuring system can therefore not be started.. 502 S: UP -/OOWNLO. !: # 501 UNCERTAIN Cause: New amplifier or communication software version Is loaded. ZERC>-RETLI RN !: #60 1 0.K. 7l 0 0 • il ." il . The device will restart automatically. AMP.JMPOS # 588 OxlO Oxll Oxl2 BAD Sensor Failure O. OSC.K. Low High Amplifier failure Cause: Amplifier error O xOF BAD Device Failure Amplifier fallure Remedy: Contact your Endress+Hauser service organization.) master BAD Device Failure Constant Constant Constant O. Extremely high viscosity Fluid Is very inhomogeneous (gas or solid content) Remedy: Change or Improve process conditions. TUBE NOT OSC # 587 Oxl O Oxll Oxl2 BAD Sensor Failure O. Device status message (local display) e. by reducing the flow velocity. A continuation of the measurement is no longer possible! Causes: Cavitation Extreme pressure shock High gas flow velocity Remedy: Change or improve process conditions.. 39D O OF x Ox48 Ox49 Ox4A BAD Device Failure Substitute set Amplifier failure New amplifier software loaded 501 s: SW. e message In the PROFIBUS (spare part~ Selte 138 ft. ~ J:! . RenJ('dy: Wait until process Is finished. [--+ OFF) 130 Endress+ Hauser . FA ULT U389 S.Troubleshooting Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA PROPIBUS measured value status No.K.. Low High Upload/download of device data active Calise: Up.K.or downloading the device data via operating program.Q ~ • Bxtended diagnostic Cause/remedy ~~ 388 S. 587 ~: p. FAULT U390 Il~ OxOF 0 ~ .

Simu lation 1 0 active Advanced dlOWlOstics: The mass now Is outside the limit value. Low High O. Simulation 10 The density Is outside the lim it value. Simulation 1 0 Advilnced diagnostics: active O. to 674 691 Simulation 10 actlve S. OUT n to !:#64 1 t0644 644 651 Ox80 Advilnced dIagnostics: The temperature Is outside the limit value. Simulatlon 1 0 active 64 1 S: SIM. OUT.K. LlM1T !: # 801 S: REF. low High Mass flow outside the limit - 801 UNCERTA1N Density outside the limit 802 UNCERTAIN R ef.K. to 634 acth'e O. to 624 631 S. Simulation 10 active Ox80 O.. ## 8xx --+ Other error messages with software options (Corlolls flowmeters) 800 S. DE LlMIT Y. K.) a ~~ 611 ~~ ~ ~ '" ~ f O. CURRo OUT. the limit Endress+Hausel' 131 . O. Low High O. TEST ACT. PULSE n 1:#631 t0634 Ox80 O. MEASURAND (-. "'~ 8". n !: #61110614 Ox80 to 6 14 621 GOO D (good) GOOD (good) GOOD (good) GOOD (good ) GOOD (good ) GOOD (good) O. SIM. SIM. !: #802 Ox40 Ox4! Ox42 Ox40 Ox41 Ox42 0140 014 1 Ox42 Ox 40 Ox4 1 0142 UNCERTAIN Non specific (uncertain status) Non specific (uncertain status) Non specific (uncertain status) Non specIfic (uncertain status) O. STAT. Cause: Simu lation of response 1 error is active. DENS. set In the corresponding dIagnosis functlons. set In the corresponding diagnosis functions. DEY.K.K. K.!! Bxtended diagnostic Cause/remedy (spare part--+ Selte 138 ft. message In the PROFIBUS master s: SIM. 0 Remedy: Switch off sImulation: Acccss: SUPERVIS10N. low High Device test via Fleldcheck active Calise: The measur1ng device is being checked on site via the test and simulation device.K.80 O. Low High Simulation measured value active Cause: Simulation is active Remedy: Switch off simu lation: Access: SUPERVISION --+ SYSTEM --+ OPERATION--+ SIM. M. Advann'd diagnostics: The electrodynamic sensor Is outsIde the limIt value.. FREO. SYST EM -.K.." t! B :I " a " . TEMP. SIM. SlM. MEASURAND 1: #692 Ox60 Ox61 Ox62 UNCERTA1N Simulated Value (manually specified value) O. Advanced dIagnostics: The pIpe damping Is outside the limit value.K.K. DEV. O. .K. outside the limit - 803 S.K. DEY. OFF) 698 S. set In the corresponding diagnosis functions.dens. !: ## 803 UNCERTA1N Temperature out.K. set In the correspondIng diagnosis functions.K. FAILSAFE MODE (-. No..K. low High O. n !:#62 1 to 624 S. set In the corresponding diagnosis functions. e ::. FAILSAFE !: II 691 0148 0149 Ox4A UNCERTAIN Substitute set (Substitute set of failsafe status) O. Ox80 Advallced diagnostics: The reference density is outside the Urn It value.Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Troubleshooting PROPIBUS measured value status !:it! No. Low High Simulation failsafe active 692 S. SlM . STATLIS IN n 1:#671 to 674 0. OFF) to 654 671 S. set in the corresponding diagnosis functions.K . LIM. O.K. OPERAT10 N-. SlM. SIM. Device status message (local dJsplay) " -a :!:.K. FL. O. K. D. O. RELAY n !: #651 to 654 S. DEV. !: # 698 Ox60 Ox61 0162 UNCERTAIN Simu lated Value (manually specified value) O. LlMlT !: ## 800 S.

DEV.-mag..) a Non specific (uncertain O. LIM I: # 804 S: E.~ '" ~ 8".Troubleshooting Proline Prom. 1l .40 Ox 41 UNCERTAIN !: # 807 Ox42 Non speclflc (u ncertain status) Tube damping fluet out.. F.. D.. out the llmlt - Ox42 806 S. DEV.K.sens. 'iI B . DAMP. - 807 0. FLU CT. DEV.~ xB ~.E .Q o~ 804 S: T. Device status message {local display} '"1l =. SEN.out the limit Op. 'iI master 0.40 Ox41 Ox42 Ox40 Ox41 Tube damping ou t thellmit - Low High O. Ll !: # 805 'iI • a UNCERTAIN a .40 Ox41 Ox42 UNCERTAIN Non specific (uncertain status) OX Low High O. fluet.freq..ss 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA PROFIBUS measured value status No. ~ " Extended ~ . diagnostic message in the PROFlBUS Cause/remedy (spare part-) Selte 138 fr. LIM 0.:.K. Low High status) UNCERTAIN Non specific (uncertain status) 80S Elec. the llmlt - Low High 132 Endress+Hauser . LIM U806 $: TD FLLlCT.K .. DEV.

a ~ 11 a II Bxtended dlagnostlc . START. Low High Batch Time Cause: The maximum permitted batch lng time was exceeded.3 Process error messages Note! See the information on --> Page 46 9.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ P A Troubleshooting 9.1 Displaying the device status on PROFIBUS DP/ PA Fwt her information --> Page 124 9. Check va\\'e (opening).. Adj ust time setting to changed batch quantity. • Batching via the BATCHING PROCESS function (72601' The error message can be reset by pressing the STOP. Another pulse then restarts the batching. • Batchi ng via operating keys (softkeys) The error message Is reset by pressing the START key. > BATCH TIM E t: # 47 1 0. these are displayed in the Home position flashing continuously. • Batchlng v!a status input The error message can be reset by means of a pulse. Pressing the START key a second time starts the batchlng process. Endress+Hauser 133 .00 OxOI O x02 BAD Non spec ific (uncertain status) O. Remedy: I. 2. Pressing the START key a second time starts the hatching process. ¥ a 'ii • . ~ '8 ~ a ~ ~ . P = Process error ~ ~ e. ~ Note! If the errors listed above occur.2 List of process error messages PROFI BUS measured value status ~ No. Increase Flow rate. 3. • General: These error messages can be reset by configuring any batchlng parameter. It Is sufficient to confirm with the EB key and then the 0 key.3.K.3. HOLD or CO ON keys.~ ~ :J • message in the PROFIBU S Cause/ remedy master = Fault message (wittl an effect on the outputs ) ! "" Notice message (LVftllOut any effect on the outputs) 47 1 p. Device status message (local dis play) -.• • ~ lX H 0 :..

O. If the hatching quantity changes.K .80 GOOD [good) O.K.Overbatching: The maximum permitted batching quantity was exceeded. .•• "tJ " " -B t:! ~ " a . RUN BATCHING OxBO Ox80 !: #571 572 P: HOLD BATCHING I: #572 GOOD (good) GOO D [good) O. Low High Flow Rate Cause: Maximum flow value entered is exceeded. The runnIng filling process has exceeded the predefined batch quantity poInt for the dIsplay warnIng message. Remedy: Underbatchlng: I.K. 474 P: MAX. Valve closes too quickly with active after run correction. the minimum hatching quantity must be adjusted. Increase flxed correction quantity. O~wbatcllillg: L 2.K.K. PROGRESS NOTE t: # 473 0.Troubleshooting Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA PROF'IBUS measured value status No. Batch running Batching process Is active O. ~ i:' ::.K.K. Progress Note Cause: End of filling process approaching. Reduce fixed correction quantity. the maximum batchlng quantity must be adjusted.K. If the batching quantIty changes. Remedy: No measures requIred (If necessary prepare to replace contaIner]. Batch hold Batchlng process Is stopped 134 Endress+Hauser . 3. ~ Note! Please observe Note in error message No. Valve closes too slowly with acti\'e after run correction. 471 473 p. Enter larger after run as mean value. 3. FLOW RATE 1: # 474 OxOO OJOI Ox02 BAD Non specific (u ncertain status) O. master P. O. O. enter smaller after run as mean value. .Underbatchlng: The minimum quantity was not reached. >< BATCH QUANTITY f: # 472 OxOQ OxOI Ox02 Ba:ch Quantity Low High C1Use: EPD calibration not possible as the nuid conductivity Is statuS) either too low or too high. 471 571 p. Remedy: Reduce the flow value. ~ Note! Please observe Note in error message No.a ~ ~ " Bxtended diagnostic tl ·s message In the PROPIBUS Cause/remedy al 472 ~~ 8 '" to a BAD • a Non specific (u ncertain O. Device status message (Ioea] display) :So "'~ . 2.

CURRo LIM.g. dow nstream from the Instru ment.40 Ox41 0142 UNCERTAIN Non specific (uncertain status) O.Install a flow restriction.K. the following measures are re<:ommended to increase system pressu re: .g. high gas or solid content. Endress+Hauser 135 .K.# 700 Sensor conversion Constant Empty pipe dete<te<i Calise: The process fluid density Is outside the upper or lower not accurate (measured limit values set fo r empty pipe detection. since certaI n process fluid characteristics are extreme.40 0141 0142 UNCERTAIN Non specific (uncertai n status) O.g.I il eo • il i '.K. Adjust the upper or lower Urnlt value for empty pipe detection to the current process conditions. . diagnostic message in the PROPIBUS Cause /re medy .Proline Promoss 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Troubleshooting PROPIBUS measured value status • s<il No. e. gas or solid content Remedy: In particular with outgassIng flUIds andlor increased gas content.~ . CHO !: 11703 0. the following measures are re<:ommended to Inc rease system pressure: . EXC. reducer or orifice plate.40 Ox41 U701 UNCERTAIN Ox42 Non specific (uncertain status) O. . 703 p. .Install the instrument at the outlet side of a pump. due to inhomogeneous process fluid. Excitation too high Cause: Low High The nm:lmum current value for the measuring tube exciter colis has been reached. e. # 702 Ox43 UNCER- TAIN Non speclnc (uncertain status) Constant Fluid inhomogeneous Cause: Frequency con trol Is not stable. Device status message (local dis play) -0 ~il o ' "'1l 8". 2. Ensure tha t there Is no gas content In the process liqu id. Causes: Ca\'itation Extreme pressure pu lses High gas flow velocIty A continuation of the measurement is still possible! Remedy: 704 p.. CH I U704 0. e. L ow High NoIse li mit Channel 0 Cause: Ovemriving of the internal analog to digital converter. . EMPTY PIPE .Install the instrument at the lowest poi nt of an ascending pipeline.Install the Instrument at the outlet side of a pump.I 0 • Extended eo ii . MEDI UM IN HOM. !.InstaU a flow restriction.g. Low High Noise limit Channel I Change or Improve process conditions.I ~ a~ Ox53 a UNCERTA IN '. by reducIng the flow velocity.Install the instrument at the lowest point of an ascending pipeline. e. Causes: Air In the measuring tube Pa rtly nlled measuring tube Remedy: value from sensor not accurate) I. e.:. NOISE LIM. 0. eoE '. The instrument continues to work correctly.g. NOISE LIM. Remedy: In particular with outgassIng lIulds andlor Inc reased gas content. Access: BASIC FUNCTIONS -+ PROCESS PARAMETER-+ EPD PARAMETER ~ EPD VALUE LOW or EPD VALUE HIGH 70 1 p. reducer or orifice plate. master 700 p. downstream from the Instrument 702 p.

Replace transmitter electronics Parts of the measuring electronics defective --} Order spare parts --} Page 138 ff.BASIC FUNCTIONS. ~ Note! Check the nuld for presence of gas bubbles. I.... FLOW LIMIT "" 70S Ox42 UNCERTAIN Non specific High Limited Flow limit Cause: The mass flow Is too high. SYSTEM PARAMETER.~ ~ ~ ~ 11 ~ • a . standstill and the measuring tube Is full. The electronics' measuring range will be e:<eeeded.4 Symptoms RectUlcatlon Process errors without messages You may have to change or correct certain settings of the functlon matrix in order to rectify faults.i 0 ~ • • ·s :::. In these Instances... The fault cannot be rectified or some other fault not described above has occurred... ZERO FAi l !: # 731 Ox43 UNCERTAIN Non specific (uncertain Constant ZeiO Point adjustment failu re statusl Cause: The zero point adjustment Is not possible or has been canceled.Q ~ • Extended dIagnostic 0 '" • ~ O~ 70S '. FLOW DAMPING Increase the value for display damping: HOME -) USER INTERFACE -) CONTROL --+ BASIC CON FIG.. 2. Always enclose the duly completed "Declaration of contamination " form with the flowmeter. Remedy: Make sure that zero point adjustment Is carried out at ' zl?ro flow' only (v = 0 mls).. PROCESS PARAMETER. You will find a preprinted... please contact your EndresHHauser service organization. Measured value reading nuctuates even though flow Is steady. Increase the following values: . CONFIGURATION... The following options are available for tackling problems of this nature: Request the selVices of an EndresstHauser service technician If you contact our service organization to have a service techniclan sent out. CONFIGURATION . Enter a value for the low flow cutoff or Increase this value: BASIC FUNCTION.~ X-B 8" . ---7 Page liS 9..Analog Input function block --+ RISING TIME . -) DISPLAY DAMPING Check the fluid for presence of gas bubbles. 136 Endress+Hauser . The functions outlined below are described in detail in the "DescrIption of Device Functions' manual. blank of this form at the back of this manual.Troubleshooting Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA PROFIBUS measured value status No. please be ready with the following information: • Brief description of the fau lt • Nameplate specUications: order code and serial number-) Page 9 Return devices to Endress+Hauser You can return a measuring device to Endress+Hauser for repair or calibration.. (uncertain statuS) Remedy: Reduce flow 731 p. even though the nuid is at a 2. Measu red value reading shown on I. Device status message (local display) -. tl message In the PROFIBUS master Cause/remedy p... •• !lj11 .. ADJ. ON-VALUE lF CUTOFF 3. display..

Output sIgnal corresponds to ·zero now ' Frequency outpu t FALLBACK VA LUE SIgna l output ~ 0 Hz FAILSA FE VALUE Output of the frequency speclfled In the FAILSAFE VALUE function.. Cu rrent output MIN. ACTUAL VALUE Fault Is Ignored... ACTUAL VALUE Fault Is Ignored. The fault [s Ignored. are suppressed .Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Troubleshooting 9.. limit value. You will find detailed inlormation on these procedures in the "Description 01 Device Functions" manual.e. pulse and frequency outputs can be customized by means 01 various functions in the function manix.-) deene rglzed The ' Description of Device Functions' manual contaIns detalted Information on relay swItchIng response for varIous configura tions such as error message. MAX. You can use positive zero return to reset the signals 01 the C Ull'ent. Pulse output FAllBACK VALU E SIgnal output. CURRENT The current outpu t will be set to the lower value of the signal on alarm level depending on the setting selected in the CURRENT SPAN (see the "Oe-scrlptlon of Device Functions' manual).e. normal measured-vatue outpu t on the basIs of ongoIng now measurement. This function takes priority over all other device functions. lor example when measuring has to be interrupted while a pipe is being cleaned .. ACTUAL VALU E Measured value display on the basIs of the current now measurement.-) Page 124 - Endress+Hauser 137 . Relay output In the eve nt of a fault or powe r supply failure: Relay.5 Response of outputs to errors Note! The lailsale mode 01 the current. pulse and frequency outputs to their lailback value. I. FalJsafe mode of outputs IProcess/ system error Is present ¢. Simulations. CU RRENT The cu rrent outpu t will be set to the hIgher value of the signal on alarm level dependlng on the setting selec ted In the CURRENT SPAN (see the "Description of Device Functions' manual).-) no pulses HOLD VALUE Last valid value (precedIng occurrence of the fault) Is output. now direc tion. normal measured-value output on the basis of ongoing now measurement. etc . Outpu t sIgnal corresponds to "zero now' HOLD VALUE Last va lid value (preceding occu rrence of the fault) is output. I. See the Information on Page 46 n. HOLD VAlliE Measured value display on the basis of the last saved value precedIng occu rrence of the fault. lor example. Caution! IPositive zero return Is activated Output signal corresponds to 'zero flow' System or process errors defined as ' Notice messages' have no effect whatsoever on the outputs. No effect on re lay output PROFIBUS . or reset measured value transmission loa field bus to "0".

pem/al/enl assfgnmellt S~DA r (sensor dal a storage device) T-DAr (lransmitferdata storage devtce) F~CHIP 5 6 7 8 9 (function chip /oroptional software) Display module 138 Endress+ Hauser . 52: Spare parts for PROF/BUS DP transmitters (field and wall-moullt housing) POWN IIl1it board (85 to 260 V AC. moreover..Troubleshooting Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP IPA 9."ous sections contain a detailed troubleshooting guide.. Note! You can order spare parts directly fi'om your Endress+Hauser service organization by prO\"ding the serial number pIinted on the transmitter's nameplate.6 Spare parts The pr. The measuring device.~' .6. . small items (screws. ---> Page 122 ft. etc. The illustration below shows the available scope of spare parts./lexfbfe Pluggable output submodllles. 20 to 55 V AC. ---> Page 9 Spare parts are shipped as sets comprising the follo""ng parts: • Spare part • Additional parts. Faultrectification can entail replacing defective components with tested spare parts. • -'" 3 8 . ~ @ Fig.1 PROFIBUS DP @ 2 '.) • Mounting instructions • Packaging 9. ordering structure 110 board (COM modufe). provides additional support in the form of continuous selfdiagnosis and error messages. 1610 62 V DC) 2 3 4 Amplifier want /10 board (COM module).

16 to 62 V DC) 2 3 4 5 Amplifier boan! 110 board (COM module). adapter PC 13.2 PROFIBUS PA "" . 4 5~ Fig. 50098037j Endress+Hauser 139 . 20 (0 55 V AC.. pt'rmanent assignment 5-DAT {sel/sor data storage device} T-DA r (tfal/smitter data storage device) F-CHfP (ful/ctloll chip/arop/lonal software) DIsplay module Ffeldblls con ll ect or conslst/lIgo! protection cap. •..5IM20. 53: Spare IJJf1sjor PROF/BUS PA transmitters {fidd and wall-mount housing} /bItter unil board (85 (0 260 V A C.. onJer No. cOflneclOr.6. o 2 ...5 6 7 8 (only/or PROF/BUS PA. ".Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Troubleshooting 9.

Unscrew covel' of the eleco'onics compartment from the transmitter housing. 7. 4. .Press in the latches ( 1.6.3) fi'om the board.2) (optional): No tools are required for removing the submodules (o utputs) fi'om the 110 board."INPUT 1 OUTPUT 3" slot = terminals 22123 .Troubleshooting Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 9. then an appropriate inspeetion must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. 140 Endress+Hauser . d Caution! Use oniy original Endress+ Hauser parI>. Remove tile screws and remove the covel' (2) from tile eleeo'onics compartment. d Caution! Only certain combinations of submodules on the 110 board are permissible. Remove power unit board (4) ancillO board (6): Insert a thin pin into the hole (3) provided for the purpose and pull the board clear of its holder.3 Removing and installing printed circuit boards Field housing Warning' • Risk of eleeo'ic shock. Remove amplifier board (51 : . i.2) of the display module fi'om the amplifier board. 5. Installing and removing printed circuit boards --> Fig.Disconnect the plug of the sensor signal cable (5.Discolmeet the ribbon cable (1. Remove the local display (II as follows: .Insert a thin pin into the hole (3) prO\oded for the purpose and pull the board clear of its holder. Exposed components carry dangerous voltages.2) fi'om the board. 3. .e."INPUT 1 OUTPUT 4" slot = terminals 20/21 6. Remove submodules (6.1 ) at the side and remove the display module. 2. 1) including S-DAT (5. • Risk of damaging electronic components IESD protection). 54: I. Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the covel' of the eleco'onics compartment. Use a workplace with a grounded working surface purpose-built for electrostatically sensitive devices' • If you cannot guarantee that the dieleco'ic sO'ength of the device is maintained in the follo\ving steps. . --> Page 29 The individual slots are marked and correspond to certain terminals in the connection compartment of tile transmitter: . without moving it back and forward . Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure.Gently disconnect the plug of the excitation current cable (5. Installation is also a no-tools operation. Static eleco'icity can damage electronic components or impair their operability.

1 Fig...y outpUI and relayoutpldJ Endress+Hauser 14 1 ...2 f/l1/d housIng: removing flIld iI/stalling pn.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Troubleshooting 4 ..1 ~r \2 ".ned c(fcuit boarrls Local display Latch Ribbon cable (display module) 2 3 Screw'S 0/ electronics comp3l1melll cover Apertlf~ jor instaflinglremavillg boaros 4 5 Fbw('f 111111 board Amp/flier boanJ 5..1.1 6.2 5...ible assignment) F-CHIP f!ullcUon chip loroplfoflal sojtwan..2 liD board (fle>.1 1.4 £Xcrlat/on currellt cable (sensor) S·OAT (scnsor data storage devfcej T· DA T (transmitter data storage devIce) 6 6..- .. 54: 1..3 5.. 6 '" ." Optional: Pluggable submodu~s {currelil output. pulsel/requenc.• 5. 5 .2 6. " ..1 Signal cable (sensor) 5. .

Loosen tile screws securing the elecll'onics module [2). 8): Insert a tltln pin into the hole provided (5) for the purpose and pull the board clear of its holder. 3. Disconnect the following cable plugs from amplifier board (7): . Then push up electronics module and pull it as far as possible out of tlle wall-mount housing.e.Sensorsignal cable plug [7 . Static electricity can damage electronic components or impair their operability. 7. 2. 6. 142 Endress+Hauser . Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics compartment. Exposed components cany dangerous voltages. ---7 Page 29 The individual slots are marked and correspond to certain terminals in the connection compartment of the ll'ansmitter: "INPUT I OUTPUT 3" slot ~ terminals 22/23 "INPUT I OUTPUT 4" slot ~ tertainals 20/21 7.Ribbon cable plug (3) of the display module Remove the cover (4) from the electronics compartment by 100seIung the screws.3) .2) [optional): No tools are required for removing the submodules [outputs) fi'om the 110 board.Plug of exciting current cable 17.1) including S-DAT [7. without moving it back and forward . . Use a workplace with a grounded working surface purpose-huilt for electrostatically sensitive devices' • If you CarulOt guarantee that the elielecllic strength of the device is maintained in tile follO\ving steps. ---7 Fig. d Caution! Use only OIiginai Endress+ Hauser parts. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. 55: Loosen tile screws and open tile hinged cover [I) of the housing. i.Troubleshooting Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DPIPA Wall-mount housing Wal'1ling! • Risk of electric shock. Installing and removing printed circuit boards I. 4. d Caution' Only certain combinations of submodules on tile 1/0 board are permissible. Remove submodules [8. then an appropriate inspection must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Installation is also a no-tools operation. • Risk of damaging electronic components [ESD protection) .2): Gently disconnect the plug. Remove the boards (6. 5.

4 S-DAT (sensor data storage device) T-OAT /lr.2 Signal cable (sensor) E>...'T 2 3 4 Elec1ronlcs module Ribbon cable (dIsplay module} SCte lVS 0/ electrol/lcs compartment cOI'(!r 5 {J AfJ('t1uf'(' lor Installing/removIng boards PolVer unillJoard Amplifier boarr/ 7 7.1 Fig... .1 8.4 7..3 7. user 143 .1IIsmitter data storage device} 8 8.ss 83 PROFIB US DP/ P A Troubleshooting 1 ___ 6 5 -'" '" 8 .. pulseljreqllclltyoulput .2 5 @.2 110 board (jleA1ble assig1/lI/ent) F-CfIlP (fuflction cllfp/oroptfollal software) Oplfolla/: f'lllgg.mel f'l!fay output) Endress+H. .Proline Prom.:cltatlofl rumml cable (sel/sor) 7. 55: Wa/~lIIoulit housing: removing and II/stalling printed ciftll1~ lJoarrfs Housing COVI.-7.7ble submodu/es (carrent output. 8. J 7.

2 x 20 mm .Ex-rated devices ---7 see the Ex documentation Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. 56 The procedure for replacing the fuse is as follows: I. Remove the protection cap III and replace the device fuse (2).6. --> Page 138 ft.0 A slow-blow / 250 V. 5.2 x 20 mm . --> Fig.8 A slow-blow / 250 V. The main fuse is on the power unit board. 5. Exposed components cany dangerous voltages. 4. Remove the power Ulilt board.20 to 55 V AC / 16 to 62 V DC --> 2.Power supply 85 to 260 V AC --> 0.7 --> Seite 8 Return 9.8 Disposal Observe the regulations applicable in your country' 144 Endress+Hauser . 2. d Caution! Use only original Endress+ Hauser parts. Fig. 3.Troubleshooting Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 9. Make sure that the power supply is switched off before you remove the cover of the electronics comparanent. Switch oft power supply.4 Replacing the device fuse Warning! Risk of elecaic shock. Only lise the following fuse type: . 56: I Replacing lite device /use 01/ tile power Ullif ooarrJ Protective cap 2 Device fuse 9.

9 Date 08.XX Communication module: 2.XX BAG63 D/06/en/03.02.Additional functionallties lor software option "Advanced Diagnostics' .Support t-mass 65 PROFIBUS DP/ MODBUS RS4B5 BA063D/06/enl12.New error messages .General devIce functlons .2007 PROFIBUS DP 3.XX Software adjustment 12.XX Software expansion: .OO.Support Promag 50 PROFIBUS DP .2007 Software history Software version PROFI8US PA 3.06.03 50loo07B New functionallties: Operation hours counter .Fieldtool Package (the latest SW version can be downloaded under: www.2005 PROFIBUS DP 3.06 710360lQ BA063D/06/en/0 1.2005 PROFIBUS PA 2..Proline Promass B3 PROFIBUS DP/PA Troubleshooting 9.2005 71009725 10.05 .endress.02.07 7[060112 Introduction of a new PROFIBUS PA I/O board Softwa re adjustment 07 .04.2006 New Sensor: Promass $.03.XX Communication module: 2.2003 Software expansion: Language groups .XX No functional changes 10.0 .08-1 (update C) and higher 03.XX Changes to software Operating instructions BA063D/06/en/OB.Promass I ONSO.XX 12.01.06 12.05 50loo07B 02.2003 Amplifier: \.com) ~ PROFIBUS operation via: Commuwin II version 2..2002 Softwa re adjustment Endress+Hauser 145 .03.Support Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP! MODBUS RS485 .Fleldtool Package ~ Compatible with service protocol: .XX Amplifier: \. Promass P Software expansion: .Additional tunctionalltles for oo!h.Upload/download via ToF TooI.No functional changes for Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP Introduction of a new PROF1BUS DP 1/0 board: .Support of additional output signals (current.) Software expansion: Advanced dIagnostics ~ Concentration measurement ~ ViscosIty measurement ~ Batching ~ 02.SIl2 ~ The totalizer values are also updated w ithout integration In cyclic data exchange ~ BA063D/06lenllO. are option "Batching" .Intensity of background illumination adjustable ~ Counter for access code . frequency etc..2005 PROFIBUS DP 3.04.Support of compatibility with previous PROFIBUS model Promass 63 with Profile Version 2. DN50FB .toHleldtooi.XX PROFIBUS DP 3.ToF Tool .Adjustments to Fieldcheck and Slmubox .

"Measuring mode" function can be operated 1.00 Soft"'vare adjustment Original soft\vare Compatible with: .01 Amplifier: 1.vare expansion: .2002 03.Prom ass H BA0630/06/en/12 .Support for 2-polnt density adjustment .00 Communication module: 1.00. 02 .02 50100078 exchange Control va riables [measuring mode): .New error messages: 001.02.02 and higher) .0 BA063 D/06/en/06.Fieldtool .2002 Software expansion: .0 -) 8: Unidirectional .03 50100078 09.0 -t Q: Bidirectional 11.07.Promass E Software expansion : .02.200 1 07.2001 AmpUfier: 1. 121.04.Troubleshooti ng Proli ne Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Date Software ve rsion Ampli fi er: Changes to softw are Operatlng Instru ctions BA0630/06/enl 10.Extension of control systems In cyclic data BA063 D/06/en/04.01 $ofr.02 50 100078 04.2002 2.0 1 50 100078 146 Endress+Hauser .XX Amplifier: 1.02 Communication module: Software expansion: .Commuwln II (version 2.Data length of ad\'anced diagnosis adjusted In q'cllc data exchange As of this software version.04.01.01.XX via local display .501 . a new device master file (GSD) must be used when replacing the device ~ Note! OB.2002 Amplifier: 1.XX Communication modu le: 2.PROFJBUS DP/PA Profile Version 3.

3 Measured variable Input • Mass Dow (proportional to the phase difference between two sensors mounted on tlle measuring tube to register a phase shift in tlle oscillation) • Ruid density (proportional to resonance frequency of the measuring tube) • Ruid temperature (measured with temperature sensors) Measuring range Measuring ranges Jor liquids (promass F.1.5lb/ min o to 238 lb/ mln a to 660 Ih/min oto [650 Ib/mln Ot02570 [b/ mln o to 6600 Ib/ mln a to 350000 kg/h o to 800000 kg/h o to 12860 Ih/m ln a to 29400 [b/m!n o to 80860 [b/min 250* 10"· o to 2200000 kglh -) only Promass F Measuring ranges Jor liquids (Promass E. Pi: ON 8 15 25 40 50 3/8' Range for full scale values (l1qulds) I11min (f} to rtl mlJl(F) o to 2000 kglh o to 0500 kglh o to 18000 kg/h o to 73.1. M): ON 8 15 25 40 50 80 100' [50* Range for full scale vaJues (liquids) 111m1n(f) to rt'Imu(F) 3/8' 'h' I' Il/l" 2' 3' 4" 6" o to 2000 kglh o to 6500 kglh o to 18000 kglh o to 45000 kglh o to 70000 kglh 010 180000 kglh a to 73.1 10.S Ib/mln lh" I' a to 238 lb/mln o to 660 Ib/mln IW 2' a to 45 000 kg/h o to 70000 kglh a to 1650 Ib/mln o to 2570 Ib/ mln Endress+Hauser 147 .1. H. S.2 Measuring plindple Measuring system Function and system design Mass flow measurement by tlle Coriolis principle --> Seite 9 10.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Technical data 10 10.1 --> Seite 7 Technical data Technical data at a glance Applications 10.

Use the formula below to calculate the full scale values: 111 m "'IG) = rtl m"IF) .71b/mln o to 3.num VI" 0" FB I" oto 2000 kglh oto 6500 kglh a to 18000 kglh a to 73.3 kg/m' (at 20 'C and 50 bar) Measuring range: 70000 kg/h x = 160 (for Promass F ON 50) Max. PIG) 7 x [kg/m') = 70000 kg/h . full scale value for gas [kgIh (Ib/minll rtlrn"[F) = Max.7 Ib/min o to 450 kglh a to 16. x = 32 (Promass A) Here.u(n 1/24" 1/12" 1/8" o to 20 kg/h o to 100 kg/h 2 4 a toO. I) x = 250 (Promass F ON 150 to 250 (6" to 10" II x = 225 (Promass E). ("Limiting flow") 148 Enclress+Hauser . rtlmax{G] can never be greater than r11max(F] Calculation example Jar gas: • • • • Sensor type: Promass F.5 lb/mln Measuring ranges Jar liquids {Promass I}: ON 8 15 15 F8 25 25 F8 40 40 F8 50 50 F8 80 3/8" Range for full scale values (liquids) l11 m1n (F) to rtl. full scale value lor liquid [kg/h (lb/minJl PIG) = Gas density in [kg/m' IIb/lt'JI for process conditions x = 160 (Promass F ON 8 to 100 (3/8" to 4"). ON 50 Gas: air with a density 0160.Technical data Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS OP/PA Measuring ranges Jar liquids (Promass A): ON I Range for full scale values (Uquld!) rtlmlnm to rh". PIG) 7 x[kg/m' (ib/ft'li rtlm"IG) = Max.3 kg/m 1 7 160 kg/ml = 26400 kg/h Recommended full scale values See --> Page 15911. possible full scale value: mm"IG) = mm!'IF) .Q" FB 2" 2" FB 3" oto 45000 kglh o to 70000 kglh o to 70000 kglh o to 180000 kglh o to 180000 kglh a to 1650 lb/min a to 1650 Ib/min a to 2570 Ib/min a to 2570 Ib/mln a to 6600 Ib/mln o to 6600 Jb/mln FB:= Fu ll bore versions of Promass I Measuring ranges Jar gases (excepr Promass Hi The full scale values depend on tile density of tile gas. M.5 lb/min a to 238 Jb/min a to 660 [b/m In o to 660 Ib/mln o to 18000 kglh a to 45000 kglh I " FB P/I" 11. 60.

resolution: 0. 2 s • Pulse output: pulse value and pulse polantyselectable. 30 V DC. galvanically isolated. pulse width configurable 10.f. 25 rnA Imax. 2: 150 l1 Pulse / frequency output: Active/passive selectable. galvanically isolated. independent of polarity Input signal 10.6 kBaud to 12 MBaud Automatic identification of data transmission rate Signal coding: NRZ code Bus add ress can be configured via miniature switches. = 3 k!l. totalizer values are registered correctly. temperature coefficient: typically 0. time constant selectable 10.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Technical data Operable flow range Greater than 1000 : 1. 250 rnA • Frequency output: full scale fi'equency 2 to 10000 Hz If"" = 12500 Hz). R. Full scale value adjustable.1. on/off ratio I: I. pulse width max. Switch level: ±3 to ±30 VDC.005% o. galvanically isolated Profile Version 3. 250 rnA during 20 ms).05 to 100 s). via the local display loptional) or operating program Signal on alarm Current output Failsafe mode selectable Ifor example NAMUR recommendation NE 43) Pulse/frequency output Failsafe mode selectable Endress+Hauser 149 .0 Data transmission rate: 9. i. RL < 700 11 • Passive: 4 to 20 mA.0 Data transmission rate: 31.> 100 l1 • Passive: open collector.25 kBaud CUlTent consumption: II rnA Permitted supply voltage: 9 to 32 V Bus connection with integrated reverse polarity protection Error current FDE IFault Disconnection Electronic) : 0 rnA Signal coding: Manchester II Bus address can be configured via miniature switches.4 Output signal Output variables Current output Active/passive selectable. R. R. galvanically isolated • Active: 24 V DC. Status input (auxiliary input): U = 3 to 30 V DC. Flows above the preset full scale value do not overload the amplifier.05t02000 ms) PROF/BUS DP interface: • • • • • • PROFIBUS DP in accordance with IEC 61 158. via the local display loptional) or operating program ~A PROF/BUS PA interface: • • • • • • • • • PROFIBUS PA in accordance with IEC 61158 IMBP). galvanically isolated Profile Version 3.5 • Active: 0/4 to 20 rnA. supply voltage Us 18 to 30 V DC.s/oC.e.

1 A DC. outputs.5AI<50ms)at24VDC • max.5 18 to 12 mm) • Threads for cable entries. G W Connecting cable jar remote version: • Cable enay M20 x 1. 1 power cycle: • EEPROM and T-DAT save measw'ing system data if power supply fails • HistoROMIS-DAT: exchangeable data storage chip which stores the data of the sensor Inominal diameter.1. • max. 3 A 1<5 ms) at 260 V AC Power supply failure Lasting min. Switch points for low flow cut off are selectable.0 Load Relay output: See "Output signal" Normally closed INC or break) or normally open INO or make) contacts available Idefault: relay 1 = NO. galvanically isolated. 45 to 65 Hz 20 to 55 V AC. relay 2 = NC).} No measures necessruy. 60 V / 0.5 Elecaical connections Supply voltage Power supply -> Page 24 ff.Technical data Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Relay output De-energized by fault or power supply failure PROF/BUS DP/PA Status and alarm messages in accordance \Vitll PROF/BUS Profile Version 3. 30 V / 0." NPT. AU circuits for inputs. calibration factor. max. 85 to 260 V AC.5 18 to 12 mm) • Threads for cable entries.5 A AC. and power supply are galvanically isolated from each other.13. 45 to 65 Hz 16 to 62 V DC Power supply and signal cables (inputs/outputs): • Cable entry M20 x 1. Low flow cut off Galvanic isolation 10. etc. Vi' NPT. G W Cable entries Cable specifications (remote version) Power consumption see Page 29 AC: <15 VA (including sensor) DC: <15 W lincludingsensor) Switch-on current. zero point. selial number. Potential equalization 150 Endress+Hauser . y.

5.2 to 4 bar (30 to 60 psi) • Calibration systems as per national norms • Zero point calibrated under operating conditions • Field density calibrated (or special density calibration) The following values refer to the pulse/fi'equency output..r. I. Promass M. Promass E' ±0..20 to 30 'C (68 to 86 'F) .25% ± [(zero point stability -.measured value) . ~ P: ±O.6 Reference operating conditions Performance characteristics Error limits fol/owing ISOIDIS 11631: .sO% ± [(zero point stability -. A. 100)% O. Promass E: ±0..45% ± [(zero point stability -.measured value) . 100)% O. Prom ass H. Mass flow (gas) Promass F: ±0. Promass H. 100)% o.measured value) .. /.measured value) .r.. 100)% 0. Endress+Hauser 151 .ls% ± [(zero point stability -. 100)% 0.1'. 5... O. Promass 1.r. A.measured value) . 100)% o.75% ± [(zero point stability -.s0% ± [( zero point stability -. I: ±0.r.1'.1.r. A4.r.. ±0..r. 100)% 0.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Technical data 10. 100[% o. The measured error at the ClUTent output is typically also ±S lJA.3s% ± [[zero point stability -..2s% ± [Izero point stability -. Promass E: ±0. 100)% O. Volume flow (l/quid) Promass F: ±O.1. A.measured value) . P: ±0. 100)% O . Optional Promass 83F: ±O.measured value) .1 2s% ± [I zero point stabili ty ~ measured value) ·100)% O.measured value) .OS% ± [(zero point stability -.measured value) .r. P: ±O. = of reading Maximum measured error Mass flow (liquid) Promass F..1'.r.IO% ± [[zero point stability -.measured value) .

17 2' 3' 4' 6' 10' 0.50 7.5 238 660 1650 2570 6600 12860 29400 80860 0.012 0.165 0.7 0.50 9.330 Yl' I' IV!' 1.0002 0.066 0.90 2.Technical data Proline Prom ass 83 PROFlBUS DP/PA Zero point stability (Promass A): Max.0 19 - 0.001 0.5 238 660 1650 2570 0.129 0. H. full scale value Zero point stability (kg/hi (Ib/mln] ON 8 15 25 40 50 3/8' (kg/h] (Ib/mln] 2000 6500 18000 73 . full scale value Zero polnt stability (kg/h] 0.325 0.00 18.00 0.200 0.00 0.007 0.50 9.0010 ON I 1124' (kg/h] (Ib/mln] (Ib/mln] 2 4 1/12' 1/8' o to 20 o to 100 o to 450 a toO.80 7.200 0.23 - Zero point stability (Promass E.66 1 - - - - 3.00 0. S. P): Max.00 88.5 Zero point stability (Promass F.25 3. M): Max.25 3.257 0.650 1.024 0.540 2.514 1.00004 0.100 0.066 - 0.083 0.257 W I' Ilh' 45000 2' 70000 ]52 Endress+Hauser .007 0. full scale value Promass F Zero point stabIlIty Promass P (h1gh-temperature) (kg/h] (Ib/mln] PromassM (kg/h] (Ib/mln( ON 8 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 250 3/8 ' (kg/h] (Ib/mln] (kg/h] Pb/mln l 2000 6500 18000 45000 70000 180000 350000 800000 2200000 73.083 0.033 0.00 - 0.0225 a to 10.0050 0.7 Ota3.0008 0.80 4.004 0.00 14.00 32.129 0.330 0.030 0.

0 18.165 0. P: ±0.5 .007 0. I0% ±0.5 4.0.2 \ o 2 4 o 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 U h Fig.0005 glee Prom ass M.. 100% = ±O.OO IOglee Endress+ Hauser 153 . measured value) · 1001% o.257 0. full scaJe value DN 8 15 15 F8 25 25 FB 40 40 FB 50 50 FB 80 3/8" Ih" Zero point stability Ikg/hl 2000 6500 18000 18000 45000 45000 70000 70000 180000 180000 lib/ mIni 73. H: ±O.!" FB I" I " FB 0.066 0. Maximum measured error: ±O.3 F / DN 25) Calculation example (mass flow.006 I/.024 0. liquid): Given: Promass 83 F I DN 25.IO% ± ((zero point stability . £.002 Ph" llh" FB 2" 2" FB 3" FB = Full bore versions of Promass I Sample calculation ('¥o j ±1.0 18.257 0.57: Maximum measured error In X oj readffle (example: Proll/ass 8..Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ P A Technical data Zero point stability (Promass II: Max.r. measured error: ±O.8 1.165 0. 8000 kglh . A.8 4.062 0.0. I07% Density (liquid) I glee = 1 kgIl After field density calibration or under reference conditions: Promass F.54 kgIh .65 1. flow measured value = 8000 kgIh Max.0 .5 7.20 0.0 7..5 238 660 660 1650 1650 2570 2570 6600 6600 Ikg/hl 0.0 JIb/ mIni 0. S..

A. H.0 1 glee Promass M. 5. P: ±0. Bglee. I. notfor high-temperature version (calibration range ~ O.004 glee Standard calibration: Promass F. (zero point stability. 5 to BO 'C): Prom ass F: ±O.05% ± (Y2 .1'.r..05% ± (Y2 . Volume flow (liquid): Promass F: ±0.. 5. (zero point stability.r. 100)% O. A. 5..25% ± (Y2 . P: ±0.. Mass flow (gas): Promass F. measured value) ..r.003 . (zero point stability. H. I: ±0.0020 glee Special density calibrationloptional!.. Promass £: ±0. 1\1. Promass £: ±O.02 glee Temperature ±0. (zero point stability ~ measured value) ·100)% o. A.B to I.35% ± JY2 . ~ P ±0. measured value) . I. measured value) ·100)% 0. (zero point stability.OOI glee Promass M. 154 Endress+ Hauser .005 . E.Technical data Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Promass I: ±0. 100)% o. H. (T-32) (T ~ fluid temperature in ' F) Repeatability Mass flow (liquid): Promass F. A.. T (T ~ fluid temperature in 'C] ± I 'F ±0.r..I 0% ± (Y2 .002 glee Promass I: ±0. P: ±0. measured value) .5 'C ±0. 100)% o.

r. 100)% o.008 0. P: ±0.053% Density measurement (liquid) I glee = I kgli Promass F. T = fluid temperature in O F) Influence of medium temperature When there is a difference between the temperature for zero point adjustment and the process temperature. S.0002% of the full scale value 1°C (±O.lpsll % -0.0002 \Ii" I' No Influence No Influence l Vz' -0. (T .0. Influence of medium pressure Promass F.0003 0.lpslJ 1% o. (zero point stability "'" measured value) ." 8000 kglh . 100)% O.r.r. = of reading Zero point stability: see "Max. M: Promass P. A: ±O. T (T = fluid temperature in °CJ (±0.32).0015 .r. H E A: .OOOI %of the full scale value 1°F). Calculation example (mass flow. P: ±0. 100)% o. The typical measured error of the Promass E sensor is ±0.0005 -0.5 of ±0. The following section shows the effect on accuracy of mass flow due to a difference between calibration pressure and process pressure.r. (zero point stability "'" measured value) .0003% of the full scale value I °C (±O.05% ± IV.lbar] (% o. o.25% ± IV' . measured eITo~'--> Page 151 ff.0005 2' No Influence 155 Endress+Hauser . the typical measured errol' of the Prom ass sensor is ±0. I.r. 0. Promass P hlglHemperature Promass M Promass M. liquid): Given: Promass 83 F I DN 25. J ±0.05% ±V./bar] 0.r.0025 . Repeatability: ±0.0006 -0.0006 -0.003 - 0. (zero point stability "'" measured value) . . flow measured value = 8000 kg/h Repeatability: ±0.000 0.008 -0.•.005 0.r.r. (zero point stability".0002 .lpslJ ON 8 15 25 40 50 3/8' f% o.009 0. .0002% of the full scale value 1°F).005 1 •.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Teclmical data Promass M. Promass E' ±0.lbar1 [% o.20% ± IV.25 °C ±0.0005 glcc Promassl: ±O. 5.006 0. .54 kglh ".IO% ± IV.r.0004 0.00025 glcc Promass M." measured value) . 100% = ±0.003 -0. Promass H.OOI g/cc Temperature measurement ±0.0003 No influence 0. 100)% O. high pressure [% o. .

009 -D.0006 -D. I psi) (o.0003 0.r.r. ~ of reading).0004 0.Technical data ProUne Promass 83 PROFIBUS DPIPA Promass P.003 0.r .r.006 0.r.0002 0.!barl (% o.lpslJ -D. the effect is .0002 2' 2' FB 3' )56 Endress+ Hauser . nominal diameters DN 8 to 40 (3/8" to I y.r.lpsl) 0 . Proman P high-temperature Promass M (% o.0006 -D.0004 0. high pressure [% o.004 0.0014 Promass I: Prom ass I ON S 15 15 FS 25 25 FS 40 40 FB 50 50 FS SO FB .003 0.lbarJ (% o.0004 0.020 -D.r.!barJ ON SO 100 150 250 3' 4' 6' 10' 1 o.006% v.").OOOS -{).r.r.021 -D. At DN 50 (2").006 0 . the effect on accuracy of mass flow due to a difference between caUbration pressure and process pressure is negligible.009% O I bar (-0.r.0006 No influence - - - - o.0004 0.r.006 W FB I' I' FS I VI' III.r.O18 -D.!' FB Nointluence No influence 0.012 -D. .r.:: Full bore versions of Promass I [% o.OOI2 W I' 11 /1' 2' -{].0012 -D .lpsll % - -D.006 0. = of reading Promass E' Witl.lpsl] Promass M.0014 -D.lbar] % -D.0008 -D. PromassA: A difference between calibration pressure and process pressure has no effect on measUling accuracy.0 13 -{)./bar] 3/8 ' 1/ ' 1 1% o.M.017 -D .009 -D.lpslJ 1 o.0.009 [% o. Promass H: ON S 15 25 40 50 3/S' [% o.0004 0.006 0 .

0.0.006 .0003 .0. transmitter) Optional: .0003 .0.lbarJ 1 o.005 .0.20°C [-4 OF) the readahility of the display may be impai red.002 .B Ambient tempel'ahlre range Operating conditions: Environment Stand"rl: -7. P: Promass S ON 6 15 25 (% o. 20 meters [66 feet) (remote version) --> Page 15 Length of connecting cahle System pressure 10.005 -0.I.0001 . and outlet IUns There are no installation requirements regarding inlet and outlet runs.40 to +60 °C (-40 to + 140°F) [sensor. Storage temperaMe Degree of protection Shock resistance Vibration resistance CI P cleaning SIP cleaning Electromagnetic compatibility [EMC) -40 to +80 °C [-40 to + 175 O [preferahly +20 °C [+68 OF)) F) Standard: IP 67 (NEMA 4X) for transmitter and sensor According to IEC 68-2-31 Acceleration up to I g.0.0.0 to +60 °C [-4 to + 140°Fj (sensor. 10 to 150 Hz. • At ambient temperaMes below .005 40 50 P h" 2' 10.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Technical data Promass S.0.lpsll % .0004 . following IEC 68-2-6 Yes Yes To IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 Endress+Hauser 157 . particularly in warm climatic regions . transmitter) Note! • Install the device at a shady location.r. Avoid direct sunlight.r.0003 3/ 6' !fl" I' -0. Max.1.7 Installation insti'uctions h~ et Operating conditions: Installation --> Page 14 fl.

· Promass F. P: No internal seals PromassM: Viton -15 to +200 °c ( -5 to +392 OF) EPDM -40 to + 160°C (-40 to +320 OF) Silicon -60 to +200 nc (-76 to +392 OF) Kalrez -20 to +275 °c (-4 to +527 'F). FEP sheathed (not for gas applications): -60 to +200 °c (-76 to +392 OF) PromassA No seals inlying. F: -50 to +200 °C (-58 to +392 O F) Prom ass F (high-temperature version): -50 to +350 °c (-58 to +662 OF) Promass M.60 to +200 'C (-76 to +392 OF) Kahz . E.40 to + 160 'C (-40 to +320 OF) Silicon . Only for mounting sets with threaded connections: Viton .15 to +200 'c (-5 to +392 OF) EPDM . 5. H. I.1.9 Medium temperature range Operating conditions: Process Sensor. I. 5: -50 to + 150°C (-58 to +302 O F) Promass E: -40 to +125 °c (-40 to +257 OF) Seals: Prom ass F.20 to +275 'C (-4 to +527 OF).Technical data Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 10. 158 Endress+ Hauser . H. A.

5 Mach). A list of the "Technical Information" documents available is provided in the "Documentation" section --> Page 175 Pressure ranges of secondary containment: Promass F: DN 8 to 50: 40 bar (580 psi) DN 80: 25 bar 1362 psi DN 100 to 150: 16 bar (232 psi) DN 250: 10 bar (145 psi) PromassM: 100 bar 11450) psi Promass E: No secondruy contailllnent Promass A: 25 bar (362) psi Promass H. • Select a lower full scale value for abrasive substances such as liquids with entrained solids (flow velocity < 1 mls (3 ftls)) . • The minimum recommended full scale value is approx. DN 8 to 15: 25 bar 1362 psi) DN 25 to 50: 16 bar (232 psi) Promass I: 40 bar (580 psi) Promass S: DN 8 to 40: 16 bar (232 psi) DN 50: 10 bar (145 psi) Limiting flow See the "Measuring range" section--> Page 147--> Page 147 Select nominal diameter by optimizing between required flow range and permissible pressure loss.The maximum mass flow depends on tlle density of the gas: formula --> Page 148 Endress+Hauser 159 . full scale value. 1120 of the max. p. 20 to 50% of the maximum full scale value can be considered ideal. See the "Measuring range" section for a list of max.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Technical data Limiting medium pressW'e range (rated pressW'e) The material load diagrams (pressure-temperature diagrams) for the process connections are provided in the separate "Technical Information" document on the device in question. • In most applications. This can be downloaded as a PDF file fi'om www.Row velocity in Ibe measuring tubes should not be more U. possible full scale values.com. • For gas measurement the fo\lowing rules apply: . .an half the sonic velocity (0.endress.

.... The following formulas can be used to approximately calculate the pressme loss: Pressure loss formulas for Promass F. . .p = pressure loss [mbar[ v = kinematic viscosity [m2ls] rtl = mass flow Ikg/sl fl = density d '" inside diameter of measuring tubes [ml K to K I = constants (depending on nominal diameter) Ikglm 31 llTo compute the pressure loss for gases.!l =KI-. S. always use the formula for Re ~ 2300. E Re = Reynolds number 2 ·m n·d -v-p "'''''''''~1 Re 2: 23001) 6p=K_vcus . Pressure loss fomlUlas for Promass H.>..p=K . . p-{l.D = K . ':.p .p=Kl-v-ri1 . I.. ri{'-S ·p-{l.-m K3 .. M.11 Re < 2300 Li.)8 1 .1.:~·o :r.t..p = pressure loss [mbar! II = kinematic viscosity Im2ls] 111 = mass flow [kg/sl p = fluid density Ikg/m31 d ::: inside diameter of measuring tubes 1m) K to K2 = constants [dependIng on nomina l dIameter) l iTo compute the pressure loss for gases. rill p ":<: ~'ll 6p = pressure loss [mbar] II = kinematic viscosity [m2ls1 rt1 = mass flow [kg/51 p ::: fluid density [kglm3] d = inside diameter of measuring tubes 1m] K to K3 = constants (depending on nominal diameter) l iTo compute the pressure loss for gases. 1 Re 2: 2300 1 n.) .'J.·rh + K2 .6.ril . rtl p V>X..\'~ _rh w _ p ~.nJlel Re < 2300 .·(~~'l ' Re < 2300 .p = Kl ·\.)'o 1 tr-d.Technical data Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Pressure loss (51 units) Pressme loss depends on the properties of the fluid and on its flow. always use the formula for Re ~ 2300_ Pressure loss formulas for Promass A 4 Reynolds number Re= 'm .~~ .Iil'J5 . P Re = Reynolds number 4· rh n·d· II' P 1' (. 'i}J. always use the formula for Re 2: 2300./o...v-p Re ~ 2300 1) lI." t.~ 2 .. 1/~:J5 . 160 Endress+Hauser . K3.

50· 10' 1.90.) 40.42 .00 . 10' 51.40 .60 10' 1.80· 10' 1.20 · 10-> 68.40 .30 · IO-j K 5.60 · lOS 12.54 · 1001 2.. 10.46 .40 · 10' 1. 10' 6.50· 10' 7.90 · 10-J 102.1 5. .7 1 . 10" 1.00 .70 · 10' 5.107 10.00 · [0.35 · 10-) 8.90 · 10' 3. 10' 1.00 . 10' 1. 10' Kl 9.36 · 10' 3.04 · 10' 0.r> 1000 .~~D:[ i'! t--.J In-bal 10000 . 100 / / / / 10 0.00 · lO-J 17.50 · 10-) 4.30 . \0 4 3.20 · IO.10 · lO' K2 1.54 · IO' 1.00 · 10-J 20. 10' 1.33 . 58: Pressure loss diagram/orl'l3ter Endress+Hauser !6! . V '-D.[ I III o OO [ -- ~ Itri 001 0.30 · 10' 5.90 · 10' 6.10· 10' 3. 10' 7.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Technical data Pressure loss coefficient/or Promass F ON 8 15 25 40 50 80 100 150 250 dim! 5.[ V IA' 1 / [ 1M 10 100 - 1111111 [00 a [Ith) Fig.

38 · IQ-J K 5.0· 10' 2.7· 10 4 10' 5.2 · 10' 38.3 7.0· 10 7 8.53 · IO.3 IDs 8.7 0.ID' 6..2 IDs 6A104 4.107 2.4 · 104 8 15 25 4.07· 10-3 25.7 · IDs 4.1 .9 · 10' ImbarJ 10000 1000 !'" 100 • 0.7 .8 · 10' 1. o.8· 107 l A. 10 7 5.1 I'" lilY Ii .2 · 107 KI 8. 10-3 1. 59: 2 Pressure loss diagram/or water PromassM Promass M (high pressure version) 162 Endress+Hauser ./ l"".55· 10-3 I J.J 8.001 10 100 -. 1 0 .7 10' 1.46 .1 --. 1.60 .Ilfi 0.2 · JOS 1.0 1 • 11111 '/ .3 · 10 4 3.2 Fig.5 lOs 8.5 .75 · JO-J JO.10 1 1.6 .3 10' J.7 · 107 K2 1..20· 10-3 6. 10 3 3.4 · 10' 2.03· 10.: ~ I I 1000 I~hl 10 / 0. 10 5 1. 2 · 10' 17.Technical data Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Pressure loss coefficient jar Prom ass M ON 8 15 25 40 50 80 High pressure version dlml 5.

1 0. 107 4.35 · 10-3 8. 60: Pressure loss diagram!orl'oItller Endress+Hauser 163 . lOs 1.38 .35 .42· 10' 2. 10' 2.Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Technical data Pressure loss coefficient for Prornass £ ON 8 15 25 40 50 dlm l 5.10 · 107 2.62· 10' 1.11 .54· 10' [mbar] 10000 1000 100 -11111 "mil III .00 .01 ~ -y / 1/ 0.73 .00· 10.66 .31 · 10'1 26.. .00 · 10-3 K KI 7..89 · 10' 4.1 O .02· 10' K2 5.3 8.9 1 _!O7 1. 10' 4.'.13 · 10' 0.- ". 10-J 17.OCI1 Y 10 100 1000 [Vh] Fig. 10' 1.0 / 10 ~ TTTTll I I I I J)j 0.30 · 10-3 12.1/ 0.70 · 107 7.

6· KI 1.' ' 1000 /1' / 100 / /' .4 0 10 1 0 ..V 10 100 1000 [kgfh] -.8 · 10-3 10 10 2.0· 10-3 2.2· lOll 1.1 .4 . 10-J K 1.4 .3 . 10 /' 0..5 .. 61: J Pressure loss diagram jor waler Stamiani vcrs {on High pressun' vers(oll 2 164 Endress+ Hauser . ~~~ ~1 I '"~ .1 ----.0· 10' 4. 10-3 5.2 Fig.3 · 10' 2 4 1. 1010 3.1 .3 · 10' [mbar] 10000 .Technical data Proline Promass 83 PROFlBUS DP/PA Pressure loss coe(ficient for Prom ass A ON 1 dlml 1.6 · \010 3. ]0 11 2 4 High pressure verslon 1. 10 ] Qk 10' 2.

75 · 10' l.99 .20 .87 .1 1.76 · 10' 8.0 1 Fig.1 0.28 _ 1 K3 !.Proli ne Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Technical data Pressure loss co~f!icien t for Promass H ON 8 15 25 40 dlml 8.04 · 10' 1. 10' 1.81 .00 · 10-3 17.1 10 100 Jtfh) V 0.22 .67· 10' 1.I 5 .51 . 10 3 12." " 100 ~ 10 / / / /' 0. 10' 4.3 40. IO-J K 8.99 .72· 10' SO Pressure loss data Includes Interface between measuring tube and piping [mbar] 1000 " "' / 0"" . 10' 2. 10' 1.S .35 · 10' KI 10 3. 62: P~ss/lre loss dfagrafll!or water Endress+Hauser 165 .60 · JO-J 25. IO-J 9.67 · 10' 8.1 0 6 3. 10.50 · 10.

60 .38 10-3 K 8.crram jor water 2 Stalldanf versions FilII bore verslolls (~) 166 Endress+Hauser .3 .5 10' 8.0 .. 10-3 35.62 · IO-J 54.10' 25.33· 10' 0.3 11.55 · 10.8· 10' 7.5 · JO ~ Pressure loss data Inclu des Interface between measu ring tube and pIping l I ON 15. 0"" 0" " DN sa ONSO' 100 / / -' :/ 10 / / V 0.1 · !Go 2. 10' 2. IDol 1. 1 .5 · K3 129.3 10 ' ID' 3.07 · IO-J 4.Technical data Proline Prom.9 _\ 07 1.3 10" 8.3 .3· 10' 3. 10-3 25 . ON" ~ O"" DN25' muo' . 40.3 17.1 ----. II' 0.0 · 10' 5.3 80 2.25· 10'1 1.1 0.60 .5 .07· 10. 25.2 Fig.5· 10' 5.3 10' KI 3.19 · 10' 0.3 10' 50 50 II 10-3 10.8 54.1 · lOS 7.01 10 4 17. 104 1.8 · 40 40 II 1. 50 "FB" :: Full bore versions of Promass I [mbar] 1000 co".11 .1 · lOS 4.8 · 10' 25 25 I) 5.01 --I / /-' 100 [Uh] 0.3 · 10' 3. 10' 2.ss 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Pressure loss coe(ficienljor Promass I DN 8 15 IS I) dim] 8.0· 10' 2.89· 10' 0.62· 10-3 35. 63: J PIl!SSllre loss dii1c.95 · 10' 23.08· 10.

/ 0.00 · 10. Simultaneous display of various meter size.09 .Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Technical data Pressure loss coefficient/or Promass 5.20 . etc.1 1.50 · 10-3 1.85 . Endress+ Ha user 167 . 87· 10' 12.09 . 10' 1. 64: Pressure loss diagramJorwater Pressw'e loss [US units) Pressure loss istdependent on fluid properties nominal diameter.30 . 10' 26.60 10-3 3.31 . 10' 1. 10' 4. "" .3 40. PressW'e loss downstream ot the measuring point. The software is used for following calculations: • • • • • Nominal diameter of the sensor with fluid characteristics such as viscosity. .76· 10' 7. etc. 10-3 K 8. Consult Endress+Hauser for Applicator PC software to determine pressure loss in US units.00 . 100 / / 10 '/ '/ '/ . P ON 8 15 25 40 50 dlml 8. The Applicator runs on any IBM compatible PC with windows. density.41 .8 1 . All important instrument data is contalned in the Applicator software programm in order to optimize the design of measuring system. \0 4 2.99 .67 · 10' 8.53 .96 . 101 9. 10' K3 1. ~.78 · 10' 1. 1O~ KI 3. "i. 10. 10) Pressu re loss data Includes interface between measu ring tube and pipIng [mbarJ 1000 .. Converting mass flow to volume flow.00 IO-J 17.Q1 Abb. 1 0.1 10 100 (1Jh] / 0. Determining measuring ranges. 10' 1.

7 40 50 30 30.7 53 54.endress. • Compact version: see table below • Remote version .5 C1300 flanges Promass M / ON Compact version 8 II 15 12 10 25 15 13 40 24 22 50 41 39 80 67 65 Remote version 9 Promass B / ON Compact version Remote version 8 8 6 15 8 6 25 10 8 40 15 13 50 22 20 Promass A / ON Compact Version Remote version 1 2 II 4 10 8 15 13 9 Prom ass H / ON 8 12 10 15 13 11 25 19 17 40 36 34 50 69 67 Compact version Remote version Promass I / ON Compact version Remote version 8 12 10 15 15 13 15PB 19 17 25 20 18 25PB 40 38 40 41 39 40PB 65 63 50 67 65 50FB 120 118 80 124 122 ' FB' = Full boJ"€ versions of Pramass I 168 Endress+Hauser .com. Weight data in [kg) .Alist of the "Technical Information" documents available is provided in the "Documentation" section --> Page 175 .S 17 - 94 - - - - "* With 10' according to ASME B16. Promass P / ON Compact version Compact version. high-temperatu re Remote version Remote version.Wall-mount housing: 5 kg Weight [metric units) All values (weight) refer to devices with EN/DIN PN 40 flanges. This can be downloaded as a PDF file fi·om www.Technical data Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA 10.5 100 96 - 150 154 250· 19 - 400 - 152 - 398 9 10 12 13 .1.5 80 55 55. high-temperature 8 II 15 12 - 25 14 14.Sensor: see table below .10 Mechanical construction Design / dimensions The dimensions and lengths of the sensor and transmitter are provided in the separate "Technical Information" document on the device in question.7 28 29.

" 2" 90 86 3" 148 143 26 22 33 29 53 49 Remote version Prom ass B I ON Compact version Remote version 3/8" 18 13 11. " I 1!fz · 2" 49 44 18 13 22 18 33 29 Prom ass A / ON Compact version Remote version 1124" 1/ 12" 24 20 liS" 22 18 33 29 Promass H / ON Compact version Remote version 3/8" 26 22 !fz " I Ph" 2" 152 148 29 24 42 37 79 75 Endress+Hauser 169 .Sensor: see table below .5 CI 300 Promass M / ON Compact version 3/8" 24 20 11. high-tempera ture - nanges - - * With 10· according to ASM E B16.Wall-mount housing: I I Ib All values (weight) refer to devices with EN/DIN PN 40 Hanges. Promass P / ON Compact version 318 - Vz- I" Jlil - 2" 66 68 62 65 3" 121 123 11 7 120 4" 212 6" 340 - to-" 882 24 hlgh~temperature 26 - 31 32 26 30 42 - Compact version." I IV. Weight data in lib]. R emote version 20 207 - 878 - 22 37 335 Remote version.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Technical data Promass S / ON Compact version Remote version 8 13 \I 15 15 13 25 21 10 40 43 50 80 78 41 Prom ass P / ON Compact Yer!ion Remote version 8 13 \I 15 15 13 25 21 10 40 43 41 50 80 78 Weight (US units) • Compact version: see table below • Remote version .

P: • Acid.Technical data Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Prom ass I / DN 3/8" Vi" IIz "FB Ph· 44 40 Jlh"FB 3/8" 3/8"PB I IFB 265 260 Z" Compact version Remote version 26 22 33 29 42 37 88 84 90 86 143 139 148 143 273 269 ' FB' ::: Full bore \'ersions of Promass I Promass S / DN Compact versIon Remote \'ersion 3/8" 'h" I 46 IIh" Z" 29 24 33 29 95 90 176 172 42 Promass P / ON 3/8" 'h " I 46 B~· Z" 176 172 Compact version Remote version 29 24 33 29 95 90 42 Material Transmitter housing: • • • • Compact housing: stainless steel 1.and alkali-resistant outer surface DN 8 to 50 (3/8" to 2"): steel.430 I 1304 Connection housing. I.430 I 1304 Compact housing: powder coated die-cast aluminum Wall-mount housing: powder coated die-cast aluminum Remote field housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum Sensor housing I containment: Promass F: Acid.and alkali-resistant outer surface • Stainlesssteel 1. H. sensor (remote version): • Stainless steel 1.4301/304 and 1.4308/304L PromassM: Acid.4301 1304 DN 80 to 250 (3" to 10"): stainlesssteel1.4301/304 (standardJ • Powder coated die-cast aluminum Ihigh-temperature version and version for heating) 170 Endress+Hauser . 5. A. chemically nickel-plated DN 80 (3"): stainless steel Promass £.and alkali-resistant outer surface DN 8 to 50 (318" to 2"): stainless steel 1.

4602 (N 06022) PromassM: • Ranges EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501) I according to ASME 816.4404/3 16L • Tri-Clamp (OD-tubes) -> stainless steell.4539/904L.5 1]15 82220 -> stainless steell.4404/3 16L • Couplings -> stainless steel 1.4404/3 16L Promass M (high pressure version): • Connector -> stainless steel 1.4404/3 16L • Hygienic coupling DIN 11851 IS MS 1145 -> stainless steel 1.4404/3 16L • VCO connection -> Stainless steel 1.4404/316L • Tri-Clamp lOD-tubes) -> stainless steel 1.4404/316L • Tri-Clamp lOD-tubes)-> stainless steel 1.43011304. Alloy C-22 2.4404/3 16L. parts in contact with medium: zirconium 702 End ress+Hausel 171 . titaluum grade 2 • Range DIN 11 864-2 Form A (flat flange) -> stainless steel1.1 (DI N 250 1) I according to ASME 816.5 1 ]15 82220 -> Alloy C-22 2. Alloy C-22 2.4404/3 16L Promass F(high-temperature version): • Ranges EN 1092.440 1/ 316 OK • Mounting set fOI NPT-F 1114") -> stainless steel 1.5 I liS 82220 -> stainless steel 1.4602/N 06022 • Tri-Clamp (OD-tubes) (Y2") -> stainless steel 1.5 1 ]15 82220 -> Alloy C-22 2.4404/3 16L • Ra nges EN 1092-1 IDIN 2501) I according to ASME 816.4404/3 16L • Hygienic coupling DIN 11851 ISMS 1145 -> stainless steel 1.4404l3 16L • VCO connection -> Stainless steel 1.4404/3 16L • Couplings ISO 2853 I DIN I 1864-1 -> stainless steel 1.1 (DIN 250 I) I according to ASME 816.4404 /3 16L • PVDF connection to DIN I ASME I liS • Hygienic coupling DIN 11851 ISMS 1145 -> stainless steel 1.4539/904L 1.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Technical data Process connections Promass F' • Ranges EN 1092-1 (DIN 250 1) I according to ASME 816. 1/8") -> stainless steel 1.4602/N 06022 • Range DIN 11864-2 Form A Iflat flange) -> stainless steel 1. Loose flanges -> stainless steel 1.4404/3 16L • VCO coupling -> stainless steel 1.4404/3 16L • Ranges EN 1092.4602lN 06022.4404/3 16L • Couplings ISO 2853 I DIN 11864-1 -> stainless steel 1.4539/ 904L.46021N 06022 Promass H: • Ranges EN 1092-1 lOIN 2501) I accolding to ASME 816.4539/904L.4404/3 16L • Couplings ISO 2853 I DI N 11864-1 -> stainless steel I .5 I liS 82220 -> stainless stee1 1.4404/3 16L PromassA: • Mounting set for flanges EN 1092-1 (DIN 250 1) I according to ASME 816.4401 /3 16 Promass E· • Ranges EN 1092-1 (DI N 250 1) I accolding to ASME 816.5 I ]IS 82220 -> stainless steel 1.44041316L • Flange DIN 11864-2 Form A (fiat flange) -> stainless steel1. Alloy C-22 2.5 1 ]15 82220 -> stainless steell.5 1]15 82220 -> stainless steel 1.4539/904L • Mounting set fOI SWAGE L 11/ 4".

4435/316L Tn-Clamp (OD-Tnhes)--> stainless steel J.2".4404/3161316L Ranges DIN 11864-2 Form A (Bundflansch). manifold: CF3M ISO (3/8" to 6"): Alloy C-22 2 .4435/316L Clamp pipe connection DIN 32676/1SO 2852--> stainless steel 1.4539/904L.4435/316L Couplings ISO 2853 I DIN 11864-1 --> stainless steel J.4435/316L Sanitalycormection DIN 11864. 3"): Alloy C-22 2.Teclmical data Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Promass I: • Ranges EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501) I according to ASME B16.4404/316/316L Ranges according to ASME B16.4602lN 06022 Promass F (high-temperature version): • DN 25.4435/316L Measuring tubers): Promass F: • • • • DN DN DN DN 8 to ISO 250 8 to 100 (3/8" to 4") : stainless steel 1. Form A --> stainless steel J.5 --> stainless steel I .4404/316/316L Ranges according to ASME B16.46021N 06022 Promass M: • DN 8 to 50 (3/8" to 2"): titallium grade 9 • DN 80 (3"): titanium grade 2 Promass M (high pressure version): • Titanium grade 9 Promass E.46021N 06022 172 Endress+Hauser . 80 (I ". S: • Stainless steel 1. Form AI DIN 118511 SMS 1145 --> stainless steel J.430 I 1304 • Range DIN 11864-2 Form A (flat flange) --> titanium grade 2 • Hygienic coupling DIN 11851 ISMS 1145 --> titanium grade 2 • Couplings ISO 2853 I DIN 11864-1 --> titallium grade 2 • Tn-Clamp (OD-tubes) --> titanium grade 2 Promass S: • • • • • • • • Ranges EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501) I jlS B2220 --> stainless steel J. Form A--> stainless steel 1. BioCormect® --> stainless steel 1.4539/904L Promass A: • Stainless steel 1.1. Form A--> stainless steel J.4539/904L (6"): stainless steel 1. 50.4404/316L (10"): stainless steel 1.4435/316L Clamp pipe connection DIN 32676/1SO 2852.4435/316L PromassP: • • • • • • • • Ranges EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501) I jlS B2220 --> stainless steel J. BioConnect® --> stainless steel J. 4435/316L Clamp aseptic connection DIN 11864-3.4435/316L Clamp aseptic connection DIN 11864-3.4435/316L SanitalY COllllection DLN 11864-1.4435/316L Tli-Clamp (OD-Tubes)--> stainless steel J. 4435/316L Couplings ISO 2853 I DIN 11864-1 --> stainless steell. Alloy C-22 2.5 I jlS B2220 --> stainless steel 1.5 --> stainless steel 1.4404/316/316L Ranges DIN 11864-2 Form A (flat flange) --> stainless steel 1.4404f316L.

5. Swedish and Czech. Endress+Hauser 173 Operating elements Language groups . o South and east Asia (SEA): English. German. Finnish.Proline Promass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Technical data Promass H: o Zirconium 702/R 60702 Promass /: o Titanium grade 9 o TItanium grade 2 (flange disks) Promass P: Stainless steel 1. I.endress. A list of the "Technical Information" documents available is provided in the "Documentation" section ~ Page 175 Process cormections ~ Page 171ff. FEP sheathing (not for gas applications) Promass A: Welded process connections without internal seals. Japanese. P: Welded process connections without internal seals PromassM: Viton. four lines with 16 characters per line o Selectable display of different measured values and status variables o 3 totalizers o At ambient temperatures below -20°C (-4 OF) the readability of the display may be impaired . H. 10. Polish.4435/316L Seals: Prom ass ~ E.1. Kalrez. EPDM. French. silicon. RuSSian.com. Indonesian o China (CN): English. Dutch and Portuguese o Eastern Europe and Scandinavia (EES): English. This can be dowllload~lI as a PDF file from www. Only for mounting sets with t1u'eaded connections: Viton. Silikon. o Local operation with three optical sensors (8/810) o Application-specific Ouick Setup menus for straightlOlward commissioning Language groups available for operation in different countries: o Western Europe and AmericaIWEA): English. italian. Norwegian. Spanish. Kalrez Material load diagram The material load diagrams Ipressure-temperature diagrams) for the process connections are provided in the separate "Technical Information" document on the device in question.11 Human interface Display elements o Liquid crystal display: illuminated. Chinese Note! You can change the language group via the operating program "Field Care". EPDM.

FM.oces and signal~processing de.1. The device thus meets all the requirements of the following specifications: • Certified in accordance with PROFIBUS Profile Version 3. For larger nominal diameters. optional approvals according to Cat. except Promass H) • EHEDG~tested (Promass A. Electromagnetic compatibility IEMC requirements). Pressure device approval F10wmeters with a nominal diameter smaller or equal ON 25 m'e covered by Art. Inlormation about currentiy avaliable Ex versions (ATEX. 3(3) of the European directive 97123/ EC IPressure Equipment Directive) and are designed according to sound engineer practice. Control.oces of otiler manufacturers (inter operability). SIL~2: C~tick mark Ex approval Sanitmy compatibility PROFIBUS DP/PA certification Functional safety In accordance with IEC 61508/ IEC 61511-1 (FDlS) Other standards and guidelines • EN 60529 Degrees of protection by housing liP code) • EN 61010~1 Protection Measures lor Electrical Equipment for Measurement. • NAMUR NE 21 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 01 industrial process and laboratOlY conti'ol eqUipment.vith requirements for Class A".12 Certificates and approvals CE mark The measuring system is in conformity with the statutory requirements 01 the EC Directives. I. • NAMURNE53 Software of field de.Technical data Proline Promass 83 PROFlBUS DP/ PA 10. • 3A authorization (all measUling systems. All information relevant to explosion protection is available in separate Ex documents that you can order as necessmy. Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark. The measuring system is in conformity with the EMC requirements 01 the "Australian Communications and Media Authority (ACMA]". CSA) can be supplied by your Endress+Hauser Sales Center on request.0 (device certification number: avaliable on request) • The measuring device can also be operated witil certified de. • NAMURNE43 Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitters willl analog output signal. Regulation and Laboratory Procedures • IEC/ EN 61326 "Emission in accordance . 111111 are avaliable when required (depends on Ouid and process pressure).oces with digital electronics 174 Endress+Hauser . S und P only) The Oowmeter has successfully passed ali the test procedures carried out and is certified and registered by the PNO (PROFIBUS User Organization) .

1. 835 (T10760/06/enl • Technical Information Promass SOP. 80M. 831 (TI0750/06/en) • Technical Information Promass 80S. 831500770/06/en) Endress+Hauser 175 . 83H (TI0740/06/en) • Techlllcal information Promass 801.13 Ordering information The Endress+Hauser service organization can pfOlode detailed ordering information and information on the order codes on request. which can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser. --> Page 120 10. FM.oce Functions Promass 83. CSA • Functional Safety Manual Promass 80. PROFIBUS OP/PA (BA0640/06/en) • SupplementalY documentation on Ex-ratings: ATEX.15 Supplementary documentation • Row measuring technology (FA0050/06/en) • Technical Information Promass 80F. 83F. 83A [TI 0540/06/en[ • Teclullcallnformation Promass 80H.14 Accessories Valious accessories. 83P (TI0780/06/el1) • Oescription of Oe. 83M (TI0530/06/en) • Teclmicallnformation Promass 80E.1.Proline Prom ass S3 PROFIBU5 OP/PA Technical data 10.1. 10. 83E (T1061 0/06/en) • Technical Information Promass SOA. are available for the U 'ansmitler and the sensor.

... • .•. . ... 114 Ambienttemperature range . .. 109 EMPTY_MODULE . . . .. . .. . . . • . . . . .. . ... . ... • ...... . . . . . .... • .. . ... . • . . ... . .. . 69 Connection See Electrical connection C-Tick symbol .. • .. .. 144 Documentation. . . 92 BATCHINGJIX_COMP_OUANTITY . ... .. .. . .. . • .. . . . .. . .. . . . •.. . ... .. 173 Display Local display. . . .. . . • . .•.. .. . . . . • . . .•.. .. . .. .. . • . .. • . . ... .. . .... . . . . . . .. .. • .. . .. . . ... .. . . 107 B Batching.... . • . . .. . . ... . .. . .. .. . • ... • ... ... . . . . 15 7 Designated use.. . . . • ..... . ... . • ... . • . ....... .. ... . .. .. .. . 97 EMPTY_MODULE . .. . .• . . . . . . . • .. . . . 71 Data transmission Acyclic . . 96 SETTOT_TOTAL module .. . . . .. . . . • . . .. . .. . . • . . • . •. . .... ... . . . . . ... . . . . .•.. . ..•.. . . . . .... • . . . . . . • . .. . . . . . .. • . ..... . . . ... .. . ... . ... . . .. .. . . . 46 EW'opean Pressure Equipment Directive. • ... 119 176 Endress+Hauser . . . • . .. .... .. .. .•.. . .. . .. . .. . .. 36 Error limits See Performance characteristics Error messages Confirming error messages . .. .. . . .. . • . . . . . .. . . ... . .. . ... .. .. .. . . ... . 29 Cable type PROFIBUS DP .. . . 7 Device address... .• .•. .... . 174 Ex approval . • . . . .. . ... 95 Cyclic data transmission PROFIBUS PA AI module (Analog Input) . . ... .. .. . . . . .. . . ... .. ... . . .. . . ... . ... . .• ... . .... . . 48 PROFlBUS PA .. ... • . .. .. 12 CIPcleaning.. . . . ... . . .. .. . ... .. . . 53 Technical data . .. • .. . 54 Zero point adjustment. .. 12 CONTROL_BLOCK ... .. . . I 10 DISPLAY_VALUE module.. .. .. . 7 Applicator (selection and configuration software) . .. . .• . . . . .. . .. ... .. .. . . ... . .. . . • . • .. .. . . • . . .. . 97 DISPLAY_VALUE module . .. ... . ... ... . . . .. .. . 108 SETTOT_TOTAL module . . 120 Acyclic data transmission... .. . . . .. • ... Druckverlustdiagramme) 167 C Cable entries Degree of protection. 29 Degree of protection. . .. 51 PROFlBUS PA.. . . 12 Certificates. . . . .. . . .. 49 De\1ce designation . . • .... .. . . • . . . .... . . .. .... . . 44 Bus structure PROFIBUS DP ...... • . . .. .. . •.. . . .. 119 Code entry (fu nction matrix) .. .. .. .. . .. . . . . .. . • . .. . .. . .. . .. • . .. . 121 Approvals .. .... . . .. . . 100 SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module .. .. .. . . .. .. . . . . 108 TOTAL module. . . . • . . • .... .. • ...... .. . • ... . . 91 PROFIBUS PA. . . . .. . • .. . . 63 Block model PROFIBUS DP . .. .. . ... . 99 E Electrical connection Cable specifications (remote ve!>ion) ... . . .. . . • . . .Proline Prom ass 83 PROFlBUS DP/PA Index Index A AccessOJies.. ... . . . . 24 D Data back-up (of device data with T-DAT) . • .. . . . 133 System error (device error) ... . .. .... 105 CONTROL_BLOCK . . . .... . . .. . ... . . ..... . . .. .. ... ..•. .... .. . . • . . . . .. • .. 43 Ouick Setup..... . ..•... . .. ... . . . • .... . . .. . . . . . . 119 Cleaning CIP cleaning.. . •. . .. . .... 36. .. ..... ... . • . . 96 TOTAL module ...... ..103 Blocks .... .•.. .. .... . .. ... 91. . 36 Technical data.. .. . • . .. . 99 BATCHING_OUANTITY .. . .. .. .... . . . ... • . . .. .... . . .. . . .. . . . ... . ... • .. • . . 175 Dmckverlust (Formeln. .... .....•.. . . ...... .... .. . . .... . • . 12 Degree of protection . . . 53 Quick Setup. . 103 Cyclic data b'ansmission PROFlBUS DP AI module (Analog Input) .. ....• . .. .. .. .. .. . ... .. . . . • . •. . . . . .. 39 Turning the display. . .. • . . ... . . . 174 Exterior cleaning .. . . . . 24 PROFIBUS PA... . . ... I 15 Communication Ouick Setup. ... . . . ... .. .. .. . . .. 46 Process error (application eITor) . .. .. . . . .•.. . .. ... configuring PROFlBUS DP . . .. . .... ..•. ..•. ... . .. . . . .. . • . 58 Relay output . . . . . . ... .. .. . . . . .. .•. .... . ..... . . . . . ... . . .. • ...... .. . . . ......... . .. . . . . . .. .. . . .. . .. . 9 Device functions See Descliption of Device Functions" manual Device status. . . . . . . . . • .•. . . . .103 Declaration of conformity (CE mark) .. .•. . . . . I 19.. ... . . . . . . . ... .. . . ........ .. . . ... ... . • . .. .. • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . .. . . . .. .. . .... . . .. 124 Error types (system and process errors) ... . . . . .... . . ........ . • . .. ... . ..• .. . 23 Disposal . • ..•. . .... . . ... .. . . .. . . .•.•. .. . . .. .. . .. . . . . .. .. .. . .•.. .. . 4. . .. .•.. • . . ... . .. 149 Cyclic data exchange PROFIBUS DP . ... . .. ... . . . ... . . . .... .. .. .. . . • . . . ... ... . .. .. . . • . .•. . . ... . . . . ..... . ... . .. . . .. .. . .. 150 Cable specifications PROFIBUS DP . .. •. . . . ... 24 PROFIBUS PA ... • .. . .. . . . . . display.. . . ... . ... . . .. • .... . .•... . .. . . . . . . 25 Cable specifications (remote ve!>ion) .. . •.• .. .• ... . . .. . • . . . . 12 Current output Active/passive configuration. . 157 Exterior cleaning. . . . . .• . .. . . . .... .. ... . . . .. . .•.• . 114 Cyclic PROFIBUS PA . .... . . .. .. .. 157 Applications. .. . .. . . 91.. . . . ... . . . . . ... ... ... .. . . . . 119 SIP cleaning.. . .. . . 45 Commissioning Current output..•... . .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . . 124 Dichtungen Werkstolle . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . .. . . ... .. • . .. ... . .. .. 110 SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module .. .. . . . ..... .. • .. . .... . . • .. . ... .. .. .. .•.. . .. . ... ..•.. . . . 25 CE mark (declaration of conformity) . .. . . ... . .... . .. .... .. . .. . 56 Device description data PROFIBUS DP .... ..•. .. ..... . .

... . .•. .... 107 G Galvanic isolation .. • ... .... .• . ..... .•. ...•....•. .•...... . ... . . Limiting flow See Measuring range Load . . ...... ... .•..•.. ...... . . . ..•... .. • .. . . ... .. .. • . ..... .•. •...... • .. . . .. . .. . .. • . . .. . ... ... . ..... . . 44 Fuse....... . • . . ........ .. ..... ... . .... • ... ...............•. . . .... .•.. ....•. 97 PROFIBUS PA . 57 Function desCliptions See "Descliption of De.. . . . .... ..... . • ..• . • . . . . . . . ......... .. . .... .. .•. .. ........ . . .. 14 Inlet and outlet runs ... .•. 14 Orientation Ivertical.. ..•. . .. . 99 CONTROL_BLOCK PROFIBUS DP ... ... .. ... . . ... • ... • . • . ..• . .... . ........... . .. .... . . . .. . .... 16 System pressure. IO Nominal pressure See Medium pressure range Notice message... .. ... .. .. . . .. ... .... . • . . . . .... . .. .•....•. ...... .. .•.• . . • . ... ..... . . . ..... . .... ... .. . 96 PROFIBUS PA . . ... . 96 PROFIBUS PA . 47 Operational safety .... ..... ..• ... 158 Messbereich ......... ..•...... . .•.. . .... . .. ....... .. . . . . horizontal) ... ...... .. . 121 Row direction .. . . ...........•. .•...... .. ... 67 Grounding . .......•. .... 170 Material load diagram .....•..•..... ... • . . .. .. . ..... . . .... .. . . . ... ... 147 Measuring principle .... . . .. ...... . .. 8 HOME position ldisplay operating mode) . . ..•. .. ... ... . .... . •..... .•...... . .•... 157 Operation FieldC. . ... 173 157 150 150 ToF Tool ... . ...•.. ...... ..•. ... .. . . ..... ..... 7 Order code AccessOlies . .. .... • . . ..... ... . . .. .. . .. .. . ..•. . ..•... . 9-10 Endress+Hauser 177 .. . 11 0 SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL PROFIBUS DP .• . ... . • .... . . .•. .... . • ...... .... 19 Mounting location .... • ..... . .. •.. . ... . ..•. • . • .... ... .. 150 Gas measurement Quick Setup .. .. ... . . ... 92 PROFIBUS PA .. . .. . .... ... . ...... . • . . .. . ... ... . . . .....•. ... ... . . ....... ... ..• ... .. ..... .• ..... 95 PROFIBUS PA . 120 Sensor . .. . . .. . ...... . .•......... . . .. .... .... • .. ..•. . .•. . .. 19 Installation instructions .17 Frequency output Technical data . .. ..... ... . • ..•.. . .. .. ... .... .. • ..... .. ...... ..•.•... ..... 149 Installation . . .... 149 Function check .. .... . ..•. . ... ..... . • ... ... . .. . .. ... • .. ... 46 o Operable flow range .. ..•. . .. .... 39 I Icons .... ......... .. ... .. . 19 Input signal... .. ".•... .... . . ....... .. 124 Measmed variable .. . • .. . .... 46 F-Chip . .• ... . .. . .. .. .. . • .. . 157 Installing the wall-mount housing ..... 159... .. . • . ..... . 118 FieldCare ...•. .. .• .. •. . . •. ........ ........... . • ' . . .. . ' ..• ' • . . ...... ... .. . . .• .•.... ..... . .. ... • . . • .... ....•.. • ..... ... . ... ..•. 50 PROFIBUS PA .. . . ...•. . ..... .•.. • •. .• . ... . . . . •. ... .... ..•.. .. .. . .....•.. . . 97 PROFIBUS PA .. . ..•.. ....... . ... • .. ... ......... ...re ... ... .. . . .... . 15 Vertical pipe .. .. . ....... . ..... . I (}-... •. .... ' .. .... .. . .. . .............. 105 BATCHING_FIX_COMP _QUANTITY PROFIBUS DP . . ... .... . ... 13 Inlet and outlet runs ........ . . •.... ..•....... .. .•. ... . IS Vibrations ..... •• ..• ... • . . ... ...•.•. .. . . . ......... . Length of connecting cable ....... • . . . . ...... • ... 149 Operating conditions .... .. . . ... ... 55 Hazardous substances . . ... ..•.. .•.... . ... . 173 Measured value status.... .. ... .... ..• . .•. .. .. ... 110 DISPLAY_VALUE PROFIBUS DP .... ....... . .. . •......... ... • .. . .... . •.. . replacing .. .• ...... •.. .•. . ... . •. .•... .... ..•..•.. ... ... . • . •......... . 108 SETTOT_TOTAL PROFIBUS DP .. .•... 144 M Maintenance .. 99 BATCHI NG_QUANTITY PROF/BUS DP ... ... .. ... 147-148 Module AIIAnalog Input) PROFIBUS DP ' " . .. . . .. . .. ..•. .. . ...... .. • ... . . . . ..•.. . .. ...... .. II Transmitter . . 159 Medium temperature range . ' .. ... . ... 148 Measuring system . ... .oce Functions" manual Function groups ... . •.. 109 EMPTY_MODULE PROFIBUS DP .•. . .. .•. . ....... ..... • .. . .... ............... .... . • ..... ..•...... 41 Incoming acceptance ..... . ...... • .. .. ...•. ... . .. ..... ..... .. .. . . ...... 147 Measuring range . • . II Sensor . ... . ....... 27 Groups .. . ... .... . .. . • .. 9 Medium pressure range... . . .. ..... .• ... • ... . ". • .. .. . ........ . . ...•...•....... .. . " .. ..... . . 47 FUllction matrix .'. 47 Fieldcheck Itester and simulator) .... .. . . 21 Insulation of sensors ...•. . 108 TOTAL PROFIBUS DP .. .. . .Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/ PA Index F Fault message .. .. . .• .. . . 44 H Hardware write protection PROFIBUS DP .. ... .... ........ • . . 157 Inlet runs .... .... .. .. ........ ... 19 N Nameplate Connections ... . .. . . . Local display See Display Low flow cut off .Fieldtool Package ... .. ... ... .. . . .... •. . .. .. .... .. . . . . .. .... . . ... ... .. . ... .... 100 PROFIBUS PA . . . .•. . . .. display .... . . .. .• ' . . ...... .•. •..... ... 157 See Installation conditions Installation conditions Dimensions .. .... .. . . .. • ....... . .. . 119 Material .... 44 Functions . . ... ..• ...... 44 L Language groups.... ...

.. . . . .•.. . .. . .. ... ... 174 Pressure loss [formulas... ..... . .. ... • . . ... • . ... 118 Seals Material .. 57 Spare parts. ...•... . . .. .. .. . ..... .• .•..•...... •... 119 Secondary contairunent Gas purging. • .. 71 178 Endress+Hauser . . . . . .. . . .. .... . . .. . .. . • . . . ....... .. . . .. .. . . . ... .. ... . .. •. . . . . . • .11 Shielding .• ..•. ... guidelines . . ..... . . . . 103 Device address. • ... . .. . . .. ... .. . .. . .... . •..... . . . • .. . . . .. .. . . • . .. .. . .. • .. . .. .. . . . .. . . . • .. . . 54.. 174 Status input Technical data. . . • .• . .. .. 29 Programming mode Disabling . . . . 60-61 Pulse output See Frequency output Pumps. . . .. .. .... ...... .. . ... .. ...... .. . .. pressure loss diagrams) .. . 51 Device description data ... .. . .. . • ... . . .... .. . . .. . ... . . . • .... . 7 SanitaJY compatibility . configuring ... .• . 15 Purge connections .. . . 149 Spur . ... .. . . .. . ..•.. . . . . • .. .. .. . . ..• . 67 Pulsating flow. . . • .. ..•.. 150 Repair... ... .. ..•. ... 25 PROFIBUSPA .... . . ... •. .. • .. . . . . 160 Pressure monitoring connections . . . . . . . .. ... . . .. ..•. • .. .. .. ...... .• .•..... . . ... . 8 Safety instructions. ... . replacement seals.... . .. . . . • .. • .•. .. . . .. 151 Repeatability . ...•. . 24 Configuration examples. . .. . • .. .•.... . . ... . . ... .. . . . . . 118 Quick Setup Batching .. .. . .... • .. 124 T T-DAT[HistoROM) .... . ... . . . . . •. . .. . •. . . . . .. . pressure monitoring connections ..... .. . 71 Gas measurement .. ... ..... . . • . 151 Reference operating conditions . • . . .. . • . ... . 26 Terminal assignment . . ..... . . 63 Commissioning . .. .. . . . • .. . ... .. .. .. ... . . .... . . . 69 Data back-up [of deloce data with T-DAT) .•. . • . .. . . ... . . .. . . .. . .. ISO Pressure device approval .... ...... .. .. . .. . . system pressure . ... • ..•.. . . • .. •... . . .Proline Promass 83 PROFlBUS DP/PA Index Ordering information ... . ... .... .. • . . .. mounting location. ... . .. .......... 111 Cyclic data exchange . . 149 Storage. .. .. ..•. .. • .. ... . . . 118 Save/load [data back-up. .. • ........ . .... .... . • . .. .. . . • . . • .. . .. . . .... .. ... • . • . .. .. . .. . . ..... • ... . . .. • . • ... . ... ... . .. . .. .... . . . .. . 173 Medium temperature range... .. . . ..... . . .. . .. . ... 155 Maximum measured enor . . . . . . 149 PROFIBUS PA .. ... 48 Hardware write protection . . ... . . . . . • .... . .. • . ....... . •. • . .. . . . . . .. ... . ... . . . ... . . 149 Spur . .. .. . • . .. .. . . . .... ..•.. .•. • . . . . . . . . .. • . • .. . . 100 Cyclic data exchange . •. . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . .. . . .. •. ... . • .. .. ... .•. . . . ... .•. . .. . . 91 Device address.. . . .. • .... . .. . . . . . • .. .. .. .. • .. .. ..... ISO Svvitching output See Relay output System error Defilutioll . .• . . . 159 Sensor heating.... .. • . 26 Standards. 142 Process connections .. . . . .... .. .•.. .. • . .. . . .. . .. . . .... . ... . . . . .. . . • ... .. .... . . ... 14 Supplementary Ex documentation..... . . .•. .. . . 119 Returning deloces . . . . . • .. .. . ... .. • ... . . . ... .. .. . •. .... .. .. . .. .. • .. •... ... ....... . ... • . .... 56 Device description data .. . . .. . . .... .. . .. ... .. ... . .. • . .. . . 25 Terminal assignment . . ... 8 S Safety icons .. . ... for replacing deloces) . ...•. . . ..... . . . . 155 Influence of medium temperature .. . .. . ... . .. .. ...•. . . ... • . . . .... . . . . 158 Replacing. .... . . . .. ... .. .•. . 173 Process enol' Definition .. . ..••.... .. . . .. ... .. . 118 Pressure range . 7.. .. . 118 Printed circuit boards linstallation/removal) Wall-mount housing . . ..•.. ......... . . 150 Power supply failure... . . .. . . . . • . .. .. . 150 Power supply [supply voltage) . .. .. ... . .• .g... . . ... ...... .•. .. ..•. .. .. . .. . . • . . .. .. • • . .. . 55 Output signal .. .. . . . . .. . . .. • . .. 119 Software Amplifier display .. . • ....... .. . .• .. .. .. . .. .. . ... . ... ..... • ... • . • . . . . • ... ... ..... • . .58 Communication . . .. • ... .... . ... • . . . . ... .. . • .. .• .... . . ... . ... • ... . . .. . . . . .. 50 Output signal. • .. • . . ...•. . . • ... ...... . . . . . 9. .... . • . 25 Cable type . • . . . . . . ... ..... ..•.. . ... .. . . . .•.. .•.... • . .. .. ... . . • ... • . 7 Supply voltage [power supply). . .. .•... .. .. . . . ..•. ... .. . . . ... .. .•. 27 Shielding of the cable connection/T-box. 175 Outlet mns .. • . . .... .. ... .. ... . 60-61 R Registered h·ademarks. . ... .. ... . . ... . 174 SIP cleaning ..... ... . . .... .. . . • . . . . .. . 49 Hardware write protection . .. .. • . • ... . .. . . • .. . . 25 Configuration examples . ..... .. . .. ... .. 149 PROFIBUS DP . 154-155 Post-installation check [checklist) .. . . . ........ ... .... . . . • . 154. . . .. • . .. .. . . . .. 46 Process error messages . • .... . • ..•.... .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . .. . .... . .. . . . ... .. . .. • . 138 Spur PROFIBUS DP .. 133 PROFIBUS DP Bus shucture . 174 S-DAT [HistoROM) ... .•.. ... •. 45 Enabling . . . . . . . •. • ... . .. .... .. . 19 Output signal .. . . .. .. • . e.... .. . . . ...•. 4.. .. 23 Power consumption. . .. .. ..•... .. . •. .. .. .. . . ... . 18 Sensor mounting See Sensor installation Serial number . .. ... . ...•. .. . . .. .... . . .. ... .. ... • .. .. . .... . .. . • . . . configuring . .. . . ... . . . .. . . .•. . • . . . . . .. ... .. . . . .... . .... . • . . 24 Cable type ... 24 Cable specifications .. . ... ...... ....•. .....155 Replacing Seals . . 29 PROFIBUS PA Cable specifications ..• . ... . .... . . . ..... . .. ...... . 35 SIL [functional safetyl .... . ... . ... . 12 Relay output.. . 149 Q p Performance characteristics Influence of medium pressure . •.. ........ . .... . . . • .. • . . ... . .....•. 45 Pulsating flow Quick Setup . • .. 46 System error messages .. .... . ..•. .. . . . .. . . .. ..... . . 8 Repeatability [performance characteristics) . . . . ..... . .. . .

... ... .... .... . .. ... . ... .. .. . . . . ... ....) ... . .. . ...• .... . . . . ........•. .... ......• . .. . 19. .. ' . ..... .. I 15 Endress+Hauser 179 ..... . 52 Thermal insulation. 2 I Weight .. .. general notes . . 20 Turning U field housing [stainless steel) .. ... . .. 20 le Transporting the sensor ... . . • . . ........... ... . . ... . .. 29 PROFIBUS PA . . . . . .. . .... .. ..• ... ........ .. ..... ... ...Fieldtool Package .. installing ... . . ... .. . . .... . . .... . 157 Vibrations . . .. ...•.. 157 W Wall-mount housing.... .... .. . . .. ..... . . .. . .. . . ..•.. . ..•...•. . . . . .....•. ........ . . 19 ToF Tool .. .. ...... . •.. .. . ........ .. . . . ... . .. 15 Vibration resistance ... . . •. .. . ..... .... . .. . 13 Troubleshooting and remedy... • . 169 Wiling See Elecbical connection Writes (max.. ... • .. ..... . . • .• ... . ..•........... ... .•... .... . .. . •. .• .... . .• ... . .. .... .. .. ..... . 168 US units . .. .•.. ... 47 Transmitter Electrical cOlmection . .... . 157 Medium temperatme range .. .Proline Prom ass 83 PROFIBUS DP/PA Index Temperature ranges Ambient temperature range.. ..... . 29 Termi nating resistors ...... . ...... .. .. 90 Z Zero point adjustment... 30 Installing the wall-mount housing .•..• . .. . .. • . .. 2 I Tuming the field housing [aluminum) ..... . 158 Storage temperature ... • ...... .. . . .. . 122 V Vertical pipe .... ... . .. . . . 157 Terminal assignment PROFIBUS DP . ....... .. ...... . ..... . .... .. . •. .. . .. .. ... .... ... 168-169 meU'ic units . ..... .... ...... .. . .

Proline Promass 83 PROFlBUS DP/PA Index 180 Endress+Hauser .

Sicherheitsd..schriftJ Tint Signature / Unterschrijt . Ip~e~ p /bille DrucJ. dale / Ort.itzend * explosive.ltflmj Name.lftfl er: Fax I E -Mail ~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ __ _ Your order No. die vorliegende ErkJa"fllng f/aell llf1Serem besten Wissen wahrheitsgelreu lind vollstlindig ausgefiillt zu haben.: a! lon Numbt'r (RAil" oh!ain€li fmm F. Bilte £C'/Jom Sf? die l UiI E+H /fJt(j.II/en l!{'k:fJJJpiai'n al/ ulld \'(:ml u~':!1 Sff' dks. we need th e "Dec laration of Hazardous Material and Oe~Col1taminationM. if necessary. "We hereby certify that {his declaration is filled om truthfully and completely to the best of our knowledge. biological risk. special handling instructions. with your signature. radioactive /r explosi'l.Endress+Hauser People for Process Automation A}:r Declaration of Hazardous Material and De-Contamination Erklarung zur Kontamination und Reinigung RA No. benotigell wir die lIflterschn'ebene g ~ ErklijnIllg zur Kontaminatiol1 und Reinigung".u" the RM c!earlf on llle oUI5:d . include safety da ta sheet and.'<!If:/ltt' Rlid. oxidising. Please make absolutely sure to attach it to the outside of the packagin g. ~ ~ x Iplace..!Abc.rcr UefI:'TU/~. on all f-'1peiW(!l":" and m." "Hljr bestatigen.. ___ Ipsil _ _ I Pa I Icpl _ [m m' /sl flammable ent2ulldlicl/ toxic corrosive gijlig .al 01 tiw rackage at our racilirf.w I .i"rlich. bevor Ihr Aujrrag bearbeitet werden /. uml'leltgejiiJlflich. ZlItreJ/endes ankreuzell.bioge[. To {he best of our knowledge they are free of any residues in dangerous quantities. ~Vlr bestlitigen weile" dass die zUrUckgesandten Tei/e sorgftiftig gereinigt wurden Wid naeh Uf1serem besten Wissenfrei VO Il Riickstiinden in gejalubringender Menge sind. dangerous for the environment.nnr(-S!>·HauY'i. M/ft eiller der Wamhimveise zu. / [hre Aujtragsnr.Si'f Am\'dsungiiihn zur Aft!i hnulI[ U. dept. Uecause of legal regulations and for the safety of our employees and operating equipment.:al1n."f h no! followed.:: iluch auiJell . radioakliv Please tick should one of the above be applicable.l/(!jC'nmgMlulI/mer {!<Alii . Bringell Sie diese uflbediflgt auiJen an der Verpackung an.~ujda l'cf7Mckur-e. Ansprechp.lI11r~~ Process datal Prozessdaten rfl _ [OCI [~S/cm l Pressure / Dmck Viscosity / Viskositiil ~~ Cond uctivity I Leitjiihigkeil Me dium and w arni ngs Wamhim~'eise zum Medium Medium /concentraUoll Medium / Konzelltration Identification CAS No. of the box.We further certify that (he returned part') have been carefu ll y cleaned.llellbl. D. Description of failu re / Fel1lerbeschreibung _ Company data / Allgaben zum Absender Company / Firma _~~~~~~~~~~~~~_ Address / Adresse Phone number of contact person I Te/ejan-NT. before your order can be handled.' brandf6rdemd. Typ e of instrum ent I se nsor Geriite-/Sensortyp Se rial number Seriennummer D Used as SIL device in a Safety Instrum e nte d System I EinsJlZ als SIL Geriit in SchutzeilllichlUngen Temperature / Te mper. If this procedlL. N/(IIIIxJehlUnt dit. 1 I I I I I I I I Plfa5e tt':e rt'n~~ the Rerum AU!ho~L.1ll Wid ggf spezielle Handllabungsvorschrijten beilege!/. Auf rond der gesetzlichel/ Vorschrijlell und zum Schulz ul/serer Mitarbeiler WId Betriebseinricl1lungell. it may result in til t r\'fus. I' :2.

07 r 71060112 FM+SGMLb.com/worldwide Endress+Hauser j ~+: People for Process Automation BA063D/06/en/08.endress.www.O ProMoDo .

.

. After the programmed minimum update time elapses Ulld tlle next nega ti ve edge occurs. e. The counter is programmable for onc of eight din"crcnt count modes.7 mm) HIGH DIGITS • OPTIONAL RELAY OUTPUT MODULE Bulletin No. Input A accepts the signal for the ('OWlt and/or Rate clisplays. The capability of the CUB5 can be easi ly expanded with the addition of an option module. REFLECTIVE OR GREENIRED LED BACKLIGHTING • OPTIONAL SERIAL COMMUNICATI ONS MODULE (RS232 or RS485) • COUNT SPEEDS UP TO 20 KHz • OPERATES FROM 9 TO 28 VDC POWER SOURCE CE GENERAL DESCRIPTION The CUDS provides the u ser the ultimate in Oexibility.. Thc backlight version is user selectable for gr~n or red backlighting with variable disp lay intensity.J) 19B16SY3. Raeommanded minimum dearance (behind Iha panel) for mounting d ip ins la~ation Is 2. including bi·di rectional and quadraturc. • • PROGRAMMABLE SCALING FOR COUNT AND RATE BI·DIRECTIONAL COUNTING..::ctly C0111111al)d motors.68::836 _ _ _-I (66!g) . The MLPS I is power~d from 85 to 250 VAC and provides up to 400 mA to drive the unit :lnd sensor.I~n U Fax +1 (717) 764·0839 • • 0.ling and decimal point rcad-outs in diffe rent engineering lUlit s. lP0584 Released 6/05 MODEL CUBS . The CUBS display has 0.vl\w/.redllon. the unit calcu lates the input rate based on the number of edges that occurrcd during the elapsed time.2.46" (11.46" ( 11.1ch I13ve their owo sc. TIl e meter can be progrnmmed as a single or dual couiller with rate indication capabi lit)'. Do not use this meter to din. or up/down control counting.21 cno I 295(7"'9)~ CL) C. Exte nsive scaling c3p3bilitics 3110w pmc tically aoy desired reading at VCl)' s low count rates. anticoincidence counting.6) H lC 3 00' (16. from it 's complete user prog. -. There is a progranunablc user input that can be progrmnmed to pcrfonll a variety offulletions. local codes and instructions th:lt appear in this literature or on equi pment must be observed to ensure pcrsonn l safety and to prevent damage to eithe r the instrument or equipment connected to it.2) W.ramming to the optiOllil[ relay output capability. RATE The mte indicator utilizes the signal at Input A to calculate the Tate value using a time interval method (1I13U). dual counter. CAUTtON: Raad complete ins tructions prio r to installation a nd operation 01 the unit. I I 15(38) 1--. UP/DOWN CONTROL • QUADRATURE SENSING (UP TO 4 TIMES RESOLUTION) • • DISPLAY COLOR CHANGE CAPABILITY AT PRESET OUTPUT NEMA 4XJIP65 SEALED FRONT BEZEL COUNTER 111e CUll5 receh-es incoming pulses and multiplies them by the Count SC:lle Factor to obt3in the desired reading for the count di splay. At s lower rates. CUBS·S Drawing No.. The meter has two separate inputs which provide diffcrent function s depending on which opemting mode is sclectcd. In the counter/rate indicator mode. When progmmmoo as a dual counlcr. To do so can be potentia lly harmful to persoos or cquipmc nt in the event of a fault to the meter. DIMENSIONS In inches (mm) Nola.net ~!~. disp lays..!ble low (minimum) and high (max imwll) updatc timcs to provide opt imal display response at any input frcqucncy. which attaches direc tly to the back of a CUBS. both inputs 3re monitored simu lt3neous ly so that no counts are 1051. The LCD is available in Iwo versions. CAUTION: Risk of etectrlc shock. valves. Selpoint capability is field installable with the addition of the CUB5RLYO.7 mm) high digits. lbe display can be tuggkd either manually or automatically between the sde. If cquipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer. In the anti-coincideoce mode.MINIATURE ELECTRONIC 8-DIGIT DUAL COUNTER AND RATE INDICATOR LCD. Inpul A accepts the signal for the count Ulld Input B is used for quadrature.r.IJ ('}. while Input U accepts the signal for the Count display or direction contra\. The CUn5 can be powered from an optional Red Lion Micro-Line/Sensor Power Supply (MLPS I 000). each counter has a sc pnnllc sca le factor and decimal points. The resulting display cOIn be chosen as the sum or difference of the two inputs. relay outp ut module. rcncctivc (CUB5ROOO) aod backlight (CUB5BOOO).too. The unit counts all the negative edge of the input pulses. or other actuators not equipped with safeguards.>.15" (54. The input rnte is the nllluitiplied by the rate sca ling va lue to calculate the rate dis ploy. SAFETY SUMMARY All safety related regulations. The Rate Indi cator has progromm. Serial communications capability for RS232 or RS4 85 is added with a serial option module. a\"ernging can be accomplished by programming the ra te minimum update time for the desired response. th e protection provided by the equipment may he impaired.

:ep' Quadrature 1<4 (18 K Hz) and Dual Counlcr (17 K Hz) 4. 85 to 250 VAC CUB5ROOO CUB5RlY Optional Plug·in Cards CUB5COM MLPS1 CUBSBOOO CUB5RlYO CU85COM 1 CUB5COM2 Accessory MlPS1QOO IGENERAL METER SPECIFICATIONS I.:ounl only) O\·erflow Indication: Display fla shes "b£ nlOU[r " I\bllmu m Count l{ates: 50% duty cycle Without setpoint optiOD ellrd : 20 KHz (a ll count modes) With setpoint option eard : 20 KHz for any count mode c.:h sde.!rnmrnablc input.:t ion 2.:opper wire Torque : 5 inch-Ibs (0. may be enabled or disabled in any mode Dislllny Uu lgnntor : "p" 10 the len side of the display llis(llny Hnnge: 0 to 999999 Over Ilange Dlsllla)": "P DlDl. and Jutxmllury usc. MODEL NUMBER DISPLAY COLOR INPUT CURRENT WITHOUT CUB5RlYO INPUT CURRENT WITH CUBsRLYO Red Display Green Display CUB5ROOO CUB5BOOO CUB5BOOO _.1: Safety requirements for !!Iec trieal equipment for measurement . C ONSTRUCTION : This unit is rated for NEMA 4X1IP65 requirements for indoor usc....·els : V IL = 1.' Counlrr 11 : 7·digils. High impacl plastic casc with clear viewing window. CONNECTIONS: Wire clamping serew terminals Wire S trip Length: 0 .AY: 6-digits.: 50 msc<: debouoce (activation and release) 7. Inlernal 10KW pull-up resistor 10 +9 to 28 VOC. M ust uSC:1o RLC modcl MLPSI or a Class 2 or SELV rOlled power supply.Dl" Mnximum Fr equrnc)' : 20 KHz I\linilllulII Frt'qurne)': 0. Thrt's hold Lt'. 2 kV L&N-E power RF conducted interference EN 61000· 4·6 Criterion /\ 3 V/rrns Power frequency magnetic fields EN 61000·4-8 Criterion A 30 Aim E mhsions: Emissions EN 550 11 C lass /\ Notcs: I.0 Setti. UL50 ELECTIlOI\1AGNETIC C OI\1PATrulLITY Emissions and Immunity to EN 61326: Eleclrical Equipment for Measureme nt. VMAX = 28 VDe U. COUNTfRATE SIGNAL INPUTS (INP A nnd INP 11): Input A : DIP swit. VIH = 2.4 V min."<.o the left side of the di splay Dispilly Range: 0 to 9999999 (positive . Installation Category I. 1.0 V ]\lax.01 % 5.5 nun) Wire Gage: 30· 14 AWG . Refer 10 l:.): Damping capacitor provided fo r swi tch contact bouncc... COUNTER DISPLAYS : COllnl f'r A: 8·cligils. 12. Red (max intens ity) Green (max intensily) 10 mA 85 mA 95 mA 30 mA 115 mA 125 mA 1&2 3 4 5 1&2 3 4 5 -35 to 75"C -35 to 70 °C -35 to 60"C -35 10 SO"C -35 10 75°C -35 10 65°C -35 10 sooC ·35 10 35°C 3..IANCES: SAFETY IEC 10 10-1 . EN 61010. WEIGHT: 3. ENVlIlONMENTAL CON DITIONS: Ollernting Tt'mperalurf' Rang t' for cunS ROOO: -35 to 75°(' Ol)('fnti ng Tempt'rnlurf' R ange for cuusnooo drpends on display color nnd Intensity len' l as per below: tNTENSITY LEVEL TEM PERATUR E using a relay module. Vm '" 2. Criterion B: Temporm)' loss of pcrfomumce from II'I/ic-h Ihe IlII it selfreco rers. DESCRIPTION PART NUM8ER CUBS CUB5R CUBS8 Dual Counter & Rete Indicator w ith Reflective D isplay Dual Counter & Ra te Indicator with Backlight Display Single Relay Ophon Card RS485 Serial Communications Card RS232 Serial Communications Card Micro·line Power Supply. 6.. Connect tcrminalto conuuon to activate function . control.: tabh: to acce pt pulses from a variety of sourccs. Control and l.46" (11. POWER: Input voltage range is +9 to +28 VDC wi th short cir. Criterion A: Norm(/l opcn/tioll withi" speciji('(J fimju.AY: 8 digit LCD 0.:uit and inpul polarity protection.565 N·m) max. Immunity to Ind ustrial I .0 1 Hz Accuracy: ±0 .. RATE IJI SP I.lIbor::atOlY usc. 8."<. Input 8 : Logic signals only Trigger Icvcls: V tL = 1.0 V max.ng th e DIP Switches fo r Input A specificati ons.: trostatic discharge EN 61000-4-2 Criterion /\ 4 kV conta. enabled ill all count modes Display Range: -9999999 to 99999999 Overflow Indication: Display flashes " [ nl DU[. IP65 Enclosure raling (Fn. Pollution Degree 2. 2. Display color change capability al preset when 9.HC /IISWllalioll GIlit/eJillcs for atltJilioll(li ill/omlt/liol/ .4 V min.IORDERING INFORMATION TYPE MODEL NO. Panel gaskct and mounting clip included. VMAX = 28 VDC Current sinking: Internal 10Kn pull·up resistor to +9 to 28 VDe Filter (LO Freq.. Part l.:t discharge 8 kV air discharge Ela:trom::agnetic RF fields EN 61000·4-3 Criterion /\ 10V/1ll Fast transients (burst) EN 61000·4-4 Criterion /\ 2 kV power I kV signal EN 6 1000-4-5 Criterion /\ Surge I kV L-L. nglc optimizc=d. DlSPL...:e on ly)..ocntions: Ele. Limits input fre quency to 50 Hz and input pul se widths to 10 mscc min.2 oz ( 100 g) 2 . lEe 529 Type 4X Enclosure Rating (Face only). enllblcd in Dual Counter mode on ly Di5play Designator: "b" . relati ve humidity tnoncondensing) Allitude : Up to 2000 meters )0.esponsf' Timt': 5 In SCC t)'P. USER IN PUT (US It): Pro!.3" (7. \\I EMOIlY: NOllvo lat ile ElPROM memory retains all programming parameters and count valucs whcn power is removed. Storage Temperature: -35 to 85°C O]lrrnting and Storage Huntidlt~': 0 to 85% l1Ia. II . CEIlTIFICATIONS AND COI\ IPI. See Se.'.7 mm) high digits CU U5ROOO: Refl ective LCD with full viewing angle CUU5ll000: Selectable transmissive rcd or green backlight LED with viewing .

Contin uous exposure 10 direct sunlight may acceleratc the aging process of the bezeL Do oot use tools orany kind (screwdrivers. odd. @28 VUC max.mel latch should be eng3ged in the farth est fOn\'. etc.000 ~:~ ) ~.: Adds interual7.: Adds internal 3. • FaclOty Sfltt:og SWITCHES 3 and 4 Hll~' requ('ncy: Removes damping cnpaeitor and allows max. The un it is intended to be mounted into an enclosed panel. (Not recommcnded wi th counl ing applications. The be7. The plug-in cards.) REMOVING THE REAR COVER To remove the rear co\·er. and input pulse widths to 10 Jllsec. 100 mV hysteresis.2k Dnla Formal: 718 bits. 3 . 28 to 36 in-oz [0. IMAX = J.. odd. c<lrd andlor serial conununications cards. To replace the co\'er. that :lIe sold separately. pens. LO Fr('(Jurney: Adds a damping c3paci tor for switch contact bounce. RS232 half duplex (non-isolated) Daud n a te: 300 to 19. V IH '" 2. = 1.000 minimum operations ItS48S SEIUAL COI\[l\1UNICATIONS CA RD TYJlr: RS485 multi-point balanced interface (non-isolale(l) Baud nail': JOO 10 19. IAOUNnNG SCREW PANEL CUT-OU T 2. insert a small . 30 .---11 ---l 1.. Time Accurncy: ± 0. flat blade screwdriver between the tab and the plastic wall below the terminals. Must " Iso have SRC S\\'ilch ON.. Type: Single FORM·C reJoy isolAtion To Sensor & User Input Commons: 1400 Vnns for I min.024 (33 +. '10 access the switches.1r cover of !lle meier. maximum vo ltage: ±40 V peak (28 Vms). SWITCH 1 LOGIC: Input A trigger levels V[(. 0>1 [iJ[iJ[iJ[iJ I 2 3 4 SWITCH 2 SN}{. INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT The uni t should be in stalled in a location Ulilt docs not excccd the operating lemperature and providcs good air circulation. SHe.2 mA max. can be inslnlkd initially or:lt a Imer date.0 INSTALLING THE METER While holding the uni t in place. The unit shou ld be installed fully assembled.3 amp @ 125 VAC resistive Life Ex pcdnnc)": 100. 7. or no parity )Jus Addrc§s. Placing the unit ncar deviccs that generate excessivc Ileal should be avoided. 00 not over-t ighten the screws.9 KCl pull-down resistor. A hank of 4 sw itches is located in the uPllcr right hand comer. pencils. In serting the sc rewdriver will provide enough pressure to release the tab locks.75 V min. even. Remove the pancllateh from the unit. Wnrnlng: I::xposecl line vo ltage ex ists on tIle circuit boards. can ue liued wilb opt ional rda). RELAY CARD A ill WARNING: Disconnect all power to the unit before installing Plug·ln card.2k nnla Formal: 7/8 bits. Do NOT use sol\'eot5. Slide the panel gasket over the rear of the unit to the bae k of the bezel. The p.8 KQ pull-up rcsistor to +9 to 28 VDC. V}. lhc details for the plug-in cards can be rc\'icwed in the spl.0 SETTING THE DIP SWITCHES SETTING THE INPUT DIP SWITCHES The meter has four DIP switches for Input A and Jnputll that lllust be set before applying power.68 (68 ~8~6 .locate the covcr locking tab be low the 2ml and Jrd input lennin als.26 N-m». Tum OfT Time: 4 msee max. max J2 mctc=rs ~r line Trans mit D ela:\": Scltt table (refer to CliB5COM bulletin) RcsllOnsc Time: Turn On Time: 4 msec max.202 to 0. or no parity 11.ud slot possible. even...'c ificalion section below. push the pancl latch over the rea r of the unit so tha t the tabs of the panel latch engage in the slots on the case.el should only be cleaned with a soft cloth and neutral soap produc t. Limits input frequency to 50 H7. frequency.6 ) jO 12. Prepare the panel cutout to the diml'nsioos shown. 0. align the cover with the input leoninals and press dOWJl unt il the cover snaps into place. Insert the unit into the pane l cutout.) to operate the ke)'I>ad of the unit.IOPTIONAL PLUG-IN CARDS ADDING OPTION CARDS The CUBS mclen.25 V max.0 1% RS232 SEIUAL COMMUNICATIONS CARll T)"p('.tAX = 28 VAC MAG: 200 mV peak input sensitivity. remove the re. 0 to 99. To release the tab.'lling: I amp @ 30 VDC resistive. INSTALLATION The meter meets NEMA 4X/IP65 requirements when properly installed. To ach ieve a proper scaL tighten the latch screws evenly until the unit is snug in the panel {Torque to 3pprox.8 rnA. Remove all power to the metcr and load circuits before accessing inside of the meter. Working Voltage : 150 Vnns ContAct R.

::eway with AC power lines.55 mm) wire. two 1118 AWG (1. 4. Use of sDubbers a. Never run Signal or Contro l cllbles in the same conduit or rll. 1. handle the cards at a static controlled clean workstation . the use of externlll EM·I suppress ion devices. b. Install them near the power entry point of the enclosure. trllnsfonners.::reened) cables for all Signlll Ilnd Control inputs. 4. Install them on Signal Ilnd Control cables IlS close to tIle unit :IS possible.1bling should confonll to :lppropriate standards of good installation. Strip the wire. such as ferrite suppression cores.3" (7. or four 1120 AWG (O.0 WIRING THE METER the noise source frequency is above 1 MHz. rou ting. Listed below arc the reeollllllended methods of connecting the shield. Use shielded (s. and olher noisy components. Snubber: RLC# SNUBOOOO..>.s: Fil ir-R ile # 0443 167251 (RLC# FCOROOOO) TD/\: # ZCAT.. Long cable runs are more susceptible! to EMl pickup than short cllble ruDS. The cards plug into the main l' ircuit board orlhl.. and shield lennination are very important and can mcan the difference between a suc. The meter becomes more inunune to EMI Willl fewer 110 connections. sour.) Each tenninal ctln accepl up to one /114 AWG (2. Comms Card Relay Card 14.::ommended: Fenite Suppression Cores for signlll Ilnd contro l cllble. conductors feeding motors. Cable length. leaving approximately 0. SCR contro ls. Il. The type of the electrictll noise.1led on the back of the meIer. usually when Note: Rejf!l"ence malJlljacturer~· instmcliolls whell installing (I iiI/eli/fer.5 1ll11l) bare lead exposed (stranded wires should be tin ned with solder. Dirt. " ii u <D DO D =-= PWR COM MON + 9. discharge slatic charges from your body by touching a grounded bare metal object.1 POWER WIRING DC Power +9 to +28 VDC: +VD C Powcr Comlllon: -V DC 4. Listed below arc some EMC guidelines fo r successful installation in an industria l em'irolllllent. Connect the shield to common of the meter and lell\'e the other end of the shield unconlll"Cted Illld insulated from c~rtll ground. which is properly connected to protective carth.02 mm). 'Inc meter should be mounted in a metal cnclosure. only handle the cards l'oy the edges. Loop the cllbJc through the . DDDD The user input of the meter is internally pulled up to +9 (Q +28 V with 10K resistance. It is recommended that Ille power supplied to the meier (DC or AC) be pmtected by a fuse or circu it breaker.. local codes and reg ulations.2 USER INPUT WIRING Sinking Logic INPCOMM USR Connect externa l switching device betwccn the } User Input tenniI13l and Input Comm on. The following EM1 suppression device s (or equivalent) are re. 7. and heiliers.1035-13JOA Steward # 28112029-0AO Line Filters for input power cables: SchatTner /I FN61O-1I07 iRLC# LFlLOOOO) Schaffner # FN670-1.28 va c PY1R COMMON o +9 -2B VOC 4 .) insert the lead under the correct screw-clamp tenninal and tighten until the wire is secure . Also. . (pull wire to verify tightness. The cables shou ld be ran in metlll conduit thllt is properly grounded.. Therdore. Before handling the cards.::ross inductive loads suppresses EM I.: essful or troublesome installation. 5. c.61Ilin). proper install ation and wiring mcthods must be followed to ensure compatibility in each applicalion. A ll conductors should confonn to the meter 's voltage and current mtings. III extremely higll E~ll em'irol1ments. Switching of induclive lottds produces high EMf.::ore severnl time·s or usc multiple cores on eaeh cable for Ildditional prolection. Connect the shield only at the panel where the unit is mounted 10 earth ground (protective earth).13. The inpl1l is Ilctive when it is pulled low (<!I . is effect ive. This is especill lly useful in applklltioilS where cable runs Ilre long and portllble two-wily radios are used in close proximity or if the installalion is ncar a commerc ial radio tmnsmiltcr. EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Although tllis meter is designed with a high degree of immunity to ElectroMllgnetic In terference (EMI)." meIer sensitive components.8/07 Coreolll # 1 VR3 WIRING OVERVIEW Electrica l connections are made via screw-clamp tcnninals ioc.. control relays. 2.::e or coupling method into the meter may be different for various installations.7 V). Signll l or Control cllbles within Iln enclosure should be routcd as far as possible from contllctors. keep cab le runs IlS short IlS possible. Ideally. in ordcr of their effecti veness. 6. Connect thc shield to ellrth ground Ilt both ends ofllle cable. The connection point for the shield depends sornewh:lt upon the app lic~t i on. All C. The shield (screen) pigtail eOlUleclion should be mllde IlS short as possible. etc. solenoids. Install line lilters 011 the power input cllble to the Imit to suppress power line inlerference..0 INSTALLING PLUG-IN CARDS CAUTION: The Plug-in enrds and main circuitlmard contain static Tile Plug-in cards arc separately purchased option cards thai pcrlonn specific functions. oil or other contaminants that may conlilct the cords can adversely affect circuil operation..

Input A Two Wire Proximity.28WC D = Current Sourcing Output we :-:-: Current Sinking Output Interfacing With TTL t6~b~ Switch or Isolated Transistor.3 INPUT WIRING & '1 L CAUTION : Power input common is NOT isolated trom user input conunOIl. ::liUU > » ::li::li U 5 ... Current Sink In plllA ~ Input A Switch or Isolated Transistor...:t to input common. . Current Source Input A Current Sink Output .4 SETPOINT (OUTPUT) WIRING SETPOINT RELAY PLUG·IN CARD ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS I o 4.\G£nc ~!oruP ) II!!" 0 O... tJ1C: power input common must be su itahly isolated from hazardous live earth rderenced voltage: or input common must be at protective earth ground potential. ~ £~8g~£ I!lrn~m81QJ RS232 U U I -t 0 .. Sh~ded ~ r(Jas not recommended fOf counting applications.6.th respect to earth ground. orlhe meier application. hazardous voltage may hi! prl!Senl at the User Inputs and User Input Common tenninals... + N....O. In order 10 prl!-serve the sa(el). 4. RJ11 CONNECTOR PIN OUTS d'"1 II W L l •• . AC Inputs From Tach Generators..... Ifno\.~ ~"" C(&IYO"I . Quad/Direction o . and Ihe common of thc plug-in cards with respc. Switch position is apptication d(Jp(Jnden l..'-21 we =-= .. ~ zw<uzz I!lrn~m81QJ RS485 .....4. Current Source ~ ~ Input A Input A loI.d of the user input common \\. Appropriate considerat ions must then l><! given 10 the POICllIi.C.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PLUG·IN CARD COM T N. Etc.g~26 PM! COWOH D 't.

without cbaoging the:: programming of preceding parameters. The meter nonna lly operates in the Display Mode. FACTORY SETTINGS MODULE MENU (SEL KEY) Each module h:JS a separate module menu (which is shown al the start of each module discussion). Pressing the RST key OJ1 power-up will load the faelory settings and display rE5fL This allows operation in the eveot of a memory tailure or corrupted data. the display altematcs betwee::o the present parameter and the selections/valoe for thai paramcter. the display wi ll toggle aUlomaticnlly ap proximately .. vcrify reccnt parameter changes.To the left o f the display is the Counter B value. PROGRAMMING MODE EXIT (SEL KEY) The Programming Mode is exited by pressing the SEL kq with Pr a displayed. "1 " . The displayed module is entered by pressing the SEL key. The Programming Mode is entered by pressing nild holdi ng the SEL key. The SEL key is pre::ssed to ndvanee ttl a particular parameter to be changed.0 REVIEWING THE FRONT BUTTONS AND DISPLAY I ~ 9816 SY 3. No parameters can be programmed in this mooe. Factory Settings ale shown. The RST key is used to seleclthe desired module. If display sc roll is ennbkd.0 PROGRAMMING THE METER OVERVIEW PROGRAMMING MENU Input Setup Parometers Rote Setup Parameters Display and Front Panel Key Parameters Setpoint Output Parometers Serial Setup Parameters PROGRAMMING MODE ENTRY (SEL KEY) It is recomm~nded all programming changes be made off line. no. SELECTION I VALUE ENTRY For e<lch parameter. the display will return to Pro may conlinue by accessing <lddition<l lmodules. Slores and llctivates the displayed scicctiorVvaluc. This w ill commit any stored parameter changes 10 memory and return the meter to the Displ uy Mode. it is recommended to record the parameter progranulling and lock OUI paramek:r programming with the user input or programming security code. Pressing and holding the SEL hy wiil enter the value and move to the next parameter. Factory Settings may be completely restored in Morlulc 3. "b" . lbese modules group together parameters that nre rdated in flUlc tion.Counter A has no deSignator. 6 . This is useful when cneountering progwrnming problcms.To tne (eft of the display is the ra te value. press the RST key to access the value. Pressing the RST key ag<lin inerelllt"nts the d igit hy one or the user can hold the RST key and the digit will autolllatkally scroll.:very four seconds between Ihe ratc and count values. When programming is compkte. . If it is not accessible then it is locked by either (I sl!Curity code. or before installation. 'Inc dis play will alternate between Pro and the present module. The SEL key will advance to the next digit. 16. 11 is recomme::nded to start with Module 1 for cOImlillg or Module :2 for rale . Pressing the SEL key.15. or a hardware lock. Programming Allcr completing a modu le.2! KEY DISPLAY MODE OPERATION Index display ttlrough selected displays Resels coun! display ENTERING PROGRAM MODE Press and ho:d for 2 seconds to activate Press SEL to enter programming mode PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION Store selected parameter and index to next parameter Advances through the program menullncremenls selected parameter value or selection SEL RST OPERATING MODE DISPLAY DESIGNATORS "R" . For nwnerie values. (If power loss occurs before fetuming to the Display :Mode. The RST key is used to move through the sclcctionslvalues for that parameter. The right h<lnd most digit w itl begin to nush.) no PROGRAMMING TIPS MODULE ENTRY (SEL & RST KEYS) The Progmmming Menu is organized inla four modules. This (l lso advances the metcr to the next parameter. Pressing the SEl bUllon toggles the m eter through the selected displtlys.To the left of the display indicates the setpoinl slalus.

The dccimal poinl is selected 10 show Ihe resolution in hund redths.E: The counter display is used to indicate the tOla l number o f feel used in a process. DISPLAY The number of input counts is mult iplied by the scale fac tor 1 obtain the 0 desired process va lue.. 1 [nlb dP 1<:Q D ~ I _-----=. The selection will also alrect Counter A seait' fac tor calculations. it is recommended to usc Count with Oireclion for the counl mode.1 MODULE 1 ['. Numbtr of Puhrs: NWIl~r of pulses requ ired to achieve the desired display units.6.up Func tion Shaded ilTea selec tion s ol1ly apply when programmed for dual cou nt mode.00 x 100 Scale Factor Scale Faclor • For value entry instnlelioJls.)· MODE Count with Diredion INPUT A ACTION INPUT B ACTION COUNTER RESET AT POWER-UP (ol ud ~Rlf (ol dURl (ol qURd I qURd qURd Rdd Rdd Rdd Sub ~ Counter A Counter A Direction RatefCounter Dual Counter Quadrature )(1 Quadrature )(2 Quadrature )(4 2 Input Add/Add 2 Input Add/Sublract Rate only Counter A Add Count A Count A Count A Counter A Add Counter A Add Counter A Add Counter B Add Quad A Quad A Quad A Counler A Add Counter A Subtract 1~5l P-UP I<:Q nu ~f S flU [ounl b ~I nal (ouol R bolh R·b . II is ncassary to know the number of pulses for the d esiT\~ d COUNTER B DECIMAL POSITION unilS to be displayed.)· o = 0. dis pilly lolal feci with a onehWldredth resolution .r H CO\Jnter B Rll P-UpHL_ InP lUI f'--. refer to selection/value entry in the Programming The Meter scction . SCALING FOR COUNT INDICATION The CUD5's scale factor is factory set to I. The selection will also affec t Counter B scale faclo r C3 lculatiollS. In JUany applications. A scale fac lor of 1. Simply leave the direction input uncQJmccled.:lions are Sho\\11 in the boxes below. To accomplish greater preci sion.9999 Sdec l the count mode thnt cOlTcsponds with your application.. Note: The R<lfe illdic(llor sigllal is deril'ed from Jnp/l/ A ill (1/1 colflll modes. meters.007812 x 100 0. etc. Sca le Factor = Desired Display lInjis X Dec imal Point Pos ition Number of Pulses Given that 128 pulses are equa l 10 I foot. It is important to note that the precision ofo counter application cannot he illlprm'ed by using a scale factor grenter than one. (Details on scaling calculations arc explained at the end of this section. (Details 011 scaling calculat ions are explaincd at the end oflhis sect ion.0 0. RIR User Input Assignm ent Decimal Point Scole Foelor Decimal Point Scole roctor 01 Power.0000 will resu!t in the display of the ac tunl numbcr of input counts. Deci mal Point Position: DUDDD I to 999999 The number of input coun ts is multiplied hy the scale faclor to obtain the desired process value.) The ('ount Scale Factor Value can ronge from 00. 0.00 0 .JH L r Co un te r A [olb dP H COl.InPUl [ SEC INPUT SETUP PARAMETERS PARAMETER MENU eQual Cou nt Mode On lY~ (I' mpu~) r Ouol cou nt I Mode Onl y I [olR dP Coun ter A l IInP R -b Count Mode i[o_lR_ I'. For simpl e counting applications.J COllnler Rese t Use r Input Ulf.a DU DDD DUDD DUDDD DUDUDD This selects the decimal poiot position for Counter B. Therefore. to provide one (ount on the display for each pulse that is input to the unit. ga llons.ll . Scale Faclor = 128 1. Scale Factor Desired Display Uoils X Decimal Point Position Number of Pulses COUNTER A SCALE FACTOR WHERE: Desired DisllJRY Units: Count dis play units acquired :ICIer pulses that occum:d.0001 10 99. if assigned to Counter A.-. there will not be a one-Io-one cOlTesponde nce between input pulses and display units.0000 will resull in the display of the ac tua l number of input counts. The fo llowing !'onnu la is used to c3!cuimc the sca le factor.00000 1 10 100 1000 10000 100000 EXA MPI.0000 0 .000 0 .lnte r B [olb l. more pulse information must be generated per measuring uni!.7812 7 . it is necessary for the CUBS to scale or multiply the input pu lses by a scale fac tor to achic\·c the desired displny units (feel. The input n. A scak factor of 1.9999. COUNTER A DECIMAL POSITION D UD DDD DDDD DDDDD UDDDDD This sdects the dCi:imal point position for ('ountcr A and the setpoint value. COUNT MODE [n~ ~Rlf COUNTER B SCALE FACTOR ud (ol dURl (ol Rdd Rdd Rdd lub DDUDD I to 99.

parameter docs not atIeet rate scaling calculations..b Rate Enob le dP ~Rff dSP ~Rl[ lOP HI'Udl~ D to 999999 I Rote De cimal Point Rote Scaling Display Value Rote Scoling In put Value Rote lo w Update Tim e Module 2 is the programming for the Rate paramelers.o l. 'For value l"lltry instructions. Store and Reset USER INPUT ASSIGNMENT Inhibit Display Intensity Level (Edge Triggered) ~SEr ASn ~ ~ I [oun~ A I I [oun~ [oun~ R b bolh R·b p. RATE SCALING DISPLAY VALUE rnr~ E"----"dS""PI ~ A. nD p" l" No Function Program Mode Lock-oul Display Select (Edge triggered) Maintained Reset User Input disabled..Sl Shadcd area se lcctiom only apply when programmed for dual count mode. The Rate value is shown with an annunciator of"f" in the Display Mode.USER INPUT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING MODE ACCESS SECURITY CODE USER INPUT FUNCTION USER INPUT STATE PROGRAMMING MODE ACCESS Immediate access AHer entering security code at Active Nol Active Active Nol Aclive ~ ~I_ DISPLAY _ n 0l ---. Freeze display for the selected counler(s) while allowing counts 10 accumulate internally. . Ihe remaining rate parameters are not accessible. refer to selection/value entry in theProgr.[ Slor -r5~ Inh Ib tl H[Ufl Store 'Entering Code 222 allows access regardless of security code.[S[l Sl.o lo< P. Prnl-. Level active reset of the selected counters. When se{IO Oil.o lo< P.-I RATE ENABLE Enter the desircd Rate Display Value for the Scal ing Point. 6.o lo< After entering secunty code at PrD [0 dE prompt" Immediale access No access Immediale access d'S[Wl . or inhibit is selected in the User Input Function menu ..1 I ~Rlf I lO'Udl Rote High Update Time PrD I~Rl[ f.---I nD ~[S RATE SCALING INPUT VALUE RATE DECIMAL POINT WA~E InP I~ ~ ." ~ _.. Inhibit counting for the selected counter(s).nnming The Meter section.cIO=OO=DI UDDDD UI to 9999H WA~E dP I~ D aD aDD Enter the corresponding Rate Input Va lue for the Scaling Point.::. 'n~ Print Request Display Intensity level (Edge Triggered) The User lnput Assignment is only active if the metcr is programmcd in the Dual Count Mode and a selection of reset. store. Pro [odE prompt" >0 >0 0 0 P.< . 8 . Increase intensity one level for each acLvation.. store and reset." aDDD aDDDDD This selects the decimal point position for rate displays and any sctpoint value assigned to these displays. ~E=SI .. -.0::..-r~ ~ -. MODE DESCRIPTION 0 >0 '01 '01 P. This. Rate Enable shou ld be set to Oil wheo nat in use.-I-. Edge triggered reset of the selected counler(s) after storing the count. Same as Print Request followed by a momentary reset of the selecred counter(sj.o l.< P.. See Programming Mode Access chart Advance once for each activation.o lo< P.2 MODULE 2 I hRlf SEL RATE SETUP PARAMETERS (2'rR~f) PARAMETER MENU .....00= = = 100 01 .. (backligh t version only) Serial transmit of the adve paramerers selected in the Print Options menu (Module 5). For maximum input frequency.

II of pulses per fOOl) is known.flH dSP) and Scaling Input tPRl[ IIlP). If# of pulse per unit is less than I. Stocto' Sample Period ~. Time RATE HIGH UPDATE TIME 1 HI -U& 1<1l ~ U2 to 999 seconds . Values of 0.0 Scaling lnput = 15. is tht!o shown as a Ra te va lue determined by the scaling calculat ion.ow Update Time valut!. With 15.25 pulses per gallon. then multil.. 1 pulses per fOOl .) Scaling Display = 36000 Scaling Input = 2. The sample period begins on the first falling edge. 1 {lJld 0.J1 0ID UI to 999 seconds low Upda te TIme Zero High Update The low Update Time is the m inimum amount of time befween d isplay updates for the Rate display. then those values can be entered illlo Sca ling Display (.of New Sample Period New Disploy low Update Hfgh Update TIm. will force the display to lero for speeds below 0. A t this falling edge.2 seconds will update tbe d isplay correctly but Jll:\y cause the display to appear unsteady. multiply both Input and Display values by 10. then it can he entered as the Scating Input value nnd the Sca ling Display value will be entered as the tollowing: RATE PER Second DISPLAY (Ii'RH . A lso. The input frequency calculated duri ng the sample period. INPUT FREQUENCY CALCULATION The meter determines the input frequency by summing the number of f:t lling edges received during a s:lillpJe period of lime. With 0. 1. the meter starts accumu lating the nwn ber of fa l\j n~ edges. l f# of pulse per unit is less than 10.is a third Jess of# of pulses per un it).:= 0201 The High Update lime is the maxinuun amoun t of time before the Rate d isplay is forced to zero.e. dSp) INPUT (1i'Rl:£ IIJSI) # of pulses per unit # of pulses per unit Minute Hour RATE VALUE CALCU LATED 60 3600 fI of pulses per unil NOTE S: I. 3. A linear rcintionsllip is fonned between these points to yield a mtc display value that corresponds to the incoming input signal rate. show fee t per minute in tenths. 2.0.5 Hz or a pulse evcry 2 seconds. 2. show w hole gallons per hour.5. 9 . If the Display value is rai5~ or lowered. Scaling Display = 60. (For more exp l ~na t io l1 . Jf the High Update lime value is reached (without receiving a fa lling edge afler reaching Low Update Time)... Display value for per hour is entered by a th ird less (1200) then Input vahl':.SCALING FOR RATE INDICATION To scale the Rate. Both va lues must be greater than 0. Both values must be greater than 0. These values . 4. The meter is c. the meter starts acculllulatin~ time towa rds Low U p date and High Update values. EXAM PLE : I. If on ly the number of pu lses per 'single' unit (i.~IOI . the Rale display will update to the new va lue and the next sample period will stan on the same edge. refer to Rate Value Calculation./ End of r Sample Somple Perio d ~ Period i I t§S.0. enter a Sca ling Display value with a corrcsfxlIlding Sca li ng Input value. then Input \'alue must be ra i s~ or lowered by the sallle proportion (i.-I _. then multiply hoth Input and Displ3Y values by 100. Sample Period l'- .l)' both Input and Display va lues by 10. No further ca lcu\ations arc needed. When the time reaches the Low Update Time value. SCALING CALCULATION If (I d isplay value versus input signa l (in pulses per second) is known.apable of showing a rate display vulue for :lny linear process.0. TIle factory setting of 2. The High Update Time value must be greater than the I.- Sample Period : .::.-------------------------1'~.the Il"k'ter looks for one more fa ll ing edge to end tile s amp le pcri()(l. End & Stort : "--. RATE LOW UPDATE TIME Prior Display Display of 1 lO-U& 1<1l ~ 1. nme ZERO RATE CALCULATED L. The same is true if the Input value is raised or lowered.-------=--=. then the sample period wi ll end but the Rate display w ill be forced to ze ro.'Ire internally plotted to a Display value 0(0 and Input value of 0 Hz.e. (To have greater accuracy. then Display \'a lue must be m ised or lowered by the same Prol>orlion. If a falling edge occurs (before the lIigh Update Time va lue is reached).) The High Updnle 'lime mllst be higher than the Low Update Time and higher than the desired slowest readable speed (olle divided by pu lses per second).

Pressing the RST key on power·up w ill load the fac tory settings and displny .n. .-r-'1 ~ Id ~I rEdl DISPLAY COLOR (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY) The ~ES selection will ret urn the meter to the factory ddault settings.6.m\ then return to P. red or green.4 MODULE 4 I~·sm~ SEl SETPOINT OUTPUT PARAMETERS (lI-5HPI:) PARAMETER MENU N/A for Tim ed 1m 1 Rsn I SP~ lDU~ i Outpu' Action m URl m l Counter A Reset Action p·Up Count er A Auto Reset Set point Output Rese t with Monuol Change Disp lay Color wit h Se tpoilll Oulp ul Stole T Reset Selpoin t As signm en t Sotpoint Outpu t Action Set point Output Time. This allows operation in the event of a memory failure or corrupted data.1_--=~E::..-: ---..HI R5n I~ HUl bOUnd ~I [oun~ RI [oun~ R This parameter selects the 3ction of the Selpoint output.. Selcct the display the Selpoint is to be assigned . DISPLAY SCROLL ENABLE @-5uoll I~ ~ 1 =--:--. SETPOINT OUTPUT ACTION lRl[H SETPOINT ASSIGNMENT ~ .-:1 _lR_~[--.. Enter the desired Display lntcnsily Level (1-5).=c= I '-. Some parameters will no! appear depending on the Setpoinl Assignm ent and Setpoint Output Action selected.-""'[Q"'lO.3 MODULE 3 Il·dSPlR~ I SEL J.up Sta t e Value The Setpoint Output Parameters are only active when the optional rclay module is installed in the meter. The ~5 LOAD FACTORY DEFAULT SETIINGS jE5 no f""R"'[ ~~5E"'~I~ selection allows the display to automatically scroll through the ~ l--c~_n-"JQI ' no jEI enabled displays..nol .. Enler th e desired display color.. 00 O o to 999 The ~f5 selection allows the RST bullan to reset the selected countcr{s).::J51 m no no ["nl R [aunt b bo~h R·b dlPlRj "'fr-o---':-[o'd"EI~ ~ 1 ----c-.. This parameter call be used in conjunction w ith the Program Mode Lock-out in the Input Setup Parameters section. Programming:l value other than 000.. This parnmctcr is active for backlight units only.Oocklight Unit Onl y Displ ay Color ~ IPro to CodE Programming Security Cod e 1 fob m iS~ fob II-Scroll Display Scroll Enoble d-lfUfl Display Int ensity Level r:c:a--::: ~ fR:: sfC1 Lo ad Factory Ddoul t Settin gs I Fronl Parlci Display Select Fronl Panel Counte r Reset Enoble FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SELECT ENABLE (SEL) DISPLAY INTENSITY LEVEL (BACKLIGHT UNIT ONLY) 15El Enb I~ ~ 1.'5~ Enb I~ ~ '-.=c~E=51 jES no I d-lEUEll ~ ~I 51 I to I The ~[5 selection allows the SEL button 10 toggle th rough the enabled displays. 6. DISPLAY AND FRONT PANEL KEY PARAMETERS (3-d5PlR~) PARAMETER MENU r . at which time all settings have been changed.out Setpo. lbe display will actively dim or brightcn as levels are changed. 10 .nt Setpoinl Output Power .. requires the security code to be entered before allY programming changes can be made.-:-=--. FRONT PANEL COUNTER RESET ENABLE (RST) PROGRAMMING SECURITY CODE if.. The shaded se lections arc onl y active when the meter is prognlmmed for DUlil Count Mock. The meter will display r[Sa :1.[SU . This parameter is active for b:lcklight units only. The scro ll r:ltc is about every 4 seconds.

~pcnses (1fising OUI of sub~quen l sales ofRLC prodn'-: Is o rprod u. as now in effed or as nU1end~d hereafter. lost profits...L.. induJing \\ilholLt limilation penalties imposed by the Consw ner Produd Safety Act (P."ttcnt li able. on will tlcti\'ate th e output at power up. this parameter on ly npplies to Coullt A rese!. c13ims. A reset will revert the bac klight color to the nonnal opemling mode color. (SS't RSn) is set to COUllt A.l~ Rddr 'jeter Address DP~ Baud Rote Pority Oit Abbreviated Prinling Print Options The Serini Setup Pnmmeters are only active when the opt ional RS132 or RS4 85 serial communica tions module is instalkd in the meter.:mufacnm:d by RLC and b:ued upon persol\:JI injuries. This a utomati.l Dol -End This parameter is only act ive irthc SClpoint Actioil is sel lo lillie out (l-OUl).we been stored.:ally resets the display value of Counler A ea('h time the SClpoint Vn lu.F1 -' .ny W:lrTllnts th e products it manufactures against defects ill m~ ttri~ 1s an d workmanship fOl" a period limit ed to a ne year from the d:l\c o f s hipment..RL I SE L .:. TIle customer ngrees to hold Red Lion Controls harmless from.Irsual1l 10 the Maguuson.1r1Y disclaims allli3bility fo r ally affinnalion. 1 SERIAL SETUP PARAMETERS (5-5[~IRl) PARAMETER MENU I Pro Rbbr Prnl 1 bRUd dRlR Doto Bit PRr ."\II)'·S products exccpl those expressly cont. SETPOINT OUTPUT POWER-UP STATE Select ~[S.Moss Warrnnly A~ t (P..:tpoint outJlut ac tion is sclected fo r ~ ·DU ~ .L.lny·s liability Wldn tlLis Jimih:~<i Warmll!)' lOhall c:>. its employees. SETPOINT VALUE SETPOINT OUTPUT RESET WITH MANUAL RESET 15Pl URl 1~ ~ ~UUUU IUU 1 Count A: -9999999 to 99999999 Rate: 0 to 999999 15P~ r5l 1~ ~ <-I__--. 11 . The au \omntic re se t occurs at output slart or e nd. installed. TIl':: Cuslom ~r 3cknowl~dgC5 Ihe <Ii s.:lnimo:: rs (lnd limitations cOlll~in~d herein Md relies 011 no otlL~r wnrrD. LIMITED WARRANTY TIte Compa. To enter a negoth'!! sctpoint \'alue.ltters which Buyer.99 seconds ~ <-I_ --. defend.'\pressed Of" impl icli ill( created with r.:r A is It:'st:t.cd lultler proper conditions. sign. 92-573) and liability imposed upou auy perwn pI..·lode is only activc when I'rogrammed for lo lfrD (KeSel to Zero). the output ac tivates at zero. Manual reset .:tors are or ilia)" be 10 My <!.. orF will deactivate the output at power up. 93-6J7). This parameter is only aelive for the backlight version.::ts.<.:an occur by the RST button or the User Input. The 1Iu~ ' End is only active when s..-. or sub-contrn.:Is cOlilaining tOmpollo:nls m.p<:ct III The COIl1P. ~ <-I_ _n=ul no YES 'Ibis parruncter enabl. ad)' to !he repair or replacement olf a ddccli\"c prOo. The COIllp. it retums to z. property damage. SETPOINT OUTPUT TIME-OUT COUNTER A AUTO RESET ~ I---_U --' ' _W UI un I no to 99. 1 5Pl P-UP 1~ ~ I<-----=-UF. h>Uldled.:s the backlight CUBS to switch the backlight color when the Setpoinl Value is reached.J Off on snu[ CHANGE DISPLAY COLOR w/SETPOINT OUTPUT STATE SIIIJ£ will restore the output to the S:lmc slate it was at before the meter wa S powered down.nlics or affiml(llions.1 ~f 5 no FJ1lcr the iksired Selpoinl \'alue. promise or reprc. once lIle Selpoinl Value is reached.tucl. increment digit S to display a .5 MODULE 5 I Hfr .n l = u M -Sl. Whe n the Setpoint Assignment. and w. This paramcter is not aclive when thc Selpoint Action is selected for timed output mode.: is reached.SETPOINT OUTPUT ACTIONS SPT ACTION DESCRIPTION OUTPUT ACTIVATES OUTPUT DEACTIVATES COUNTER A RESET ACTION AI Manual Resel (if SPl r5l=~f5) After Selpoinl Output Time·Oul When Coun t < Selpoinl LRl[H HUl bOUnd Latched Output Mode Timed Output Mode Boundary Mode When Count = Selpoinl When Coun t = lo SPl When Count.:ro or the Setpoint Vn luc. No wruronties \:. lit The Comp:my's option. and e. Md ot h~ r m..tenJ.s(nt(llion with respec t 10 the proou. 6. deaths. lind ind<:mnify RlC againsl d:uII:lges. When the R~se t Ac tion is selected for ~o SP~ (Resctto Setpoint). jf programmcd for that function . Enter the value in seconds Ihal the SClpoint will be acti ve. provided the products h. so the Setpoint outpu t wi ll deactivate (resct) when n ma nu31 reset is "Jlplied to the meter. The CO:Illp. Refer 10 the CU B5COM bulle tin for compie:te de tails on CUBS serial communications. Selpolnl When Count 2: Selpoinl Boundruy r.ined herein.

. Press and hold SEl key to enter Programming Mode.. Front Ponel Displ ay Select ..... Z ~ ~ (i1 SEL r--.:a (i1 ~ SEL RSTI Rote Enoble Rote Decimal Point Rote Sca ling Display Value Rate Sca ling Input Value Rote Low Update lime Rote High Update Ti me ~ 'I FRll .Backlight Unit Only SEt En!.... ~1 f"_ •• __ I D:I U1 "a I SEr R511 U RSTI Count Mode Counter A Decimal Point Counter A Counter B Decimal Point Scole Foctor Counter B Scale Foelor Counter Reset at Power-up User Input Fundion User Input Assignment 0 .~~ H Rddr H Rbbr H§J Print Opt ions .0 ~ ~ En!.. Disp lay Scroll Enable Display Color m c: . n c: RSTI Exit Programming n . m SEL --1 bRUd H dR~R H PRr . n ::0-::: Front Pone! Counter Reset Enoble Display Intensity Level Programming Secu rity Code Load Factory Default Settings 0 iBaCkHght Unit Only l h·COLDr Setpoint Assignment Setpoint Output Action Setpoint Output Time-out Setpoint Value Set point Output Power -up St ate Counter A Reset Action Counter A Auto Reset Setpoint Output Reset with Manua l Reset Change Display Color with Setpoint Output State :e < m ~ .Shaded area selections are dependent on parameter mode selected.

.

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG OPERA TING INSTRUCTIONS all 04 A Ausgabe 10/2001 Edition 1012001 Sensor . In!. +435577/88 433 . b. Tel. Fax In !. & Co Pumpen-Volumeler.BOX 304. A-6893 LustenaulAustria.Baureihe BEG ( + BEV ) sensor . PosHach 304fP. H. +43 5577/86S4 4-0.series BEG ( + BEV) Krautler Gesellschafl m.O.

Dies konnte zu Fehlmessungen oder sogar zur Zerstorung des Sensorsystems fOhren . Fur Schaden. To prevent consequential damage it is advisable to install an appropriate alarm device. frequency converters etc. ubernehmen wir keine Ge. Die Unterweisung des Betriebspersonals obliegt dem Betreiber. B. BEG ( + BEV) is guaranteed. This could cause measuring errors or even destruction of the sensor system. Frequenzumrichtern usw.Die Betriebsanleitung wird dem Betreiber spatestens bei Lieferung des Sensors zur VerfOgung gestellt. tung eingehalten werden.undl oder Betriebsvorschriften. ausgehen. The user is responsible for observing the instructions. The sensor system (sensor. as they emerge e. E-Motoren.Troublefree operation of the KRAL sensor ren BEG ( + BEV ) ist dann gewahrleistet. This operating instruction does not take into consideration the general preventation of accidents and the local safety. Ein einwandfreier Betrieb der KRAL Senso.and/or operating directions.is installed properly in accordance with the tiert sind und aile Punkte der Betriebsanlei. Defects of the sensor can result in excessive leakage. This manual should be read in detail by the end user and the plant operator. elektromagnetischer Feldimpulse befinden. Das Sensorsystem (Sensor. wie sie z. wiihrleistung. Die Betriebsanleitung berOcksichtigt nicht die allgemeinen UnfaliverhOtungsvorschriften sowie ortsbezogene Sicherheits. if the sensor wenn die Sensoren vorschriftsmaBig mon. MeBumformer und Leitungen) darf sich nicht im Bereich starker. die durch Nichtbeachtung No guarantee can be granted if the inentstehen. Bei Schaden oder auftretenden Undichtheiten am Sensor kann Fordermedium austreten. electric motors.operating instructions. Um Foigeschaden zu vermeiden. measuring transducer and cable) must not to be located in the area of strong electromagnetic field pulses with high intensity.structions of the manual have not been observed.g. von Starkstromleitungen. FOr deren Einhaltung ist der Betreiber verantwortlich. ·2· . from high voltage transmissions. sind entsprechende Warngerate zu installieren. The user will receive the instruction manual by the time the sensor is delivered at the latest.

Inhallsverzeichnis table of contents Seilel page Anlieferung Allgemeine Informalionen Gewiihrleislung Belriebsanleilung Allgemeines Beschreibung Anschlul3 Demontage und Montage B etriebsstiiru ngen delivery general information warranty operating instruction general description 4 4 4 5 5 connection demounting and mounting failure data sheets BEG 43 BEG 44 BEG 45 + BEV 13 BEG 46 BEG 47 5 5 6 Dalenbliiller BEG 43 BEG 44 BEG 45 + BEV 13 BEG 46 BEG 47 7 8 9 10 11 .3- .

sind mit Alarmeinrichtungen und/oder Bypass auszustatten und deren FunktionstUchtigkeit in regelmai3igen Abstanden zu prufen. dai3 sich das Montage. Allgemeine Informationen Es ist unbedingt erforderlich. Any faults must be reported to the forwarding agent upon inspection as we will not accept any late claims for damage or shortages. All parts. Anlagen. kontaktieren Sie bitte KRAL. mussen rechtzeitig ersetzt werden. Abweichungen davon bedingen unsere Zustimmung. have to be replaced in time. general information Before starting up the system it is important that all the staff concemed with the unit make themselves familiar with the operation manual. If you are not able to find all required information in this manual. Abhangig von den Betriebsbedingungen sind die Lebensdauer und damit die spezifizierten Eigenschatten dieses Gerates durch Vibrationen. Any variations require our confirmaUon. Sollten Sie nicht aile benotigten Informationen in dieser Betriebsanweisung finden . Instandsetzungsarbeiten wahrend der Garantiezeit durfen nur mit unserer Zustimmung und Anweisung und nur vom Betreiber selbst oder durch einen von uns Beauftragten durchgefuhrt werden. Der Betreiber ist fUr die Einhaltung der Instruktionen und Sicherheitsvorkehrungen gemai3 dieser Betriebsanweisung verantwortlich . Temperatur oder alterungsbedingt begrenz!. which endanger troublefree operation. This system shouldbe checked at regular intervals. The user is responsible for regular checks and maintenance. Dieser Sensor darf nicht uber die auf dem Datenblatt angegebenen Daten eingesetzt werden. it should be equipped with an alarm system and/or bypass. warranty Warranty is granted according to our terms of delivery. please contact KRAL. Repairs during the guarantee period have to be carried out only in accordance with our agreement and instructions and only by the user or a person authorized by us. -4- .und Bedienungspersonal vor der Montage und Inbetriebnahme mit dieser Betriebsanweisung vertraut mach!. Aile Teile. If the unit operates unusually or damage is observed. delivery Upon receiving the goods they rnust be fully inspected for any shortages or transport damages. operation should not be allowed to continue. The user is responsible for the compliance with the instructions and precautions according to this manual. Gewahrleistung Der Gewahrleistungsumfang erfolgt gemai3 unseren Lieferbedingungen . Mangel oder Schaden sofort beim Transportunternehmen melden . If the breakdown or failing of a system could lead to personal injury. Jede Beobachtung einer abnormalen Betriebsweise oder einer wahrnehmbaren Beschadigung verbietet die weitere Benutzung. da sonst keine Anspruche geltend gemacht werden konnen. service life and attributes of the sensor are limited by vibrations.Anlieferung Den Eingang der Sendung auf Volistandigkeit und Schaden sowie Daten des Lieferscheins prufen. Depending on the operating conditions . temperature or age. This sensor must not be operated beyond the data given on the data sheet. Der Betreiber ist fur regelmai3ige Kontrolle und Wartung verantwortlich. die einen sicheren Betrieb gefahrden. bei denen der Ausfall oder das Versagen zu Personenschiiden fUhren kann.

is screwed into the dry sleeve (see included data sheet).-JlJ) ~)~ . ausgehen. ainen Impuls zurn Anzeigegerat. Due to corresponding conversion factors the display can be presented in any unit. Durch entsprechende Umrechnungsfakloren laB! sich die Anzeige in jader beliebigen Einheit darstellen..edby~on-obseNanceoftheoperatmg instructions. Fur Schaden. dismounting and mounting The sensors BEG 43 . Exchange of sensor insert E Is possible during operation. Der Sensoreinsalz E kann auch wah rend des Betriebs. Dies kennta lU Fehlmessungan oder sogar lur Zerstorung des Sensor systems fOhren .Aligemeines Ein st6rungsfreier Betrieb der Sensoren und MeBumformer iSI nur dann gewahrleistet. jf all operating instructions are oberserved. Achtung: In der Trockenhulse durien sich keine Fremdkorper befinden.47 bestehen aus einem Sensoreinsatz E. measuring transducer and cable) must not to be located in the area of strong electromagnetic field pulses with high intensity. ohne daB FIOs sigkeit austritt. the sensor is sending an impulse to the display unit. ~ No guarantee can be granted for defects ~us. ] JSj]p '. The free cable ends are connected to a display unit according to connection diagram and technical data stated on the included data slleet. when system is under pressure. description In front of the sensor I the pole wheel P is turning in an exactly defined distance a. die durch Nichtbeachlung dieser Anleitung entstehen. wie sie z. )). The spring must be able to press the sensor insert smooth onto the frontside of the dry sleeve. dar mittels Randelmutter R und Feder in die jeweilige TrockanhOlse G eingeschraubt wi rd. For every pole passing by. Die freien Kabelenden werden an ein Anzeigegerat angeschlossen.dl ~ Troub/etree operation of sensors and measuring transducers is guaranteed only. electric motors. general \. bel unter Druck stehender Anlage gewechselt werden. Cnution: The sensor system (sensor.~ ~\ ~ 'I ' . Die Feder muB den Sensoreinsatl satt an die Stirnseite der Trockenhulse drucken konnen. Der Sensor sendel bei jedem Pol. \Jl-Jl. B. kennan wir keine Gewahrleistung Obernehmen. Frequenlumrichtern usw. as they emerge e. including milled nut and spring. der sich an ihm vorbeibewegl. -5- . which is screwed into dry sleeve G using milled nut Rand spring. This could cause measuring errors or even destruction of the sensor system. von Starkstromleitungen. Achtung: Das Sensorsystem (Sensor. E-Motoren. Beschreibung Vor dam Sensor I dreht sich in einem genau definierten Abstand a das Polrad P. elektromagnetischer Feldimpulse befindan.g. wenn aile Punkte dieser Betriebsvorschrifl eingehalten werden. MeBumformer und Leitungen) darf sich nicht im Bereich starker. AnschluB Der Sensoreinsalz wird mit Randelmutter und Feder in die TrockenhOl se geschraubt (siehe beiliegendes Datenblatt). Demontage und Montage Die Sensoren BEG 43 . Caution: The dry sleeve must be free of foreign substances. from high voltage transmissions.47 consist of a sensor insert E. frequency converters etc. connection The sensor inserl. witlJout emergence of Ifquid. Dabei mussen AnschluBschaltbJld und technische Daten laut dem beigelegten Datenblatt berOcksichtigt werden.

46 sensor insert E as a whole unit.kei" sauberes Signal • defekter Sensoreinsatz • schlechte Kontakle • St6reinflCJsse von auBen • Polradabstand a nicht korrekt .inform KRAL -6- . BEG 45 Caution: Change of position of dry sleeve G is indicated by red sealing point. in seiner Funktion beeintrachligl wird. guarantee for the KRAL Volumeter is expired. Wen" der Versiegelungspunkt beschadigt ist.Die TrockenhCilse G wurde bei KRAL eingebaul. Position of dry sleeve G must not be changed. BEG 44 Achtung: Ein Verstellen der Trokkenhulse G wird durch den roten Versiegelungspunkt angezeigt.KRAL benachrichtigen • no clear signal • defective sensor insert • defective contacts • external interferences • distance a to pole wheel not correct • replace sensor insert • check contacts • install cables (and measuring transducer) properly (see page 5: connection) • check signal with oscilloscope . da ansonsten das Sensorsignal verlcren geht oder der KRAL Volumeter beschadigt bzw. adjusted and tested the dry sleeve G will) the BEG 43.defective connection • vo/umeter is not working • wrong power supply . otherwise the sensor signal can be lost or the KRAL Volumeter can be damaged resp. eingestell! und mit dem Sensoreinsatz E als Einheit geprOft.defective sensor insert . Versiegelungspunkl sealing point Belriebsslorungen failure Storung failure • kein Signal Ursache reason • defekter Sensoreinsalz Beseitigung remedy • Sensoreinsalz herausschrauben und CJberprCJfen: funklionierender Sensoreinsatz muB bei der Annaherung an ein ferromagnelisches Teillmpuls senden (siehe Leuchtdiode) • Leuchtdiode OberprOfen (falls vorhanden) • Verbindungen CJberprCJfen • Volumeter in Gang bringen • Elektronikgerat angleichen • fehlerhafte Verbindung • Volumeter lauf! nicht ·falsche Spannungsversorgung -no signal . erlischt die Garantie fUr den KRAL Volume!er. If the sealing point is damaged.screw out sensor insert and check it: by approximation to a ferromagnetic material sensor insert has to send a pulse (see luminous diode) • check luminous diode (if eXistent) • check connections • set valumeter in motion • adjust electronics • Sensoreinsalz ersetzen • Verbindungen CJberprCJfen • Kabel (MeBumformer) entsprechend verlegen (siehe SeiIe 5: AnschluB) • Signal mit Oszilloskop CJberprCJfen . its function affected. Versiegelungspunkt seating point KRAL has mounted. Die TrockenhOlse G dart nicht ver· stellt werden.

81goal Goo PNP 3 CE 4 .... +90' C Arcap I Keramik Winkelstecker mit LED (3-polig) PUR (3xO.Datenblatt I data sheet BEG 43 '" '" N (j: Anschlul3schaltbild (siehe unten) wiring Information (see below) --->-' Steckerbelegung (sie he unten) plug assignment (see be/ow) elektrische Spezifikation electrical specification Sensorspezifikation Arbeitsprinzip Arbeitsschaltabsland Ausgang Schaltung max..25 mm') 3m IP65 operating range max.3 V yes mechanische Spezifikation Einsatzbereich max. 30 V DC Stromaulnahme (ohne Last) s 10 mA s3V Spannungsablall KurzschluB.plug casing material (dry sleeve) connection wire covering wire length type of protection Kabelmantel Kabellange Schutzart AnschluBschaltbiid I wiring information ~ 1 ~ +Us'O-30VOC KRAL " J"1..... Laslstrom induktiv 0. load current frequency range voltage range current consumption (without load) voltage drop 517011 circuit.Stecker Gehausewerkstoff (Trockenhulse) AnschluBart 250 bar -20 .and reverse battery protection mechanical specification square wave Frequenzberelch 0 .frontside .. blaulblve ·7- .. +90·C Arcap / ceramics right angle plug with LED (3-channel) PUR (3xO.Slirnflache .25 mrrf) 3m IP65 working temperature .. +100'C -25 . 1000 Hz 10.... pressure onto fronts/de 250 bar -20... +100'C -25 . 30 V DC 5 10 rnA .. Druck aul Stirnflache Betriebstemperatur ... 1000 Hz Spannungsbereich 10 ...• schwarz I black 1 .. braun/brol-ltl 3 ..5mm PNP circuit max.5mm PNP Rechlecksignal 200 rnA sensor specification working principle working switching distance output inductive 0.und Verpolungsschutz ja 200 mA 0 ..

.24 mm ) 3m IP 67 mechanical specification operating range max.. 30 VDC < 18 rnA <4.. schwarz/bfac/o.5 V up to 50'C yes mechanische Spezilikation Einsatzbereich max.. 3 .5mm PNP square wave lOrnA 0 .n... pressure onto fronts. load current frequency range voltage range current consumption (without load) voltage drop short circuit protection reverse battery protection 10..Datenblatt I data sheet BEG 44 AnschluBschaltbiid (siehe unten) wiring information (see below) elektrische Spezifikation Sensorspezifikation Arbeitsprinzip Arbeitsschaltabstand Ausgang Schaltung max... 5000 Hz circuit max...8- . 30 V DC < 18 mA <4. Lastslrom Frequenzbereich Spannungsbereich Stromaufnahme (ohne Last) Spannungsabfall KurzschluBschutz Verpolschutz Halldifferenz < 0. rotl red ..5 mm PNP Rechtecksignal 10 mA O. SOOO Hz 10 . . Goo Signal PNP 5 CE 1 .PTFE 2 (4xO. +150'C Arcap Teflon ..PTFE (4xO..24 mrrf) 3m IP67 AnschluBschaltbiid I wiring information ti 3 ~ +us 10 .... geb {yei/olY 5 . .30VDC KRAL 1 ---..S V bis SO'C ja electrical specification sensor specification working principle working switching distance output Hall difference <O. +1S0'C Arcap Teflon . Druck auf Stirnflache Belriebstemperatur StirnWiche Gehausewerkstoff (TrockenhOlse) Kabelmantel Kabellange Schutzart 420 bar -40 .de working temperature frontside casing material (dry sleeve) wire covering wire length type of protection 420 bar -40 .

...nI/ ~ttillIIlID ' #=t.Stirnflache . Frequ enz Spannungsbereich Stromaufnahme (ohne Last) Spannungsabfall KurzschluB. 30 VDC 540mA 53V yes mechanische Spezifikation Einsalzbereich max..7S mm PNP Rechtecksig SOmA 2000 Hz 10 . pressure onto frontslde working temperature . +2S0°C O.MeBumformer Gehausewerkstoff (Trockenhulse) AnschluBart Kabel man tel (Sensoreinsatz) Kabellange (Sensoreinsatz) Schulzart AnschluBschaltbiid I wiring information BEG 45 Sensor BEV13 420 bar -40 ..frontside ..24 mni) 1m IP6S sensor MeOumformer measuring transducer Sensor· Eiogang sensor ".und Verpolungsschutz s40mA s3 V ja sensor specification working principle working switching distance output circuit max.and reverse battery protection mechanical specification magnetic O./// AnschluBschallbild (siehe unlen) .--'--~ / j /j <. Druck auf Stirnflache Betriebstemperalur . frequency voltage range current consumption (without load) contact drop short clrcuit. load current max.::""'f'U::' _ KRAL Gren zwerte Q lim bei Unlerschreilung von limit values O fm for values below Orri n OMGlH 13 alim flim Qmin rnI8 [g p.2 OMGlH 32 0.Datenblatt I data sheet BEG 45 + BEV 13 iU ~~.~ ---.1 2 ..53 9 OMG 140 5. +SO°C Arcap plug coupling (S-cI18nnel) Teflon . Laststrom magnetisch O. wifing information (see be/ow) 'Kabeldosenbelegung (siehe unlen) flit plug assignment (see below) elektrische Spezifikation electrical specification Sensorspezifikatlon Arbeitsprinzip Arbeilsschaliabsland Ausgang Schaliung max.~::'DC _ _---'d:: ::.9- .PTFE (3xO. +SO°C Arcap Steckkupplung (S-polig) Teflon .7Smm PNP square waVE SOmA 2000Hz 10. oufpul isp:o:' 3 Kabeldosert>e legur19 (L6IseitQ) {fit Anzoigen .... I/min Hz 5.?lfIJ.5 2 OMGlH 52 2 10 Vmin Hz 0. 30 V DC max.ay . +2S0°C O.Ausgang OMGlH20 0..measuring transducer casing material (dry sleeve) connection wire covering (sensor insert) wire length (sensor insert) type of protection 420 bar -40...05 6 8 OMGlH 68 OMGlH 100 a.24 mm 2 ) 1m IP6S operating range max.PTFE (3xO. '" l' <D <D // // .4 15 2.im fU m 4~ 2 plug assigntm'lll (solder side) 5 \::J 1 Ct: .

...plug casing material (dry sleeve) connection wire covering wire length type of protection KurzschluB.und Verpolungsschutzja PNP square wave 200 rnA 0 .Omm Schaltung max.. +100'C -25 .Stecker .. 1000 Hz 10 ..Datenblatt I data sheet BEG 46 . '" yl (~ Anschluf3schaltbild (siehe unten) wiring information (see below) elektrische Spezifikation Sensorspezifikation Arbeitsprinzip induktiv Arbeitsschaltabstand Ausgang 1. Slgrla! Goo CE ..4401 / Kerarnik Winkelstecker mit AnschluBart LED (3-polig) Kabelmantel PUR (3xO.4401 I Keramik right angle plug with LED (3-channe/) PUR (3xO. pressure onto frontside working temperature . +90'C Gehausewerkstoff (TrockenhOlse) 1. 30 V DC :5 10 rnA s 3V yes mechanische Spezifikation Einsatzbereich max.10- . Druck auf Stirnflache Betriebstemperatur 40 bar 40 bar -20 .Stirnflache AnschluBschaltbiid I wiring information E$: ~ PNP 3 : +UB 10. 1000 Hz 10..• braun I br0111l '" schwarz I black ' " blau I blue . .... +90'C 1. \ OJ <0 \\ \ Sleckerbelegung (siehe unten) plug assignment (see below) 0> .. +100'C -25.25mm 2) 3m IP65 -20 .25 mm') 3m Kabelliinge Schutzart IP 65 . load current frequency range voltage range current consumption (without load) contact drop shan circuit.and reverse battery protection mechanical specification operating range max.... frontside .. 30 V DC s 10 rnA s3V electrical specification sensor specification working principle working switching distance output inductive 1...0 mm PNP Rechtecksignal 200 mA 0. Laststrom Frequenzbereich Spannllngsbereich Stromaufnahme (ohne Last) Spannungsabfall circuit max.30V DC KRAL --fl..

.4401 Ausgang Schaltung electrical specification Sensor specilicaUon induktiv 0. 2000 Hz 5 ..Polrad 2.4401 I Keramik PVC (2xO.pole wheel 1.'. lkO ..15 mm output circuit internal resistance frequency range voltage range class of protection Namur DIN 19234 sine wave Ridk() (8 V DC) 0 . Druck aul Stirnfliiche Betriebstemperatur Slirnflache Gehausewerkstoff (Trockenhiilse) Kabelmantel Kabellange Schutzart 40 bar -25 .... blau l bluB • 11 - .4068 . braun I blo".2000 Hz 5 .4401 inductive O.pole wheel 2..34 mrrf) 2m IP68 AnschluBschaltbild I wiring information ..Datenblatt I data sheet BEG 47 c::Jmtg==~~ () / Anschlul1schaltbild (slehe unten) wiring information (se6 be/ow) eleklrlsche Spezifikalion Sensorspezifikalion Arbeitsprinzip Arbeilsschaltabstand ... +100' C 1.15 mm Namur DIN 19234 Sinussignal R i~ 1kO (8 V DC) 0 .+100'C 1.4401 1 ceramics P VC (2xO..' EJ: 1 ~ .2V DC KRAL Ri .. 25VDC EEx la flC T6 EEx ib flC T6 Innenwiderstand Frequenzbereich Spannungsbereich Schutzklasse mechanische Spezifikation mechanical specification Einsatzbereich max.Polrad 1.34 mm2) 2m IP 68 operating range max.! (schwarZ I bfack) 3 . 25 V DC EEx ia IIC T6 EEx ib IIC T6 working principle working switching distance . . pressure onto frontside working temperature frontside casing material (dry sleeve) wire covering wire length type of protection 40 bar ·25. .. CE 1 .4068 ..5mm 0.5mm 0..

.

... r"ls..~~~ d Fiillstandgrenzschalter ij w~ ~~ 3)-' ~iiI -~ [ I ::I ] e Level Limit Switch f Detecteur de niveau es Detector de nivel i Interruttore di livello nl Niveauschakelaar ) \ \( \( Endress + Hauser The Power of Know How . CJrn ·1..I- .99 (a) 016757-0000 liquiphant T FTL 260 l : I ~ I ~~* I ~ 'l'! ? .KA 035F/00/a6/11...1 -<:I' rne _ .

fOhrt zu fehlerhaftem Betrieb oder Zerstbrung. dX Caution! = forbidden . pieces de rechange Documentation complementaire 7 9 11 13 18 19 20 21 23 24 Notes on Safety Device Identification Handling Mounting examples Installation Connection Function Test Maintenance Technical data Accessories .d Inhalt Sicherheitshinweise Gerate-Identifikation Behandlung Einbaubeispiele Einbau AnschluB Funktion Test Wartung Technische Daten Zubehbr.peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements ou la destruction. Endress auser . leads to incorrect operation or destruction. spare parts Supplementary documentation 4 6 4 6 7 7 9 11 13 18 19 20 21 23 24 9 11 13 18 19 20 21 23 24 Sicherheitshinweise Notes on Safety Conseils de securite dX 2 Achtung! = verboten. Ersatzteile Erganzende Dokumenation e Contents 4 6 f Sommaire Conseils de securite Denomination Manipulation Exemples d'implantation Montage Raccordement Fonction Test Maintenance Caracteristiques techniques Accessoires . dX Attention! = interdit .

repuestos Documentaci6n suplementaria i Indice Note sulla sicurezza Identificazione della strumento Accorgimenti Esempi di montaggio Montaggio Collegamenti Funzionamento Test Manutenzione Dati tecnici Accessori . jAtencion! d X = Vietato. leidt tot foutieve werking of storing. pericolo di malfunzionamento o di distruzione. ricambi Documentazione supplementare nl Inhoud 5 6 7 Veiligheidsinstructies Instrument-identificatie Behandeling Inbouwvoorbeelden Inbouw Aansluitingen Functie Test Onderhoud Technische gegevens Toebehoren. 3 Opgelet! Endress+Hauser . Attenzione! d X = verboden.es mdice Nota sobre seguridad Identificaci6n del equipo Modo de empleo Ejemplos de montaje Montaje Conexiones Funcionamiento Comprobaci6n Mantenimiento Datos tecnicos Accesorios. reserve-onderdelen Aanvullende documentatie 5 6 7 5 6 7 9 11 9 11 9 11 13 18 19 20 21 23 24 13 18 19 20 21 23 24 13 18 19 20 21 23 24 Notas sobre seguridad Note sulla sicurezza Veiligheidsinstructies d X= Prohibido. peligro de mal funcionamiento o de destrucci6n.

under strict observance of these operating instructions. in Betrieb genommen und gewartet werden. Das Gerat darf nur von qualifizierlem und autorisiertem Fachpersonal unter besonderer Beachtung dieser Betriebsanleitung . mis en service et maintenu que par un personnel qualifie et autorise. commissioned. II peut etre source de danger en cas d'utilisation non conforme aux prescriptions. The level limit switch Liquiphant FTL 260 may be installed . Mark the power switch as a disconnector for the device. Marquer ce commutateur comme prise de coupure de I'appareil Endress auser 4 . L'appareil ne doit etre installe. f Conseils de securite Le Liquiphant FTL 260 doit etre exclusivement utilise comme detecteur de niveau pour liquides en zones non explosibles. Installer un commutateur reseau a proximite immediate de I'appareil. raccorde. the certificate . en veillant a ce qu'il so it facilement accessible. qui tiendra compte des indications contenues dans la presente mise en service. If used incorrectly it is possible that applicationrelated dangers may arise. der einschlagigen Normen. where appropriate. In der Gebaudeinstallation ist ein Netzschalter fOr das Gerat leicht erreichbar in dessen Nahe zu installieren. e Notes on Safety The Liquiphant FTL 260 is a level limit switch designed for use in non-hazardous areas. any relevant standards.d Sicherheitshinweise Der Liquiphant FTL 260 darf nur als FOllstandgrenzschalter fOr FIOssigkeiten in nicht explosionsgefahrdeten Bereichen verwendet werden. legal requirements . des normes en vigueur et des certificats disponibles (selon I'application). operated and maintained by qualified and authorised personnel only . Der Schalter ist als Trennvorrichtung fOr das Gerat zu kennzeichnen. and. Bei unsachgemaBem Einsatz kbnnen Gefahren von ihm ausgehen. Install an easily accessible power switch in the proximity of the device. angeschlossen. connected. der gesetzlichen Vorschriften und der Zertifikate (je nach Anwendung) eingebaut.

Installeer een makkelijk bereikbare voedingschakelaar in de nabijheid van het instrument. dei certificati appropriati. Installare un interuttore per I'alimentazione in prossimita del dispositivo. Het instrument aileen door gekwalificeerd en geautoriseerd personeel laten inbouwen . instalado y mantenido (mica y exclusivamente por personal cualificado y autorizado. solo in aree sicure. Instalar un interruptor de facil acceso en las proximidades del equipo. disposizioni legali vigenti e. messo in funzione ed operato sola mente da personale qualificato ed autorizzato. aansluiten. EI equipo debera ser montado. sOtto la stretta osservazione delle presenti norme di installazione e di manutenzione e delle ulteriori norme. regolamenti. Neem de instructies in deze Inbedrijfstellingsvoorschriften. bajo rigurosa observaci6n de las presentes instrucciones de servicio. asf como de los certificados (dependiendo de la aplicaci6n). dove richiesto . conectado. connesso. Identificar el interruptor como desconectador del equipo. Endress+Hauser 5 . i Note sulla sicurezza II Liquiphant FTL 260 pub essere utilizzato come sicurezza di troppo pieno. de wettelijke voorschriften en eventuele certificaten in acht. in bedrijf nemen en onderhouden. Lo strumento deve essere montato. de desbetreffende normen.Notas sabre seguridad EI Liquiphant FTL 260 debe emplearse unica y exclusivamente como detector de nivel con fluidos en zonas sin peligro de explosi6n.es . Marcare I'interuttore come disconnessione del dispositivo. Su empleo inapropiado puede resultar peligroso. de las normativas y legislaciones vigentes. Un'installazione non corretta pub determinare una situazione di peri colo determinata dall'applicazione. nl Veiligheidsinstructies Gebruik de Liquiphant FTL 260 aileen als niveauschakelaar voor vloeistoffen in niet explosiegevaarlijke gebieden. Kenmerk de voedingschakelaar specifiek voor het instrument.

(AC) 19 .. 55 V - o ~9"G End ress 3. 253 V.11-26 (ZE 186F/00/de) SA General purpose --------------------1 A.6l- Denomination es Identificacion del equipo i Identificazione della strumento nl Instrument-identificatie g ~""f<'WER CE T FTL260-#### Bt Oberfullsicherung nach WHG Z-65. DIN 2999 / 1 I-- I t ~ + .1 1.6lJQUPHANT J ] .d Gerate-Identifikation e Device Identification f I I ( _ I ....20.. 50 .user * 1 = ohne / without / sans / sin / senza / zonder 6 2 . ANSI B1.60 Hz ~ (~C) 10. DIN ISO 228 / I NPT.. .

d Behandlung Am Gehause anfassen.. no por las horquillas i Accorgimenti B ~'.: '--o·. ·• Afferrare la custodia.. et non par la fourche es Modo de empleo Coger por el cabezal.. not by the sensor forks f Manipulation Tenir par Ie boTtier.. non i rebbi nl Behandeling De behuizing vastpakken. niet de trilvork Endress+Hauser 7 . nicht an der Schwinggabel e Handling Hold by the housing.: ~."" (E :~ <b& M ~1 rr. \ i .-eL.

:I:I: ?C[:I: ·..1 9 .user .. ~! " nl Niet verbuigen 8 End ress 9..e : . t i I I es No torcer i Non stringere 0 allargare Non accorciare 0 allungare Non piegare Niet inkorten Niet verlengen ..-.e..._~o"" ~ f " '..-."1 ..d Nicht verbiegen Nicht kurzen Nicht verlangern e Do not bend Do not shorten Do not lengthen Ne pas tordre Ne pas raccourcir Ne pas rallonger No acortar No alargar 0/..I .. .o ..'&1 Uw~:.

:ro'-:'-'-"O'-'...~'L E--.S: l!)<") ° ~ 0°/ n ~ 1 0 0 InI I I . l!) '"" '<t-.I 1 ~r ' II JJ t---.S: '.r ==lJ r 0 o oo oooOL 0 0 kin d e f es i nl Schaltpunkt Switchpoint Point de commutation Punto de conmutaci6n Punto di commutazione Schakelpunt o ~ 0 0 u 0 ..!..'I-.'·:..l(.£Iiil 0 0 Co t ~ (): I ~ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o 0 o o 00 0 0 0 II o 0 0 0 'J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ° <J o ° o 0 '" II u 0 Q ~ I I ~lInllf :: §j .0 !i!~.. E . E .!..... <J E--..L. 0 o 00 00 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1.:A'...'+'-'-"O". I E~ Ec:i :s d Einbaubeispiele e Mounting examples f Exemples d'implantation es Ejemplos de montaje 1 Esempi di montaggio nl Inbouwvoorbeelden 1'-'-"0" ."""C.!. I d e f es i nl Schalthysterese Switching hysteresis Hysteresis Histeresis de conmutaci6n Isteresi Schakelhysterese Endress+Hauser 9 .

d Viskositat und Ansatzbildung berucksichtigen e Take account of viscosity and build-up f ® ®®© v = 0 .5 in) o oC\! nl Houdt rekening met de z . 2000 mm 2/s (cSt) i Attenzione alia viscosita e ai depositi viscositeit en de vorming van aangroei ® (max. ...- LD"2 E~ C . 2.E: © ® 1C Endress auser .. 10000 mm 2/s Ten ir compte de la viscosite et du colmatage viscosidad y la formaci6n de adherencias es Tener en cuenta la @® = v (cSt) 0 ..s .

. R1 (G1A) ~ ~II:C '1I TIi1~ ~ G1A ~ ­ Liquiphant einschrauben e Installation Screw Liquiphant into process connection f Montage Visser Ie Liquiphant es Montaje Atorni llar el Liquiphant CD 33 x39 i Montaggio Avvitare il Liquiphant nl Inbouw Liquiphant vastschroeven ......:: 0..11% NPT.. E+H 11 . ral~! ~ CD Endress+Hauser ~ J ..d Einbau ~mll" !l!J "I 1 . ~ .

d

Schwinggabel ausrichten Markierung .. beachten

e Align sensor forks Note mark ..

f

Orienter la fourche Tenir compte du repere .. Atencion a la marca ..

es Orientacion de las horquillas
i
Orientare la forcella. Osservare il contrassegno ..

=

b"

)~~

~

~

nl Trilvork uitrichten
Let op de markering ..

v

=0...

10000 mm2/s

l

v > 2000 mm2/s

1~

Endress

auser

d AnschluB
Stecker oder Kabel

e Connection
Plug or cable

f Raccordement
Connecteur ou cable
d e f es i nl Nummer Number Numero Numero Numero Nummer

= = = =

Farbe Colour Couleur Color Colore Kleur

es Conexiones
Conector
1

0

cable

Collegamenti
Connettore 0 cavo

nl Aansluiting
Connector of kabel

1

BU
BK

blau, blue, bleu, azul, blu, blauw

2

schwarz, black, noir, negro, nero, zwart

3

=
(PE)

BN
GNYE

braun, brown, brun, marron, marrone, bruin

o

grGn/gelb, green/yellow, vert/jaune, verde/amarillo, verde/giallo, groen/geel

Endress+Hauser

13

d

Spannung beachten Leitung in Kabeldose einfOhren Note voltage rating Insert cable into plug housing Tenir compte de la tension Inserer Ie cable dans Ie boTtier de raccordement

,....
~

e f

_

___

r

~

.

II "'[~ ~ * :1I dll . ill.~ 0 '" j "'" ••' ~ I""'N .11 " \d ~1f.~~11 11-I nH ;;t.;- il ~
v

11 11111111 1

.....

<1

L

"'",

I

ill
u- ... V
(AC)

1 1111'1 J 111

'-

u= ... V (~C)

es Observar el voltaje Introducir los hilos en la caja de conexi ones

D~'G3'-: .... ®
II UI I 1 111

i

Attenzione all'alimentazione. Inserire il cavo nel vano connessioni Bedrading in connector invoeren

~
max. 1,5 mm 2 (AWG 16)

nl Let op de voedingsspanning

"

~
[0

®

.

"

I

I@
/'
--,

III

max. 9 mm (0.35 in)

'" min . 6 mm (0.24 in)
~"

--=='[0 I

.

1L

Endress

auser

o
1A

Max. @

Min.
@

[J
R , '

d Wechselstromvariante
anschlieBen
Max. = MaximumMin. = MinimumSicherheitsschaltung Connection AC version

e

(
PE
(Ground)

,

~1

A

X
, ,

(
PE
(Ground)

X
N max. 250 V 50/60 Hz N

L1

N max. 250 V 50/60 Hz

N

L1

Max. = max. fail-safe mode Min. = min. fail-safe mode f Raccordement variante tension alternative Max. = securite maximum Min. = securite minimum es Conectar las variantes de corriente alterna Max. = Conexi6n de seguridad maxima Min. = Conexi6n de seguridad minima i Collegamento della versione in corrente alternata Max. = Sicurezza di massimo Min. = Sicurezza di minima Wisselstroomvarianten aansluiten Max. = max. veiligheidsschakeling Min. = min. veiligheidsschakeling (ruststroomprincipe)

~
~I
I max. 1,5 A

R = externe Last external load charge externe

carga exterior carico esterno externe belasting

nl
min. 2,5 VA / 250 V
(10 mAl

t n
40 ms

~~~-~-.-t

I max. 350 mA ~f----

+ .t permanent

max. 375 VA / 250 V max. 36 VA / 24 V Endress+Hauser

max. 87 VA / 250 V max. 8,4 VA / 24 V

min. 0,5 VA / 24 V (20 mAl
15

d Gleichstromvariante
anschlieBen
Max. = MaximumMin. = MinimumSicherheitsschaltung Connection DC version Max. = max. fail-safe mode Min. = min. fail-safe mode Raccordement variante tension continue Max. = securite maximum Min . = securite minimum Conectar las variantes de corriente continua Max. = Conexi6n de seguridad maxima Min. = Conexi6n de seguridad minima Collegamento della versione in corrente continua Max. = Sicurezza di massimo Min. = Sicurezza di min imo Gelijkstroomvarianten aansluiten Max. = max. veilighe idsschakeling Min . = min. veiligheidsschakeling (ruststroomprincipe)

o

Max. @

Min. @

o

e
f

o
3
_ _ _ _ . _ _ ---1

es


F
0,5A

+

R
__ ---1

F
0,5A

i


PE L(Ground) 1


PE L(Ground)
carga exterior carico esterno externe belasting

nl

°...

L+

L+
10 ... 55 V
I max. 350 mA U max. 55 V

55 V

~

R = externe Last external load charge externe

1(

Endress

auser

d

@

rn
~'
t
I

l~i=iI~

@

@

Kabeldose zusammenbauen und festschrauben

~~
t t
[1"';"-·1-1

e Assemble plug and screw tight
f

Assembler et visser Ie boTtier de raccordement cajas de conexiones

----.'~

@)

@)
.A

@).

es Ensamblar y atorniliar las
i
Montare il vano connessioni avvitandolo a fonda vastschroeven

I

I

nl Connector samenbouwen en

III

- O --@,.. I " ,.. I "

" I ,..

" I /

~Jj --~
Endress+ Hauser

. @)

-?

.I~ D--I~

17

d

Funktion
Max. und Min. = Sicherheitsschaltung
Max. Min.

~
StOrung Fault Defaut Fallo Guasto Storing

)(
L1 L+

e Function
Max. and Min. fail-safe mode

=

t
U- (AC)
I....

~

......
--0

,

f

Fonction
Max. et Min. = commutation de securite
1-+

"I....

Kov
N

L-

es Funcionamiento
Conexi6n de seguridad maxima y minima

A

F9
< 12 V

r~1
1
I L1
1-+
3

1-+

1-+

1

3

50 ... 60 Hz

V

i

Funzionamento
Sicurezza di massimo e di minimo
U"" (DC)

I L1

~
N

~
N

1

F9
< 12V

r~1 r~ 1
1
I L1
1-+
2

[
1
I

2

I L1
I....

~
N
<3V

1
I L1
1-+

(3/2)

(3/2)

1
N

~
N

~
N

I....
< 3V

X

~

nl Functie
Max. en Min. = veiligheidsschakeling (ruststroomprincipe)

Fl ~
3

+

rOO~1
3 2

2

Fl
2

+

r~1
2 3

r;~l
(3/2)

[

3

I L+

~ -

I L+
,1/ /1' ,

~ 1 / / 1'

(2/3) (3/2)

(2/3)

1
-

I L+
,1/ /)'

~
-

I L+
,1/ /)'

~
,1/

I L+
,1/

~ )2:( ~ I , 1 / /1'

~

~
@)

-0- •
/)'

,J/

-o--@ -

-0-.

- o- -@- -o--@/1' /1'

~

)~

o

= grun / green / vert / verde / verde / groen

••
auser

U
if

® = rot / red / rouge / rojo / rosso / rood

Endress

d

Test
mit Prufmagnet

- -

- - .

~r-( €
l! J,. ,.o --e.,..,·

e Test
with test magnet f

i .o~ l "

• ....c ·-a....r-

' I'I;;;'~'

Test
avec aimant de controle

es Comprobacion

-0 / 1 '

,

1 /

Prueba magnetica

-0/ 1 '

,

1 /

-@/ '1' ,

,

1 /

i

Test
Test magnetico

(€

nl Test
met testmagneet
'" ,t' <, , i'
"

~ :"-- Il tjr:
It t-O"--Ww .
. ~ . -~

IS"':, C(

1 .;~rJ,

,1 ;:,r:I; ;1
II

J-~@

-0/ 1'

,

1 /

,

1 /

- @/ 1'

-0/1'

,

1 /


19

End res s+Hauser

d

Wartung Dicke Krusten entfernen
I~

e Maintenance
Removal of thick encrustation

f

Maintenance Enlever les depots importants

es Mantenimiento Eliminaci6n de adherencias

10' ·

i

Manutenzione Rimozione di scarsi depositi

nl Onderhoud Aangroei verwijderen

d Nicht besteigen! e Don't use as a step! f Ne pas marcher sur les lames vibrantes! es No usar como peldano! i Non calpestare! nl Niet op staan!

2(

Endres~

'auser

r~ , 1
, ,

,

/'

I

iY
0
'<;j-

V
I
..1

-40
I

PUR PA PPSU
Pg 11

d

Technische Daten
Abmessungen in mm und Werkstoffe

e Technical data
PA EPDM PPSU
1.4404 (-A lSI 316 L)

I , I , I , I

Dimensions in mm and materials

..1

0 N

"""

f

040 ,
I ,

""

Caracteristiques techniques
Dimensions en mm et materiaux

I

I

I I

I

]
..O'l

,
SW 41 ---.I (41 AF)

;
I
I ,

I

es Datos tecnicos
1.4571 (-AISI316 Ti)

Dimensiones en mm Y materiales

,

i

Dati tecnici
Dimensioni in mm e materiali

I~ ~

\ ;1 -+,
..0::> N
I , I , I ,

nl Technische gegevens
1.4581 (-A lSI 316 Ti)

/ ! I
~ ~ IJ

~

Afmetingen in mm en materialen

9
-

28

-

100 mm

=394 in

20

Endress+ Hauser

21

d

Umgebungstemperatur Tu Betriebstemperatur TB Betriebsdruck Pe

Tu

°C

e Ambient temperature Tu Operating temperature TB Operating pressure Pe

i
fS

TU

70t
oI o
I

,..
,
I
- ------- ---- -~---- ---- -

---50

I

f

Temperature ambiante Tu Temperature de service TB Pression de service Pe Temperatura de trabajo TB Presion de trabajo Pe

I
I I

I

: I

50

100

150°C

I ..

Ts

es Temperatura ambiente Tu
pe

i

Temperatura ambiente Tu Temperatura d'esercizio TB Pressione d'esercizio Pe Procestemperatuur TB Procesdruk Pe

nl Omgevingstemperatuur Tu

fS
Dichte p Density p Densidad p Densita p Dichtheid p

c::
-40
-1

bar

I " r---- -----------+------, ,
I I

I I I

Ts

/0

50 Viskositat v / Viscosity v Viscosite v Viscosidad v Viscosita v Viskositeit v

100

150

°C

De,,;"p

~ lr,1
l'

x °C = (1 .8x + 32) of 1 bar = 14.5 psi

~7

k

Vi
!

v max. 10000 mm 2/s (v max. 10000 cSt)

2:

Endres::

lauser

d Zubehor, Ersatzteile
..-..

o -~ - --

([
.(I
E+H 942667-0000

d e f es i nl d e f es i nl d e f es i nl

SteckschlOssel SW 41. Socket spanner 41 AF CIE§de41 Llave de fijacion SW 41 Chiave a tubo SW 41 Pijpsleutel SW 41. PrOfmagnet Test magnet Aimant de controle Iman Magnete di controllo Testmagneet Dichtung fOr G 1 A Seal for G 1 A Joint pour G 1 A Junta para 1" G (G 1 A) Guarnizione per G 1 A Afdichting voor G 1 A

e Accessories, spare parts

f

Accessoires Pieces de rechange

es Accesorios y repuestos i Accessori e ricambi

,' ,'"
\ j I

---...

...

nl Toebehoren Reserve-onderdelen

',\
'
"

\'~" " ,," - ... "'\ " ~ 111/ \:
; ,,- ...
' I

1 I 1/

/ \', ___
ri~

~,

"I,' ;~\'

' \ ' ... , _ _ _ , , " , ' /1

\" .......... ___ . ,,/'/

E+H 016920-0000

39

E+H 003579-0000

Endress+H auser

23

5668222. Fax 5666848 THA Tel. (0204) 83160. (08) 55511600. (032) 859850. Fax(0 11 ) 2628062 INTERNATIONAL Tel. Fax (70) 132133 ES Tel. Fax (93) 4733839 FI Tel. GWjI"/5 . Fax (905) 6819444 CH Tel . (905) 6819292. 016757-0000. Fax (03) 7338800 NO Tel. (01 1) 2628000.endress.01/PT II III 1111 II 016757- 111I K. Fax (032) 859851 NL Tel. Fax (0161 ) 9981841 HK Tel. (93) 4803366.99 (a). + Fax: see DE http://www. (02) 921 92-1. (03) 73348 48. Fax 28654171 IT Tel. Fax (07621) 975555 DK Tel. (061) 7157575. Fax (0422) 550275 MAL Tel. Fax (01) 88056-35 BE Tel. Fax (02) 2480553 CAN Tel. (389) 696768. Fax (02) 921 92-362 JP Tel.d Erganzende Dokumentation d TI 244F/OO/de Technische Information fOr den FOllstandgrenzschalter Liquiphant T FTL 260 level limit switch Liquiphant T FTL 260 e Supplementary Documentation f e TI 244F/00/en Technical Information for f TI 244F/14/fr Information technique Detecteur de niveau Liquiphant T FTL 260 el detector limite Liquiphant T FTL 260 Documentation complE~mentaire es Documentaci6n suplementaria es TI 244F/23/es Informaci6n tecnica sobre i Documentazione supplementare nl Aanvullende documentatie i TI 244F/16/it Informazioni Tecniche per I'interruttore di livello Liquiphant T FTL 260 niveauschakelaar Liquiphant T FTL 260 nl TI 244F/15/nl Technische Informatie voor de Endress+Hauser Sales Centers AT Tel. Fax (0204) 83161 FR Tel. (0422) 540613. Fax (035) 6958825 SE Tel. Fax (061) 7111650 DE Tel. (70) 131132. (0161) 2865000. Fax (389) 694802 GB Tel. (01) 88056-0. Fax (08) 55511655 SGP Tel. (035)6958611 . (02) 2480600. (2)99678 11-20. Fax (2) 9967810 USA Tel. Fax (317) 5358498 ZA Tel.com 05. (317) 5357138. (07621) 97501. 25283120.A "'15F/00/a6/11 .

01.Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH Mechanical Separation Division 10 Pressure Vessel Druckbehalter 10.1 Mixing Tank Mischtank 10.2 Pressure Damping Tank Druckstof3-Tank Type 191 A company of GEA Group Power Plant EISalvador 1402568900_271 VBU 118.2008 .

I I .

1.2002 OPERATION MANUAL PRESSURE VESSELS Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC TECHNICAL DATA .1 (5) 1.

the installation space shall always be equipped with a floor gully. do not open the plugs or inspection doors. Be careful with the hot contents. The vessel will break as the contents expand due to freezing. The vessel plate may breach by the connector as a result of such force. 4. drain the water with the tap. the pressure rises too. If the contents of the vessel can be drained into the sewer.2 (5) WARNINGS 1. 3. Use flexible connections to prevent harmful bending of the connectors. 8. Prevent water from entering the vessel during servicing by e. Use the relief valve. 2. Do not install the pipe connectors in positions where the attachment points will be subjected to bending forces. Do not earth the electrical network of your house directly to the pressure vessel. Use the relief valve. The voltage difference may cause breaking of the vessel due to corrosion. which has leaked from a broken connector or 'condensed on the vessel surface could damage structures such as floor or walls . do not exceed the maximum allowed operating pressure which is shown on the vessel's nameplate.g. 5. Observe the pressure inside the vessel! When the vessel is under pressure. The vessel surface is burning hot. Do not install the pressure vessel in any space where its contents (in most cases water) may freeze. 6. Do not install the pressure vessel in any area where water. Do not exceed the maximum allowed operating temperature which is shown on the pressure vessel's nameplate. 7. switching off the power from the feeding pump. Before taking for servicing. To avoid damaging the pressure vessel. . As the temperature rises . Do not touch the surface of the vessel when its internal temperature exceeds 60°C.

. which the owner of the pressure vessel has assembled for his personal use. Otherwise the safety of the location has to be ensured by submitting the location plan to the local notified body for approval or.The pressure vessel shall be installed in a position where it will rest firmly on its supporting structure. The change of dimensions caused by possible thermal expansion are compensated with flexible pipe parts and vibration dampers. . N. if this is not required . centre the hand hole carefully during installation. For contact information of the notified bodies please refer to the homepage of the authorities on the Internet. . .Safe service platforms shall be furnished for the operation.We recommend an authorised contractor be assigned to perform the installation. 2. .B! The contractor must issue a Declaration of Conformity covering the whole setup. by obtaining the approval during the first periodic inspection performed by this notified body. By way of exception such declaration needs not be drawn up for a unit. serviced and inspected in a safe manner.The pipes and flanges which will be attached to the connection points on the vessel shall be installed so that no breaking forces are exerted on the connectors. The regulations issued by the national authorities must be observed when locating the pressure vessel.To prevent the gasket from leaking.Thermal expansion must be taken into account. INSTALLATION . . the room where a pressure vessel containing substance which is not harmful to the environment is placed must be equipped with drainage to the sewer. . LOCATION The pressure vessel must be located in a space where it can be operated. service and inspection of large pressure vessels. To avoid damage to structures caused by leakage.Equip the pressure vessel with a relief valve.3 (5) INSTRUCTIONS 1.

. . a relief valve.4 (5) 3.Level indicator Any vessel.Draining devices The pressure vessel has to be equipped with a valve or tap with adequate throughput capacity for draining the vessel. . Should the relief valve not be shipped with the pressure vessel. e. a level glass.g . has to be equipped with a level indicator. which is directly connected to the vessel without the presence of a shut-off valve of any kind.Measuring devices for pressure and temperature The pressure vessel has to be equipped with a pressure gauge with a measuring range of at least 1. there has to be a shut-off valve between the pressure vessel and the pipeline attached to it. and where the product of maximum allowed operating pressure (in bar) and gas volume (in m3 ) (the gas volume is assumed to be at least y.e.Non-pressure safety device A pressure vessel with a quick-lock door or head (such as autoclave) must be equipped with a device which prevents opening of the doors while the vessel is under pressure. cooling down of the contents.Safety guard Please refer to the national regulations issued by the authorities.Shut-off valve Normally. The pressure vessel must be equipped with a reliable safety guard to prevent exceeding the maximum allowed operating pressure. which contains water from a pressurised water plant and harmless gas. The instructions for sizing the relief valve in terms of flow parameters are presented in the standards of each respective target country. . it has to be equipped with an automatically operating vacuum valve. it must be installed before commissioning. the pressure vessel must be equipped with a reliable temperature measuring device. This equipment must be dimensioned to ensure the maximum allowed operating pressure and the maximum allowed internal temperature prescribed for the vessel. . As required. .5. . . EQUIPMENT The pressure vessel shall be supplied with all necessary equipment to ensure its faultless and safe operation. i.Vacuum valve If a pressure vessel is not dimensioned to endure the pressure which effects its outer surface and it is possible that a vacuum might be created inside the vessel due to. Please ensure sufficient freeflo capacity. of the total volume) exceeds 2. for example. .3 times and not more than 2 times the maximum allowed operating pressure of the vessel.

.the connections do not leak. Please consult the national authorities for regulations concerning the registration of the pressure vessel and the competence required of the operators. . well trained personnel. i. damaged. or if its surface coating is torn. operation and inspection are issued by the local pressure equipment authorities in the target country.the operating pressure does not exceed the design pressure. OPERATION The registered pressure equipment may only be operated by skilled. INSPECTIONS DURING OPERATION Please refer to regulations issued by the local pressure vessel authorities.e. is performed for pressure vessels which are to be registered. The registration of the equipment is carried out in connection with this inspection. the first periodic service. Repair measures must be agreed with the manufacturer of the pressure equipment. The decisions of the local pressure equipment authorities in the target country apply for any possible repair and modification work. The first periodic inspection is performed by the notified body and the owner or the holder is obliged to apply to the notified body for the performance of the inspection. The manufacturer of the vessel shall be contacted if it is established that the vessel has been deformed. check the designations on its nameplate and make sure that: . corroded. The internal and external condition of the vessel is inspected. the pressure vessel 's safety devices shall be inspected according to the schedule. COMMISSIONING Before commissioning the vessel . 6.5 (5) 4. 5. Guidelines for the pressure vessel 's correct location. It is the duty of the owner or the holder of the pressure equipment to apply to the notified body for performance of the so called first periodic inspection of the commissioned pressure equipment. To ensure faultless operation. The substance and schedule for subsequent inspections are determined in connection with the periodic inspection. A commissioning inspection . In general the strength calculations are based on five hundred full load cycles . Check the operation of the pressure relief valve and any other safety devices. During the operation of the pressure vessel special attention has to be paid on reduction in the structure's service life caused by corrosion and exposure to fatiguing load.the contents temperature does not exceed the maximum allowed operating temperature. . which requires registration .

.

: Edition : Designation: 000 0806 Commissioning and Maintenance of 19L Damping Tank Visco Booster Unit Type: £ ..J&. .Mechanical Separation Division Westfalia Separator Mineraloi l Systems GmbH Commissioning and Maintenance of 19L Damping Tank No. •• ~ .

2 Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH Subject to modification! The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving the documentation . They can be sent to GEA Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH Werner-Habig-Str. 1 0-593020elde © GEA Westfalia Separator 000 I 0806 .

..1 1..2 Maintenance ........... 5 000 I 0806 . ............. ........... 4 Maintenance description .............. ..................... .... ..............Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH 3 1 Maintenance 1....... .......... ............... ............... .......... ........ ...........

1. solenoid valves etc. excessive ly high temperature. low-grade fuel . 000 I 0806 . ) can necessitate shorter maintenance intervals.) the manufacturer's maintenance instructions must be observed. frequent starting and stopping of the Visco Boosler Unit etc. Conscientiously performed maintenance operations improve the service life of the Visco Booster Unit. In the case of accessories (pumps. strong vibrations. Negative operating conditions (e.g.1 • Maintenance(1) after operating hours at the latest after Operations Check the air cushion in the 19L Damping Tank (if installed) Remark • Separate damping tank from the system 1000 1 month (c)ose ball valve) • Empty the damping tank completely • Start funning the damping tank (open ball valve slowly) • Next check after 1 000 operating hours (1) Legend: = The specified maintenance intervals are reco mmendations which apply only for normal conditions. preheaters.4 Westfalia Sep arator Mineraloil Systems GmbH Maintenance Special care must be taken when performing maintenance operations. filters .

Fig.2 Maintenance description 5 & ! . The Visco Booster Unit must be completely started to generate the required air cushion in the Damping Tank. 000 I 0806 .Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH 1. . 1 Close the ball valve 10-7-020.

000/0806 . The damping tank will be emptied. slowly.6 Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH Fig. 2 Open the ball valve 93-7-008. Open the Plug on top of the damping tank 10-2-002.

3 Close the ball valve 93-7-008 and the plug on top of the Damping Tank 10-2-002.Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH 7 Fig. 000 I 0806 .

8 Westfalia Sep arator Mineraloil Systems GmbH Fig. Now the damping tank has a sufficient air cushion to absorb pressure pulsations. 4 Open the ball valve 10-7-020. The air in the Damping Tank will be compressed. 000 / 0806 . coming from the engine. the air cushion exists therefore. slowly.

~@~l~@[JjJ ~[JjJ@\l®©D@[JjJ@~ JllYmm ~®[JjJIW©@i!!IJ ~IlJlD~U55[JjJ[lll@Oll@~ ~17j][l!l[D~@[D~ ~~@\l®~@1f u.Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH 9 [KI]@~@ [KI]@~@~ ~.~@Q@~ !i.!]@U@ 000 I 0806 .

R.Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH Take the Best .westfalia-separalor.de .maillo:info@gea-westfalia. http ://www.Separate the Rest A company of GEA Group Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH. Fax: +49 (0) 25 22177·23 94.StraBe 1 • 0-59302 Oelde (F.com!. Germany) Tel. Weroer-Habig.: +49 (0) 25 22177-0.